Th e o rig in a l o ft h i s bo o k is in

the C o rn e ll U n i v e r s i t y L i b r a r y.

Th e re a re n o kn o w n c o p y r i g ht r e st r i c t i o n s in

t h e U n i t e d S t at e s on t h e use o f t h e t e xt .
 A DI G RA N T H ,

THE HOLY SC RIPTURE S O F THE SIKHS ,

T RAN S L A TE D F RO M

THE O R I G IN A L GU RMU K H I ,

W I TH T
I N RO D C U T ORY E SS AYS ,

BY

DR . E RNE S T TRU MP P ,
S T
AN GU A GE A TH E I I MU NI C H ,
S S
P RO F E S S O R RE O IU S OF O RI E N T AL L U N V E RS TY OF

ME MB E R O F T HE R O Y A L B A V AR IAN A C AD E MY OF C IE N C E .

I NT E D
PR BY ORDER OF T HE S E C RE TARY OF STAT E FOR INDI A IN C OUNC I L .

L O NDO N

WM H
. . A L L EN 1 3, WA T E R L O O P LA C E , PALL MA LL , sW
. .

AN D

N . T R U BN E R CO .
,
57 AND 59 , L UDGA T E HI LL ,
E C. .
 P RE F AC E .

IN offerin g this v ol um e to th e l ear n ed publi c I t hi n k it

,
r i gh t topr em i se
a fe w w or d s on th e w ay an d t h e p eculi ar c i r cum stan ces un der whi ch t h e
l ion of th e S i kh G ran th h as b een m ad e
t r an s at .

Th e w o r k w as en tr usted t o m e b y th e In d i a O ffi c e author i t i es t o war ds

th e en d of th e y ear 1 8 69 i n th e ex p ec tat io n t h at t h e t r an sl at ion c o ul d

,

be m ade at ho m e B ut after I h ad fair ly t ak en up t h e t ask I soon p er

.
,
~

c ei v ed th at i n spi t e of m k n o w l ed g e of t h e m o d ern No r th I n di an v er n acul ar s

y
-
, ,

whi ch I h ad for m er ly a cqui r ed i n th e c o un tr y i tself an d of S an skr it an d ,

P r akr it i t w as n ex t to i m po ssib l e to m ak e a tr ust wor t hy t r an sl at ion o f such

,

a d i ffi c u lt b o ok as t h e S ikh G r an th pr o v ed t o be w i tho ut n at iv e assi stan c e

“

, ,
.

Th er e ex i st ed n ei th er a gr am m ar of th e ol d Hi n dui d i al e c ts n or a d i c ti on ar y ,

a n d t ho ug h I w as abl e t o m ake o u t m an y o b scur e w o r ds b y d i n t of c ar e ful

c om par ison wi th th e m o der n i diom s an d th e P r akr i t y et t h er e r em ain ed a ,

c on siderabl e r esi duum of wor ds an d grammat ical for m s t o whi ch I c oul d get
n o c lu e b ei n g desti t ute of al l li t erar y m ean s
,
.

W h en I r epo rt ed t his c ir c um stan c e t o th e I n dia O ffi ce, c o n sider ab l e

d i ffi c ul ti es ar o se as t h e o r i g in al p l an h ad t o be ch an g ed ; but i t w as fi n ally
,

ar r an ged t h at I sho ul d g o m y self t o t h e P anj ab in o r d er t o w o r k fi r st

,

t h e G r an t h t h r o ugh w i t h t h e aid of so m e S i kh Gr an th i s
. I st ar ted t h er e .

fore for In dia t o war ds t h e clo se of t h e year 1 8 70 in t h e ex p ec tation , ,

t h at al l d i ffi cult i es w o ul d be easily sur m o un t ed t h er e

. B ut after I h ad .

s ucc eeded in en gag in g t wo S ikh Gr an th i s at L aho r e I was n o t a li ttl e ,

su r r i sed
p wh en th ey dec l ar ed t o m e th at th e Gr an th co ul d n ot be tr an sl ated
, ,

i n th e li teral gra mm at i c al w ay I d esir ed I soo n c o n v i n c ed m yself th at

.
,

I)
VI P RE F A C E .

though t h ey pr ofessed to un der stan d th e G r an th ,

t hey h ad no k n o wl e d g e

w o h ey c o u l d
e i th er of th e ol d gr am m at i c al for ms or of th e b ol o s e t e r d s ; t

c f ly p r ov e d w r o n g
o n ly gi v e m e so m e t radit ion al ex pl an ation s w hi h ,
r e q u en t ,

I foun d t h em c on t ra di c t e d b y o th er p assag e s an d n o w a n d t h e n t h y
e
as ,

coul d gi v e m e n o expl an ation what ev er ; th ey h a d n o t e v e n a c l i i gh

e a r ns t

i n to th e r eal d o c tr in es o f t h e G r an th O h p . t e r e r s o n s w ho w e r
,
e re
co m m en ded

h
t o m e for t e r e arn ni l i g I f
,
o u n d e qu a lly i g n o r a n t I w e n
.
t e v en t o l a
y a

b
n um er o f d ffi u t i c l p g
assa es b f
e o e r so m e G r a n t h i s a t A m r i t sar b u t w ,
as li ke

i
w se so r e ly i pp
d sa o t e i n d .F i n a lly I g a v e u p a l l hop e of fi n d in g w h at I

w an t e d ,
as I c l ea ly r saw t h a
,
t t h e S i k h s i n c o,
n se q u en c e of t h e ir fo r m er

w ar like m an n er o f life an d th e t r oubl o us t i m es h ad lo st all l ear n i n g ; wh er eas

,

t h e B r ah m an s who alo n e w o ul d h av e h ad th e n e c essar y er ud i t i o n t o l en d

,

m e a h elpin g h an d n ev er h ad d ei gn e d t o p ay an y at ten t io n t o t h e G r an t h
,
,

ow in g t o th e an i m o si t y whi ch for mer ly ex isted b etw een th e S ikh s an d th e

H in dfi c o m m un i ty .

T h us I w as ag ai n t h r o wn upon m y o wn r eso ur c es an d h ad t o fi n d o ut ,

t h e w ay th r o ugh t hi s l ab yr in th fo r m y self B ut t hough th e ex pl an at io n s of

.

t h e S i kh Gr an t h i s w er e i n so m an y c ases in suffi c i e n t or futil e t h ey w er e ,

still of gr eat use t o m e as th ey in dir ectly h elp ed m e t o fi n d o ut th e

,

r i gh t t r a ck .

I w a s sure in m y o w n m in d th at as th e l an g uag e of t h e G r an t h h ad
,

b ecom e al r eady ob sol et e t o a gr eat ex t en t som e att em p ts at so me sor t of ,

l ex i c o gr aphy m ust h av e b een m ad e i n t h e p r ec edin g t i m es an d I i n qui r ed ,

t h er efor e c ar efully aft er c o m m en t ar i es o n t h e G r an t h A t fi r st I w as po si ti v el y

.

t o l d t h at th er e w as n o such t hi n g i n ex i st en c e ; but i n p r o gr e ss of t i m e I

su cceeded in det ecti n g three com men tar i es two of whi ch ex plain ed i n a ,

r ou gh w ay a n umb er of obsol ete Hin dui an d d eshi ( p ro v in ci al ) wor ds an d ,

t h e o th er a n um b er o f A r ab i c an d P ersi an w o r ds whi ch w er e r e c e iv ed i n t o ,

t h e Gran t h in a v er y m util at ed fo r m T h ese c o m m en t ar i es t h o ugh v er y

.
,

d efi ci en t ,
pr o v ed v er y useful t o m e an d I th er efor e got t hem c opi ed as
, ,

t h eir o w n er s w o ul d n ot p ar t w it h t h em .

I fi r st at t emp t ed to wr it e do wn th e t ran sl at io n as I r ead o n w i th t h e

Gran th i s ; but I soo n fo un d th at t hi s w o ul d n o t d o as I fr equen tly p er ,

 P RE F A C E .
VI I

i
c e v ed t h at I h ad isl ed by t he m No thi n g t her efor e r em ai n ed t o m e
b een m .
,

b ut t o r ead fi r st t h e w h o l e G r an t h t h r o ugh in o r der t o m ake m y self ,

c on v er san t with its c on t en ts an d its st yl e A s I wen t o n I n oted down .

,

al l gramm at i cal for ms an d ob sol ete wor ds I m et wi th an d t hus I gr adual l y ,

dr ew up a g r amm ar an d a d i c tio n ar y so t h at I c o ul d re fer t o ev er y p assage ,

ag ain ,when ev er I fo un d i t n e c essar y for th e sake of c om p ar i son .

A fter I h ad g o n e t h r o ug h t h e G r an t h in t hi s wear i so m e w ay an d p r e

par ed my t ool s I r et ur n ed t o E ur op e in th e spr i n g of th e y ear 1 8 72 an d

, ,

b egan to wr i te do wn th e t r an slat ion for th e p r ess I h ad th us t o d o th e .

w ork t wi ce but I saw un der t h e d i sadv an tages un der whi ch I h ad b een

, ,

l abo ur i n g n o o th er way op en if I w i sh ed t o l ay d o wn a solid foun dat ion

, ,

an d t o g i v e a t r an sl a t i on whi ch shoul d be of an y sc i en t ifi c v al ue .

Th at i n m an y p assag es ev en after all th e t r o ubl e I h av e t ak en m y

, ,

t r an sl at io n m ay p ar tly p r o v e d efi c i en t I fully a llo w an d i n a fi r st at t em p t , ,

on su ch a v ast fi el d whi ch h as hi ther to har dly b een touch ed this will

, ,

ap p ear n at u ral en o ugh to an y m an who i s c o n v er san t w i th th e p ec uliar

,

diffi cul t ies of suc h an un der taki n g .

Th e S i kh G r an th i s a v er y b i g v o l um e but as I h av e n ot e d on p c x x i ,
.
,

l 3 an d on p c x x u l 4 in c oh er en t an d sh allo w i n t h e ex tr eme an d
.
, .
,
.
, ,

couch ed at th e sam e t im e in dar k an d p er pl ex in g l an guage in or der t o c ov er ,

t h ese defect s I t is for us O cci d en tal s a m o st p ai n ful an d al m o st st up efyin g

.

t ask t o r ead o n ly a si n gl e B ag an d I doub t if an y o r d in ar y r eader w ill

, ,

hav e th e pat ien c e t o pr o ceed t o t h e sec on d Rag after h e sh all h av e p er used ,

th e fi r st I t w oul d t h er efor e be a m er e w ast e of p ap er to add al so t h e

.

m in o r Rag s whi c h o n ly r ep eat i n en dl ess v ar i at io n s wh at h as b een al r ead y

, , ,

sai d i n th e great Rags ov er an d ov er again w i thout addi n g th e l east to ,

ou r kn o wl edg e .

A n um b er of i n t r o d uct or y essay s h as b een added to thi s t r an sl at io n ,

whi ch I tr ust w ill n o t be un wel c o m e t o th e l ear n ed p ub li c as th ey will

, , ,

ser v e t o clear up al l those poin ts whi ch m ay be of in ter est t o sc ien c e

r e g ar di n g t h e S i kh r efo r m at o r y m o v em en t .

I h av e sp en t se v en y ear s on th e el abo r at io n of t hi s v ol um e t h e task ,

o i g i fi i t ly m o r e ar du o us t h an I h ad ev er i mag i n ed an d t ho ugh I c an
p r v n n n e ,
V III P RE F A C E .

h ar dly exp ec t t hat th e Gr an th w ill attr act man y r eader s th e l ess so as , ,

S ikhism i s a wan i n g r elig io n t hat w ill soon b el on g t o hi st o r y y et I v en t ur e

, ,‘

t o hop e t h at m y l ab ours w ill n o t b e in v ai n

,
Th e S i kh G r an th , w hi ch
.

w ill al way s keep i ts pl ac e i n th e hi stor y of r elig io n li es n ow op en b efo r e

,

us an d we kn o w auth en t i c ally wh at t h e i r G ur us t augh t

,
.

B ut th e chi ef i mpo r t an c e of t h e S i kh G ran t h li es i n t h e lin g ui sti c lin e ,

as b ei n g th e t r easu r y of th e old H in dui d ial ect s an d I hop e t h at th e day

,

w ill n ot be far d istan t wh en t hese hi t her t o hi dden t r easur es w ill be m ade

a v a il ab l e for t h e fur t h er an c e of m o d ern I n d i an p hilolo g y by b ei n g em bo di ed

i n a g rammar of t h e mediaev al Hin d ui di al ec t s .

A s hith er to n o thi n g of th e S ik h G ran th h as b e en p ubli sh ed I h av e ,

a d ded in t h e A pp en d ix t h e o r i g in al t ex t of t h e Japji whi ch m ay ser v e as

,

a sp e c i men of th e lan g uage an d at th e sam e t i me as a cr i ter ion for t h e

,

t r an sl at ion
.

F or thi s t r an sl at io n of th e G ran th as w ell as for i ts p ubli c at io n t h e

, ,

p ubli c i s i n deb ted t o Her Maj esty s G ov ern men t for In di a whi ch in d ue
’
, ,

c on sideration of th e im portan ce of th e wo rk plan n ed i t s ex ecutio n an d de

,

fray ed it s ex p en ses .

Th e E n glish r eader w ill n o d o ub t de te ct i n t his v o l um e man y an ex

pr ession t h at w ill app ear t o h i m m or e o r l ess un i dio m at i c F or al l such .

shor tc o mi n g s I m u st b eg h i s p ar do n whi c h h e w ill sur ely g ran t wh en h e

, ,

h ear s t hat E n gli sh i s n o t my moth er t o n gue an d t h at I was th er efor e often

.

at a lo ss how t o t ran sl ate suc h ab st r use philo sophi cal m at ter s c l early an d
cor rectly in to an idio m which sin ce I n o lon ger hear i t spoken i s gradually
, ,

r ec ed in g fr o m m y m em o r y
.

E RNE S T T RU MP P .

M UNI C H , 23r d J anuary , 1 8 77 .

 T A BL E OF C O NT E NT S .

I NTRO DU C T O RY E SSAY S .

P A GE
P RE A F T ORY RE MARK S
I . THE L IF E OF B ABA NANA K .

JAN A
M S X K HI
-
or BA E NANA
B }: (A .
) v u— xl v

JAN A M S ZK R T
-
or B A K NAR NA ]: (B .
) xlvi lxxvi
-

II . S K E T C H OF TH E L IF E OF T HE O T HER S IK H GURU S .

2 . G URU A NA
G D

3 . GURU AM A
R -D AS

4 . GURU RI M - Di s

"
9 GURU A RJU N
6 . GURU H AB - GO N VI D

7 . GURU HAR RZI

-

°
9 GURU H AR K I
-
S AN
9 . GURU T E G- BA R ZDU R

GURU G6V I N D SN I GH lxxxi x xcvi—

III .
S K E T C H OF TH E RE L I GI O N OF THE S IK H S x c v n- cxviii

IV .
ON THE C O MP O S IT I O N OF THE G RA N TH cxix—cxxi

V .
ON TH E L A N GU A GE A ND THE METRE S U S ED I N T HE

GRA N T H cxx n cxxxvi ii

 TA
BL E OF CO NTENTS .

TRANS L A TI O N O F THE ADI GRANTH .

A rj un , Di n ra i ni
VA S B , I .
— XX V II .

RAG GA URI .

S A Rn s .

Nan ak , I XX
R AG S I RI RAG
-
.

I
.

A m ar das XX L XXXV II
- —
S ARn s .
,

Ram d i s XXX I X L XX
- —
Nan ak , I XXIII
. .
,
—X

A m ar —das XXXI V L XI V
. . .

Arj un L X K L C C X L I ,
-
I .

I I
.
—
,
T eg b ah ad ur C C X L I I C C L
'
- -

Ram di s L X V L XX
. .
,
- -
. .
,

A rj un L XX I C - A S TP AD I S .

I
. .
,

N an ak , I .
-
X VI I .

A srm n i s .

Am d X IX
ar -XXV I I as, .
— .

Nan ak , I XVI I .
— .

R d XXVI II XXI X
am - i s, .
— .

A m ar d as X V I I I —XX V A j u X X X X LIV
-
, .
r n, .
— .

A r jun XX VI — XX V II
CH A N r s
. .
,

N an ak , Jogi dar e
.
'

an
N an ak , I .
— II .

Ar j un , P ai p ae
'

A m ar d as, I II - —V I I
Nan ak , P ah ar é
. .

Ram di -
s, P ah ar é
A r j un , VI I I X I .
-
.

Bav an akh r i ,
‘

by A rj un I LV ,
.
—

A r j un , P ah ar é
.

S ukh m an i , by A rj un I X X IV -

S
.
,

II
_

AN
V

CH T . Thi t i s, by Ar j un , I —XV . .

N an ak , I .
V Z Rs .

Ar j un , I I .
— I II .
Ram d ag , I -
XXXII — I .

I
.

Ram d i s, V an j ar a XX XI V —L V
'

Ar j un ,
-

I
.

V KR s, I .
-
XX .

S PEE CH or T HE B H A GA T S .

S P EE CH or r un BII A GAr s .
1 . K abi r , I L XXI V .
-
.

1 . K abi r I .
— III .
B av an akh ri by K abi r , , 1 —45
Th it i s by Kab i r 1 1 6 -
2 . T r il é c an , I .
-
V .
, ,

3 . Kabi r I .
— IV .
V ars of Kabi r 1 — 8 ,
,

4 . Berti , I .
-
V 2 . N am d é v

5 Rav i das, I .
-
II I .
3 . Rav i d as
.

RAG A S A
RAG MAN1 U
.
-

by Nan ak
.

S 6 dar , 4 9 2— 4 9 3
S ABD s
SA S
.

RD .

Ram di I V II
I
-
- s,
Na k
. .

XXX X
VI II I
na —
A r j un ,
.
,
L
.
-
. .

A m ar d as, X L - -
L II
LI I I L X V I I
.

A srP An i s . Ram d i s, -
.
-

L XVI II
.

Na k I na ,
.
Ar j un , .
-
C C XXX
III I
.

A m ar das, II —X XX T é g bah adur , C C XX X

'
- ~
. .
.

Ram d as, -
XX X I V .
A sr P ADr s
IX
.

Ar j un , X XX V — XX . X .
Nan ak , I .
— XXI I
III
.

A r j un , Bar ah m ah a A m ar d as, -
X X .
—X
XX VII .
 TA BL E OF CO N TE N TS . X I

'
A rj un , x xx v rrI .
—X LII .
S L O E S or K A BIR 1 2 4 3 ,

Th e P ati by Nan ak , S L O E S o r S H E K H FA R I D ,
1 1 30
T h e P ati by A m ar d as -

S AV A IE OF T H E BH A TTS
,

CH AN TS .

S av ai é on Nan ak , by t h e
.

B h att
tt
Nan ak , I —V
.

. .

V I YI I K al asu, I .
—X . 6 9 4 69 6
A m ar d as, - —
A n g ad , by th e Bh at t
.

VIII X X I
.

S av ai é
'

on
Ram -d as, —
V by t h e B h att
.

K al asah ar , I -

XX II XXXV
.
' ,
Ar j un , —
.

K al u, V I -
X 6 9 7— 6 9 9
by t h e Bh att
. .

VARs .

S av ai é
'

on A m ar d as, -

Na k XX
na , I .
— .
Kalh u I IX by t h e Bh att — .
,

Jal ap X —X IV h y t h e B h at t
, .

An gad XX L — XXI V , .
. .
,

II
,

S EE
P CH OF TH E BH A GATS . K i rat u, XV .
— XV I .
,
hy th e
1 . Kab i r ,
I .
— XXXVI I . B h att Bhi k i ,
X IX . X X .
, by
2 Nam d év , I — V t h e Bh att S al h , XX L by ,
th e
I
. . .

VI
'

3 . Ravi das, I .
— . B h at t Bh al h au, XXI .

4 Dh an n a, I . II I
-
. S L O K S 0 F TE G B AHADU R 1 56 -
,
-

5 . S h ekh F ari d ,
I .
—I I . O NE D OE RA OF GOVI ND S I NGH

A P P E NDIX .

O RI GI NA T E L X T or TH E J AP JI 7 0 9— 7 1 5
 E RR ATA .

P A GE P A GE
xl viii , n . 5, D é v é n ag ar i , r ea d : D é v an fi g a r i . 264 , 11 . 1 , 1111 255, r ea d :
m .

lxxx , n . 1, ad d a t th e en d : Cf p . . cx i ot v , n e 3 . 305, u 2, 1 . . r ea d : mi } .

xci v, nl 2 fix e d fi x . l, .
, , r a : . 3 1 1, n .
m a, r ea d : m .

xc l 5 f om b low
v, . dd fi er r e , a a 3 l 9, n. l , m ,
r ea d :
m
xcv l 4 f om b elow
, . re d fizz r , a : . 3 23 , text , 1 24 , H ar i c h an d ,
. r ea d : Ha ri éan d .

xcv l 2 f om b low i e d Ti
, . r e , , r a : . 3 23 , n . 5, l l .
, H ari c h an d, r ea d : H ar i c an d .

ci v 4 arm e d urgent , , r a : . 3 23 , n . 5, 1 2, V i sh v am i t r a,
. r ea d : V is
v am i t r a .

c x u I 1 1 f o m b elo w
x re d K r , a : 3 24 , n . l l
, . l , H ir an y a k ash ip u, r ea d : Hi r an y a k a s
ip u .

c xx m l 5 f o m b elo w W
, .
3} r e d r , , a : 3 35, n. r ea d :

c x xiii l 2 fr o m b elo w ccx i r e d : cxxi

x , .
, x , a . 33 8 , 11 . l m fg
, , r ea d : m fg .

3 7, u .
W2 , r ea d : K m . 44 2, n . l, l . 2, r ea d : am
70, n. I , 1 2, .

W , r ea d : Ra fi If:
-
4 60, n. 313 33 , r ea d :
m .

93 , n. l , l 4 , Ma
. ga r , r ea d : Ma gabar or Ma g b ar -
63 1 , 11 . l,
m , r ea d : a m .

( C f p 463 ,
. . n. l) .
657, 11 . l , Wfi fi
' '

, r ea d : fi .

98 , n . 3, l . l , A l ok h , r ea d : A l akh .
663 , n. l l , . I , i n ser t “
w hich al l MS S . e xhibi t

210 , n. 2, l . l , h
B r a m an , r ea d B r a ma n h .

2 1 0, 11 . l , Bh a g av ad- i Gt a , r ea d : B h ag av a d-Gi té .

225, 11 . l , r ea d : 3175 .
 ii P RE F A T O RY RE MA RK S .

g din g th e l i fe o f N anak I appl ied to di ffer ent p erso n s w h o I h ad h ear d w ere i n possessio n
r e ar , , ,

khi m an uscr ipts in or der to get J an am sakh i s of Nan ak but all m y effort s p r ove d i n
.

o f old Gu rm u
-
, ,

v ai n n o n e bu
, t t h e usual com p i l ation s b ein g f o r thcomi n g .

A ft er m y r etu rn to E u r op e i n 1 8 7 2 som e m an uscr ipt s o f t h e Gr an th w ere fo r w ar d ed to m e ,

fr om t h e I n di a O ffi c e L ib rar y fo r t h e p r o sec utio n of m y l abo u r s an d to th ese som e oth er G u

,
rmu khi ,

m an uscri pts w er e add ed in th e exp ecta tion th a t t h e o n e or th e oth er m ight p r ove usefu
,
l in my
r esear ch es I n looki n g th em ov er I f o un d an old m an usc r ipt p a r tly destr oyed by w hite an ts th e
.
, , ,

ear ly ch ar acter s o f w hich r esem b l in g tho se o f t h e old C opy o f t h e Gr an th

,
p r eser ved at K ar tar p ur , ,

an d si gn ed by Gur u A rj un hi m sel f at o n ce c aught m y ey e O n th e fi rst l eaf it co n tain ed ,

.

i n S an skr it l ett ers t h e sho rt ti tl e m m at W aw ard } arr A book of N an ak r ef r r ing , , , e

t o h is bi r th ( or l f ) T h e copy h ad b een p resen t ed to t h e L ib r ar y of t h e E ast I n di a H ouse

i e .
,

a cco r d i n g to t h e en tr y on t h e fi rst l eaf by th e fam ous H T C ol eb r ooke wi thout h is b ein g a war e , . .

, ,

as it app ears of th e co n ten ts o f t h e book

,
A s soo n as I co mm en c ed to r ea d t h e book I ob ser v ed .
,

w i t h gr eat pl e asure th at thi s w as a d escr iptio n o f t h e li fe of N an ak q uite d iffer en t f ro m all t h e

,

oth er s I h ad hith er to seen A s th e ch ar acters so al so w as t h e idio m i n w hi ch it w as com posed

.
, , ,

old an d i n m an y w or ds an d exp ressio n s agreein g w ith th e dic tio n o f G ur u A rj un .

A fte r a l en g t h en ed exam i n ation an d com p ar i son of thi s m an uscr ipt w ith th e l ate r Jan am
sakh i I am sati sfi ed th at thi s is t h e fo un t ain fr om w hich al l th e oth ers h ave dr awn l ar gely
s, ,

f r th e sto ri es as far as th ey ar e com m o n to both r el atio n s v er y f r equen tly a gr ee v er b all y

o
, , ,

w i t h t h e o n ly di ffer en c e th at t h e l ate r J an em sakh i s h ave su b stit uted m or e m oder n f or m s f or old

,
-

w o r d s w hich w ith t h e p r ogr ess o f ti m e h ad b eco m e un i n te lligibl e

, This old Jan am sakhi as .
-
,

h i te d alr eady b elon g s a cco r din g to al l exte rn al an d in tern al m ar k s to th e l att e r en d o f t h e ti me

n , , ,

of G ur u Ar j un or to th at of hi s i m m e diate succ essor T h e Gran th w hich G uru A rj un co m pil ed .

,

o f t h e w r i t in g s o f h i s f o ur p rede c essor s an d t h e old f am o us B h ag ate as w ell as o f h i s o w n n u m er o us ,

poetical eff usio ns i s cited th r oughout W ithout an y p ar aph rase w h er eas t h e l ate r Jan am sakh i s
, , ,
-

h ave deem e d it al ready n ecessar y to add to ever y quota tio n fr o m t h e Gr an th a p ar aphr ase
i n t h e m oder n idio m .

W e ar e en abl ed n o w by th e di scovery of this old Jan am sakhi w hich i s n o w a d ay s as it

,
-
,
- -
,

a pp ear s q u ite un kn o wn to t h e S ikh s th em selves to di sti n guish th e older tr adition r egar di n g N an ak

, ,

f o m th e l ater on e an d to fi x wi th som e degr ee o f ver i sim ili ty t h e r eal fact s o f hi s l if e

r
, , Th er e , .

i s n o l ack even i n thi s old rel ation o f m an y w on derf ul sto r i es as in d eed m ight be
, xp ected f rom ,
e ,

In dian s o w i n g to their w il d un c urb ed ph an t asy an d th e l ow stan dar d of ed ucation am o n g th e m asses

, ,

o f t h e pop u l ati on ; but co m p ar e d w ith th e l ater Jan am sakh i s w hich en ter in to th e m in utest detail s -
,
,
i n o rd er to satisfy c ur io sity an d w hich h av e n o sen se but for th e m i r a culous ho w e ver ab d it
, su r , ,
i s r el a ti v ely sob er .

W e subjoi n h er e a b r ief summ ar y of t h e lif e o f N an ak accor din g to thi s old est auth or ity
,
or der to co n tr ast it w ith th e n ar r at ions o f th e l ater com pilers .

N an ak w as born i n t h e S am v at y ear 1 52 6 i n th e m o n th o f V ai sakh

1 4 6 9 A p ril — Ma
y)
AL , .
, ,
i n a v i ll a g e c all ed T al an di on th e b a n ks o f t h e Ravi t h e H d r ao t es o f th e G
r ee ks
,
( v
y ) n o t f a r a
bo ve ,
L ahor e l H i s fath er s n am e w as Kal a by caste a Kh at ri o f t h e V é di fam ily
or cl an
.
’

a
pl ain , ,
,

T al v an di , t h e b i thpl c e
k i s sit ua ted i n th e Z il ar
i P a j abi p on o un ce d
a of N an a
fi lm ) o f , n n r

L ah o e ( p J b m C oll cto a te
“ 5
r
)an a th l
Jen i ) f S a r akp u T h e plac e is o w called
, In e e r n o r .
n
N a a ké a (m
n n ) ; it h a Gur d ar d i a pl ce o f pilg i m a g e fo r t h e S ikh s a - r an
s M a lcol m ( S ke tch o f s a r
.

t h e S ikh s p 7 ot e 7) i s m istake i p laci g th e vill a g o th e b a k s o f t h e B i s ( P a j abi l l

n n, n n
fi
-
, .
, e n n zi n

c all ed o w R ip ur T h er e i s i n th J a la dh a D uab a pl ac e c all ed T il v a di n ear S ultan p ur o t far fr o m

n a . e n r
n , n

co flu n ce o f t h e B ias an d S a tl uy ( th us thi s river i s p r o n oun ced in P a j abi ) but it is n o t t h e bi r th la ce

v

th e n e
n
p ,

o f N a ak n .
 P RE F A T O RY RE MA RK S .

iii

far mer , w h o h eld al s o th e o ffi ce of W p at v ar i ( a v al uer of th e pr oduc e of th e fields) i n th e

ser vice of t h e feu a dl
village l L or d of th e .

A t h is bir th th e w hol e H i n di p an th eon app ear e d an d an n o un c ed th at a gr eat Bh a gat ( sai n t

.
)
w as born to sa ve t h e w o r ld .

O f hi s childhood n othi n g p ar ticul ar i s m en tion ed except th at h e did n ot pl ay li k e oth er bov s ,

of hi s age bu t w as al w ay s occupi ed i n h is m edit atio n s on th e S upr e me L or d

, .

A t t h e age o f sev en h i s f ath er took h im to a H i n d u school to l earn to r ead an d w r ite .

H e i s sai d to h av e sur p r i sed t h e H i n d uschool m aster by h i s sup er io r k n o wl edg e t h e p upil c o m ,

m en c i n g at o n c e to i n st ruct th e m aster w h en t h e l atter g av e h i m a w ooden slat e o n w hich t h e, ,

l etter s of t h e alph ab et w er e w r itten In pr oof of thi s thi r ty f our ver ses fr o m t h e G ran th are
.
,
-

q uoted in scribed t h e wooden slate

,
“
p at ti ) w hich Nan ak is supposed to h a v e utter ed on
”
,

th at occasion but n o do ubt th e stor y w as i n ven ted i n or der to accoun t for t h e verses as i s
, , , ,

evid en t fr o m oth er c ases of t h e ki n d .

Th e fu r th er d evelop m en t of Nan ak s ch ara cter is n ot to uch ed upon app ar en tly b ecause at ’

,

th at ti m e n othin g w as k n o wn about it O n e stor y on ly i s in ser ted w hich tells h ow Nan ak w hil st .

, ,

gr az in g h is father s b uffalo es allow ed th em to br ea k i n to a cul ti v ated fi eld an d destr oy t h e cr op

’
,
— .

W h en t h e o w n er of th e fi eld sued Nan ak s fath er for d am ages Nan ak d en i ed h is guilt an d w h en

’

, ,

t h e field w as in sp ect ed it w as f o un d un i nj ur ed ,
.

Th e m arr i age o f Nan ak as w el l as th at of h i s sist er Nan aki w ith Ja ir am w hich to th e l ater

'

, ,

c om pil er s h av e offer e d su ch an exub er an t fi eld is total ly om itted h er e I t i s on ly b r i efly r e , .

m ar k e d th at by t h e or der o f G od t w o son s w er e bor n i n t h e ho use of Nan ak E akh mi das an d ,

-

S ir i éan d but th at Nan ak co n ti n ued to l ead a r ecl use li fe

-
, .

Then f ollow s a m ir acul o us stor y th at on e d ay Nan ak laid hi mself dow n un der a t r ee an d fell
”

asl eep . By ch an ce Rae B u l ar c am e th er e an d saw th at w hil e t h e sh a do w s of t h e oth er tr ees h ad

t r av ell ed r oun d th at of th e tr ee un der w hich N an ak sl ept r em ain ed station ar y Thi s ci r c um stan ce
, .

in duce d Rae B ul ar to i m p re ss on K al a wh o bore ill w ill to war ds h is son o n accoun t o f h is dream in g

,
-

p r op en siti es th at N an ak w as a g reat m an an d th at t h e father w as ex alted by h im ; but th ese

,

w o r d s m ad e n o i m pression on K al fi s m i n d w h o slighti n gly an sw er ed t h at t h e thi n gs o f G od onl y

’
, ,

G od kn ew Th e l at er Jan e m sakh i s h ave em b elli sh ed an d enl ar g e d thi s sto ry by ad di n g an oth er

.
-

m ir a cl e th at a lar g e bla ck sn ake exp an de d it s hood ov er Nan ak in or der to p r otect h im fr om

,

t h e glo w in g ra y s o f th e sun .

Th en it i s stated expressly th at N an ak al ways kept com p an y w ith F aql rs an d w as av er se to

,
''

an y earn est l abou r or c allin g w hich greatl y al ar m ed h i s fam ily w h o w o uld n ot r ecog n i ze h i s
, ,

divin e calli n g an d especially hi s w or ldl y mi n ded fath er K al a w ho m th e n ar r ators seem to take

,
-
,

a se c r et pl easu r e in d esc r i bin g as a m i ser Hi s f am ily at l ast con sider ed h im a l un a ti c an d b eg an

.

to m our n thi s cal am ity A t th e in stigation o f th e r el ativ es a physician w as c all ed but h e co uld
.
2
,

do n othin g Nan ak show in g him self t h e clever er o f t h e t w o

,
.

I t i s ver y sign ifican t th at this w hole cir cum stan c e i s car ef ully p asse d over in t h e l ater Jamam
,

sakh i a as e ver y oth er p o i n t w hich th r o w s an un fa vo u

,
r abl e or do ubtf ul li ght on Nan ak .

A t l ast h is p ar en ts sen t Nan ak to S ultan p ur to hi s b r oth er i n l aw Jai m w h o h eld an ap

‘
-
,
-
ra ,

poi n tm en t i n t h e com m issari at of Navab Daulat K h an They p r ob ably despai red o f br in gin g hi m .

i n to an or der ly cour se of li fe at home ; b ut accor din g to t h e origi n al text h e w as sen t by t h e ,

l t on ed as t h e p r oper ty o f R56 B h 6 e ; t h e L or d i N an k s ti me w a s Rae B ular a

T al v an di i s m en i n a
’
,

M usal m an R ajp ut o f t h e B hatti f m ily a desce da t o f R ae B h 6 e a , n n .

T h e o r i gin al text ( p 26) r u s th us 3 ft : l 1 m 3 3 1 3 31 3 g i g af fi rm a n a rm g afi r

3 "

{
. n :

m m n m w nm n m a u a fi a m um
O x A
.
iv P RE F A TO RY RE MA RK S .

or der of G od By th e good
.
vices of his b r oth er i a l aw Nan ak al so was appoi n te d to th e c o m
ser - -
,

m i ssari a t ,
an d h e co n d u him self to gen er al sati sfactio n His w ife an d t wo ch i ldren h e l eft
cted .

b ehi n d at T al v an di h i s dom estic life bei n g by n o m ean s h appy o w i n g it appear s to h is o w n

'

, , , ,

f au l,
t as n oth in g po t
is r e r e d p rej udici al t o hi s w if e A t S ult a n pu r h e w as j oi n e d by a c er tai n .

M ar dan a by pr o fession a b eggin g musici an of th e M usal m an persuasio n After h i s dai ly w or k

,
.

h e sp e n t h is n ights w ith Mar dan a in p rai sin g G od M ar dan a pl ayi n g t h e r eb eck whi lst h e h i mself
'

, ,

i mpr ovi sed ver ses to th e t un es .

O n e m orni n g h e w en t to th e c an al to b ath e Whil st b athi n g an gel s seiz ed h i m an d c ar i ed

r .
,

h im to th e di vi ne p r esen ce H ere h e r e ceived th e p r oph etic i n iti ation a c up of n ectar b ei g

.

n ,

p resen te d to h im w ith th e i nj un ction to pr ocl aim t h e n am e o f B ar i on ear th A fter t i s

hom e He w as re cei ve d Wi th
h .

h e w as b ro ught bac k agai n to t h e ca n al w h en ce h e r et u rn e d

,
.

a m a z em en t : for h i s ser van t to w ho m h e h ad h an ded over h is cloth es w h en en ter i n g th e w a ter

,
,

h ad r u n hom e on Nanak s di sapp ear an ce an d sp r ead th e n ew s th at h e w as dr o wn ed

’ O n hear in g .
,

this i n te lli gen ce even t h e Khan him self i s sai d t o h ave r idden to t h e spot an d to h ave given
,

or der s to th e fi sh er men to sear ch w ith th eir n ets for th e cor pse of Nanak but th ey h ad been ,

un abl e to fi n d it .

A ft er thi s a cciden t w hich somehow seem s to be b ase d o n a hi stor i c al fac t Nan ak divided
, ,

all h e h ad am o n g th e poor l eft hi s ho use an d tur n e d Fa qi r M ar d ana accomp an yin g hi m T h e

, , ,
'

K h an en d eavour e d to retai n a faithf u l ser v an t but Nan ak st ood fi r m i n h i s r esol ution ,

.

T h e l at er co mp il ation s h av e gi v en to thi s stor y q uite a di ffer en t t urn A ccor di n g to th em .

N an ak goes to S ultan p u r by th e ad vi ce o f Rae B u l ar w h o c an b ear n o lon ger Kal us di srespectful ,

’

t reat m en t o f h i s w on derf ul son A t S ultan p ur h e i s appoin t ed to th e com m i ssar i at But h e gives

. .

al m s so ab u n d an tly th at Jair am con sid er s it advi sabl e to r epor t it to Kal a w h o in con seq uen ce
, , ,

o f thi s n ew s co m es to S u , ltan p ur an d sh ar ply enjoi n s o n h i s son a more p ar si mon io us con d uct A t

, .

Nan ak s r eq uest h i s accoun ts ar e ex am i n ed by Jair am but a con sid erabl e sur pl us app ears i n h i s
’ '

f vo ur
a .I n o r der to accustom Nanak to e con o m y his m arr i ag e i s pl an n ed by Jair am a t K al fi s ,
’

r eq u e st an d thi s i s
, descr ib ed i n f ull d etail B ut n ot w ith stan d in g h is m arr i ed state Nan ak .

co n tin ues h is fo r mer h abits of givin g l avis h al ms w hich l eads to dom estic quarr el s an d t h e ,

i n ter fer en ce o f h is paren ts i n l aw This i s v er y gr aphical ly descr ib ed th e l ater co mpil er s h er e

- -
.
,

app ar en tl y feeli n g v er y su re of t h e gr o u n d un der th ei r fee t .

To t h e story of th e b ath i n th e can al w hich could n ot quite be set aside a di ffer en t tur n is , ,

given Nan ak s in iti ation i n to th e G uruship i s n o t m en tion ed ( tho ugh this is th e ver y t urn in g
.
’

poi n t of th e w hole stor y ) as accordi n g to th ese later co m pil ation s Nana/o has en ter ed the wor l d
,

as A v atar as the F or mless o n e hi mse

, lf It is ther efor e r el ated th at on e of th e Govi n d faqi r s
.
,
-

advi se d h im to b ath e i n th e r iver daily i n or der to cur e hi mself o f a li ver com plai n t O n e -
, .

day K an ak w hil st t akin g a b at h w as lo st i n th e r iver

, O n thi s th e r um o ur w as spr ead th at
, .

Nan ak h ad b een guilty of embezzl emen t W h en h e r eapp ear ed after th ree d ay s ( it is n o t e ven .

hi n ted w h ere h e w as d ur ing tho se thr ee days) th e Kh an or dered an i n quir y to be m ade i n t o ,

h i s a cco un ts but it turn ed out th at 7 6 0 Rupees w ere d ue to h

, i m w hich Nan ak w o uld n o t ,
a cc ept but taki n g h i s di sch ar ge r eti red i n to th e w ild er n ess l eavi n g h i s
,
wi fe an d childr en b ehin d , .

A s it app ears N an ak st ay ed at fi st i n th e vici n ity of S ult n p

, a ur Hi s first sayi n g w h ich
r
.
,
m ad e so me n oise am on g st th e p eopl e w as : Ther e 2s n o E nds an d n o Musal man ” but this “
'

, .
,

b r ought upon h im again t h e ch ar ge of m ad n ess A t th e in stigation of th e K az i th e Nav ab D aul at .

K h an su m m o ned h i m to h is p r esen ce i n or d er to i n t err og ate hi m abo t th I t w as

u i s n ew doctri n e .

j ust t h e ti m e of n oon day p ray er an d t h e K han i n v ited Nan ak to a ccom pany him to t h e m osque
-
.

T h e E ast sa id p ra yer s bu t Nan ak i n stead o f listeni n g d evoutl y b eg an to l au h P y b g

, ,
g r a ers ei n , .

over t h e K 512 i c ompl ain ed of t h e irr evere t con d uct of Nan ak Bei n g c all ed to a cco un t by th e n .

K h an h e r eplied th at h e l a u ghed because th e prayer s o f t h e Kazi w ere n ugatory Bein g asked fo r

, , .
 P RE F A TO RY RE MARK S .

a n ear er xplan ation h e con ti n ued that th e K 21 2 i h ad lef t a fo al in h i s cour tyar d i n w hich there
e , ,

w as an op en w ell ; an d th at w hil st sayi n g pr ayer s h i s tho ughts w er e al w ay s w an d er i n g bac k to

th e f o al l est it should fall i n to the w ell O n thi s th e K az i fell do w n at N an ak s feet an d c on

'' ’
.
,

f essed th at it w as tr ue Nan ak r o se at on ce in th e esti m ation of al l an d th e K h an dism issed h i m

.
,

graciously He n ow comm en ced w an der i n g about t h e coun tr y accom p an i ed by M ar dan a th e

.
, ,

m usici an .

Up to thi s poin t both relation s agree at least in sub stan ce though th e l ater com pil ation s out
, , ,

o f love f or th e m ir a cu lous st r iv e h ar d to ex agger at e ev er ythin g in to t h e sup ern atur al B ut w i th

, .

t h e comm en c em en t o f t h e w an d er i n gs of N an ak n ear ly al l poin ts i n co m m on c ease an d th e old

‘

an d th e l at er traditio n di v er ge i n such a m an n er th at th ey c an n ot be r e con cil ed Thi s p r oves .

suffi ci en tly eith er th at v er y littl e w as kn o w n abo u

,
t th em o r th at v er y littl e coul d be said about
th em as th e old Jan e m sakhi testifies Th e l ater tradition w hich p reten d s to h ave a k n o w l edge
,
- .
,

o f al l th e d et ail s of th e life of Nan ak , w as th eref o re com p elled to p ut for th as vo uch er for i t s

su n d r y t al es an d sto r i es Bh ai Bel a w h o i s said to h a v e b een th e con stan t com p an io n of Nan ak
,

f r o m h i s yo uth up w h er eas o ur old J an am —sakhi do es n o t even o n c e m en tio n Bh ai Bel a tho ugh at

, ,

e v er y n ew w an der in g of N an ak it giv es t h e n am es o f h i s com p an io n s If Bh ai Bal e h ad b een t h e .

con stan t com pan ion o f an ak and a sor t of m en tor to h im as h e app ears n ow i n t h e curr en t
'

Jan am sak h i s it w ould be q uite i n co m pr eh en sible w h y n ev er a sin gl e a

-
,
l l usion sho uld h ave b een
,

m a de to h im i n th e old t raditio n .

W e w ill n o w bri efly sum up h ere w h at t h e old J an am sakh i h as to say abo ut th e fur th er li fe
,
-

of Nan ak .

H i s fir st w an d erin g i s said to h ave b een to th e east Th ere h e came to a cer tai n S h ekh .

S aj an w h o h ad built a t em pl e f or H i n du s an d a m o sq u e for M u h amm adan s H e r eceived al l w h o

'
.
,

c am e to h i m w ith o sten sible fr i en dli n ess but m ur dered th em w hilst sl eepi n g an d plun der ed th eir
, , , ,

goods N an ak got quickly at t h e bottom o f h is rascality an d con v i n ced h i m o f h i s si n ful l ife which
.
,

b r ought h i m to r ep en tan c e .

A t Dill i h e i s said to h av e v iv i fi ed a d ead el eph an t B ut w h en t h e th en em p er o r w h o h ad .

,

h ear d o f thi s m ir acle c alled o n Nan ak to kill th e elephan t an d to vivify it in h i s pr esen ce h e

, ,

pr uden tly decli n ed .

A l so Th ags w ith whom h e fell in o n h i s w ay h e b r o ught to r ep en tan c e by h i s fi r m an d

, ,

in tr epid con duct .

O th er adven tures w hich h e i s n arrate d to h ave exp er ien ced ar e so ch i ldi sh an d n on sen sic al
, , ,

t h a t it i s n ot w o r th w hil e m en tio n in g th em .

A t th e c apture o f S ay y i d p ur h e i s repor t ed to h ave b een t aken pr i son er by t h e tr oop s of Bab ar ,

but by a m ir acl e be attra cted th e atten tio n of Bab ar w h o r el eased h im w ith th e oth er p r i so n er s , .

A s Bab ar con quer ed th e P anj ab in 1 52 4 a p er so n al m eetin g of N an ak w ith Bab ar i s n o t i m po ssible

, ,

but it i s n ot v er y p r ob abl e F o r N an ak sp eak s i n th e Gr an th sev er al ti m es o f th e great c al am ities

.

w hich at th a t ti m e b efell v ar io us cities o f th e P anj ab ; Bab ar al so i s m en tio n e d by h i m but n o ,

al l usion w h atev er i s m ade to h is h avin g co m e in to p er so n al co n t act w ith Bab ar .

T h e m eetin g s an d ver b al con tests w ith oth er F a qi rs an d S h é kh s w hich are d esc r ib ed at f ull ,

len gth ar e in th emselves v er y pr ob able but in oth er resp ects of n o i m por tan ce except th at th ey
, , ,

give som e hi n ts to th e m en tal develop m en t of Nan ak A ft er som e len gth en ed w an der in g s Nan ak .

retrac ed hi s step s to h i s ho m e at T al v an di .

Hi s un quiet spir it gav e h i m n o r est a t ho m e an d h e soon com m en ced h is secon d w an der in g ,

w hich w as di recte d t o t h e south T h e i n ciden ts o f thi s p er iod al so ar e of littl e con se quen c e

. .

Th at on thi s excursion h e should h ave com e to C ey l on ( S in gh al a d i p a ) as i s repor ted i s in t h e v

, ,

high est degr ee un likely Th e w hole story i s so m ixed up w ith th e m iraculous th at it b ears th e
.
,

st am p of f able on i t s fr on t I t i s b ased on al together err on eous suppositio n s th e kin g an d

.
'

,
vi P RE F A T O RY RE MA RK S .

bein g r epresented as co m m on Hi n d u C ylo

.

th e in h abitan ts of e s th e S ikh author b ei n g quite

n ,

un aw are of th e fact th at t h e pop u l ar r el igious b eli ef th er e w as Buddhi sm Th at Nan ak fo un ded .

th ere a S an gat ( c on gregation ) th e or der o f w ho se divi ne ser vi c e even i s detailed con tr adict s
“ ”
,
,

all hi story an d is an in ven tion o f l ater Ltim es w h en S ikhism h ad com m en c ed to sp read to th e

, ,

so u th F r om thi s tour Nan ak is said to h ave returned to Tal vaudi an d to h av e sp en t so me

.

tim e at home .

His th ir d w an der in g h e d irected to th e n or th w h er e h e i s r epo rt ed to h av e vi sit ed Kash mi r , ,

w hi ch i s n ot i mp r obabl e .

O n thi s tour h e i s said to h av e eaten th e poison o us fruits an d blo ssom s of th e Akh tr ee

-

i n a dri ed st ate N othin g r em arkabl e i s m en tion e d on this to ur except th at h e h ad a lon g c on

. ,

v ersation w ith a K ashm i ri Ban dit which en ded i n t h e Pan dit s b eco m in a di scipl e of Nan ak ,
’
g .

H i s vi sit to m o un t S um er u w h er e h e i s r epor ted to h ave h ad a lo n g di sc ussio n w ith M ah ad ev

,

an d th e chi ef J ogi s b elo n gs of c ou r se to t h e r eal m o f fi cti on

,
.

His f our th w an der in g h e i s said to h ave dir e cted to th e west goi n g o n a pilgr i m age to ,

Mekhah O n ar r ivin g at Mekk ah h e l aid hi m self do w n

. an d by ch a n c e str etch ed h i s feet
, ,

to war ds th e Ka b ah Th e K az i Rukn u ddi n on ob ser vin g thi s r ep ro ach ed N an ak w ith i rrever en ce

’
.
-
, ,

tow ards th e house o f G od Nanak replied : P ut m y feet in th at di r e ct ion w h er e t h e house o f

.
“
,

G od i s n ot T h e Kazi t u r n ed th e feet of N an ak
.
”
but w h er ev er h e tur n e d th em thith er th e , ,

Ka bah al so turn ed O n accoun t of thi s m ir acl e th e K azi kissed t h e fee t o f Nan ak an d h ad a lon g
’
.

con versation w ith h i m i n w hich h e w as of course o ut ar gued by Nan ak Thi s h ajj of Nan ak is a
, , ,
- .

favo ur ite th eme w ith t h e S ikh s an d a w hol e book h as b een w ritt en abo ut i t c all e d 511 1f;
T he C onver sat ion of Ill s/shah whi ch i s eager ly r ead by th em O wi n g to th ei r cr edu
,
l ity an d .

utter w an t of geogr aphical an d histor ic al k n o w l edge n o do ubt of t h e r eality o f thi s h ajj seems to
'

h av e occ urr ed to th em tho ugh it i s as cl ear as d aylight th at th e w hol e stor y i s an i n v en tio n

, ,

fr om b egin n in g to en d .

Hi s fift h w an der in g Nan ak i s sa id to h ave m a de to Gor ahh ha tafi a pl ac e n ot y et di scov ere d -

,

by geographers O f thi s e xpedition n othin g i s r epor ted except a co n ver sation w ith th e eighty four
. -

S iddh s wh o b elon g likew i se to th e r eal m o f ph an tasy

,
l
.

Nan ak clo se d hi s life at Kart arp ur i n t h e Jal an dh ar B ush in th e bo so m o f h is family w ith , ,

w ho m h e seem s to h ave b ecom e recon cil ed to w ar ds t h e clo se of hi s ear thly c ar eer though all th e
,

Janam sak h i s ob ser v e a d eep sil en ce on thi s poi n t an d o nly m en tion t h e b are fa ct Wh en h e felt
'
-
.

h i s d eath appr o ach i n g b e n o m in at ed to t h e great di sappoi n tm en t of h is t w o so n s h i s d evote d

, , ,

ser van t an d di scipl e L ab an a ( or A n gad

) h i s succ essor i n th e Gur uship H e di ed i n th e S am v at .

y ear 1 59 5 on t h e t en th of th e light h al f o f t h e m on th of A sh ( a n 1 538 about th e l oth o f

, .
,

O ctob er ) !

Thi s i s th e sum o f all th at can be gathere d fr om th is oldest sour ce as to th e lif e of

Nan ak I t is a biogra phy con tainin g ver y li ttl e to attract our in ter est an d mutatzs mutandts
.

,
' '

,
applic able to n ear ly e ver y Hin d uF aqi r If m ore could h ave been said o f Nan ak w e m ight be .

su re ,th at hi s devoted di sciples wh o rev ered in h im t h e saviour of t h e w or ld w oul d n ot h ave

,
,

passed it over in sil en ce Th e writers o f t h e l ater Jan am sakh i s to w hom thi s picture of Nan ak
. -
,

app ear ed too sc an ty an d m ean did th eir b est to emb ellish it w ith all so r ts of won derful t al es
,

an d sto r i es but i n com pari son w ith this old er tr adition th ey c an n ot

,
be h eld in an y acco un t .

1
haS i dda p fec t J g1 o f who m e nera lly e i ghty—fo ur are en um r
,
g
er
e a t ed
o
-
,
, but t hei r n a mes a re n owhere
stated ; they a r e pop u l ly co sider ed as a kin d o f dem i g od s ar n -
.

T his is th e d te given by th e old J an am sakh i ; t h e la ter co m pilatio s

a -
n
gi
ve th e year 1 539 ; see t he
t ran sl ation .
 J A NA M - S A K H I O F BKBK NANA K . A .
vii

We ppen d h er e a liter al tran sl ation of t h e old Jan am sakhi m ar ked A O f th e cur ren t
a -
. J an am

sakh i s w hich di ff er fr o m each oth er m er ely in m i n or poi n ts w e give o n ly tho se p ar ts

, , , w hich
are o f i n t er est for th e sak e o f co m p ari son Thi s l ater co m pilation i s m arked B . .
1

A .

JA N A M S A K H I OF B A BA N A NA K .

B y th e favo ur of th e t rue Gur u

Th e holy tr ue G uru came to v

sa e th e W orld ; i n t h e Kali y ug -
Babs Nan ak w as born , th e p
su r em e

Br ah m s ow n devotee
’
.

B y th e favo ur of th e tr ue G ur u!

I n S am b at, 1 526 , Bab a Na k w

na as bor n
oon l i ght n ight at an i n th e m on th of V ai sakh ; z in a m
e ar ly ho u r w hil e y et abo ut a w atch o f t h e n ight w as r em ai n i n g h e w as bo r n
,
Un b eaten soun ds , .

w er e pr od uc ed at th e gate o f th e L o r d Th e thi r ty th r ee c r or es o f gods pa id ho m a ge ( to t h e child

.
-

Nan ak ) T h e sixty f our Jé gin i s th e fi fty t w o her o es th e si x ascetics th e eighty four S iddh s t h e
.
-
,
-
, ,
-
,

i
n ne N ath s p a id h o m ag f
e
‘
b ecause a gr eat devotee h as com e to sav e th e w or ld ; to h im hom ag e
,
“

sho u ld b e p ai d ! ”
A t th a t ti m e Kal a a Kh at ri by c aste a V é di ( by cl an ) w as livi n g at Tal v an di a vill age of Rae
, , , ,

Bh oe th e B h atti ; th er e ( Nan ak ) w as bo rn
,
.

W h en h e b ec a m e big h e b eg an to pl ay w ith t h e boy s but th e vi ew s of th e boy s an d hi s w er e

, ,
4

di fferen t I n h i s spir it h e w as occ upie d w ith th e L or d

. .

Wh en Bab a ( Nan ak ) w as fi v e year s old h e b eg an to t al k o f t h e S hastr as an d of th e V edas ,

Wh atever h e says th at h e ( al so ) un derstan ds ; ever ybody r eceived co mf or t fr om h im T h e Hin d u

, s .

sa
y th at so m e f o r m o f a god h as b ecom e i n c arn ate an d th e Musal man s say th at som e holy m an of
, ,

G od h as b een born .

1
I use h p ur po se a G ur m ukh i MS b elo n gi g to m yself a MS belon gi g to t h e In di a C fli c e
d for t i s . n , . n

L ib rar y m a k ed : 3 B iblioth e c a L e d e n ian a a d

9
lithog r ap h ed copy publi sh ed a t L ahor e ( 1 8 71 ) w ith th e
n a
,
r y 885
, ,

t i tl é z m n w w m m fi fi m m fw m m fi x mfi a m u m
f m } UTE ? m {1 7 ; 3 W T hi s b ook co tai i n g m a y bold w oo d c uts i s utte l y spoil ed i
‘ ’

, n n n , r n

t h e l t ter h al f by t h e m alicio usn ess o f t h e scr i be t h e l etter s b ei g p urp o sely so di fi g u

a r e d th at t h ey c a
, o n s , n n

lo n g er be r ea d w itho ut t h e h elp o f a m a n uscript L ar g e extra cts ar l so co t i ed i n th e fi ll Hi Q m i }

. e a n a n
' ‘’

W T p ublish ed at L udih ana by t h e A m eri can Mi sio n P r ess 1 8 68

,
s , .

B oth J an a m sak h i s a g r ee a s t o th e year but o t s to t h e m o th fo r a cc or di n g to B h e w as bo r n

2 -
, n a n

i n t h e m o th o f K a tak ( m id dl e o f O ctob er— t h e m i d d l e o f N ovem ber )

n T h e m o t h V a i sakh is m idd le o f . n

A pr il— m iddle o f Ma y ; h i s bi r th took th e ref e pla c e eith er i n May or Novem ber o f 1469 A D
or . .

C om par e B
3
S ee B
viii J ANA M- S A K HI O F BA BA NAN AK . A .

h b v y old K l id O k d Th en h e b r o ught G u ru N an a !”
W en th e Ba w
“
a as se e n ear s a a sa :
, ,
r ea
”
Nan ak to th e school master Kal a said : O school m aster t each thi s on e to ead ! T h e school
r “
. ,

m aster w r ote a sl ate an d g av e it to h im con t ai n i n g t h e thir ty fi v e l e tters ( o f t h e G ur m ukhi alph ab et ) ;

-
,

t h e sl at e ( i s co n tai n ed ) i n t h e Rag Asa Mah al a I T h e fir st w or d h e r ead w as By th e favo ur ? “

:
,

o f th e holy t ru e Gu r u!
”

o w f o l lo w s a qu ot atio n o f thi r ty fo ur v erses f r o m t h e B ag Asa bu t w itho ut an y t ran sl ation

[ N -
,

or p araphr ase b ei n g add ed to it Af ter som e c on ver sation b etw een th e school m aster an d N an ak on th e
.

su bj e ct o f th ese verses th e stor y con ti nues ) .

Th e P an dit b ecam e aston i sh e d an d p aid re veren c e ( to h im ) because th i s i s a p er fect on e ,

“
.

Wh at co mes i n to th y m i n d th at do ! Th en th e G ur u B ab a w en t ho me an d sat do wn I t w as
,
” .

th e or der o f th e L or d th at h e di d n o w o r k w h ate v er ,
Wh en h e sits do w n h e r em ain s seated ; . ,

w h en h e go es to sleep h e rem ai n s asl eep He associ at es w ith F aqi r s

,
H i s f ath er K al fi b ec am e .
.

asto n i sh ed w h at w o uld b eco m e o f hi m

3
.
,

( t w o l eaves b ein g lo st) N othin g of t h e field o f thi s on e i s spoil e d Th en th e 4

.
.

Bh atti said S ir m y fi eld in deed i s l a id w aste ; I am r obb ed m y fi eld i s spoil ed

:
“
,
Pr ocur e m e ,
.

j ustice if n ot I go to th e Tur ks
, ,
Gur u Nan ak an sw er ed : 0 Di v an h ealth ( to ( th ee ) ! i f on e
.
” “
,

blad e be spoiled or out off th en an sw er m ust be m ade f or it ; but sen d thou thy ow n m an an d
,

look ! Then Rae B ul ar sen t hi s o w n footm en ( a l ac un a i n t h e M S ) N ot on e bl ade

”
.
.

w as d estr oyed Th en th e B ab a m ade a S ah d ; it i s wri tten in th e B ag S fi bi Mah al a I [f our ° s

.
. ,

v er ses f ol low wi thout a paraphr ase] Then Rae B ul ar c alled th at Bh atti a li ar Nan ak an d . .

K al a bot h w en t ho m e .

Th en c ame th e or der of th e L or d th at i n t h e house o f Guru Nan ak t w o son s should be born , ,

L akh m i das an d S i ri éan d B ut N an ak s r eti r em en t fr o m th e w or ld w as n ot giv en up ; G ur u

’
- -
.

Nan ak goi n g to tr ees r em ain ed ( th ere ) r etir ed fr o m t h e w o r ld ( M S p . .

Then on e d ay th e Bab a G ur u Nan ak w en t an d f el l asl eep i n a gar den Th e day w en t down .

7

agai n an d h e did n o t r i se A t th at ti m e Rae B ular t h c B h at ti chi ef w as occupi ed i n thi s b usin ess

.
, ,

( o f h is chieft ain ship al e m easur i n g l an d ) C om i n g an d co m i n g wh en h e en t er e d t h e g ar den som e

,
. .
,

o n e h ad fal l en asl eep un d e r a tree B ut w h en h e look e d o n h e saw th a t t h e sh ad e of th e oth er

.
, ,

trees h ad go n e an d th at th e sh ade of thi s tr ee w as r em ain in g Rae Bul ar said : A w aken h i m ! ”

, .
“

W h en h e w as r ai sed it w as foun d th at it w as t h e so n of Kal a Th en Rae Bul ar said : Fr i en ds

, , .
“
,

w e h av e seen a w o n d er ful thi n g an d look al so at t h i s it i s n ot e m pty ! Th en R ae B ul ar w en t

, ,
”

ho me an d sen t for Kala an d said to h i m : Kala don t be sayi n g to thi s thy son : F i e upon th ee
,
“
,
’ ‘
,

di e ! h e i s a grea t m an m y to w n i s a sacri fice to h i m

’
Kal a tho u h ast bc c om e e xalted an d I al so
, .
,

am e x alted in w ho se to wn thi s on e h as b een bor n ”

, K al ii said : Th e thin g s of G od even G od .
“

kn ow s an d wen t hom e
,
”
.

Guru Nan ak kept co mpan y with F aqi r s w ith an y on e ( el se) h e did n ot con verse T h e w hol e , .

fam ily w as gri eved th er eby an d said : He h as b ecom e m ad Then c am e th e moth er of G ur uNan ak
, .
”

S ee B
9
M ah al a I d esig n a t es th e wr iti g s o f Nan ak
n Mah ala II tho se o f A n g ad , et c very piece is th us
E
ked in t h e G th T h e p atti
.
, . .

m ar r an is fo un d i n t h e R ag Asa L ho e
( ( o r woo de slate) n a r lithogr a phed e di tio n o f
t h e G a th ) p 4 77 8 99
.

r n , . .

C o m p are B
3
a t t h e en d .

S B w h ere t h e sam e sto ry i s rel a ted

ee .
.

T h e C a up d a an d a a d a a e c alled by o e co m m o n n am e
5
a
S bd r n a .

S e Rag su m S ahd Mo b 1 v 7
e , , . . . .

7
T h at i s : i t fo r ebo des so m et hi g i m por ta n t
a
S ee B n .
 J A NA H - S A K HI O F BA BA N A N A K . A .

outside be dam aged ! Th en came h i s m oth er an d b egan to giv

”
i t 0 son f or ge t e him ns r ucti o n :
“
,

o d y t d cloth d go bo u t i n t h e l an es an d str eet s th at t h e

for f ur a s th e n am e ! s an up p u t o n es an a
,
,

p eopl e m ay be r eassur ed ( o f thy h ealth ) an d th at ever y on e m ay say : Th e son o f Kal a h as b eco m e ‘

n si sti n g o f f o ur v er ses]
1
w el l Th en th e B a b a r e ci te d a S ah d [ n o w f o l lo w s a S ah d co ,
.

Then hi s m oth er r o se an d w en t aw ay an d g av e i n for mation ( as to h i s state) i n t h e fam il y .

Th e w hol e fam ily an d cl an of t h e V adi s b egan to g r i e ve an d to say th at a g reat c al ami ty

h ad ,

h app en ed th at t h e son of K al a h ad b ecom e m ad

,
.

Th en Baba Nan ak di d n eith er eat n or dr in k for th r ee m on th s Th e w hol e cl an of th e Vadi s .

b ec am e di spi r ited All b egan to say : K al a h o w c an st tho u sit dow n qui etly w ho se son h as
.
“
, ,

fal len ( sick ) ? C all som e phy ici an an d gi ve h i m som e m edici n e th y son w ill b eco m e w el l th en
s , ,

h t
w a i s th e o u tl ay o f so m e R up ee s ? ”
K al a r o se an d c all ed a phy sici an W h e n th e phy sici an h ad .

co m e h e took th e ar m of N an ak to feel h is pul se Nan ak p ulle d aw ay h i s ar m an d st an di n g on

,
.

h i s l eg s h e r o se an d said 0 phy sici an w h at ar t tho u doi n g ?

: Th e phy sici an an sw er e d : ,
I look ” “

after t h e di sease th at m ay be in thy spi rit Th e Bab a l augh e d an d utt er ed a S l é k [ n ow f ollow ”

.
,

f our v erses] Th e B ab a m ad e al so a S ah d on th e subj ect o f th e phy sici an i n th e B ag M al ar

.
2

[th er e follo w fo ur v er ses]

3
.

T h e physici an b ei n g afr aid stood in t h e shop an d said : Br oth er do n t be an xious thi s is “ ’

, ,

r em ovi n g t h e p ai n Th en t h e Baba utt er ed a S ah d i n th e B ag G auri M ah ala I [th er e f ol low

.
, ,
.

si x v er s es
]
4
.

Th en c am e th e or der o f th e L or d th at Gur u Nan ak w en t aw ay ( fr om ho m e) T h e b r oth er ,

.

i n l aw o f Bab a Nan ak w as J ai r am w h o w as t h e ste w ar d o f t h e Nab ab Daul at K h an ‘ Jai ram

-
,
.
5

h ad h ear d th at N an ak w as distr acted i n h i s m in d an d di d n o w o r k w h at ev er H e w r ot e a l ett er .

th at Nan ak sho uld co m e to hi m Gur u Nan ak r ead thi s letter an d said : May it be so I wil l .
“
,

joi n Jai am ” T h e p eople o f th e ho use said th at it w ould be good if h e w oul d go p er h ap s h i s

r .
, , ,

m i n d w ould b eco m e set tl ed th er e Th e B ab a r o se an d w en t to S ult an p ur . Th e w i fe o f t h e B aba .

b egan to w eep an d said : Thou w ast n ever ki ssi n g m e b efor e thou art n o w goi n g ab r o ad h o w
“
, ,

w ilt tho u co m e T h e B ab a said : 0 silly on e w h at w er e w e doi n g h er e ? an d w h at “

,

sh all w e do th er e ? I am o f n o use to th ee S h e r o se an d a ddressed ag ain thi s p etitio n to hi m .

W h en tho u w ast sitti n g i n th e ho use th en I h ad i n m y vi ew th e sov ereig n ty of t h e w hol e w or ld , , , .

0 dear thi s w or ld i s o f n o use to m e wh at ev er

, Th en t h e Guru bec am e t en der an d said : Do n ot .
”

be an xious e ver y d a
y th e sover eig n ty sh all be thi n e S h e said : S i r I sh all n ot r em ain
” “
: .
,

b ehi n d take m e w ith th ee

, Th e Baba an sw ered : It i s ( th e or der ) of t h e L or d th at I am
.
“
,

goi n g If I sh all gain som e livelihood th er e I sh all call th ee th er e Min d th o u m y or der

.
, . .
”

Then sh e kept silen ce Guru Nanak th en took leave fr o m h i s r el ativ es an d fri en ds an d w en t to

.

S ultan pur He arri ved th ere an d m et w ith Jair am

.
Jai r am w as v er y h appy an d said : Br oth er .
“

N an ak i t i s v er y good
, Th en Jair am w en t to th e court an d m ade thi s p etitio n to Daul at Khan
.
”

“
N ab ab h ealth ! o n e b r oth er i a l aw o f m i n e h as com e ; h e w i sh es to m eet th e Na b ab
,
- -
Daul at .
”

K h an sai d : G o an d brin g h i m !
“
Jair am w en t an d b r o ught G ur u N an ak ; h e ut so m e pr esen t
”
p
( befor e th e N ab ab ) at m eetin g w ith hi m Th e K h an w as m uch pl eased an d said : Wh at i s t h e . “

”
n am e o f t h i s on e ? Jai r am said : S ir hi s n am e i s N an ak Th e K h an r ej oi n ed :
“
, H e seems .
” “

to be a goo d an d hon est m an en tr ust m y w or k to h im ! Nan ak b ec am e h appy an d smil ed T h e

,
”
.

K h an g av e h i m a dr ess o f ho n o ur an d G ur u Nan ak an d J air am th en w en t hom e Th ey c om , .

T he pl c e wh ere t his S ubd is to be fo un d is o t i n dicated

a , , n .

T h e pl a c e w h er t h e S l ak occu s i s o t i dic t ed
a
, e r n n a
, .

T o be fo un d i n M l ar S hd 7 M ah I b ut t h e ver ses are given th ere i

3
a , a , . .
, n a d i ff e re n t o r der
S ee G auri S ub d I 7 M h I
.

, , a . .

S ee t hi s sto y l r g ed i B
5
r en a n .
 JA NA M- S AK H I o r BA BA NA NA K . A .
xi

m en c ed th eir w or k ; th ey did thei r w or k i n such a w a y th at ever ybody w as pl eased w ith it A l l , .

t h e p e ople said : Well w ell thi s i s so m e good m an ; e ver y on e pr ai sed ( h im ) befor e t h e K h an

“
, , .

T h e Kh an w as v er y m uch pl eased Wh atever sal ar y Gur u N an ak got o f th at h e ate ( = sp ent ) .

,

so m ethin g t h e r est h e g a v e aw ay f or G od s sak e

, B y n ight h e san g al w ay s p r ai se ( to G od ) ’
. .

A ft er w ar d s Mar dan a t h e Dam cam e fr om T al v an di an d r em ai n ed w i th t h e Baba To oth er s w h o

, ,
]
.
,

c am e after w ar ds h e pr ocur ed an in ter view w ith t h e K h an an d a stip en d al l got th ei r br ea d by th e

, ,

f avour of G ur u Nan ak A ll w ere pl eased an d w h en th e B ab a s f ood w as pr ep ared th ey al l c am e

.
’
,

an d sat do w n By n ight con ti n ually p r ai se w as sai d ( by N an ak ) an d w h en as y et a w atch of t h e

.
,

n ight w as r em ai n i n g th e B ab a w en t to th e r iv er to b ath e
2
, W h en it b ec am e d aw n of d ay h e p ut .
,

on h i s cloth es applied th e Til ak

( to h is foreh ead ) an d h avi n g t aken t h e accoun t book i n t h e offi ce
, ,
-

h e sat dow n to w r ite .

O n e d ay th e o r d er of t h e L o r d w as m ad e th at th e r iv er w as goi n g co n ti n ual ly H e w en t ,
.

th er efor e th er e t akin g on e ser v an t w ith h i m S tr ippin g o ff h i s cloth es h e e n tr uste d them to

, .
,

t h e ser v an t an d b eg an to b ath e A s h e was doi n g so a cco r di n g to t h e or der o f th e L or d ser v an t s.

, ,

( = an gel s) took h i m aw ay to th e threshold o f th e L or d Th e ser v an ts said : S ir N an ak i s p resen t “ ”

. .
,

Then h e ( Nan ak ) obtai n ed a sight of t h e tr ue cour t ( of G od ) ; t h e L or d w as kin d ( to h im ) .

M ean whil e th at ser van t ( of Nan ak ) w as st an di n g by h i s cloth es S tan di n g an d stan di n g h e ( fi n ally ) .

r etu rn ed
( ho m e) an d said th at Nan ak h ad gon e in to t h e r iver but h ad n ot com e o ut a gai n H e
, ,
.

w en t to th e K h an an d said : K han h ealth ! Nan ak h as gon e i n to th e r iv er but n o m or e com e “

, ,

ou t .
”
T h e K h an m oun te d h is ho rse an d c am e o ut to t h e b an k o f t h e r iv er H e c all ed fi sh er .

m en an d m ad e th em th r o w a n et ( i n to t h e r iv er ) Th e fi sh er m en sear chi n g b e cam e ti red but .

,

did n ot fi n d h im Th e K h an w as ver y m uch gr ieved h e m oun ted a gai n h is hor se an d said

.
,

“
N an ak w as a good stew ar d an d re tu rn e d ho m e It w as th e o r der of th e L or d th at Nan ak
,
”
.
, ,

t h e de votee w as p r esen t ( at t h e th reshold )

, Th en a c up of n ectar w as fi lled an d giv en hi m .

by t h e or der ( of th e L or d ) T h e comm an d w as given : Nan ak thi s n ectar i s a c up o f m y .

“
,

n am e dr in k it !
, Th en Guru Nan ak m ade sal utatio n an d dr an k it Th e L or d w as ki n d an d said
”
.

“
N an ak I am w ith th ee I h a v e m a de th ee e x alted an d w h o w il l t ake thy n ame th ey w il l al l be
, , ,

m ad e e x alt ed by m e Havin g go n e m utter m y n am e an d m ake al so oth er p eopl e m utter it !

.

Rem ain un con t am in ate d fr o m t h e w o r ld ! Rem ain i n th e n am e ( i n givi n g ) al m s i n p er for m i n g , ,

abl u tio n s i n w orship an d rem em b er in g ( m e) !

,
I h ave given th ee m y o w n n am e do this w or k 3 '

( I told th ee ) I
’

Then G ur u Nan ak m ade sal utation an d stood up Th en th e or der o f th e L or d cam e : N an ak .

“
,

of w h a t ki n d i s t h e gr eatn ess o f m y n am e ? T h e B ab a an sw er ed w hil st a so un d ( o f m n si c ) ”

, .

w as m ad e w ithout i n str umen t s b ein g b eaten as it i s w r itt en i n S ir i Rag M ah al a f ollo w , ,

f o ur v er ses] .
4

Th en agai n a voice cam e : Nan ak my or der h as com e i n to thy sight pr ai se thou m y or d er ! “

, ,

wh at i s don e by an y on e ( but m e) ? an d a t m y gate w h at h ast thou h ear d ? ( w h a t) are t h e m usic al

i n str um en ts playi n g ? T h e Bab a an sw er ed : ( an d a so un d ar o se )
”
as w r itt en i n t h e Rag u ,

Asa Jap u M ah ala I [ th er e f ollow s a S l é k]

, ,
Then c am e ag ai n th e or der : Nan ak on w ho m
. .
5 “
,

thy ( favourable) look i s on hi m i s al so m in e ; o n w hom thy b en evol en c e i s o n h im is al so m in e

, , .

1
caste o f Musa l m an s wh o ar e pr o fessio n al d r um m er s a d m usici a s
a , n n .

m a wa tch equal to th ree hour s

, , .

Th e w o r d s a re i m po r ta t as co n tai n i g th e d uties i n c ulc ated to t h e S ikh s ; t h ey

3
n n ar e :

4
S ee S ix-
i R ag , S ab d 2, Ma h . I .

5
T hi s 8 16 k i s n ow n o t fo un d i n t h e Ra
g Asa, but is th e fi r st l i n e in th e J am] ; it i s t h e we ll k o w
- n n

u
n fit we . e tc .
xii JA NA M- S AK HI o r BA BA N A N A K . A .

My n am e i s : th e S up rem e Br ah m th e S up reme L or d ; an d thy n am e i s : th e G ur u th e S upr em e , ,

L or d Then Nan ak fell on h i s feet A d ress of hon o ur w as given to h i m ; a soun d an d voice

” 1
.
.

ar o se it w as t h e Rag Dh an asar i t h e Ar ti [th ere f ollo w four v er sesj ’

.

, ,

Th en or der w as giv en to tho se mi n i sters th at th ey sho uld b r i n g Nan ak bac k to th at v er y ,

fer ry ; so th ey b r o ught h i m th er e o n t h e thi r d d ay an d w en t o ff H e c am e o ut fr o m t h e r iver . .

Wh en th e p eopl e saw h i m th ey said : F r i en ds thi s on e h ad fall en i n to t h e r iver w h en c e h as h e

,
“
, ,

co me ? Nan ak en ter ed hi s house ; givin g aw ay ev er ythin g h e r em ov ed h i s abode far

”
M an y
p eople assembled th e Khan al so c ame an d said : N an ak : w h at s h pp d to th e
,
h a a e n e e ? ”
Th e “

p eopl e sai d : S ir thi s on e h ad fall en i n to t h e r iver h e h as b een h ur t i n t h e r iver

“
,
Th en t h e ,
.
”

Kh an an sw er ed : F r i en d s thi s i s a gr eat pity He w as m uch g r i e ved r o se an d w en t a w ay

“
,
.
”
, .

A t th at ti m e th er e w as on t h e body of G ur u Nan ak o n ly a L an gati h e k e pt n o oth er pi ece ,

a

o f clothi n g ) H e w en t a n d sat do wn w ith F a qi r s M ar d an a t h e Dam al so w en t an d sat do w n

( . .
, ,

w ith h i m Guru Nan ak co n tin ued in sil en ce fo r o n e d ay Th e follo wi n g d ay h e r o se an d said

.
.

“
Th er e i s n o Hi n da an d th er e i s n o Musal m an Th e p eopl e w en t an d said to t h e K h an th at .
”
,

Nan ak w as sayi n g T h ere i s n o Hi n d i an d n o M usalm an Th e K h an said : Do n t thin k of

“ ” “ ’
.

it h e i s a F aqi r
, O n e K azi w as sitti n g n ear ; h e said :
.
”
K h an thi s i s w on d erf ul th at h e i s “
, ,

sayi n g : th er e i s n o H i n d fi an d n o M u sal m an Th e K h an said to a m an th at h e sho uld c al l h i m ”

.
, ,

sayi n g Nan ak t h e K h an i s c allin g th ee

:
“
G ur u Nan ak said ( to th at m an ) : W h at h av e I to
,
.
” “

do w ith th y K h an ? T h e p eopl e th en said : He h as r un m ad an d i s a l un ati c

”
G ur u Nan ak “
.
”

sa id to M ar d an a : Pl ay th e reb eck ! M ar d an a pl ay ed it it w as t h e Rag M ar a an d t h e B aba

“ ”
,

utter ed t h e S ah d M ah al a I [ th er e follo w f our v er ses] ,

Th en t h e Bab a w as sil en t Wh en h e
. .
4
.

said an ythi n g th en h e said thi s v er y w o r d th at th er e w as n o Hi n d a an d n o Musal man “ ”

, Th e , .

K azi said th en : 0 K h an i s it good th a t h e say s : “

Th er e i s n o H i n d a an d n o , ,
‘

Th en t h e K h an said : G o an d fetch h im ! Th en footm en ( of t h e K h an ) w en t an d said : S ir

“ ” “
,

t h e K h an i s c all in g y o u Th e K h an say s : F or G od s sak e giv e m e an i n t er vi ew ! I w i sh to ‘ '

.
,

see th ee Th en G ur u Nan ak r o se an d w en t sayin g : No w m y L or d h a s c all ed m e I sh all

.
’
,
“
, ,

go . H e w en t h a vi n g pl a ced a club on h is n e ck , H e c am e an d m et w ith t h e K h an Th e K h an

"
. .

said : Nan ak fo r G od s sake t ake off t h e cl ub fr om thy n eck ! gir d thy w a i st ! thou ar t a good
“ ’
, ,

F aqi r Th en Guru Nan ak took off t h e club fr om h i s n eck an d gi r ded h i s w ai st Th e K h an

.
.

said : Nan ak it i s a m i sf o r tun e to m e th at a ste w ar d lik e tho u b eco m es a F a qi r

“
, Th en h e , .
”

seate d Nan a k at h i s sid e an d said : K az i i f thou w i lt ask a n ythin g ask n o w oth er w i se thi s o ne “
, , ,

w ill n o t utt er ag ai n a w or d Th e K azi b eco m i n g f r i en dly sm il e d an d said : N an ak thou

”
.
“
, , ,

w h o ar t sayi n g : th er e i s n o H i n da an d n o Musal m an wh at dost thou m ean by it ?

‘
Nan ak
’ ”
,

utter e d a S l ak i n t h e Rag Maj h [ th er e f ollo w f o ur v er ses] .

6

Wh en N an ak h ad utter ed thi s S lak t h e Kazi b ecam e am az ed T h e K h an th en said : 0 Kazi , .

“
,

it h as pr ov ed a f ail ur e to question h i m
T h e ti m e o f th e aftern oon pr ayer h ad co m e A l l ar o se an d w en t to say th ei r p r ayer s an d .
7
,

th e B ab a al so w en t w ith th em T h e K azi stood i n fr o n t o f th e m al l an d be an to pr ay Then

g
.
.

t h e Bab a looki n g to w ar d s th e K azi l augh ed T h e K azi saw th at N an ak w as l aughi n g After th e .

.

pray er w as fi n i sh ed th e K azi said : K h an h ealth ! h ast thou seen that th e Hi n d a lookin g to

,
“
, , ,

1
In t h e G
th t h e ( h um a ) G ur ui s freq uen tly i de tifi ed w ith th e S upr em e L o r d w hich thi s sto y t ries
ran n n
, r

to expl i n d to acco u t fo T h w or ds o f t h o igin al are :

a n a
3 3 1 me
n r .

ug fi aa e e r
'
'

G a th L aho e li thog aphed editio p 732

.

I
2
r n , r r n, . .

A p i ce o f cl oth w a pt r o un d t h e w a oi st o
a
p assm g bet w een t h e l e g s a n d t uck ed b ehi n d ser vi g in stea d
e , r
,
,
n

o f t ous r e r s.

4
R ag Mi S a hd 7, Ma h 1
-
5
n 1, . .
31 3 3 1 S an sk .

g af f , a cl ub or la r g e stick .

S ee M aj h lk
6
, V ar V II l S a I .
7
S ee B , S i k i 1 7 h .
 JA N A M- S A K H I 0 F BA B A NA NA K . A .
xiii

w ar ds th e Musal m an s w as l aughin g ? tho u w h o art sayin g th at Nan ak i s a good m an

, T h e K h an , , .
”

said : Nan ak w h at do es t h e K azi say ( ag ai n st Th e B ab a an sw ered : 0 K h an w h at

“ “
, ,

h ave I to car e for t h e K azi ? Th e p rayer of t h e K azi ho wever h as n ot b een accepted ( by G od )

th eref ore h av e I l au gh ed Th e K a z i said : H e i s m akin g subterf uges l et h i m m an ifest m y fa ult
.
” “
, .

Th e Bab a rejoi ne d : Kh an w h en thi s on e w a s stan di n g p r ay in g h is m in d w as n ot fixed ( on

“
, ,
‘

G od ) H is m ar e h ad b een d eliv er ed of a sh e fo al an d h e h ad com e ( to pray er ) h avin g loo sen ed th e

.
-

f o al
. In t h e en clo sur e i s a w ell an d thi s on e said ( i n h i s h ear t ) : May it n ot be th at t h e f o al ‘
,

w ill fal l in to t h e w ell h i s m in d h ad w an d er ed th er e Th en th e K azi c am e an d fell dow n at h is ”

.

feet an d said : Wo n derf ul w on der ful on this on e i s th e favour o f G od !

“
, Th en t h e Kazi b elieved
,
”
.

Nan ak uttere d a S lak :

H e i s a M usal m an w h o clear s aw ay hi s o w n sel f w h o i s sin c er e p ati en t o f p ur e w or d s
, , , ,
.

Wh o do es n ot to uch w h at i s stan di n g w h o do es n o t eat w h at i s fal len do w n ,

That Musalm an w ill go t o p ar adise ( say s) Nan ak , .

W hen th e Bab a h ad uttered thi s S l ak th en t h e S ayyid s th e son s o f th e S h ékh s th e Kazi , , , ,

th e M ufti t h e Kh an t h e chi efs an d l eader s w ere am a zed

, , T h e K h an said : K azi N an ak h as .
“
,

ar rived at t h e tr uth to ask h i m m o r e h as pr oved a fail ur e ” Wh er ever th e Bab a look ed th er e al l

, .
,

w er e sal uti n g hi m Th en th e Baba utt ered a S ahd i n S ir i Rag Mah al a I [th ere f ollo w four
.
, ,
.
I

v er ses] Aft er t h e Bab a h ad re cited thi s S ahd th e K h an cam e an d fell do wn at h i s feet T h en

.
,
.

t h e p eopl e H i n d as an d Musal m an s b eg an to say to t h e K h an th at G od w as speakin g i n N an ak

, , , .

Th e Kh an said : O N an ak ( m y ) dom in ion p r op erty author ity an d r evenue al l i s thin e

, N an ak , , ,
.
”

an sw ere d : G od w ill r ew ar d th ee I c an n ot r em ain n ow h ere D om i n io n pr op er ty an d household

“
. .
,

goods are thi n e w e forsak e ( al l ) an d go

,
H avin g go n e h e sat dow n am on g t h e F aqi r s Then .
”
.

t h e F qi r s r o se joi n e d th eir h an d s an d stood b ef o r e h i m ; th ey b egan to p rai se h im an d to say

a ,

“
Nan ak h as b e co m e ( o ur ) tr ue d ai ly b r ead an d i s colo ure d i n t h e dy e o f t h e Tr ue on e N an a k .
”

said th en : M ar dan a pl ay t h e r eh ec k ! M ar dan a pl ayed th e r eb eck t h e Rag Til an g w as m ade

“ ”
.
, ,

T h e Bab a utter ed t h e S ah d M ah al a I [ th er e f ollo w four v er ses] ,

Th en t h e F aqi rs cam e ki sse d. .
2
,

h i s f oot an d shook h i s h an d Th e Bab a w as m uch pleased w ith th e F aqi rs an d sho w ed m uch ki n dn ess
.

to th em Th e Khan also cam e ; H in dii s an d Musal m an s ever ybody stood before h im sal uti n g h i m
.
, .

Then th ey took l eav e f rom t h e G ur u Wh en t h e Kh an cam e hom e h e saw th at t h e r oom s of h i s .

,

tr easur y w ere fil le d ( A t th i s) th e B ab a w as m uch pl eased

. .

Takin g M ar dan a w ith h im h e w an dered abo ut ; th ey did n ot en ter an y vill age th ey did n o t ,

stop i n an
y j un gle n or on an y r iv er No w an d th en w h en M ar d an a w as h un gr y th e B ab a said
.
, ,

“
M ar d an a thou ar t h un gr y ? Th en M ar d an a an swered Y es tho u k n ow est al l
,
”
Nan ak said :
“
, .
”

M ar dan a go straight on to t h e villag e th er e in fr on t i s t h e K h atr i Up al go to hi s house an d

, , ,

stan d th ere sil en tly ; th er e they w ill giv e th ee food 0 Mar d an a to th ee w h o art goin g w ith m e .
, , ,

som e H in d a so m e M u sal m an
,
w ho ev er w ill com e an d f oll ow m e w ill fall dow n at thy feet th ey
, , ,

w ill br in g an d p ut b efo r e th ee ex q ui site food ; so me w ill b r i n g R up ees an d P ai sas ( copp er coi n s) ;

som e w ill b r in g fi n e c alico s ; n o o n e w ill ask an ythin g w h en c e tho u h ast co m e an d w ho se ser van t .

tho u art Whoever w ill com e an d follo w m e h e w ill say : I w ill b r i n g an d l ay down al l m y
.
,
‘

p r op er ty Th ey w ill say : ‘We h av e b ecom e ex al ted th at thi s i n t er vi ew h as b een giv en ( to us)

.
’
, ,

th at t h e Bab a h as b een pl eased .

’

O n e d ay M ar dan a w as sen t to a to w n ; i n ( th us) sen din g hi m m uch w or ship w as p aid to h im .

W h en h e w en t th e w hol e town c am e an d fell dow n at h i s feet H e m ad e up a b un dl e of copp er .

coi n s an d clothes an d b r ou
,

ght it T h e Bab a lau gh ed M ar dan a br ought th e cloth es an d th e

. .

copp er coi n s to th e Bab a Then th e Bab a said : Mar dan a w h at h ast tho u b r ought ? Mar dan a
.
” “
,

an swered : S i r tr ue ki n g al ms i n thy n am e ; t h e w hole to wn r o se to thy ser vic e

“
, ,
0 Kin g ! I .

1
S ee S iri R ag , S a h d 27, M ah . I .
2
S ee Ra uT g ila g n , S ah d3 , Mah I . .
xiv JA N A M- S AK HI or BABA N ANA K . A .

sa id th a t I w uo ld b r i n g th e se thi n g s an d cloth es to M ar d an a t h e B ab a .
”
T he G ur u an sw ere d :
“
,

thou h ast don e quite w ell but th ese thi n gs are of n o use w h atever to m e ,
Mar dan a said : 0 .
” “

ki n g w h at sh al l I do ? Th e Bab a an sw ered : Th r o w th em aw ay !
,
”
Th en M ar d an a th r ew al l th e “ ”

thi n gs aw ay th e w h ol e b un dl e h e sc attered about th er e After th at M ar d an a said : 0 ki n g i f

,
.
,

on e i s w illi n g to giv e al m s i n thy n am e a n d p u t s it i n to t h e m o uth o f a di scipl e d o es h i s lov e i n ,

ch th ? A d thi tho u ght i s al so i n my h ear t th at tho u ar t n ot to uchi n g an ythi n g

a yn w ay r ea ee n s ,

n or p utti n g i n to thy m ou th w ith w h at do st tho u sati ate thy sel ,

f ? ”
T h e G ur u B ab a an sw er ed
Mar dan a play th e reb eck !
,
M ar dana pl ayed th e reb eck an d th e Ragu G auri Di paki w as m ad e
”
,

M ah al a I Th e Bab a utter ed th e S ahd [ th er e follo w four verses] Th en M ar dan a b ei n g m oved

.
.

( th er eby ) p aid w o rship ( to h i m ) .

T h en th ey dep ar ted th en ce Wan der in g about th ey came to t h e house o f S h é kh S aj an His

.
.

ho use w as on t h e r oad ; h e h ad b uilt th ere an idol house an d a m o sque If a H in d a came h e gave - .

,

h i m a pla ce ( to st ay i n ) an d if a M usal m an c a m e h e p aid att en tio n to h i m

,
Wh en t h e n ight c ame ,
.

h e used to say : G o to sl eep ! T akin g th em in h e th r ew th em in to a w ell an d killed th em

”
on , , .

A n d wh en it b ec a me m orn i n g h e took a staff an d r o sar y i n to h i s h an d s sp r ead o ut a c ar p et to p ray

, ,

on an d sat d o w n .

h b
W en t h e Ba a an d ar M d an a c a m e h e did m u ch s e r vic e to th e m an d sa id to h
,
i s p eopl e :
“
In
thi s on e s h em i s m uch w ealth but it i s con c eal ed ; on w ho se face th er e i s such a spl en dour h e
’
, ,

i s n ot empty It i s al l a story th at h e i s a F aqi r W hen n ight h ad set i n h e said : Rise

. .
” “

an d go to sl eep ! T h en t h e Bab a said : O S j an h avin g r ecited on e S ahd ( son g ) to t h e ser vice

”
a ,

of G od w e w ill go to sl eep
,
S h akh S aj an repli ed : . Well be it so S ir ! r ecite it t h e n ight i s
” “
, , ,

f ast p assin g Th en th e Baba said : M ar dan a pl ay t e reb eck ! M ard an a pl ayed t h e r ebeck ;
” ”
. h “
,

t h e B ag S ahi w as m ad e Nan ak utt er ed t h e S ah d M ah al a I [ th er e f o l lo w si x v er ses] ;

.
( Then ,
.

S h é kb S aj an said ) : I am a sac ri fi ce to th e i n ter vi ew ( w ith

“
H is m in d r eturn ed to h i m ;
w h en b e r efl ected h e f oun d th at al l h i s si n s w ere di scov er ed
, H e r o se an d f ell do w n at th e feet .

( o f Nan ak ) h e ki ssed th em an d said S i r p ar do n m y si n s ! T h e Bab a r epli ed : S h é kh S aj an

“ ”
,
: , ,

at th e th reshold o f G od t h e si n s ar e p ar do n e d by t w o w o r d s S h ékh S aj an h um bly said

”
S ir .
,
“
,

say tho se w or d s by w hich si n s ar e f o r given Th en Gur u Nan ak b ecam e co m p assion ate an d said ”
.

“
T ell th e tr uth th at m ur der s h ave b een p er p etrated by th ee !
, T h en S h é kh S aj an b eg an to t ell ”

t h e tr uth He said
. Y es m an y si n s h av e b een co m m itt ed by m e
,
“
, T h en said Gur u Nan ak .
”

Wh atever r em ai n s of th ei r pr oper ty th at b r i n g ! S h é kh S aj an ob ey ed t h e o r d er an d b r o ught it

“
, .

I t w as given aw ay i n th e n ame of G od ( as al m s) H e ( S h é kh S aj an ) b egan to mutter : O G uru .

“
,

G uru! an d reli ed on t h e n ame — S ay : v ah G ur u!

”

Then h e w en t on fr o m th n ce on th e r o ad an d c am e to P an i p at h In P ani p ath w as a P i r

e .
,

n am ed S h é kh S ar af ; h i s di scipl e w as S h é kh V ati h ar He h ad co m e to fill t h e w ater j ug of that . -

P i r w ith w ater T h e Baba an d M ar d an a w er e both seat ed fur th er o n

.
Wh en h e c am e h e sal uted .
,

th em an d said : Peace be to th ee O Dar vash ! “

Gur u Nan ak r epli ed : To th ee be p eac e 0
,
” “
,
”
h an d ser van t o f t h e F i r !
-
S h é kh V ati h ar b e c a m e aston i sh ed an d said : Till thi s d ay n o on e “

h as an sw ered m y sal utation B ut l et it be so I w i l l go an d i n f o r m m P i r of it H e c am e an d

y
.

, .

said : O P i r h ealth ! h avin g h ear d th e voic e o f a D arv é sh I h av e b eco m e asto n ish ed

“
, Th e P i r ”
.

r epli ed : Tell th at I m ay see w h at sor t of a m an h e i s

“
, , Th en S h é kh V ati h ar said : May th e .
” “

F i r liv e i n h ealt h ! I h ad gon e to fi l l th e u : h e w as sitti n g in fr o n t o f m e goi g I l t d

j g ( ) i n n sa u e ,
‘
h i m an d sai d : Peace be to th ee O Dar v é sh ! Th en h e r epli ed : ‘To th ee be p eac e 0 h an d s r v ant ’
, e ,
-

” ’
o f t h e Pi r l T h e P i r said : S o n wh o said to th ee to th ee be p eac e h i s sight h as b een seen
“ ‘ ’
, , ,

( by m e) S ho w m e wh ere th at m an w as seen ( by
.
, Th en S h é kh S araf h avin g t aken h is

I
S ee Rag S fi h i , S a h d 3 , Mah . I .
2
T he p pe ty o f
ro r t h e m ur d er e d p erso n s.
 JANA M-S A K H I O F BA BA NA NAK . A .
X V

di scipl e V ati h ar w ith hi m c ame to Gur u Nan ak an d said [th ere follow a n umb er of question s on
,

th e p ar t o f th e S h é kh to which Nan ak an swer s i n lo n g v erses]

, Th e S h ékh ki ssed h i s h an d s .

an d f e et an d w en t to h i s ho u se Th e Bab a an d M ar d an a con tin ued th eir w an der in g s an d they

.

c ame th us to D ill i .

A t th at ti m e S ultan I brahi m B ag w as K i n g o f Dilli H avi n g com e th er e h e rem ain e d ther e .

1

d ur in g t h e n ight A m on g th e eleph ant d river s m uch ser vice was r en dered to hi m ( Nan ak) A t
.
-
.

th at t i m e th ere h ad fall en do wn dead an el eph an t T h e p e ople w er e b eatin g th ei r br easts ( i n token

‘

of gr i ef ) an d w eepi n g T h e Bab aske d :

a . Wh y ar e y ou w eepin g ? ”
Th ey an sw er ed : We are “ “

w ee pi n g f o r an el e ph an t T h e B ab a said : W ho se w. a
”
s th e el eph an t ? ”
T h e el eph an t d riv er “ -

r epli ed : I t w as t h e el eph an t of th e Ki n g it b elon ged to th e on e G od ” T h e B aba said th en

“
, .
2

“
Why do y o u th en w eep ? Th ey an swer ed : S ir it w as our livelihood ” T h e Baba r epli ed
” “
, .

“
T ake up an oth er occ up ation ! ” Th ey said : O ur w or k h ad b een p r o sper o us o ur fam ily was “
,

h appy an d h ad i ts susten an ce (fr om Th e B ab a sho we d th en co m p assio n an d said : Thi s “

el eph an t li ves do n t be w eepin g ! Th ey said : S ir h ow sh al l th e dead on e live ? T h e Bab a

’ ” “ ”
, ,

said i G o an d m ove yo ur h an ds upo n i ts fac e say : v ah G urui T h ey obeyed h i s or der an d

“ ‘ ’ ”
,

m ov ed th eir h an ds ( upo n i t s fac e) Th en t h e eleph an t r ose an d stood Thi s m atter w as r epo rted
. .

to th e K i n g S ul tan I br ahi m Bag sen t for th e eleph an t H avi n g m ounted h e c am e to see it

. .
,

h av in g c om e h e sat dow n an d said : O Dar vash h ast thou v i v i fi ed thi s eleph an t “

Th e B ab a ,

r epli e d : T h e destr oyer an d v i v ifi er is G od an d t h e prayer of t h e F aqi r s i s fo r th e m er cy of

“
,

G od .
”
T h e K i n g said ag ai n : Kill it an d show it ! ” Th en th e Baba uttered this S lak
“

H e kill s an d v i v ifi el .

0 Nan ak , b esides th e O n e there i s n o n e oth er !

Then th e eleph an t died Th e Kin g said agai n : Mak e it alive ! . T h e Bab a an sw er ed : Y o ur “ ” “

m aj esty t h e i r o n b ei n g h eat ed i n t h e fi re b ecom es r ed but it do es n ot r em ai n a m om en t o n th e

, ,

h an d an d ( r ed hot ) coal s rem ain but for a short tim e S o th e F aqi r s b ecome r ed i n G od an d tak e
,
- .

upon th em se lves a co mpl et e d evotion to G od but th ei r d evotio n gives w ay Th e Ki n g ,

un d er stood thi s an d w as m uch pl eased H e said th en : A gr ee to som ethi n g ! ” T h e Bab a an swere d .

“

w ith t h e S 161:

Na k i h u g y f t
na s n r a er G od oth er thi n gs h e does n ot c ar e
,
fo r .

O ur sear ch i s for th e si ght ( o f G od ) for o th er t hi n gs w e do n ot

, sear ch at all .

Th e K in g un d er stood
thi s r o se an d w en t Th e B ab a con ti n ued w an der i n g abo ut
,
. .

Fir st ( Nan ak ) p assed his r eti red life in t h e east Th er e i n his r eti remen t Mardan a t h e r ebeck .
,

pl ayer w as w ith h i m A t th at time h e pr actised w i n d eati n g T h e atti re o f th e Baba w as on e

,
.
-
.

m an go colo ured r ai m e n t an d on e w hite r ai m en t ; on h i s feet h e h ad on e p air o f sho es an d on e p ai r

-
,

of slipp er s O ver h is n eck a shir t on h i s h ead a K al an d ar s h at a n eckl ac e of bo n es on h i s 3 ’

.
, , ,

f or eh ea d a Tilak ( m ar k ) of saffr o n .

Th en h e m et on t h e r o ad S h ekh Baj i d S ayyid wh o w as goin g alon g b ei n g m oun ted on a 4

,

palki ( a kin d of sedan chai r ) ; w ith hi s w ooden fr ame ( on w hich h e w as r idin g) w ere si x b ear ers
- -
.

He ali ghte d un der a tr ee an d th ey ( t h e bear er s) com men ced to p ull and to fan h im Then M ar dana .

T h e MS tes t h e n ame
. wr i an i n stea d o f Ibrahi m B ag Ib rahi m L adi , . wa s K i n g o f Dilli fr o m
1 51 7- 1 526 a n d fell i n b attl e ag ai n st B ab ar
,
.

T h e o ri gi n al i s : m 112 1 f? ra th er a c urio us ex ressio n

p .

T he W } i s a ki n d of woollen shir t w itho ut sleeves w or n by F aqi r s

3
.
,

Ver y lik ely ~ 3 :

1
xvi J A NAM- S A K HI O F B ABA NA NA K . A .

”
id :
sa
“
Is G odplie d : O Mon e ? G od
”
Th e Bab a
Th id M d 0 re
“
ard an a, is o n e. en sa ar ana : “

Kin g w ho se cr eatio n ar e tho se an d w ho se cr eatio n is h e w h o h as com e m o un t e d on a p alki ? Tho se

, ,

are r unn i n g on th ei r feet an d w ith n ak e d bodies h av e b r ought h im on th ei r shou lders an d thi s on e , ,

wh o i s sea t e d th ey f an
”
Nan ak an sw er e d wi th t h e $16k
,
.

c tic s w h o i n a f or mer bir th h av e bor n e th e sti n g of cold

Th e as e , ,

W ere th en w orn out ; n ow 0 Nan ak th ey a dorn th eir body , ,

.

Th e Bab a w en t on sayi n g : 0 Mar dan a f r o m austerity co m es dom i n ion an d f r om do m i n ion

“
,

h ell Wh oev er i s bor n from t h e womb o f a m other h e co m es n ak ed ( in t o t h e w or ld ) ( Th er e i s)

.
,
.

pleasur e an d p ai n ( in thi s w orld ) an d l ast th e acco un t w h en h e d epar ts ”

Then M ardan a fell down ,
.

at h i s fe et .

Dep ar tin g th en ce th ey c am e to B en ar es H a vi n g ar riv ed th er e th ey sat do w n i n a squar e l A t . .

th at ti m e th er e w as at Ben ar es a Pan di t cal led Oatur das w h o h ad com e to make h i s abl uti on s ,
-
,
.

H e sal uted h i m ( al e N an ak ) an d h avi n g seen h i s ( F aqi r s) g arb h e sat dow n an d said : O d evot ee
’ “
. ,

thou h ast n o sali gr am ! tho u h ast n o n ecklac e o f Tulsi ( hol y b asil ) ! thou h ast n o r o sar y ! thou
2

h ast n o mark ( on th e f or eh ead ) of w hite cl ay ! an d thou c all est thyself a d evotee ! Wh at devoti on
h ast thou t aken up ? Th e Bab a said : Mar d an a play t h e r eb eck ! Mar d an a pl ayed t h e r eb eck
” “
,

an d t h e B ag Basan t w as m ad e Th e Bab a uttered t h e S ahd M ah al a I [t h er e f oll o w s on e v erse]

.
, . .
3

Th e Pan dit rejoi n ed : Thi s tr uly i s collecti n g b ar ren soi l 0 d evotee but w h at i s th at thi n g by , , ,

m ean s of w hich t h e w or ld i s g ain ed an d th e L or d i s obt ai n ed T h e Bab a uttere d th en

th e secon d P auri [ th er e f oll o w s on e ver se] T h e P an dit ask e d a gai n : T h e ear th in deed i s d u g .
“

up but wi thout w ate i n g it h o w sh al l it b ecom e gr een ? an d h ow sh all t h e gar den er co n sid er it

,
r

h is o w n ? Th en t h e Bab a utter ed th e thir d Paur i Th en th e Pan di t Oat ur das said : S i r thou

”
.
-
“
,

ar t a p erfe ct d evotee of t h e L or d my un der stan di n g b ei n g over co m e by t h e sen ses i s d u , l l l ik e a , ,

w hite h er o n Then t h e Baba utter ed t h e four th Pauri T h e Pan dit w en t on sayi n g : S ir tho u
”
. .
,

art a w o r shipp er of t h e L or d but m ake al so thi s city holy ! S ay so m eth in g i n i t s p rai se ! ” Th en

,

G uru Nan ak a sk ed : Wh at is i ts exc el l en cy ? Th e P a n dit an sw er ed :

“
S ir i t s excellen cy i s
”
,

sci en ce by r eadin g w hich pr osperi ty is accrui n g an d wh er e thou si ttest do w n th er e t h e w or ld w i l l

, , ,

r esp e ct th ee ; by takin g thi s advice thou wi l t b ecome gr eat Th en t h e Bab a uttered a S ah d in ”

.

t h e Rag Basan t M ah al a I [ th er e f ollo w fo u ,

r ver ses an d on e . T h e P an dit Oatur das said -

agai n We w h o are in str uctin g th e w or ld an d w e wh o ar e r ea di n g ( o urselves) i s t h e n ame

:
“
, , , ,

o f th e L or d al so n ec essar y to us ? Th en G ur u Nan ak asked : S ir w h at are y ou r eadi n g an d

” “
,

w h a t are y ou teach i n g t h e w o r ld your di scipl es ? Th e P an di t an sw er ed : S ir th e w or ds of th e

”
, ,

S upr em e Brahm I m ak e t h e w or ld r ead wi th t h e first w oode n sl at e Th en th e Bab a said i n th e .

” 5

B ag Ram kali Dak ar M ah al a I [ there f ol lo w s o n e v erse an d on e Rah au]

, , After th at t h e fi fty
. .

f o ur P auri s ( fol lowi n g w ere utt er e d ) an d th e Dakar m ade ( th us) Th en th e Pan dit c ame an d fell .

do w n a t hi s feet an d b ecam e a relier on t h e n am e ; h e b eg an to m utter : O Guru G ur u! “ “

,

Th e Bab a d ep ar ted th en ce an d c am e to Nan ak m et a Th at Ban y a tree h ad becom e dry sin ce - }

-

3 6 511 is a s qu cou t (i
ar e r n a tem ple , m on a stery , et c .
) or an open s qu ar e o f th e to w n , w h er e m ar kets
a re h el d .

Wm
'
2
, an a m m n o ite st o - n e, fo un di n th e i
r v er Wig ai} an d w o sh ip p ed
r a s sa re c d to Vi sh nu . It is
usually wr itte n
WW .

3
t S hd 9 M h I
S ee Rag B asa n , aS ee Rag B asan t S a hd l l M h I
, a . .
, , a . .

T h e se se i s : w ith t h e fi r st w ooden sl t I w r ite fo r th e m I m ak e th e m r ea d et c

5
n a e, , , .

C o mp ar e w it h th is rel atio t h e story i t h e S ikh a d é r aj d i vi th i a p 28 9 w h er e it i s n ear ly lit er ally

6 '
n n
, .
,

co n t a i n ed on ly tho se w o r ds an d ph ase bei g left out w hich wer e un i n tellig i bl e to t h e later revi ser
, r s n , .

A ccor di g to wh at f ollo ws t his appea r s to h a v e been t h e a m e of a B an y t rc e

7
n , n a- .
X t i li J A NI M S A K HI O F BA BA NA N A K
- . A .

Th e Bab a dep ar ted th en c e an d w en t on Th en said M ar dan a : S i r w h er e sh all th e r ain y . ,

seaso n h e sp e n t ? T h e B aba an sw er ed : Wel l i f so m e v il l age be m et w ith th er e a stay w ill be

” “
, ,

m ade . H avi n g go n e above o n e K as f ro m th e ci ty th ey sat dow n i n a vi l l a ge

” I n th at vi l l ag e o n e .

K h atri w as att ach ed ( to N an ak) He c am e on e d ay to h av e an i n t er vie w an d a fter h avi n g h ad

. ,

th e i n ter vi e w h e c am e co n ti n ually to do ser vic e O n e d ay h e m ade t h e v o w th at w itho ut h avi n g . ,

h ad an i n t er vi ew h e w o uld n o t t ak e a n y dr aught o f w at er O n e of h i s n eighbour in g shopkeep er s .

”
ask ed : B r oth er w h y art thou co n tin ually goi n g to w h at r en dez vo us ar t tho u goi n g ?
“
,
Th at ,

di scipl e r epli ed Br oth er so m e pious m an h as co m e I go to m eet h im Th at o n e said : S ir ”

“
: . ,
, ,

l et m e al so h av e an in t er vi ew w ith h i m ! ” O ne d ay th at on e al so c am e w ith h i m ; ( but ) co mi n g an d

co m in g h e attach ed hi mself to a sl av e gi r l Th en c e th ey w er e al w ay s goi n g togeth er fr om hom e -
. ,

b ut th at on e w en t to th e w ho r e s house an d t h e oth er w h o h ad b een co mi n g b ef or e w en t to do

’
, ,
,

ser vi c e to t h e G u r u th e L or d O n e day th at on e said :

,
O b r oth er I go to do a b ad w o r k an d
.
,

th ou a t goin g to r en der ser vic e to th e holy m an To day l et us m ake an agr eem en t b et ween
r .
-

o ur selves th at w e w ill see w h at w ill accr ue to m e an d w h at w i l l h appen to th ee I f thou w ilt

, ,
.

com e fi r st sit do w n her e an d i f I sh ould co m e fi r st I w il l si t do w n h er e To d ay w e w i l l go to

, , ,
.
-

geth er aw ay Wh en th at one w en t h e f o un d t h e sl av e gir l n o t at ho m e Bei n g v ex ed h e r o se

.
,
- .

an d c a m e to t h e ( appoi n te d ) pl a c e a n d sat do w n th er e I n h i s str ay tho ughts h e b eg an to di g up .

t h e g r o un d ; w h en h e looked on it w as a gold coi n Th en h avi n g dr aw n o ut h i s k n if e h e b ega n 1

.
,

to dig ( m or e) Wh en h e looked th ey w er e ch ar co al s a w hole j ar full T h e oth er after h e h ad

.
, ,
.
,

f ll en do w n at t h e f oot o f t h e G ur u w en t a w ay
a O ut sid e t h e door a thor n pi er c e d h i s foot
,
. .

H avi n g bo un d up h i s foot w ith a cloth h e c am e ( to th e appoi n te d pl a c e) w ith o n e sho e dr a w n o ff ,

an d on e b ei n g p u t on Th at on e asked : 0 b r oth er w h y h ast thou d a w n o ff on e o f t h y shoes ?

.
“
,
r

H e r eplie d : O b r oth er a thor n h as pi er c ed m y f oot

“
, Th at on e said : O br oth er to day I .
” “
,
-

h ve f oun d a gold m uh ar an d thee a tho r n h as pier ced ; w e m ust ask about thi s m atter F o r
a .

thou goest to do ser vic e to t h e G ur u an d I go to com m it si n ” Th en both c am e an d told th e w hol e .

t ruth T h e G ur u said : B e sil en t ! Th ey r epli ed

.
“
S i r m ay an expl an atio n be giv en ( to
”
:
“

Then t h e G ur u said : T h e j ar o f ch ar co al s w er e gold m uh ar s ; it i s w h at h e h as so wn i n h i s fo r m er

,

bir th H e h ad giv en o n e m uh ar to a holy m an th ese h i s al m s h ad b ecom e m uh ar s B ut i n

.
,
.

pr opor tion as h e r an after w ick ed n ess th e m uh ar s b ec am e ch ar co als A n d i n thy desti n y an i m ,

.

p ali n g stake w as w r itten I n p r opor tion a s tho u w ast com i n g to do ser vice ( to m e) t h e i m pali n g
- .

st k e d ecr eased
a o f t h e i m p ali n g st ak e b ec am e a th o r n
, as t h e r esu l t of ser vic e r en d er e d ( to m e)
-
, .

Th en th ey r ose a n d fell do w n at h is feet an d b ec am e devotees o f th e n am e ; th ey b eg an to m utter

Gur u Guru! Then th e Baba r ecited a S abd in Bag Mara Mah ala I [ther e follow four
,
”
, , .

v er ses] .
2

Th en they dep ar ted th en ce O n t h e r o ad th ey fell in w ith Th ags .

H avi n g seen t h e .
a

( tr av el l er s) th ey said : I n w ho se fac e the e i s such a l ustr e h e i s n o t e mpty in h is p ur se th er e

“
r , ,

i s m uch m o n ey but it i s con c eal ed , Th ey surr o un ded th e B ab a an d stood b ef or e h im but w ith

.

seei n g h i s sight th e y b ec am e w eak

( = di scour aged ) w ithi n T h e G uru ask ed th em : Wh o ar e .
“

y o u? Th ”
ey an sw er ed : W e ar e T h ags w e h av e co m e
“
f o r thy j e w el s
”
Th en th e B ab a said , .

Wel l ! Havi n g do n e o n e w or k y o u m ay kil l ( m e) Wh er e th at sm oke i s co m i n g i n to si ght .

,

thith er co m e a little f ur th er o n ! Th er e y o u m ay kill an d br an d m e ! T h e T h ags said : Wh ere ” “

i s t h e fi r e w h ere ? w e w ill kill an d r em ov e h i m ! ” Th en sa id so m e T h ag s :

, W e h av e kill ed “

m an y m en but l ughi n g n on e h as said : ki l l m e ! w h er e i s h e goi n g i n hop e ?

,
a Th en t wo Th ags
‘ ’ ”

1
m sgol d coi o r m uh ar
f . a
6 f
3 ! w o r th a bo u
n t o ne £1 l l 8d ” a. .

S hd 3 Ma h I
2 -

R ag bl i p 1, a , . .

3
r o bb e
a w h o i vei l es h is vic ti m a n d kill s h im ; liter lly a ch eat
r, n
g a : .
 JA NA M - S A K H I O F BABA N A NA K . A .
xix

r an to war ds t h e fi r e Wh en th ey c am e th ere a fun er al pil e w as b urn i n g an d t h e tr oop s of Rama

.
,
1

an d th e tr oop s o f Y am a w er e st an di n g an d q u arr ell i n g T h e Th ags ask ed : Wh o are y o u an d w h y “

.

ar e y o u q u ar r elli n g ? Tho se an swered : We are t h e t r 0 0 ps o f Yam a h avi n g r ec eived t h e o r der

” “
,

o f t h e L o r d w e ar e goin g to t ak e thi s c reat u

( h er e) to th e pot h ell B ut after us th ese tr 0 0 p s 2
re -
.

of Ram a h av e co m e an d h av e sn atch ed h i m aw ay f r o m u s A sk th em w h y th ey h av e torn h i m .

,

aw ay f r o m u s T h e Th ags asked th e n :
.
”
Wh y h ave y o u sn atch ed h i m a w ay f ro m th ese ? Th e “ ”

tr0 0 p s o f Ram a an sw ered : Th e G ur u t h e L or d w ho m y o u h ave com e to kill by h i s favo ur abl e

“
, , ,

look th e sm oki n g fi r e o f thi s o n e s fun er al pile h as b een appli ed ( h avin g b een ) a sacr ifi ce to h i m
’
,

h e h as ( n o w ) reach e d p ar adi se Th e Th ags h ear i n g thi s r an ba ck an d said :

.
”
B y w ho se favour abl e “

look on e h as b ecom e en tirely em an cip ated w h en t h e fi re w as appli ed ( to h i s pyr e) h im w e h ave , ,

com e to kill Th en th ey cam e an d fell do w n at h i s feet T h e oth er s asked an d w ere told t h e

.
”
.

m att er ; th en th ey al so c am e an d fell do w n at h i s feet Joi n i n g th eir h an ds ( i n supplic ation ) th ey .

stood b ef o r e h i m a n d b e gan to b esee ch ( h i m ) an d said : S i r m ake us att ach e d to t h e n am e ! “

,

D estr oy thou o ur sin s w e h ave p erp etr at ed v er y horr ibl e sin s

. Th en Guru Nan ak b ecam e m oved ”

w ith co m p assio n an d said : Your sin s w ill th en be extin gui sh ed w h en y ou ab an don thi s o c cu
“
,

p atiou an d t ak e to agr icultur e ; an d w h atev er ( stol en ) thi n g r ests w ith y ou th at giv e aw ay i n th e ,

n am e o f th e L o r d
( as al m s) ! S eek th e favour o f asc etic s an d d evotees ! Th ey ob eyed h i s or de ; ”
r

w h atever thi n g th ey h ad th ey b r o ught an d p ut do w n b ef or e h i m

,
T h ey b egan to m utter : G ur u .
“
,

G ur u! Thei r lif e w as adj usted

”
Th en th e B aba r ecited a S ah d i n th e S ri Rag Mah al a I
.
3
, , .

[th er e follo w four ver ses] : Th e Gur u w as m uch pl eased an d d ep ar te d th en c e S ay v ah G ur u!

1 '

. :

Then th ey cam e to t h e co un try o f K aur fr O n e day M ar dan a b ec am e hun g ry ; h e r o se an d .

5

w en t He c am e to t h e door o f a w om an an d stood th er e
. S h e c all ed h i m an d a sk ed h i m i f h e .

w i sh ed to eat Th en sh e boun d h i m w ith a th r ead m ade h im a r am an d seated h im H avi n g

.
, .

boun d h i m sh e w en t fo r w ater Th e B aba c am e th en an d h avi n g seen ( h i m ) h e ( M ar d an a) b egan

.

to bl eat ( like a sh eep ) W h en sh e c am e b ack w ith h er w ater j ar G ur u N an ak aske d h er an d

.
-
,

said : My m an h as co m e h ere S h e an sw er ed : N o on e h as co me h er e look

“ ” “
.
,

Then th e B aba utter ed ( thi s) S l é k

Th e fem al etr affi cker s in b arr en soil ask m usk fr om th e b rambl e .

W ithout ( good ) w o rk s 0 N an ak h ow w ill th ey m eet w ith th eir L or d ?

, ,

On thi s th e j ar on h ead
i d fi x ed it did n ot go o ff as a pun i shm en t for h er fal se
h er r em a n e , ,

hood ; sh e w en t about w ith i t Th en N fi r S h ahi h ear d th at such a ( gr eat ) con j urer h ad com e
.
,

th at th e j ar did n o t go o ff S h e gave th e or der th at n o fem ale con j ur er i n th e to w n sho uld rem ai n

.

b ehin d Then w h er ever th ere w as a conj urer th ey all c ame w ith th eir skil l O n e c am e m oun ted
.
, , .

on a tr ee an oth er c am e m ou
, n ted on a d eer ski n an oth er o n th e m oo n an oth er o n a w all an oth er -
, , ,

br ought w ith h er a tiger an oth er cam e b eati n g a dr um H avi n g come th ey co m m en ced to pr acti se
,
.

th eir j uggler y bi n din g th reads Then th e Bab a saw Mar d an a boun d ; Mar dan a b egan to m e w
,
. .

T h e B ab a l augh ed an d sai d : M ar d an a say : v ah G ur u! bow thy h ead an d b r in g t h e r eb eck !

“ ‘ ’ ”
,

Th en M ar dan a bow ed h i s h ead an d t h e thread b r oke an d fell off h i s n e ck H e br ought t h e r eb eck . .

Then th e G uru said : Pl ay th e r ebeck O Mar dan a ! Mar dan a pl ayed it an d th e S ahd i n th e
“
,
”

Rag u V adh an s M ah ala I w as sun g [th er e f ollo w f our v erses] Th en n o an swer wh atev er w as 6
. .
,

Ufa t r oops o f i n ferior deities

,
.

2
m n m e o f a h ell i w h ic h p eople a r e boiled a s i a pot
, a , n n .

x?! wa tfan- n th ir li f w a s adj usted i 8 th ey g ai ed t h e obj e ct o f th ei l i fe w e re em an cip ted

‘

fi , e e , . . n r , or : a .

4
S ir i Rag , S ab d 4 , Ma h . I .

5
C f sakh i 25 ( L aho r e
. T h ere t h e n am e o f th e coun try i s w r itte n Ra var a or m , K ar fi .

V adh an s, S ah d 2, Mah I . .
xx JA NA M- S A K HI O F BA BA NA NA K . A .

ma de I n tell igen c e r each ed Ni r S h ahi th at n o m an tr a n or ch ar m w as av aili n g N fi r S h ahi w as

.
.

t h e h ead o f all co n j ur er s ; sh e c am e w ith h er b est di scipl es m o un t ed on an a pp aratus o f p ap er an d ,

b eg an to apply h er m an t ras an d ch ar m s Th en N an ak r ecited th e S ah d in th e B ag S fi h i M ah al a I . , ,

.

th er e f oll o w four v erses] l T h e Bab a h avi n g said : V ah v ah ! r o se N i n S h ahi al so b e c am e “ ” 2

[ .
,
.

ti red of pr acti sin g h er m an tra s an d sp ell s th ey took n o effect wh tev er S h e said : I h av e ,

a .
“

do n e w r o n g an d r em in ed sil en t fr o m sh am e Drum s al so w ere st an di n g n ear th ey b egan to

,
”
a . ,

d an ce an d to si n g Then t h e Bab a said Mar d an a pl ay t h e r eb eck ! M ar d an a pl ayed th e r eb eck

. :
“
,
”
,

t h e B ag S ri Rag w as m ade M ah al a I t h e B ab a uttered t h e S ah d [ th er e follo w f o ur v er ses a n d a

A f ter t h e G ur u h ad said thi s 8 16k N i r S h ahi sa id ( W ithi n h er sel f )
.
, ,

S l dk] .
8
I will d elude h i m ,
:
“

w ith t h e M ay a S h e b r o ught thi n g s of m an y kin d s p ear l s j e w els gold silv er coral : , , , , ,

c am phor clo th es ; w h a tev er good thi n gs th ere w er e sh e b r o ught an d p ut th em do wn b e fo re h im

, ,
.

S h e b e gan to b esee ch h i m th a t h e sho uld d esi re som ethi n g T h e G ur u r epli e d : M ar d an a pl ay “

. ,
,

t h e r eb e ck ! M a d a a did so an d t h e B ag Til an g w as m ad e M ah al a I [th ere f ollo w f o ur verses]

”
r n ,
. .
4

A f ter thi s sh e f ell do w n at t h e feet of t h e G ur u H avi n g p ut a v eil ov er h er ch eek s sh e stood .

b efor e h i m an d co mm en c ed to say : H o w sh all o ur salv ation be b r o ught abo ut a n d h o w w ill th e “

Th e Guru an sw ere d :
,

w at er j ar go o ff fr o m t h e h ea d o f th i s o n e ? H avi n g said : v ah G uru! ” “ ‘ ’

-

o u w il l m ak e t h e w ater j ar go o ff f r o m h er h ead an d yo u r salv atio n al so w ill be e ffecte d ;

y
-

m utte r : Gur u Gur ul Th en sh e cam e an d fell dow n at h is feet ; sh e b ecam e a votar y of

‘
,
’ ”

th e n am e . S ay : v ah Guru !
Th en t h e Bab a dep a ted th en ce G oin g abo ut h e c am e to a deser t an d sat do w n Th en by
r . .

t h e o r der o f t h e L or d t h e K ali y uga c am e to f ight en h i m h avi n g assum ed a vi sibl e f or m A -

r ,
5
.

sto r m ar o se an d t h e t ees b e g an to fl y abo u t Mar d an a got v ery m uch afr aid an d sai d : 0 K i n g “
r .
,

thou h ast b ought m e i n to th e deser t an d kill ed m e ; ev en grave an d sh o d I

r r u m ust o go
f r e
”
G uru .

N an ak s id : Mar d an a do n t b e com e tr o ubl ed !

a
“
Mar dan a an sw er ed : U p to thi s d ay I h av e
,
’ ” “

n o w lived but such a c al am ity I h av e n o t seen for w h at h as h app e n ed h er e to us ! Th en a ”

, ,

f o m o f fi r e w as sho w n ; a sm ok e ar o se f o m t h e f o ur sid e s an d i n th e f o ur q uar t er s a fi r e w as

"
r r

m ad e .Th en Ma d an a cove in g hi s face fell dow n an d said : S ir I am w aiti n g

r r Th en a for m “
,
.
”

o f w at er w as m ad e ( by t h e K ali y ug
) ; h e c am e h avi n g g ath er ed clo uds W ate r b egan to r ai n ~
a .
,

but it fel l at so m e di st an ce f om t h e G ur u Th en t h e Gur u said : M ar d an a di sclo se thy fa ce

r .
“
, ,

ri se an d si t do w n ! pl ay t h e r eb eck ! Mar d an a r o se sat do w n an d pl aye d t h e r eb eck ” “

Th e , .

Rag Mar a w as m ad e T h e B ab a utt er e d th e S ahd M ah al a I [th er e follo w fo ur

. Th en ,
.

assu m i n g t h e fo r m o f a Daity a h e ( t h e K ali y ug a) c am e n ear Th e top o f h i s h ead h e h ad r ai se d up -

.

to h eaven I n p r oportion as h e app r oach e d h e dec r eased i n si ze Joi n i n g h i s h an d s h e stood an d

.
, .

said : S ir t ak e som ethi n g fr o m m e ! w alk i n m y w o r d ! Th e G ur u B ab a ask ed hi m : Wh at

“ ” “
,

h ast thou? K ali yuga an sw er ed : I h av e ev er ythin g I f thou or der m e I w ill b uild th ee a

”
- “
.
,

p al ac e of p ear l s an d stud it w ith gem s an d r ubi es I w ill b esm ear it w ith san d al pow d er an d alo e ,
-

W ood . Th en t h e G uru r ecit ed a S ah d ( as w r itten ) in t h e B ag S i ri Rag M ah ala I [th er e f ollo w

”
, .

th r ee ver ses] T h e K ali y ug a said :.

8
T ake som ethi n g fr om m e ! thou m ayest beco m e a S ultan
- “

Th en t h e G ur u r ecited t h e f o ur th P aur i [ th ere f ollo ws t h e

,

tho u m ayest ex er cise sovereign ty .

”

f our th v erse] Then th e K ali yuga w alked r oun d ( N an ak ) in ador atio n c am e an d fell do wn at
.
-

1
h
S a i , K uéaj i 1 (p .
2
V ah , b ravo ! b r vo !
v ah a

i e r t fo u d am o g t h e S abd s o f Nan ak T ilan g S hd 4 Mah I

3
T h ese l n s a e no n n .
, a , . .

C f S i kh i 26 ( L ho e
5
by t h e K ali yug a
8
. a r i. e. -
.

T h e q uota tion i s w r on g ; i n t h e G r an th th ese ver ses to G ur uA rj un ; see Mar u S ahd l

7
a r e as r c ib ed , ,

Mah . V (p . .

S i ri R ag S h d l M h I
8
, a , a . .
 JA NA M-S A K HI O F BABA NANAK . A .
xxi

hi s feet an d sa id : S ir , h o w m ay m y salvation b e eff ec te d ?” G u ru an ak N an sw er e d : “ If am on g

a cr ore som e on e w i l l b e com e m y di scipl e, h i s sac r ific e ( = d evotion to m e) w ill b e com e thy salv ation .

Th e Kali y uga th en - fell do w n at h i s feet

dism i ssed by th e Baba S ay : v ah Guru! an d w as .

T h e G uru an d M ar dan a
c c n t i rfi red th ei r w an d er i n g s ; they came to a city o f an ts Wh en .
1

th ey looked about tr ees an d sh r ub s al l appeared bl ack th e w hole g roun d also Wh en M ar dan a

, , , .

saw thi s h e was m uch fr ighten ed an d said : S i r l et us d ep art h en c e ! such a g r eat bl ack thi n g “
, ,

I h ave n ever seen go aw ay fr o m this bl ack thi n g ! Th e G uru Baba r eplied : M ar d ana : ( here)
,
” “

i s th ei r r ealm though som e on e ( ti e an t ) m ay go to a h un dr ed j un gl es

, I f som e yo un g on e of an
. .

an i m al i s bo rn th ey eat it an d i f egg s b e l aid by som e sn ak e th ey eat th em al so but n on e w ill

, , , ,

co e n ear th ee
m ”
Then sai d M ar dan a : S ir h as ever any on e com e h er e ? Th e G ur u an sw ere d
.
,
”

“
Mar dan a on e day on e Raj a h ad com e up her e Havin g f orm ed a host of fif ty t w o com pl ete
,
.
«

arm ies h e h ad m ar ch ed ou t a gai n st so me Raj a an d com e to thi s co un tr y O n e an t wen t an d m et .

h i m an d said : O Raj a rem ai n h er e an d do n o t m ar c h on ! A n d if thou ar t m ar chin g th en m ar ch

, ,

acco r din g to m y w i ll Th e Raj a ask ed : Wh at i s thy w ill ? Th e an t r eplied : O Raj a

.
’ ‘ ’ ‘
,

m y w ill is thi s th at h avin g eaten m y b read tho u should st go

, Th e Raj a sa i d : I am th e Raj a .
’

of fi ft y t w o co m pl ete ar m i es h o w sho u
- ld I eat thy br ead ? T h e an t r epli ed : If n o t thou w ilt
,
’ ‘
,

go aft er a b attle Th e Raj a said : Well l et it h e so ! 0 Mardan a th e Raj a takin g h is fif t y

.
’ ‘
,
’
,

t w o co mpl et e ar m i es b eg an to fight w ith th e an t s Th e chief of t h e an t s g av e th e o r der to th e .

an ts : G o an d fe tch poison ! Havin g fill ed th eir m outh w ith poison fr o m th e Piyal tr ee they br ought
‘ ’
-

it ; ever y on e di ed to w ho m th ey appli ed it 0 Mar dan a t h e whol e host of fi fty t w o com ple te

, .
,
-

y ) th e or d er o f t h e L or d ; th e Raj a alo n e r em ain ed aliv e

ar mi es died wi th =b Then th at an t w en t
( .

an d said : 0 Raj a h ear m y w o r d n ow t h en w il t a ccept m y b re ad T h e Raj a j oi n in g h i s h an d s

‘ ’
.
, ,

stoo d
( as a suppli an t ) an d said : Well m ay it be so ! Th en th at an t g ave th e o rd er to t h e
‘ ’
,

( oth er ) a n ts :
‘
G o an d br i n g n ectar ! I n th e n eth er r egion th er e ar e sev en pool s of n ectar an d
’

seven pool s of poi so n T h e an ts w en t fill e d th eir m outh w ith n ect ar an d b r ought it

.
, To w ho m .

th ey appli ed it h e r ose an d stood ; so th e ho st o f fi fty t wo com plete ar m i es r o se an d stood w ith

,
-

t h e or der o f th e L o r d Th en th e Raj a h avi n g r i sen w en t to eat b r ead w ith h i s fi fty t w o com pl et e

.
-

ar m ies . Wh en t h e b read w as giv en ( th em ) it w as cold an d w h en t h e grass w as giv en to t h e , ,

horses it w as soake d an d w hen th e corn w as given it w as chopped T h e Raj a asked : Wh y i s

, , ,
.
‘

su ch bread giv en an d soak ed g rass an d chopp ed corn ? The an t an sw er ed : O Raj a som e ’

,

t i m e ago a Raj a h ad co me for h i m I h ad p r ep ared b read ; w h at was l ef t by h im th at I h av e

, ,

ser ved ou t to thy arm y an d th e co rn an d grass th at w as l ef t by hi s horses w as giv en to thy

, , , ,

ho rses Wh en t h e Raj a on goin g away looked about full m ag az in es stood th er e Th e pride of

.
’
, .

t h e Raj a w as h u m bl ed an d h e said : ‘S uch ar e t h e h abits of t h e Raj as Then t h e Raj a return ed ’

.

to his house ”
T h e B ab a utter ed thi s S l ak
.

L io h aw k s f alcon s an d bi rd s of pr ey h e m akes eat g r ass

n s, , .

Who eat grass them h e m akes eat flesh such i s h is h abit

, , .

I n r iver s h e sho ws h eaps of san d an d on dry l an d h e m ak es botto ml ess pool s .

Hav i n g kill ed t h e c reatures h e v iv ifi es th em ( if ) h e besto ws h i s look an d , favour on th e

creatur es .

He est abli sh es an an t an d gives it do mi n ion an d an ar my h e red uc es to ash es .

N an ak ( says) as it pleases th e True on e so h e gives a m or sel , .

Th en M ar dan a fell down at h i s feet S ay : v ah Guru! .

Th ey dep ar ted th en c e an d h avin g come to a vil lag e th ey sat do wn th ere . I n th at vill ag e no

C f L ahore dit sakhi 27

1
. e .
, .
xxii JA NAM- S A K H I 0 F BA BA NA N A K . A .

one g av e th em a pl ace to stay in , th ey b eg an to ra il ( at them) .

Th en th e G ur u Bab a ut tere d
thi s sl ak

W h en I k ep il c th y y i th i m th i
e s en e, u d t di g e sa ,
n s an er e s no n er s an n .

Wh en I p k th y y h ttl m uch w y
s ea , e sa , e ra es a a .

W hen I i t do w th y y h i t d
s b d f t w h h
n, l id do wn
e sa ,
e s sea e on a e o s ra ,
e as a .

W h en I i e d go th y y h i go h vi g th o w h
r s an ,
hi h d e sa , e s ne a n r n as es on s ea .

Wh en I b w do w th y y h p fo m w o hip co ti u l ly bo w i g do w
o n, e sa ,
e er r s rs n n a n n .

Th er e i bu
s no a d t u t by w hich I m y ut ff th i f l ccu ti o
se an no a n ,
a c o e r a se a sa n .

h ere an d th er e ( says) Nan ak th e true G ur u God ) p r eser ves ( m y ) ho n our

( But) , ,
.

H e did n ot r emai n th er e t w en ty four m i n utes M ard an a said th en : S i r w h a t o r de r h as b een

-
.
“
,

iv
g en ( by G od ) r eg a r di n g th ese p e opl e ? ”
T h e B ab a an sw er ed M ar d an a thi s to wn w ill h e :
“
,

t h ri v in g Th en th ey w en t to an oth er to w n Th ere m uch atten tio n w as p aid to th em th ey r e

”
. . ,

m ain ed th er e a n ight E arly in t h e m o r n i n g th ey r o se an d st art ed

. Th en t h e G ur u said : Thi s .
“

to wn w ill be r ui n ed it w ill b eco m e a pl ace w h er e eight r o ads m eet l M ar dan a said : I see a
,
.
” “

fi n e j ustice at thy g ate ; w h ere th ou do st n o t get a pl a c e to si t o n th at ( tow n ) i s m ad e th r ivin g ,

( by th ee) an d by w hom m uch a tt en tio n an d ser vic e i s r en der ed to th ee th ei r to wn i s r ui n ed

"
.
, ,

Th e G ur u B ab a r eplie d : O Ma r dan a w h en th e p eopl e of th at city w ill go to an oth er to w n th en

, ,

oth er s also wil l be spoiled an d w h en t h e people o f this to w n w ill go to an oth er town th ey w ill
, ,

al so save th em an d give th e m good advic e M ar dan a an swered : S ir if it pl ease th ee pr ocure ” “

.
, ,

al so sal v ation to th at to w n ! Th en th e Baba r ecited a S ahd in t h e B ag M al ar M ah al a I

” '
, ,
.

[ th ere foll o w f our v er ses]

?

Th en th ey w en t agai n to th e coun tr y o f Asa Th er e w as S h é kh F ari d w h o l ived in a j un gle .

3
, ,

t o w hi ch t h e B ab a w en t S h ekh F ari d said : A ll ah A ll ah O Dar v é sh ! ”

. T h e G uru B ab a “
, ,

an sw er ed : A ll ah O F ar i d i s m y ai m ‘ C om e S h ekh Fa ri d A ll ah A llah i s al way s my aim

“
, , .
, , , .
”

Then takin g his h an d h e sat dow n S h é kh F a i d lookin g at th e fac e of th e Bab a said en teri n g . r
,

in to a con versation w ith h im

Desire e ith er do m ini on or d esir e A llah !
Do n ot p ut thy f eet on t w o boat s l est tho u dr ow n thy good , s

T h e G uru Bab a answ er ed w ith th e s16k

P ut th y f eet o n t w o bo ats ship thy goods i n t wo ,

O n e bo at m ay be sun k on e m ay p ass acr o ss , .

( Th ey r eq uir e ) n either w ater n o r a boat ,

Th ey ar e n ot sun k n or do th ey p ass aw ay
T h e goods th e tr ue w ealth ar e n at ur all y co n ta in ed in G od
, ( ) , .

Th en S h ékh F ari d recited thi s 8 16k

0 F ari d w h o art en am o ur ed w ith ( thi s) w itch th e w or ld i s a fal se di stin ctio n
, , .

O N an ak w hilst looki n g on wi th th e eyes th e fi eld is w asted

, .

The it w ill be totally tr odden un der foot

sen se is : Rag Mal ar S ahd I Mah I .
2
, , . .

C f L ho r
. ad sak h i 28
e c I t i s n o t k n o w n exa ctly i f Asa i s a r ea l o o n ly a fa cy n am e
.
, .
F ar id a , r n .
,

M uh mm ada n P i li ed o t f r f o m L h o e lo w e d o w n t h Ravi
a r, v n a T h er e a e stil l m a ny follo w er s o f
r a r , r e r

t p o ti on o f h i poetic l co m posit i on s h s b n i n c o r po ted i n th e Gr an th

.

F a ri d i n t h e P a j ab A g
n . r ea r s a a ee ra .

F ar i d i s n o t m en t io ned by De T assy i h i
-
Hi t oir e d e l a littératur e Hi d o ui et Hi d ii st an i
n s s n n

m
.

(m
4
Th
a
r i in l i s
e
g W aU .
li t erally A ll h I s m eff o r t I a m st ivi n g f o r h i m
y , . a
, r

A ra b T h er e i s n o do ubt th at N an ak picked u so me little A r abic a s w ell

59 as P ersia
- or
5 3 ? p
.

by h is fr equ n t i ter co ur se w ith Muh amm da F qi s

e n a n a r .
 J A NA M - S A K H I O F B ABA NAN AK . A .
xxiii

Th e G ur u Bab a an sw ere d w ith t h e S l ok

L ov to th
e e itch co mes spr in gin g up by itself by itself
w , , .

0 Na n ak , t h e fi eld i s n o t W astgd if i t s guar di an be att en tiv e , .

Th en th e S e h kh re cited this S l ok

O F ar i d, t h e
body h as lost i ts st ren gth t h e h ear t i s b r oken n o stren gth wh atev er i s l e ft
, ,
.

T h e b elov ed h as b eco m e ( m y ) physici an h e appli es r e m edi es an d m edici n es ( to m e ) ,

.

Th e Gur u B aba an swere d With t h e S l dk

Ver ify i n thy o w n p er son t h e tr ue fr i en d to talk w ith th e m o uth i s sen sel ess ,
.

P er c eive h i m in t h e h ear t m y fri en d i s n ot far fr o m th ee , .

Th en t h e S h ekh utt er ed ( a S ah d
itten ) i n th e B ag S fi h i [th er e follo w th r ee v erses]
as wr .
1

Th e Gur u Bab a an sw ere d w ith t h e S ahd i n t h e B ag S u hi M ah al a I [th ere follow fi v e verses] ,

. .
2

Th en F ari d utt er ed a S ahd in t h e Rag Asa [ th er e f ollo w th ree ver ses]

,
.
3

Th e B ab a an sw ered w ith a S ah d i n t h e B ag S fi h i M ah al a I [ th er e f ollo w s on e v er se] , . .

Th e B ab a an d S h ekh F ar i d r em ai n ed tog eth er on e n ight i n t h e j un gl e Th en c am e on e ser v an t .

o f G od th er e H avin g seen ( th em ) h e r o se a n d w en t hom e fi lled a bo w l w ith m il k an d b r o ught

.
,

it tow ar ds th e clo se o f th e n ight after h avi n g thr o wn four A sh rafi s in to it Th e S h ekh took h is
, .

por tion (of th e m ilk ) an d left t h e po r tion o f t h e Gur u Th en S h ekh F ari d utt ered thi s S l é k .

Tho se w h o w ake obt ai n gifts fr o m th e L o r d .

A t t h e com m en c em en t o f th e n ight th er e i s th e blo ssom , at th e en d o f th e n ight al so t h e fr uit .

T h e Bab a an swer e d w ith th e s16 k

Th e gi fts a re t h e L or d s w h at c an h e be p r evailed upon ? ’

,

S o m e tho ugh w ak i n g do n ot obtain ( th em ) so m e w h o

, , , ,
are as ee l p ,
h e m akes i
r se an d m ee ts
( w ith th em ) .

Th en th e B ab a said : S h ekh F ari d m ove thy h an d i n thi s m ilk a n d see w h at it i s

“
, Wh en .
”

S h ekh F ari d look ed th ere w er e f o ur A sh r af s; h e d r opp ed th e bo w l an d w en t aw ay Th en th e Gur u

, i .

B ab a r ecited a S ah d i n t h e B ag T ukh ar i M ah al a I [th er e follo w fi e v er ses] Th en t h e ll aba 5 '

,
.
. v .
,

an d S h ekh F ar i d star t ed th en c e Th en th at m an cam e an d saw th at t h e bow l w as lyi n g o n th e

.

g r oun d W hen h e li ft ed it up it was of gold an d fi ll ed w ith A sh r a fi s H e b egan to regret it

.
, ,
.

an d said : Those w er e w ealthy F aqi rs ; if it h ad co m e in to my m i n d I w o uld h ave p ut in r e

“
,

l i gi on : so I h av e br ought m on ey an d h av e got m on ey H e took t h e bo wl an d w en t ho m e ”

. .

Th en th e Gur u Bab a an d S h ekh F ari d cam e to th e co un tr y o f A55 A t th at ti m e th e Raj a .

of t h e coun t r y of Ash w ho se n am e w as S am u n d ar h ad di ed Hi s sk ull did n o t b urn ( w h en h is 6

.
, ,

cor p se w as b ur n t ) tho ugh th ey m ade di ff eren t eff or t s Th er eupon th e astr ologers w er e asked w h o
, .
,

said : Thi s on e h as on ce told a fal sehood th er efore h is so ul h as co m e i n to tr o ubl e Th e p eople

“ ”
.
,

o f th e co u n try of Asa w er e sp eakin g t h e t r u th by d ay th ey w er e so w i n g an d by n ight th ey w ere ,

cutti n g ( th e corn ) Th e p eople o f Asa b eg an to lam en t Th e astr ologers said : H e w ill th en

. .
“

b eco me eman cipated w h en t h e feet of a sai n t touch

,
Th e r o ad to th e co un t r y of Asa w as
th er efor e shut up on ly on e gate was l eft th at i f by ch an ce a F aqi r should com e h e w ould be
, , ,

c arr i ed alon g fr o m th at gate A t th at ti m e Bab a Nan ak an d S h ekh Fari d ar r ived th ere W h en

. .

Rag S fi h i , F a ri d , 2 .
2
4, Ma h . I .

3
B i g Asa, S h ek h F a i d l r , . A ppa r en tly a m isq uota ti o n, fo r t h e ver se i s n ot f un d o there .

B i g T ukh ar i ch an t B ara h a m atr a 2 Ma h I ( p

5
. . .
, , ,

I n t h e L ah o re ed itio n a d i n MS given yam S am un d

6
n . th e n a me is as : S ar .
xxiv JA NA N - S A K HI O F BA BA NA NA K . A .

th ey h ad com e n ear G ur u Nanak said : S h ekh Far i d p ut thy foot ( o n it ) S h ekh o F ari d re “ .

, ,

pl i ed : W h at i s m y pow er th at I should p ut for th m y foot ? Th en t h e Bab a p ut h i s foot ( on

“
,
”

it ) an d th e skull b urst ; h e w as em an cip at ed Th en al l t h e peop le of t h e co un t r y o f A sa ca m e an d .

ll do th i t b cit d hd M M ah al a I [ th er e f ollo w
fe w n at ( e r) f T h B a a e e a S a i n t h e B ag a ra .

ee e r . , ,

f o ur v er ses] l Th en t h e p e opl e b r ought b read

.
Wh o o ff er ed b r ead to S h ekh F ari d to h i m h e sai d : . ,

“ I h ave al ready eaten b read an d al so boun d som e up in th e h em of m y gar m en t Th en th e ”

.

p eopl e of th e Asa co un tr y said : O ser van t of G od ar t tho u so m e un tr uth ful m an o f th at co un tr y “

, ,

i n which S h ekh F ari d lives w h o h as a lo af o f b r ea d m ade of w ood an d if o n e o ffer s h i m b r ead

,
,

sa ys : I h av e eaten al ready an d also boun d som e up i n t h e h em of m y gar m en t

‘
Th en F ari d .
’

th rew do wn th e b read o f w ood an d said : F o r t ellin g once a l ie th e Raj a h as got such a great “

p un ishm en t ( w h at w ill th en be m y Th e B ab a w as pl ea sed at thi s W h en S h ekh Far i d .

took leav e th e Bab a sai d : S h ekh F ari d tr uly God i s i n thee but tak e tho u a P i r ( spiritual
,
“
, ,

S h ekh F ari d an sw er ed Well it m ay be Wh en S h ekh F ari d d ep ar ted th ey em :

“
,
.
”
,

b rac ed each oth er Th e G uru B ab a r ecited th en a S ah d i n t h e B ag S ri R ag Mah al a I [th ere

. , , .

f ollo w f our v e rses] T h e B ab a r em ai n ed so m e d ays ( lo n g er ) i n t h e A S 5 co un t r y an d t h e w hol e

.
3

coun try b egan to m utter : G ur u G uru! an d b ec am e d e votees of t h e n ame I n t h e A sa coun try

“
,
”
.

th er e i s ( still ) a Manj i T h e B ab a w as m uch pl eased w ith t h e Asa coun tr y

.
4 S ay : v ah Guru! .

Th en th e Bab a c ame to th e coun tr y o f Bi si ar T h er e th ey g av e h i m n o pl ac e to si t on . .

Wh erever th ey go a n d st an d th ere t h e p e opl e apply c o w d un g seei n g th em gon e Th en h e c am e

,
-
,
5
.

to Jh an da th e c ar pen ter w h o took h i m to h is house Thi s o n e w as dr i n ki n g after h e h ad w ash ed .

Whil st h e w as d i kin g t h e G uru c am e i n to sight H e b e c am e an Ud asi ( F aqi r ) an d

, ,

h is f eet . r n ,
.

b egan to w an der abo ut w ith ( Nan ak ) .

By t h e fa vo ur of t h e holy t ue G uru! Th e w r iti n g o f th e J ug av al i ( com es n ow ) A t th at

r
6
.

ti m e h e ( L e th e G u u) w as sitti n g on th e sea sho r e ; h e p racti sed w in d ea ti n g ; w ith h im w as

. r - -

Jban da th e c ar p en ter o f th e Bi si ar co un t r y
,
He got t h e Jugav al i w ith Jh an da it was fin ished
,
.
, .

A t th a t ti m e it w as r ea d w ith asto n i sh m en t [ Th er e follo w s t h e Jug v al i ]

‘
7
. a

N an ak w as pl eased an d di sch ar ged J h an da th e c ar p en t er to t h e Bi si ar co un t r y Th en th e Babe , , .

an d M ard an a d ep ar t ed th en c e G oin g alon g they cam e i n to a gr eat desert w her e th ey did n ot m eet
.
,

w ith a n ybody Mar d a a w h o h ad b eco m e ver y h un g r y said : O ut of att ach m en t to th ee I b ecam e

. n , ,
“

thy m u ici an an d w as eati n g th e m or sels I b egged fr o m t h e coun t r y ; t h i s al so is n o w den i ed to m e

s
, .

W e h ave fall en i n to a gr eat j un gle ; i f Go d ever w ill d r a w us o ut w e sh all co m e out of it NO W , .

’

i f som e lion w il l r o ar an d fall o n ( us) h e w il l kill us T h e B ab a repli ed : O M ar d an a n on e ,

.
” “
,

w ill co m e n ear th ee but be t h en p ud en t ! H e said : S ir h o w sh all I be p r ud en t ? I h ave

” “
, r
,

fall en i n to a desert T h e B ab a r epli ed O M ar d an a w e ar e n o t i n a d eser t w e ar e i n a vi ll age

.
”
:
“
, , ,

w h er ever t h e n am e com es i n to our m i n d Th er e t h e B ab a utt ered th e S ah d in th e B ag Asa .

”
, ,

Mah al a I [th ere follo w four v er ses] Th en t h e B ab a said : O Mar d an a k eep ( th is) S ahd in
. .
8 “
,

( thy ) m i n d except by th ee ( these) w o r d s ar e n ot un d er stood

, Th en th e Babe said : M ar dan a play .
” “
,

R ag Mar ti , S ah d 2, Ma h l . .

2
T hi s I h a ve supplied f o m r th e L a ho r e ed i t io n, as it i s m i ssi n g in th e or ig i n al .

3
S ir i Rag , S abd 1 0, N a h . I .

p op e ly sm all co uch o stool bed ecked wi th silk cloth es o n w hich t h e Gr an th is pla ced an d
r r a r , ,

a d o ed by t h
r p eopl e e .

A i f t h p l ac e h d be p oll uted
5
t h e r o w o f Y ug as
s e a 6
en .
.

7
Al l t h o th e J a a m sak h i d o o t m en tio t hi s I t i s ap p a re t ly o l d i te r pol a t io a s it h as
e r n o
s n n . n an n n,

n o thi g w h te e to do w ith t h e a r ative o f Na ak s w a der i g s

n a v r n r n
’
n n .

6
Bi g Asa S a bd 3 3 Mah l
, , . .
xxvi JANAM- S A K H I 0 F BA BA N A NA K . A .

w en t Th e
. m oth er
id th en My
of d eart h e Bab a
th a t thi s o n e h as s
sa o q u ickly r i sen an d :
“
,

d ep ar ted fro m th e yard th at h as it s r eason S h e stood up took so me cloth es an d so m e sweet

”
,
.
,

Mar dan a b r i n g m e to Nan ak !

”
m eat s an d w en t after M ar dan a w ith who m sh e m et an d said :
“
, ,

M ar dan a r emai ned sil en t Th ey w en t o n above t w o K 63 to th e pl ace wh er e t h e Bab a w as sitti n g

.
.

h b th t oth M d co c d f ll do w n at h er feet
W en t h e Ba a saw a h i s m e r an d ar a n a h a d m e h e am e an e
,
.

H i s m oth er b eg an to w eep an d k i ssed h i s h ea d an d said : I am a sacrifice I am a sacrifice my “

, ,

son ,
f or th ee I am a sac r ific e I am a sacr ifi ce:for th at pl ace wh ere thou ar t w an der in g about
. ,
.

I h ave b een made h appy by thee th at thou h ast show n m e thy face Th e Bi b i seein g th e love ,
.
”

“
o f h i s m oth er b ec ame so ft an d b eg an to w eep H vi n g w ept h e l augh ed a n d sa id : Mar dan a . a ,

pl a y th e reb eck ! Mar dana pl ayed th e r eb eck an d th e B aba m ade t h e S ahd i n t h e B ag V adh an s
”
, ,

M ah al a I [ th ere f ollo w fo ur verses]

. Then h is m oth er p ut t h e clothes an d sweetmeats b efore h i m
.
t

0 m oth e r I a m sati ated Hi s m oth er said : S on

” “
an d sai d Th e Baba an swer ed :
” “
S on eat ! ,
“
, ,
.
,
”
wi th h t
w a f ood ar t t o
h u sa a e ?ti t d ”
T h e holy Guru B ab a sa id : Mar dan a pl ay th e r ebe ck ! “
,

Mar da a pl ayed it an d t h e Baba m ade t h e S ahd in t h e S iri Rag M ah al a I [th ere f ollow s on e
n , ,
.

v erse an d on e Rah au] His m oth er said agai n : Take thi s p a tched quilt off th y n eck an d p ut o n
.
2 “

n ew cl oth es ! Then th e Baba recited t h e secon d Paur i [ th er e follow s on e ver se w ith a Rab i n ]
” . .

H is father K al li al so h eard this n ew s b e m oun te d a horse a n d cam e Wh en h e h ad com e th e Babe ,

.
,

fell do w n at h i s fee t an d p aid r ever en ce to h i m T h en K al a b eg an to w eep and sai d : Nan ak .

“
,

m o un t t h e horse an d co me to o u r ho u se Th en t h e G uru r eplied : O fath er hor ses are o f n o use .

” “
,

to m e He r ecit ed th e thir d P auri [there f ol low s o n e ver se w ith a Rah au]

. Kal a said again : G o .

o n ce to ( our ) house w e h av e b uilt a n ew house see it tho u h ast r eturn ed after a lon g time Ther e
, , ,
.

i s t h y fam ily m eet w ith it an d if it sh all pl ease th ee thou m ayst go ag ai n

, ,
Th en th e Baba , .
”

utter e d t h e f our th P auri [th ere foll o w s on e v er se w ith a Rah au] K al i: w en t on to say : “ 0 son .
,

thy soul h as b ecom e embitter ed by som e m atter t ell it m e ! i f thou tell m e I w il l p rocur e th ee , ,

an oth er m ar ri age ; I w i l l get u p a good com p an y for th ee a t th e w eddi n g p r ocession w ith spl en do ur -
,

I wi ll get thy m arri age sol em n i z ed Th e B aba utter ed a S ahd in th e B ag S ii h i dh an t Mah al a I .

” '

, ,
.

[ th er e f ollo w f o u r v er s es ]
!
Th en t h e B ab a said : O fath er an d m oth er th at on e i s th e al l
‘ “
,

ar ran i n g S u p em e Be in g t h e u io n th t i m d by h im is good ”
Hi s m oth er said t h en : 0 “
g r ; n a s a e , , .

so n, r ise an d go ! give u p thi s per ver se t al k w h a t un ion m ay be m ade ag ai n by w hich w e sh all , ,

a gain m eet ? T h e Bab a m ade th en th e S ah d i n Raga M ar a Mah al a I th ollo o

”
[ ere f w f ur , , .

A f t er thi s t h e Bab a said : 0 fath er an d m other w e w h o h a ve come sh al l co m e ag ain at som e

“
( ) , ,

B ut m i n d n ow th e or der : I am an Udasi ” His m oth er r epli ed :

,

fi t oppor t u n ity .
0 son h o w .
,

sh all thi s give co n ten tm en t to m

y h ear t as thou h ast co m e af ter h avi n g l ed a re ti re d life for m an y ,

year s ? Th e Baba said : 0 m oth er m in d m y w or d tho u wilt obtain con ten tmen t ” Then h i s
” “
, , .

m o th er kept sil en ce Th e holy Gur a aba dep ar t ed th en fr o m th at pl ace

.
.

H avin g seen t h e Ravi an d t h e C an au Ch en ab h e w en t in to t h e w ildern ess an d c ame to h e

( ) t
coun try o f Patan Three K 6s fr o m th e coun tr y of Pat an w as a deser t thith er h e w en t an d sat
.
’
,

do wn M ardan a b ein g w ith h im Th e P i r of Patan h ad b een S h ekh Fari d ; on h i s th r on e sat ( n ow )

, .

S h ekh Br ih am O n e of h i s discipl es h ad co me ear ly in t h e m o r i n g to collect w ood

n who se n ame
.

,
w as S h ekh Kam al ; h e h ad gon e out to colle ct f uel for th e kitch
en of th e F i r He saw th at n ear .

an Akk tr ee both th e Babe an d M ar d an a were sitti n g

-
Mar dan a played th en th e reb eck an d b egan .

to si n g a S ah d ; h e gave a i n th e B i g Asa S h ekh Br ih am h ad h ad a co n v er satio n

w ith t h e .

Babe ( b efor e) .

Rag Vadh a us, S a hd I, M ah . I .

3
S i ri Rag , S a hd 7 , Mah . I .

3
Reg S fi h i , C han t 4 , Ma h I . .
Rag M ar a, S ahd l , Mah . I .

6
Com p ar e th e L a hor e e ditio n , Sa khi 83 .
 JANA M- S A K HI o r BABA N A N A K . A .
xxvii

S IG/c .

Thou thyself art th e w ooden tablet thou thyself art t h e p en thouar t al so th e wr itin g upon it
, , .

Wh y should th e O n e be c al l edg an oth er O N an ak ,

W hen K am al
hear d this s16k h e l eft h is w ood an d c am e n ear an d said , S ir t ell thi s Rababi :
,
'

( pl ayer o f t h e reb eck ) th at h e sho uld r ep eat thi s verse M ar d an a w as told to do so an d r ep eated ”
, .

it Kam al l earn t it ; h e took th e wood h e h ad collected m ade h i s sal am an d r etur n ed to I atan

.
,
’
.

H av in g thr o w n do wn th e w ood h e w en t to h is P i r m ad e h i s salam an d said : P i r h ealth to ,

“
,

th ee ! a b eloved m an o f G od h as fallen i n w ith m e T h e P i r said : K am al w h er e did h e m eet .

” “
,

w ith th ee ?
”
K a m al an sw er ed : 0 P i r h ealth to th ee ! I h ad go n e to g ath er fuel ; a B ab ahi i s
“
,

w ith h i m an d h i s n a m e i s N an ak ; h e r e cit es h i s o w n S l ok s
”
Th e P i r said : S en h ast tho u l ear n t .
“
,

so m e ve r se ?
”
K am al r epli ed : O P i r h ealth to th ee ! O n e v er se I al so h ave comm itted to
“
,

m e m or y H e say s : T h o u thy sel f ar t t h e w

.
”
ooden t ablet thou thy sel f ar t t h e p en thou ar t als o
‘
, ,
-

th e w r iti n g upo n it Wh y sho uld th e O n e be c all ed an oth er 0 Nan ak ?

. T h e P i r said : 0 son ,
’

h ast thou som ew h at un der stood t h e m ean in g of thi s ver se or n o t ? K am al an sw ered P ir ”

:
“
,

h ealth to thee ! to th ee al l i s m an i fest Th en th e F i r said : 0 son by w ho m thi s v er se h as .

” “
,

b een spoken hi s sight I h av e seen ( already ) be i s a F a qi r o f G od b r in g m e al so to h i m ! w or ds

, , ,

o f G od ar e S pok en by hi m Th en S h ekh E r lh am ascen ded a sedan ch air an d w en t t aki n g K am al

”
.
-
-

w ith h i m ; h e w en t alon g above th r ee K os ; w h en h e look e d t h e B ab a w as sittin g th ere S h ekh ,

.

i
B r am
a h'

w en t an d 1
s t an di n g sa id : N a n ak p c
e e be
a on th ee ! ”
T h e G ur u B ab a answ er ed
“
,

A n d on th ee b e p eace ! 0 P i r h eal th to th ee co m e ! G od h as b een m er ci f ul to us th at I h av e

, , ,

got a sight of th ee Th en h avi n g ki ssed t h e h an ds mut ual l y th ey sat do w n Th e P i r asked th en

.
” .

“
0 Nan ak h avin g h ear d on e v er se o f thi n e I h a ve b e co m e aston i sh ed
,
I said : By w ho m thi s ,
.
‘

v er se h as b een spoken h is sight I h ave seen , Nan ak r eplied S ir a favo ur h as b een b esto w ed.
’
,

on m e th at I h ave obt ain ed a sight of y o u T h e P i r said : N an ak giv e m e an expl an ation o f

,
.
” “
,

thi s v er se Tho u sayst : Th ere i s on e 0 Nan ak w h y an oth er ? But ther e i s on e L or d an d

.
‘
, ,
’

t w o defin itio n s W h at sh al l I accept an d w h at shall I r ej ect ? Tho u say st : Th er e i s o n ly

.
,
‘

O ne b ut th e H in d fi s say th a t t h e tr uth i s w ith th em an d th e Musal m an s say th at th e truth i s

,
’
,

w ith th em S ay w h o is r ight an d w h o i s wr o n g ? Bab a Nan ak an swer ed : S ir th ere i s on e ” “

.
, ,

L o r d an d o ne d efi n ition acc ept th e O n e an d r ej e ct an oth er ( G od )

, .

Wh y sho uld an oth er be ser ved w h o is born an d dies ?

,

Re m em b er th e O n e, 0 N an ak w h o is con t ain ed in w at er
, an d ear th
When t h e B ab a h ad given thi s S l fi k, th e F i r sa id
T ear th e ilk p etti coat an d make a flag of it p ut o n a sm all blan k et
s ,
“

P ut on th ose c loth es in w hich t h e bridegr oo m i s obtain ed

,
.

Th e G ur u Bab a g ave th e an sw er

Tear an y pe tticoat p ut on an y b1an ket ,

S ittin g i n t h e ho use t h e br id e gr oo m i s obt ai n ed if th en k eep thy m i n d fi r m ( o n h i m) , .

I n th e house is th e w om an h er b elov e d abr o ad sh e g r i ev es con ti n ually r em em b er in g h i m

, , .

He meet s With h er w ith o ut delay if sh e m ak e a sin c er e desir e ( fo r h im )

.
, . .

1
The n am e is w r t i ten di ffer en tly : B r ih am , B irah am , and B irah am , as h er e . Very likel y it i cor r upted
s

fr om Ib ahi m r .

2
T h e F a qi rs are in th e habit o f er ectin g a fla g i n fr on t of thei r dwell in g s .
 J A NA M- S A K H I 0 F BA BA NA NAK A
x xviii
. .

When Nan ak h ad given thi s an sw er , th e F i r id sa

szér .

Ih v b a e een yo un g an d h e d id n ot spor t ( w ith m e) .

H avi n g gr o wn up Idp td e ar e .

T h e w om an h as sun k i n to t h e g r ave w eepi n g : I h ave n o t “

m et w ith my L or d .

T he B aba an sw er ed
S IG/c .

Th e w om an i s fooli sh , thin bl ack o f an i m pure h ear t , ,

.

I f sh e h ad vi r t ues sh e w o uld co n stan tly en j oy h er b eloved

,
.

O Nan ak by h er vices sh e i s con f o un ded

,
.

Th e P i t ask ed a g ain

S IG/c .

What i s th at w or d w h at tho se vi r t ues w h at th at gem an d ch ar m

, ,

W hat i s th at I sho uld get i n to m y po wer 0 sister by w hich t h e b eloved

, , ,
on e m ay com e in to
po w er ? my

T h e B ab a an sw er ed w ith th e S l é k

B ow i n g i s t h e w or d p ar tin g w i th t h e vi r t ue th e ton g ue th e g em s an d ch ar m
, ,

These th r ee 0 si ster get i n to thy po w er by w hich t h e b elov ed on e w ill co m e i n to thy po wer

, , ,
.

W h o ser ves th e b eloved o n e h i s th e b eloved on e b eco m es ,

.

N an ak ( say s) w h o giv es up al l h er com p an ion s w ith h er th e b elov ed on e w ill b e ,

.

Wh en Nan ak h ad gi ven thi s an swer th e F i r said : N an ak I w an t on e k n i fe give m e ,

“
, ,

th a t kn i fe by w hich m an b ecom es sl aught er ed W ith th e com m on k n i fe th ey sl aughter an i m al s

,
.
,

an d w h e n it p asses ov er t h e n eck of m an h e w ill be sl aughter ed G ive m e th at kn i fe by ,

.
,

w hich egoti sm b e co m es sl au ghtered T h e B ab a an swer ed 0 P i r t e it !

ak ”
. :
“
,

S ic k .

kn ife of tr uth con sider altogeth er as true !

Th e
I t s w o r ki n g i s i n esti m abl e .

A pply it to th e W h et ston e o f tr uth an d hid e it ;

P ut it i n to a sh eath o f vir t ues !
W h o i s sl aughtered by thi s b eco m es a S hekh .

Behold cov e tousn ess th e blood h as fl o w ed o ut

, , , .

I f b ei n g sl aughter ed tho u cli n g to t r uth

, ,

T h ouw ilt be ab sor b ed i n th e sight ( of Go d) at t h e gate ( say s) Nan ak , .

W h en th e Bab a h ad given h i m thi s k n ife th e h ead of th e F r tur n e d r o un d an d h e said , i

Well w ell don e ! thou ar t t h e b eloved of G od G od h as b esto we d a g r eat favour ( on th ee)

, , .

Th en th e F i r said agai n : 0 Nan ak l et m e h ear o n e V ar o f G od ! O ur i n ten tion i s thi s : a v ar

“
,
l

c an n ot be m ade w ithout t wo an d thou ar t sayin g h e i s o n ly o n e L et m e see w hom thou w ilt , .

,

m ake th e ar n er of G od ! T h e Bab a said : M ar d an a pl ay t h e r eb eck !

”
M ar d an a pl ay ed it an d
“ ”
p t , .
,

t h e Rag A sa w as sun g t h e Gur u gav e t h e S l ok i n t h e V ar o f Asa Mah al a I

-

,
[ th er e f ol lo w th ree , .

S l é k s an d on e I aur i ] ’
Ni n e P aur i s wer e m ade on thi s topic
.
2
Th en t h e F i r r o se an d stood er ect .
.

H e cam e an d ki ssed h i s h an d s sayin g : Nan ak tho u h ast obtai n ed G od betw een th ee an d G od

,
“
, ,

th er e i s n o di ffer en ce but be thou m er ci ful th at G od m ay also come an d r em ain w ith m e ” T h e

, , .

l
o g o f p r a is
a s n e .

2
A a v ar I ( p
s , . T h e eco d
. s n $16 k i s n oted dow n in th e G ra n t h as be i g
n of An g ad h
w ere as
i t i s h e e q uo t d as bei n g m a d e by Na ak
,

r e n .
 JA N A M- S A K HI O F BA BA NA NA K . A .
xxi x

B ab a an sw er e d :
“
S h é kh Br ih am , G od w ill acco m pli sh th y tr ip .
” 1
Th e Pir sa id :
“
S ir , give
me yo ur w or d !
”
Th e Bab a re pli ed : “
G o y ou h ave
, my w or d .
”
T h e S h é kb r o se th en an d

stood an d , b took l eave of h im

t h e Ba a .

Th e Bab a al so r o se an d p assin g ’ th r on gh Dip alp ur K adh an n r K asar an d Pati h e c ame to

p , , , ,

Gaid aw al an d stopp ed th er e but n obody allo we d hi m to st ay th er e Th er e w as on e F aqi r th ere

, .
,

to h i s ho vel h e w en t Th at F aqi r w as lep ro us T h e Baba h avi n g go n e th ere stood an d said

.
.

“
O F aqi r al lo w m e to r em ai n h ere d ur i n g th e n ight !
, T h e F aqi r said : A n i m al s ar e d e ” “

str oy ed w h o co me n ear m e but it i s t h e favour of G od th at a h um an sh ap e h as co m e agai n i n to m y

, ,

sight He r emai ned th ere Th e F aqi r b eg an to l am en t Th e B aba uttere d th en a S ah d in th e

”
. . .
,

Rag Dh an asar i M ah al a I [th ere f ollo w f o ur v er ses ? T h e G ur u b e c am e co m p assio n ate an d said

, ] .

M ar dan a pl ay th e r eb eck !
, H e did so an d th e Rag G aur i w as m ad e t h e B ab a r e cited th e ”
, ,

S abd M ah al a I [th er e f ollo w t en ver ses]

, . Th en i n con seq uen ce o f t h e i n t er vi ew ( with th e G ur u) .
3

t h e l ep r o sy w as r em oved an d h is bo d y w as h eale d H e c am e an d f ell do wn at ( Nan ak s) fee t .

’

an d b e c am e a vot ar y o f th e n am e ; h e b e g an to m u tter : Gur u Gur u “

,

Th en t h e Baba star ted th en ce ; h e cam e th r o ug h S u l t an p ur V ai r é w al Jalal ab ad to K i ri a a , , ,

Path an to w n ; th er e h e m ade P ath an p eo pl e h i s di scipl es Tho se Path an p e opl e m ovi n g al o n g .

began to soun d dr um s an d said : C ourage S h ah Nan ak ! Then th e o r der w as giv en to Ma r “

,
”

d an a : Pl ay th e r eb eck !
“
H e did so an d t h e Rag Til an g w as m ade ; t h e B ab a utter ed t h e
”

S ah d Mah al a I [ th ere f oll o w t en v erses]

, . Th en th e Pat h an p eople b eco m in g br ave b eg an to .
4

sh o u t : C ourage S hah Nan ak !

“
,
”

Th en t h e Gur u dep ar ted th en ce ; h e came ag ain th r ough Vatal a an d S aidpur to S an d eal i I n . .

t h e ho uses o f t h e Pa th an s w ed d i n g s w ere sol em n i z e d an d w ith t h e Bab a w ere al so s o m e F qi r s a ,

w h o w ere h un gr y an d em pty H avi n g gon e th er e th e Bab a sat do w n but n obody took an y n otice
.
,

of th em though t h e F aqi rs wer e so r ely depr essed by h un ger Th e Bab a r o se an d stood h e took
, .
,

t h e F aqi rs an d M ar d an a w ith h im w en t an d b egged b ut n o on e r espo n d ed to th e d em an d Th e “

‘

.
, ,

B ab a b e cam e v er y an g r y an d said : Mar dan a play t h e r eb eck ! H e did so an d t h e Rag Tilan g ,

”
,

w as m ade t h e Bab a utt er in g i n a n ger t h e S ah d

, M ah al a I [th ere follo w fo ur ver ses] Wh en ,
. .
6

t h e G ur u h ad r ecit ed thi s S ahd a Br ah m an c am e w ith a b ask e t of fr uit s an d m et w ith th em sayi n g

0 ki n d on e m ay t h e S ahd o f w r ath th a t h as b een utter ed be r e voke d !
,
T h e B ab a an swered , ,
”

“
S i r n o w it i s too l at e to r evok e it it i s spoken ; but t h ou w h o h ast com e an d m et us ar t
, , , ,

p ar don ed Tw elve K as f r o m h ere i s a pon d thith er b rin g thy fam ily do n o t r em ain h er e ; if
.
, ,

tho u sh alt r em ai n h ere t h en w ilt be kill ed Th e B r ah m an took h i s f amily an d w en t aw ay tw elve

, .
”

K 65 an d sat dow n i n a d eser t W h en by th e po wer ( o f G od ) it h ad b eco me m o r n i n g Mi r B abar

.
, ,

th e K in g m ar ch e d o n an d st r uck S aidp ur an d al l th e vill ages r o un d abo u

, t Hi n das an d Musal m an s "
,

w er e pr o m i sc uo u sly c ut do wn th e houses sacked an d p ull ed dow n S uch a sl aughter c am e o n t h e

, .

Path an s by th e S ah d of t h e Baba I t w as t h e w r ath o f a g reat m an G od m i n d s t h e w or d s o f . .

F aqi rs as h e i s m i n d ed by th e F aqi r s ; G od b ei n g ador ed by th e F aqi rs h ears th eir wor d Wh at

, .

1
T he se n se i s : Go d w ill b i g thee sa fely th r ough (this lif )
r n e .

2
ha n asari S ahd 5 Mah I
D , , . .

T hi s i s ag a i a m i squotatio n fo r in t h e G r a th th ese v er es are asc ibed to Gu u Ram Das ( fo urt h

3
n n s r r

Guru) ; see : Gauri parhi K ar ah al é I (p 258 ; T ran s] p

,

, , . . . .

Rag T ila n g Rai sa I ( p

4
, , . .

It i s de ied by t h e S ikh s tha t Nan ak ever b egg ed but t h e t xt h ere says pl a i ly fi t fi W

5
n , ,
e n :

m un It is al so xpressly sta ted th at h e begged o n his sec on d tour ; see p xxxiv

. e ,
. .

Rag T il a g S abd 5 Mah I

6
n , , . .

C f T ra n sl p 50 9
7
. . . .
_
xxx JA NA M S KK H I O F BABA N A N A K
- . A .

e ver com es i n to t h e mi n d of th e F aqi rs th at h e do es B ut w h o are th ese F aqi rs ? Wh o ar e ,

.

given to kin d ness an d l o v e w h o ask little w h o w alk i n si n cer ity an d p ati en ce w h o h ave subdued
, ,
,

th ei r body an d soul an d w h o do n ot m ake fo rethought ; w h o are caref ul an d ten der h ear ted an d -

upr ight th ey ar e Dar v é sh es of G od th ey are F aqi rs

,
This also thi s m ar rie d ser an t ( o f G od ) ,
.
v

d esi res to be W h o m o n g t h e fo ur c astes p uts o n t h e gar b o f F aqi rsh ip be h e a H in dfi or

. a ,

M usal m an a thi ef fo rn icator or high w ay m an h e ought to be ser ved an d h is ( for m er ) w or ks should

, , . ,

n ot b e taken i n to acco u nt .

T h e Bab a an d M ar d an a w er e th r ow n i n to t h e p ri so n o f S aidp ur ( at t h e c apt ure o f t h e pl ace) ;

th en th ey c am e i n to th e h n d s o f Mi r K h an th e M ugal Mi r K h an t h e Mugal gave th e or der a ,
.
, , ,

th at th ese sl av es should be c ar ried a w ay T h e B ab a got a b un dl e o n h i s h ead an d for Mar d an a a .

hor se w as sei z ed Th e B aba utter ed th en a S ahd i n B ag Mar a M ah ala I [th er e f oll o w f our
.
, ,
.

v er ses] l Mar dan a said : S ir wh at i s t h e m atter r eg ar di n g th ese ( w o m en ) w h o ar e stan din g o n

.
“
, ,

”
th eir feet an d go al on g w eepin g ? T h e Bab a replie d : Mar d an a play t h e r eb eck ! Mar dan a ” “
,

said : S i r i n m y h an d i s a ho r se Th e B ab a said : S ay : v ah G ur u! an d l et t h e horse go

“ ” “
.
,

fr o m th y h an d M r d an a l et t h e horse go an d pl ayed th e r eb eck th e B ag Til an g w as m ade th e

”
. a , ,

B ab a utter i n g t h e S ah d Ma h al a I [ t h ere f ollow t w en ty t w o v er ses] W h en t h e Baba h ad r ecited -

2
. .
,

th ese S abds Mi r K han th e Mug al c am e Wh en h e looked h e saw th at th e b un dl e on th e h ead

, , ,
.
,

( of N an ak ) w as goin g o n suppo rted by a h an d an d th at th e hor se w as w alki n g b ehin d ( Mar d an a) .

He r epor ted this to S ult an Bab ar an d said A F aqi r wh o h as b een t ak en p r i so n er o n hi s h ead :

“
, ,

a bu n d l e i s goi n g ; w ith h im i s a D am b ehi n d w hom a horse i s W alki n g ; h e i s playi n g a r eb eck ,

au d w orshippi n g G od Th e K i n g r epli ed : A to w n i n w hich th er e ar e such F aqi rs sho uld n ot

” “
.
, ,

h ave b een str uck T h en t h e Mi r said : S ee to b esto w favour on th em !

.
”
Th en h avin g gon e “ ”

above t w o K GS t h e ten ts w er e pitch ed Ther e m ills w ere p ut b ef o r e th em an d th ey w er e told to .

gr in d th e cor n o f th e govern m en t T h e Path an K hatri an d B rah m an w om en w er e al l seat ed .

, ,

together an d m ill s p ut b efor e th em b efor e th e B ab a too a m ill w as p ut b ut it turn ed by itself , , ,

t h e Bab a sat an d fi ll ed i n a h an d f ul ( w h en t h e c or n w as gr oun d ) Th en th e K in g c am e th er e an d .

t h e B aba r ecited a S abd i n t h e B ag Asa Mah ala I [ th er e f oll ow sev en v er ses] , Th e K in g b egan ,
. .
3

th en to ask m ir acl es ; at th at ti me th e S ah d w as m ad e i n t h e B ag Til an g M ah al a I [th er e f ollow , .

f o ur W h en t h e Bab a h ad r ecited thi s S ah d t h e K in g B ab ar c am e on an d k issed h is feet ,

‘

sayi n g : I n th e face o f thi s F aqi r G od i s co m i n g i n to sight

“
Th en al l t h e p eopl e Hin das as .
” 6
,

w ell as Musal m an s b eg an to m ake sal am ( to N an ak ) , T h e K i n g said 0 D a rv é sh a ccept o f .

,
“
,

so m ethi n g ! T h e G ur u B ab a r epli ed :
”
I do n ot w an t an ythi n g but r elease t h e pr ison ers of “
,

S aidp ur an d w h at h s b een taken fr o m th em restor e to th em !a K i n g B ab ar g av e th e or der th at

”

th ey should rel ease th e pr i son er s an d r estore th eir p r oper ty to th em A l l th e p r i son ers o f S aidpur .

; so t h e B ab a r etur n e d w ith th em on
w er e set at liber ty but th ey w o uld n ot go w itho ut t h e B ab a
,

t h e thir d d ay to S aidpur W h en h e arr i ed th ere h e saw th at a p r o m isc uous sl aughter ha d b een

. v
,

m ade . Th e B ab a said th en : 0 M ar d an a w h at h as h app en ed h er e ! M ar d an a repli ed : “

K in g ,
”
,

w h at w as thy w ill th at h as h app en ed T h e B ab a said :

, Pl ay t h e reb e ck ! M ar d an a did so .
” “ ”
,
an d t h e B ag A sa w as m ad e t h e B ab a utteri n g th e S abd
[th er e f ollo w seven v erses] , Wh en .
8

1
Mar s S ahd 6 M ah
, , . I .

2
hi s i m i quot tio n ; i t h e G a th th se v ses e ascr ib ed to G ur u Ram D a ( Ma h
T s a s a n r n e er ar
s see
T il a g S a h d I M h I V ( p
.

n , , a . . .

T h i s i s p r oper ly a A stp ad i ; ee Ra A a A st di X L Mah I p

3
n
g p ( s s , a , . . .

T h ese v ses are o t to b f o u d i t h e Ra T il g

4
er n e n n
g an .

5
Mul isi F a i a y s i t h e D abista
n n th t th er e w s r p o rt th at N a ak h ad c lled t h e
s n n a a a e n a Mug al s
i to t h e cou tr y T hi i s by o m ean s co u ten an ced by th e S ikh tr a diti o
n n . s n n n .

6
AS 5 A stp ndi X II
, .
, Mah I . .
 J A N A M- S A K H I O F B A B A NA NAK . A .
xxxi

B ab ar m ar ch ed aw a cited th e S ah d i n t h e B ag S ci at h i M ah al a I [th er e f ol low fo ur

y , t h e Ba a b re r
, .

verses] Wh en t h e Baba cam e to S aidp ur th e Hi n d as an d th e M usal m an s co m men ced t o b ur y an d

.
1
,

to burn th e dead on es ; i n ever y house th ey b ega n to w eep an d to beat th ei r br easts an d to l am en t .

T h e G ur u fell i n to a t r an ce ; at t h at t 1 m e th e S abd w as m ad e i n Rag Asa [th er e f ollo w t en v er ses

]
2
.

O n e day M ar d an a said : S ir w h y h as thi s ( tow n ) b een a lik e d estr oye d an d wh y h av e so m an y

“
,

b een killed ? Th e G ur u Bab a repli ed : M ar d an a go an d sl eep un der th at t ree w h en tho u w ilt

” “
, ,

r i se
, I w ill give th ee an an sw er M ar dan a w en t an d slept th ere O n e d rop of grease h ad fallen
.
”
.

on h i s b reast w h en eati n g b r ead A s soon as h e w as ( th er ef o r e ) fall en asl eep an ts c am e an d

.
,

f ell on hi m W hen on e an t bit th e sl eep er h e br ui sed th e m al l w ith h i s h an d an d t h re w the m

.
,

a way . T h e Baba said : Wh at h ast tho u do n e 0 M ar d an a ?

“
M ar dan a an sw ered : F o r th e ,
” “

sak e of on e w h o h as bitten m e al l h ave b een kill ed T h e B aba l augh ed an d said : I n thi s

” “
, , .

very w i se th ey h ave b een kill ed fo r t h e sake of o n e T h en M ar dan a c am e an d fell do w n at .

”

h i s feet Man y p eopl e of S aidpur b ec am e vot ar i es o f th e n am e

. .

A t th at ti m e Jh arfi th e di stiller w as i n pr i so n ; h e w r ote ( to Nan ak ) ; h e w as a K h arar o f

, ,
‘

Kh an p ur but by vi sitin g t h e society ( of th e pious) h e p ut h i s trust i n G od an d b ec am e an U dasi

,
.

T h e Bab a st ar ted th en ce P assi n g th r o ugh P asr fi r h e c am e to th e sm all for t o f Miy Mi th a ‘

. a ,

a nd at a di stan ce of a littl e m o re th an h al f a K as h e w en t i n to a g ar d en an d sat do w n th er e M ia .

Mi th a w as i n for m ed o f it an d said am on g st h i s discipl es : Nan ak i s an excellen t F aqi r bu t w h en “

,

h e w i ll m eet w ith us w e w ill ski m h i m off a s t h e c r eam i s ski mm ed o ff t h e m ilk T h e B ab a

”
, ,
.

said :
“
Mar d an a w h at do es M ia Mith a say ?
,
M ar d an a an sw er ed : S ir h e i s thy m usic al
” “
,

in str um en t as h e i s c aused to so un d so h e soun ds

,
Th en t h e G ur u Bab a said : M ar dan a w h en ,
.
” “
,

Mia Mith a w ill m eet us w e w ill so sq ueez e h im a s t h e j uice i s sq ueezed o ut o f a l em o n

~

, Th en ,
.
”

Mia Mi th a r o se an d said : G o on f ri en d s w e w ill h ave an in ter vie w w ith N an ak

“
H i s di scipl es
, ,
.
”

said : Thou h adst b ef ore said Wh en N an a k w il l m eet w ith us w e w ill so ski m h i m o ff as th e

“
,
‘
, ,

cream i s skim m ed o ff th e Mi a Mitha said : Rise an an sw er h as com e ( to m e) : as th e “

,
‘

j uice i s squeez ed out o f a lem o n so w h en M ia Mith a will m eet ( w ith m e) I w ill squeez e h i m o ut
, , ,
.

T h e m il k i s n othi n g w h en t h e c r eam i s tak en o ff an d th e l em on w h en sq ueez ed o u t w ill be a ,

Th en Mi a Mith a c am e to t h e i n ter vi ew ; h avin g sal uted h e sat dow n .

Mi a Mith a said th en
.

S ick .

'

fir st i s th e n am e o f G od th e secon d t h e pr oph et
Th e ,

0 N an ak i f thou read th e K alim a thou w ilt be accept ed at th e th r eshold 5

.
, ,

Th e B ab a an sw er ed
T h e fi rst i s t h e n am e of G od t h e pr oph et i s t h e cow keep er at th e g ate ,
.

0 S h ekh i f tho u m ak e a r ight aim thou w ilt be acc epted at t h e th r eshold

, ,
.

T h e B ab a added : 0 S h ekh Mith a at th at g ate th er e i s n o pl ace f or t wo ; w ho ever

“
,
r em a n s i
th ere h e r emai n s th er e h avi n g b e co m e o n e ( w ith
,
Th en S h ékh Mith a said : O “
N an ak ,
h o w w ill t h e l am p b urn w itho ut oil ?
”

S l ot .

H im, w h o can n ot be deceived ,

f raud does n ot deceiv e ,
th e d agger does n ot i n flict on e w uno d
( on h im ) .

Th e m i n d of thi s covetous on e palpitates ; how hould t h e lam p b urn

s w ithout oil

T hese ver ses are n ot , to o

be f un d in t h e Rag S ar a t i h .

2
Ass A st p adi x n
,
Ma h I ( p . . .

3
N am e o f a sa vage t i be o f th Rac h n a Duab
r e .

C o m p ar e : S ikh ad é r ay d i v it h ia pp 257 sqq

v

, .
,
.
5
The M oslem co n fess io n of fa ith .
xx xii J A NA M S A K H I O F BA B A N A NA K
- . A .

Th e Bab a an sw er ed
8 16k .

book K u ho uld b p f o m d t h w ick of fear sho u

’
ld b e appli e d to thi s body
The f
o t h e r an s e er r e e ,
.

Un derstan d in g of tr uth should be br ought an d ki n dled

Th us th e l am p b urn s w itho ut oil m ak e light th us t h e L o r d is m et with ,
.

To thi s body adh ere ( differ en t ) te m per s .

C o mfort i s obtai n ed by p erf or m i n g ser vic e ( to G od ) .

A l l t h e w or ld i s co m i n g an d goi n g .

If i n th e w o rld ser vic e ( to G od ) be p e r f o r med

( ) ,

Th en at t h e th r eshold a seat i s obtai n ed .

N an ak say s : th e ar m wi l l b e l ei surely sw un g ( th ere )

1
.

Th en S h é kh Mith a sai d : S ir w h at i s th at K ur an by r eadi n g w hich o n e m ay b eco m e ap

“
,
’
,

pr oved o f an d w h at i s th at book by acti n g up to w hich on e m ay b e co m e accepted ? an d w h at i s

,

th at Dar vesh ship by w hich on e m ay b eco me w or thy o f t h e gate ( o f G od ) ? an d w h at i s th at

-
,

fasti n g by w hich t h e h ear t r em ai n s fi x ed an d do es n o t m ove ? an d w h at i s th at p rayer by th e

, ,

p erf or m i n g o f w hich a favourabl e gl an ce ( o f G od ) fall s ( o n o n e) ?

T h e Baba an sw er ed an d said : M ar dan a pl ay t h e r eb eck ! M ar dan a did so an d th e Baba
“ ”
, ,

m ad e t h e S ahd i n t h e B ag M ar a Mah al a I [ th ere f ollo w fi fteen v er ses] Th en S h é kh Mith a said 2

. .
,

“
Thou h ast pr ai sed th e on e n am e w h at i s thi s on e n am e ? T h e B ab a a n sw er ed : 0 S h ékh ,
” “

Mith a h as an y on e attain ed to an esti m ate o f t h e o n e n am e ? S h akh Mith a said : F or kin d

,
” “

n ess sak e sho w i t to m e ! T h e B aba sei z ed th e a r m of S h é kh Mith a l ed h i m to a co r n er an d

’ ”
,

said : S h é kh Mi th a th e on e n am e of G od w as void Then th e B ab a said : Allah ! an d

“ ” “ ”
.
,

w ith sayi n g thi s t h e oth er b ec am e ash es S eein g thi s S h ekh Mi th a b ec am e aston i sh ed ; w h en h e

.

looked on th ere w as a h an df ul of ash es th er e T h en c am e ag ai n a voice : A l lah ! an d w ith

, .
“ ”

thi s h e r o se an d stood er ect Ther eupo n S h é kh Mi th a c am e o n an d ki ssed h is feet Then th e

. .

B ab a said i n a state o f e c st asy : O n tho se wh o ar e pr esen t f avo ur i s b esto w ed to tho se w h o

“
, , , ,

are n o t pr e sen t h e i s i n eo mp assi o n at e

, F aith i s a f r ien d t h e faithless o n e i s a n i nfi del ; arr ogan ce
.
,

i s w r ath w rath i s unl aw ful

, S en suality i s t h e d evi l ; co n c eit i s i n fi d elity ; th e m o uth of h im
.
,

w h o sl an der s o n e b ehi n d on e s back i s bl ack ; h e w h o i s w itho ut faith i s i m p ur e ; th e t en der

’
, , ,

h ear ted o n e i s pur e Wi sdo m i s m ild n ess ; w h o i s w ithout gr eedi n ess i s a sai n t ; t h e di sho n est
.
,

o n e i s n ot ho n ourabl e ; th e un gr atef ul on e i s sh am el ess Tr uth i s p aradi se fal sehood i s h ell ; .

,

cl em en cy i s an oa th ; for ce i s oppression ; j ustice i s t h e Kur an ; p r ai se ( o f G od ) abl ution ; t h e ’

c ry (
to p rayer ) di scr i min atio n ; th ef t i s covetousn ess ; ad ulter y i s i mp ur i t y ; l eadi n g t h e li fe of a
3
‘

F aqi r i s p ati en c e ; i m p ati en c e i s de ceit

\

T h e w ay i s t h e F i r ; w h o h as n o P i r i s goi n g ast ray

.

,
.

H o n esty i s a fri en d t h e di sho n est o n e i s w o rthless T h e sw o r d b eco m es m en j ustic e th e kin gs

, .
, .

W h o k n o w s an d m ak es k n ow n so m an y thin gs h e i s c alle d w i se ( say s Nan ak Th en th e ”

) , , .

Bab a took l eav e o f M Mith a an d d ep ar ted th en ce S ay : v ah G ur u!

ia .

G oi n g alo n g t h e b an k o f t h e ri ver Ravi h e c am e to L ah aur I n t h e L ah aur Par gan a ( di str ict)

w as a m an w h o o wn ed a C r 6 r e ( o f R up ees) n am ed D un i C an d a Dh u ur K h atr i t h
.

,
p e S i adh of , , ,

w hose fath er w as th en p erf o r m ed Wh en h e h ear d th a t Nan ak t h e a sc etic h ad co m e h e w en t

.
, , , ,
an d p aid r e ver en c e to t h e B ab a an d took h i m w ith h i m T h e G uru w en t an d sat do w n in hi s
( .

house) Th en th e per for man ce o f th at m atter t h e S r adh ) w as t ak en u H e ( Dun i C an d )

.

p .

An d i io m atic expr ssio e n fo r a co m li f w it hout c es

I t a bl c e ar

t h e G n th t o Gu u
.

a m i squ
2
T h is o t a t io
15 the m ses b ei n g sc i bed j h
n, 1 a r 1n ra r A r un ( fi ft G um ) . S ee Mar a,
So l b
a e, V Mah
. .
,

3
T he o ig i al is E l m
r n
3; 3 33 i s in i t l f se
se l
n se ess ; it is ve y li kely a slip
r o f th e i stea d
p en n
of f afi u
‘ .
 JANAM-S A K HI O F BA BA NAN A K A
x x x iv . .

I w ill go to th e Ba a b He am e c f e ll ” do w n a t hi s f e e t an d s a id M ay th at f ood be given :

“
.
, ‘

to m e I am dead of h un ger ” T h e G uru said : Th at ti m e of m eal is p assed but go an d say :

,
.
“
,

en t h e Bab a utter ed a
‘
”
dig up th e r un g o d m k e a cooki n g pl a c e an d ea t ! Th -
v ah a
‘
,

Sa hd in t h e B ag B as an t M a h al a I [ th
,
e r e f ollo w f o u r v .
er ses] .
1

G g v o d th t i t h l t w tch f th e n ight t h e p r ai ses ( of G od )

O n e day th e ur u a e th e r er a n e a s a
,
o

an d stood b ehin d
s
ho ld
u be sun g O ne boy . of se en v y e a r s r o se f r o m h i s ho u s e a n d c a m e ( too ) ,

G W h cit l t d o d w t O n e day t h e Bab a said

a of t e A h 2 n
th e ur u en th e re
.
h r i w as m a e e r se an e
,
.

p to boy b ck W h h w t
"
w y f t er h a vi n g bo w ed hi s h ead th e so c iet v
“
K ee d ay th e - a e n e en
.
a a a ,
,

ar t t h an
“
he ld h im b a ck an d pl c
a e d him e b f o re th e G u r u Th e G u r u a sk e d h i m sayi n g : . W hy
com in g h ere an d r isin g at this ti me ? Till n o w it i s fo r th ee th e ti me o f eati n g playi n g an d ,

"
l pi g Th t boy p i d o t h i d to m ‘
O m son ki n dl e a fi re !
s ee n .a
”
re l e : S ir o n e d a
y m y m“ e r
,
s a e : y ,

I set to kin dle it Wh en I h ad p ut on th e w ood th e fi re first seiz ed th e sm al l pieces an d

. ,

t d
af er w ar s th e ar er l g o n es At thi s I b e c a m . e a f r ai d l es t I m ight ( a l s o ) d ep ar t ( thi s w o r ld ) w hilst
,

little ; in gro w in g big we may meet o r n o t m eet ( w ith G od) like t h e pi eces of w ood Th erefore ,
.

I said : I w il l m utter th e Guru!

‘ Th e assem bly h ear in g thi s b ecame as ton i sh ed an d t h e Baba
’
,

al so w as mu ch pleased Th e boy fell do w n a t h i s f eet A t th at t ime th e Baba utter ed th e S abd

.
.

i n t h e B ag S ir! Rag M ah al a I [ th ere f ollow f our v erses]

3
.
.
,

By th e favo ur o f th e t rue G ur u!
Then th e Bab a st art ed f r o m h i s house an d p assed th e second ti me a r eti red life i n t h e D akkan
( s o ut h ) H .e got h i s liv e lihood by filli n g h i s b e ggi n g v e ss e l w ith m o r se l s ;
4
on h i s fee t h e h ad san dal s

o f w oo d i n h i s h an d a st aff on h i s h ead r oll s o f r op e ; on h i s fo reh ead as Til ak t h e p ai n t o f a

, ,

poi n t W ith h i m w ere S aid?) an d S i ho o f th e Gh é h o Jat t rib e Th e Bab a w en t to t h e co un try

.
.

o f Dh an asar i an d r em ain ed so m e d ay s th er e A t n ight ti m e S aid?) an d S i h é of t h e Gh é h o tr ib e

.
-

both w en t to th e r iver to p erfor m Wo ship Th ey w en t w h en y et on e w atch of th e ni ght w as r .

r em ai n i n g an d tho u ght i n th eir h ear t th at w h at th e G ur u a got o ‘

,
h d f r m t h e K h av aj ah h e h ad ,

got i n th at v ery pl ace O ne n ight th ey w en t an d saw a m an com in g tow ar ds th em in w h ose

. ,

h an d w as a fi sh Th at m an asked : Wh o ar e y ou?
. S aido an d Si bé said : “ We ar e th e
“ ”

di sciples of Gur u Nanak ”

Th at man asked ( f ur th e )
. r Wh t a f or ar e y o u c o m e h ere ? ”
S aid?)
:
“

r epli e d : We ar e al way s goi n g h er e i n th e la st w atch o f t h e n ight to w orship th e K h av zij ah ,

‘
“

b ecause o ur Guru h as obtai n ed ( someth i n g) fr om th e K h av aj ah Th en S ai d?) asked : S i r w h o

6
.
” “
,

are y ou an d w h er e w ill y ou go ?
”
Th at m an an sw ered : I am th e Khav aj eh an d am con tin ually
goin g to th e G uru; I go at this tim e to p ay w or sh i p t o h im To d ay I b r in g h im a fi sh as an .

off er i n g Then S aid?) an d sins cam e an d fell dow n at h is fee t an d said : We are sayin g th at
.
” “

th e G uru h as got it f r om y ou an d y o u ar e sayi n g th at y ou ar e al way s goi n g to p erfor m ser vice

,

( to t h e G u ru
) an d th at, y o u b r i n g t o d a
y an o ff e r i n g to th e Gur u- ”
Th en K h av aj ah Khi dir said .

“
0 y e m en of th e L o r d I am th e w a ter an d th at G ur u i s th e w i n d
, I h ave m an y tim es b een .

p r oduced fr om hi m an d m an y ti mes I h av e b een ab sorb ed i n h im ” B oth di sciples S aid?) an d S i l l ?) .

,

o f th e Gh é h é trib e w en t th en an d f ell do wn at th e feet of th e Gu

, ru Th e G ur u asked : Why .
“

Rag B asan h t , I S a d 3 , Mah . .

T h e M 13 3 } i s h ere th e pi ece o f p o et y su g at t h e obl a tio o f t h e Arti

2
r n n

I t i s a mi squota tio n th e verses bein g asc r ib ed i n t h e G r th to G uru A rj un

.

3
,
; an see S i ri Rag , S a d 4, h
M ah V . .

4
T h e beg gi n g o f
h er e m ost pl in ly a sser ted Cf p xxix n ote 5
Baba N an ak i s a . . . . .

unrfi n o r Ew an m (f é @ 52 a cco rdi g t o Musl im tradition th e p roph et E l ias In

I l /
5 ’
a 5 n .

s as t h e r iver god I n d u
S in dh an d t h e lo wer P anj ab K har i j ah K hi di r is w o r sh ipp ed a l so by t h e Hi n du s un de r ,

t h e m o e co m m o n n am e o f J in d ci P r
r i .

It is n ot men tio ned wh at th e Gur uh ad or w as sup p o sed to h a ve obtain ed

5
, .
 JA NA M- S AK H I or BABA N ANA K . A .
n e w

h ave y o u com e to d ay
-
thi ( ly) ti ? y ou h av e c om e b efor e th e day h as r isen
at mse ear
”
S ai d?) th e Gh é h o .

told h im , h ow th ey h ad m et w ith t h e K h av aj ah Th en t h e Bab a uttered th e S l é k in th e Jap [t her e

‘

f oll o w s ver se] l T h e G ur u Bab a r e mai n ed after th at so m e days i n th e coun tr y of Dh an asari ;

on e .

m an y p eople th er e b e cam e votar i es o f th e n am e an d b eg an to m utt er : G ur u Gur u! ” “

,

Th er e w as a cloi ster of Jai n as th ere th e p eople of w hich p erfor m ed m uch w or ship When , .

they h ear d th at th e G ur u w as c om e they col lected th ei r di scipl es an d cam e w ith th em ; they ,

sp r ead ou t th ei r b eds o utside t h e d eer an d sat on th em They then sen t w or d t o th e G ur u .

,

th at h e should co me o ut to them W hen G ur u B ab a cam e o ut th e h ead J ai n a ask ed h i m : T h en .

,
“
,

w h o art eati n g gr ain n ew an d f u ll an d wh o ar t eati n g split v etch es an d dr i n ki n g cold an d un str ai n ed

,

w ater an d c al l est th y self a G ur u w h at autho r ity h ast th en got th at tho u ar t al w ays killin g li vi n g
, , ,

cr eatures ? ” Th e Baba r e cited ( i n an sw er ) a Paur i of a V ar i n th e B ag Maj h [th ere follo ws a

Pauri ] an d ( t w o ) S l é ks .
“

Wh en th e G uru B ab a h ad
id th ese S l é ks th e h ead Jain a c am e an d fell do w n at h i s feet ;
sa ,

h e b ec am e a votar y of th e n am e an d b eg an t o m utter : G uru G ur u! A t th at ti m e i n a sta te “

,
”

of ec stasy thi s w hol e v ar o f t h e B i g M aj h w as m ade in th e coun t r y o f D h an asar i an d w r itten ,

dow n by S aidé th e Gh é h é ; th e w hol e i s to be r ead I n th e c oun tr y of Dh an asari man y b ecam e

, .

votar i es of t h e n ame ; th ere is also a M anj i th ere S ay : v ah G ur u! .

Th e Bab a d ep ar t ed th en c e an d w an d er ed alo n g Th er e w as a Rak sh asa of th e Dh an asari .

coun tr y w h o w as eatin g m en T h e Bab a p assed th er e S ai dé an d Si h o b ei n g w ith h im T h e

, .
, .

Raksh asa c am e up to th em h avi n g seen th at th e i r on boiler w as p ut o n ,

H e sei z ed th e Bab a an d .

c arr i ed h i m aw ay wh o seein g thi s l augh ed S aidé an d S ih d b egan to w eep an d said : He w il l

, .
“

al so th r e w o u r bodi es in to th e b oiler Th e B ab a sat do w n in th e h eat ed b oi l er an d fell i n t o a .

”

state o f e c st asy A t th at ti m e t h e S ahd w as m ad e i n th e B ag Mar ti Mah al a I [ th er e fol lo w four

.
,
.

ver ses] Th e Rakshasa k ept o n h eati n g t h e boil er but t h e boiler did n ot b e com e hot it b ecame
.
8
, ,

cold Then h e came an d f el l do w n at h i s feet an d sai d : S i r eff ect m y salvation !

. Then Si hé ,
”

ga ve h i m t h e P ah u1 ; h e b ec am e a votar y of th e n am e an d w as em an cip ated ( sav ed )

4
.

T h e Baba w en t o n w an d er i n g abo ut F ur th er o n o n th e sea shore Makhdu

. m Bah ii v adi n was .
,
-
,
5

sitti n g on a c ar p e t an d pl ayi n g Th e G u r u We n t u
p to h i m Then Makh dii m Bah av adi n h avi n g
. .

seen h i m sal u ted h i m an d said : Peace be on th ee O Dar v é sh l Th e Bab a an sw er ed an d said “ ”

,

O n th ee b e p ea c e 0 Makhd u m Bah av adi n t h e K urai shi ! Th en h avin g kissed h is h an d h e sat

“ ”
, ,

down Makh di un Bah av adin said : O Dar v esh N an ak c o m e l et us m ake a tri p on th e sea ”
.
' '
“
, .

Th e B ab a said : M akh d um Bah av adi n h ast tho u seen an ythin g i n maki n g thi s voyage ? ,

Makhdum Bah av adi n replie d : O N an ak on e d ay a tow er c am e in to sight ” T h e Bab a said “

,
.

“
G o an d bri n g i n for mation about it ! Makh dii m Bah av adi n r epli ed : I p r om i se to do it S ir ! ” “
,

Makh dum Bah av ad i n thr ew h i s p r ay er car p et i n to t h e ocean an d spor ti n g spor ti n g h e w en t out

'’
-
,

( in to t h e sea) H e saw th er e on e to wer an d w en t th er e

. A s h e w en t on h e saw t w en ty m en .
,

sea ted th er e H e w en t to them sal ute

. d th em an d shook h an ds w ith them an d sat dow n Wh en
,
.

n ight h ad set i n t w enty di sh es o f f ood c am e d ow n fr o m h eav en ;

,
th e F aqi r s at e th e food Four .

1
S ee th e last s16k o f th e J apj i
G c i bed to G uru A m ar D i s ( thi r d Gu u)
.

2
T h e P a n ri i s i n Ma jh V ar X X V , but i n th e r an th as r r ;
Gran th att ib uted to B aba Nan ak
.

th e follow i ng t w o S l ok s ar e i n V ar X X VI a d a lso i n th e . n r .

T h ese ver ses are n o t to b e f o un d a m o g t h e S b d s o f Rag Mi ni

3
n a .

T h e P ah ul ( o w p r o o u c ed P alm ! ) i s t h e i iti a to y ite o f t h e S ikh s w hich i s h er e c ar r ie d b a ck a s

4
n n n n r r ,

f r a s t h e ti m e o f B aba N a a k which is by o m ea s p ob ble as i t i s never m en tio n ed i t h e G r an t h

a n ,
T hen n r a ,
n .

m o re a ci en t r ite o f t h e P ah u
n l co n si ste d si m ply in t h e d i nk i g o f so m e sh e bet with t w o o th er d i sc iples a n d r n r

utterin g : V 51 G ur u!
”
1

Babaud di n th e fam o u s Mu sal m z m S ai t o f M u lta

5 ‘

- n n.
,
xxxvi JA NA M- S AK HI O F BABA N A NA K . A .

wa tch es ( o f t h e n ight ) th e y w o r shipp e d G od A t d a yb r e ak tho se t w en ty m en w en t aw ay .

.

Makhd um Bah av adi n r em ain ed th at d ay th er e Wh en t h e day h ad r i sen o n e w atch th ree .

o
h ur s) on e ,
bo a t c am e a n lo g a n d it b e g an a l so to s i n k M a
,
khd u m li ft ed u p h i s h an d s b efo r e G od . ,

th at thi s bo at should n ot sin k whil st h e stood th ere Th e bo at ceased to sin k Wh en n ight h ad .

.

se t i n tho se m en c am e b a ck an d re m ai n e d tog e th er d uri n g t h e n ight b u t n o f ood c am e do w n fr o m ,

,

t h e sky T h e F a.
qi rs w e n t o n r e m e m b er in g G od d ur i n g t h e n ight W h en it b e c am e m o r n i n g . ,

tho se m en w en t ag ain aw ay Makh d um Bah av adi n r em ai n ed al so th at day th er e Wh en t h e .

‘
.

se co n d d ay h ad se t i n th at to w er beg an to fall i n Th en Makh dfi m j oin i n g h i s h an ds b egged

,
.

th at th e to wer whil st h e w as sittin g th ere should n o t fall i n an d it c eased to fall W h en n ight

, , ,
.

tho l o c m th y t tog th d u i g t h ight b u t n o f ood c am e do wn fr o m

h ad set i n se m e n a,
s a e ; e sa e e r r n e n ,

h eaven Th en th ese fri en ds said : Wh o i s t h e un for t un ate m an w h o h as th r o wn an obstacle

.
“
,

i n to th e w ay o f G od s w o rks ? Th ey b egan to r eflect an d to i n quir e a m o n g th em selves Th en

’ ” .

sa id M akhd u m B a h a v a d i n : I h a v e p r es e r v ed t h e bo a t an d t h
“ e to w er T h ese m en ask ed : 0 .
” “

D ar v esh w h at i s th y n am e ? Makh d fi m Bah av adi n an s we r ed : My n am e i s M akhd u m Bah av adi n

'

” “
,
,

Th ese m en said : O Dar vesh h er e i s n o pl ac e for P i rs an d Kin g s ; t h e Pi r s an d Kin gs 1

” “
th e F i r .
,

are l u str o u s i n t h e w o r ld an d ar e t h e g at e an d fo u n d atio n o f th e w ay o f G od ; th e h ead of F i re

an d K i n g s i s high
”
.

Makhd um Bah av adi n h avin g said : Peace be on y ou! took up h is p r ayer c ar p et an d p ut it

~ “ ” -

on th e sea an d sat th er eon B ut t h e c ar p et di d n o t go t h e f o ur w atch es o f th e day h e r em ai n ed

.
,

sitti n g on t h e oc ean W h en t h e d ay b egan to sin k tho se m en al so c am e Wh en th ey saw th at

.
,
.

h e w as sitti g on t h e oc ean tho se m en ask ed :

n O D ar v esh w h y ar t thou sitti n g h ere ?
,
Makhdu m ,
”

B ah av adi n repli ed : My pr ayer c ar p et do es n o t go “

Those d i scipl es th en said : Wr ite th e
-
.
” “

n am e o f t e h t r ue G u r u N a n a k ( o n it ) th a t thy c a r p e t m a
y go ! ”
H e w r ot e th en ( th e n am e o f )
,

t h e t r ue G ur u N an ak an d t h e c ar p et of M akhd u m Bah av adi n w en t alo n g an d h e c am e b ack to th e

‘

B ab a H avi n g m ad e h i s sal utatio n h e sat do w n

. T h e B aba ask ed : Wh at h ast thou seen 0 .
“
,

M akhd um Bah av adi n ? H e r eplied : S ir th ou kn o west al l ; I h ave com e b a ck as a sacr ifi ce

” “
,

to thy sl av es T h e Bab a said : .

”
O Makh d i m B ah av adi n w o r k s are a c ar c ass it i s fo r bidden to “ ‘

i , ,

t h e de votees to si t do w n th er e M akhd um Bah av adin c am e th en an d ki ssed ( h i s t h e Baba s)

.
”
,
’

f et A t th at ti m e th e S ahd w as m ade i n t h e Rag S i ri Rag M ah al a I [ th ere foll o w eight v erses]

a
e .
, .
.

Then Makhd um B ah a adi n fl un g a w ay th e p r ay er c ar p e t fr o m h is h an d s ; h e w as or der ed th at h e

v -
,

sho u ld go an d take a P i r M akhd um Bah av adi n said : S i r who m sh all I m ake m y P i r ? Th e .

“
,
”

B ab a g av e t h e an sw er : Wh o m S h ekh F ari d h as m ad e ( h is “
M akhdum Bah av adi n m ade
h i s sal ut a tion shook h an d s an d w as di sm i sse d by t h e Bab a T h e Bab a al so d ep ar t ed th en ce
,
He . .

w en t alon g o n t h e r o ad o f t h e oc ean ; fur th er o n Ma ch i n d an d Garakh n at h w ere sitti n g 3

When .
4

M chin a sa w ( h i m ) h e said :
a O Gor akh n at h w h o i s co mi n g h er e o n t h e oc ean ? ”
,
“
Gorakh n at h ,

an sw ere d : S ir thi s i s Nan ak T h e B ab a m ade h i s app earan c e ; h avi n g said : A d es adé s

“ ” “
, .
,

h e sat do w n Mach i n d ask ed an d said : O Nan ak w h at did th e ocean of th e

.
“
,

w orld app ear ( to th ee) ? I n w hich wi se i s th e oc ean c o ssed ? Th e B ab a utter ed a S ahd in th e r

”

G
t F qi s are al so c l l ed K i g s ; t h us N a k is usu lly called N an k S h ah by t h e Muh am m ad an s
re a a r a n na a a .

T h se ve es o t t o be f o u d m o g t h e S bd e o f S i ri Ri
2
e rs are n n a n a
g .

T h t is to s y : h e w t lo g o th e se sho e b ut o t h e ocea
3
a a en a n n a- r n n
, .

M ch i d ( p o p e ly M ch e d ) a d Go k h r J o i s both h ave the e fo re t h e t i tl e o f ath Gorak h

g ( )
a n r r n ra
a
n ra a e r n ,

n ath b i g t h e so o f Mac h E d r a
e n d g d o o f Ad i ath
n a cco d i g to P r ic e s H i di d Hi d u
n stan i an r an s n n , r n
’
n an n

S l ectio
e vol i p I4 l I l t r ti m es Gor kh ath w as co sid ered th e fo u d o f t h e J ogi sect tho ugh with out
n s, . . . . n a e a n n n er ,
v

re a o s nA t a y r a t M ac hi d
. d Go k h at h w e e o t co te m po a i es o f N a ak as Gor a kh at h w as acco rd
n e n an ra n r n n r r n n
, ,

i g to ll cco u t s a co tem po
n a a y o f K abi It eed th er efo e h a rdly be m e ti ed th a t thi s whol e sto ry i s
n , n r ar r. n r n on

a n i ve tio o f t h e S ikh s w h o con sider M achi d a s a fabulo us bei g h al f m a a d h al f fi sh

n n n , n n ,
~
n n - .
 JA N A M-S A K H I O F BA BA NA NA K . A .
xxxvii

Rag Ramk al i , Mah al a I [th . er e f ollow f o ur

v erses w ith t w o Rah aus] A t th at tim e t h e S abd w a s .
1

al so m ad e
[th ere fol low f our v erses] Mach in d said f ur ther : 0 N an ak practi se th e Y é ga th at tho u
1
.
, ,

m ay st b ecom e f r ee fr om va cilla tion an d c r o ss i n co m f or t t h e w ater o f exi sten c e T h e G ur u .

”

r e cited a S ahd in th e B i g Ram k l i

a Mi h al a I [ th er e follo w f o ur v erses] Then Gerak h n ath h um bly 2
, . .

said : O G ur u: th y P i rsh i p ( spi ri tual g uid an c e) i s (m y ) p r ay er ; f r om th e begi n n i n g f r om th e

“
,

b egin n in g of th e Yug as it h as gon e on T h e B ab a r epli ed : Who m w ilt tho u m ak e ( thy) G ur u .

“
,

Gerakh n at h said : Wh o i s such a G ur u th at h e m ay p ut h i s han d o n thy h ead ?

”
0 Gerak h n ath ? “ '

th at i s thy G ur u wh o m ay be born fr om th y body , Th e B ab a r epli ed : Ver y w ell Th en .

” “
.
”

th e B abe d ep ar t ed an d w en t alon g Th e co n v er satio n w ith Maeh i n d i s fi n i sh ed it w as w r itt en by

.
,

S aidé of t h e Gh é h e Jat t r ib e S ay : v ah G uru! .

Th en m en tion w as m ade of S i n gh al a di pa ( Ceylon ) They Wen t an d stood on th e bottoml e ss -

.

ocean Th e Bab a said : How sh all this bottom less ocean be cr o ssed an d p assed ? Hi s di scipl e s
.
“ ”

S ai dc) and Si he h um bly said : bir by thy o r d er th e m o un t ai n s w ill cr o ss T h e B ab a said

'
“ ‘ ”
.
,

Keep o n readi n g thi s S l ek : th e tr ue n am e is t h e creator t h e S upr em e S pir it w itho ut fear , , ,

w itho ut en m ity of ti mel ess for m un p r od uc ed f r o m a w o m b

, B y t h e favo ur o f th e holy tr ue
, .

G uru! Th en th e Bab e said : I n w hose di sci pl e s m outh thi s S lek w ill be an d w h o w ill con ti n ue
”
.
“ ’

r eadi n g it an d as m an y p e o p l e af ter h i m w ill h ear it th ey w ill al l cr oss th e w ater o f exi sten ce ”

, , .

A t thi s t h e di scipl es fell do w n at h i s feet an d said : S i r w hom tho u pleasest h i m tho u m ak est “
, ,

cor ss
”
. Then th ey w en t acr o ss t h e ocean ( to C eylon ) I n S i n gh al a di p a th ey w en t to th e Raj a .
-

S i v n ahh i an d took up th eir abode in h i s g ar d en o n t h e oth er side of th e ocean

-
A t th at ti m e t h e .

gar den o f th e Raj a S iv n abh i w hich w as w or th n i n e L akh s w as dr i ed up ; it b ecam e gr een ag ai n

-
, , ,

wh a t bo re flow er s got flo w ers w h at bor e l eav es got l eav es

, Wh en M agh er t h e g ar den er saw th at
, ,
.
, ,

th e g ar d en w hich h ad been d r i ed up for years h ad b e co me gr een h e w en t an d i n fo rm ed t h e Raj a

, , ,

S i v n abhi of it sayi n g :
-
S i r com e o ut ! with t h e sitti n g do wn in it of a F aqi r th e g ar den h as
,
“
,
'

b ecom e gr een ! T h e Raj a S i v n abh i sen t sl av e gi rl s o f ex qui sit e b eauty w h o h avi n g arr iv e d
” - -
, ,

th ere began to dan ce Th ey san g m an y Rage an d m ade m an y spor ts but t h e Baba did n o t say
, .
,

an ythi n g h e r emai n e d su
, n k in m edit atio n After w ar ds t h e Raj a S i v n abh i c am e ( hi m sel f ) Havi n g
.
-
.

co me h e b egan to ask an d said : S ir w h at is thy n am e ? w h at i s thy c aste ? ar t thou a Jegi ? B e

“
,

so ki n d as to co m e to m y p al ac e ! Th e B ab a re cit e d a S abd i n t h e B ag Mer e Mah al a [ th ere f ollo w ,

fou r verses
] Th en t h e Raj a S iv n abh i asked : S ir ar t tho u Ger akh n ath ? T h e B ab a r ecit ed
- “ ”
.
,

th en th e fi fth P auri [th ere follow s o n e v erse] Wh en th e Bab a h ad con cl uded ( th i s v er se) th e B aj a .
,

c am e an d fell dow n at h is feet, hum bly b eggi n g and sayi n g : S ir be so kin d as to com e to m y “
,

ho use ”
T h e B ab a r epl i ed : “ I do n ot go o n foot Raj a S iv n abh i said : S i r al l i s giv en to ” - “
. .
,

th ee I f it be th y w i sh m o un t a hor se or an el eph an t ! or moun t also a t ravelli n g th r on e !

.
,
-
”

Th e B ab a r eplied : We w ill r id e o n m e n
” “
Th e K i n g said : “ S ir th ere ar e al so m an y m en ( at .
,

thy d i sposal ) m o un t ! ” Th e Bab a r eplied : Yo ur ho n o ur if th er e be such a m an w h o i s a Raj a

,
“
, ,

( )
o r a p r i n c e an d if th er e be t
,
h e R j
aa o f t h e ci t y o n h i s b a ck I w ill m o un t ”
Th e Raj a said , .

0 K i n g I am thy cr eatur e t h e Raj a am I m o un t ! Th e B ab a m oun t ed on th e b ack o f t h e

“ ”
, , ,

Raj a Th e p eo pl e ( seei n g thi s) b eg an to say th at th e Raj a h ad r un m ad

. Wh en h e ( th e B ab a) , .

h ad co m e h e sat do w n ,
Th e Ram ( l an d kal a an d th e B aj a S iv n abh i j oi n ed thei r h an d s ( i n suppl i
.
-

cation ) an d stood b efor e h im h um bly sayin g : Do y ou w i sh to eat S i r ? Th e Bab a an sw ered

,
“
,

“
I am keepin g a fast Th e Raj a said : S ir h ow m ay w e b estow any b en efit ( on
.
”
T he “
,

Gur u an swer ed : I f th er e w o uld be som e fl esh of m an I w o uld eat it Th e B aj a S i v n abh i

“ ”
.
-
,

Ram k li S a bd 3 4 M h I
a , , , a . .

Ram k a li S ahd 5 M ah I
2
.
, , .

3
Th ese verses a re n o t to be fo un d am o n g t h e S abd s of B i g M arn .
xxxviii JA NA M- S AK HI o r BABA NAN A K . A .

said : “
S ir , m an y m en c ifice for yo u lo
a s pli d Yo ur hon o ur i f th ere
ar e a sa r .
”
T h e B ab a re e :
“
,

w ould be such a m an a son in t h e ho use o f t h e Raj a a p r i n c e of t w elv e y ear s h i s fl esh I w o uld

, , ,

O n thi s t h e Raj a an d t h e Ram b ec am e thoughtf ul ; th en t h e Raj a sa id : O L o r d p er h ap s

”
eat . ,

t h er e i s a son i n t h e ho use of so m e Raj a T h e Ran i said th en : Ho w sh all I give h im up by .

” “

thy or der ? A fight en sued w ith h er ; wh en sh e w a s over co me sh e gave h er son up T h e Ram

”
,
.

said th en : Yo ur hon o ur th er e i s a son i n o ur house look at h i s j an am p atri !

“
,
Wh en th e ,
-
”

j amam p at ri w as ex am i n ed it w as fo un d th at h e w as tw elve years old Th e Raj a said th en ” ‘

- .
, ,

0 son thy body i s requi r ed for th e G ur u! w h at thy d i T h e boy r epli ed : O f ather

” “
,
i s e s r e ? ,

w h at b en efi t i s d er iv ed fr om thi s th at m y body sho uld be r eq u ired for th e G r uu T h e Raj a

”
?
'

sa id : A s thi s on e h as b een m arr i e d sev en d ays h i s w ife al so sho uld be ask e d Th en t h e Rani ”
“ .
,

an d t h e Raj a w en t an d sat do w n at t h e sid e of th eir d au ghter i n l aw Th e R aj a sai d : 0 daughter - -

,
.

t h e body of thy h usb an d i s req uir e d for t h e G ur u w h at i s thy pl easur e ? T h e gir l r epli ed ”
,

0 fath er th i s on e s body i s r equir ed for th e G ur u an d m y w ido w hood i s sac rifice d to th e G ur u

“ ’
, , ,

w h at oth er b en efi t i s d er iv ed fr o m thi s ? Th en t h e four c am e to t h e G ur u an d stood b efor e h im ”

.

Th e Raj a S iv n abh i said : S i r h er e i s t h e boy ! T h e B ab a repli ed : Yo ur hon our th us h e

'
“ ” “
-
, ,

i s o f n o use to m e Th e m oth er sho uld sei z e h i s ar m s an d h is w i fe sho uld sei z e h i s feet an d thou
.

sho u ldst take a k n i fe in to thy h an d an d sl aughter h i m th en h e w ill be o f use to m e ”

Th e Raj a ,
.

S i r n ah bi ob eyed t h e o r d er o f th e G ur u; taki n g a kn i fe i n to h i s h an d h e sl aughter ed hi s son

-
.

Havin g boil ed ( th e flesh ) h e br o ught it an d p ut it bef o re h i m Th en th e B ab a said : Y ou thr ee .

,

closi ng th e ey es an d sayin g : V ah G ur u! p ut ( it ) i n to yo ur m outh ! T h e B aj a an d th e

‘ ’ 1 ”

Ram an d th e Raj a s d aughter i n l aw clo sed th ei r ey es an d said : V ah G ur u ! Wh en they

’ “ ”
- -

p ut it i n to th eir m o uth t h e f our w er e sitti n g th er e b ut w h en th ey op en ed th eir ey es th e G ur u

, , ,

B ab a w as n ot th ere Th e Raj a b ec am e di str essed an d w en t to t h e w ild er n ess ; h e stood on h i s feet

.

b ar e h eaded an d w an dered abo ut sayi n g : G ur u Gur u!

-
Th en after t w elv e m on th s h e ( th e “
,
”

G ur u) c am e an d gave h i m an i n ter vi ew an d appli ed h im to h is feet ; th e r e gen er ation an d dyi n g

of t h e R a j a S iv n abh i w as c ut off h e b ecam e a di scipl e S aid?) th e Jat of th e Gh é h 6 tri be gave
-
, .
, ,

h i m t h e P ah ul by t h e or d er ( o f th e G ur u) ; al l t h e p eopl e o f S in gh al a di p a b ec am e di scipl es th ey -
,

b egan to mutter : G ur u G ur u! th e whole r egion w as par do n ed after th e R aj a S i v n abh i

“
,
”
-
'

.
2

Th e ev en i n g ser vice of t h e soci ety o f S in gh al a di p a -

.

Wh en n ight sets in th en al l assem bl e tog eth er an d sit do w n in t h e Dh arm sal a Th en on e

, .

di sciple goes f or th e food of th e n ight I n th e m orn in g they al l go an d eat togeth er I n whose .

.

di sciple s house t h e m eal tak es pl ace i n to h is kitch en t w en ty on e m aun ds o f salt are b r o ught
’

,
-
.

A t th at ti me t h e secret de votion al ser vic e w as m ad e m an i fest B y t h e f avo ur of t h e holy .

t rue G ur u i s w r itten t h e P r dn san gali t h e sto r y o f t h e em pty p al a c e m editation on th e

- 3

F or m less o n e ; t h e r ecital of th e sec r et devotion al ser vice by th e Babe th e co n sid er atio n o f th e vital
,

b reath an d t h e body At th at tim e th e Bab a w as w i n d eati n g I t w as m ad e b eyon d t h e ocean

. -
.

i n S i n gh al a di p a i n th e coun t r y of th e Raj a S i v n abh i

; at th at ti m e t h e di scipl es S aid6 an d S ihé
- -
,

w er e w ith h im w h en t h e Pr i n san g ali w as m ad e F i rst p ar t : Rag u Asa M ah al a I th er e f ollo w

[
-
, .
, .

t wen ty on e verses]-
A t th at ti me th e Br an san g ali w as m ade t h e k n o w l edge o f t h e so u
.
5
l is -
,

1
It is n o t s a ed , tt w h
h ey sho uld p ut i t o th ei r m outh v ery l ikely pur po sely
at t n
, , .

2
T h e sto y o f Raj a S i abh i i s a l so co tai n ed in t h e l at er J a e m S ak h i s b ut tot lly ch
a g e d ; see
r v -n n -
a n , n

L ho re ed i tio
a p 1 20 It was t ho ught t o o o ff sive as it bo de s o m a d ess
n, . . en , r r n n .

3
L ite ally t h e ch i o f t h e b
r : th T h e P r i sa g ali f o r m e ly fo r m ed a p ar t o f t h e S ikh d evotio nal
a n r ea . n- n r

se vic e b u
r t i s n ow u k o w m o g st t h em ( a t l st i t h e P a i b
n
, n
j ) n a n ea n n z .

T h e w o r d o f t h o r i gi l are : 3 % m
4
s
3 J ETe na

I c ot fi d th ese ve se t h e R g A s ; they w ere as i t appear s n o t receiv ed in t o th e collection of

5
an n n r s in a a

t h e G r an th i f they
, ,

e
, o t a ltog e t h er fi ctitio uar
s n .
 J ANA M- S A K H I O F BA BA NA NAK . A .
xxxix

( th er ei n ) discussed on e could t ake it it w as ( th erefor e ) l eft th er e By S aidfi th e Gh é h o b e

,
but n , .

caused it to be w r itten h avin g m ade h i m w ash h is feet n ear th e sm all shop o f Gorakh Near t h e
, .

littl e shop of Gor akh i s a square i n th at h e (t h e G ur u) b egan to r em ain sep ar ated ( fr o m t h e

,

w o r ld ) B ut t h e secr et d evotio n al se? v i c e w as n o t m ad e m an i fest it w as gi v en to th e Raj a S i v

.
,

n ahb i . Th e w or d w as pr on oun c ed ( by th e Gur u) : if on e m an sh all com e f ro m Jamb udi p a ( In dia ) -

,

for h i m it sho uld be w r itten .

T h e Gur u de p ar ted th en c e H e c ame to t h e house of a c ar pen t er an d r em ain ed th ere d ur i n g

.

th e n i ght Thi s m an p er f or m ed m uch ser vice to h im an d laid out a couch for hi m Th e B ab a

. .

sl ept
( o n it) d ur i n g th e n ight ; i n t h e m o rn i n g be sei z ed w ith h i s h an d th e w ood o f t h e b ut an d
sm ash ed th e co u ch w ith a side post Wh en h e c am e o ut S aid?) t h e di scipl e h umbly said : S ir
- .
,
“
,

i n t h e w hol e to w n n obody w as givi n g us a pl ace b ut thi s car p en ter g ave us a pl ac e Hi s thi n g s

, .

al so h ave b een rui n ed ; h e h ad on e h ut an d a couch thi s al so thou h ast pul l ed do w n an d gon e ,

aw ay . Wh at i s th e m atter co n cer n i n g h i m ? T h e B ab a r epli ed : O h i s lov e ( to m e)

” “

h as b een a ccep ted W hen th at ( c arp en ter ) c am e to h i s h ouse tho se f our feet ( of th e couch ) w ere
.
,

b ur i ed in th e gr oun d but b en eath them w er e f o ur pot s of m on ey ; of th e hov el a p alac e w as

,

r ai sed an d of t h e l o w couch fin e b ed stead s w er e m ade Th en S aido an d S ih o fell down at hi s feet ”

. .
,

Th e Bab a w en t th en to h i s house ( 31 6 hom e to T al v an di ) an d r em ai n ed so me d ay s at ho m e

.
, .

Th en h e set out agai n an d b egan to pass h i s thir d r eti r ed life i n t h e n or ther n r egion I n thi s .

( thir d ) r etir ed li fe h e w as eatin g th e fruit s an d blo sso m s of th e Akk tree but in a d rie d state O n - l
.
,

h i s feet h e h ad a ski n an d on h i s h ead al so h i s w hol e body w as w r app ed up , O n h i s f or eh ead h e .

h ad a Til ak o f saffr o n At th at t im e w er e w ith h i m H asfi t h e bl ack sm ith an d S ih a th e c al ico

.
, , ,

pr i nter Th e Baba w en t to K ash mi r an d r em ai n ed som e days th ere ; m an y p eople b ec am e votar ies

.

of t h e n am e A t th at ti m e th er e w as i n Kash mi r a P an dit Br ah m d as ; h e h ear d th at a F a qi r

.
,
-

h ad co m e W ith h im ( ti e th e P an dit ) w en t t w o c am el s ( l ad en ) w ith th e P uranas an d on h is

. .
,

n e ck h e h ad an idol H avi n g co m e h e said : Ram Ram ! an d sat dow n Havi n g seen t h e “ ”

.
.
,

g ar b ( o f th e B ab a) h e said : Thou ar t a sadh w h y h ast tho u p ut on ski n s ? an d wh y h ast ,

thou t w i sted r oun d r opes ? w h y h ast thou giv en up th e ( pr escr ibed ) w or ks ? an d w h y ar t thou
touchi n g m eat an d fi sh ? Th e Bab a r epli ed w ith th e V ar in th e B ag M alar Mah al a I [ th er e
” '

,
.

f ol low tw o v ar s] Th en th e Pan dit Brah mdi s c am e an d fell do wn at hi s feet an d sai d : S ir

.
2 -
“
,

w h en thi s thi n g w as n o t w h ere w as th en t h e L o r d ? T h e B ab a r ecited t h e S abd s i n th e B i g

”
,

M ar a M ah al a I [ther e follow sixteen v er ses] Th en th e P an dit Br ah m das came an d fell dow n

,
. .
3 -

at h i s f eet ; h e fl u n g aw ay t h e sto n e ( idol ) f r o m hi s n eck an d b ec am e a votar y o f t h e n am e he ,

began to p erfor m ser vic e ( to it ) B ut t h e desi re did n ot l eav e h i s m in d w h atev er ser vice h e
.
,

p er formed th at h e did n atural ly sighin g ; it cam e i n to hi s m i n d th at h e w as per for min g thi s

, ,

ser vic e al so b ef o r e Th e sacri fic e of h i s egoti sm w as ( th er ef o r e) n o t acc ept able

. O n e day t h e G ur u .

B ab a said : G o an d take a G ur u! T h e Pan dit r epli ed : S ir w ho m sh all I m ake m y G ur u?

” “
, _

Th e G ur u Bab a said : G o i n th e w ild ern ess i s a house th er e fo ur F aqi rs ar e sitti n g they w ill
“
, , ,

poi n t h i m o ut to th ee ” Brah m di s st ar ted off ; h avin g go n e th er e h e m ade ob ei san ce to th em

.
- .

Those di scipl es h avi n g p aused for tw en ty o f ur m i t

n u es said : Thy G u r-
u i s i n th t
a m an sio n
” “
.

Th e P an dit c ame b ack an d mad e h is ob ei san ce A w om an dr essed in cr im so n cloth es stood b efor e

.

h im an d takin g h er slipp er b eat h i m b a dly

,
Weepi n g h e w en t b ack ( to tho se di sciples) Tho se
. .

di sciples asked h i m : Hast tho u m et w ith th e G ur u? He r el ated to th em th e acciden t th at

“ ”

h ad h app en ed to h im Th en said those disciples : O br oth er that w as t h e Maya w hom thou “

.
, ,

W hich ar e co n sidered very poi son o us .

2
Of th ese Vars t h e fi r st S i ok i s a sc r i bed i n th e G ran th to A m ar D as . S ee Mal ar v an 1 2 ( p ,
:
, .

3
Rag Mar a S oi a hé 1 5 Ma h
, , , . I .
 JA NA M- S A K H I or BA BA N ANAK A
xl . .

t d i i g Th c ll do t t h f t f t h G u r u B ab a ; h e d r ov e a w ay t h e
am e an d f
” e
w as es r n en h e . e w n a e e e o

r u! e b ec am e t h e d u st o f t h e
”
c
t wo am e s w l ith th e P u n
r a as an d b e g an to m u tt er : G ur u G u h “
,

t f
f ee o t h e s oci e ty ( Thi s
) t r u e s.
to r y w as w ri tt en by H as u t h e bl ack sm ith an d S i h a th e c alico pr in ter
, , ,
-
.

b
T h e B a a e ar e d p t d th en ec H a vi n g p asse .
d a L akh a n d a q u ar t er o f m ou n t ai n s h e asc en d ed

h id c M h d v hiv Th M h d G rakh n ath B h ar th ari

'

a e o
S um é ru w ere t h e r es en e
,
o f a a e ( S a ) w as er e a v . , , ,

G opi can d an d Oarp at w ere sitti n g T h e Baba w en t up to th em m ad e h i s sal utatio n an d sat

-
. ,

dow n Th e S iddh s gave h i m th en a sm all r o un d box an d said to h im : 0 child o f th e K ali

.
“

u go fill it ith t b i g it ! T h e B ab a w en t to fill t h e box ; w h en h e put it

”
y g , , ( w w a e r
) an d r n

i n to th e w ater diam o n ds an d p ear ls b eg an to fall i n to it Th e Guru Bab a beat th e box w ith

,
.
:

ear th so th at it b r ok e i n to pi ec es
,
H e join ed th en th e piec es agai n tog eth er an d recited t h e $ 16k
.

He b r eak s fashion s an d ador ns ,

O Nan ak wi thout th e Tr ue on e th er e i s n on e oth er

,
.

Th en th e stren gth o f th e m an tras w en t o ff ; h e p ut th e box i n to th e w ater an d got Water ( i n it)

h avi n g filled it h e b r ought it b ack to t h e S iddh s A ll th e S iddh s dr an k o f t h e w ater but th e w ater . ,

w as n ot exh auste d Mahad ev asked th en : Ar t tho u a household er or a lo n ely m an ? ”

.
“ Th e
B ab a r ep l i ed : Wh at are th e ch aracter istic sig n s of a lon ely m an an d o f a householder ?
“ ”

[ th er e f ollo w s a n u m b er o f v er ses abo u t t h e state o f a ho usehold er abo ut lon eli n ess an d B ai r ag ,

( i n di ffer en c e to t h e Th en said Bh ar th ar i : O N an ak b e co m e tho u a Jd gi w h o con ti n u es

“
, ,

to live for ever ! T h e Bab a r epli ed :

”
Wh at i s th e f o r m o f t h e Jog ? B h ar th ari said :
“
Th e ” “

for m of th e Jog i s th e earr i n g t h e p atch e d q uilt t h e w all et t h e st aff ( an d ) th e b o rn t h e soun d of

, , , ,

w hich i s e m itted i n t h e un iv er se T h e B ab a r e cited th e S ah d i n th e B ag Asa M ah al a I [th ere

.
”
, .

f ollow f o u r v e r ses
j
‘
Th en th e S i ddh s said : Nan ak go tho u to th e m oun tai n ( K ail asa th ere i s
.
“
,

an assem bly th er e a m ee tin g of t h e S iddh s t ak es pl a c e th ere T h e Bab a r epli ed : H o w m an y “

, .

d ays jour n ey i s it to t h e m oun tai n ?

’
Th e S i ddh s said : Th e m o un t ai n i s di st an t th ree d ays
” “ ’

j our n ey ; w e ar e goin g th er e w ith t h e p ac e o f t h e w i n d Th e B ab a said : G o y e I sh all come .

” “
,

slo w ly T h e S id dh s star t ed an d after th em th e B ab e too ; h e w en t th er e i n o n e m om en t on t h e

”
. .

flight of h i s desi r e Havin g com e th ere h e sat dow n un d er a F icus I n dic a after war ds t h e S iddh s
.
,

al so c am e ; w h en th ey look ed about h e w as ( al r eady ) sittin g th er e T h e S iddh s ask ed :

, When .
“

h as thi s on e co m e ? Th e f or er un n er of th e S iddh s said : To d ay it i s t h e thi r d day that this

” “ -
,

on e h as com e T h e S i ddh s b ec am e asto n i sh ed at thi s Wh en t h e ti m e o f t h e c up c ame th e

”
. .
,

flagon w en t r oun d ; th ey br ought it al so to t h e B aba w h o ask ed : Wh at i s thi s ? T h e S iddhs ,

“ ”

an sw ered : T h i s i s t h e c up of th e S id dh s dr in k t h en ? T h e B ab a said : Wh at does it

“ ” “
,

co n tai n ? Th e S iddh s an sw ered : I t con tain s r aw sugar an d th e blossom s o f th e Dh ava tree ”

” “
-
.

T h e Bab a r ecited th en a S abd i n th e B i g Asa M ah al a I

[th er e foll o w fo ur v er ses] Th en th e
, .
.
2

S iddh s said : A des ad es i ( salut ation sal utat i o n i

“
) but th e Bab a said : Ad es to th e p rim ev al
'
” “
, ,

divin e m ale ! H e st ar ted th en ce

”
.

H is f ur th retire d li fe w as p assed i n t h e w est

o O n h i s feet h e h ad sho es o f l eath er an d tr o user s .

o f l eath er ; on h is n eck h e h ad a n e ckl ac e o f bo n es on h i s f o r eh ead a Til ak

of a dot hi s cloth es , ,

w er e bl ue He played am on gst childr en ; ( th us) pl ayin g h e w en t on a Hajj

.

O n e Haj : fell i n .

w ith hi m an d th ey rem ai n ed tog eth er d ur i n g t h e n ight T h e Haj i ask ed hi m an d said :

.

0 .
“

Dar v esh thou h ast n o c up n o staff n o ski n n o sack ar t tho u a H i n d u o r a M

, , , usal m an ?
, Th e ,
”

B ab a r ecited a S ahd i n th e B i g Til an g Mah al a I th er e f ollo w four v er ses id g i

,
[ ] , T h e H aj : sa a a n.
.
3

S i r w e are livi n g i n thi s w o rld w h at w ill be o ur st at e ?

, T h e B ab a r ecited th e S abd in th e
,
”

1
Rag Asa , S a hd 37, Mh a . r .

2
AS 5 S ahd 38 Ma h I
, , . .

3
Til g an , h
S a d 2, Ma h . I .
x lii JA NA N - S A K H I 0 F BA BA NA NA K . A .

Th ey are b ur n t i n h ell like r o asted m eat put on a spit ,

.

G reat m i sery w ill b efall th em wh o are d r i n ki n g Bhan g an d w i n e ,

.

A pig i s i n ter dicte d f r o m li quor an d b eer n o r i s it Bh an g d r i n ki n g ,

- .

Wh o w alk acco r di n g to t h e advice of th eir l ust th ey w ill suff er gr eat p ai n ,

A t t h e day of t h e resur r ectio n th er e w i l l be a cl am o ur an d n oi se .

A t th at d ay t h e m oun t ai n s w ill fl y about as w h en cotto n i s c ar ded ,

O K az i n on e oth er w ill si t ( th er e ) G od hi m sel f w ill st an d

, ,
.

A c c ord in g t o j ustic e al l w il l be decided th e t ablet i s h an d ed ov er at th e g at e ,

.

Just in qui r ies ar e m ade th er e by w hom sin s w er e com m itted

‘

, ,

Th ey ar e bo un d an d th ro wn i n to h ell w ith a l ayer ( o f earth ) on th eir ,

ne ck an d w ith a

black f ace .
0

T h e do er s o f good w or k s w ill b e un con c er n ed at th at d ay .

T h ose w ill be r esc ued O N an ak w ho se sh elter h i s w o r ship ( th e Pr oph et ) i s

, ,
.
1

Th en P i r P atali a said : S i r w e ar e livin g i n th e w or ld h o w w ill G od be obtain ed ? Th e Baba

, ,
”

r e pli ed w ith t h e S ahd in t h e B ag Til a g Mah al a I [th er e f ollow f o ur ver ses] W h en th e Bab a h ad n ,
. .

utter e d thi s S ahd t h e K azi Rukn Di n an d th e F i r P a tali a c am e an d ki ssed h i s h an ds an d h i s feet

,

a n d w ith th e i r say i n g : V ah G uru ! w at er w as p r od uc ed i n t h e well T h e B ab a w as pl eased

“ ”
.

an d d ep ar ted th en c e ; h e c am e ho m e ag ai n 2
.

H is fif th r eti red li fe T h e B ab a w en t to Gorakh h at ar i

. There h e w as seen by th e S iddhs, -
.

w h o ask ed : Wh at K h atri ar t th en ?
“
T h e Bab a r epli ed : M y n am e i s Nan ak T h e eighty
” “
.
”

f o ur S iddh s m aki n g th eir ( di ffer en t ) po st ur es w er e sitti n g th er e

, Th en th e S iddh s said : 0 , .
“

devotee say som e p r ai se ( o f

, T h e B ab a an sw ered : T h e con v er sation w ith t h e S i ddh s is
(
w r i t t en ) i n t h e B ag Ramk al i M ah al a I [ th er e f ollo w fi v e v er sesj , Th e S idd h s ga v e h i m th en a .
f"

cu p o f fi v e S eer s ( = t en poun ds) T h e B ab a p ut it o n t h e gr oun d ; at thi s t h e S iddh s b ec am e p uffed

.

up an d sa id : S ee so m ethi n g or sho w som ethi n g !

“
Th e B ab a r epli ed : Well l et it be so ; i f ” “
,

y o u w ill do so m ethi n g I w ill look Th en th e S iddh s b egan to sho w th ei r po wer ; so me on e ”

, .

m ad e fl y ( i n th e a ir ) a d eer ski n an oth er c a use d a sto n e to m ove abo ut an oth er g av e f or th fi re

-
, , ,

an oth er c au sed a w al l to r u n abo u t T h e Bab a c am e i n to a state o f ec stasy ; at th at ti m e h e made

.

thi s s16k
If I p ut fi d m k
on hou f o w d c u th b t food to b m d
re an a e a se o sn an a se e es e a e .

I f I tu ll p i
rn a i to w t d d i k it
a ns d d iv t h
n th bout a er a n r n an r e e ear a .

I f I p ut t h ky l d w igh it
e s d p ut f t w d
o n sc a es a nT k i to ( th c l ) e an a er ar s a an
4
n e s a es .

If I i c m uch th t I b t co t i d ( i y pl c ) i f I l d l l bo ut by o i g
n r ease so a e no n a ne n an
, a e , ea a a a n se- r n .

If I c t i l l t h pow th i d l o t l l it
as er a n a e er er e s an a s e

As gr eat as t h e L or d i s so gr eat are h i s gifts in givi n g h e does h is pl easur e

, , .

O N an ak on w ho m h is favour able look h i s h e g ets t h e gr eatn ess of t h t

,
( ) e r ue n am e , .

0 Nan ak t h e fa c es of th e w o r k er s o f m i r a cl es w ill be bl ack g re tn ess i s i

,
( ) ; a n th e t r ue n am e .

t h e S id d h s sa id : “
Ad es b ut th e Bab a sa id : “ To th e p rimeval divin e ma le

1 o o
l ast ver se look s v y su p
Th e e y u l ke N n k tho u gh h is a m e is i ser ted I t co tai s
4

a d er s 1 c ro n s , n v r n r a a , n n . n n

a pl i co fessio o f t h Islam a d t h i t ces io n o f Muh a m m a d whic h N a ak o w h er e else h as m a de

a n n n e n e n er s
, n n .

2
I eed h a d ly m t io h
n r t h t t h is w hol e st o y i s w i t h o ut a
en d tio h t ho gh v y
\
n er e ,
y f o u w a e
a
er t u a er
r n n a n v ,

b g 311 1f? ( co v sa t io ) is m ad e up u d r t h e t i t le 3
l n er n
33 fin fz w hich is i n m y p ossession n e

B i g Ram k li S i dd h G o ti l M h I
, .

3
a ,
(p s , a . . .

4 o
A ta k S equ l to f u m s s o
n I T h e se se of t h i s ph ra se i : to wei h m o st acc ur at ly
a o r a a ich n
w h is do n e s
.

g e ,

by putti n g a ta k i to o e o f th e sc les i o der t m ak e it sin k

n n n a , n r o .
 JANAM-S A K H I O F BA BA NA NA K . A .
xliii

( be) salutation ! ”
At th at tim e th e w or d w as
poken ( as w ritten ) in th e B i g G auri A stp adi s
, ,

M ah al a I [th er e f ollo w s on e A stpadi ] T h e S iddh s said th en : Ades ades ! ” th e Baba ( h o w

.
l “

To t h e pr im eval divi n e @
.
,
_

ev er ) said : al e ( be ) sal ut atio n !

“ ”

A ft er th at t h e G ur u Bab a w e n t ho m e O n e d ay t h e or d er of t h e L o r d w as m ad e ( m an ifest)
.
,

th at on e discipl e of good c aste i n Kh adur w as m utter i n g : G ur u G ur u! ” an d th at t h e w hole o f “

,

K h adfi r w as m i n din g t h e ( godd ess) Dur g a an d th at al l w ere t ea z in g th at di scipl e w h o r em ai n ed

!

, ,

in t h e quar ter o f t h e Tih an as an d th at h i s w or sh i pp er w as L ah an a O n e day th at discipl e w as

' '

, .

sittin g an d r ep eati n g h i s
j ap ( m utter in g ) G ur u A n g ad h ear d it an d a sk ed w ho se thi s w or d ,
,

w as. Th at di sciple r eplied : G uru Nan ak s G ur u A n gad c am e togeth er w ith th at di sciple

“ ’
.
”

an d fell do w n at th e fe et
( of th e B aba) an d as soon as h e h ad seen h i s sight h e tor e aw ay t h e
, ,

j 1 n gl i n g b all s f r o m h i s h an d s an d feet an d th r ew th em aw ay ; h e b egan to m utt er : G ur u G ur u “

,

an d c am e to ser v e h i m
; h e scour ed th e pot s an d sw un g t h e f an O n e d ay G uru A n ga d w en t .

to w ar ds th e close o f n ight ; w h en h e look ed about h e saw a w om an dressed i n cri m son cloth es ,

sittin g an d p u lli n g ( t h e f an ) Guru A n g ad h um bly said : 0 K in g w h o w as th at ?” Th e B aba

.
“
,

r epli ed : O A n g ad th at w as D urga ; e ver y eighth d ay sh e i s com in g to do ser vi ce to t h e G ur u ”

“
, .

Th en G uru A n gad f ell dow n at h i s feet O n e day by th e or der o f th e L or d t h e foot o f t h e B aba .

w as sh aki n g W h en Gur uA n gad looked on sev er al ( livi n g ) creatures w er e takin g l eav e o f h i s feet ”
.
, .

O n e da y G ur u A n g ad h a d got cloth es fr o m t h e to w n an d p ut on a suit Th e G ur u Bab a ga v e .

h i m t h e or d er to b r in g g rass Guru A n gad b r ought gr ass fr om t h e p ool s but al l h is cloth es b ec am e

.
,
'

sulli e d by m u d When th e m oth er ( th e w i fe o f N an ak ) saw thi s sh e began to be an gr y w ith t h e

.
,

Bab a an d said : Thi s on e al so i s dr iv en aw ay ( by th ee) by w or ldly b usi n ess ; h e i s an ot h er s son

“ ’
,

w h o h as b r ought ( t h e g rass) h avi n g sulli ed h i s cloth es w ith spot s an d m ud Th e B aba l augh ed ”

.

an d said : 0 m oth er thi s i s n o t m ud thi s i s san d al w ood p er f um e o f thi s an d th at w o r ld ”

, , Th e -
.

m oth er re mai n ed silen t at thi s Th en t h e B ab a w en t an d slept ; w h en it w as din n er ti me a sl av e

.
-
,

gi r l b eg an to aw ak en h i m S h e licked th e feet o f th e Bab a w ith h er ton gue an d at th e m o m en t

.
,

o f licki n g th em sh e saw th at th e B ab a w a s stan di n g i n t h e oc ean ; a bo at o f di scipl es w a s w ith

h im w hich h e was p ushin g on an d p ulli n g o ut

,
Then th e m oth er also cam e an d said : I s Nan ak .
“

a w ak e ?
”
T h e sl av e gir l said :
”
N n k s
a
- a i n o t h ere 0 m oth er h e
“
i s st di g
a n n i n t h e beean ”
Th e , , .

m oth er b egan to b eat th e sl av e gi r l an d said : A l so thi s on e co m m en c es to m ak e d r ol l eri es ”

-
“
.

Th en t h e B aba aw oke an d t h e m oth er said : 0 child thi s sl ave gi r l al so com m en c es to m ak e ,

-

d r ol l er i es sh e says th at N an ak i s st an din g i n t h e ocean

, ,
Th e Bab a repli ed : 0 m oth er do .
,

n o t c are for w h at a m ad sl a v e gi r l talk s T h e sl av e gi r l b e c am e th en m ad but as a r ew ar d for

-
” -
.
,

t h e sight ( sh e h ad h ad ) sh e w as r ec eive d i n to th e soci ety ( of th e di sc ip l es) Man y p eople b ecam e a

.
,

at th at ti m e votar i es of t h e n am e .

Th en by th e or der ( of th e L or d ) Gorakh n ath cam e to th e Bab a an d said : A w ide diffusion “

( o f th y n am e) i s mad e Th e B ab a r epli ed : O Gorakh n ath i f an y on e w il l b elon g to us y o u

” “
. , ,

w ill see y o u r sel f Th en t h e Bab a w en t o ut of th e ho use an d m an y p eopl e votar i es of th e n am e

”
. , ,

f ollo w ed h i m By th e o r der ( of t h e L or d ) copp er c oi n s w er e l aid o n th e g r o un d ; m an y pe ople

,

took th e copper c oi n s r o se an d w en t aw ay Wh en th ey w en t f ur th er on Rup ees w er e laid on

,
.
,

th e g r oun d ; m an y p eopl e t ak in g t h e Rup ees wen t aw ay W h en t h ey w en t f ur ther o n gold m uh ar s .

,

w er e l aid do wn Whoever h ad r emain ed w ith h im took th e gold m uh ar s and w en t aw ay T wo

. .

di scipl es r emained as y et w ith h i m Wh en th ey w ent f ur th er on th er e w as a fun er al pyre upon .

, ,

whi c h f o u r l am p s w er e b u r n in g ; a sh ee t w a s sp re ad ov er it ( un der which ) a dead on e w as ,

1
to be fo un d am o n g th e A stp di s o f th e R ag G ur i
No t a a .

2
T h e w or d s o f t h e o r ig i al r u th us i t ! a? 3 1 m ?fi m fi a l 3 1 % re v % 3%
‘ ' ‘
n n 3
I ha ve tr an slated them literally but their se se i s n o t quite clear to m e ,
n .

A wo nderful exa m ple o f S ikh cr ed ulity !

3
X liv JANA N -S A K HI O F BA BA NA NAK . A .

lyi n g but a sten ch was com in g ( fr o m h im) T h e

,
id I s ther e an y on e wh o w ill eat . Bab a sa :
“

this on e ?” The oth er di sciple wh o w as ( with h i m ) t urn ed away h i s face an d spit o ut an d

, , ,

h avin g spit o ut w alked away G uru A n gad alon e cam e on an d h avin g r eceived a pr omi se stood
. ,

th ere an d said : 0 S ir fr om w hich side sh all I apply my o h u I t w as said : Fr om t he

”
“
,
m t ? “

side of th e feet th e m o u ,
th should be applie d Wh en G uru An g ad lifted up th e sh eet G uru .
”
,

N an ak was lyi n g th ere asl eep Then Gdrakh pr on oun c ed th e w or d : 0 Nan ak h e is thy G uru
.
'
“
, ,

w h o wi ll be p r od uc ed fr om thy body Th en h i s n am e w as ch an ged fr om Lah an a to G ur u.

”

A n ga d .Gar akh n ath d ep ar ted an d Nan ak r et ur n ed to h is house Th en t h e p eople b egan to .

r ep en t v ery m u ch ( of w h at th ey h ad don e) Those w h o h ad tak en th e copp er coi n s said : I f “

.

w e h ad go n e fur th er o n w e w ould h av e b r ought ,

R u p ees
”
an d tho se w h o h ad t ak en th e Ru p ees , , ,

said : I f w e h ad gon e fur th er on w e w ould h ave got gold m u

“ h ar s
”
Th en th e Bab a uttered
,
.

th e S ahd in th e B ag S i ri Rag Mah al a I [ th er e f ollow four v erses] l , . .

Th en on e day th e order of th e L or d cam e th at M akhd um Bab ava di n t h e F i r of M ultan ,

-
, ,

w en t to th e m o sque on a d ay of a festiv al an d m an y di scipl es of h i s an d p eopl e c ame w ith hi m ,

to p ray Th e w or d of Makh d i m Bab ava di n w as th en fulfill ed ; h e b egan to sh ed t ear s an d to

.
'

r -

w eep . His di scipl es asked : May th e F i r liv e in h ealth w h y art tho u w eepi n g ?
“ ”
Makhd ri m , .

B ab av a di n r epli ed : O se r v an ts o f G od thi s w or d must n ot be told T h e di scipl es said :

“ ”
- .
,

May th e F i r l iv e i n h ealth be so kin d as to tell us ! Th en Makh d i m B ah av a di n said : Fr om

,
”
r - “

to d ay th e fai th of n on e w il l rem ai n fi r m all w ill b e com e i nfi del s ” Th e di sciples sai d : May

-
,
.
“
.

th e F i r liv e i n h ealth be so ki n d as to expoun d us th i s ”

, M akhd um B ah av a di n replie d : 0 .
- “

fr i en ds wh en a H in du w ill co me in to p ar adi se th en th ere will be light i n p ar adi se

, Th en as , .

m an y as be i n t elligen t th e faith of all th ese do es n o t r em ain fi r m Th e di scipl es b eg an to say

”
.
,

“
May t h e F i r live i n h ealth ! t h e l earn ed p eopl e say th at for a Hi n d fi p aradi se i s n ot dec reed ,
.
”

Th en Makh dir m Babav a di n said : Who am on g y o u i s w ell r ead an d i n telligen t him b rin g to
'
- “
,

me !
”
Th ey b r ought a l earn ed m an Makh d irm B abav a di n wr ote th en a 8 16k an d g ave it to .
‘

h i m ( to th e p urpor t) : We h av e packed up give us so m e n oti c e ” A n d o r ally h e added : Th e

“
, .
“

n am e of th at Dar v é sh i s Nanak h e i s livi n g i n T al v an di ; wh en h e ask s for this giv e it to h im ”

, , .

Th at man w en t to Tal v an di ; abov e t wo K as fr om it h e sat down an d said : If it be t r ue h e “

,

w ill sen d for m e Th e Baba sen t th en on e di scipl e to h im an d said :

”
.
I n th at g ar d en is a m an “
,

w h o h as com e f rom Multan h e i s a m an of M akh d i rm Bab av a di n c al l h i m an d b r in g h im h er e ”

’

-
, , .

H e br ought hi m to t h e G ur u; h avin g co m e h e ( zl e th e messen ger ki ssed h i s feet Th e Gur u

) . .

ask ed for th e p ap er Makh d r i m Bab ava di n h ad w r itten an d r ead it Makh d ii m Bab ava di n h ad
-
-
, .

w ri tt en : We h av e p acked up give us so me n otic e

“
Th e Baba wr ote a S l é k abov e th at 8 16k
, .
”

Wh o i s filled up h e w ill pack up ,

O Nan ak th eir f ac es ar e br ight wh o dep art h avin g don e w h at i s r ight

, , .

T h en th e Bab a wr ote hi m in pl i p o
tho u w e al so shall come f orty d ay s after ” A t
an r se :
“
Dep ar t , .

th at ti me th e S abd w as m ade i n th e B ag S rri Rag Mah ala I [th ere f oll ow fi ve v erses Then th at
]
3
, . .

m an w en t to M u ltan Makh d ii m Bah av a di n h ad gon e out with h i s di scipl es wh en th at m essenger

‘

. -

br ought h im t h e letter ; h avin g seen it h e b egan to w eep His di scipl es asked : S i r wh y do y ou .

“
,

w eep ? He r epli ed : 0 fr i en ds I h ad wr itt en : i f ou go w e w ill go togeth er w e w ill go to

” “
y , , ,
t h e th r eshold of G od He h as wr itt en m e : go thou fir st w e al so sh all com e f or ty d ay s af ter
.

, .

0 fri en ds I am anxio us abo ut those f or ty day s b ecause I sh all h v to

, a e r emain f or ty d ays in dar k ,

0 fri en d s on a ccoun t of those f or ty days I am w eepi n g for h o

w w il l th ey be p assed ? If
n ess ;
,
,
h e w ould go w e w ould go w ith comfor tabl e light
, Wh en th e de par t ur e ( d eath ) o f Makh dfi m .
”

Bab ava di n h ad t ak en pl ace tr an uillity en ter ed t h e h ear t o f h

i s di scipl es an d of th e p eopl e
-
q , .

S iri Rag , S abd 3 , M ah . I .

2
T he p ape r is to rn h ere .
3
S i ri Rag , S abd 24 , Mah . I .
 . JA NAM-S A K H I 0 F BA BA NAN AK . A .
X IV

Th en cam e to t h e b an k of th e Ravi ; h e p ut fi v e P ai sa befor e G ur u A n gad an d f ell

th e Bab a
do wn at h i s feet ; thi s b ec ame kn own th en am on g h is r etin ue Then am on g all th e soci ety th e
1
.

i n telligen c e w as spread th at t h e Gur lg Bab a w as in t h e house of éan an ; th e society cam e to see

,

h i m Hi n d u
, s an d Mu sal man s al so c am e Then G ur u A n gad w ith join ed h an ds sto od before hi m ; .

th e Bab a said : A sk som ethin g ! Gur u A n g ad said : 0 K in g if it pl ease th ee m ay th at w hich

“ ”
, , ,

w as br oken off fr o m t h e soci ety h e agai n applied to ( i t s) skir t ! Th e an sw er w as given to G uru

,
2

A n gad : F or thy sake all ar e p ar do ne d ” Th en G ur u A n g ad fell dow n at h i s f eet

“
A t th at ti m e
. .

th e S abd w as m ade i n t h e B i g M aj h Mah ala I [th er e f ollo w f our v er ses] Then t h e Bab a w en t 3
. .
,

to a S ar i h tr ee an d sat dow n un der it ; th e S ari h t ree h ad becom e dr y an d b ecam e n o w gr een agai n

- -
,

l eaves an d blossoms c am e for th ; th en G ur u An gad fell do wn at h i s feet Then th e m oth er ( t h e w ife .

of Nan ak ) b eg an to w eep ; b r oth er s r el ation s all th e r etain ers b eg an to w eep A t th at ti me th e

, ,
.

S abd w as m ade in th e Rag V adh an s M ah al a I [th ere f oll o w f o ur v er ses] 4 Th en t h e soci ety b eg an , . .

to si n g fun er al son g s ; th e Baba fell i n to a tr an c e A t th at ti m e th e or der w as given an d t h e B ag .

T ukh ar i w as m ade Th e Bab a utt er ed th e Bar ah m ah a ; it w as n ight to w ar ds d a wn of d ay at t h e

'

.
, ,

ti m e of hi s dep ar tur e Th e Rag Tukh ari Bar ah m ah a M ah al a I [ th ere f oll ow seven teen
.
, , .

Th en h i s son s said : O fath er w h at w ill be our st at e ? Th e G ur u an sw er ed : “ Not even t h e

“
,
”

dog s o f the Gur u are i n w an t y o u w ill get pl en ty of cloth es an d bread an d if y ou will m utter
, ,

‘
Gur u G uru! th e en d o f yo ur exi sten c e w ill be obtain ed ” Then t h e H in d u
,
’
s an d M u sul m an s .
'

w h o w ere votar i es of th e n am e b eg an to say t h e Musal m an s :

“
W e sh al l bur y h im an d t h e
, , ,
”

Hi n du s: We s h al
“
l b urn h i m
”
Th en th e B aba said : P ut y e flo w er s o n both si des on t h e r ight
.
“
,

sid e p u t tho se o f t h e Hin d u s an d on t h e l ef t th o se of th e Mu sal man s If th e flo wer s o f t h e H i n d us .

wil l r em ai n g r een to m orr o w th en th ey sh all b u r n m e ; an d i f th e flo w ers of th e M u

-
,
sulm an s w ill
rem ai n gr een th en th ey sh al l bur y m e ” Th en th e Bab a or der ed t h e soci ety th at th ey should
,
.
,

re cit e t h e p r ai ses ( of G od ) ; th e soci ety b egan to r ecite t h e p r ai ses ( as wr itten ) i n t h e Rag G au ri ,

p ur bi Mah ala I [th ere f ollo w four ver ses]

, . Rag Asa M ah al a I [ th er e f oll ow t wo 6
, .

th en fr om Dh an zi sar i Rag [ th er e foll ow s on e v er se]

'

then th e $16k w as r ead : Th e w in d i s “

t h e G ur u ” et c W h en ( th is) $ 161: was r ead

,
. h avi n g t aken up ( hi s feet ?) h e fell asl eep
Wh en th ey lifted up th e sheet th er e w as n othin g at al l
9
Th e flo w er s o f both p arti es , .

h ad r em ain e d gr een T h e Hin d u s took th eir s an d w en t an d t h e Mu

, sal m ans took th eir s an d w en t .

Th e w hole soci ety fell on th ei r kn ees S ay : v ah Gur u! I n t h e S am v at year 1 595 th e t en th .

,

d ay of t h e li gh t h al f of t h e m on th o f A sfi Bab a Nan ak w as ab sor b ed died ) i n Kar tar pur '

, .

I t was said : v ah Guru v ah G uru v ah Guru v ah Gur u! Th e S akhi i s fin ish ed, , , .

I T his in iti ation or appoin tmen t to t h e G uruship ; a fter war ds as it appear s fr o m t h e later
w as t h e ,

Jan a m S ak h i s a cocoa n ut al so w as placed b efore t h e successor ; see p xlviii l 1 5

-
,
- .
, . .

Th e sen se i s ; m ay th o se w h o w ere excluded fr o m th e soc iety ( o f t h e d i sciples) be a gai n r esto re d !

2
, ,

A m i sq uota tio n t h e ver ses b ein g ascr ibed i n t h e G r an th to G ur u A j un ; see Rag Maj h S abd 18
3 r , ,
,

M ah V ( p
. . .

4
V adl l an s, A aba l ma , 1, Mah . I .
5
kh zi ri , B arali m ah a, l , Mah
Bi g T u
'

. I .

6
Gu a ri p fi r bi d i p a i 1 ,k Mah I ( p £55 S abd 30 Mah I
. . .
7
, , . .

8
T he MS . is t o r n h er e an d o nly a few w o r d s rem ai n Th e leaf h ere i s tat tered .
9
,

1°
A n n o Do m in i 1 53 8 ,
 xl v i JANAM—S AK HI O F BA BA NA NA K . B .

B .

J A N A M -S A K H I O F B A BA NA NA K .

(E n l ar ged r ec omp ilation f A )

o .

Th e J
p atri of Baba Nan ak w as w ri tten i n th e S am vat y ear fi fteen hun dred an d eighty
an am-

t wo on
,
1
th e fi fth day of t h e light h alf of th e m on th o f V ai sakh Th e book w as wr itt en by .

Pai r a a momma a Kh at ri of S ultan pur G

-
,
”
,
u r u ”
An g ad c aused it to be wr itten an d P aira wr ote .
,

i t a cco r di n g to t h e oral dict ation of Bala a S an d h fi J et ,

.
4

Bh ai ‘ Bal a h ad co me fr om T al v an di ( t h e j agi r ) o f Rae Bh ae th e B h atti an d h ad look ed , ,

6

ou t for G ur i A n g ad .

T wo m on th s an d seven teen d ay s w ere sp en t i n w r itin g ( thi s book ) Wherev er h e h ad .

w an dered abo u t w ith Guru Nan ak th at Bh ai B al a dictated w ith facility , .

Gn r fi A n g ad w as m uch pl eased w ith Bh ai Bal a ; (f or) Bh ai B al a h ad w an dered abo ut wi th

M ar dan a th e r eh ahi i n t h e com p an y o f Nan ak ; also at th e time w h en N an ak was employed
, , , .

i n t h e comm i ssar i at Bh ai Bal a w as w ith h i m, .

(1)
How the Jan em P a tfi -
f N an ak was obtained
o .

O n e d ay t h e tho ught cam e in to Gur fi A n gad ’ s m in d : “ My p erfe ct between G uru Nanak w as ,

h i m an d t h e S u L
p reme or d th ere w as n o differ en ce w h atever I should like to kn ow i n which .
,
"

w i se my G u r u w as born Thi s thoug h t w a s occupyin g h i s min d Mean while i n th e latter h alf

”
.
.

o f t h e m on th o f K atak Bal a th e S an dh a Ja
t cam e to see Gur u A n gad G ur u A n g ad w as keepin g
, , .

hi m self con cealed Bal a t h e S an dh a h ad thi s desir e th at if th e Guru w ould co me f orth h e

.
, , , ,

w ould h av e an in ter vi ew w ith hi m Then Bh ai Bal a h ear d th at G ur u Nanak h ad appoi nted ( as

.

i . e A D
. . . 1 525 . If A n gad was bor n i n I56 1 S a m ba t , h en t wen ty o ne year s of
h e was t -
age .

f ten w as t h e n am e cl c st e h e w a s a K h atr i
2
o of h is or an ; by a

or d Guruis wr itten di f e tly

.

a
T he w g ur g u u a d 3Q Gu
er n : -
i ii , r n .

B ala as will be seen i s h ere r ep r se ted a s th e co sta t co m p an io n of Nan a k t h e old a

, ,
;
e
J n am S akhi
n n n -

v e r m e n t io n s h i s n am e He w as J e t ( H22 1 ) o f t h e S a dh fi cla n ; C ust m ade h im a S in dh i !

.
‘

nc . a. n

B h ai i s an h o n or ary titl e for sai tly S ikh s l i t er ally b r oth er

5
n , : .

Rae B h ae a M usalm an Raj p ut w s for m e l y t h e j i d ar o f T al v an i h

,
g d t e bir th pl a c e o f Nan a k after
, a r a r
,
-
,
w h o m t h e pl ac e w as n a med ; see p iii n ote 1
’

.
, .

Th e o rigin al i s : ?srr I sh oul d like t o see

'
7
, .
 JA N AM —S AK H I 0 F BA BA N A NA K . B .
l ii

h is cc o ) on e Kh atri by n am e A n gad a Tr i bun K h atri but th at it w as n ot kn o wn in

su ess r , , ,
1

w hich pl ac e h e kept hi m sel f co n c eal ed B ut h e h ear d fur th er t h e n ews th a t h e w as sittin g at .

,

fli h an dfi r a vill age of th e K h ah ar a Jats Havin g h ear d this B ala cam e to see G ur a A n gad -
.
,
2

H e sear ch e d f or t h e G ur u an d f ou
.
,

nd fl i im He saw th a t G ur u A n ga d w as t w i stin g v an Bh ai . .
3

B al a t h e S an dh ii Wen t an d bow ed h i s h ead b efo re h im

, ,
G ur il A n gad said : C o m e br oth er ! .
“
,

tr ue is t h e creator ; com e sit do w n ! ” Gur A n gad left o ff tw i stin g v an an d b egan to ask Bh ai

1
‘

,
'

ii

Bal a : O b r other di scipl e fr om w h en c e h ast tho u co m e ? w h y di d st thou com e ? an d w h o ar t

“
,

thou? Th en Bal a th e S an dh ii j oin i g h i s h an ds i n supplication said : Gur u I am a Jat ;

”
, ,
n ,
“
,

my cl an i s S an dh fi an d m y n am e i s Bal a My bi rth pl ac e i s T al v an di ( th e vill age o f ) Rae Bh é e .

-
, ,

h
t h e B tt ;
a i I a m co m e f o r t h e sak e o f an i n t er vi e w w ith t h e G u r
”
Gur a A n ga d asked fur th er ii
‘

“
Bh ai Bala w hose discipl e ar t tho u? ,
”
Bh ai B ala said : G ur u I am th e discipl e of G ur u “
,

Nan ak ; w ith m e Gur ii Nanak th e son o f K al a t h e Vadi h ad m et ” Gura A n gad ask ed furth er , , ,
.

B h ai Bal a h adst tho u seen Gur fi N an ak ? Bh ai B al a said : Gur u Nan ak w as th r ee years

' ” “
,

older th an I I w as follo w in g G ur u Nan ak an d goi n g about w ith h i m But at that ti m e I h ad

,
.

n ot thi s fa ith th a t i
he s a p er fe ct ,
a n d g r e a t G u r u ; I w as w ith h i m i n t h e c a p a city o f a ser v an t ”
.

Wh en Bh ai Bal a h ad said thi s G ur u A n gad w ept an d d id n o t stop h i s tears in an y way Thus , .

th at n ight p assed Wh en it h ad b ecom e m or n i n g G ur u A n gad said : C all Bh ai Bala

. B h ai ,
‘
“
.
”

B al a c am e an d bo w e d h i s h ead G ur u A n gad aske d Bh ai B al a : Bh ai Bal a i s it kn own to “

.
,

th ee h o w t h e bir th o f G ur u Nan ak did take place ? ” Bh ai Bal a an sw er ed : S i r th at I do

,
“
,

n ot k n o w B ut so m uch I h ear d f r om t h e m o uth of th e p e opl e th at Har i Day al t h e Br ah m an

. ,

say s th at i n th ese a uspicio us m o m en ts i n th e t w en ty seven lun ar m an sion s an d at th e full -

, ,

m oo n of K atak n o t an y such on e w as bor n i n to t h e w or ld

,
I n th e house o f K ala t h e V adi .
, ,

a gr eat A vatar i s bo rn S o much I h ad h ear d I h ad al so hear d th at Mahata K al a caused a

. .
6

J amam p atri to be w r itten

-
8 G uru A n gad said : Bh ai Bal a h o w could thi s Jan am p atri be
.
” “
,
-
'

pr ocur ed ? Bh ai B ala an sw ered : Th e G ur u kn o w s i t ; but by sear ch in g it m ay com e to h an d

” “ 7
.
”

Gur u A n g ad sai d : Bh ai B ala i s th er e an y such o n e by w hom a tr a c e o f th e Jan em p atr i m ay

“ -
, ,

b e p r oc ur ed ? B al a sai d : L et it be sear ch ed S ir ! G ur u A n gad said : Bh ai Bal a thou ar t an

” “ ” “
, ,

i n habit an t o f th at pl ace by th ee a tr ace o f it y m a

,
be p oc d
r u re S ear ch a n d g e t it of r m a n
y on e
”
. .

B h ai Bal a t h e S an dh fi said : S ir ! M ah at a K ala th e Vadi h as a br oth er it i s M ah at a “

, , , , ,

L al ii t h e Vadi fr om h i m it may be sear ch e d Gur u A n g ad an swere d : Bh ai Bal a y o u m ust ” “

, ,
.
,

sear ch f o r it Th en B hai Bala said : G ive m e on e o f your o w n m en ; h e an d I w ill go an d

.
” .
“

say to M ah ata L al i i Bh ai L al fi tho u h ast b ecom e v er y old G ur u A n ga d h as sho w n ‘

th e V é di :
'

, , ,

th ee m uch b en evol en ce : sear ch after th e Jan em p atri o f G ur u Nan ak an d give it ( to us) ! We -

ha ve i n quired a n d f oun d G ur u An gad : b etw een G ur u Nan ak an d A n g ad th ere i s n o d iffer en ce

w h atev er Then A n g ad said : B h ai B al a wh at t h e soc iety ( o f th e di scipl es) says th at i s
’ “
. , ,

l
A n ga d w as a K . hatri , of ccor d i g to t h e J an am
t h e T rih un c anl . His for m er n am e w as L ah ana . A n

sakh i it w as ch a g ed by Nan a k t o A g a d : ?fi 5 n 3% fift h -n 3 C o m pa e al so p xliv l 6n r .

, . .

T h e lithog r a ph ed L aho r e co p y i n ser ts h ere : 313 1 13 3 m 5} 3! 3 2 g W h e br o ught

‘
2 :

a p resen t a s h is c ir c u
. ,
m sta ces w o uld p er m it h i m sig i fi ca n t fo r t h e la ter S ikh ti m es
n ,
n .

3
3T 6 c o a rse t w i e m a de o f m n j T hi s occ up atio n o f A
n g a d w as a fter w ar d s co n sid er ed a s u
nn b eco m in g
. n

a Gu
,

r uan d t h e r e fo r e Je ft o u t i n t h e L aho re lithog r aph ed c op y .

313 3 3 31 3 w as t h e o l d fo r m o f S ik h sal utatio n

4 “
.

5
31 3 3 1 i s a n ho n o r a r y titl e giv en to K h a tri m er chan t s co r r espo n d i n g to m ast er , .

6
A bo ut t h e H7531 U 31 se e t h e r e m ark s p i n ote 1 T h e fi rst m ar r iage an d th e bi r th of t h e
, , .
, .

fi r st child i s a l so fr equen tly a dded I h ave seen an d exam i n ed m an y o f this k i n d . .

i s I do n o t k n o w it y o uk n o w it b e tter
7 .
. . ,
 xlviii J A NA M- S AK H I or BA BA N A N AK . B .

tr ue Gur u A n g ad w as m uch pl eased w ith Bh ai B al a

”
W ell Bh ai Bal a take som e di sciple and “ '

. .
, ,

go ! ”
Bh ai Bala said : O G ur u w ho m tho se d t
u n es h i m I t k ith
a e w m e
” “
Th en Gur u A n g ad , ,
.

"
cal l ed L al a th e P un n fi He w as a di scipl e a Je t G uru A n g ad said : Bhai L al a P unn fi
,
.
,
.
“
,

thou art a di scipl e tho u ar t atten din g to th e Gur u go th en w ith Bh ai Bala to T al v an di b ri n g

, , ,

th e Jan am p at ri o f G ur u N an ak L al a th e P uri n a said : B l essed i s o ur lot th at w e sh al l see

-
” “
.
, , ,

t h e Jan am p at ri o f G ur u Nan ak w e sh all con si der it as i f w e h ad h ad an i n ter vi e w w ith G ur u

-
,

N an ak Gur u A n gad said : Bh ai L al a m ay th e c r eato r c o me i n to thy m in d ! l

” “ ”
.
,

Bh ai B al a th e S an dh fi an d L al a t h e P un n ii c am e to T al v an di ( t h e v ill a ge of ) Rae Rhae

‘

, , , , , ,

t h e Bh atti H avin g arr ived th ere th ey m et Mah ata L al i i Th ey said : Bh ai L al fi give us th e ’

“
.
,
.

Jan am p atri o f G ur u N an ak ! G ur u A n gad ask s for it

- Bh ai L a l i i an sw er ed : I t i s n ot w ith .
” ’

me .Bh ai B al a said :
”
Thou ar t t h e b r oth er of Mah ata K al a sear ch t h en i n t h e ho use ” L al fi
“
, .
,

t h e Vadi r ej oi n ed : Bh ai B ala thou ar t th e fr i en d o f G ur u N an ak sp eak t h e tr uth : i s A n gad

,
“
, ,

G ur u or S ir i Oan d ? “ He told th em al so so methin g el se Bb ai B ala said : Bh ai L al fi A n gad .

-
“
,

h as b eco me G uru b efo r e w hom G ur u N an ak p ut fi v e p ai sas an d a cocoa n ut an d bo w e d h i s h ead

,
-
.
3

Wh at com p etition i s th er e ag ain st h i m ? We h av e so ught an d f o un d h i m To h i s ho n our S i ri .

,
-

Oan d as b ein g h i s son d ue r ever en c e w ill be p aid

, Th en B h ai L al i i said : Bh ai B al a look
, .
” ’
“
, ,

I am sear chin g My br oth er s w i fe h as dep ar ted an d m y br oth er K al a al so

. Th ey b eg an to
’
.
”

sea ch i n t h e ho u
r se S ear chin g an d sear chi n g th ey f oun d o n th e fi f th day t h e Jan a m p atri an d
. -

Bh ai L al i i gav e it i n to t h e b an d o f B al a an d B al a p ut it in to t h e h an d o f L el a t h e P un n fi
'

, , .

Th en Bh ai L ala said to Bh ai Bal a : Bh ai Bala go thou al so w ith m e ! much hon our w ill be “
,

p aid to th ee Bh ai B al a an sw er ed : .Well b r oth er go on !

” “
, ,
”

Wh en Bh ai L al a an d Bal a w en t a way L al a th e Vedi said : Y e t ake aw ay t h e Jan am , , ,

“
e

p atr i o f G ur u Nan ak but take al so w ith y ou som e o ff er i n g o f m i n e ! ” B al a said : Well

,
“
,

b r oth er L al f w h atever co mes i n to thy m i n d th at i s good

i , B h ai L el a g av e fi v e p ai sas an d a , .
”
.

coco a n ut an d said : P at my o fferin g b efor e G ur u A n g ad h o w th e h ea d an d say : 0 Gur u

-
“
,
‘
,
if ev er hi s hon our S i ri C an d should tak e offen c e ( at thi s
) y o u m ust ren d er m e ,

O n thi s Bh ai Bal a said : O L al fi th ere i s n o gr oun d for f ear ” “

, .

Bh ai L al a an d B al a took t h e J an em p atri an d b r ought it to K h an ar vi l g

d ( l e of ) th e K h ah ar a
-
a a ,

J ats an d p ut it b efor e Gur u A n gad G uru A n gad w as ver y m uch pl eased an d said : Bh ai Bela
,
. “
,
m ay th e c r eator co m e i n to thy m i n d ! to d ay thou h ast p r oc ur ed us an i n t er vi e w
w ith Nan ak ”
-

H avi n g t aken it in to h i s h an d s Gur u A n gad ki ssed it an d p ut it on h i s ey es an d on h is h ead .

W hen h e look s at it h e sees th at t h e l etter s ar e S h astr i G ur u A n g ad r efle cted : Ma th ere

,
5 “
y
.

b e suc h a di scipl e w h o i s r ead i n both ki n d s o f l etter s ? ” Mahi m a a Kh e b ar a

,
Jat i n w ho se ,
-
,

house Guru A n gad w as stayin g said : Gur u i n S ultan pur i s Pai r a a M akh a K h atfi h e r eads ,
“
,
, ,

both l etters G ur u A n g ad th en said : Bh ai M ahim a h e should be b r o ught

.
”
Mabima “
, .
”

T hi s i s a S ikh blessi n
g .

fi g}
2
n am e o f t h e e ld st
te J an um S akh i s b e is alw ys m e tion ed e so n of N an a k , as i n th e l a r -
a n
fi st ; i t h e o l d J a a m S ak h i L k h m i d a i o t h e c o tr y m e tio ed fi
r st ; see p viii l 22
-
r n n a - s s n n ar n n

p p a cti se d l so by t h e f ollo w i g G u us w h en
.
, . .

3
T h i s ite o f i vest iture w i th th e Gur usl i
r n o mi atin g i , r a n r , n n
su
th i cc s o r di ff so m w h at f om th at m tion ed o n p xl v l i B ut fr o m wh t fol lo ws it m y be
e r e s , er s e r en .
, . .
a , a
co clud d th t it w s t h e com m o way o f do i g hom g to a sup io
n e a a n n a e er r.

m p g . T his e, bel n g
v y i g can t a s to t h e iole t ch ar a cter o f S iri O d w a s in t h e L ahor e
a ssa er S n ifi v n
v

an ,
li tho g r aph ed copy ch g d i th follo wi g w ay : a? fi g} é ? 53"
an - e
33W
n e n
3W N K
m if ever S i ri C
: d should tak e o fi e c e a t thi s
( ) y o u m ust n t be a g ry ( w
an
ith h i m ) ] sic 0
'

n
( , o n

s h a t h e so c all ed G u
5
e De
o o
T h i s oti c e 1 5 ver y i m po tan t a s i t sho w t t
a a
L
ag ari . xa n . n
r mu
khi l etter s w r

i use b e fo re th e S ikh G u us a n d n o t i n ve t d by th em
‘
, -

n r n e
, .
 JANAM-S AK HI GP 131 3 1 NANA K . B .

un d er m y h an ds ! but s uch
child an d in such a m an n er was n ever bor n The voice h e em itted
a .

w as such , as i f so m e v ery w ise one w ou ld l aughi n gly j oin ( us) I am q ui te out o f m y wits .

a bo u t thi s child ”
T h e Ban dit said :
. Hear Kalli : th e child is bor n w h en th e twen ty se ven
“
,
-

l un ar m an sion s wer e full If h e w ere born b efore m idn ight h e w ould becom e a great merch an t ;
.
,

thi s on e i s bor n i n th e follo w in g w atch th e n ight declin i n g ( already ) This n ight w as a very ,
.

o
m m en us to poi n t of ti me on h is h ea d an u m
,
b re ll a
‘
w ill n eed s b e t urn ed I am v ery much .

su r p r i sed I will see w h at sor t of umb rella w ill be turn ed ( over

,
T h e Ban dit w as sun k
d
i n ee r e e p fl ctio n a n d sa id : K al a l et m e s ee t h e child
“ ”
Kala asked for t h e child fr o m w ithin
,
.
,

fr o m h i s w i fe But th e w ife o f Kal a said :

.
“
I shall n ot giv it e t h e d y
a s ar e chilly ”
Th e ,
.

Ban dit said : I t w ill do h im n o harm y ou m ay r ely on y w o d Then K ala br ought hi m

“
m r
”
,
.

ou t in h i s clout on h i s h an ds an d sat do w n w ith h im b efore th e Ban di t Th e Ban dit w as .

ver se d in divin e kn o wl edge Havi n g seen h im h e stood up j oin ed both h is han ds an d w or shipped
.
,

h im. Th e Ban dit said : K al a t ake hi m aw ay “ ”

Kal a br o ught th e child to th e in n er r oom
,
.
,

an d h avi n g r etu r n ed said : C ome ( again ) an d poi n t out some n am e fo r it ; for i n what auspicious
“

m om en ts i s it born Th e Ban dit said : K al a I w ill d eter min e on a n am e an d give it h im ” ,

.

T h e Ban dit r eflected f o r thi r teen d ays Wh en thir teen d ay s h ad p assed a co at was p ut ( on th e
.
,

child) an d th e n ame given N an ak th e Formless on e Th en K al a said : 0 Ban dit thi s n ame should .
2
,

n ot h a ve b een given this m e i s comm o n to H in df s an d T urk s Th e Ban dit said again : This
” “
n a , i .

i s a m an i n who m i s a gr eat A vatar ; h e h as co m e to thy house ; such a g reat A v atar h as

,

n e ver b een b ef or e! Ther e h as b een S ri Ram ban d an d th ere h as b een S ri K r isn th e L or d ; those ,

t h e H i n dfi s w o rship but t hi s on e both H i n du

, s an d T u r k s w ill w o r ship ; h i s n am e w ill be curren t
o n ear th an d in h eav en Wood an d grass w ill say : Nan ak N an ak ! ” Th e oc ean w ill gran t h i m
.
“
,
3

a cc ess h e w ill m en t ally re cit e th e Fo r ml ess

, ( S uprem e ) on e An d h e w ill be m uch giv en to ablutio n s .

a n d t h e cr eatu r e h e w ill co n sider as a cr eat u re Without th e S upr em e L or d b e w ill ackn owl edge .

n o n e el se 0 K al a thi s w ill be m y g r ief th at I sh all n ot see h i s dig n ity h e wil l attai n to

.
,
( ) .

Wh at do I k n o w h o w lo n g m y li fe w ill be ?”
When Nan ak h ad be co m e fi v e years old h e used to lo se ever ythi n g w hich h e took from ,

th e house Kal i: w en t to r epr o ach th e Ban dit : Well Ban dit a ( fi n e) um b r ella is tur ned ( over
“

.
“
, ,

Th e Ban dit said to K al a : New thou repr o ach est m e but th at time w il l com e when
“
, ,

tho u with a straight face w ilt n ot utter a w o r d “ .

(3)
N d n ah sen t to school .

Wh en Na k b c m big
na e a e , be
commen ced to play w ith boys but h i s view did n ot agr ee with ,

that of th e boys ; h e studied w ith hi mself over th e Formless on e .

Wh en h e h ad b eco m e seven year s of a ge h e b egan to talk o f th e S h astr as an d t h e Vé das .

Wh atever h e talks th at h e un der stan d s E ver y o n e p ut s r elian ce o n h im

,
T h e Hin d fi s b egi n .
.

“
to say : S o me for m of a god h as been bor n Th e Musal man s sa :
y S o m e holy man o f God .
“

i s bor n ” .

Th en K al fi said : 0 boy N an ak l earn n ow to r ead “

, .

I
an umb r ell a, t h e s ig n o f royalty .

In A this na m e W
.
, t h e F o r m l ess o n e, is n o t e en v hi n te d at .

3
3f? $11 3 311 is her e used i n th e sen se o f t o h e do n e t o be said , n o t in t h e sen se n o w com m o n : to
bec om e .

4
T h i s whole
p assa
ge 18 S im p ly left o ut
a

in th e L a ho re lithog r aphed cop y , as der og ato ry to N an ak , fo r

w ho m it o n l h as p r a ise
y .
 JA NA M- S A K HI 0 F BA BA NA NAK B
. .
H

Kala t to th e ( village) schoolmaster an d said 1 “ O school master look o ut f or a n

wen
,

au spicio u s m om en t for w e w il l sen d th e boy to school Th e school master an swere d :

”
, No w .

”
t h e ti m e i s good Th en Kal i asked f r om h i s w ife f or a t wo pics p ieoe b etel n ut and r ice an d
. - -
, ,

br ought it an d h an ded Nan ak over t o‘h t h e sch oolmaster for th e purpose of readin g K ala said .

0 schoolm aster teach Nan ak to re ad ! ” T h e school m aster sai d :

, Wel l th at sh all b e don e “
, ,

S i r ! ” Th en th e school master w r ote h i m a w ooden sl ate an d gav e it him Nan ak r ead on e d ay .

a
.

O n t h e f ol lo w i n g d ay h e remain ed silen t T h e school m aster sai d : Nanak w h y rem ainest th ou .

“
,

sil en t ? w h
y do st tho u n o t r ead ? ”
Nanak an sw er ed : 0 school m aster hast th en r ead an ythin g “
, ,

w hich tho u m ay st l et m e r ead ? ” Th e school m ast er said : “ I h ave r ea d ev erythi n g Then .

”

Nan ak r ej oin ed : O school master by readin g these w or ds n oo ses ar e laid ( on m en ) ; that w hich
“
,

w e m ust r ead i s al l w i n d ” Th en Nanak uttered a S ah d in t h e S iri Rag M ah ala I

, .
, .

[Ne w f ollo w fo ur Bauri s w ith a l en gth y p ar aph r ase fr o m S iri Rag S ahd 6 Mah al a 3
, ,

T h e Ban dit b e c ame aston i sh ed an d p ai d r ev er en c e ( to Nan ak ) as to a p er fect m an “ Wh at .

co mes i n to t h y m i n d th at do ,

Then Nan ak came hom e an d sat down h e did n o w or k Wh en h e sat de wn h e r e mai n ed , . ,

,

seate d H e associ at ed with F aqi r s

.
Hi s fath er Kal li be came asto nish ed, that N an ak w en t on
.

i n thi s m an n er .

N o mah gr asses his f ather s bu

f al ocs an d sp oil s a cor n -
f ield, which is mi r acul ously
‘
’
r estor ed .

Wh en Nan ak h ad
b eco m e n in e y ears old th e ( brah m an ical ) cord w as pl aced ( o n hi m ) H e , .

l earn t al so to r ead som e T ur ki sh “ He did n ot di sclose t h e thoughts of h i s m i n d to an y on e

. .

H i s father K al a th en said : 0 son Nan ak take th e b uff al o es w hich are in m y ho use an d ,

p asture th em ! ”
Nan ak took th e b uffaloes an d w en t out ( to th e p asture-groun d ) ; h avi n g gr azed
th em h e br ought th em b ack at n ight to th e house T h e f ollow i n g d ay h e w en t o ut agai n H avi n g . .

l eft th e buff al o es h e fel l asleep at th e bor der of a fi eld so wn w ith w h eat Th e b uff aloes w en t an d
, .

f ell upo n t h e w h eat an d b r o w sed it an d th e w h eat w as spoil ed T h e o wn er of t h e w h eat c am e .

said : Br oth er wh y h ast tho u l ai d w aste m y fi eld ? giv e an swer f or thi s de v astatio n !
“ ”
an d ,

Nan ak an sw er e d : N oth i n g o f w h at i s thi n e h as b een w asted O b r oth er ! W h at i s it if so m e

“
, ,

b uffa lo h as pil fered fr om it ? God will p ut a bl essin g o n this B ut th at m an di d n o t desi st ,

h e b eg an t o quar re l w ith Nanak Then Nan ak an d th e Bh atti pr opr ietor came to Rae B ular
.
,

hi sto ry i s al so con tained in t h e S ikh a( 16 F i d i v i th (L udih ana

T s p b ut r a th er al te r ed
r ra , . .

T h e xtra ct s fro m th e J an e m S akhi which th is book co ta i s ar e t a ken fr om m o r e m odern sourc es a d t h e

e -
, n n , , n

expl a n a tio s a d de d ar e o f l i t tl e o r n o v al u
n e w h a te ver .

T he Hi d fi s in t h e P unj ab wr it e 0
n sm all w oo den sl te s p a in ted bl a ck w ith a colo u
11 r m a de o f w hite a ,

ear t h W hen t h e sl ate i s w r itten over t h e lett rs a re w ashe d o ff with water T h e bo ys w hi l t im it atin g
. , e .
, s

t h e l etter s p o n o un c e th e m alo ud w hich c u

,
r ses a c o sid r a bl e d i n
, a n e .

W he ever t h e Gr nht h i s q uoted i n t h e l ter t i m es a t an l t io n o r r at her a p ar a ph r ase i s al w ays a dd e d

n a , r s a ,

to it wh i ch p oves sufii c ien t l y th at a t th a t t i me t h e S ikh s n o lo ng er un derstood th e i diom o f th e G a th

,

r , r n .
,

T h se p uap h ases are u

e
'
su ally very i n d i f eren t a d fre q u
1 en tly m i sin ter p r et t h e o r igi n al text co m pl etely
n or ,

si m ply p a ss over w h a t was u n i n telligi bl e to th e m .

T h e L ah o re lithog raphed c opy h as h ere sig n i fi ca tly : 3 ”3 31 5 3: 5 tho uar t t h e S upr em e L o r d

' ‘
n ,

5 U d
.

n er W T urki sb v e1 y li kely P er sian i s to b e u der stood t h e o ffi ci al l a n g u g e o f t ho se d ay s n , a .

Th is i s al so co rr obo ra ted by t h e fa ct th at so me P ersia n v e s s o f N an ak are f o un d i n t h G a th tho ugh

, ,

,
1 e e r n ,

h is k n o wle dg e o f P er sia n m ust have b een very defi cie t T o t his ve ry li kely all udes t h e o ti ce i n t h e S iy r
n . n a

ul m ut a axxir i n ( B r iggs t r a n sla ti o n vol i p t h a t so m e S ayyid Hu sa i n wh o h ad o child re of hi

’ ’
- . . , n n s
, .

o wn ch ar g e d hi msel f w ith h is e d u cation a d i tr oduced h im to th e kn o wledge o f t h e m ost esteem ed wr iti gs

n n n
,

o f t h e I l am s I n t h e L aho re li thog r a ph ed c o p y th is i s ( n d o ub t in ten tio nally) left o ut

.
o .
Iii JANAM-S A K HI or BA BA NANA K . B .

th e h eadman of T al v an di by trib e a Bh atti Th en t h e h eadman said : Cal l

,
l A side .
“
Ka i ! ”

p eopl e h ad said th at Nan ak was m ad an d th at h e sho uld sen d for K al a Th ey bro ught Kala .
.

Then Rae Bul ar said to Kala th at h e w as n ot w ar n in g th is h is son w h o w as l ayin g waste th e

'

,
,

fields o f oth er s Well though con sid erin g h im m ad thou h ast l et hi m alo n e Go n o w an d make
.
“
, ,
.

d d v t tio do to oth ! I f t tho u w ilt h av e to an sw er b ef o r e t h e Tu r kish

am en s for t h e e as a n n e er s n o ,
”
au tho riti es K ala said : S ir wh at sh all I do ? this one i s ver ily
.
” “ m
,
a d T h en th e Rae sai d .

I h av e f or given thi s tr esp ass to th ee K al li but go and make am en ds for t h e dam age ,
Nanak ,
.

”
spok e th en : S ir n othin g of th e p r op ert y o f thi s on e
“ h as b een d gd
a m a e h e sp k
ea s a fa l sehood , .
,

T h e ow n er o f th e field r ej oin ed : S ir m y w hole field h as been laid w aste ; I h ave b ee n pl undered

,
.

Gran t m e j ustice if n o t I go to th e Tur ks ,

Nan ak an swe d : S ir n ot on e bl ade h as b een
,
re
“
.
”
,

Th en Rae Bul ar sen t

”
spoil ed an d c u t o ff ! S en d tho u th y o w n m en th ey sh al l see an d re por t ,
.

h is ow n footm en Wh en th ose footmen h avi n g gon e see w h at do th ey see ? n o t on e bl ad e of th e

.
, .

fi eld was spoiled T h e footmen co me an d r epor t : S ir n othi n g at al l i s w asted ” Then Rae

.
“
,
.

Bu l ar called t h e o wn er of th e field a l iar Nan ak an d K a both w t ho

al en m e
‘
. .

A bl ack serp en t exp an ds i ts h ood over N anak when r esti ng un der a tr ee .

Wh en i year s o f age h e h ad go n e out ( on e day ) to gra z e th e buffaloes

B ab a N an ak w as n ne , .

Th ey w er e th e days o f ( th e m on th of ) V aisakh ( A pr il—May ) at th e ti m e o f n oon h e came and ,

rested u n der a tr ee an d m ad e al so h i s b u ffalo es st an d ( th er e) A s soo n as h e h ad taken to r est .

,

a bl a ck sn ak e c am e an d sat at h i s h ead e xp an din g i t s hood ( over h im ) Th ey w er e th e days of ‘

m easur in g ( t h e fi elds un der cultiv ation ) R ae Bul ar h avi n g measur ed w h eat w as goin g home ; .

w h en h e looked on a boy h ad fall en asl eep ( th er e) an d a bl ac k sn ake sat at h i s h ead expanding

, ,

i ts hood ( ov er h im ) Rae Bul ar stopp ed ; w h en h e look s on w h at do es h e see ? th at t h e sh ade

.
,

of t h e oth er tre es i s go n e an d th at t h e sh ade o f th at tr ee u n der w hich t h e boy was sl eepin g h ad , ,

r em ain ed th er e He r efle cted in hi s m i n d : if th at boy r eally liv es th an h e i s some p r oph et an d

.
, ,

if h e h as dr un k th e b r eath of t h e sn ake h e i s dea d A f ter wards some p e opl e c ame th ere Rae ,
. .

B ul ar said to th em : L ook w h o this boy i s w h o li es th er e ? ,Wh en th ey looked on wh at did ,

"
,

they see ? th at it w as Nanak th e son of K ala t h e wh o w as lyin g th er e

, Th ey said to , .

Rae Bul ar : O Rae th e son of K al a thy P atv ari i s l yi n g th er e ” Rae Bular sai d
“
, Look , , .
“
,

th t y
a e ra ie
s h i m up ”
Th ey r aised th e sleep er an d N an ak stood up an d sat do w n Wh en h e
.
.

look ed abo ut h e saw th at Rae Bu

, l ar stood at h i s h ead
, Nan ak joi n i n g h i s h an d s sal u
ted h im , .

T h e Rae di sm oun ted fr om h is hor se em b rac ed N an ak an d ki ssed h i s h ead an d sh o w ed h im much

, ,

politen ess Rae Bul ar said : L ook fr i en ds a w o n de r ful thi n g h as b een seen ( al r eady ) and to d ay
.
“
, ,

al so see ! This on e i s n o t empty on h im i s some mer cy of G od ” Th e p eopl e w ere astoni shed

, .

( sayin g) : 0 b r oth er Rae Bul ar h as b eco m e ver y ki n d to thi s boy ” Havi n g go n e h o me h e

“
, .

cal led K al a an d said to h im : O Kal a th e so n o f th y ho use N anak do n o t con sid er as thy son , ,
h e i s a d evotee of t h e S upr eme L or d Do n o t say to this ( th y ) son : Be eursed di e ! h e is a.
‘ ’
,

great p er son m y to wn i s a sacr ifice to h im Kal a tho u also h as t b een exalted in whose house
, .
3
, ,

thy son Nan ak h as been born .

”
Kal a said : Th e thi n g of G od God kn o ws ” an d w en t ho me , .

O
I
T hi s whol e st ory i s left o ut in th e L aho re lithog r a ph ed copy as it was felt th at thi s d uplicity did not ,

red o u n
d to t h ho o ur o f N an ak It is also m i ssi g i a M S copy o f th e In dia O ffi c e L ib rar y No 2885
e n . n n .
, . ,
w hic h i s n ea ly i d t ic l w i th t h e L aho e lithog
p h d d itio o f thc J auam S akh i
r en a r ra e e n -
.

m } l d t w d ; his business is to k p t h l a d acco un ts of th e villag e

2
an s e ar ee -
, e n .

a
T h e w o ds D o o t ay to thi s thy so n — to t h e e d o f t h e s n te c
n e are l ef t o ut i t h e L aho re lithog raphed
r : n s n e , n

C
opy ( l 1 ke w 1se i th e M S N 2885) as bein g too disr esp c t ful T h e an swer o f K ala also is given differentl y
n . o. e .
 ‘

JA NA M-S KK H i or BABE NKNA K . B .

liii

N anak f uses to do wor k the u hi m f r om hes su

'

a ttemp
re any t to c re pp osed madn ess f ail s .

N
But an ak kept c o m p a ny w ith q i rs he spoke w ith n obody else His whole fam ily w as , .

grieved an d distressed thereby, they s aid : Nan ak h as become m ad ” Then his mother c ame to “
.

N an ak an d s aid : “ It w ill not do for thee to sit w ith F aqi rs give up these perpetu al f ooli sh w ords ! ,

T h e pe 0 p1e l augh at us th at the son of K al i h as become an idler ” When h i s mother h ad said

, .

these w ords to N an ak he did not min d them at al l he l ay dow n ag ain he did not spe ak wi th an y
‘

, , ,

one as he l ay do w n so he rem ained for four or five days His mo ther c ame ag ain an d s aid to
, , .

him : “ 0 son h o w does it behove thee to l ie down ? rise eat an d drink somethi ng ! L ook after
, . ,

the fields ! al l thy fami ly is grieved An d 0 son if anything do not ple ase thee then don t do .
, , ,
’

it w e say nothing to y o u; wh y ar t thou so thoughtful ? ” Then information w as given to K al fi ;

,

K al a s aid : “ 0 son w h at w ere w e telling thee ? it is good to do w ork , I f the sons of K h atri s .

h ave money do they no w ork ? 0 son it is good to do ( some ) w ork ! O ur field out there st ands
, ,

ripe if thou w ouldst go an d stand in it it w ould not be w asted Then every one w il l say : ‘Well
, , .

done w ell done the son o f K al a h as become a good son !

, , 0 son the field is w ith ( its ) o w ners ! ” ’
,

Nan ak ans wered : By us a priv ate field h as been ploughe d o f th at w e ar e tak ing c are The ,
.

plough h as been c arried ( over it) th e proper ti me for so w ing the ground h as come ; the eight ,

w atches w e w ere standing there 0 father w e take c are of our ow n fiel d ‘ h o w sh all w e h ave.
, ,

know ledge o n other s field ? K al i : became astoni shed an d s aid : “ L ook people w h at th is one
f a
”
,
’ "

, ,

is s aying ! T hen s aid K al a :

“
When h ast thou ploughed a priv ate field ? Give up ( these ) silly
w ords an d i f it be thy pl e asure I w ill give th ee at the next h ar vest a private ploughed fiel d I
‘

, , ,

w il l see h ow thou w i l t m ake it ripen ! Then Nan ak s ai d : O father the field h as n ow been
” “
, ,

ploughe d by us an d it h as gro wn up well it looks quite w ell ” Th en K al fi s aid agai n : 0 son ,

.
'

w e h ave seen no cul tivated field of thine at al l h ow sh all I kno w w h at thouar t s ayi ng ? Nan ak
”
, ,

ans w ere d : O father that field h as been c ultivated by us thou thyself w ilt he ar ” Then Nan ak
, , .

uttered a S ah d in the B ag S orathi ( S ah d 2 1 Mah [ K al a s aid ag ain :

“
0 Nan ak sit th ou , ,
.
,

in the sh op our fi eld is the sh0 p ” Then the second P auri w as s aid Then K ala s aid again : “ 0
, . .

son i f thou w ilt not sit in the shop t ake thou horses an d tr affi c w ith them ! Thy spirit is
, ,

mel an choly Do ( some ) business an d see also f oreign coun tries ! we shall say th at he is gone for
.
,

s
( o )me business th t he ill come ”
Then th e third P auri was s aid Then K al il s aid
'

an d a w n ow . .

again :
“
0 N
an ak thou art gone from us but go an d do some service perh aps thy spirit w il l come
, , ,

to rest therein w e h ave given up th y gaining ( anything ) 0 son if thou w ilt become an U d asi
,
'

, , ,

then al l people wi ll say to us that the son o f K ala h as be c o me a F aqi r an d the people wi ll repro a ch
,

us ” Then th e f ourth P aufi w as

. Then Nanak s aid : “ O father our field is so wn thou , ,

h ast he ard h o w 0 father our field h as sprung up w ell we h ave so much confidence in this field
.
, , ,

th at the w hole go vernment tax w ill f all off sons d aughters an d th e w hole family w ill eat to their , ,

s atiety an d w ill be h appy ; the debt o f the L ord w ill be re mo ved and th e poor b rothers an d , ,

rel atives al l w ill be pr ofited by it The L ord w hose husb an d ry I h ave c arried on gives me much
,
.
, ,

assist ance ; for th at d ay I rej oice much “ Wh atever I ask th at he gives me O father I h a ve .
,
.
,

f ound out a gr e at Lord traffi c an d shep al l h as been ent r u s te d ( by him to

, Then K al i ,

eg ation w hich A h a s is left o ut here very likel y p urpo sely

T he n .
, , .

2
T h e w ords i br a ckets ar e an a d dit ion It i s ea sily perc ei v e d th at they d o n o t agree w ith t h e co n text
n .
, ,

but rat h er interrup t it A l l th e a dd itions m ade by the second com p iler w ill thus be p ointe d o ut by b ra cke t s
. .

T h e text is her e so much shortene d th at t h e w or d s ar e no lo n ger in t elligible w herea s they ar e quite

3
, ,

p lain i n the first compilatio n .

liv JA NAM-S A K HI O F BA BA NAN A K . B .

” “
bec ame astonished and s ai d : We h ave not at all seen ( or) he ard of thy The By L ord . Bab a s aid :

w hom my L ord h as been seen by the m he is prai s ed ”

The ,
G ur u B ab a uttered one S ahd in the .

G w alk aft e
B ag Asa ( éaup ada 1 Mah Then l s id g in ive up these th i ngs the “
K a a
,
a a a .
:
r ,

m an ner of the people it is nothi ng to live w ithout a busin ess ,

”
Then Nanak rem ai ned S i len t .
,

“
Kaa l rose an d w ent home a n d took to his w ork ; he s a id : This w ork is beyond our str ength ,

but m ay not the field outside be d am aged ! ” Then al l the family o f the V é di s began to g ieve
”
Nan ak rem ai n ed s i lent ;
r ,

they s aid : It is a great pity that th e son of K al a h as become m ad

“
,
.

thr ee months he l ay do wn an d ate an d dr ank nothing The w hole f amily of the V é di s became .

d ispirited an d al l began to say to K al li : Ho w dost thou sit dow n ( quie tly ) w hose son ,

remains lyin g do wn ? C all th an some physici an an d get medicine fo r h i m ! Th e people will ‘

i s)
say ,
th at 11 51 11 on account o f ,
the money does not get his son cured ( This ,
much money .
,

if ( th y ) son become w ell ” Then K al il stood up an d w ent an d brought a physician The physician
.
.

c ame an d beg an to seiz e the arm of the Babe The B ab a dre w aw ay his ar m lifted up his
' '

. ,
”
leg stood up an d sat do wn He began to say : 0 physician w h at art thou doin g ?
,
.
The “
,

p
hysici an s a id : I am looking af ter the dise ase th a t m a y be in thy spirit ”
The B ab a l aughed
,
.

an d m ade the S ah d [ there f ol lo w f our verses] ou th e subj ect of the physician he m ade also .

another S ah d in the Bag Mal ar [there follo w t wo verses ] S ay 0 h

brot er : v ah G ur fij i ! ‘
.
,
,

( 7)
eld an d n eg l ec ts i t thor oughl y H is f ather exp ost ul ates wi th h im
Nd n ak sows a fi .
.

[ When
B ab a h ad become tw elve ye ars o f age th en K al li said af ter he h ad reflected in
th e , ,
”
hi s mind : N an ak h as re ad but h e should ( n o w ) be put into so e business
“ m
,
Then K ala said .

to Nan ak : S on apply thysel f to some business ! ” Nan ak ans w ered : “ We l l father if you
“
, , ,
”
tell me anything I w ill do i t ”
K al fi s aid :
,
S on in such an d such a pl ace s w thou a field
.
o ! ,

“
W l fa
el ther I,
am so wi ng ”
,
K al a g ave to N an ak one m a un d an d a qu arter o f seed Nan ak
.
,

took it w ent a nd c ast it The field sprang up but wh o protects it ? A n y one s cattl e, an y
,
.
,
’

one s ass an y one s filly an y one s horse eat it aw ay Nanak removes none ( o f them ) K fil fi
’
,
’
,
’

,
.

w ent an d saw th at his field h ad sprung up w ell Becoming angry ( th at the field h ad been c .

wa sted ) he beg an to repro ach him ( l

a e N an ak ) an d s aid :
“
A fine son h as in thee been born .
,

in my house t o c ause destruction ! an d going a way he began to say to the P an dit Hari D ayal :
”

“
A fine umbrell a is tur ned about in my house ; such are thy V edas an d P a r an as ! my field ,

that h ad sprung up is w ast ed by him ! The P an dit Hari D ayal said : Thou h ast no ih
,

f ormation w h atever thou ar t luckless ! thou h ast no profit w h atever f rom Nan ak other people
, ,

w il l be profited by Nan ak an d h ow m any w il l be liber ated ( by hi m ) ! h aving he ar d th e words

of Nan ak they w ill do them N an ak w ill become famous among Hind u s an d Musal m an s The
. .

people having heard an d re ad the Védas ( an d ) the book ( =the K ur an ) w il l do ( them) The ’
.

f our V edas th e eighte en P mfi n as th e six S has tr as an d the B h agav ad ( Gi ta) an d as m any Gi tes
, ,
-

as there are al l w ill suddenly c o m e o u

, t of the mouth of Nan ak w ithout h aving re ad ( them) ( as)
from the invisible ( w orld) H ear K al a be not alarmed about him ! It is w ei ghty to say of
.
, ,

him wh at c annot be s ai d of a corpore al being th at Nanak appe ars t o me even as th e Formless

, ,

one ( the upreme Being) Bet een

S w hi m an d t e Formless one there is no difference wh atever
h .
”
.

The n K al a rem ained silent .

When Nan ak was fift ee n ye ars of age K al a s aid to h im : “ W h at sort of a m an art thou , ,

I
Here
the secon d co m p iler break s o f s udde n ly w ithout c arrying the s t ory t o the end w hich i s also ,

rather a brup tly fin ished in t h e first co mpilation It is very sig n ific ant th at this whole S akhi i s l eft o ut i n .

t h e L ahore e d itio n as i t was co n s i dered rath er derog at ory to Nanak

, .
 JA NA M- S A K HI o r BA BA NA NA K . B .

wh o w ast born in my house ? I n the time of old age my n ame is dro w ned by thee I have .

no more an y hope First N an ski w as born an d then thou I h ad hoped that my n ame w ould
. .

remain af ter me an d thou h ast been born such a m an ! Whilst I live my n ame is dro w ned
,

by thee ”
Nan ak rem ained silent
. Then K al a s aid again : “ I am gr adu ally wor n out an d .

die an d thou givest me no ans wer ! ”

W hen Nan ak h ad become seventeen ye ars of age K al li s aid to Nanak : “ S on I h ave , ,

become nxious bout thee think o f something !

a a
”
Nan ak ans w ered : “ W ell father p ardon me
, , ,

n ow ! Whatever thou w ilt tell me concerni ng the field that I w il l ,

N an ak ts sen t on a tr ading tr ip an d sp en ds hi s m oney on F aqi r s . H e ts beaten by h is

f ather an d p r otec ted by R ae B ul ar .

[ Then K al li s ai d :
“
T ake t wenty Rupees an d go an d bring four or five things ! Bf in g s alt
an d tur meric an d some other things th at I sh all point out to thee ; an d if thou w ilt m ake this
,

time a good traffic then I w ill give thee again m any Rupees ” Nan ak ans w ered : W ell
, .
“
,

father thou w ilt see thysel f w h at a good tr affi c I sh all m ake ”

, K ala gave him the t w enty
,
.

R upees an d ( sent) one serv ant w ith him

.
They set out ; w hen they h ad gone t welve K é s h e .
1
,

saw th at an a ssembly o f $ 5t w as sitting there an d h o w w as it ? . E xcept a str ip o f c l o th ,

betw een the legs they h ad no kind of clothes on A mong them w as a M ah ant ; him Nan ak
, .

asked : S i r are you not in possessio n of clothes or are clothes not ple as ant to your body ? ”
“
,

The Mah ant s aid : H o w brother w h y dost thou ask ? w hat object h ast thou ?
“
, ,
”
Then B ela ,

the Jat w h o w as as serv ant w ith him s ai d : H e ar N an ak thou h ast come for the purpose
, ,
“
, ,

o f traffi c go an d t ake up that traffi c that K alli h as told thee ” Nanak s aid : He ar brother
, ,
.
“
,

B al i my father h as s aid th at I should m ake good t rafii e S hall I m ake a good traffic or a
, , .

bad one tell me thy advice ”

,
B el a ans w ered : “ K al a h as sent thee fo r good tr affic ” Then
. .

N anak said : B al e this is good traffi c an d th at is bad tr affic B ale replied : S ir kno w
“ ” “
.
, ,

thou ( thyse ) thou ar t the son he is the ther

lf ,
fa
”
Then Nanak asked these sadh s : “ Wh y h ave
,
.

you not given me an ans wer ? ” Th e Mahant s aid : “ 0 boy w e are l‘Tirbtugi s to us absti nence 2
‘

, ,

f rom clothes is necess ar y ”

Nanak s aid : u w ill lso not be e ing T h e M ah ant replied
”
“
Y o a . at ?
O l ad w hen the Lord sends then w e ar e e ating other w ise w e rem ain silent ; fo r this re ason
, , ,

w e ar e d w ell ing in the j ungle ; h aving become S any asi s w e no longer d w ell in a village in a
'
,

vil l age there is hope ( of getti ng Then Nanak s aid : H e ar O M ah ant w hat is “
, ,

thy n am e ? The M ah ant mentioned his n ame “ ( m y ) garb ( is that of a) Ni rban i ( my ) n ame
”
,

the dust of the s aints ” Nan ak bec ame very h appy an d s aid : H e ar brother B el a I c annot
.
“
, ,

give up this traffic ”

B al a s aid : H e ar N anak K al li w ill be angry w ith me see thou to it
“
.
!
,
”
, ,

Nan ak repli ed : T h is is a good tr affi c there is no loss in it but on the contr ary an incre ase , , .

s
Bel a ai : d “
You must kno w it ”
Then Nanak took the t w enty Rupees from B al e an d put
.

them be fore the M ah ant The Mah ant s aid : H o w 0 l ad ? these ar e of no use to us an d
.
“
,
'

they are given thee by thy father for the s ake of t rafii c ; w h at dost thou me an by giving them ?
,

to Faqi rs ? ”
N an ak replied : “
H ear O Mah ant ! my f a ther h d s aid to me : I f thou come
a
‘
,
”
having m ade good t rafii c then it is good This i s good,
t rafii c every other tr c is
affi b a d .
’
,
.

I
The l it h dg r ap h ed L ahore e dition a dd s her e : 253 3 W W T: t h e servant with ( hi m ) w as
'

B el a w here a s t h e MS ( No
,
which other wise a g r ees verb a t im w it h t h e L ahore editio n does not m en t io n
. . ,

t h e n a me here but further on , .

2
m an ord er o f F a,
qi rs w h o prete n d to be fre ed from every w an t an d to be em a ncip ated w hil s t
’

as yet in t h e bo dy .
lvi JA NA M - S A K H I 0 F BA BA NA NAK . B .

Th e a aM h nt s aid :
“
H e a r O l a d w h a t is thy n a me ? w h o replied H e ar t tho
ar, u? ”
Nan ak :
“
, ,

O M ah ant my n ame is Nan ak Niran k ari ( the Formless on e) I am the son o f K al fi a K h atri of , ,
,

V d tribe ” Then s id th t M h nt “
H e r O l ad w h a t is this N i ran k er i an d the son
th e a i a
. a a a : a , ,

h tr n k replied “ In h D a yug a w e h ad per f ormed devotion t o th e

of a K a i ?
”
Na a : t e v p a r a

Formless one the devotion w as complete but desire entered us ; there fore our bi rth took pl ace in
.

, ,

house Then our birth took pl ce in the house o f an oil m an ; o n account of th at desire
a l ow .
a

ere g in born the house f K h tr i A t th t time also w e w ere incorpore al an d n ow

we w a a in o a a a .

”
l o l ” l
Then the M h nt s id O l d N a n ak “
a sk thou so m e th m g ! N anak
a s w e ar e i n c rp o orea . a a a : a ,

replied : “ Wh at sh all I ask the O n e F orml ess one I desire I desire nothing else
”
Then the Mahant
,
.

thou thysel the F ormless one w h t sh all w e give t o thee ? But do ( on e)

s aid again : 0 l ad “
f ,
ar t a ,

ork t ke these R upees d bind them in thy bundle a n d br in g provisions f or these th at the
w ,
a a n ,

q rs t money is f use to us ”
Then N an ak t O O k 13515 W ith h i m an d w ent
A ti t s ( F a i ) m ay ea o,
n o .

the to he took prov i sions d f u el d w pots an d brought them an d p u t them be f ore the
t o w n ,
an an r a

M ah ant Then the M ah ant s aid : Nanak Niran kari thou art indeed the Formless one The A ti ta
.
“
,
.

h ad a p ssed seven d ays in fa sting ; n ow g o thou ! ”

Then Nan ak bo w ed his he a d rose an d w ent , .

A f ter ( th at) an A ti t asked the M ah an t : S i r w h y didst thou send h i m aw ay he h ad done

“
, ,

service to thee ” The Mah ant repl ied : “ He ar O A ti t he w as himself the F ormless one h e h ad
.
, , ,

come to inquir e aft er us w e h ad t o take fro m him o ur provisions but service w e h ad not t o
, ,

exact from him ; hi s splendour could not be borne by us there fore w e g ave him le ave ,
.

W hen Nan ak h ad gone above on e K 63 he beg an to as B l ,

k e a :
“
Brother B ela wh at h as ,

been done by us ? ” Bhai B ele s aid : He ar O N anak by me none ( t o Rupees ) h ave been “
, ,
.

e aten thou didst de m and them an d I gave them to thee ”

Then N anak s aid : B el a .
“
,

we did n o t m a ke the m i st a ke ”
B e l a replied . :
“
I f I m ade th e mistake th ou must kno w if , ,

I did not make the mistake then th en must know A s thou w ast inexperienced so w as I in
,
.
,

experienced ; K el fi know s ( this ) or thou must kno w it ” Having come there ( t o home ) Nanak . .

did n ot enter his house an d Bal e w ent to his o w n house K al a w as inf ormed th at Bel a the .
, ,

servant ( o f Nanak) h ad entered his house an d th at N an ak h ad not come K al fi bec ame alarmed
,
.

an d w ent to the house o f B el a an d c alled h i m o ut B el a c ame o ut o f the house an d K ale

.

asked :
“
B e l a w here is N n ak an d w here
,
a a r e the R upees ? ”
B el a s ai d : “ M ah at a K ala in going ,

along N an ak h a s given th e t w enty Rupees aw ay to f eed F aqi rs K ala s aid a gain : “ I w h o h ad

”
.
,

sent thee wi th him w h at for did I send thee w ith him ? th at y ou should feed F aqi rs ?
, Mahata ”

K al a thou h adst s aid t o N an ak : ‘m ake a good tr afii c !

, H e s aid : H e ar Bal e w e must m ake
’ ‘
, ,

a good tru di e ; by him the good traffi c h as been m ade t hen mayst cry o r not ” Then K el fi
’
, .

s aid : “ S ho w me to a certainty w here he is ! ” B al e took K ala an d c ame w ith h i m t o the pond .

H av ing come there K al a sei z ed N an ak an d beg an t o ask : W here are those t w enty Rupees ? “

N an ak did n o t say an y thing K al a bec ame angry an d ga ve N anak t w o sl aps on his le ft cheek
.

an d on h i s r ight cheek he g ave him

( t wo ) w ith his right h and Nan ak shed te ars but said .
2
,

nothing the w ater ran do wn his cheeks O n e m an w en t t o Rec Bul ar an d s aid : “ K al il th e

, .

P atv eri h as given his son a se v ere beating

, Nan aki the d aughter of K al a h as fall en for the
.
, ,

l T he MS No 288 5 h as th e
. ord s : In th e Dv ep ara yuga w e h ad p erfo rmed devo t ion to the F o rmless o ne
. w ,

t h e d evo t io n h a d b ecome co m pl et e ; t hen a lso w e w er e i n cor oreal an d n o w also w e ar e incorpor ea l A bout

p .

t h e diff eren t births no t hin g i s said T h e L a ho r e ed ition h a s ( in ten t iona lly left o ut t his whole ass a g e
.
) p .

T h e MS No 28 8 5 gives this p a ss ag e more clear ly : 3m

3
mf g Qfi m 75 i f? 3 311 3 31 %
0

g
'
. .

3 m 3m 3 W? { f 2 3 311 8 Hfi UH i 3T5 g i e K ala h aving becom e an g ry s t ruck , . .

Nanak t w o sla p s w ith t h e r igh t h nd o n the le ft ch eek a n d t wo sl aps with the le ft h a n d on the ri ght c h ec k
a
.

( T h e verb ( i n ?) is d ropp ed ) In th e L ahore e dit io n th is whole p ass age which all J a n a m S ak bi s have is
.
,
-
,

i n te n tion ally le ft o ut it only says t hat K el fi b ec a me ver an g r

,
y y .
lviii JA NA M- S A K H I O F BA BA N A NA K . B .

belongs to K al a the P at v ari Jai r am asked 0 Rae K al a the P atv ari wh at s ort
.
”
f urther :
“
, ,
,

o f people ar e they ? Rae Bul ar s aid : O bro ther they K h t f t h V d cl n

a ” '

” a re a r i s o e i a “
, .
,

J airam s aid : O Rae if her betroth al h as not been made so me w here else bring about my
“
,
,

betroth al w ith her ” The Rae replied : O brother i f betw een them an d y o u interm arri ages
.
“
,

take pl ace I w ill spe ak about it but i f n ot h o w c an I spe ak bo t it

,
a u ? ”
Wi th Jai r am was
, ,

a Br ahm an cook but ver y intelligent Hi m Jair am asked : S i r betw een us an d the V é di s .
“
,
,

do betrotha ls take pl ace or n ot ? Nidh a the Brahm an r eplied : 0 brother they are t aking
”
, ,
“
,

pl ace ” The Rae c alled then K al a an d asked : K al a do betroth als t ake pl ace bet ween
.
“
,

”
him an d you or n o t ? K al fi a nsw ered : T h ey ar e t aking place
”
The Rae s aid f urther “ .

” “
K al a thy d aughter h as become big betroth her w ith Jai r am !
,
K a l replied
ii : O Rae , ,

th ose w h o h ave a daughter do n ot spe ak themsel v es those spe ak w ith w hom something is , , ,

w rong I am thy servant w h atever is in my pow er I sh ll be re dy

.
a
,
a t o do ”
The Rae .

”
s aid : S h e is our d aughter don t trouble yoursel f about
“ i t ! Jai r am c alled ag ain on the
,
’

Rae : 0 Rae “
w ah t ne w s about
,
the betroth a l ? ”
The Rae ans w ered : The asking i n “

m arri age o f others daughters i s not a l a w but a m atter o f submissi on an d entre aty C all thou
’
.
,

h i m an d spe ak w ith him w h at w ill h ave to be s aid o n our p art ,

th at w e sh all also say , .

Jai r am replied : Ho w sh all I spe k

a ? y
“
o u ar e R aj as you underst a nd it ”
The Rae s aid : Do ,
.
“

n ot spe ak thysel f l et it be told by ,

the Br ahm an
”
Jai r am replied : W ell S ir the Brahman .
“
, ,

Jai ram c alled the Brahm a n an d s aid : S i r go t o K al a the V adi s house for the
’
” “
m ay go .
, , ,

s ake o f betroth al ” The Br ahm an ans w ered : 0 Rae let us both y ou an d I be together and
.
“
, , ,

spe ak t o K al a ! ” O n S aturday w hen o n e w atch an d a h al f of th e day w as yet rem aining th e , ,

Brahm an s aid to K al a : L ook Mah ata K alli thou ar t a good K h atri an d Jair am also is a
“
, ,

gre at m an ; it is a good union consent to a betrothal ! K al a replied : “ A r t th o u speaking

”
, ,

O Brahm an or is Jai r am spe aking ? ”

,
The Brahm an replied : O M ah ata h o w should Jairam “
,

spe ak ? he h as sent me ”
Th en s aid the Rae : “ K al a the B rahm an spe aks truth h ow should
.
, ,

Jai r am spe ak ? Wh at the Br ahm an s ays th a t h e s ays ” T h en s aid K al a : W ell 0 Rae thy , .
“
, ,

w ord is on my he a d ; w h at y o u d o that is acceptable t o my seven generations ! ” ,

The betroth al of Jair am an d N an aki took pl ace In the coming ( month o f ) M angh ar th e .

w ork w as do n e Jai r arn took the D ali ( w ith his w i fe ) to his house ( at S ult anpur )
.
1
A fterw ards .

K al a began to send Nan ak but N an ak did not go K al a s aid : ,

2
Go an d bring thy sister ” .
“
.

Then the Rae c alled Nan ak com forted him an d s ai d : Go for this time an d bring thy sister ,
“
,
”
aft er w e sh al l ent r ust you ( to them ) there N an ak w ent an d as it w as some j ourney he took .
,

B ala the S an db fi w ith him as he h ad an aff ection for B al a H aving gone there he began to
, , , .

ask le a ve fo r h is sister Then Jair am s aid : Nanak rem ain thou also here I am not sending “
.
, ,

( thee an d N an aki s aid then to Jai r am : S end me this time th at the father K alli “
,

an d the mother b oth m ay be p le a sed an d N an ak also m a be ple sed he w il l ‘I h ve

, y a say : a ,
’ ’
not come b ack empty Then don t send me again ! I stan d in aw e o f Nan ak When a dream
.
.

comes to me w h atever comes f orth o ut o f h i s mouth ( in the dre am ) th at is taking pl ace ;

,
,

fo r this re son I tell you this

a
”
Jai ram s aid : W ell go w hen w ilt thou come again ? .
“
, ,
”

N an aki s aid : When thou w i lt come to d o th e government w ork then take me w ith thee
“
, ,
”
I am not coming by mysel f Nan ak took N an aki w ith him an d they w ent home an d joined
.

The w o r ds o r t h e origi n al ar e : fluff? QT?

I
t hey allud e b r iefly t o t h e w ed d in g which

took pl ace i n Ma gh ar B ut t h e L a h o r e e di tio n is n o t co n ten t w ith th is brief a llusio n it gives a d e scrip tio n
n .

o f t h e m a r i age p r oces sio n a n d th a t m u

r ch mo n ey an d s weetmea t s w ere d istr ibu ted T hat this i s quite a
, .

r e ce n t a ddit ion i s p r oved by t h e MS 28 8 5 w hich contain s nothi g o f this ki n d but ag ree s here qui te with .
, n
,

o ur text .

i e t o S ult anp ur t o look a fter h i s sister

2
. .
, .
 JAN A M-S A K H I O F BA BA NA NA K . B .
fix

( th eir people ) When : the se ason of V ai sakh came ag ain the me asuring ( of the c om fi el ds)
.
,
-

commence d Jai ram c ame to T al v an di an d h aving me asured there he w as on the poi n t o f bringing
.
,

b a ck his w ife R ae B ular he ard o f it he sho w ed Jair am much attenti on an d entre aty ; Jai r am
‘
.

w as much ple ased w ith the Rae he s aid also to th e Rae : “ O Rae I am very much ple a sed
‘

, ,

w ith you m ay boldly s o me service be ordered to me

, The Rae s aid : O brother t h y father ,

i n l aw is very foul tongued an d Nan ak thy bro th er in l aw is a perfect S adh We w ere s aying
'
- - - -
.

this th at you should keep him w i th y ou Jai r am replied : “ O Rae wh at is better th an this ?
, .
,

H e sh all go w ith me ” Then the Rae s aid : “ O brother it w ill not d o th at he go w ith you
.
, , ,

after t w o months w e w ill send him ; you must bring about his betroth al there somew here ”
( i
. a .w ith somebody ) Jai r am replied :
“
Well Rae wh at Ram w il l do th at is good
.
Jair am , , , .
”

took his w ife an d w ent

N an ak give
s away ki s dr i n king vessel an d r i ng to an A ti t . A r r angemen ts f or hi s dep ar ture

to S ul tanp ur .

[ Wh en Nan ak h ad become t wenty ye ars of age one d ay an A ti t ( F aqi r) came an d sat outsid e ,

of the to w n There also Nan ak went w ith ple asure an d sat do w n In N an ak s h and w as a
. .
’

d rinking vessel ( L ata) an d on one h and a ring o f gold The A ti t s aid : “ Wh o ar t thou ? w h at .

is thy n ame ? ” Nan ak replied : “ My n ame i s N an ak Ni ran k ari I a m a V adi K h atri ” Then , .

the A ti t s aid agai n : W h ose a e w e ?

“
r
”
Nan ak replied : “
You ar e th e Niran kar s ”
Then ’
.

the A ti t s aid : ‘5You ar e a Ni ran k ari an d I am a Niran kari betw een thee an d me w hat ,
-

difference is there ? ” Nan ak replied : “ None w h atever T h en the A ti t s aid : “ Give me this .

drinki ng vessel an d ring ! ”

Nan a k took o ff the ring f rom his h and an d put ( it an d ) the drinking
vessel be fore the A t t i Then the A ti t s id
a . :
“
They have come t o h and let them remain w ith ,

me ” . Nan ak s aid : “ O Go d w hen the spi ttle is thro w n o ut of the mouth it is n o t again
, ,

taken up ” The A ti t replied : “ O Nanak thou ar t re ally t h e Nir an k ar i ( F ormless one ) an d w e are
.
,

the copy ” Nan ak w ent then to his o w n house an d the A ti t took th e drinking vessel an d th e
.

r ing an d w ent o ff K ala asked Nan ak :

.
“
Where is the drinking vessel an d th e ring ? ”
N an ak
rem ained silent an d did not spe ak K ala h av in g become angry s aid : “ Go le ave my house ! I
.
,

do n ot hold thee b ack ! ”

Rae Bular he ard this an d c al led K ala : O K al a w h at h as h appened ,

ag ain ? S i r I am ( your ) dust : the ring an d the dr inking vessel he h as thro w n a w ay some
” “
,

w here ; i t is n o t kno w n w h t done The Ra then s id to la L et him be sent

”
a h e h as
'
e a K a . :
“

t o Jai r am ; here thou a r t a nnoyed an d he a lso is g rieved ; w h a tever h a ppens there th at h appens ”
, .

T h e Rae w rote a letter to N am a ki an d J a i r a m an d w rote a good de al :

“
We h ave entrus ted
Nan ak to thee ; w h atever w ill be done on t h y p art th at should be done w ithout del ay
”
Jai ram
,
.

also w rote a letter :

“
N an ak come an d j oin us ,
”
When Nan ak h ad re ad this letter he s ai d
.
,

I w ill j oin Jai ram The people of th e house s aid : I f Nan ak go it is

.
“ :

N an ak arr i ves at S ul tanp ur an d en ter s th e C ommi ssar i at .

the third of the light h alf of the month M angh ar in S amb at

On Nan ak w ent to ,

Jair am ; he c ame on the fi f th day from T al v an di to S ultanpur On t h e seventh o f the light h al f .

o f Man gh ar he met w ith Nan aki , his sister N an aki on seeing Nan ak f ell do w n at his feet
,
. .

N an ak s aid : “ O sister thou ar t older ( th an I ) I on the contrary w ill fall at thy f eet or shouldst
, , ,

I
He r e Ni r a n k ar i h a s th e
sense : of t h e F or m l ess on e .

T h e L ahore e d ition h a s S a mb a t 1 544 a g a i n st a l l M S utho rity

2 . a .
,
Ix JA NAM- S A K H I 0 F BA BA NA NA K . B .

thou fall at my feet ?“ Nan ak? replied : O brother thou ar t spe aking the truth but though “
, ,

thou m ayst be a man thou ap p earest to me as my S upreme L ord ” Jai r am w as n o t at home

,
. .

The B ebe put do w n a stool ( for N an ak ) an d began to ask : 0

“ brother a t
r th ou very h appy ? ” “
,

Nan ak replied : “ 0 Babe I am al w ays h appy ” He w as ( still ) sitting w hen Jai r am after wards
,
.

c ame home When he looked abo ut N an ak w as sitting in front

. When N an ak saw th at his
,
.

brother i n l a w Jai r am h ad co m e he rose an d ran to f all do w n at his f eet Jai ram w as a very
- -
,
.

intelligent m an ; he seiz ed the h ands o f Nanak an d did n o t allow him to apply them to his f eet ,

he himsel f put his h and on the f eet o f Nan ak T hen Guru N an ak s aid : O brother in l aw .
“ - -
,

w h y is this inverted custom m a de by thee ? ” Jair am replied : O N an ak y o u kno w th at w e “

, ,
.

w ere brothers i n l a w an d ( n o w ) I consi d er th ee as the S upreme Lord

- -
, I t h as been m y good luck .
,

that you have come to me ; you h ave given me your sight an d I h ave been ex alted thereby , .

Don t y ou do an ything sit do w n an d live w ith e ase ! ” Gur u N an ak replied : O brother ih

’
,
“ -

l aw i f there w ould be some bu siness ( for me ) it w ould be a good thing ”

, Jair am s aid : Well ,
.
“
,

brother as this ( thought ) h as arisen i n your mind it is good H ave y o u re ad some Turkish ?”
, , .

Guru N an ak replied : We h ave re ad some H in di ” Jair am s aid : Brother N an ak w ill you

“
.
“
,

t ke
a t h e Commiss ariat ? ”
Guru N an ak replied : O brother i n l aw w hose is the Commiss ariat ? ” “ - -
,

Jai r am s a id : It belon gs t o th e Nav ab D aul at K han L 6di it is a gre at commiss ari at ; i f it be

“
,

possible then take it ! ” Gur a N an ak replied : W ell brother in l aw the F ormless on e w ill brin g
,
“
,
- -
,

it t o a n issue ! ”
The Béb é N amaki s aid again : Thou ar t th e form o f the S upreme L ord as “
,

th e m orsel i s so eat it in sitting do w n do thou n ot fall into th ese troubles ! thou dost not come
, ,

up t o these troubles thou art a F aqi r Gur a N an ak replied :

, I f o n e e a ts h is bre ad in doing
.
” “

( some ) w ork it becomes pure a n d,t h e Turk s ar e s aying :

‘
Wh at is e aten l awfully th at is
, ,

Then Bebe N an aki s aid : W ell brother as thou ar t thinking an d liking so it is “

, , ,

S i r ar e y o u a c q ua inted w ith his cir

”
right Then B eb e Namaki s aid further t o Jair am :
.
“
,

c um st an c es o r
”
n ot ? Jair am replied : O se r v ant o f th e S upreme L ord I am a cqu ai nted ” “
, .

Then Bebe N an aki continued to say : “ Where sh all his b etroth al be m ade ? i f he conceive an
affection f or t h e m arried state then business w ill be done by h i m Jai r am replied : I w ill ” “
, .

see about it If he w ill give hi m sel f t o busi n ess then some K h atri also w ill give the h and to a
.
,

betro th al ; d o n ot be h asty ! K eep the L ord in t h y min d ! Bébé N amaki replied : S ir I am ” “

,

n o t cleverer t h an thou bu t I h ad t o t ell y o u this ” O n the fou rteenth o f the light h al f of

, .

the ( mon t h of ) M angh ar the Commiss ariat was given ( to N an ak) by Jair am S ay 0 brother .
,

v ah Gur a j i l -

I
d n ah i n the C ommissar i at , v i si ted by h i s f ath er a s acc o n ts u
:

.
ar e exam i ned by J air am and

f oun d eor r eet .

[ O n e thous and Rupees in

c ash w ere given ( to him by Jair am ) B ala the S an dh fi s aid : .
3
, ,
0 Gun ; ( A ngad ) I also
“

, w as w ith him I s aid : ‘O brother N an ak thou h ast t aken on e

.

thousand Rupees an d the Commissariat give me le ave to go Then Gur a N anak s aid : ‘0
, .
’

1
T h is s t o ry is a lso t o h e found in t h e P a nj abi Gr am mar ( e d ited by th e A m eric a n M issio naries L udih a a
n ) ,

p 97 sqq b ut t h e text i s n o t gi ven c o r r ec tly ; t h ey prin t e g N 3 3 1 3 1 i n s te ad o f a s if u

m fg m
. .
, ' ’

ra .

a d u
,

rfi w er e t h e s a m e w h erea s t h e la tter is t h e L oca t ive a n d w ritten so i n t h e MS S

'
n

o
,
.

HE ! t h e s am e as “57 4 0 6 a l ady us ed also m ad d ressm g S i s t er o ut o f r espect o r e n de a r m en t ;

2 K

, 2 2, , 11 .
,

ge n er ally R} is a dd ed to t o e n h a n ce t h e r esp ect .

3
I t is n ot
qui te c l ear by w hom t h e Rupees were given t o N an a k if by J a ir am as he a d ste wa rd
,
, ,
-
, or by
N a v ab D a ul at K h an t h e o r igin al o n ly s ays :
f 2? fi l a W m a ? w 1 .
 JA NA M-S A K H I O F BA BA NA NA K . B .
lxi

brother Bal a thou h ast m ade an unsolid friendship ( w ith me ) w hilst living thou ar t le aving
, ,

me ? ’
I replied : S ir th ou w ast the son o f a K hatri an d didst th y o w n business I w ill
, ,

n o w also do my ow n w ork Then ur fi N an ak said : ‘ O brother B ala w e sh al l p ass ( here )

’

g
'

.
,

some d ays this profession must be done by us w h at our business is that w e sh all do ; behold
, , ,

t h o u the amusement ( sho w ) of the F ormles s one ! w h at f e ats the Forml ess one is doing ! rem ai n
thou w ith us live ( w ith ,
Then I replied : ‘Well Nanak as you like w h at you w ill say , , ,

th at I w ill do Then I also beg an to do w ork w ith N an ak

.
’
When in this w ork t w o ye ars .

h ad p assed M ah at a K al a c ame to get inf orm ation ( about it ) an d met w ith Gu

,
r fi Na n ak Gur a , .

Nanak rose an d fell do w n at the feet of K ala M ah at a K al a kissed his he ad an d pressed h im .

to his neck an d comforted h i m H e beg an to ask : ‘0 son t w o ye ar s h ave n ow p assed since .

, ,

thou w ast sent here w h at is gained w h at e aten ? ,

Nan ak replied : ‘F ather m uch h as been ,
’
,

e aten ( spent) much h as been g aine d but no D am ri rem ains w ith us

,
Then M ah at a K ala ,
2
.
’

b egan to qu arrel w ith me ( i e B al a) Gur a Nan ak m ade me a si gn an d so I di d not speak . . .

, .

K ala beg an to say : I h ad thought N anak is n o w employed in busines s w h at of my property

‘

, ,

he h ad ( formerly ) squ an dere d that he w ill n o w h ave gained an d w ill restore to me He tal ked
,
.
’

in such a w ay as it w as usu al w ith K al a H e met then w ith N an aki an d Jai r am an d began

, .
'

to say : ‘Wh at h ave you done ? are y ou looking after him ? you h ave not looked after h i s
business n o t h ave you m ade an e ff ort for his betr oth al you h ave done nothing at all B aba ,
.
’

N an aki replied : S ince he h as come here he h as squ andered nothing of thi n e you ar e not
‘
, ,

th ankful th at he is h appy an d h as taken to his w ork one day he w ill m ake profit ; an d w e
, ,

h a ve also some in form ation concerning a betroth al to d ay or to morro w it w ill take place in ,
- -

some direction ; w e h ave lost nothing in it w h at must w e look out ? 0 father i f ( the betrothal ) , ,

is in an y di r ection bein g brough t about on your p art then do so ! A s it is painful to us so it , ,

is still more p ain ful to you K al a s aid : ‘0 d aughter N an aki if it w ill be done by me then
.
’
, ,

w h at is it necess ary to me ( to ask y ou) ? A n d d aughter if y o u m ake ( it i e the bet r oth al )

‘

. .
, , , ,

i t must be m ade in the house o f a good K hatri ; an indiff erent one must not be m ade Jai ram .
’

s aid then : ‘We must not m ake entre aties O M ahata ! There i s a K hatri Mal a o f th e Sana , ,

f amily in ( the village of ) P akh a the Radh av a in his house is a d aughter ; he also is c alled a
, , ,
3

good m an an d is P at v ari of the Radh av a H e is m aking the betrothal ( of his d aughter) f or t h e

'

s ake o f reli gious in er i t 4 there w e h ave looked out for a betroth al ; w h at is ple asing to the L ord th at ,

w ill t ake pl ace 0 M ah at a compose your m in d Ram w ill m ake ( al l ) right K al a s aid then
’
. .
, ,

‘
The sh ame is common to the sons an d to the sons in l aw I w as s aying in my mind : the - -
.

h appiness o f Bebe Nan aki I h ave seen w ith my eyes n ow it is my w ish th at w hilst living I see , ,

the h appiness o f Nan ak ; then my mind w il l be compose d Then J air am s aid : 0 Mah ata rem ain .
’
,

t h en here an d the mother l ady w e w ill also c all an d bri n g here

,
-
K ala replied : 0 son Jairam it is .
’
,

h ard for me to remain here as I am occupied there Jai r am s aid : 0 M ahata thou ar t in the pl ace
, .
’
,

o f P ar man and
‘
tho u ar t m y father
,
5
Then K al a said : ‘Jairam w hen the betroth al of Nan ak t akes .
’
,

place then give me inf orm ation ; keep my son N an ak under your eyes lest he w aste an y money
, ,
.
’

Then Bébé N an aki s aid : ‘O fat her you ar e not th ankful Y ou w ere d aily c rying : “ to day , .
-

re a d i f? 3 3 t wo ye ars but i n the L ah ore e dition this i s ch a n ged ( a p pa ren tly w ithout an y
A l l MS S .
, ,

a ut hori ty fo r in the P a nj ab i Gra m p 99 an d in the S ikh ad é r a

, j d i v ith ia p 21 1 we find al so i f? 3 3 3 )
. .
, , .
,

t o : RU}? Q (p t w o mon ths . .

2
m the eighth p a r t o f a P ais a
,
.

T hus the n a me i s w ritte n in t h e M S S Radh av a ( a lso pr onounce d B a n d h ava as I w as told) i s the

3
,
.
.

preper n a me o f a tribe o f J a ts HQ3 E l n a s ignifies th e re fore l iterally : in P a kh6 t h e Rad h av a s ( village

.
‘
,
’

T h at i s t o say : w i t hout t aki n g a n y money fo r her

4
b ein g le ft o ut) S ee p lxi v l 25
. .
, . .
.

P a rm an an d i s s a id t o h a ve b een t h e fat her o f J airam

5
.
lxii JANA M- S A K H I 0 F BA BA NA NAK . B .

this is w asted ( by h i m) ; n ow h e does not w aste thine o wn An d 0 father w hen he is feeding .

, ,

t h e F aqi rs then o ur heart is trembling ; if there is no deficiency in the money o f t h e Government

'

, ,

an d i f w e rem ai n un ab ashed o n th e p art o f the Government it is al l right A n d 0 f ather wh en ,

.
, ,

he is rendering account some surplus comes out ; he is some f orm o f the Formless o n e,
Then .
’

0 M ah at a for thi s re ason w e c ann ot say an yth i ng to h i m K ala replied :

’
Jai r am s aid : ‘
, 0 .
‘

son Jai r am i f you render agai n account an d if some surplus comes out y o u w ould do w ell to
, ,

t ake it to yoursel f to him a L akh ( of Rupe es ) an d a straw is the s ame A n d c all thou B ala and
,
.

a dmonish him I am also telling it him Jai r am sent a m an an d c alled B ala ; he s aid to hi m
'

’
.
,

‘
Bh ai B al a thou ar t the special friend o f N anak w e w ere thinking o f thee thus th at as Nanak
, , ,
.

is so ar t th en ; t ake thou c are of Nanak that he d o not w aste his money on an y stranger
, , .
’

K al a s aid then : It is a sh ame th at ( my ) son an d B ala rem ain together W hat Jair am s ai d
‘ ’
.
,

I did not take amiss but th at w hich K al a s ai d I answ ered to K ala : Mah ata K ala m ay not
,
.
‘
,

some suspicion be in thy mind that B ala is rem aining w ith Nan ak an d w ill m ake some extra ,

v agance ! I n my opinion Gh i also i s a bad thing an d some oth er greediness is a bad thin g : to ,

us w h o w ere rem aining w ith Nan ak Nan ak appears as the S upreme L ord Mahata K ala thou
, , .
,

ar t hun ry af ter money an d I h ave a craving af ter this one

g Wh at h e (Nan ak ) does that he does .
, .

We m ake f urther no apolo gy ; i f thou art hungry after money then rem ain t h e n w ith him , ,

w h a tever comes in to h is h and th at t ake ! Then s aid Jai r am : ‘ O M ah at a Bh ai B al a speaks ’

,

the truth : N an ak is n ot a m an he appe ars as something else W ell M ah ata dep ar t th en now ! , .
, ,

w hen th e betroth al h as take n pl ace at th at very time th e aff air i e the m arri age must be done
( ) , . .

by us quickly love w ill then spring up to his w ife an d then he w il l comprehend himself ( what
,

he h as t o Then K ala w ent home .

When one m onth h ad passed some good m an brought Jai r am this inform ation about Nanak
“
,

H e ar Jai r am thy brother i n l aw is a stew ar d an d is squ andering the money of th e Govern

‘
- -
, , .

ment thou dost n ot take c are o f h i m ; dost t h en not kno w h o w the temper of t h e P ath ans i s ?
, ,
’

Jai r am bec ame sorry he w ent h ome an d took N an aki aside , H e beg an t o say : H e ar O beloved .
‘
,

of t h e L ord a c ertain m an said to d ay to me :

, Jai r am thy bro ther i n l aw is a ste w ard he is - “
- -
, ,

squ andering th e money t h en dost n o t admonish h i m ; dost th en kno w t h e tem per of th e P athans
,

or not ? ”
W hat sh al l I do n o w w i fe ? Wh at you say th at I w ill do Nan aki replied : ‘What, , .
’

comes into th y mind th at do wh at c an I say I m ust also w al k according to th y w erd Jai ram
, , , .
’

s aid : Give me some advice 0 w ife I w ill do it N an aki replied : ‘ S ir h as n o f aith yet come to
, , .
’

you ? You w ill think th at I am taking the side o f my brother W h atever be the M aya of
, .

the w orld th at al l goes out o f the h ands o f Nan ak But w ell S i r it i s in thy mind d o th i s
, .
, , ,
w ork : t ake thou once an account ; if th e account h as turned out f ull be it in excess
or be it not ,

in excess but be it not deficient then th en wilt not again be be w ildered by th e w ord of an y one
, , .
’

Jair am replied : W ell w i fe I d o not take it i f thou h ast faith in him

‘
h t should I
(
’
,
) ,
w a do ? ,
,
N auaki s aid : ‘S i r don t let it go n o w I w ill c all my brother ’

Jai r am replied : W ll i e ’ ‘
,
e w f , .
, ,
as you like N an aki sent the sl ave girl Tuls a an d c alled Nan ak
.
’ ‘

The sl ave girl Tuls a w ent -

-
.

an d m ade her s al am Nan ak s aid : 0 Tuls a w h y h ast thou come t da ‘

.

o y ? T uls a replied , -
’

‘
S i r my l ady told me : “ Go to my brother an d tell him th at he should gi e me
,
v h i s sight ; ,

h f
t ere ore I h ve come N n k s id Go Tuls a I am coming
’

A f ter w ards Gur a Nan ak

‘
a a a a : .
, , .
’

asked Bh ai B la a :
‘
Wh y h as th e Bébé c al led me ? I s aid : S h e m ay have c alled you on ’ ‘

a ccount 0 f anything Gur fi N anak rej oined :

’
‘
.
Bh ai B al a my he art gives me w itness that , ,

some t ale be aring h as been made about me

-
B al a s aid : S ir wh at t ale be aring c an an one .
’
‘
-
y ,

m ake about thee ? w h at ar t th en doing ? Then Gura Nan ak s aid : m B515 bring a pl ate ’
(
,

s w eetme ats I bro ught it Nanak put al l the w

’
of .

s eet m e ats into his l ap they w ere one S eer

.

,
an d a h al f ( = t hree pou nds ) Nanak took them an d c ame to Nan aki Bébé Nan aki w as standing
.

.
.

‘ ’
Come bro th er she s ai d an d put a steel for h i m Nan ak sat on the stool I also w as w ith him
, , .

, .
 I“

J AN A M- S A K H I O F BA B A N AN A K A l xiii
‘

. .

Nan ak sked : ‘0 Bébé wh y h ave I been c al led ? S h e replied : ‘0 brother m any d ays h ave
a ,
’
,

p assed since I h ave seen you I h ad a longing to see you then I sent for y ou Gura N an ak
, , .
’

s aid : ‘Bébé j i I doubt it ; tell m e w h y you h ave c alle d me !

-
, Then the B eb e replied : 0 ’ ‘

brother all is kno w n t o thee but it cannot be told Nan ak s aid : ‘ I know i n my o w n mind
, , . .
’
,

th at somebody h as m ade a tale be aring about me there fore say I also th at account should be -
, ,

t aken from me The Bebe Nan aki comf orted h im but Gura N anak s aid : ‘No this is a m atter
.
’
, ,

of a ccount here no reg ard is h ad to an y one

,
Th en the Bébé s aid : W ell brother .
’
,
.
’

In S amvat
“
on th e fift eenth of the light h al f o f the month of Mangh ar the account ,

w as m ade ; the account of three months w as given O n e hundred an d th i rty fi v e Rupees rem ained .
-

due t o Nan ak after ( deducting) e ating drinking t aking an d giving Then Nan ak s ai d to Jai r am , ,
.

‘
W ell brother i n l a w w e h ave become justified in thy sight : t ake this Com m iss ariat an d gi ve
,
- -
,

it to some o n e else ! ours is the Formless o n e the cre ator ! Then Jair am fell at his feet an d Bebe ,
’ 2

N amaki began t o w eep an d to say : ‘F i rst be at me an d then go ! N an ak s aid : ‘ O bro ther i n

’
-

l aw : n o w the a ccount h as t urn ed o ut f ull but i f it w ould be less or more then h ow ? you , ,

w ould b ri ng me into difli c ul t i es J ir m replied 0 brother formerly I kne w someth ing but
a a :
‘
.
’
, ,

n o w fai t h h as come t o me on both sides ; p ardon me f or this f ault ! I h ave erred very much !
’ 3

N ana k w ent t o the Commiss a ri at an d sat do w n there ; al l the w orkmen began t o congr atul ate
“

him Hin dfi s an d Musal man s w ere

,

N d n alc s betr othal

’
. H e h as to g ive u
ac co n t an d c omes o ut w i th a s rp u l us .

[ In S am vat 1 544 , on th e fif th o f th e l igh t h al f o f ( the month of ) M angh ar the betrothal o f v

,

Nan a k took pla ce in the house o f Mala the C ana in P akh a the Radh av a s ( villa ge )
’
Jai r am
, , ,
.

an d B ebe N an aki g a ve notice to M a h a t a K a l a an d to t h e l ady m other 4

an d congr atul a ted ; they
c alled them ( s aying ) : I f y o u come the m arriage expenses w il l be m ade
“ ”
K ala h a ving he ard
,
.

this w as very h appy an d like w ise the l ady m other Wh o h ad brought this information his .
,

m outh w as fi lled w ith sugar c andy an d K hi r w hich the mother prep ared w ith her own h ands
-
5
.
,

H a ving filled h i s mouth sh e beg an to say : I am a s a crifice t o thy m on th w hich h as given “

,

me the inform ation of the con gratul ati o n o f Nan ak ” Then al l the f em ales of the V é di s c ame .

by night an d sat do w n to sing ; they began t o say : O n e Nan ak a good m an h as been pro “
, ,

d uc ed in our fam il y ; as his betroth al h as l aw f ully taken pl ace our family is rend ered spotless ,

by A n d th e l ady m other sent congr a tul ation to her f ather s house in the M anjh a 6
R am a
’
.

Jh ang ar " w as th e father of the lady an d Bh i r ai w as her mother ; they w ere the m ate rn al grand
fath er an d grandmother o f N an ak an d the f ather an d mother in l aw o f K al a S h e sent w ord - - .

to them : Come an d go to S ultanpur we w il l m ake fine ex penses ( in t h e

“
,
Bh i r ai ,

the grandmother an d Rama the grand father an d K isn a th e gra ndmother s brother these three
, , , ,
’
,

h aving hear d this w ere h appy an d c ame thence to Tal v an di an d met K al a H avi ng met him
,
'

they rose an d w ent from T al v andi w ith K al fi an d L al ii th e Vadi an d the mother l ady six men , , ,

ere re dy T w serv nts w ere w ith R am a three serv ants an d one M ard an a the D am o f the
w a o . a , ,

house in al l f our men w ere w ith K al a so th at al l together there w ere tw elve m en When they
,
; ,
.

1
Al l theh ave t h e ye a r 1 543 o n ly the L a h ore e dition h as ch an ged it t o 1 544
MS S . ,
.

31 3 a 3 3 3 13 3 o ur w ork i s ( to say an d to te sti fy) : the cre ator

‘

The MS N o 2885 rea ds : W

'
a
. . ,

3
We b re a k o ff here a s the le n gthene d speec h
,
es an d mutu al compliments a r e quite irr eleva nt .

ha ? i s rice boiled in m ilk

5
4
The w ords ar e : mm $ 8 1 5 .

-
31 1 51
5 t h e M anjh
,
a i s t h e cen t r al p art o f the B ar i D u ab .

i y n me properly R m f the J h an g a r fa mily

32 a a
7
373 i t h fa m l a o

u
.
s e ,

8 o t p xi note 1 T hough M u sa l m an s they are a lso a tt ac hed t o H i n dfi houses

Ab 3 31 see
.
. ,
,
.
,
lxiv JA N A M S A K HI O F BA BA NA NA K
- . B .

w ere the point of starti ng th ey w ent t o Rae Bul ar to t ake le ave o f him K al a W ent an d stood
on ,
.

be fore the Rae ; the Rae asked : H o w K al a ? K ala s aid : The betroth al o f N an ak thy slave “
,
" “
, ,
’
adh av a s
h as at ken pl a ce w e are going to m a
,
ke the m arri a ge expenses in P a kh a the R ( village ) , ,
”
le ve be given The replied K l it is good but is N a n ak c are f ul ? K al a s aid
u ” “
m ay a t o s ! R a e : a a , ,

“
O Rae h e h as ,
given me ground p
f or a p rehension ”
N o K ala I spoke o n a ccount o f something .
“
,

”
else thy temper is h arsh but he is a S adh do not qu arrel w ith him !
, ,
This i s not my intention ,
“
,

”
O Rae ! an d O Rae y ou h ave been m a de equ al t o the S upreme L ord spe ak you w ith kindness !
, ,
,

The Rae said : Go K al a m ay God do y ou goo d m ay he accomplish the w ork ! We also love
“
, , ,
”
him but K al a kiss the head of Nan ak as being mine go the L ord protect you ! , ,
, , ,

K ala mounted a c a rt an d st arted ; on the fif th day they arr ived at S ultanpur on Thursday , .

They entered the house o f P arm an and the P alta an d congratul ations beg an to be m ade Nanak , ,
.

obtai ned inform ation tha t the mother an d the father the f ather s younger brother the m aternal
, ,
’
,

grand father an d grandmother an d uncle ( on the mother s side ) an d also M ard an a the D am h ad ’
, ,

come H e rose an d r an an d fell do w n at the feet o f K al a K al a lifted him up an d kissed hi s

.
.
,

he ad Nanak sai d : O fat her i s the R e ple ased

. a ? ” “
K al a replied : ,
0 son it is good that “
, ,

”
thou didst remind me the Rae h ad s aid th at I should kiss thy he ad ,
Then N an ak fell down ,
.

at th e f eet of his mother l a dy ; his mother kissed h i s he ad an d pressed him to her neck Then .

N an ak f ell do w n at the f eet o f his uncle L ala L al a took him to his neck kissed his face .
,

0 son thou h ast m ade o ur family spotless h ere a n d the f uture the L ord kno w s
”
an d s aid :
“
.
,

Then N an ak fell dow n at the feet o f h i s grand father Rama Rama took him to h i s neck and .

did not let him go Then the grandmother Bh i r ai s ai d : L et h i m go f rom thy neck ! ” Rama
.
“

repli ed to Bh ir ai : “ W hen my desire w ill be fulfilled then I w ill let h i m go .

”

In S amvat 1 54 4 o n the seventh o f the light h alf o f the month o f M agh they starte d fro m
,

, ,

S ultanpur h avi ng l efi ec ted o n a good moment an d d ay

, N idh a the Brahm an w as sent in ad vance .
, ,

to the vil l age o f P akh a the Radh av a The grandson of P ak h a the Radh av a w as Hi ta his .
, , ,

P at v ari w as M al a the C an a Ni d h a the Brahm a n w en t an d g ave in f orm ation to Mala : “ O

, .
, ,

M ah ata M ala be h appy ! ” M al a replied : Reverence t o thee O P andh a ! Come ! w hence hast
,
“
,

thou come ? N idh a s aid : ”

I h a ve come from S ult anpur ” M ala s aid then : Wh y hast “
.
“

thou come ? ”
N i dh a replied : O brother J m an d P arm an and the P al t a h ave sent me
a i r a
“ ”
, , , .

M al a s aid : Wh y h ast thou been sent ? ” Nidh a replied : K al a the f ather i n l aw h as come
“ “
,
- -
,

f rom T al v an di for the s ake o f m aking the m arri age expenses A n d Jai r am h a d s aid to me .

‘
Go thou an d bring inf orm ation t o M ah a ta there fore h ave I come ” M al a replied : “ May .

they com e on my he ad ! ”
O n S unday the tenth aft er a w atch o f the d a h ad risen they arri ved Mala
, y , .

h ad m ade some preparations ( o f f ood ) an d put do wn

( fo r them ) P arm an and th e P alta w ent .
, ,

an d g a ve the w edding presents w ith h i s o w n h ands In taking an d giving congratula tions the .

custo m w as w ell observed f rom the side o f both p arties Then K al a the Vadi s aid t o P arman and .
, ,
-

“
O brother ask thou for the appointment o f the m arri age d a ! ” P a rm an and w as an intelligent
,
y
m an h e took M al a an d sat aside w ith him
, The m atter w as accomplished L ook 0 M ahata .
“
.
, ,

the l ad is a young m an an d it is he ard tha t the girl also i s gro w n up : give thou a d ay for
,

t h e m arr i age t h e V adi s h a ve come f rom T al v an di an d the Jh an ar s the rel atives o f the mother
,
g , ,

o f the l ad h ave come f rom the M anjha ” M ala ans w ered : 0 brother h e of good cheer ! give
, .
“
,
’
me o n e ye ar s dela y then h aving ascert ained a good ti me for the m ar riage I w il l send you
,
'

”
w ord H aving s aid this be dismi ssed them in a good m anner w ith honour
.
They r e entered .
-

S ultanpur w ith gre at j o y Con gr atul ations beg an t o be m ade ; Bébé Nan aki c al led her companions
.

an d they sat do w n to sing O n the f ourth d ay they took le a ve .

.

Then M ard ana the Dam s aid : “ 0 Nan ak give me some m arri age present of thy o wn
, , ,

N an ak replied : O M ard an a w hat w ilt thou take ? We h ave some business , w ith thee .
 JA NAM-S A K H I 0 F BA BA NANAK B
v i . .

said : Ho w is it Jai ram is th e account m ade up ? Jairam replied

“ Health 0 Navab ! it ” :
“
,
, ,

is m ade up ”
.
“ ”
The Nav ab said : H o w h as it turned out ? Jairam replied :
“
He alth 0 Navab , ,

cal l Jada Rae ! ” Jada Rae w as called ; h aving come he p aid reverence to t h e Navab The .

”
v b s d the ccount been t ken ? d h h it turned out ? J ad a Rae r plied
Na a ai : H as “
a a an o w a s
e
Nav ab he alth ! three hundred an d tw enty one R upees h ave come out as surplus
t o N anak
-
”
.

The N avab s aid : “ Wh at ours or his ? ” J ada Rae replied : “ 0 f Nan ak th ey ar e due to Nanak
,
,

on the p art o f the Go v ernment ”

Then th e Nav ab s aid :
“
Th e people w ere s aying th at Nan ak
.

is sq ua ndering th e money ”
Then Jair am s aid : O Navab he alth ! the people are bearing
.
“
,
”
much spite ”
The Nav ab s aid : C all the tre asurer Bh avan
.
“ i d a s ! The tre asurer w as called -
,

c ame an d s aluted The Nav ab s aid : “ Bh av ani das the money th at is due to N an ak give
.
-
, ,

” “
him n o w ! an d gi ve hi m three thous and Rupees in addi ti on Bh av an i d as repli d
e : Very .
-

w ell
,
he al th 0 N an a,
k ! ”
Bh avani das gave him the three hundred an d tw en ty one Rupees
-
-

an d thre e thous and Rupees in addi t ion Nan ak took t h e b ags an d c ame home ; some o f th em .

h e to ok to h is shop but the most o f them he pla ced w ith his sister A fter w a rds Jai ram ca me .
,

very h appy Nansh i asked : “ H o w did th e a ccount turn out ? Jai ram said : O beloved of
.

Go d I am quite astonished
,
I w as thinking th at N an ak w as openly squandering the money
. ,

”
an d n o w th at the ac c oun t is being made comes out on t h e contrary a surplus for h
,
i m .
, _
.

N an ak i s a id : W ah t surplus
“
h as to d ay come out J a ir am replied :
“A - surp lus of three .

hundred an d t w enty one Rupees after e ating dr in ln n g an d giving away

'

« .
,

Mar r iage of N an ak, wh )

o: tur n s o ut unhapp y .

[I n the seventh o f the light h al f of ( the month of ) Hair the m arriage

S am v at 1 54 5, for ,

d ay w as w ri tten Nan aki m ade congr atul ations in the house an d by the h and o f the Brahm an
.

Ni d ha a letter w as sent sprin kled w ith s aff ron S w eetme ats an d C ard amom seeds an d five
, .

Rupees in cash w ere sent to T al v an di to the house o f K ala In t h e house of K al a the Vé di .

, ,

they commenced to rejoice an d t o m ake congratula tions K al a sent a m an to h i s father ih law s .

- -
’

fa mily in the Manj h a; there also con grat ul ations w ere m ade ; they began to divid e f ruits ( among
their iends )
fr K al a w n
e t to. Ra e Bular : 0 Ri ta be blessed ! ”
The Rae s aid : K ala what ,
“
,

( is the K a l a replied :
“
The day fixed for the m arriage of t h y slave N an ak h as ‘
h

come ( to us ) The Rae said : K ala don t c al l N an ak again our sl ave w e sh all be grieved
.
“
,
’
,

thereby K al a replied :
. W ell S ir politeness becomes us ” , .

W h o w ent to t h e w edding ? K ala L al a P ar asr am th e son o f Lal a N an dl al I n drasain , , , , , ,

P h i ran da Jagatr ae L o l c an d Jags1 tm al l Jadm al l ; al l t h e V edi s w ere re ady

, , , When the first day , .

o f ( the month of B h ada h ad risen seven days p assed then they st arted from T al v an di From , , .

t h e M anjh a c ame Ram a th e m atern al gr and father an d K isn a the m tern l uncle an d tw o
, ( a a ) , , ,

other comp anions w ith them W hen they h ad arrived at S ult anpur the begin ning w as m ade ih
.
,
,

t h e house o f P arm an and an d Jair am the P alt a When yet five d ays rem aine d for the appointed
, .

day o f the m arri a ge they st arted from S ultanpur , H aving come t o the t w enty second resting . -

3
pl ace they stopped an d alighted in a garden P arm an and t h e P alta the father o f Jair am sent
, .
, , ,

the Brahman N idh a ( s aying to hi m ) : Go an d inf orm Mul a ( th at) th e m arr iage comp any of
, ,

the V ed 1 s h as come let it be kno w n to you ” Nidh a w ent an d in formed M ala the C ana he
, .

, ,

ga ve h im a benediction an d s aid : “ 0 p atron be happy ! ” M ala s aid “ 0 P ahdit reverenc e , .

,

l T h e L ab m e edition h as s t ruck ut the rd 31m hich M S S h ave , substituted its

‘
o wo , w al l . a nd in
pla ce so n .

3
W e d r op h ere some other c om plimentary w ord s .
W Ta m . rest rest ing pl ace
,
- .
 JA NA M-S A K H I O F BA BA NANA K . B .
lxvii

(to s aid : “ O p atr on th e marriage company of the V adi s h as alighted in a

Nidh a ,

g a rden in order
, to in f orm you Bh a i P arm an a nd h as sent me ”
M ala replied : “ It is w el l ” .
.

Then M ala w ent an d assembled his o wn brothers an d rel atives ; he w ent to H i ta th e Radh av a , ,

an d s aid : 0 C audh an l the m arr iag? comp any o f the V é di s h as come

“
H it a th e Radh av a
, .
, ,

said : “ 0 son Aj ita go w ith M al a whatever M ala s ays give that supply ! Wh atever vessels
, , ,

clothes people he m ay desir e th at give an d rem ain thou thy sel f also w ith him ! My body
, , , , ,

0 M ala is ol d else I w ould be myself w ith thee ”

, , W el l C audh ar i w h at your order is th at .
“
, , ,

is yoursel f Mal a goo d people h ave come to thy house h ave an eye on ( th y ) honour an d
.
“
, , ,

restrai n thy tongue this is w hat I h ave to say I h ave he ard that K al a the P atv ari o f th e
, .
,

Bh atti s is f oul tongued an d thou also ha st a sh arp tongue But w ell among them P armanand
‘
-
, , .
,

an d Jair am are c alled good men th ere fore f rom thy o w n p art politeness must be show n ( to
M ala replied : Wel l C audh ari you are our ref uge an d asylu m an d the L ord also is , ,

ou r support
”
Well M l go m ind my order
a a .
-
” “
Then M al a h aving assembled the he ad men of
, , , .

the c aste sent excellent f ood ; Aj ita the Bandh av a w as w ith them much honour an d polite ness , , ,

w as sho w n ( to the m ) A t night the m ar riage comp any ( of the V é di s) rose an d entered ( th e
.

vi llage ) w ith fine music inside much honour w as sho wn ( to them ) Wh en o n e w atch an d a , .

qu arter of th e night h ad p assed the ( four ) circuits ( round t h e m arr i age fire ) took place “ This , .
,

w hi ch I a m telling 0 Guru I h ave seen w ith my o w n eyes I w as present an d spe ak as an

, , ,

”
eye w itness
-
Guru A ng a d having he ard some w ords bec ame h appy an d began to w eep in love
. .

“
When the time o f the circuits ( round the fire ) c ame Nanak said : ‘Bhai B al a rem ain thou , ,

W ith me O Guru w h atever w as N an ak s secret expense th at w as w ith me I s aid : W ell

.
’
,
’
, .
‘
,

S i r I w i ll rem ain w ith you

, O Guru it was a good enj oyment Three d ays the marriage
.
’
,
.

c o mp any re mai ned on the f ourth d ay it took le ave H aving taken th e D ali ( w ith the young
, .

W if e ) th ey c ame to S ult anpur K al a an d L al a s aid th at the l ad an d h i s w i fe should go to .

,

their o w n house an d Nan ak s aid : I w ill rem ain here Nan aki an d Jai r am s aid th ey should ‘

.
.
’
,

r em ain here for w h o w ould attend to the business o f th e commiss ari at ? The n K al a s aid : ‘ 0
,

d aughter Nan aki thy mother sits ( at home ) full o f expectation sh e also is longing for comfort
‘

, , .
’

This contention w as going on w hen M ala c ame When M ala he ard o f it he said th at the ,
.
, ,

l ad an d th e girl should rem ai n here they sho uld not be sent to T al v an di This strif e w as going , .

on for several d ays then P ar manand s id a :

‘
M al a this is n o w th e fi r st time th e moth er o f
, ,
’
,

th e l ad is also f ull o f expectation an d desire let th em go to th eir ow n house the n h av ing , ,

re turned they sh all rem ain here the business o f the commiss ariat is here ,
.
’

N an aki an d the moth er the 66m “ an d all the other m arri age comp any th at h ad come
“
, ,

f ro m T al v an di w ent w ith the D ali o f the mother the 6611 1 ; Nanak ( also ) w e nt to T al v an di
, ,

an d le f t the commiss a ri a t t o me .

Nan ak returned ag ain to S ultanpur an d took the moth er th e bani to her f ather M ala s
’
“
, ,

house then he w ent t o th e commissari at a n d sat do w n ther e an d commenced his w ork A s the
,
.

custo m o f Gur a N anak w as so it conti n ued to be H e sho w e d littl e affection to his w ife an d ,
. .

th e mother the bec ame ( in consequence thereof ) angry the conduct o f the Guru di d not
, ,

ple ase her the Guru did not apply h er to his mouth ( i a he did n ot kiss h er ) T wo months
,
. . .

p assed an d he did not enter th e hou se .

1
m , the head o ffi cer o f a villa g e .

2
In other MS S .he i s also c alled 355 Mal dan d, dan d being an e pith et frequently added to the name s
of K h at ri s .

3
311 3 1 mother t h e 669 i i e N k s w ife A s so o n as a girl is m arried her proper n ame
“
th e , , . . an a
’
.
,

is d ropped an d sh e is only ca lle d by t h e na m e o f her family N an ak s w ife wa s o f th e 66 11 5 f m ily an d sh e i s .

’
a

therefore onl y c alled by tha t n a me ; h er m aiden n ame was S ulakh anu q m afi ) see p lxviii l 5 .
, . .
 lxviii JA NA M- S A K H I O F BA BA NA NA K . B .

0 fa ther here h ast thou given ‘

W hen M al a c a me to see h i s d aughte r she s aid to him w
,
: ,

me aw ay ? This on e is feeding the people an d does n ot at al l c are for his ho use

.
M ala we nt .
’

to Jai r am m ade a gre at r ow an d s aid : ‘Having obt ained my d aughter thou h ast dro w ned her !
,
’

And to N a
a n k he s ai d :
‘
O thou w hence h ast thou been born ? But Nan ak did n o t speak
,
’

at all T h e n ame of the mother the S am was S ul akh a n i an d bec ause she c ame to the house
.
, , ,

o f the Guru she w as c alled the mother the 6am They m ade contin u ally alterc ations and months
, ,
.

on months p assed in squ abbles The n ame of the mother in l aw o f N an ak w as C an dar an i

.
- -
.

éan dé r an i c ame to her d aughter an d the d aughter bega n t o w eep be fore her mother C an dar ani
‘

became very angry an d w ent t o Bébé Namaki an d began to qu arrel w ith her S h e s aid : How .
‘

so ? You begin t o govern thus th at you r uin other people s d aughters ? You h ave n o fe ar of ,
’

G d
o thou dost not a dmonish thy brother tho u dost not consider thy sister i n —l aw as
one ( with ,
-

thee ) thou dost n o t look after thy sister i n l a w ! N either does thy husb and admonish his brother
,
. - -

i n l aw tell me w h at y o u h ave in your m ind ?

-
, ,
B ab a N a n ak i replied :
‘
H e ar O aunt h ow ’
, ,

sh all I admonish my brother ? My brother is n o thie f nor adulterer nor gambler he is not , , ,

committing an y w ickedness this is ( al l ) th at he is giving alms to the n aked an d hungr y ; with

, ,
‘

w h at one e arns onesel f one m ay do w h at one pl eases ,

Then you m ay repro ach hi m when .
,
l
your d aughter rem ai n s h ungry or n aked ( an dar an i rem ained silent she could not say .
’
,

anything S h e c ame b ack t

. o h er d aughter an d s id
a :
‘
0 d aughter thy sister —i n l aw h as put me ,
-

quite t o sh ame I could n o t give her an y ans w er ; 0 d aughter beh ave thou also a little humbly
, ,
.
’

S ul akh an i replied : ‘0 mother I am not hungry n o r n aked j e w els clothes f ood al l this I
, , , , ,

h ave .But daughter if thou h ast all this w h y ar t thou giving a bad n ame t o the son o f a
’ ‘
, ,

K h atri ? S h e s aid : 0 mother wh at sh all I do ? H e is not a pplying me to his m outh he

’ ‘
, ,

does n o t spe ak t o me face to face w h at shall I do t o w hom sh all I spe ak ? éan daran i went , ,
’

then ag ai n t o Bébé N anaki an d commenced t o say : 0 d aughter I h ave mu ch admonished thy ‘

,

sister i a l aw ; she admits th at sh e is not hungry nor n ake d b ut she s ays th at he do es not
- -
, ,

spe ak t o her fa ce t o f ace nor apply her to his m outh i w h at sh all I d o ? B ébé Nanaki repli ed
,
’

O aunt the m anner o f my sister i n l aw is rough

,
but she herself w ill become discreet
- -
, .
’

‘
W ell d aughter N an aki there is n o question o f an y w ant but consider t h ou thyself : w hat is
, , ,

the custom of the w omen th at also is desir ed B abe Nan aki replied : ‘ Thou ar t right the
, .
’
,

L ord w ill m ake it w ell ; comf ort her an d admonish her a lso th at she should w alk accor ding ,

to his w ord th at she should be gentle a n d give up roughness T h ou also kno w est O aunt
, .
, ,

th at I a m taking care o f my brother an d I d o n ot consider N an ak as my brother I consider ,

N an ak as the L ord ; put thou true faith in h i m ! W e are so afr aid o f Nan ak th at w e dare
,

n ot sa
y a w ord to him for Nan ak is a F aqi r ,éan dé rani w ent then .
’

N d n alo s tw o
’
son s ar e bor n . H e quits th e c ommi ssar ia t .

Gur a Nan ak
c ar r ied on the commiss ariat an d s atisfied everybo dy b e commenced al so to come ,

t o his o w n house When he h ad become thirty t wo ye ars o f age a son w as born in the house
. -
,

o f t h e Gur a the turning pin o f the w orld ; the n ame of S iri (l and w as given to him When
,
'

S iri C and w as f our ye ars o f age L akh mi d as the gentlem an w as in the w omb ,
-
, , .

The Gur a w as sittin g in the commissariat w hen one day a m an of the Gavin d people l ,

1 x n
T he fi l q 3112 1
'
ex
p r essno n ls: th e ver b re ferri n g t o it i s throughout kept i n t h e S i n g so th at it .
,

c ann o t be t r anslate d by : some p eopl e o f Gav in d fi t? Effi iz $53 s t and s there fore fo r fi fi ! iff é z 8 3 1 T I
‘
' ’
.
:

#3 being i n P a nj abi lso us ed in

a th e sens e o f man ( S ing ) The Gav i n d 16 k w ere a sect o f F a qi rs S ee : .

S i kh ad é ra
j di v i t h ia, p 268
. .
 JA NA M- S A K H I O F BABA NA NA K . B .
lxix

appear ed to h i m in
Turkish garb Guru Nanak said : “ S i r si t dow n ” Then th at Gavi n d
a .
, .

m an sat do wn an d s aid : “ O s ervan t of Go d w h at p ain h ast thou? ” Nan ak repl ied : S ir ,

“
,

I h ave no p ain wh atever ” The Gavi n d m an continued to say : “ Wh y h as thy colour become
.

yello w N a n k replied
a : “
S i r I am t h e son o f a K h atri w ithout b athing I do not eat
, Four , .

w atc hes p ass while I am si tti ng ( in th e commiss ar i at) ; w hen t w o Gb ari s ( = f orty ei ght minute s
) -

o f th e d a
y are as yet rem aining then h av i n g b ath ed I put a m or l e
,l into my m outh
,
”
The , .

Gavin d m an ans wered to Nan ak : “ O broth er al l is present w ith thee : rise thou e arly in the ,

morning dip i n th e c an al an d sit then in the commiss ariat after h aving put some Gh i mola sses
, ,

an d some r aw grains of corn into thy mouth then thy li ver will rem ain green it w ill not , ,

w ither aw ay
”
Nan ak took up this custom
.
When si x months h ad ( thus ) p assed Nan ak dived .
,

in the c an al an d w as lost A fter his servant h ad w aited (for some time ) he rose an d c ame
.

an d in f ormed the Nav ab The fish ermen began t o search for him but bec ame tired o f it ; they
.
,

th r e w in al so a l arge net but did not get him Then in the commi ss ariat an d i n the public
, .

o ffi ce th e nois e w as m ade th at Nan ak the Vadi h ad been lost S ome s aid this some th at
, , , .
,

S ome s aid : He h as squ andered th e money o f the Government for he w as f eeding the Fa qi rs
“
,
.

Thr ee d ays an d nights b e w as lost o u the thir d day Nanak c ame out of the canal W he n . .

h e h ad c om e out th e noise arose th at Nan ak is sitting among the F aqi rs

,
The people said .

“
A demon h as seiz ed Nan ak the ste ward D aul at K han Ladi sei z ed airam an d said : “ Nan ak
, . J ,

thy brother ih l aw w as my stew ard ans w er thou fo r my money ” Jai r am w ent to N anak an d
- -
, ,
.

”
s d:
a i “
N a n k D aul at K h n the Nav b dem an ds a ccount go
a a,
a an d give it ! N an ak rose an d ,

w ent w th h im an d g ave the a ccount 7 60 Rupees c ame out as s u r plus to N an ak D aul at K han
i

.
, _

w as in formed th at 7 60 Rupees c ame out as due to Nanak on the p art of the Government _
.

D aul at K h an s ai d again : Nan ak sit do w n in the commiss ari at wh at is thy o wn bil l , , ,

settle th at an d take it an d go on w ith the business of the commiss ari at ” Nan ak replied .

“
O Nav ab this money is of no use t o m e this money belongs to Go d f eed the F a qi rs w ith
‘

, , ,

thi s m oney ”
Nan ak got dischar ge d an d did n o t enter his h ouse he rem ained outside
. Mala , .
,

his father i n l aw burnt and bec am e hot like co als

- -
,
.

O n the third m onth ( after ) L akhm i d as w as born i n the house of Gu r u Nanak M al a the-
.
,

his fa ther in l aw w as a vot ary o f the Ban dit S am a; he w ent to h i m an d w ept : L ook
- -
,
“
,

S i r, N a n ak is neith er doing an y busine ss n or d o es he go any w he r e ; I a m very much a fll i c ted ”

.

M al d , hi s f ather -tn-law, N an ak
'

comp lain s agai nst a nd d ec lar es him mad . N an ak p r oves that

h e i s i n his senses . 1 7w p r ay er s i n the morgue .

Then M al a the 6511 5 w ent to the N av ab an d compl ained The Nav ab D aul at K h an s aid
. .

”
O Y ar K h an wh o is this m a
,
n of w hom does he compl in a ? Y ar K h an a sked M ala
,

Wh o ar t thou an d of w hom dost thou complain ? ”

M al a ans wered : “ S ir I am the f ather ,
”
n
in l a w of N a a
- k t he ste ward an d ,
I compl a in o f N an ak Y ar K h an told it to the N av ab
,
The -
. .

v b
Na a sa : id Brin g hi m here
“
!
”
Y ar K h a n brought M al a a n d the Nav ab asked him :
“
Wh y
ar t thou compl aining of N a n ak ? ”
M a l a s a id :
“
Nav ab he alth ! The 76 0 Rupees w hich c am e , ,

out as due to Nan ak should go to the w i fe o Nan ak f,

”
The Nav ab s aid : “ 0 Mal a Nan ak .
,

”
is s aying th at they should be given to the F q rs
,
a i M al a answ ered : “ Nav ab health ! Nan ak .
,

h as become m ad
”
The Nav ab s aid : .
These have a j ust claim Apply to Nan ak a Mul l a ! .

I f h e h as not become m ad then give t e money to h th e F q rs

a i
,
! ”
Then the Mull a commenced

1 In the sixteenth S akhi it is related that th e a d monitio ns o f the P un dit same m a de n o impressi on on N anak .
 l xx JA NA M-S AK H I or BE BE NAN A K . B .

to m ake inc antations to Nan ak but Nan ak rem ained absorbed ( i n tho ught ) ,
. When the s mell of

the bur n t roll of candle wick w e n t into the nose o f Nanak h e said ,

Whose field is w asted w hat need h ave they of a threshing ,

floor ?
-

O Nan ak w oe to their lif e wh o w rite an d sell the n am e !

, ,

The Mull a said f urther : Wh o art th ou ? tell me thy n ame ! “

Then Nan ak utte red a S abd in ”

the Rag Mara Mah al a I [there f oll o w four v er sesj ‘ The Mul la became comfort ed and began
, . .

to praise ( hi m ) H a ving come the M u

. ll a said to the N v ba a :
“
Na vab he alth ! Nanak is not ,

m ad w ith h i m so me saint h as met he is in

,
hi s senses ”
The Na v b s id hen
a a t ,
: C ll
a Jair am ! ”
.

Jair am w as a c ll ed The Na bv a s a
.id :
“
Jai ram w h at sh all be done ? W e c annot keep the money ,

of Nan ak an d N anak h as s aid th at it should be given

,
to the F aqi rs H is f ather in l aw com .
- - .

plains ag ainst him ( s ayi ng ) : ‘ We kno w th at Nan ak h as become m ad an d th e Mull a s ays that , ,
’

Nan ak is in his senses S pe ak thou ! w hat thou s ayest th at w e will

. Jairam was very ,

m uch af r ai d o f N an a k he rem a ined theref ore silent

,
The Nav ab s aid a g ai n :
“
Jair am wh y dost .
,

thou not give an ans w er ? ”

Jai ram rep li ed : Na vab heal th ! The N av ab underst ands every “
,

thing ( be tter th n ) ; w h at shall I ans w er ?

a I ”
The N a v b s id
a a :
“
Jai ram ( his ) w if e h as also ,

a right Jai r am replied : Nan ak is al so present he is not gone far o ff Then the Navab
" “ ”
. .
,

s aid : “ Call N an ak ! A m an w ent to c all N an ak but Nan ak did not co me

”
The man , .

returned an d s ai d to th e Nav ab : S ir he does not come The N avab D aul at K h an became

“
,
.

angry an d s aid : S ei z e an d bring him ! ” The m an w ent ag ai n an d s aid : O Nan ak the

“ “
,

Nav ab h as become very angry ”

Then Nan ak rose an d c ame an d stood be fore the N av ab he made
.
,

his s al am ( to him ) The Nav ab got angry an d s aid : Nanak wh y didst thou not co me ?”
.
“
,

Nan ak replied : H e ar O Navab ! when I w as thy serv ant I c ame to thee n o w I am not th
“
,
y , ,

servant n o w I h ve become the servant of Go

,
a d ”
The Nav ab s ai d then : If thou h ast become .
“

such a one then go w ith me an d say prayers ! i t is F riday to day ” Nanak s aid : “ Go S ir ! ”
,
- .
,

The Nav ab the K az i N anak an d m any innumerable people w ent togeth er an d stood in the great
, ,

mosque . As m any people as w ere in the m osque they all began to say in their place that , ,

Nan ak h as to day come over to this side an d a mong all the respectable Hindas i n S ul tanpur a
-
,

noise w as m ade Jai r am w as much grieved an d w en t home When Nan aki saw th at her lord
.
.

w as m uch grieved sh e rose an d s aid : “ Wh at is the m atter to da

y th at thou h ast come so
-
, ,
”
grieved ? J a ir a m replied :
“
He ar 0 servant of Go d w h at thy brother Nan ak h as done ! he is
, ,

gone wi th th e Navab to the gre at mos que to say prayers ! an d in t h e whole to w n among Hindas ,

an d Mu sal m an s a noise is m ade , that to day Nanak is coming over to th is side ; w h y sho uld I not
,
-

”
be grieved ? N an ah i i
s d
a :
“
Compose thy m i nd rise an d eat food ! do not h e in anxiety about ,

Nan ak ! N an ak my bro ther is under his ( i e God s ) str ong protection no one is able to look to wards
, , . .
’
,

Nan ak w ith a bad eye ; r ise thou an d eat w ith j oy ! ” Whilst they w ere tal king thus a noise
,
aro se Jair am h ad lef t Ni dh a the Br ahm an as a spy ; he c ame an d congra tula ted Jai r am saying :
( )
.
, ,
,

O p atron com fort an d j o y set in ! no apprehension is to be m ade !

, Jai r am an d Nanaka began
to ask Nidh a : Tell Nidh a h o w h as it h appened
“
Nidh a s aid : “ I w as not wi thi n the
, ,
(
m os que ) but I ha ve he ard it fr om the mouth o f th e Turks th at the Nav ab m ade his pr yer
, a and ,

that Nanak rem ained standing When th e Nav ab h ad finished his prayer h e began to say to .

N an ak : ‘0 Nan ak thou h adst come to make prayers w h

y di dst t h an not say them ? Nanak
,
’
,

repl ied : With w hom sh all I m ak e prayers ? The Nav ab s aid : ‘T h ou shouldst h ave m ade ’

’
w
them ith us N a
.
n k replied
a :
‘
Thou h adst gone to K and ah ar in order to buy horses with ,

I
S ee Rag Mar a, Ma h . I . S a bd 7 .
 JA NA M- S A K H I o r BA BA NA NAK . B .
lxxi

w hom sh all I pray ? D aul at K h an s aid : ‘0 N an ak thou ar t telling so m uch falseh ood I am
’
, ,

st nding here
a N an k replied : He ar 0 K h an thy body w as st anding here an d h e w h o
a .
’
‘
, , ,

W as s aying the pr ayers h ad gone to K and ah ar to buy horses Then the K az i s aid : Nav ab ’ ‘
.
,

he alth ! h ow much falsehood is the Hfi i d a telling ! The Nav ab replied : 0 K az i N anak is ’

,

truth ful A t the time o f bo w ing dow n m y spirit h ad gone to K and ah ar f or the s ake o f horses
. .
’

A gain the K az i m ade a c alumny ( s ayi ng ) : H e ar 0 K h an ! w e surely h ad not gone he should ‘

, ,

h ave s aid prayers w ith us ! Then t h e Nav ab s aid : N an ak thou shouldst have prayed w ith
’ ‘

the K az i ! Nan ak replied : ‘0 Nav ab the K az i h ad gone to his house to t ake c are of a colt
’
, ,
“
perh aps my colt m ay be falling into t h e pit ”
.

Then both believed l

S o 0 brother I h ave he ard ”
Nan aki s aid ag ain :
.
“
0 Misr w here
, , .
,

h ast thou le ft N an ak ? ” Nidh a replied : “ I h ave le ft him there ” Jai r am beg an t o qu arrel .

w ith Nidh a : I f thou h adst stood there for one hour Nan ak w ould h ave co m e out an d thou
“
,

w ouldst h ave met w ith h i m

”
Ni dh a replied : “ S ir he w as in the mos q ue an d all th e people
.
, ,

that w ere there returned to their houses but he did not come into my sight w h o kno w s w here
, , ,

h e is gone ? ” N an aka com f orted Jai r am : “ Be thou n o t anxious at all N an ak is coming n o w ” , .

In the me an while N an ak c ame to Jai r am s house The sl ave girl Tuls a cried f rom belo w ’
.
-

“
Mi stress your brother h as come !
,
”
Jair am became ver y h appy an d beg an to ask Nan ak
0 brother N an ak h o w di d the m entioned aff air h appen ? tell thy o w n stor y w h at is he ard f ro m
, ,

t h y o wn m outh th a t is genuine in form ation N an ak s aid : 0 brother i n l aw ! D aula t K h an

” - -
.
,

an d the K az i began to say their pr ayers w e rem ained standing by W hen he ( th e K h an ) h ad , .

finished his prayers he began to say : 0 N anak hast tho u come to say p ray er s or to stand here
, , ,

thou hast not s aid prayers W e repl ied : .

’

The f orehe ad he knocks on the ground the h ear t r ises to he aven , ,

D aul at K h an the P ath an buy ing horses in K and ah ar

, ,
.

The Nav ab s aid : I h ave not understood it w h at didst thou say ? I s aid again : Thou hadst
‘
,
’ ‘

gone to K andah ar to buy horses h ow s hould I h ave m ade pr ayers ? The K az I s aid then : ‘L ook ,
’
,

0 K h an h o w much falsehood the H ind a is telling !

,
The K han replied : 0 K az i th e Hin du ’ ‘
,

i s tr uthf ul A t t h e time w e w ere m aking t h e bo w s ( in prayers ) our he art h ad gone to K andah ar

.
, ,

f or the s ake o f horses Then the K az i s aid : ‘We indeed h ad not gone an y where h e should
.
’
, .

h ave s aid ( prayers ) w ith us I replied to t h e K az i :

‘
In ( thy ) courty ard a pit w as dug w hile
.
’
,

bow ing do w n on the ground ( thy ) spirit w as w ith ( thy ) colt T h e N av a b s aid :
‘
0 Nan ak .
’
,

w h y art thou s a ying this ? I replied :

‘
The m are o f the K az i h ad brought forth a colt an d
’
,

in his courtyard is a pit ; w hen the K az i m ade his bo w ings his spirit w as d w ell ing on th e colt , ,

“
perh aps the colt m ay fall into the pit an d This I s aid ; then D aulat K h an l aughed
No w K az i w h at does N an ak say ? spe ak the truth The beg n t s y 0 K h an
’
‘
, ,
! K az i a o a :
‘
,

the m atter is indeed so Then the N av b s id to the

a a .
’
K a z i : N a n k is per ect F q r Now
a a f a i 2 ‘
.

not a w ord c an be s aid ag ainst him The Nav ab s aid f urther : He ar N anak thy money I .
’ ‘
, ,

c an not keep an d thy father in l aw h as brought a compl aint ag ainst thee that it is the right o f
.
- -
,

thy
( ) w i f e an d thou h adst s aid
,
th at I should give it t o the F aqi rs say n o w
,
t o w hom sh all I , ,

give the m oney ? I replied to the Nav ab : ‘I h ave told thee kno w thou ( wh at is f urther to
’
, ,
.

be The Nav ab s aid : ‘H e ar Nanak ; the one h alf o f thy money w e w ill give to thy ,
.

w fi e an d the other h l
a f to the F a qi rs giv e thou it w ith thy o w n h ands ! I replied :
‘
We
,
’

kno w nothin g at al l know thou ! This w ord w e h ave spoken w hether it ple ase thee 0 brother
,
’
, ,

Here t h e L ahore edition a dds (ag ainst all th e other B oth fell at hi s fee t an d s aid S ir , thou
t h ysel f indeed Go d ”
ar t .

2
T h e L ahore edition h a s here ag ain : 3 175? 3 W H2 1 N anak indeed i s himsel f Go d .
 lxxii JAN AM- S A K HI 0 F BE BE NAN A K . B .

i n l aw ,
-
or disple ase thee ! ” Jairam s aid : Wh at is done by thee th at is done Th n Nanak
e
“
,
.

an d Jai r am took their f ood an d h av ing e aten they sat do w n,

A fter w ards Mfi l a an d C andé r an i .

c ame in Before Mfi l a an d S ame the P an dit h ad been qu arrelling Now C an darani the mother
.
“

, ,
.
,

in l aw c ame ; h aving seen Nan ak she pe aled like thu n der a d beg n to
-
,
n a say :
“
H e ar Nanak , ,

f or this purpose thou h ast m arried th a t h avin g incre ased the f amily thou l eav est it an d runnest
,

aw ay ?
”
S o she w ent on ch atting M al a did not ag ain g ive up his daughter L akh mi das
. . -

w as as yet on the h aunch ( i a a b aby ) an d S iri (l and w as f o ur ye ars an d three q u arters old
. . .
-
.

N d n ah leaves h is f amily , w hi c h i s br oken u

p .

[Nan ak then went away f rom S ultanpur an d rem ained outside

( o f it in the j ungle ) ; he did
not come ( an y longe r) to the house of his w ife C an dé ran i an d M al a did not give up their .

d aughte r ; prat ing on he ( i a M ala) m ade much alterc ation A t l ast the m atter w as settled thus
. . . .

B é bé N an aki said : “ Well aunt S i ri C and sh all rem ain w ith m e an d my siste r i n l aw and
, , ,
- -

L akh m i d as you take w ith y o u

-
If there shoul d be an y question about property an d if my
.

sister in l aw should become exci ted about anything w e w ill m ake a present of it to her ; we
- -
,

c nnot struggle with the L ord

a
”
Then éan dé r an i an d Mala took their d aughter an d grandson
.

w ith th em 1
]

N an a/o r eturns to Tal o u

niqi .

Then Gurfi Nan ak an d B al a c ame to T al v an di ; his uncle L al fi met w ith hi m an d s ai d : “ My

brother K al a is dep arted and m y l ady sister i n l a w is also dep arte d thou ar t my arm re main - -
, ,

n o w with me ! w h at thou s ayst th at I w ill d o ! ” Gura Nan ak replied : “ O un cl e Lala we al so

, ,

m ust go w e c annot rem ain ”

, Then uncle L al fi s aid ag ain : “ Well S ir w h at thou w ilt say
.
, , ,

th at w e must mind ” Gurfi N an ak rem ained there fifteen d ays

. .

N an ak j oin s his w if e at P alcho .

Questi on s a bo ut the successi on i n t he Guruship .

Then Gur fi Nanak an d Bal a came t ( th e vil lage ) of th e Radh av a an d began to

o ,

remain th ere ” One day the mother the 0 6 m said : Bhai B ala let n o w the ascetic stop her e “
( )
.
, , , ,

he h as w a ndered enough bouta

”
B al a replied : W ell m ad am ! ” Bh ai B al a said then to Gura
.
“
,

N anak : S ir ! gi ve me n ow le ave ! ”
“
Gur a Nan ak replied : “ Bh ai B al a where we rem ai n
, ,
”
a h
there r em in t ou so ! al B ala s aid : S i r going an d rem aining depends on the Lord but S ir “
,
, , ,
w h o w ill be af ter th ee ( th y Gur fi Nan ak replied : Bhai B al a af terw ards Lahana “
, ,

the K h atri the son of P h é rfi the Tib an K h atri w il l meet w ith us he w ill rem ai n after me
, , , ,

( as B al a asked again : 0 Gur fi w ill he also be a good m an ?” Gura Nanak replied

“
,
“ ”
Bh B l he ill be like me
a i a a w , B al a asked again : S i r w h at about h is honour S ir i band ? ”
.
“
,

Th e Gur u replied : “
Bh ai B al a he w il l not be in w ant of bre ad and clothes they w ill f ollow
,
,
him but that th ing ( i e th e Guruship ) belongs to L ahan a ” Then B515 took le ave an d went
, . .
.

to Tal v an di .

We bre ak off
here an d give t h e conclusio n o f t h e life o f N an ak The intermediate wa nderin gs of .

N an ak a s rel ate d h ere h ave very li ttle i n common w i t h th e origina l

, ,
compilation an d are full o f w ond erful stories ,
w h i c h b ear t h e s tam p o f inventi on o n t heir front ‘ V e p a ss them over a s irrelevan t to our object i n view
.
.

2
The home of Nanak s wife where sh e h a d been staying i n t h e ho use of her p arents since her sep aration
’
,

f rom h e r h usban d .
l xxi v JANAM- S A K HI O F BA BA NA NAK . B .

removed to some distance ! But S iri Oan d ans w er ed : I h ave seen m any such conj urers wh o
’
,
”
putti ng do w n a w ing let fly off a pigeon an d w h o fi o m skins m ake c s a t U pon this Guru ,
.

N an ak rem ained silent When an hour h ad p assed I c ame Then Guru .

N a n k s id
a a :
‘
0 child ,
.

A ng ad a de a d mouse is ly i ng here touch it w ith the t o e of thy f oot an d thro w it to so me

, ,

dis tance .
I touched it w ith th e t oe of my f oot an d it f ell do w n in some direction Then
’ .

N an ak s aid : 0 d aughter o f M al a ! this i s t h e son of a stran ger an d t h i s one is m y ow n son

‘
,

w h at sh al l I do ? To w hom the cre ator gives it he t akes it ( i s the Guruship ) Then Bhai
’
.
,
. .
,

B al a my n ame bec ame A ng ad ”

,
.

B al a said : “ S ir another doubt h as come to me : is there in me some great vice that you
,

ar e putting a screen before m e ever y t w enty f our m inutes ? ”

Guru A ng d ns e ed
a a w r :
“
He ar -
,

Bh ai B al a ! O n e day I an d Bh ai B ara w ere wi th N an ak it w as midn ight

2 Gur u Nanak ,
.

said : Bh ai B fi r a w h a t time o f the n i ght is i t ? B r looked c me

‘
,
h a a an d s id
a :
‘
S ir i t is ’
, ,

midnight Guru Nan ak said : ‘Bh ai B ara I know it is not midnight it is a w atch of the
.
’
, ,

night ”
. Bfi r a w ent aga in out an d looked ; it w as m idnigh t a a f
B ar s id ( there o e ) gain : S ir
r a
‘
.
,

it is midnight Guru N an ak s aid t h e thir d tim e : ‘Bfi ra it i s not mi dnight it is a w atch of

.
’
, ,

the night B ara s aid t h e third time : ‘S ir it is midnight it is n o t a w atc h of the night
.
’
, ,
.
’

G uru N a n a k then s aid :

‘
Bh ai B ar a rem ain se a ted ! Then G uru N a n ak s a id a g ain :
‘
S on ,
’

A ng ad see thou h o w much of the night it i s ?

, ,
I w ent o ut to see ; it w as midni ght Having ’
.

come in I s aid : S ir it is midnight Guru N anak s aid g in : S on A ngad it is a watch of

‘
a a
,
‘
.
’
,

the night go a n d see ! , Then I un derstood in my min d th at it w as ( in deed ) mi dni ght, but
’
,

that the Gur u s vie w w as di ff erent I came an d s aid :

’
O Guru a w atch o f the night is .
'
‘
,

rem ainin g but there w as a defect in my eyes

, Then Guru Nan ak bec ame much ple ased and .
’

said : ‘S on A ngad bo w thy he ad before the cre ator ! , I bo w ed my he ad but Bh ra became ’

,

d isple ased in h is mind Then Gur u N anak s aid : ‘Bh ai B ara bow t h y he ad be fore Angad ! ’
.
,

But Bfi ra bec ame much disple ased Then Guru Nan ak s aid : B ara don t be di spleased ! this .
‘
,
’

is the order of th e cre ator Thus Bhai B al a it h appened w ith us .

’
,
.

, .
”

U pon t h i s B al a s aid : Wh y are y ou continu ally keeping th e secret fr om me ? ” Guru“

A ng ad ans w ered : Bhai B ala t h e mouth i s middling an d the gre atness unfathom able it cannot
“
, ,

be told it must be kept in the he art But as thou dost not leave off it must be told ” B ala
, .
, .

”
s id
a :
“
S ir let it be told ! , Then Guru A n gad s ai d : The discipleship is di ffic ul t an d all is
’
the cre ator s but thi s is th e conduct of t h e w orld But Bh ai Bal a this story h as n o t been w rit ten ‘ .
, , .

“
O n e day m y d aughter w as going about an d fell int o t h e si ght o f Guru N an ak He s aid .

‘
S on A ng ad h aving dressed th y daughter br i n g h er to me
, I dressed an d brought h er to hi m .
’
.

Guru Nan ak s ai d : ‘S o n go th en sit outside ! I went an d sat dow n o n the threshold Guru
, ,
’
.

N an ak an d my d aughter sat do w n on th e bedste ad then the rai l of t h e bedste a d broke Guru , .

N an ak w as sitti n g in his composure o f mind I s aid then ( to myself ) : In the Guru s com .
5 ‘ ’

p o sur e o f mind di scomposure must take pl ace I sei z ed then th at rail an d sat do w n Th us ’
.
.
,

Bh ai B al a it h appen ed wi th us if you w ill accept it or n o t ” B al a s aid : “ O Gu r u ! true true

, , .
, »
”
true ! Then Gur u A ngad s aid : Bh ai B al a this story th at h as been he ard m ust be taken as “
, , ,

such jugglers
1
T h e M a d ari s ( foll o w e rs Musalm an P i r Mad ar)
of the ar e . T h ey put do wn a Wing of 3

pig eo n re a d a m ant ra over it an d a p igeo n flies

, e tc .

2
T h is s t ory i s le ft out in th e L ah o re litho gr aphed e dit ion .

Tha t i s i t i s t h e l ast w atch o f th e night .

T h i s s t o ry w hich thro w s a good d e al of light o n th e rea son o f the inti m a cy f

,
o Nanak a n d A ng ad i s ,

n a turally le ft o ut in t h e L a h o re lithogra phed copy b eing to o discreditable t o the ch arac ter o f N anak , .

£5 rea ds here : 313 m m ug fun-[TE faf g m

5
h e MS
: Gur fi Nanak w a s in h is o wn
.

t h oug t .
 JAN AM-S AK HI O F BAB A NANAK . B .
lxxv

true , nd, Bh ai Bal a, thou must consider Guru Nan ak

'

a true An d if one w il l con sider h i m as tr ue as .

,

his vices an d sins as m any as th ey m ay be w ill by t aking h is w ords as true be w ashed away
, , , , .

A n d if one w ill do th e w ords of Guru Nan ak he w ill arrive there w here Guru Nan ak is 1
, ,
“
One time there was i n a c ert ain ‘o w n a pool f ull o f bl ack mud Wh en r ain was fall ing .
,

al l the filth of the to w n w as collected there The Guru h aving gone ne ar it thre w a cup into .

it. A t th at time both sons of th e Guru w ere w ith him an d I ( i a A ngad ) also w as w ith him . . .

The Guru looked first to w ard s S iri band an d said : S on tak e th e cup out from the pool " S iri ‘
,

C and ans wered : Wh ere one must go th er e one m ay go some others w il l take it out w ith , ,

ple asur e an d not give it up Then th e Guru looked to w ar ds Lakhma das an d said : ‘S on take
.
’
-
,

out t h e cup f rom the pool ! He answ ered in th e s ame m anner as S ir i (l and h ad done The n
’
.

th e Guru looked to w ards me I did not l et the Gu r u spe ak but j umped w ith my cloth es into
.
,

th e pool an d brought th e cup out Though my clothes w ere full of mud I felt very h appy
.
,
.

Death f
o N an ak .

As it Was th e B ab a Gu ru s h abit t o remain i n K ar tarpur ( to wards his end ) so he rem ained

’
, .

A t th e time o f prais ing ( th e Lord) pra ise w as m a de to w ards the end of the night ablution w as ,

m ade an d recit at ion an d austerity pr acti se d the L ord w a s m agnified ; th en crow ds ( of disciples )
~

come an d cooki ng goes on In th e mind of Guru B aba Nan ak dw elled th is thought : “ When w ill
.

th at time come in w hich I sh all see th e Lotus f oot of the Lord ?” When some days h ad passed
.

-
, ,

the month of A sa c ame Then Guru Nan ak bec ame very j oy ful an d h appy O n th e seventh
. .

of A sa it h appened th a t songs of j oy w ere sung an d the praise of the L ord w as m ade B ab a

,
.

Nan ak f ell into deep reflection

’
A fter th at he s aid to his attendants :
. I th ink th at to day “
,
-

my absorption wi ll t ake pl ace ; sme ar a pl ace w ith c o w dung thro w K us a grass upon it an d -
,
-

m ake things re a dy
”
His attendants beg an to w eep ; Guru Nan ak comf orted them
. Then h i s .

a ttend ants be ga n to collect the ( necess ary ) things an d a m an w ent to c al l L ak h mi das an d -

S iri ( an d ( saying ) :
l
, Y ou are c alled f or
”
L a khma d as an d S iri Oan d did n o t come they beg an
.
-
,

to say : Wh y shoul d w e go as he is in good he lth ? The moth er th e (Jam w ent by h er

a
”
, , ,

o w n disposit i on to the Guru When Guru N anak saw th at h er h ands w ere sull i ed wi th Dal
. ,

he said : H o w 0 ban i ? If t hou h ast anything to say , say it ! An d wh y ar e thy h ands

“
,

sul lied ? ” Wh en t h e moth er saw th at th e Guru w as in th e state of absorption sh e said ,

“ To mor o
- r w is a S r ad h , it is th e date o f thy f ather ; if it ple ase thee we w i ll go an d m ake ,

the S radh The mother the 66133 h aving become very humble , begged o f him
, ,
Then Guru .

Nan ak s aid : “ Well be it so 0 dam! m ake th e S r adh ! Rem aining ( as yet) the eighth an d
, ,

n inth w e sh all be a bsorbed on the te n th H aving seen th e submissiveness of the mother the
”
.
,
,

(idai the Guru bec ame merci ful an d s aid : P rep re the t ings
”
,
“
a h f or the S r adh ! Then the mother “

in token of s acrifice clung to th e f eet o f the B a a T Guru B b t en g ve

h h e a a h a t h e order :
“
Give .

up t o d ay p reparin g the things for ( my) absorp tion ! ”

This w ord w as noised about among th e
'

eople h t the uru B i l be absorbed o n the tenth On the eighth t h e S radh of h i s

p , t a G aba w l .

father w as pe rf ormed on the nin t h the whole fam ily of the Guru B ab a a ssembled Then L akhma 2
.
,

Here
both th e Ma nus c r ipts which we h ave hitherto follo wed b re ak o fl after som e convers ation between
’

, , ,

A ng a d an d B h ai B al a o n the f ormer Bh agat s a n d wh y K a bi r alone reached the presence o f t h e S upreme

L ord .
The d e ath of N an ak is not mentioned by them a n d we are there fore restricted t o t h e L ahore litho
g
r aphe d c op y alone w hich rel a tes some more stories o f A n ga d s bli n d obedience t o t h e comm a n d s o f Gu ru
,
’

N an ak an d o f the disob edience of h i s s o ns .

3
We l e ave out t h e sto ry th at al l P roph ets P i r s S ai n ts etc c a me to t ake le a ve o f N anak a s it i s not
, , , , .
, ,

w orth ment io n ing .

lxx v i JA N AH - S A K H I O F BAB A NAN A K . B .

d as an d S i ir Ga nd beso ught hi m much s ay ing :

“
S i r the Guruship you h a ve given to L ah ana
, , ,

w h at is o ur support ? The Gu r u answ ered : Children y o u w il l ha ve plenty of f ood and

” “
,

clothes ” T h en L akh m 1 d as an d S iri C and s aid : F ood an d clothes w e sh all h ave but nobody
.
“
,

w ill mi nd us
” The Gur u answ ered : Chil dren don t be anxious ! The dogs o f Gurus and
.
“
,
’

F i r e ar e minded you also w ill be minded But the gre tness

a o f the n a m e is w A
ith ng d a
”
. .

, v

When they h ad he ard thi s order o f the Guru B ab a L akh m i das an d S iri C and an d all the ,
-

famil y an d the disciples fell do w n at his feet .

When t w o w atches an d a h alf o f the n ight w ere rem aining the Guru B aba f ell into deep ,

me dita tion All the things (f or crem ation ) w ere prepared Then the L ord appe ared to him an d
.
.

in the true region a cr y o f victory arose W hen the B ab a h ad gi ven up his m editation he .
,

began to say : I am a s a crifice h ave mercy on me the lo est s nner Blessed be

“ w i ! ,
th e L ord ! ”

Then the L ord h av ing become merciful said : I h a v e p ar doned thy w ay ( i a thy religions
, ,
“
. .

sy stem an d the f o llo w ers o f it ) be fore a n d a fter w hoever w ill take thy n ame he shal l become
, , ,

em ancip ated Then w ith the order o f the L ord the Guru B ab a w as absorbed in S amvat 1 596
.
”
,

on the te nth day of the d ark h al f of the mo n th o f A sa The Mab aj an s ( i a K h at ri s) an d the .

. .

people of G6 vi n d ‘ began t o per form the duties of t h e w orld ( i a to prep are f or cremation ) an d . .

put Guru N an ak on the funer al pile T h ere w ere al so P a th ans w h o w ere di sciples o f the Guru . .

They s aid : \V e also w ill ha ve a sight of him

“
The Mah aJan s s aid : K h ans n ow it is n ot .
” “
,

your time They ans w ered : B ab a Nan ak is our P i r w e w il l h ave his sight
.
”
.
“
The M ah aj ana ,
.
” '

s aid : To d ay is not the time t o see him go aw ay !

“ - The P athans came on w ith might an d ,
”

began t o say : B ab a N an ak is o ur P i r w e w ill do w ith him as it is cus t om ar y to P i rs w e wi ll

“
, ,

bring h i m to the grave yard ”

The Mah aj an s h a d o n a ccount o f the Turks dr a w n sheets round
- .
, ,

a bout
( th e corpse ) Then one disciple s aid : Ye brethren Hind as an d Mus ulm ans w h at for are
“
.
, ,

you qu arrell ing ? The Guru B aba is not here indeed he h as dep arted t o the true r egion ” Wh e n , .

he w ent an d looked there w as nothing on the f uneral p ile ; the qu ar rel o f both p arties ceased
, .

I mp r ession m a de by the dea th o f N an ak .

All the attendants th e Mah aj an s an d the people of Gar ind beg an to say
the ret inne , ,
'

'‘
l h ey praise d Guru N an ak ( s aying ) : V ah v ah ! Guru N an ak h as been the
”
Ram ! Ram ! ,
“
,

visi ble S upreme L ord ! but by our o w n lot w e h a ve not been able t o w orship h i m in an y w ay ” .

T h ey began to repent an d h a ving seen the sport o f the Guru B ab a they w ere confused with
f e ar
. The Musal man s began to take the n ame o f Go d ( s ay ing ) : V ah v ah Go d ! Guru B aba ,
“
,

an ak h as been a gre at m an o f a gre at spirit he w as the im age of Go d himself ” They set

T
, , .

to praise Go d H ind as an d Musal m an s h aving seen this w ere as to nished Th e family an d

.
, , .

a tte nd a nts o f Gur u B ab a N an ak set fire t o the f uneral pile an d perf ormed the f u eral ceremonies
n ,

( s ayi n g ) : The“
G u r u B ab a N an a k is bodily gone to P a r adise ! ”

S ic k .

H o w sh all I the sinf ul w orm utter thy praises ?

, ,

The spe aker art thou t hyself thou thyself si n gest thy praises , .

W h o sings re ads be ars an d w ri tes ( them ) w ith an a tten t ive m ind

, ,

Hi m surely H ari unite s ( wi th himself ) .

I am a musician begging at ( thy ) door : m ay by thy favour the n ame be given to me !

,

Give ( me ) the n ame ( the besto w ing of gifts an d ablution th at I m a beco me f ully s a iated !
) ,
y t ,

The musician h as by sil ent repetitio n ( o f th e n ame ) obtained comf or t meditatin g on the lo t us foot ,
- .

O N anak it is the pr ayer of ( thy sla ve : keep me in thy a sylum !

)
,

1
S ee a bout th e a igz $3 p lx vi ii note n
-
, .
, 1 .
 C
S K E T H O F T HE L IF E O F T H E O T HE R S IK H GU RU S . A NGA D .
lx xvii

S K E TC H OF T HE L IF E OF TH E OTHE R S IK H G U RU S .

2 .
— GU RU A NGA D (A D . . 1 53 8

T HE disciples ( S ikhs M ) o f Nanak w ould n o doubt h ave soon disperse d an d gradually dis
, ,

appe ared as w ell as the disciples of

,
m any other Gurus before Nanak if he h ad not taken c are ,

to appoint a successor be fore his de ath The disciple on w hom his choice f ell w as L ahan d ‘ w h o .
, , ,

h ad j oined Nan ak not long be fore his de ath N one o f his e arly disciples seems to h ave rem ained .

w ith N anak an d w e m ay f airly conclude th at t here w as not on e amongst them w h o h ad a ttained

,

to an y degr ee of le ar n ing The w ay in w hich N anak used the disciples w h o attached themselves
.
,

to hi s perso n w as n o t very conducive to imp art to them an y considerable k n o w ledge ; they w ere
,

in fact li ttle more th an his menial servants ( see p xliii l 1 8 N o Brahm an o f an y note or .
,
.

le arning h ad as it appe ars j oined h im an d th e m ass of the disciples w ere ignorant Jats w h o
, , , , ,

on an average could neither re ad n or w ri te,

.

What N an ak looked chiefly for in h is successor w ere not scientific a ccomplishments or a , ,

c ultivated mind but bl i n d o bedien ce to the c omma n ds of the Gur u The storie s w hich ar e told in
,
.
‘
,

the Jan am sak h i s of the total sacr gfic ium z n tell ec ta s of L ah an a ar e there fore very signi fic ant
” ' '

-
“
, ,

( of ! p xliv l 1 sqq ; p l x ixiv l 9

.
,
. . .
,
.

L ah an a bec ame first a cqu ainted w ith N an ak at K ang ra w hither he h ad gone to w orshi p the
"

,
.

D av i H e he ard there th at N anak a gre at F aqi r w as st aying there an d af ter the first intervie w
.
, , , ,

he att ached himsel f firmly to h i m an d no more le ft hi m This i s the rel ation of the l ater Jan am .

sakh i s w here as the old Jamam s akhi states that An g ad became a cqu ainted w ith Nan ak by t h e
,
-

medium of another disciple of the vil lage o f K h adar ( see p xliii l 3 w hich seems far more .
,
.

probable .

T h e l at er S ik h tradition states th at Nan ak ch an ged th e n ame o f L ah an a into th at of A nga d

‘

w hen conferring on him the Guruship as being a p ar t of hi mself but the old tradition know s
, ,
2

nothing of this neither does the p anegyric o f A ngad in the Gran th allude to an y such ch ange of
n ame w hich if it h ad been kno w n at those times w ould certainly n ot h ave been p assed over in
, , ,

silence The Bh att K i ratu ( Tr ansl p 7 0 3 V

.
on the con trary gives h i m both n ames
. .
,
.
,

(
“ T h en A ng a d L ah ana becoming m ani fest
”
f ro m w hich it w ould appe ar th at he bore both , ,

n ames at the s ame time I need h ardly :rem ark th at the e xplan ation w hich the Si khs give o f
.
, ,

the si gnific ation o f t h e n ame of A ng ad is altogether fan ciful fo r WE ? is an old H indu proper , ,

n ame an d signifies literally givi ng ( one s ) l i mbs or body .

’
.

ng d settled do n the v ll ge f K h r on the b nks o f th e Bi as a w hich w as ver y

A a w t i ada a
'
a a o , ,

probably his n atl v e place He gained his subsistence by his o w n h andi w ork ( see p xl v ii 1 4 )
.
.
,
.

the li e H l together unlettered an d could himsel f neither re a d nor

an d l e d f o f a i ec l use e w as ‘‘
a .

rit be rly concluded f rom p xlviii l 4 from belo w The l ater tr adi t ion w hich
w e as m ay
,
f ai .
,
. .
,

m akes h im the inventor o f the Gurmukh 1 letters ( see S ikh a d e r aj d1 v i thi a p 20 s

qq is ,
.
,
.

th ere fore w ithout an y foundation .

1
A lso w ri tte n : L ah ina) , Tihun ( = T r i h un T ah un) K h a tr i (p xl v 1 1, l l )
2
S ee p xl v u note 1 .

(
.
,
a . . .
,
lxxviii S K E TC H or THE i rr E or T HE O T HE R S IK H GU RUS . A MAR-DA S .

The few verses of A ngad w hi ch are contained in th e Granth ( m arked Mah all a
,
ar e but

a poor repetitio n of the w ords of Nan ak an d sh all o w in the extreme Being f ully aware of the .

importance of the succeseio ep zseop or um t o the S ikh community he nomin ated be fore his de ath
“ ” ’

h M rch his devoted serv nt A d g hi s successor dee m ing li ke B ab a Nanak neither

( 4 t a 1 55 2 )
,
a m ar a -
, , ,

o f h i s sons w or thy of the Gu ruship .

3 .
— GU RU A MA R DA S -
(a n . 1 552

Guru A m ar di -
s w as clan born in t h e vill age v asarki (W
a K h atri of th e Bh all
) a 2
,

the district of Am ri ts ar The story goes th at he w ent in his youth on a pilgrim age to B ard uar
.
, .

There a th irsty P an dit drank w ater f ro m his h ands ; after he h ad quenched his thirst h e ,

a sked A mar di s -
w h o he w as and w hence he h ad come ? A mar d as ans wered tha t he w as a
,
-
,

Bh all a K h atri from th e P anj ab from a village call ed v asar ki ,

The P an dit asked him furth er .

w h o his Guru w as ? Wh en A m ar dag answ ered th at he h ad n o t t aken an y Guru the P an di t

-
,
.

f elt vexed an d said : A las ! I h ave committed a great sin th at I h ave drunk w ater fr om this ,

m an w h o h as got no Guru ! I am a gre at transgressor th at at the ti me o f being thir sty I did ,

”
n ot
( first ) reflec l
t ! h o w wi l my transgression n o w be done a w ay ? On he aring this A mar di s -

f elt much ash am ed in his mind ; he f ell do w n at the f eet of the P an dit an d s aid : “ M ah araj ,
”
pardon n ow my faul t as soon as I sh all come home I sh
,
all t ke a Guru
a
'

,
.

Wh en he h ad come home h e began to look o ut for a Guru One day he he ard th at in the
,
.
,

vicinity in th e vill age of K hadar there w as a perfect Gur u Bab a A ngad an d th at he wh o would
, , , , ,

t ake hi s ins tr uction w oul d cross over ( the w orld o f existence ) , an d th at in him al l qu alit ies
, ,

th at ar e requi red in a Guru as steadiness content ment f orbe ar ance , mercy devotion etc are
, , , , , .
,

t o be f ound . .

Thereupon A m ar das w en t t o K h adar seiz ed the feet of Guru A ng ad an d s aid : O L ord

-
,
“
,

h av ing he ard your n ame I h ave come to y o u fo r t h e s ake o f m y o wn s al vati on ; giv e me merciful ly
t h e n ame o f the Guru ! ” Guru A nga d received hi m k i ndly and he rem ained w ith hi m serving ,

hi m w ith he art an d body .

It is rel ated that A mar dais w as so conscient ious in the servi ce of the Guru th at he did n ot
-
,

e at an
y bre ad f rom the store r oom o f the Guru but got h is subsistence by c arrying round on his
-
,

back a bundle of sal t an d oil an d sell i n g it t o the people .

H e w as perfor mi ng t o An gad all sort s o f menial services as A ngad h ad done to Nanak Thus , .

he used to bring daily for th e s ake of the abluti ons of the Guru a lar ge m etalli c j ar of water from
the r iver of Gav i ndv al w hich was about t w o K é s distant ; out of reverence fo r his Guru he is
,

said to have m ade t h e w ay fr o m K h adfi r to Gav i n d v al in w alking back wards lest he should tur n ,

h is b a ck o n h i s Guru O n e n ight w hen he w as c ar r ying w ater f rom the ri ver he is said to

.
,
,

h ave sli pped an d to h ave fall en into a w e aver s hole When the w e aver asked his wife wh o it ’
.

I
Al l t h e S ik h Gurusc al l the m sel ves N an ak i n or der t o d esign ate thems elves as th e l egitimate
“ ”

s uc c ess o rs o f N anak F or th e s ak e o f d is tin c t io n b et w een them W E T m

.

( m ah alla p ahila f ir st c our t) , ,

m m (mahalla dfiJa sec o n d c ourt ) e t c is add ed t o t heir res pective compositions i n th e Granth
, , .

( see p l xxxi ) o t herwi se they ar e also m en tio n ed by t h e n a m e o f u

.
fm W fi r st r eig n e tc as , , .
,

t h e S ikhs soo n comme n ce d to look o n th eir Guru s a s t h eir sover eigns t h nce r ss
( e t h e a dd e : I f? t ra m .

0 t r u e k ing D I n lat er t imes w h en N an ak w as g r a d ually look ed upon a s an A va t ar eve ry su c eed in g Guru

.
, c ,

w as consi dered as a n inc arn ation o f B ab a N an a k I n t h e Gr an t h its el f n o al l usion of this k in d i s found o nly
.
,

t h e B h a tts w h o se p an eg ri cs a r e a d ded a t t h e e n d o f t h e G r an th
y a n d w h o k no w n o boun d s i n t h ei r flat ter y
‘

,
.

commen ce praising Nanak a s A vatar .

2
I n t h e Granth w ritten 3 661 bhala as n o letter i s doubled i n th e w rit in , o f t h e Gr anth g .
 C
S K E T H O F T HE L I F E O F T HE O TH E R S I K H GU RU S . RA M-DA B .
lxxix

w as, she n er d a sw Wh o wi ll fal l at th is time ? it must be that un fortunate homeless A m ara

e :
“
, .

Am ar d as rose an d returned to the river an d h avin g fil led his ar h e brought it to the Guru
j
-
.

A ngad he ard f rom somebody th at the people w ere calli ng Am ar d as the homeless one
(m i) -
, .

Bei ng f ull y s atisfied o f his sincerity an d devotion he took him to his neck an d said : “ A mara ,

is n o t homeless but f rom thi s day the Lord h as m ade hi m the home of the h omeless an d the
,

asylum o f those wh o h ave no asylum ; w h o w il l f oll o w him w ill obtai n gre at h appiness ”
, On , .

that very day A ngad put five P aisas an d a cocoa nut be fore h im bo wed his he ad before him an d -
,

s aid t o all the societies ( of the s aints ) : No w I am entrustin g the throne of the Gur uship t o “

A m ar d as b ow ye al l your he ads bef ore him ! he is a perfect Guru the Lord h as received him
-
, ,

to day ; wh o w ill be on his side he w ill also be ple asin g to the Lord ”
-
, .

A f ter t h e de ath o f Guru A ngad A m ar das took up his re sidence at Gav in d v al

'

H e w as a ,
-
.

humble p atient an d pious m an round w hom m any disciples assembled Though unlettered like
, , .
,

hi s m aster w h o could te ach him only the f ew simple tenets he h ad he ard himsel f from N an ak
, ,

he comp osed m any verses whi ch w ere incorp orated in the Granth ( Mahalla II L ) an d w hi ch a re
, ,

conspicuous f or simplicity an d cle arness .

T h e off erings o f h i s numerous disciples en abled him t o buil d a gre at w alled w ell (W )
at Gav i n dv a l in w hich eigh ty f our steps led dow n to th e w a ter The S ikhs believe th at w hoever
,
- .
,

sits dow n on those eighty f our st eps one by one an d m akes ablut ion an d reads the Japj i to the
-

end gets free from the eigh ty f our L akhs o f f orms o f existence an d enters paradi se A grea t
,
- .

Mela is s til l held every ye ar round th at w ell .

Guru A m ar das died the 1 4 th of May in th e ye ar 1 574 h aving appoin ted in the usu al w ay
-
,

Ram d a i s as his successor in the Guruship

- .

4 — GU RU
,
RA M-DA B (A D
. . 1 574

Ram d as w as -
the d h i cl an ( fig?) an d a n ative of the village Gurfi éakk
a K h atri of
-

H e h ad come i n e arly youth to the house of h i s grand p aren ts at Gav i n dv al an d rem aine d there -
.

H i s grand p ar ents w ere very poor an d he sustained the m an d himsel f by selling boiled grain
- -

Itis sai d that one day h e sat n e ar th e door of B aba A m ar das selling boiled gra in wh en
,
-
,

A m a r di s by ch ance called his f amily priest an d said to hi m :

- Misr o ur lit tl e daughter h as n o w
-
,

become o f ripe age go and look out in some good house ( for a suitable p art ner) that w e m ay
, ,

betroth her W hen the.fa mily

’
p r iest h ad gone the w i fe o f the Guru s ai
- d :
“
For my daughter ,

a l ad must be sought of the s ame age as the l ad there is wh o is sel l ing boiled grain the , , ,

gi rl bein g of about the s ame age ”

A t the s ame time Guru A m ar das s aid i n his o w n mind
.
-

Our girl is n o w this l ad s for it is the religi ous obs erv ance of the K h atr i a th at the thought
’
, , ,

w hich first comes into the mi n d must be per ormed f ”

Having considered this he c alled th at l ad
,
.

Whe n
‘
”
an d a sked :
“
My de a r boy w h o ar t thou ? H e ans w ered
,
: I am a S é db i K h a tri
” “
.

m r
A a das h ad
- he ard this he th anked G o d an d s a id : -“
Blessed be thou L ord th at thou h ast , ,

preserved the honour of my w ord : for if this l ad w ould be no K hatri my c aste fello w s w ould ,
-

repro ach me for giving h im my d aughter “ A t th at very time he put into the hem o f the l ad .

the bet roth al presents an d a few d ays after th e wedding took pl ace an d Ram das took his wife
-
-

to h i s na ti ve v il lage Gur fi éakk .

m is a diminutive form of m .

wrd 313— w
very likely adde d more recently when Gur u Ram di s h ad taken up h is a bo de ere
.

2 - th
T he o as ,
.

T h e rea l n a me wa s therefore only a?

ru
T his p ass ag e is ver y signific ant as to th e observa n ce o f ca ste by the earlier S ikh Gu
3 s .
lxxx C
S K E T H O F THE L IF E O F T HE O T HE R S IK H GU RU S . A RJUN .

Guru A m ar -d i s w as p articul arly f ond o f his d aughter ( w hose n ame w as M ah ani ) so th at ,

p assing his son Mé h an be entrusted the Guruship t o his son in l aw Ram d as w h o w as a pious - - -
,
,

an d pe ace ful m an He . w as e ager in collecting disciples an d gre at cro w ds used to flock to hi s

reside n ce at Gurfi éakk .

His income f rom the volu n tary o fferings of h i s disciples must h ave been considerable : for
it en abled him to restore m agnificently an ol d t ank w hich he c alled A mr i tsar ( the nectar
t ank ) in the midst o f w hich he built a place of w orship to w hich he gave the name of
, ,

H ar man der ( m tem ple of B ar i) The n e w to wn w hich soon sprang up round this t ank
,
.
, ,

w as first c all ed R d m dd s p u i s ) aft er wards the n ame of A mrits ar w as extended

r ( ci ty o f Ram d a - - -
,

t o the w hole to w n an d the old n ame Gur fi éakk f ell into oblivion .

This w as o f the g re atest importance for the fir m establishment o f S ikhism for the S ikhs obtained ,

thereby a fixed central pl ac e of w orship w here the disciples annu al ly as sembled round their ,

Gur u an d perf ormed their ablutions in the nectar ta nk Ram d ai s though w ithout an y scientific -
.
-
,

education gave himsel f much to litera ry w ork H e composed a g re at m any verses i n whi ch
,
.
,

he expounded his doctrines an d though n o ori gin ality of thought is t o be f ound in them they
, ,

belong to the better compositions of the:Granth ( Mah all a N ) H e spent his days i n pe ace and H

rest as un der hi s Gurushi p th e organi z ation o f the S ikh community h ad not yet progre ssed so
,

f ar as t o arouse the suspicion an d al ar m o f the Muh amm ad an Government H e died on the .

3 rd o f M arch 1 58 1 hav ing nomin ated hi s son A rj un ( A rj un m al l ) ‘ his successor in th e Gurushi p

, ,
-
.

F rom Ram das the succession re m ai ned h er edi tar y in the family w hich added gr e atly t o increase
-
,

the w e alth and the authority of the Gurus as th e S ikhs w ere thereby gradually accustomed to ,

look on their Gurus as th eir actu al sovereigns .

5 — GU RU
, A RJU N (A D . . 1 58 1

to Guru A rj un the S ikhs w ere a community neither very numerous nor much taken
Up
notice of thei r Gurus le ading the li fe o f F aqi rs an d being aver se t o out w ard sho w an d pomp
, ,

t hough A m ar di s an d more so Ram d as h ad al re ady consi derable me ans at their dispos al fr om

-
,
-
,

t h e voluntary o fferi ngs o f their disciples .

This state w as ch anged considerably under Guru A rj un wh o w as an en terprising an d active ,

m an an d the fir st Guru w ho meddl ed w i th p ol i t i c s

, A ft er the S ikhs h ad obtained under the .

Guruship of his father Ram das a visible s a cred pla ce w hich served the m as a rallying point
-
, ,
’
Guru A rj un s first object w as t o give them also a sac r ed c ode in order to unite them more
, ,

closel y by one common religious tie an d to separate them f rom the m ass of the Hi ndfi s He .

collected there fore the verses o f t h e preceding Gur us to w hich he ad ded his ow n very numero us ,

( but c arelessl y w ritt e n ) compositions an d in order t o prove th at the tenets o f th e S ikh Gurus
,

w ere al re ady entert ained an d procl aime d by the e arlier popul ar s aints Bh g t inserted
( a a e) b e ,

considerable extr acts from their w ritings a s l oci p r oban tes at the end of nearly every Rag This .

miscell aneous collection he c all ed Gr an th ( or Gr a n th sd hi b mfv a ) i e the 50076 an d it Wil 8 ,

‘

, . .
,
l

thencefort h held sacred as the Bible o f the S ikhs suppl a nting gradu ally t h e authority of the ,

V edas an d Bn ranas w hich the unlettered people h ad never been able to re ad w here as the
, Granth ,
w as composed in the ir mother tongue an d intelli ible t o the vulg ar -
g .

The sto ry goes that the disciples assembled o n e d ay round Guru A 1j un an d s aid th at by
,
,

hearin g the verses which Guru Nanak h ad uttered tr an quill ity c ame to the mind an d desire ,

I
It is n ot quite clear if Ram di s h a d tw o o r three sons It i s ce rtain t ha t B harat m all was th e b r other
-
. -

o f A lj n n w hich i s confirmed by t h e D abi st an

,
( II p w here it i s mentioned th at B h arnt foll o wed after
. .
,

h i s brother A rju n m all though the S ikhs themselves d is a vow t h e succession o f Bba
-
, r at .
l xxxii S KE T C H O F T HE L IF E O F T H E O TH E R S K H GU RU S I HA R GO VI ND
- .
.

community incre ased very consider ably an d spre ad fast over the P anj ab ; but in proportion as
the S ikhs began to draw public attention on themselves the suspicion o f the Muham madan ,

Gove r nment w as roused an d Guru A rj un w as the first w h o f ell a victim to it

,
.

There ar e di ff erent accounts of the c auses of the de ath of A rj un T h e common S ikh .

l

traditio n is th at A rj un h ad a son n amed H ar gé v i n d W hen h e h ad att ained to the ye ars of

,
-
.

discretion a b arber an d Brahm an c ame an d brought about his betroth al w ith th e daugh ter
, v

of Can d fi sah w h o w as a serv ant ( fin ance adm ini str ator ) o f the E mperor o f Dilli C an dfi szi h
'

-
- .

he ard from the people th at in the house w here hi s d aughter h ad been betrothed they l ived
, , ,

af te r the m anner of F aqi rs an d w ere e ating o fferings H e got very angry w ith the Brahman .

an d the b arber an d t u rned them out o f his house W hen A rj un he ard of this he sent w ord to . ,

Can d fi sah t h at the betroth al w a s gi ven up on h i s p art he could betro th h i s d aughter some where
-
, ,

else Ga n dfi sah bec ame gre a tly ash amed at this bre aking o ff o f the m atch an d fro m th at day w as
.
-

a bitte r enemy o f th e Guru H e c alu m ni ated him t o the E mperor an d Guru A rj un w as several
.
,

times summoned t o L ahore w here he su ffered severe tre atment O n e d ay this w retch suggested to
,
.

the E mperor that he should se w A rj u n up in a r aw c o w hide w hi ch the H ind u

,
s abhor most and -
, ,

burn him W hen the c o w bi de w as brought be f ore him b e begged t o be allo w ed to take first a
.
-
,

b ath in the Ravi The E mper or granted this request ; A rju n j umped into t h e Ravi an d w as lost
.
,

in it ; the people se arched much for hi s corpse but could not find it Guru A rj un died in the ,
.

ye ar 1 60 6 h aving nomin ated h i s young son H ar —gé v in d h is successor in the Guruship

, .

This account of the c ause of the de ath of Guru A rj un i s very uns atisfactory It is e asily .

perceived th at the re al ch arge w hich w as brought against the Guru is p assed over in silence ,
v

by the S ikh tradition even if w e admit th at C an dfi sah w as actu ated by private enmity for
,
-

the re asons stated above F ortun ately the Dabi st an ( II p 2 72 ) thro w s some light on this dark
. . .

point There w e le arn th at the E mperor N fi r u ddi n Jah angi r c alled to h is court ( when at
.
,
-

L ahore ) A rj un m all on acc ount of h i s h aving o ffered pr ayers f o r the K ing s son K husrau wh o
-
,
’
,

h ad rebelled ag ainst h i s f ather K busr au h aving been t aken t h e K ing ordered the imprisonment
.
,

o f A rj un m all an d w anted to extort a l arge

-
, sum o f money fro m him The Guru w as helpless ; .

they kept him prisoner in the s andy c ountry o f L ahore until he died fro m the he at of the sun
a n d ill tre atment This h appen ed in 1 6 0 6 . .

From this it appe ar s th at A rj un w as arr aigned on the ch arge th at he h ad j oined ( w ith his
a dherents
) in the reb ellion o f K h usrau W hic h ever w ay he died his de ath w as ascribed to the .
,

bigotry a n d cruelty o f the M uh a m mad an Govern ment an d his disciples w ere b urning to revenge ,

it T h e de ath of Gur u A rj un is there fore the gre at turning poi n t in the development of the
. -

S ikh community as from th at ti m e the struggle commenced w hich ch anged the whole ch arac ter
,
,

o f thi s ref orm atory religious movement .

6 .
— GU RU H A R GO V I ND -
1 60 6

the de ath of Gur u Arj un some troubles arose in the S ikh community as the uncle of
Af ter ,
,

the youthf ul H ar —gd vi n d P ir thi m all cl aimed for himsel f the succession in the Gurushi p P i rthi
,
-
,
2
.

M alcol m ( S ke t c h of
ikhs p 32) gi ves a diff erent s t ory t h at a Hi n d i z e alot D an i (l an d a K hat ri
th e S , .
-
, , , ,

w h o s e w ri t ing s A rj un r ef u s ed t o a d m it in t o t h e Gra th c a us ed h i s d eat h by pre vaili g up ont h e Mub am ma dan n , n

Gove rnor o f t h e p r ovince t o impri son A rju n T h e w h ole s t ory looks ve ry un lik ely a n d I h ave hitherto n o t
.

b een a bl e t o t rac e i t i n a n y S ik h t ra diti on th a t h a s com e u n der my observa t i on .

I t is ve ry l ik ely t h a t fi ra q f 3
2 —
135 is id entic al w ith 3 T33 3135 ( see t h e Dabist an II p 273) a nd
‘

a
'

W prog eny c all ed W

, . .

,a n d h i s disciple s c alle d con t e m pt uously afi a ( 311 2 “ m an ox

,
‘

, .

w i t h the ho r ns b endi ng do w n the fa ce w ere a t a l a t er time excom u ic ted by

) m n a , Guru Govi n d S in gh .
 SK E TC H F
o r TH E L I E o r THE O THE R S IK H GU RU S . E AR-GO VIND .
lxxxiii

m all seems to h ave been o f an intriguing disposition ; he i s s aid to have go ne to Can d fi sah to -

Dilli in order to get the Guruship by his assistance but beco mi n g ob n oxious to th e S ikhs by
, ,

his intrigues he was soon de serted an d Har go vind was ackn o w ledg ed as th e right ful successor to
,
-

h i s father .

In order to revenge the de ath o f his f ather b e f or the first time armed his follo wers an d
took bloody revenge o f Can dfi sah an d the Muh amm ad ans wh om he considered concerned in -

h i s d e ath .

The S ikh accounts agr ee by no me ans on this point an d ar e full o f confusion as they ,

app arently try to smooth over m any uneven thin gs an d to conceal th e re al f acts o f the life o f
their Guru l A ccording to o n e relat ion it w as Can d fi si h instigated by P irthi m all w h o told
.
-
,
-
,

the astrologers of t h e K ing th at they should frighten the K ing by telling h i m th at for one mon th
,

an d a qu arter th ere w as gre at d anger f o r h i m ; i f he w ould c all Guru H ar

gd v i n d f rom the P anj a b
-
,

all w ould go w ell O n this the K ing ( o r E mperor ) sen t men to bring him f rom A mri ts ar ;
.

w hen he arrived th e K ing told him th at he should for his s ake sit f orty days i n prison an d
'

perf orm w orship O thers say th at t h e K ing sen t h i m for f orty d ays to the f ort of Gual i ar to
.
,
'

per form devotion there W h e n the f orty d ay s w ere over a S ikh n amed B it éan d w h o w as
.
, ,
-
,

staying w ith the Guru g ave himself t h e appe arance o f a physician met t h e K ing an d s aid that
, , ,

H ar —gdv i n d w hom he kept in p r ison for the s ake o f his o w n com fort w as a gre at s aint he
, .
, ,

sh ould speedil y set him at liberty for those w h o h ad c aused his i m prisonment w ere h i s enemies , , ,
.

The K ing c all ed H ar gdv i n d ackno w ledged his fault an d asked the Guru to forgive it Har gd v in d
-
, .
-

h ad a priceless pe arl w hich h e o ff ered as a present to the K ing

,
When the K ing h ad seen its .

splendour h e w as much ple ased a n d s aid : I f o n e o the r like it could be f ound it w ould be
,
“
,

very w ell ” The Guru ans w ered th at on the neck of his father A rjun th ere w as a necklace
.
,

containing more th an on e hundred an d eight o f such p c a1 l s but they w ere n o w in the possession ,

of his D i v a n C an d fi sah Wh en th e K ing he ard th is he w as astonishe d an d a sked h o w C andu

. o , ,

sah got them f rom his f a ther ? The eyes of the Guru w ere filled w ith t ears ; h e told th e K ing
the w hol e story an d added t h at w hen his father under the h ard treatment of Gan dfi sah h ad died
,
-

at L ahore he took the w hole neckl ace from him The K i n g bec am e very angry an d w hen he
“ -
,
.
,

h ad ascertained the f ul l truth als o f r om oth er peopl e b e s ei z ed Can dfi sah an d h anded h i m over ,
-

to the Guru to revenge himself on him as b e ple ased He took him w ith himsel f to A mrits ar
,
.

an d beg a n to punish him It is s aid th at they bound a rope round his f eet an d d ra gc d h im
.
,
g
g

through th e b az ar o f A mrits ar an d L ahore A s he h ad seated A rjun on he ated f rying pans an d .

hot s ands so did H ar gd v in d to him till h e at l ast died being dragged ab o ut in the b az ar
,
-
,
,
.

A ll this appe ars very improb able as it is far more likely th at h e reve n ged himself w ithout ,

an y r c fer en c e to a uthority We kno w from th e Dabi stan th at Har gdv i n d w a s a m an o f a w arlike

.
,
-

spirit an d addicted to huntin g ; he al w ays kept a strong b an d of armed f ollo w ers round h i s person
an d h e is s aid to h ave h ad eight hundred horses in h i s st ab l e H e built the to w n of Har gd vi n d .
-

p u r on the b anks of the E dit ed to serve him in c ase o f necessity as a fi r m retre at

,
H i s w arlike , , .

inclin ati ons pro mpted him also to enter the service of the E mperor Jah angi r but his irr egular _
,

con duct involved h im in m any diffi culties It is expressly stated in the D ehistan ( II p th at. . .

l
Th e histor y o f t h e l a ter S ikh Gur fi s from H ar —d ind to Gav i n d S ingh is in vol v e d i n a gre at deal o f
obscurity a s the S ikh a ccou n ts a r e so frequently co n t radictory an d dicta ted by prejud ice or h atred a g ain st t h e
,

Muh amm ad an s T his pa rt o f their history require s as yet a c areful cri tical sifti n g as th e S ikhs thems elves
. , ,

h av e no i d ea o f historica l truth .

F ro m this tradition it w oul d follo w th at Arju n h a d r ea lly d ied o f ill trea t m ent a s t h e Dab ist an r eports
2
, , ,

an d n o t by dro wni n g in t h e Ravi T h is i s also mor e or l ess co n fir m ed by A rj un s to mb e re cted at L ahore ;

’

. ,

for if A rjun s co r pse h ad not been foun d h o w could a t omb h a v e b een e rected over it ?
’
,
 lxxxi v S KE TC H O F THE L I F E O F T HE O THE R S IK H GU RU S . HAR-GO VI ND .

be appropriated t o himself the p ay d ue to the soldiers i n adv ance in consequence of wh ich and ,

on ac count of the mul ct imposed upon h is f ather Arj un the E mperor Jah angi r sent h i m t o the ,

f ort of Gual i ar w here he rem ained impr isoned for t w elve ye ar s A t last the E mperor released .

him being moved by pity The S ikh tradition is quite silent on this point ; an d his imprison
,
.

ment at Gual iar w hich it restricts t o forty d ays is asc ribed to quite diff erent re asons, as w e have
, ,

seen above .

A fter t h e de ath of J ah an gi r ( 1 6 2 8 ) H ar g ovind entered the service of the E mperor S h ah -

j ah an but he seems soon t o h ave left h i s service an d t o h ave t aken up a reckless course of
,

li fe again S hah Jah an sent troops against h im w h o t ook Ramd as pur an d plundere d the Guru s
.
-
,
’

prop er ty Thence he fled to K art arpur w here he soon h ad a serious en c ount er w ith t h e P athan
.
,

P ainda h K han A ccording t o th e S ikh tr ad ition P ainda h K h an w as living w ith the Guru in his
.
l

tent ( he is even s ai d t o h ave been his f oster brother ) O n e d ay a S ikh brought a s w or d a h awk . ,

an d a be au ti ful d re ss as presents t o the Guru w hich he besto wed o n P aind ah K h an w h o gave , ,

them again away to hi s so n i n l aw W hen the Guru heard thi s he bec ame angr y wi th P aindah
- -
. ,

K han an d expostula ted w ith hi m about it P aindah K h an denied it a t fi rst but was convicte d . , ,

w hereupon he was bea ten by some S ikhs present an d turned o ut of the tent .

P aindah K han got the ear of the Mugul authorities an d as he w as considere d a fit i nstrument ,

to s trike a blo w at the dre aded Guru troops w ere entrusted t o him w ith whom he besieged , ,

H ar govind a t K artarpur
-
A severe struggl e ensued in w hich t h e Impe ri al troops w ere v anquish ed
.
,

a n d P aind ah K h an himself sl ai n by t h e Guru

'

E ncour aged by this victory h e move d to Bh agv ara in th e vicinity of L ahore He seiz ed .

some h orses belonging t o the E mperor but being pursued he fled to the hills He took up his , .

abode at K i ratp ur ( ne ar A n andpur ) in th e house o f his eldest son Gur ditt a Wh o w as li ving
,
-
,

there w ith B ab a Bu dh a an d some time af ter h aving given the thr one o f the Guruship to his
,
2
,

gra ndson H ar r ai he died there A D 1 63 8 the l 0th o f M arch 3

-
, . .
, ,
o

Guru H ar govind h as given qu-

ite a d ifferent appe arance t o the S ikh commu nity The peaceful .

F aqi rs w ere ch anged into sol diers an d the Gur u s c amp resoun ded w i th the din o f w ar ; th e ’

ros ary w as l aid aside an d the s word buckled on A s the Guru s expeditions w ere ne arly al ways
'

.
’

d irected ag ainst the Muh amm adans an d th e extor t ion ate provinci al authorities w e need n o t w onder , ,

th a t his popula rity f ast incre ased w ith the ill tre ated H indu rur al popul ation ; every f ugitive or -

oppressed man to ok refuge i n his c amp where he w as sur e to be w elcomed w itho ut being much ,

troubled about religion an d the ch arms o f a vagrant life an d the h 0 pe of boo ty attracted numbers
, .

o f w arli ke J a s
t wh o w ill ingly ackno wledged him as their Guru the more so as he allowed hi s
, ,

f ollo w ers t o eat all kinds of flesh th a t o f the c o w ex cepted The home of the S ikhs w as n ow
, .

the camp wh er e the heterogeneous elements by cl ose contact an d stim u

, l ated by th e s ame hopes , ,

an d f e ars soon w elded together into a n e w communi ty

, Th e expedi tions an d fights ho wever .

w ere as yet on a sm all scale an d p artook mor e o f a local ch ar ac ter an d w ere there fore h ardl y ,

ever noti ced by the authorities w h o w ere either t oo shortsighted an d indolent or too po werl ess to
,

stop effectually t h e concourse of such a turbulent an d d angerous cro wd ,

I n Gurmukhi w ritten Tit

W
2
notorious freebooter i t h e P a nj ab wh o h a d b eco m e a disciple o f Har govind He got
a n
,
- .

t h ere fo re t h e h o n or ary ti tl e o f W
( fat h e r B n d b a) .

3
Th ere is a great d iversity ab o ut t h e date o f Ha r gc win d s d e a th The ye ar g iven i s th at commonly -
‘
’
.

r cor de d by th e S ikhs In t h e Dabistan t h e y ear 1 64 5 i s m en tio n ed corr espon di ng to th e Hij l al l 1 055

e .
,
'

M uli in a i s ays ( H
s th at h e saw Ia r —g ov in d in the ye a r o f the Hit
.
-

16 43 ) at
W e d o n o t kno w h o w to reconcile th es e t wo d ate s which diff e r b seven yea r s P erh aps there is a mistake i n
y , .

t h e A ra b ic cip hers o f the Dabi stan .

lx xxvi C
S K E T H O F THE L IF E O F T HE O T HE R S IK H GU RU S . TE G-BA HA DU R .

he w as much vexed ; he s aid before the S ikhs th at H ar kis an w as still a minor on w hom the ,
-
,

smal l p o x h ad not yet broken out if he should get through the sm all p ox then he might take
-
,
-
,

the Gur uship .

A ccording to one tr adition ( as given i n the S ikh a dé r aj di v i th i a p 4 3 ) Gur u H ar kis an

-
, .

A ur ang z e b one d ay asked his

‘

w as summoned t o the court of Dill i in the f ollo w ing w ay

-
.

courtiers w h o amongst the F aqi rs o f B aba Nan ak w as n ow the best ? They ans w ered th at n ow
,
,

a you ng l ad by n ame H ar kis an w as reported t o be th eir le ader w h o alre ady in his youth
,
-
,
,

w as a perfect F aqi r Thereupon the E mperor ordered th at they should quickly bring him to
.

Dilli as he w ished t o see him O n e K h atri w h o w as a D i van ( minister ) o f the E mperor and
,
. ,

on e of the disciples o f the Guru o ffered him sel f to bring H ar kis an H e w ent to K i ratp ur,
-
.

an d communic ated to the Guru the w ish o f the E mperor w h o set out w ith the messenger and ,

w ith m any disciples in a P alki fo r Dilli Here the m atter is represented as i f A ur ang z eb desired .
-

t o see the Guru out o f curiosity where as w e kno w from other so urces th at this w as by n o , ,

me an s the c ase .

Ram r ai the el der brother of Har kis an w as det ained as h ost age at th e c o ur t of A uran g z eb
-
,
-
,
‘ -
,

an d w as app arently n ot on a good f ooting w ith his f ather an d there f ore w as p assed over When ,
.

Ram r ai he ard o f the de ath o f his father an d th at h i s y o unger brother h ad bee n instal led as
-

Guru he compla ined t o the E mperor an d asked f or his decision

,
A ur ang z eb w as very glad .
-

t o h ave an opportunity o f interf ering an d sum m oned the young H ar kis an t o h i s court w h o ,
-
,

reluctantly obeyed .

Whilst staying at Dilli H ar kis an w as attacked by the sm all p o x so th at he w as unable

,
- -
,

t o appe ar at court When the Guru bec ame very w e ak the d isciples asked him w hom they
.
,

should acknow ledge as Guru after him ? It is s aid th at after some reflection b e put five P aisas ,

an d a coco a nut o n the ground an d h avi n g bo w ed h s he d s id t the disciples Go your

“
-
i a a o,
: ,

Guru is in the village of B ak al a ( m 1) ne ar A n andpur ”

H e died in 1 6 64 No verse of his , . .

is contained in the Granth .

I n the dis t urb ances w hich f ollow ed the de ath o f H ar kis an Ram r ai w as dis avow ed by all -
,
-

p arties H e w ent therefore t o the hills an d set tled at Dehradun

. w here h e started
a sect o f his o w n an d collected m any disciples He still lived in t h e times o f Guru Gav in d S ingh
,
.

an d frequently qu arrelled w ith h i m He taught his disciples n ot t o h o w the he ad be fore an y

.

o n e but himsel f an d n o t t o w orship an y god or

,
goddess but him sel f H is disciples w ere c alled .

“
Ram r at e ” (W
-
W ) an d w ere aft er wards e x com m unicated by Guru d ind S ingh
, .

It is reported that Ram rat fo r the s ake o f on e of h i s disciples under went in a deep cave
-
, ,

a very severe course o f austerities ( fi at m m ) ; w hen the bre ath h ad risen to th e ten th
g ate the disci ples wh o w ere n e ar him kne w th at the Guru h ad die d an d they burnt h i s body
, , , ,

after the m anner o f t h e H ind u s They erected there a t omb ( I n-rm) an d c alled i t 3 1 3; m
.

2 1 311 3 1 ; hen ce th at hilly country received t h e n am e o f D ehradu n ; there every ye ar a gre at

M el a is held W here m any holy person ages assemble
, ,

9 .
— GU RU T E G B A HA DU R -
( A D . . 1 664

the de ath of H ar kisan dissensions arose among the S ikhs as t o the succession in th e
A fter -
,

Guruship A com pany o f disciples w ent t o B a k al a in order t o p ay their revere n ce t o T eg

.
,

b ahadur as their Guru But T eg bahadur at first re fused t o accept the Guruship : for the d hi s
.
-

there about h ad set up a Guru o f their o w n an d Ram r ai also w as r aising cl aims t o th e succession ,
- .

3 3 3 1 s ig i fies a sh r i n e a n d
(sf ) literal ly the refore : t h e sh rin e
'

23 a val l e
y bet ween t wo m o un t a i n s,
n
 C
S K E T H O F TH E L I F E O F T H E O T HE R S IK H GU RU S . TE G-BA HA DU R .
l x x xv u

At last T eg b ah adur was prevailed upon chiefly by the en treatnes of his mother t o take upon
-
,
'

himself the burden of the Gur uship an d he w as soon generally ac kno wledge d as the head of
,

the c ommunity .

T eg—b ah ad ur left then B akal a w h a e he h ad l ived in secl usion and removed to M a kh av al

, ,

( mm ) w hich is ne ar K i ratpur on the b anks o f the S atl uj this pl ace wa s after wards c alled
, ,

A nandpur as being the re si dence o f th e Guru

, .

S ome t ime after he le ft this pl ace an d w ent as the story goes on a pilgrim age to P atn a , ,

w ith his w ife an d ki nd red w her e h e stayed fo r about fi v e or six ye ars an d w here Govind S ingh
,
-
,

w as born an d also received his first educ ation f rom the P an dits of th at pl ace w hich deeply ,

tinged his mind w ith the Hindu superstitions V ery likely Teg b ah adur no longer felt s afe in .
-

the Banj ab w here the spies of A urang z é b kept a w atchful ey e on the proceedings o f the S ikhs
,
-
,

an d b e resolved therefore to le ave the P anj ab altogether an d to settle under the garb of a ,

H indu pilgrim in some populous pl ace w here he could rem ai n conce al e d or unnoticed ,
O n the .

f ollo w ing e vents of the li fe of Guru T eg b ah adur the accounts di ffer very w idely as the S ikh
'

-
,

tr adit ion is ende avouring to con c e al or do aw ay with everyth ing th at could thro w an un fa voura ble
l ight on him A ccor ding to the S ikh tradi tion Guru Teg b ah adur w as a saint w h o even after
.
,
-
, ,

his a ccession to the Guruship remained an U d asi ( i a in diff erent to the w orld ) an d w as totally
, . .

taken up w ith meditation an d devotion .

H e removed f rom P atna again to An andpur on account of some enmity w ith th e people ,

the re asons of w hich ar e not stated .

H e rs s aid to h ave been very f ond o f w ande r ing about in the j ungles w ith some disci pl es 1 .

On one o f these w anderi ngs he is s aid to h ave come to H indu stan When he arrived at A gra .

he stopped in a g arden an d sent his S ignet ring an d a sh aw l to the b az ar to dispose o f the m

,
-
'

an d t o buy some provisions The c c n fec ti on er to w hom these th ings were o ff ered for s ale took
.
, ,

f right lest they should be stolen goods an d brought them to t h e K ut v al

, ,
Th e K utv al h aving t aken .
,

the signet ring w ent to T eg—b ah adur into the garden an d began to inte rr og ate him w h o he
'

-
, ,

w as an d w hence he h ad come ? W hen he h ad ascertained th at it w as Teg b ah adur he sen t a

-
,

m ess a ge t o A urang z é b at Dilli th at Guru T eg b ah adur h ad by ch ance fallen i nto hi s h ands

-
,
—
,

an d a sked for orders reg arding hi m The E mp eror A urang z éb w as m aking al l eff orts to brin g -
.

the w hole w orld to the Musalman faith an d h e h ad in tho se d ays impri soned m any Br ahmans , ,

as he hoped th at if these first bec ame Musal m an s the other people w ould re ad ily follo w their
, ,

ex ample When the E mper or hear d th at Guru T eg b ah adur h ad been sei z ed he w as very glad
.
-
, ,

becau se he h ad he ard much o f the Nanak p an th i s an d w ished to meet with them He sent - .

t here fore orders to Agr a th at he sh ould be quickly sen t to Dilli

,
.

W hen the Guru h ad come to Dilli th e E mperor h ad m any di sp utati c n s w ith him an d tr ied
, ,

al l me an s t o b ri ng hi m over to th e Mus al m an f aith T eg b ah adur wh o was not a le ar ned m an -

.
,

con v ers ant w ith disput ations g ave no a ns w er an d w hen the E mperor desired to see m iracl es
n or , ,

om him he rem ined silent A t l st he w thro w n into prison w ith three disciples an d
fr ,
a a . as ,

told th at he w ould not be set at liberty till he w ould embrace the Mus alman religion When .

the Guru rem ained fi rm they beg an to torture him H e m an aged to send a letter to h i s son
,
.

Go vind at A a n ndpur in forming ,

him o f his ho p eless st ate c i n d ans w ered him w ith a consol atory .

Doh r a
'

,
but could do nothing for him 2
W hen n o more an y hope
.
w as le ft f or th e Guru t wo ,

ikh fled only one rem ined w it h him Des airi n g o f lif e an d being w e ar y o f the crue l
S s an d a p .
,

re tment he h ad to su e
ff r he ord e ed the S ik h to ou t o ff h i s he ad H e re fused at fi rst to
t a r .

h t is on e led under these h rmless ord s w sh ll see he rea fter

W a c c a a w e a .

S ee T r ansla tion of the Gra nth , p 708 . .

lxxxviii S K E T CH O F TH E L IF E O F T H E O T HE R S K H GU RU S I T E G- BA H A DU R
. .

commit such a crime but w hen th e Guru pressed h im h ard he at l ast struck off his he ad with
,
,

a s w ord T eg b ah adur died A D 1 6 75

'
-
. . . .

‘
dfi h a ) to Dilli
When Gov ind he ard of the d e ath of his fath er he sent his s w eepers r
,

t o bring the corpse o f the dece ased t o A nandpur They entered the j ai l under the pretext of .

s w eeping there an d brought aw ay the corpse on a c art l aden w ith grass

,
The body w as burnt .

n ndpur gre t shrine erected th re the he ad w hich h ad rem ained at Dilli some
at A a a n d a a e ; , ,

ikhs burnt there erected tomb hich c lled S s ganj ( fi n fi fi he a d st ack

)
’

S an d a w w as a i -
,
-
.

A cco rding t o this tr adition of t h e S ikhs as i t is essentially contained i n the S ikh a dé r aj

2
,

di v i th i a p 4 7 sqq Guru T eg b ah adur appe ars quite as an innocent m an w h o su ff ered severely

,
.
,
.
,
- ,

at th e h ands o f the bigoted A u r an g z é b an d w h o in order t o avoid a contumelious de ath with ,

o

, ,

w hich he h ad been thre atened go t his he ad cut o ff by o n e of his disciples ,

To this vi e w h is .

compositions w hich ar e contained i n the Granth a n d w hich be ar th e stamp o f a rather mel ancholy
,

a n d w orld renoun cin g ch ar acter

- see m t o h ave contributed gre atly an d it is n ot t o be overlooked
, , ,

th at as t o his s anc tity an d renunci ation o f w orldly desires those very verses ar e appe al ed to in ,

the f oregoing tradition W e need therefore n o t w onder if T eg bah adur after the troubles and
.
-
,

tu rm oils o f the times w ere some w h at forgotte n appeared t o the l ater S ikhs in this light ,
.

But w e must n o t rashly conclude fro m the w ords o f T eg b ah adur as far as they h ave been -
,

h and ed do w n t o posterity th at he w as altogether a q uiet w orld re n ouncing F a qi r w h o did n ot

, ,
-
,

m eddle i n w orl dly aff airs or the politics o f those d a ys ; f o r th e mor al vie w s of the S ikhs of those
tim es w ere alre ady so thoroughly confused an d their h atred against the Muh amm adans so great ,

th at they considered rebell ion against t h e established government an d plundering the property of
t h e Muh a mm ad ans quite as l aw ful a cts .

T h e reasons alleged in the S ikh tr aditio n f or the persecution an d de ath of their nin th Gu ru
appe ar very de fective an d improb able though the bigotry o f the E mperor A uran g z é b is conceded ,
-

al l h ands an d m ay n o t h av e been altogether str ange t o it S ome hint as t o th e r eal c ause ‘

on .

of the destruction o f T eg b ah ad u r is given by the S airu l m uta axxi ri n ( Briggs s transl atio n vol i
- -
’ ’
,
. .

pp 1 1 2
.
,
where it is stated th at he w as taken prisoner on account of his predatory proceed ,

ings an d executed as a rebel a gainst the Government .

The S akh i s w hich S irdar A ttar S ingh chief of Bh adour — w h o w ith an enli ghtened mi nd
,
a
, ,

foll ow s up the history an d religio n of his n ation — h as l ately published thro w a very significant , ,

light o n th e w an de rings o f T eg b ah adur an d their re al ch aracter an d tend t o confirm th e charges

-
,

brought ag ainst him by Muh amm ad an w riters A s these S akbi s reproduce the S ikh tradition .
,

w e h ave the less re ason t o question their trustw orthiness A ccording t o them the Guru appears by .

n o me ans as a h armless spiritual instructor but riding at the front of w ell armed disciples wh o
, ,
-
,
,

Their d escendants a r e s aid t o h e th e z fi fi fi fi rbf ( Maj h i S ikh) a s those s w eep er s w ere r eceived in to th e ‘

,
x o /

K h alsa by Gur u Govi d S i n gh fo r t he i r d aring cou r a ge wfi c fi i s a co r rup tion fr o m t h e A ra bic w h m ‘ '

‘

n .
o

( r eg ul ar d ue S ikh s)
, .

2
T h e t r a di t ions a bou t t h e i m priso m ent a n d de a th o f T eg bah ad ur d i ff er very much a n d a re f req uen tly
n -

co t radic t o ry S ome ascribe hi s p rs ecut io n s a d co n seq uen t d ea t h t o t h e inve tera te h a t red o f Ram rai ( see
n . e n -

M Gr ego r H i s t ory o f t h e S i khs v o l i p 66 ; M alcolm S ke t ch o f t h e S ikhs p

‘
, , . . some solely to th e bigo try
.
, , .

0 i A ur a u g z éb C unni n g h a m ( Histo r y o f t h e S ik h s pp 6 1 62) com e s n e a rer th e t ru th as he co n sul t ed also

- .
, .
, ,

a Muh a mm ada n a u t hor i ty T h e S ik h repor t s mus t be t a k en w it h gre a t pre c au t ion a n d cri tical d iscernmen t
.
.

3
T he i r t itle i s : T h e T r a v els o f Guru T egh B ahad ur an d Gu ru Gobi n d S ingh T ransl a ted from th e .

O r igin al Gur m uk h i by S i r da r A t ta r S ing h C hief o f B h ad o ur J anua ry 1 8 76 L a hore I n dia n P ublic O pi nion

, .
, .
,

P re ss . I t w ould h a ve b een v ery usef ul if t h e t r ansl a t or h a d also a dd ed so m e crit ic al app ar a tus a b out t he

pro bable t ime o f t h e compo sition of the se S i k h i s They c anno t be very ol d as the B ri tish territory thereabo ut .
,

i s a l r eady m en tione d (p ii) . .

xc C
S K E T H O F T HE L F E O F T H E O T HE R S K H GU RU S I I . GO VIND S NGH I .

W hen he ttained t o ye ars of m anhood he stood publicly up as Guru an d c om

h ad a , ,

m en c ed to collect t h e dispersed an d intimid ated members o f the S ikh community During his .

retre at he h ad m atured his pl ans ; h i s ai m w as t o w re ak bloody reve n ge o n the murderers of his

father t o subvert tot ally the Muh a m m adan po w er an d t o f ound a n e w empire upon its ruins
, ,
.

A s h i s mind w as deeply tinged o w ing t o his e arly educ ation by H ind u P a n dit e w ith the , ,

superstitious notions o f the H in d us he resolved be f ore emb ar king on h i s gre at enterprise t o secure
, , ,

t o himself the aid o f the godde ss Durg a w h o w as his speci al object o f w orship A fter he h ad '

,
.

procured some P an dits f ro m Ben ares he w ent w ith them t o the hil l o f the Nain a devi ( W , ) -
,

which is about six K 6 3 di stant f rom A n andpur There he began t o practise the severest austerities
'

a ccording t o the directions o f the P an dits When he h ad gon e through the course of these .

auste r ities t h e Br ah mans bega n to o ffer up his burnt o fferings thro w ing hundreds of m aunds
, ,

of Gh i r a w sug ar an d mol ass e s into the fire

,
.

When the burnt o ffering w as co m pleted the P an dits told the Guru th at he sho u ld n ow , , ,

in order t o m ak e a pow e rf ul o ffe ri n g cut o ff the h ead o f h i s o wn son an d put it bef ore the goddess
,
.

Govind S ingh h ad f our son s ‘ but w hen he a sked their mothers t o give him o n e they flatly , ,

re fused it The Guru asked the P an dits w h at w as n o w t o be done ? an d w hen they ans wered
.
, ,

th at the he a d o f some on e else w ould do five ( others say t w enty fi v e ) disciples offered their heads ,
-
,

o n e o f w hi ch w as c u t o ff an d o ff e red t o th e goddess an d thus t h e burnt o ffe ring m ade complete .

,

The story goes th at thereupon t h e Dé v i appe ared an d said : Go thy sect w ill prosper in th e
,
“
,

w orld (a re ? ar fire was fa t? 53 t ram) ?

”

W hen the Guru h ad returned f rom the hills t o A n andpur b e a ssembled the societies of th e ,

di scipl es an d told them th at he r equired the he ad of a disciple ; he w h o loved his Guru should
, , ,

give it Most of them w ere terror struck an d fled ; but five out o f the m rose an d offered
.
-

re solutely their heads Their n ames ( which h ave been c are fully recorded w here as the n ame of
.
,

the poor victim offered t o the Nai n a d evi is n ot mentioned ) w ere : Dh arm S ingh S ukkh a S in gh
'

-
, ,

D ay a S ingh H imm at S ingh an d Muhkam S ingh These five he took i n to a room an d told the m th at
, .
, ,

as he h ad f ound the m true he w ould give th e m the P ah u l o f the true religion ( 31 % m

, all I nga ) .

H e m ade the m b athe an d se ated them side by side ; he dissolved purified sug ar i n w ater and 3

s tir red it w ith a t wo edged d ag ger an d h aving recited over it some verses w hich ar e w ri tten in th e
-
, ,

m h e m ade them drink some of this sherbet some p art o f it b e poure d on their head ,

1
T he na me s of th e f our son s of Govi n d S i n gh ar e : J or av a r S in gh , F a t e S i n g h , J u
j h ar S i n gh an d

J i t S in gh .

The re c a n h ardly b e a n y d oubt th at this bloo dy h uma n s a crifi ce w as real ly o f e re d as a l l reports agree ,

o n thi s p o i t T h e S ikh s w h o felt ver y m uch t h e a troci ty o f such a ac t w o uld n eve r h ave a scr ibed a nythin g
n .
, n ,

o f th i s k i n d t o t h e i r G uru i f i t h a d n o t r eally ta k e
p la ce
, A t t h e s am e tim e w e m ay lea r n from thi s fa ct n . ,

th a t t h e B rah m an s ev e n a s l te a s th e sev en tee n th c en t ury d id n o t sc ru p l e t o o ff e r up a hum a n s acrifice

, a
, .

U 3 11 ?H ( S i dhi q an fi ) p uri fi e d s ug a r ; al so som e k i n d o f s w eetm ea t s m a d e o f it

n , .

The W 6 31 3 3 ( t h e prai se o f t h e T imel ess o n e) follow s i m m edl a tel y a ft er th e J apj i i n Gov i nd s ’

Gr a n t h I t comm ences w it h t h e w or d s
.

W W H3 3 1 UV
R
'
5%II T he protectio n of im eless divin e male
th e t i s t o us .

{ a a? i ‘3 % U 31 5
%II T h e p r o te ction o f al l iro n i s t o us .

m m i i 3% II T h e protectio n o f t h e A l l tim e is t o u
- s

m
.

m
i

i i af g nn U “ i II T h e prote c tio n o f t h e Al l iron is t o u

- s .

3
5 is a n old Hin d i D a tiv e A di x .
m m } t h e A l l -t im e ( t e co m prehe n ds
h e wh o all ti me) an d m
m
, . .

, th e A l l — iron ( i e . . h e w h o is al l iro n ) , are e pi th e t s fo r t h e S uprem e B ei n g .

 C
S K E T H O F TH E L F E O F T H E O T HE R S K H GU RU S I I . GO VIND S INGH .
xci

an d the rest be
spri nkled on their body ; then patting them w i th his h and h e cr ied w ith a loud
voice :
“
S ay the K h ii l sa of th e V ah Guru ! v ictory of to ) th e holy V ah Guru ! ” ( W m
m
,

m fi ffi 3" A fte r he h ad given th e P ah ul ‘ to these five in this m anner ,

he took it li kew ise f ro m th em an d in This w ay al l the re st of his d iscip le s w ere initiated to

, ,

w h om he g a ve th e n ame o f t h e l f ha l ati
'
ad din g to th e n ame o f e ach o f them th e epith et o f S i n h
'
a
, g
( lion) Then he g ave th e order th at w hoever d esire d to be his disciple h e must al w ays h ave
.
, ,

five thin gs w ith h im w hich al l commence w ith th e letter K akk a ( i a K ) v i z : the hair w hich . .
, .

must not be cut ) a eomh a hmf e ( m

, ) a swor d ( W ) an d br eac hes r eac h ing to the , ,

kn ee ( Fi g ) other w ise he w ould not consi d er him as his disciple

, In order to sep arate hi s S ikhs .

tot ally from th e Hind u s an d to f orm them into a distinct body w h ich as such should also be ,

kno w n by out ward signs h e issued m any other regul ations w hich are c al led E W I NT ( book
, ,

of con d uct ) A s he h ad perceive d th at th e H in d u

. s h ad become an e asy prey to t h e Muhammad an
,

inv aders by their division into c astes w hich nursed a r ancorous feelin g an d did not allo w the ,

low er ord er s to be ar arms he aboli sh ed th e c a ste al to gether in order to put al l on a f ooting of

, ,
,

e qu ality an d r eceived people of al l c astes into th e K h al s a

, But thi s off ended t h e pr ide an d .

prej udices o f the h igher c astes to such a degre e th at a great m any o f his disciples le f t him an d ,

w ould n o longer ackn o wledge h im as the i r Guru ; th e K hal sa consisted ther ef ore chiefly o f men
'

o f th e low er orders especially of Jats w here a s th e disciples wh o did not ackno w ledge the
, , ,

a uthority o f Guru Gav in d S ingh on account o f h i s i n ovati on s simply cal led themselves S ikh s , .
,

w ithout ad ding to their n am es th e ti tle o f S tap h? H e tr ied al so to i nf use h is o w n spirit into

th e Adi Gra nth w hich w as al re ady gener al ly r ec eiv ed as th e holy book o f th e S ikh community
‘

, ,

as h e slightingly rem arked th at the Adi Gr anth such a s it w as o n ly in stilled into the minds of , ,

th e S ikhs a spirit of meekness an d humbleness He therefore sent men to K artarpur w here th e .

,

o fficial volume signed by th e h and of Guru A rjun hi m self w as preserved to bri n g it t o him
, , , ,

in order to m ake additions t o it ; but the S odh i s to w hom th e volume w as e n truste d ref used , ,

t o give it a w ay as th ey did not acknow le d ge Gov in d S ingh as Guru ‘ They sent h i m w ord
, c .
,

th at he sh ould m ake a n ew Gr anth i f h e w as able t o d o so T his mess age incensed Gov in d S ingh
, . r ,

an d he resolved f orth w ith to m ake a Gr anth o f his o w n fo r his f ollo w ers w hich shoul d rouse their ,

mil itary vel o ur an d inflam e them to dee d s of courage He set t o w ork an d composed a big he avy .
,

Gra nth an d w hen it w as completed ( S a mb at 1 753 a n) he c al l ed it the Gr an th of the .

ten th r eign mm } 2 1 are) !

I

T h e P ah ul w as no n ew in ve n tio n o f Govind S in gh as f re que n tl y a sser ted b ut on l y t h e ren ova tion o f , ,

a n o l d S ikh ri te ( se e p xxxv n o t e w hic h i n t h ose t r o n b l o u

.
, s t i mes s eems t o h a ve falle n i n to d i suse H is .

obj ec t w as to p ut the S i kh c om m unity o n a n e w a n d fi r m er b a sis by a d min i ste rin g t h e P ah ul to all h i s di scipl es .

T h e sherbet d ru n k a t t h e ce remony o f t h e P bul th e S ik h s c a ll ( nect a r) e .

2
m t h e n a me o f t h e n ew S ik h commo n w ea l t h is d a1 1 vad from t h e A r a bic d l l}
, It s ig n ifies, e

on e s ow n p u
’
, r e p r op er t
y thence : t h e G ur us ( o r God s) o w n sp ec ia l p r op er ty Thi s IS t h e m ost a pp 1 o p 1 i a t e
‘
,
’ ’
, .

expla n a tio n i n spit e o f the S ikh s aying : m m

, erm fi i mi a n new new a1 fi n er sfir i i i? -

A mo n g th is l at ter clas s w ei a als o t h e N n ak p 6 t 1 a t h e d escendants o f B ab a Nan a k some o f w h o m

3
a , ,

v is i t ed me a t L aho re This cl ass o f S ikhs differ very li t tle fro m th e H in d u

. s as they are equally p a r t icul a r a s ,

t o c a s t e (especi al ly as r egards i n terma rriages) an d do n o t re fr ai n from smoking a s the Govind S in g h i s d o , .

A s far a s I could per ceive t he s t ric ter Si khs a r e n o w fa st d ecr ea sing i n n umb e r sin c e they n o lo n g er enjoy
, ,

an y p u blic privileges .

T hese S odhi s were th e W the d esc end ants o f Dhi r m all S ee p l xxxn note 2
,
- . .
, .

O n ly a sm all porti on of it w as c o mposed by Govi n d S ingh himself by fa r t h e g re a ter port io n o f it w as

5
,

m ad e up by his co urt poets T he id i om o f i t is t h e old er H in di but c o uc h ed i n very diffi cult a n d fr eque n tly
. ,

o b sc ure l an g ua g e .
x c 11
C I
S K E T H O F T HE L F E O F T H E O TH E R S K H GU RU S I . GO VIND S INGH .

Gov ind S ingh kne w very w ell th a t he could n o t a ccompl i sh

,
his schemes w ith an undisciplined

crow d ; his gre at a im w as therefore t o exercise h i s S ikhs in the use of arms W hen this point .

w as re a ched to some degree an oppor t unit y f o r trying

,
their v alour w as n o t long w anting though ,

th t m de upon ithout a c ause ccording to tradition

1
vind S ingh ssures u w w h i m w A
G o a s a ar as
O
a
,
.

t h e w ar broke o ut on a ccount of an eleph ant w hich the hil l R aj as dem anded f ro m Guru Govin d ,

S ingh an d w hich he ref used t o give up

,
The b ill Raj a s m arched w ith a considerable force on
.

A n an dpur an d some severe b attles w ere f ought in on e of w hich ne ar the to w n o f C amk au ,

r ,

the elde st sons o f Govind S ingh w ere kill ed ; but the Raj as w ere at l ast successively
'

(g m ) , t w o

repulsed an d compelled t o flee t o the hills When the Raj as perceived th at they could effect . ,

nothing ag ainst Govind S ingh they addressed the E mperor an d asked for assistance w hi ch was
, ,

re adi ly gr anted In union w ith the Imperial troops they again a ttacked A n andpur an d besieged it
.
.

W hen Govi nd S ingh saw the d anger o f his position he le ft h is troops there an d fled w ith those five ,

S ikhs ( w hose n ames h ave been m entioned above ) an d h i s t w o youngest sons t o the tow n of
Maéh av ar a ( W ) w here he conce aled himself f or some time in the ho u
,
se o f a S ikh W hen .

the Imperi al tr dop s f ollo w ed him also there he m an aged his escape w ith those five S ikhs by ,

di sguis in g himsel f an d putting on the d r ess o f a Mus alm an an d re ached s afely Malv a ; but his ,

t w o sons he w as compell ed t o le ave behind at th at place They w ere betrayed into the hands .

of t h e Imperi al tr 0 0 ps w h o brought them t o S irhin d ( in P an j abi

,
V az i r K h an the ,

Governor o f S irhin d inf orm ed the E mperor A ur ang z é b o f it an d a sked f o r orders reg arding the m
,
-
,
.

H e w as ordered to put them t o de a th H e put the poor children under the f oundation o f a wall
.
,

closed the pl ace up an d bu ri ed them thus alive It is s aid th at the w eeping o f the children .

w as he ard fo r some d ays .

The Gur u w as me antime pursued by t h e Imper ial f orces but as they could f ollo w him i n ,

the s andy deserts only slo w ly o w ing to t h e w ant of w ater an d provisions he f oun d time to col lect
, ,

ag ain a body o f S ikhs round his person Wh en the troops a t l ast c ame up w ith him an d brought
.

him to action at a pl ace c alled aft erw ards Mukt sar ( O he w as de fe ated w ith his small -
“

band ; but as th e Imperi alists w ere under the impression th at the Guru h ad been slain they ,

d e si sted f rom f ur ther persecutio n as they w ere ne arly dyi n g of thirst

, Thus Govind S ingh .
2

f ound some rest ; he built on the b attle fi el d a l arge t ank w h ich h e c all ed -
W ( the tank of ,

em ancip at ion ) as he a sserte d th at m any h ad th ere been em an cipated H e settled in a village

, .

of Mak e an d rem ained pe acef ul o n ly ben t o n m aking disciples in w hich he i s s aid t o have
, ,

been ve r y succe ss ful H e built there a l arge residence f or h imself w h ich h e c alled Damdamd
.
3
,

(m ) This pl ace bec ame the Ben ares o f t h e S ikhs a n d m any resort thither as a residence
.
, ,

at D amd am a i s considered a very meritorious ac t A saying o f Govind S in gh is cu r rent among .

t h e S ikhs th at w hoever w ould d w ell at D am dam a h e w ould become w ise be he ever so great
, , ,

a f ool T h e study o f t h e Gr anth is much in vogue there an d the Gurmukhi w r iters o f Damdama
.

ar e consi d ere d th e best .

V idit rt v 28 5 : {EU U B1 In ! afi n; m

n a ak , . I t i s very r e m ar k a ble th a t Govin d S ingh p as ses
“
.
,

h ere in co m plet e silence t h e rea son o r re a so n w hic h l ed to the se san guin a ry conflic t s w i t h t h e hil l Raj as
, s, ,

w h i c h h e de sc r ib es i n su c h gl o w i g colo urs i f h e d o es n o t t o o muc h exa gg er a te t h e importan ce o f t hese

( n

fi gh t s w h i c h i s by n o m ea s c e r t a i )
, n n .

2
T h i s fi ght i s r ec o r ded i n S ak h i 53 ( A t t a r S ingh s ed ition) Ther e it i s stat e d t h at forty S ikhs fell an d
’
.
,

ob tai n d t h e crow n o f m arty rd om a n d th a t 250 M uh amma d an s w ere killed I t i s O penly concede d th at t h e

e .
,

Im p e r ial fo rc es re m ai ed m a st er s o f t h e b a t tl e fi el d D urin g th e fig h t th e Gur uh a d re t ir ed to a hill ock a nd

n -
.

a ft er t h e de p r t u e o f t h e M u
a r h a m m ad a n s h e c am e d o w n from th a t hil lock t o t h e ba ttle fi el d an d wiped th e -

fa ce s o f h is w ou d d fo l lo w r s n e e .

I t i s sai d t h a t Gov i n d g a ine d di scip l es

3
.
xciv C
S K E T H O F TH E L F E O F T H E O T HE R S K H GU RU S I I . GO VIN D S IN GH .

A f ter Gov ind S ingh settled his aff airs at home h e m arched fo r the Dekhan w here he
h ad , ,

h ad been appointed to the comm and of five thous and horse l

O n th e m arch there he fell in .

w ith a P ath an w h o w as the g r andso n o f th a t P ai ndah K h an w ith w hom Guru H ar gov ind h ad
- -

f ought The Guru sho w ed t o this m an gre at aff ection an d engaged him in hi s servi ce an d took
. ,

h i m w ith him O n e d ay th e Guru beg a n to mock at him ; w hen he perceived th at the P ath an
.
"
2

p aid n o heed t o h is taunts he beg an t o put him to sh ame s aying : I f the son ( an d) , ,
“

grandson w hose father ( an d ) grandf ather h ave been killed by s o mebody goes t o him in order to
,
,

”
get his subsistence f rom h i m say w h a t sh ameless m an must he be ? The P athan ans wered :
, ,

“
I f a m an rem ains w ith the enemy of hi s f ather ( an d ) g r andf ather an d gets his subsistence from
h i m he must be a very sh ameless nose cut person
,
The Guru cont inued : I f a P at han rem ain ,
-
.
” “

”
w i t h t h e enemy o f his f ather ( an d ) gr and f ther w h at dost thou consider him ? H e answ ered a ,

“ I do n ot c on sider him a P ath an but a w eav er ”

The Guru s aid f urther : I f thou w oul dst ,
.
a “

meet wi th the enemy o f th y father ( an d ) grandfather an d a w e apon w ould be in thy hand say , ,
.

”
w h at wo uldst thou do ? H e answ ered : I w ould not let h i m l ive The P athan w on dered
” “ .

w h y the Guru asked hi m such th ings an d reflected on it He recollected th a t Govi nd S ingh was .

d escended from H ar Govind w ith w hom the b attle o f K artarpur w as fought ; he f elt a sh amed in
-
,

his mind an d resolved t o t ake h i s revenge at a given opport unity O n e d ay a S ikh brought to .

th e Guru f rom abroad a very be autif ul d agger The Guru seeing its brightness an d its edge was .

much ple ased w ith it an d kept it alw ays w ith him O n e d ay he a sked the P ath an by h ow .

m any thrusts o f this d agger a m an might be killed ? He ans w ered th at on e thrust of it was
o

enough The Guru w ent on t o say : Well if h e by w hom t h y father an d grand father m ay
.
“
, ,

h ave been kil led w ould come be fore thee an d this d agger w ere in thy h and w h at w o uldst thou
, ,

d o wi th him ? The P athan on he aring this got ve r y ang ry i n his he art but coul d say nothing
”
, .

S hor t ly after the Guru f ell asleep an d all his door keepers w ent t o their o w n tent The P athan - .
,

w h o h ad rem ained sitti ng ne ar him took gently the d agger o ut o f the h and o f the Guru an d ,

thrust it i nto his belly When he thought th a t he w as de ad h e rose an d fled The Guru wh o
.
,
.
,

w as n ot de ad on seeing the w ounds o f the d agger cried out :

, 0 brother S ikhs I am dead ! ” ,
“
,

A l l the S ikhs assembled together an d ru n ning in the f our directions they sei z ed th a t P ath a n an d '

brought him b ack t o the Guru It i s s aid th at the Guru pr aised the bravery of the P athan an d .
,

set him free telling the S ikhs w h o w ere overcome by grief on seeing the w ounds o f the Guru
, , ,

th at they sho ul d n ot be sorro w ful for this w as ordered so by the L o rd ; the P ath an h ad not ,

struck him ( tre acherously ) but he h ad himself provoked him to kill h i m by putti ng him to shame ‘
,
.

T h e S ikhs loa th t o co n c e d e this ap p o in t m en t o f Govi n d S in gh I n t h e S ikh ad é r aj di v itbia

a re n o w .

i t i s o n ly s a id : f 2? fin s 5 % ffi m 3 31 Q as W T: one d ay Govind S i n gh w ent on a

’

jo urney to t h e sou th Govin d S i gh c a n have b een only a sh o rt time i n the D ekhan o t h ers exte n d h is s tay
n

u
.
,

t here T h e chro olog y o f t h e se e v e n t s re quire s a c ar ef ul re sea rc h w hich c a o n ly be c a rried o t at t h e

. n
, n

h a d s o f mor e t r ust w or thy m a t er i a ls w hi c h h a ve s y et t o be s e a r ch ed fo r

n , a .

T here i s a S i kh i in t h e S i kh i B oo k of t h e d esc r ip t io n of Gur u Go t/in d S in h s r el i ion a n d d oc t r i n e

2 “ ’
t
g g ,

t r a sl a ted in t o E glish by S i rd ar A t t a r S in g h ch ief o f B h a d o o r B en ares

n n
( p ri n te d a t t h e Medica l Hall P ress)
, , ,

I8 73 w h ich g i ves som e m ore d t ails a bout t h e s t ory i que s t ion see sakh i 98 I t i s stated th ere
,
( e
p l 98 n
, . ,

th a t th e grand son o f P ain d ah K han sal uted t h e Guru in a D a r b ar hel d b y h im h avin g been sen t by h is mother , ,

w h o co n s id e r ed t h e Gur u a s a prop h et T h e G uru p r es en te d h im w ith fi ve gol d M n b a r s a n d ord ered h im t o

.

come e v e ry d ay t o h is h o use to pla y w i th h i m a t ches s F o r t h is servic e h e received fiv e Rupees p er diem

o o o o
. .

The m
3
o r w ea ver l s co n s i d ere d 1 n In d i a a co w a r d
, , .

4
C unni n gh am gi v es a somew h a t d iffe r e t s t or y p 79 follo w i n g MacG re o r i n t his point v o l i p
g
n
( , .
, . . .

M alcolm w h o is h e re ve ry brie f s eems t o h ave h a d t h e s ame t r ad i t i o n b efo re h i m w h ic h w e h a ve given more

, ,
,

in d e t ail follo w i n g t h e S ikh i d é r aj d i v it h ia p 76 sqq In th is book h o we v e r a gre at chronolog ic a l blunder

, , . .
 C
S K E T H O F THE L IF E O F T HE O T HE R S I K H GU RU S . GO VIND S INGH .
xc v

The w oun ds w ere up an d he aled ag ain but it seems that th e Guru w as bent on dyi ng
se w n
, ,

One day h e bent his bow :wi th gre at f orce an d by so doing the stitches of th e w ounds w ere
broken an d the blood began to flow The surgeon bound up his w ounds again but the Guru
.
,

obtained no r est He mounted a P alki 9nd travelled tow ar d s the south W hen he h ad arr ived at
. .

a to w n n am ed Nad er th e Guru became gre atly exh austed by hi s w ounds H e s aid t o .

his S ikh s th at he saw that h e w ould not live an y longer they should th erefore stop in thi s
, ,

pl ac e When t hey w ere st aying there f or some d ays an d his p ain w as not reli eved h e s ai d to
.
,

his d isciples th at they should give some alms as medi c ines w ere no more of an y use t o him
, , .

The S ikhs brought together a gre at qu antity of f ood of various kinds an d fe asted Brahm ans an d
S ai nts an d distr ibuted in alms orn aments an d clothes The Guru felt th at his dissolution w as .

ne ar at h and an d ordered his S ikhs to keep re ady w ood ( for crem ation ) an d a shroud Having
, .

done so they al l j oined their hands an d asked : 0 true Guru whom w ill you se at for the s ake “
, ,

of our w el fare on the throne o the Guruship ?

f He ans w ered : “ As the nine K ings before
”
,

m e w ere at the time of their de ath sea ti ng another Guru on th eir throne so sh al l I n o w not ,

d o ; I h ave entrusted the w hole society ( of th e di sciples ) to the bosom of the timeless divine ,

m ale Aft er me you sh all every w here mind the book of th e Granth s ahib as your Guru ; w ha tever
. -

y o u sh al l ask it it w ill show to you

, Wh oever be my disciple b ; sh all consider the Gr anth as
.
,

the f orm o f the Guru and w hi chever disciple w ishes to h ave an interview w ith me he sh all
, ,

m ke o r one Rupee
a f an d a qu r er or
a t f o r as much as he is able K arah parsad ; then opening the
,
2
,
'

book an d bo w ing h is he ad he wi ll obtain a rew a rd equ al to an intervie w w ith m e ”

H avi n g given .

th em some other dir ections the Gur u soon af ter bec ame se n seless Me antime th e di scipl es h eaped .

up a pyr e o f s and al w ood an d kept every oth er thing re ady

- One hour be fore h e expired h e .

s aid t o the disciples : “ B athe me an d put on me n ew clothes an d give me all my w e apons ; w hen
'

my bre ath dep arts do not t ake off these clothes but burn me w ith them an d w ith all my
, ,

w ae pons ! ” 3
He then sat himsel f do w n upon the f uneral pyre an d h aving meditated o n the ,

S uprem e L ord b e uttered w ith his mouth an d with lo ve the fol lo wing S av aiy a
,

S ince I se iz ed thy feet I brought nothing else under ( my ) eye

,
.

0 mercif ul Ram, the P ur an as an d the Qur an te ach v ar ious systems I did not mind o n e
’
,

( o f them ) .

The S m r iti the S h astra s an d th e V edas al l teach m any modific ations I did not recogniz e
, , ,

one ( of them ) .

0 disp oser o f h appiness besto w mercy ( on me ) ! I di d not say I al l I recogni ed

” ”
,
“
z as Thee ,
.

is commi tted i t bein g stated that N adir S h ah se n t h i s o w n ph ysician fro m Dilli t o look af ter the w oun d s o f
, ,

Govi n d S ingh . N adir S h ah inv aded I n dia i n 1 738 w herea s G ovind S in gh died in 1 708 , I n t h e S ak hi quot ed .

i t i s sta te d t h a t L akh a S in gh r a n a fter the bo y a n d c ut o ff h i s hea d

,
.

N a d er i s a t o w n in t h e valley o f t h e Go d av er y .

m up m ( a kin d o f s w eet m e at m ad e o f flour gh i a n d sugar) t o a

'

33 TH th e o fler in
g
, o f , ,

h oly pe r son ( a s fo r instance the Gu

,
ru) an d t hen d istributin g i t amon g th e w orsh ippers
, ,
.

3
This is confirmed by t h e S akh i quoted : see p 20 1 . .

The origin al is ( S ikh i d e r 55di v i th itt p 8 1 )

‘

, .

fi fip m éz
‘

aai an az fi on fis x m l

k as sfi u
eufi u
’

fimm safi
'

z
fi tn aa fi x sn

m S ansk .
M , be wh o hold s happiness i n h is h ands , an epithet of V ishnu .
 C
S K E T H O F T HE L I F E O F T H E O T HE R S IK H GU RU S . GO VIND S INGH .

H avi n g utt eredthese verses he closed his eyes an d expired 1 708 All the S ikhs an d s aints .
,

w h o f rom m an y p arts w ere assembl ed there r aised the shout of Jaik ar ( Victory ! ) an d s ang a
,

be auti ful song an d the eyes o f m any people w ere fil l ed w ith te ars on account o f the sep ar ation of
the Guru Be autiful edifices w ere erected there an d in the midst o f them all the shrin e of th e
.
,

Guru an d round this some Dh a rm s al as in w hich the Gr anth s ahib w as deposited

,
-
,
To the town
-
.

of Nader they g ave the n ame of A b E 2al n ag ar 1

T h ey put up m any s w ords shields sp ears an d
'
-
.
, ,

steel di scuses in th at sh rine an d the S ikh people w h o go there o n pilgri m age w orship those
, , ,

W e apons as they believe th at they belonged to Guru Govind S ingh

, .

The object o f his l ife Govi nd S in gh coul d not c arr y o ut though he tried to secure it even
,

by a hum an s acrifi ce an d he died broken he arted an d w e ary o f lif e far from th e scenes of h is
,
-

exploits ; but he h as contributed a good sh are to the destruction of the Muhamm adan pow er in
Indi a by his bloo dy struggles inuring his S ikhs to a continu al w arfare an d moulding them by his
, ,

n ew ordin ances i nto a distinct n ation of fan atic al sol diers the K hals a A body contai ning such
, .

elements coul d not rem ain quiet ; the ir course w as prescribed to them an d they h ad indeed ,

no o th er choi ce but to conquer or t o be conquered We need there fore not w onder that the.

S ikhs though repe ate dly repul sed soon succeeded in erecting their o w n s way on the ruins of th e
, ,

decli ning Muhammadan E mpire .

m m , m
th e i m ov a ble c i ty ; mm rufa a a S ansk W
-
, . M ac Gr ego r ( vol i p 1 01)
. . . .

sta tes tha t t h e S ikh s c al l it A p h ul l an ugg u a str a n ge mi st ra n sc r ip tion ; C un ning h am His t ory o f t h e S ikhs
r,
, ,

p 394 w rite s it similar ly U p c h ul l un n gg ur

.
, .
xcviii C
S K E T H O F T HE RE L I G O N O F T HE S K H S I I .

mind w as alre ady more or less famili ari z ed w ith this ide a it h aving been asserted long before , .

N an ak by most of the H ind u philosophic al systems an d popul ariz e d by the Bh agat s especi ally ,

th e ingenious K abi r .

Th at th e S upreme is O ne an d th at there is no 0 ther is frequently inculc ated .

,
.
Thus s ays Nanak

Wh om sh all I call the second ? there is none .

1
In al l is th at O n e S potless on e the S upreme ) .

Th at on this point there is f ul l concord betw een H indus an d Musal man s, is openly conceded .

Nan ak s ays
o f H ind us an d Musal m an s) , ” 3
K now , that there ar e t w o w ays (i . e . but only one L ord .

Th e s ame is al so conceded w ith re ference t o the H ind usects those d ays of , w hich , though we aring
di fferent g arbs acknow l edge the O n e S upreme
,
. N an ak s ays o f them :

There are six houses six Gurus six ( methods of instruc ti on , ,

.

The Guru of the Gurus is O n e the garbs m an y ,

.
” 3

This S upreme Being is ( according to the nomencl ature o f the Vaishn ava sect to w hich ne arly all ,

the Bhagate belonged ) c alled by di fi eren t n ames such as : B r ah m the S up r eme B r ahm P a/r ameeur ’

, , ,

( the S upreme L ord ) an d especi ally H ar e, R u

'

m Govz n d , , .

Thi s Being is al one re ally existing ( FIB or uncre ated ( W ) endless (m ) timeless , ,

( W 1 35) etern al ( IQ
,
it contains in itsel f al l qu alities an d is at the s ame time without
qu ali ties ‘ It is theref ore in accessible ( ma m m 3 ) invisible incomprehensi ble ( even to the
. , , ,

gods ) an d indescrib abl e qu alities w hich ar e frequently d welt upon i n the Granth
—
.
5

It is t h e ground or root ( J o f al l thing s the source f rom w h ich al l h a ve sprun g the p ri mary
“

, , ,

c ause (3 1 m ) ; in this sense it i s c alled the c r ea tor (3 3 3 1 o r B ut w e must n ot mis

'

understand this appell ation fo r no cre ation out of nothing is thereby intended W hen the A bsolute
, .

Be ing is styled the cre ator the exp an si on of the s ame into a p l ur al i ty of f or ms is thereby meant ;
,

cre ation is therefore in some pl aces pl ainly c alled 1 41 1 13 1 exp ansion A rj un s ays ( Transl p 4 00 6) , . . .
,
“
H e himsel f is O n e an d he hi m self i s m any ; an d p 5: F rom th a t L ord all the creation .
“

( h as sprung) If it ple ases him he m akes an exp ansion

. I f it ple ases him he is of one form , .
,

I Gauri M a h
, . A stp V . .
, P a use ( T r ansl p . . 3 20 )

wfi r i s {m
n

a3 11

O t h er p a ssa ge s , see Tran s] p . . 1 7, vv . 5; 2 ; p . 4 14 , 8 .

Gauri , Ma h ( T r a n sl p
2
. A stp V . .
, 8 . .

\
m it ? was m ar 11
K

23
S ee a lso T rans] p . . 4 82, 5 .

Ass Mah ( Tra n sl p

3
, . S a h d x xx , 1 . .

Mah V ( Tr ansl p
4
. .
, X X L, 3 . . 1 43 )

3 fi rms I ren a m: 2 1 3 1 11
S ee a s l o T ra n s] . p . 4 1 6 , X X L , S l ok .

5
S oc T ra n s] p . . U L , P aur i ; p 457, X X . .
, P a ur i ; p . 4 93 , I .
, l , 2 .
 C
S K E T H O F T H E RE L I GI O N O F T H E S I K H S .
xcix

very where an d i n
E al l things an d beings the O ne is d iff used ,
he is filling al l pl aces .

Thus s ays Nam dé v ( Transl p . . 6 6 5, 4)

H ere
is B i th a] there is Bi th al, , w ithout Bi th al the w orld i s n o t .

In eve r y pl ace s ay s Nam a in , ,

ah thou art f ully cont aine d ” .
2

Y ea the whole universe an d al l things therein ar e identified w ith the S upreme . Nam d é v says
( T ransl p 66 5 P ause 2 )
. .
, ,

A llis G6 v in d al l is Gav in d w ithout G6 V i n d there is no other

, ,
. .

A s in one string there are seven thous and be ads ( so ) is th a t L ord length w ise an d cross w ise , .

A w ave o f w ater f roth an d b ubble do not become sep ar ate f rom the w ater
, .

This w orld is the sport of the S upreme Brahm pl aying about he does n ot become another ” , .
3

Al l the finite cre ated be ing s ha ve there fore no sep arate existen ce ap art from the A bsolute they ,

a re only its v arious f orms an d appe arances its frol ics N anak s ays ( Transl p 3 29 X VI In “
.
, . .
,
.
,

al l living cre atures the O n e sports ( p 652 X X I V S 161: By himsel f the vessels
”
an d
“
, .
, ,
.

ar e f ormed he himself also fill s th em ” A l l cre ature s are th ere f ore al ike w ith the only di ff erence
, .

th at the A bsolute b e co mes self conscious in m an K abi r s ays ( Transl p 6 8 2 20 4 )

-
. . .
,

K ab i r
in s aying : thou thou become thou I h as not rem ained in me
” ” ”
“
, h as “
,
“
.

W hen my o w n sel f ( w hich i s) another s h as b ee n efi ac ed ( then ) w here I look th ere

‘
’
, , , ,

( ar t )
It is o wing to the M ay a ( decepti on ) w hich th e A bsolute h as spre ad out over the w hole universe
, ,

that the cre atures are led t o consider themsel ves as individu al beings di stinct f rom the S upre m e , ,

a n d f al l thereby into t h e error of eg ot i sm the ide a of in divid u

al e x istence ) an d d u
.

al i ty .

Nanak s ays ( Japfi 2 7 Trans] p , By w hom a May a o f v arious colours kinds an d sorts i s
,
. .
“
, ,

produced ” An d K abi r s ays ( Transl p 1 27)

. . .

One is w onderful he ar 0 Ban dit ! n ow nothing c an be s aid ;

, ,
.

By w hom the Gods Ganas an d Gandharv as are deluded ( by w hom )

, , a. rope is applied to the
three w orlds ” .

1
The orig inal is

fi a qa § m 3 6 3 ufi lr

SW 3 1%3 1
'

Wa s n
S imila r is t h e expressio n , Gauri , S ukh m an i S 16 1: ( T ra nsl . p . 4 18 )

m t it m m 25 11 are fi n e ra n
-

Thez e ar e a g re at m a ny p ass ag es o f t his k i n d in the Granth ; comp a re T r a n s] p

2
. . 1 33 ,

T h e s ame i dea i s also bold ly expressed by R e vidas (T rans l p 1 30 I ) a

3
. . .
,

m l wfi n at s fi ms a fim
‘ o

m ates a s 3 331 $11 11 11

etw een th ee an d me m e an d t h ee wh at is t h e diff erence ?
“B
, ,

L ik e gold an d the br a celet ( m a de o f i t ) li k e wa ter a n d a w ave -

, .

We n ow pre fer this renderin g o f t h e first lin e 0f also T ra n s] p 1 16 V ] 1 P auri

. . . . .
, .
, .

4
Th e origin al is
wh j j m g qq nfi r m x j n

m m m us m fi rfz n fi zm ws m ss i u
 C
S K E T H O F T HE RE L G O N O F T HE S K H S I I I .

(RE ) the bsolute Being w hich is

‘
The w orld i s th ere fore in fact nothi ng but a p l ay or A sp or t 0f ,

expandi ng or contracting itself as it ple ases ; H ari establishes an d dis est ablish es v i v ifi es an d destroys
, ,

ad libi tum An i n fini te number of w orlds i s stated to be produced by him w hich li ke a plaything
. , , ,

appe ar an d dis appe ar Thus s ays Ram di s .

-

“ By thyself all the cre ation is produced by thysel f h aving cre ated the , , , w hole is caused
t o dis appe ar 3

No teleologic al prin ciple w h atever is assign ed for th e production or destruction o f the cre ated beings ;
they ar e cosmogonic r evolutions w hi ch could not be accounted for an d w ere there fore re ferred to a ,

sporting propensity o f th e A bsolu te We n eed h ardly rem ark th at thi s w hole definition an d . ,

d escription o f th e S upr em e is altogether p an tfi ei sti e The Hin d uw ay o f thinking comprehends in .

the A bsol ute both sp i r i t an d mat ter as the cre ation of m aterial bod i es out of nothing is totally ,

incompr ehensible to t h e Hind umind ; to h i m the m ateri al essence is there fore c c etern al w ith the -

spirit T h e m att er p ut in the A bsolute is ho w ev er n o t t h e gros s sensible m atter ( f a m ,

fawn ) but purely a to mi c

, w hich by the exp ansion o f the A bsolute receives t h e
”

gross er sensible for m by the conjuncti on o f infinite atoms Go d is th ere fore th e absolute vital
,
.

substance the al l fi ll i n g w orl d soul ( W

,
-
) as h e i s frequ ently c alled -
,
.

We c an distinguish in the Granth a grosser an d a finer kind of P antheism

-
T h e grosser .

P a ntheism identifies all things w ith the A bsol ute the u n iverse in its v arious f orms being considered ,

the exp ansion o f i t ; the fi ner P anth eism on the other h and distinguishes bet w een the A bsolute
3

an d the finite bei n gs an d borders f reque n tl y on Theis m Though God is producing all things out .

o f himsel f an d i s fi l ling all yet he rem ains di stin c t f r om tli e creatu

r es and is not cont amin ated by
,

the M ay a; as a lotus in a pond of w ater rem ain s distinct from the w ater surrounding it The .

1
S ee : T r a n s] p . . 1 7, 2 .

T h e o rig i n al is P ur k h u, Mah Tra n s] p

2
. 1V .
, 5, . . 1 7)

um fi fnfz ua e m ui r fi mi fi fm fi m g i ré r u ‘
‘ '

s sn
A s t o t h e i n n um e r a bil i t y of th e w o r ld s , see T r a n s] . p . 6, v 1 9 ; p 3 97
. 7 w he e A j u s ys :.
, v .
, r r n a “
Man y i
t m es
th e e x p a se o f th e w o ld w a s sp re a d O t M a y e ro r es o o
n r an n n . n
( f w rld s) o f m y k i d s w e re m ade . F ro m th e
L o r d t h ey em a ate d a d i t h e L o r d they ar e a b sorb ed
n n n .
”

3
T h i s k i n d o f P a n t h ei sm w hich a cco r din g t o t h e expres sio n s us ed bo r d e r s occasio n ally o n
, , , Ma teri alism,
i s chiefly r epresen t ed by t h e B h a a t s N ad V an d R av i d as S ee p xc ix n o t e 3
g . .
, .

4
K abi r s ays ( Tra n sl p 4 74 L IL 2) . .
, ,

b o dy t h e un iverse i s h e i s n o t in it t h e crea to r i s n o t i n it
“ \
Vh o se , ,

W h o i s p utt in g ( t h e th in gs) tog ether h e i s alw ays aloof fr om the m , .

A n d A rj un s ays ( Tr a n sl p 1 4 8 X X X V . .
, .
,

I n eve ry body h e d w ells n ea r .

T h e d o n or o f t h e livi n g bei n g s i s a l w ays distinct from th em ”

( )
Of l o T r a n s] p
a s 3 w i th n ote 2 I n or d e r t o un d rsta n d t h e w o r ds o f K abi r a n d A r un m ore
j e
. . .
, .

f ully w e m ust co m p a r e w h at i s s a id o f t h e S u re m e B ei n i n t h e B h a a a d g i t a Ch ap X
,
p g g 1 1 1 S h l é k 1 4 sqq v -
, . .
,
.

It i s exi s t in g both a p a r t fr om a d w i t h in exis t in th i n s i t i s a n im a te an d al so i n a n i ate

g g m n
, .

I t c an n o t be r ecog n iz ed o n a cco un t o f i t s sub t il ty a n d it ex i s t s b o t h fa r n d n e r

a a , .

N n t d i s t ributed a m on g bei n gs a n d yet existi n as i f d istributed ”

g .

A n d in C ha p x i i i su m 1 2 it is s a id
.
, ,

I t isc all d th e S up r e me B r ah m w i thout begi n n i n g

e
, , ne ith e r isten t n o r n o n exi stent
ex - .

s en t his li n e i s th a t it h s a n d h as n o t a re al existen c e t h at i t i s S pi rit a n d m a t ter

T he se o f , a i . e
, . .
 cii SK E TC H o r T HE RE L I G I O N or T HE S IK H S .

a P antheism , der ived directly from Hin du sources an d onl y outw ardly adapted to the forms of ,

the Isl am Hi nd uan d Musli m P antheists could w ell unite together as they entertained essentially
. ,

the s ame ide as about the S upreme ; the H ind u myth ology w as n o t pressed on the Musal m ans l
,

as the Hi nd uphilosophers themselves l aid n o p articul ar stress upon i t

— the belie f in the minor gods
,

the transient m anifest ations of the S upreme being w i th them a m atter o f choice O n these grounds ,
.

tolerance between Hind u s an d T urks is o ften advoc ated in th e Granth an d intolerance on the part
of the Turk s rebuked
2
.

O ur next questi on is : Wha t i s t he r el at ion of man t o the S u p r eme ? .

The hum an soul is represented as being light ( $rf3 ) f rom light a sc in til l a uminae dioinae , ,

w hich h as em an ated from the A bsolute an d i s by itself i mmor ta l

3
.

A ccording to t h e popul ar belief of the H ind u s w hich is occ asion ally alluded to in th e Granth , ,

f our L akhs of souls h ave on ce fo r al l em ana ted f ro m the f ountain of light their number neither ,

incre asing n or decre asing ‘ Th e hum an souls form only a sm all part o f the cre ation which i s
.
.
,

li mited to eighty four L akhs o f forms of existence v i z : nine L akh s o f a qu atic anim als (away )
-
, .
'
,

seventeen L akhs of im movable cre atures ( 1411 13 1 3 3 a mt such as trees eleven L akhs , ,

of creeping a nim als “ 33 31 t en L akhs o f fe athered a nim als (W 3 ) t w enty three Lakh s of
:
,
-

quadrupeds (at n fg n-n) an d f our L akh s of men ( 3 5 H)

' '

, .

It is t h e ai m an d obj ect of the ind ividu al soul as a divi ne sp ark to be reunited with the
f ountain of li ght f ro m w hich it h as em an ated an d t o be r e absorbed in it
, A s long as it h as n ot ,
-
.

re ached this go al , it i s unh appy being sep arated f ro m i t s source the S upreme Wh y the soul
, , .

h as em an ated a n d w h at fo r is n o w here st a t ed in the Granth w e must theref ore look also on th is

,

process as a sp ort of the A bsolute (aw) B ut the return of the individu al soul t o th e eternal fountain .

o f light is c u t o ff in consequence o f w orks pra ctised w hilst in t h e body an d by its impur ity , ,

contracted by second love (Ij l l or du ality w hich subject the soul to

‘’

metempsychosis th e coming an d going

,

Th is le ads us t o the question : i f the individua l soul is light h ow did it happen th at it fell , ,

into i mp ur i ty or sin ?
T h at the w orld is actu ally under t h e dominion of sin Nan ak could an d w ould not deny ; he ,

decl ared h i msel f th at the object o f his mission w as t o sho w to m ankind th e w ay by which it
, , ,

could be s ave d from this state o f misery .

A ccording t o th e p an theistic premises as st ated above sin ca nnot be the free deli berate ac t , ,
.

K a bi r s ays ( R ag Asa , X ML , 4, T r a ns] . p . 657)

2
S ee a p ass ag e of th is kind in Rag Asa K a bi r
, VIII .
, 2 ( T r an sl p . . w h er e h e w itti n gly s ays

fi sm fifi r m afi m w mfi m h u
A rjun ys r Mah V dX ( T r a n sl p
3
sa , S i i Rag, . .
, S ah IV .
, l . .

m a m tfi
q fs z fi m sfi m m fi m fi x n
m am afa mfi mn ni s fi fi fi m ns u
C omp are w i th t h is w h at t h e B h ag a v a d - gi t a s a ys, C hap X V . .
, S h l ek 7
m
Wha } S il e si a ensign: Hau n t: I
—
an : s ewn { m nu tri ents a fifa m It
.

An eternal port ion o f m e o n ly h avi n g b ecome e n do wed w ith l i fe i n t h e w orld of li fe a ttracts

, the min d and
t h e fi v e s en ses w hich belo ng t o n atu r e
, .
 C
S K E T H O F THE RE L I GI O N O F T HE S IK H S .
ciii

of m an ;it must h av e on t h e contrary its origin in the A bsolute Being itsel f as al l cre atures are ,

s aid to be subj ect to an absol ute destiny (3 E1 3 1 31 firs This is plainl y taught in th e Granth , , .

Re vid as says ( Tr ansl p 6 66

‘

3) . .
,

h A s f ar as living
th ey are subj ect to destiny c r ea i r e s ar e, .

On the forehe a d of every m an h is lot is w ritten fr om the beginning w hich c annot be e ffaced , ,

though one try to do so Nan ak say I ( Gauri Mah . S ah d X l Transl p 21 7 ) , . .

, , .
,
.

The lot h as fallen none efi ac es it ,

‘
.

Wh at do I kno w wh at w ill h appen in future ,

Wh at h as ple ased him th at h as come to p a ss ,

.

None oth er is acting ( but 1

Th ere are con sequently numbers of p ass a ges in the Granth w hich pointedly deny th e l iber um
ar bi tr ium in m an ; m an comes an d goes a ccordin g t o the ple asure of H ari ; he acts spe aks etc , ,
.

as he i I c aused to do A rj u n s ays ( Tr ansl p 3 9 8 s 5)

‘

. . .
.
,

The po w er of this one is not in this one s hand ’

.

The c ause of c auses is the Lord o f al l .

The cre ature is helpless an d must obey .

W ah t ple ases t o th a t one th a t w ill be ”

, .

Very pointed is the expression of Arj un ( Transl p 3 9 9 X L tha t m an like a mimic sho w s m any . .
, ,

appe arances an d th a t the L ord m akes him d ance a s it ple ases him
,
Man is n aturally impelled .

to ac tidn s by the three qual ities w h ich penetr ate every cre ated bei ng even th e gods them ,

selves . These thre e qu alities ar e th e 31% (W th e qu ality of goodness ) the 3 % (

m the , , ,

qu ality of p assion ) an d the 3 % (m the qu ality of d arkness ) ; they are inn ate in every body but
, ,

not in equipoise the one or the other being predominant The actions o f al l men are conse quently
,
.

determined by the qu al ity th at h as a ruling influence on them .

t h i I must be added th at the S upreme h as spre a d the May a ( decep tion ) over the w hole universe
«To , ,

th e gods not excepted by w h ich t h e cre ated bein gs ar e deluded into egotism an d du al ity
, Th e .
z

w ise an d th e f ool th e good an d the bad are t here fore alike they c annot be con sidered responsible
, , ,

for w h at they thin k say or d o as they ar e a cting un der influences an d impulses which are n o t
, ,

un der their control This is n ow an d then keenly felt and ackno wledged Thus A rj un ( T ransl
.
3
.
.

p 4 1 8 v 7) asks
.
, .

When by h imsel f the f orm of the w orld is cre ated ,

A n d l aid out in the three qu aliti es :

Then r eligious demerit an d merit wh at is it ? ,

The o rigin al is
fi ufi mr m fi i dfia l
ss

m um m mfi bf z n

mes a 3 38 3 m m
-
“
The B rahman T r il eba n
s ays ( see T r ansl p
a
. .

m fiz n n 353 1 3 3 % 251 61 m mara fu fi m a rtian 11

‘

A m ar di s s ays pla inly :

-

fi n: nrrii 3m g 31 fi t? as i n ? I
a t e: m 5
1 26 ! 7; m i? ll
g
S ee T r ansl p 154 .3 F olly an d er ro r produced in m an by t h e Maya is dire c tly a
.
, . scribed to a divin e
, ,

c ausal ity S ee Transl p 1 26 K abir P ause p 494

. . . 3 ,
.
, .
civ C
S K E T H O F TH E RE L I GI O N O F T HE S IK H S .

A n d Ravi d as
'

boldly ask s ( Transl p . . 1 3 0, P ause)

“
If I w ould commit sins 0 E ndless one !
n ot ,
‘
How w ould be thy n ame purifier of the si nn er s P

With referen c e to the delusion of th e M ay a ,

K abi r s ays ( Tran sl p . . 4 70, XXX IX ) openly .

P ause .

H ari ,the deceiver h as practised deceit on the w orld

,
.

In sep ar ation fr om H ar i h o w sh all I live 0 my mother ,

S ay wh o is a m an wh o is a w om an ?
, ,

Reflect on this truth in thy body

K abi r s ays : my min d is reconciled w ith the deceiver .

The decei t is gon e th e dec eiver is kno w n ( by ,

U nder the i nfluence of the three qu li

a t ies a n d the delusi on o f the M ay a m an comm i ts ac t s
‘
whi ch ,

subj ect th e soul to transmig ration .

A ccording to common H ind u notions every action c arries w ith itself i ts fruit or r e w ard If .

on e ,
under the influence of the qual ity of g oodn ess h a s done here meritorious acts ( xix he , ,

is af ter his de ath admitted into he aven or p ara dise w here he is allo w ed to enj oy the f ruits of h is ,

w orks ti l l they ar e exh austed ; then he i s turned b a ck a gain into a w omb an d born on e arth in
,

a high c aste an d in a pious family t o commence a ne w the old course w hich m ay end a ccordi ng
, , ,

t o his actions to his advantage or dis advantage

,
If he h as a cted under the impulse o f the qu al ity .

o f p assi on h e is reborn after h i s d eath in the house o f w orldly minded men

,
B ut i f he h as acted -
.

under the influe n ce of the qu ality of dar kn ess an d he aped up demerits he i s v ariously punished ,

by Y am a ( o r D h ar m r ai ) an d then born in the body o f some anim al 2 or even throw n into hell
-
, ,

( K 337) ; w hen h i s punishment there is over h e is the n born i n so m e vile anim al body an d h as t o ,

go through v arious transmigrations til l he be born again i n a l ow hum an w omb, There is a .

3

gre at l atitude in these pop ul ar vie ws con cernin g f uture re w ards an d punishments an d we fi nd ,
"

m any allusions to them in the Granth p artly couched in mel an choly p artl y in j ocose terms
, , .

E very soul is supposed to h ave migra ted through th e eighty f our L akhs of f orms of existence -
,

I fi n d it nowhe re stated i n the Gran t h if th e soul its elf i s consid ered i n a c t i v e a s i n th e system of th e
, ,

t heisti c S i kh y a ( an d t h e B h agav a d gi ta) w he re t h e th r ee qu al ities a re rep r ese n ted as exe r cisi n g t h eir
-
,

i flue n ce th r o ugh the m edium o f m a tter w h ich t r an s m i t s t h e g ood o r ba d im ressions t o th e sea t o f se n sibil ity
n ,
p
(m ) ; t his ag ain forwa rds t hem t o conscious n ess ( WE N T) an d t his t o the i n tellect w hich co nveys ,

t hem t o t h e soul w h o t akes cogniz an ce o f t hem

, .

K a bi r s ay s 108 Tran sl p 6 76)

2
, . .

m m fi uaa e rfsfi mufi ‘

afi m fa l
W it wa n rflfi m afi ‘

wx m fi i u
Having given up th e remembrance o f B a r i th e w om an keeps the Ah 6i ( fa st) - .

H aving b ec ome a jen ny ass sh e i s born a g a in a n d c arries a lo ad o f fo ur m a u n ds

-
.

3
Ra v idas s ay s ( Ass , 2, Tran sl p . . 6 66)
‘
W erfi s mes fi sa fi x m umfie i

The thoughtless on e i s produced in the w om b of a reptile ( he wh o i s) in diff e rent to religious merit ( or) demerit , .

T h e hum an bir th i s h a rd t o ob t ain in th a t h um a n society a lso h e is l o w

( ) , .
”
 C
S K E T H O F T H E RE L G O N O F T HE S K H S I I I .

by the r e- absorp
‘

t zon f
o th e is in on e w ord the Nir bd n (fi fi m)
so ul i n the f oun ta i n of l ight }
H is ai m , , ,

the total cessation o f individu al consciousness an d reunion w ith t h e Vacuum m

a ) .

If there could be an y doubt o n the p anthei stic ch ar acter o f the tenets o f the S ikh Gurus
reg arding the S upreme it w ould be dissolved by their doctrine of t h e Ni rb an Where n o personal
,
.

God i s taught or believed in m an c annot aspire t o a fin al person al communion w ith him his aim
, ,

c an only b e absorption in t h e A bsolute S ubst ance i e in dividu al annihil ation W e find therefore ,
. . .

n o all u sion t o the j oys of a future li fe in the Granth as he aven o r p ar adise though supposed to , ,

exist is n ot considered a desirable object The immort ality o f the so ul is only taught so far as
,
.

the doctrin e of tr an smigration requires it ; but w hen th e soul h as re ached its highest obj ect it is ,

n o more mentioned bec ause it n o longer exi sts as individu al soul 2

.
,

T h e Nir ban as is w el l kno w n w as the grand object w hich Buddh a in his pre aching held
, ,

ou t t o the poor people F rom h i s atheistic point o f v ie w he could look o ut for nothing else ;
.

person al existence w ith al l t h e concomitant evils of this life w hich ar e n ot counterb al anced by
, ,

corresponding ple asures necess aril y appe are d to h im as the gre ate st evil H i s w hole ai m w as there
, .

f ore t o counter a ct the troubles an d p a in of thi s exis t ence by a stoical indi fference t o ple asure an d
p ai n an d t o stop i n dividu al consciousness t o its utmost li mit in order t o esc ape at th e point of death
,

f rom t h e dre aded tran sm igration w h i ch h e also ev en o n h i s atheistic ground h ad n o t ventured

, , ,
'

t o reject Buddhism i s therefore in re ality like S ikh ism nothing but unrestricted P essimism
.
, , ,

un able t o hold o ut t o m an an y sol ace except th at of annihilation , .

In progress o f time Buddhism h as been expelled from In dia but th e restored Brah m anism w ith ,

i t s con f used cosmological legends an d gorgeous my thology o f t h e P uri na s w as equ ally unable
t o s atis fy the thinking minds It i s therefore very rem ark able th at Buddhi sm in its h ighest
.
,

object the Nir ban soon emerges a gain in th e popul ar te ach ings o f t h e mediaev al reformatory
, ,

movem ents N am dev Tr il oean K abi r Rav i d as etc an d after th ese N an ak take upon themselves
.
, , , ,
.
, ,

t o sho w t h e w ay t o the Ni rban as B uddh a in h is time h ad promised a n d find e ager l i steners the
, ; ,

difference is only in the mean s w hich the se Bh agats propose for obt aining th e desired end , .

In the K ali—yuga announces N anak as w ell as the popul ar s aints bef ore h i m i s th e name qf
, ,
,

H ar i the on l y means f
o o btai n i ng fi n al eman c ip ati on

l
K a bi r exemplifi e s th is pro c ess by
ord s th e w

A d r o p i s m ixed wi th a d r op “
.

A d rop ca n ot be s p a ra t e d f rom a d ro n e
p .

S ee Tran sl p 4 84 v 29 . C o mp are a l so t h e n ext follo wi n g vers e

.
, . .
.

2
K a b i r expre ss es t h i s very for c ibly Ga ur i K a b i r X X L l Tr an sl p 4 8 l
( ) , , , . .

\ o
Vh en I wa
t) n o t N o w a r t tho u a n d I a m n o t
s, t h u ( w as .
.

No w I a d thou h ave beco m e O e my m ind is a ssured s ee

n o ly
in g O ( )
n , ne n .

3
A m a r d i s s ays ( Gauri A st p
-
7 8 Tra sl p 33 I ) , .
, , n . .

Yuga s th e n ame is th e h ighe st ( th in g ) h a vi n g reflected

I n t h e four the w ord th e Gu
ru
T h e d i sc iple w ill cro ss ove r the w a ter o f existe n ce i n
on
( of ) ,

( ) t h e K ali u -
y g .

( Whe n) t h e true (di sc iple ) dies he d oe s n o t com e n o r g o ( a g a i n ) ,

.

N an a k ( says) : t h e d isciple rem ains a bsorbed i n t h e

(
There a re in n umerable pa ss ages o f this ki nd in t h e Gran th .
 C
S K E T H O F T H E RE L G O N O F T HE S I K H S I I .
cvii

A usterities (3 H) renunciation
, its ple asures b athing at holy w ateri ng of the w orld an d

pl aces the giving o f alms ar e not denied t o be meritorious acts ; but they are by

n o me ans su ffi cient f or g aining complete em ancip ation ‘ as they are n o t po w er ful enough to cle ar
,

aw ay egotism This c an only the n ame 3 f Ha ri eff ect w hich w ashes aw ay in a mira culous m anner
.
2
,

all the fi lth of sins liberates fro m all f urther transmigrations an d reunites w ith H ari The n ame
,
3
.

of Hari is the univers al medicine f or m an kind ; 4 w hoever mutters it is s aved i n a moment .

,

This muttering of the n ame of H ari (W ) seems to be a very e asy w ay of s alvation ; th e S ikh
Gurus ho wever took good c are lest it should be m ade t o o e asy so th at th ey themselves might be c o n
, ,

sidere d more or less superfluou s guides They t aught therefore th at nobody w as able to t ake t h e .
,

n a me of Hari by himsel f ; an y attempt of this ki n d w as loudly declaimed a gainst an d severely c on

d em n ed ‘ The n ame o f H ari c an only be obtained f rom the tr ue Gur u
.
5
w h o alone c an
besto w the right i niti ation an d communic ate the m antra of the n ame o f Hari .
6

The Guru o n his p art ag ain give s th e name o f Hari only t o th ose on w hose forehe ad this l ot
is w ritten from the beginning W e meet here ag ain w ith th e decr etum aeter n um ; s alvation by .
7

the n ame is by no me ans univers al but restricted to t h e elect ; they ar e chosen n ot according ,
°
,

to their meritorious w orks but according to the ple asure o f Hari the le ading principles o f whi ch
, ,

N an a k ys ( J a pji 2 i T ra n sl p 7) '
sa , , . .

T i r th as a us t er ity m e r cy g i f t s give n if o n e obta i ( t hei r m erit) it i s t h e hon our o f a s es a m s eed

, , ,
n ,
- .

N a ak s a y s ( S iri Rag A stp X I V 4 T r a ns ] p 8 6)

2
n , . .
, , . .

Though I g ive ( i n ch a rity) ca st l s o f gol d an d pr ese n t m an y excellent h o r ses a n d eleph a n t s e .

T h o ugh I give l a n d a n d m an y co w s yet ( th ere i s) ego tism w ithin ,

Nan a k s ays (J a pj i 20 Tr a n s ] p 7)
3 '
. .
, ,

gs w fi w g irfi z ui m g asm fi ufifiz u

m fi fifa u ufi w fi fi fi r ufi o fifi fi
If b a n d foot bo dy trunk b ecome d efi l ed : B y w as h ing w i th w ater t h e d ust w ill be re moved
, , ,
.

I f the c l o t h b e pollu ted b y uri n e : B y a ppl ying so ap i t w ill b e w a shed .

If t h e in t el le ct be d efi l ed w i t h sin s : I t i s w a sh ed b y the d y e o f t h e n ame .

S ee Ga uri S uk h m a n i 1 X
,
5 T r an sl p 394 .
, , . . .

Nan ak s a y s ( Ga uri M a h A stp X II 5 Tr an sl p 3 26)

5
.
, . . .
, , .

fn x z ufir wé a xfi m z n fn x i fi fi m mfi a z u ‘

far: are ii? un i um: lI 0f Tr ansl p 3 37 xx v m 4

”
.
. . .
, , .

S ee Ga uri M b A stp X V 4 Tr a n s] p 328

6
, a . . .
, ,
. . .

A rjun s ays ( Ga ur i M ah V S uk h m an i IX 5 Tra n sl p 3 94)

7 . .
, . .
,
.
, ,

T h e pr a ising o f t h e B ea uti ful o n e an d t h e sing in g o f ( h is) excellences

Is n ot o b t ained by an y skill n or by a n y r eligious p r a c tice .

N an a k ( s ays) : h e obtains it t o w h om i t i s d ecree d by d estin y its el f ,

.

It is n o whe r e hinted a t h o w t h e Guru k n o w s or fin ds o ut t o w ho m t his l o t h a s b een d e creed

,
T h e m eetin g , ,
.

o f the d iscip l e wi t h t h e Guru o r v i c e v er sa o f t h e Guru w it h t h e d i sc i pl e

i s the refore a scri bed to a providen t i al , ,
,

a c t o f th e S uprem e so tb a t t h e d isciple h a s i n t hi s v e ry fa ct the ba dge

o f h i s s a lva tion N an a k s ays ( Asa .
,
,

Mah I S a h d X V IIl 4 T r a nsl p 50 1 )

. .
, , . .

m afi m n fi m fi l fi u\{a a fs m sa w s fi u
A m ar di s s ays ( Maj h Ma h A stp 1 Tr an s] p
8 - . .
, . .
,

5% Hf? u
'‘

m are fi qm g
( Whose ) destiny it i s
( him ) ,
th e t r ue Guru unit s ( e wi t h Hal '

i) .
c viii C
S K E T H O F T HE RE L IGI O N O F THE S IK H S .

ar e no where hinted at so th at also the em ancip ati on of the elect necess ari ly falls under the
,

c ate gory of “ sp or t ” This i s occ asion all y expressed in very decisi ve ter ms Thus s ays Arjun
.
.

Tr ansl p 3 9 7 X L If it ple as e the L ord m an obtains s alvation “I f it ple ase the Lord he
( . .
, , ,
.
,

m akes a stone cross If it ple as e the L ord b e rescues a sinner

.
He himself acts he himself ,
.
,

reflects The inw ard governor sports an d expan ds What ple ases him th at w ork he c auses to .
,

be done .

But on the other h and it w as felt th at such a doctr ine if str ictly c arried out w o ul d natur al ly , ,

render men thoroughl y indiff erent to their s alvation if nothing depended on their own exertion We ,
.

find it therefore stated in other p assages o f the Granth th at those wh o ar e seeking the Lord obtain , , ,

hi m in their o wn he art ; th at w ith th ose w h o are thi rsting for t h e sight o f the Lord b e w ill meet ; 1
,
,

the people are f requently exhorted t o come t o the true Guru ( Transl p 4 6 4 XV III 2 ) an d to . .
, .
,

receive meekly his instruction w hich necessarily presupposes in th em a f ree decision for good or ,

evi l . The disciple is even w arned not to come t o the Guru fo the s ke r a o f f ood as a mere
2
,

bodily intercourse w ith the Guru will n ot save him ( see Transl p 4 95 2 . .
,

We might n aturally expect th at N anak w ould bring f or ward some proof th at he himself really
w as the true Guru sent an d confirmed by the S upreme L ord ,
In the old Jan am S akhi ther e is .
-

a tra diti on t o this purport that Nanak w as c alled t o the threshold of Go d an d solemnly ins talled
,

as Gu r u
( see p xi ) ; but in th e Granth itsel f w e fin d n o tr a ce of it an d Nan ak never alludes
.

t o anythi ng of thi s kind It is every w here presuppose d as self evident th at he is the true Guru
.
-
,

an d he never t akes the slightest p ains t o prove it The f ollo wing Gurus in their turn appeal to .

N an ak th at he h ad ins tituted a successive initi ation into the Gu r uship an d dispense therefore with
, ,

every proof .

The Gr anth is full of the pr aise of the Guru w h o in every way is extolled an d magnifi ed , .
3

The Guru is th e only inf all ible guide t o complete eman cipation ( Transl p 95 V II he is the . .
, .
,

m edzator (Fem ) bet w een Hari an d m an kind w ithout w hom nobody c an become acceptable at ,

the div in e threshold h e 1 s the bo at th at c arri es men over the w ater of existence (3 3 W ) ;
,

y ea
,he is the very f ulness o f H ari himsel f ‘
.
5

The di sci ple h as there fore to submit t o the direction o f the Guru uncondition ally ; mind an d
body h e h as to surrender to him fo r h i s salvation d epends entirely on the favour an d mercy of ,

the Guru w h o freely disposes o f the tre a sures of H ari B ab a Nan ak s ays ( Transl p 209 X X V
, .
. .
,
.
,

P auri ) : “
I f the true Guru become merci ful then ( one s ) w ish is f ulfilled If the tr ue Guru ,
’
.

become merciful th e nine treasures are obtained I f the true Gur u become merciful th en on e is
, .
,
'

absorbed i n th e True on e
”
W hatever the Gur u does is approved by He ri whom the Guru
.
,

unites w ith Har i he rem ains united w ith him , The Guru is even possessed of a magic po w er .

l ike as the philosopher s ston e turns everything th at it is touching into gold, so the Guru
’
, ,

Tran sl p 396 6
S ee . .
, .

2
T h e Gurus used to keep up a l a r ge coo k i g establ ishmen t t o fee d th eir disciples n sm all attract ion fo r
no
,

a l a y h u n gry p op u l atio n T h is w as al re a dy t h e p r a c tice a t th e time o f B ab a Nan ak ; see p lxxv 1 1 7 0f

z .

.
.
, .

T r a n sl p 699 V IL ; p 704 III

. .
, .
, .

3
S ee a p ass age o f th is ki n d T r an sl p 377 L V l a st 8 16 k , . .
, .
, .

N anak s ays ( S iri Rag Mah S h d IX 3 Tra n s l p 26

) , . a .
, , . .

fi fs e m é gn fi t us —
n fi m afi m fi n
5
A rjun sa ys ( S iri Ri g , Mah V S ahd IX 4 T 1 a n s1
. .
, , , .
p .

m q auw fi q fi h z m x rrfi e fi z n
ox
C
S K E T H O F T H E RE L I GI O N O F T H E S IK H S .

of li fe is the extinction of i ndividual existence there c an be n o r o om for a system of mor al duties ; ,

w e need there fore h ardly poin t out h ow w rong the statement o f some authors is th at S ikhism is ,
,

a mor al isi ng Dei sm . .

We h ave alr e ady noticed th at the chief duty o f t h e disciple is blind o bedi en c e t o his Guru ,

an d in the second pl ace service t o the s aints This l atter point is considered quite essential to .

s alvation an d therefore frequently enj oined ; the disciple sho ul d become the dust of the feet of
the pio us h e should w ash their feet an d drink the w ater used in so doin g ; he should offer
up h i s life to the pious an d become their s acrifice The society o f the s aints is the gr e atest blessi ng ; .

f or in thei r society al l filth is removed true kno w le dge o f Brahm is obtained an d the jew el of the ,

n ame found so th at t h e g ate o f H ari ( i e fin al em ancip ati on ) is n atur all y re ached }

,
The other duties . .

ar e summed up in the tri ad : fm x i e remembering the n am e giving al ms an d , . .

,

practising ablutions ; but the t wo latter duties as in fa ct al l except t h e muttering of the name , , ,

ar e no longer required w hen the highest step the kno w ledge o f Brahm is obtained O ther
, , , .

duties ar e occ asion ally inculcated as far as they tend tow ards the burning of egotism an d the ,

remov al of du ality such as abstainin g from falsehood an d slander not lookin g on a wife
’
'
'

,
\ nother s
, ,
\
purifying th e he art from the five vices 31TH ( lust) al l (wr ath ) f3 3 ( greediness ) m ( infatuation , , , ,

or spiritu al blindness ) an d W 3 1 3 ( egoti sm ) “

.
a

Ch arity to anim al lif e is frequentl y inculc ated in the Granth on p antheistic grounds ( all
cre atures being considered alike ) an d in consequence abstinence from anim al f ood ; 3 but this injune
,

tion w hich w ent right against the habits of the Jat popul ation of the P anj ab w as never observed
, ,

an d there f ore silently dropped after w ards ; only the kill ing of th e c ow w as in l ater times interdicted
as s acrilegious though in the Gr anth itsel f n o tr ace o f a peculi ar s anctity o f the c ow is to be found
, .

Rem ark able it i s but quite in accordance w ith the p antheistic principles o f the system that
, ,

prayer to the S upreme is h ardly ever m entioned in the Granth 4 w here as prayer t o the Gur u is ,

frequently enj oine d .

5

The high position w hich the Guru cl aimed for himsel f n atural ly led t o a deifi oati on of the s ame
, ,

an d though Nan ak spoke modestly o f himsel f an d conf essed himsel f unle arned an d the lo w est o f sinners ,

C om p are Ga ur i , Mah V . .
, S uk h m a n i , X V .
, 6 , T ra n sl . p . 406, an d VII 1—8 , Tra n sl p . . 389 .

G auri , M ah Tr a n s] p
2
S ee . V .
, S uk h m a n i , IX .
, 1, . . 3 93 .

K a bi r s ( Tr an sl p
3
sa y . . 68 2, v .

m e w n uwfi r fi a afi m ufi n m u

4
A nd v
e en w hen prayer t o t h e S upr e m e i s m enti one d n o obj ect o r co n tents o f it a re deta iled , , so th at it
s ee m s to be a mere a ccommo d a t ion t o popula r n o tions A rj un says ( T ra n sl p 38 7 V 8 ) . . .
, .

A n d T ran sl . p . 502, X X L , 2 :

R ag , M ah L , A stp
5
N an ak says ( S iri . . IV .
, 5, Tra n sl p . . 77)
uf s m mfi m fi w fi wm i fa fi rm fa u

6
N an a k s ays h umbly o f himself (Asa , Ma h L S abd X X IX
.
, .
, 2 , T ra n sl .
p . 505)
re
251 a xvii V i e w user 3131 1 1 1 raw s ham n

I t is i comprehen sible
n
, h ow t h e la ter trad itio n , i n t h e fa ce of confessions of t his k in d co ul d deem
, Nan ak t o be
an A vatar .
 C
S K E T H O F T HE RE L IGI O N O F T HE S I K H S .
cxi

the f ollowi ng Guius soon commenced ow in g to the abj ect fl att ery o f their adherents to identif y , ,

th e Gur u w ith the S upreme himself ‘ The consequence w as such a deifi c ati on of m an as h as h ar dl y
.

ever been he ard of else where Life property an d honour w ere s acr ificed to the Guru in a w ay
.
, ,

w hich is often revolting to our mor al f eeh n gs It w as th ere fore a very f ortunate event f or the . .

m ore f ree an d mor al development of the S ikh community th at with the tenth Guru G6v in d S ingh , , ,

the Guruship w as altogether abolished .

With precepts of this ki nd the disciples o f Nan ak w ould h ave sunk into a state of dull apathy
to th e w orld around them or they w oul d h ave l e d a contempl ative l if e i n mon asteries as th e
, ,

Buddhists did i f N anak c autioned by h i s m any disputes an d conten t ions with the Jé gi s an d
, , ,

co n vin c e d by pract ical exper ience o f the wickedness an d hypocrisy of the erratic Faqi rs h ad not
‘
,

enj oined to th em to rem ain in th eir secular occupati on an d not to leave the w orld It is o wing
, .

t o t hi s sound principle th at th e S ikhs h a ve not become a n arro w minded sect of F aqi rs but th at
'
.
-
, ,

t hey developed themselves by de grees into a politic al co mmon w e alth .

Nan ak an d his f ollo w ers t aught th at the state o f a householder w as e qu ally acceptable
,

to Hari as retirement f rom the w orld 2 an d that secular business w as n o obstacle to the attainment ,

of fin al em ancipation S alv ation does not de pend on outw ard circumstances nei ther on the per
.
,

for m an c e of austeriti es 3 but on the in ward state o f the mind w hich even amon gst the d aily business o f
, ,

l ife m ay rem ain abs0 1 bed 1 n meditation on Hari ( this kind of devoti on 1 s called W or 3 1W ) .

The evil practices o f the mendicant Faqi rs as Well as the r ogueries of the Brahmans ar e theref ore
fre quentl y exposed in the Grahth an d severely censured By such pious tricks transmigration c annot .

be overcome but the soul gets on th e contrary still more sul lied an d depraved
,
.

The institution o f c aste was not directly ass ailed by N anak th ough h e an d the o ther Bhagate did , .

not put an y stress upon it He expresses h i s m ind on this point very cl early by s aying ( Tr ansl
. .

p 4 94 III P ause ) : Thou ( O Go d) ack now l edgest the light ( th at is in him ) an d dost not ask after
.
, .
,
“

”
his
( ) c aste For
. in the other w orld there is no c aste ( f
o also Transl p 1 1 4 III S l é k L ) . .
, .
, .

K ab i r even occasion ally ridicules it as w ell as the Br a hm an an d the Mull a E m ancip ation is not
, .

confined to the higher c aste s but m ade accessible t o all men even to the C an da l ‘ Difi eren t stories
, , .
'

ar e theref ore cited in the Granth th at even the lo w est men attain ed to salvation by mutter ing
,

the name ‘ Nan ak received al l men as his disciples w ithout an y re gard to c aste recogniz ing in
. .
,

Guru A rjun, oversteps

wh o all bounds in t h e pr ais e of the Guru s ays fo r , in stance ( S iri Rag, M ah V . .
,

S ah d X X 1X ,
. 2, Tr ansl p 73) . .

T h at real ly the Guru (not the S upreme) is me ant by these w ord s , is clearl y see n fro m v . 3 , where he says

A rjun s ays (Asa Mah V S ah d C L V 1 1 2, T ra nsl p 573 )

2
.
, . .
, , . .

fl utes fe s fi ra ut ums q uu efi u t n
ni sfs fiar fi ra u t u£11 3 1 3 m II
”

sTsrfi uafaat u qs fi zQ fi s fmm fa m u

‘ ‘
-

K abi r ridicules occ asio na l ly outwa rd austerit ies ; he s ays ( T ransl p 664 IV
3 . .
,

w fi m fi a fi r fire fi rs m fi sg m fi r u

S ee T ransl p . . 4 30, X VII P auri .

S ee T r ansl p . . 4 89, Nad V.

cxii C
S K E T H O F T H E RE L G O N O F T HE S K H S I I I .

all the dignity of the human b irth an d l aid thus th e f ound ation of a popul ar reli gion an d it
, ,

w as quite i n a ccordance w ith these pr inciples that Guru Gov ind S ingh fin ally abolished caste ,

al together i n the K h als a though th e deeply rooted prej u di ces of the higher c astes ref used t o
,
-

submit t o it .

T h e dignity of the Br ahm ans as family priests etc w as like w ise le f t untouched an d of ne arly ,
.
, ,

al l the Gurus it i s reported th at they h ad their f amil y priests though the te aching o f the Brahma s
, n , ,

as w ell as the authority of the V edas an d P uran as is o ft en reproved It w as the l ast Guru d ind 1
.
, ,

S ingh w h o positively prohibited the employment o f Br ahm ans in an y c ap acity an d introduced a

, ,

n e w ritu al p artly t aken fr om the Gran th an d p artly from his o w n compositions ,

.

F rom
the f oregoing sketch of the S ikh religion as l aid do w n i n the Granth w e must w ell dis , ,

t in gui sh the popul ar notions o f the m asses Th e vulg a r a r e no w here given to lof ty metaphysical .

specul ations ; th eir ide as ar e concrete an d ad apted t o their every day w an ts P antheism h as never -
.

been the reli gion o f a w hole n ation o r o f an y l arge body o f men not even in Indi a the home of
, , ,

P antheism In spite o f al l the definitions of th e Granth the common people constructed for
. ,

themselves a God such as they required for their out w ard an d in w ard w ants The teachin g .

of the Granth gr a du ally dis a ccustomed them f rom idol at r y a n d the w orsh ip o f the in f erior deiti es ,

an d impressed them w ith the i d e a o f O n e S upreme L ord w hom ho w ever they could not realiz e ,

under the abstract notion o f an A bsolute S ubst ance but only as a person al self conscious S upreme , ,
-

Being wh o cre ated al l an d governs an d disposes al l according to his w ill It is not improb able
, .
,

th at the Isl am h ad a gre at sh are in w orking silently these ch anges w hich ar e directly opposed to ,

the te aching of their Gurus The m ass of the S ikh popul ation is n ow at al l events thorou ghly
.

imbued w ith these deistic notions an d even educated S ikhs w ere quite astonished w hen I proved ,

to them th e contrary from th e Gr anth I met only a very fe w devotees w h o being fairly read .
, ,

in the Gr anth kne w about the secret

,
“
.

Guru Govind S ingh did n ot an d could n o t essenti ally ch ange th e te a ching o f his predecess ors .

H e describes the S upreme Bei n g ne arl y in the s ame terms in his J apj i , as the Adi Granth does ,

though h e w as person ally addicted t o the w orship of the godd ess Durga ; h e m ade the worship of
the O n e S upreme obligatory though the ador ation o f the minor deities as w e are t aught by hi s
, ,

o wn Gr anth w as by n o m eans rejected

2
.
,

T h e ch anges an d additions b e m ade in S ikhism concerned chiefly the ceremonial an d social

duties o f h is adherents ; as he received men o f al l c astes an d creeds into the K hals a an d ende avoured

I
Nan a k s ay s ( 1555 , Ma h . I .
, S ah dXX L , 4, Tr ansl .
p .

ifss u a f ua ma fi r é z n ni s fi m x mé fiz u
‘
‘

m f ag fixfi g x x fiz um e t af a efi rm x fi fi z n
p u
2
T h e R ah i t n am as g o in this resp e ct m uch fa r th er c o n dem n i n
g a ll o ther w orsh ip but th at of the O ne
-
,

S upreme T h e Ra bi t n am a o f P r a h l ad r ai s ays v 1 3 :
.
- -
, .

w m fi a fs fi s fi i a fi nree n
m m se us fi fi ssfi x q uai rs es u ‘ '

T h e w orsh ip of id o ls is also positi ly for bidd e i th e R h it n am as ; see P r ah l ad r ai

ve n n a - -
v 14
, .

um ; :fi um a? fi n: fi ns fee t ? t h e n
i m fm m mtw
‘

fii m fi w n
W h o a dores a s t o n e a n d b o w s h is h ea d to an y o ne b ut a S ikh
He i s a sak a t ( a n d ) w i t h out a Gur u h e i s al w a s curs ed b t h e L ord of th e w orld
y y , .
cx iv C
S K E T H O F T HE RE L G O N O F T HE S K HSI I I .

Temples shrines an d burning places are not to be w orshipped n or are other religions to be
,
,

praised ‘ The V edas S h astras P ur an as an d the Qur an are n o t to be minded neither the P an dit
.
, ,
’
,

n or the M u l la All Hinduan d Mus alm an rites are to be discontinued ; th e H indu ceremonies at
.

the time o f birth m arr i age an d death should not be observed ; no S hradh sh oul d be performed
, ,

an d i f it be perf ormed the w ords of the Gr anth should be used N o T i l ak should be applied to
,
.

the forehe ad nor shoul d the s acred cord ( Hi ?) n or a rosary ( 31 1 351 ) be w orn ; circumcision should
,

n ot be pr actised .

A S ikh is n ever to w e ar a c ap (i i fi ) nor to sh ave his he ad or be ard n or t o w e ar r ed clothes , , .

2

H e shoul d b athe in cold w ater comb h is h air tw ice every d ay an d bind his turb an after adjusting ,

the tresses ; he is never to take off h i s turb an w hilst t aking his food He is t o cle an his teeth .

every day w ith a tooth stick H e should al w ays w e ar breeches (3 g the H ind u Dh é ti being a
-
. ,

f orbidden article ) an d h ave steel about h i s person especi ally a sw ord

, ,
.

The use o f tob acco in an y sh ape is prohibited Gambling especi ally the play of C aupar .
3
,

(8 6 143 a k ind o f chess ) an d visiting prosti tutes deserve severe punishment

, , ,
.

A S ikh should never buy me a t f rom a butcher but eat on l y the flesh of such animals whose ,

he ad w as severed by a S ikh w ith one stroke o f the s w ord ; this ki n d of sl aughte ring animals i s
c alled m 1 Bee f is n o t even so much as mentioned in the Rah i t n am as a s its use w as altogether
“
.
-
,

considered abomin able T o eat of the le avings o f the me al o f another entails the p ain o f de ath
.
.

E special attention is p aid t o the m aking an d distributing o f the K ar ah P ras ad ( m

w hich in some w ay rese m bles the Communion S ervice o f Christi ans the K a r ah P r as ad being con ,

sec rat ed t o the Guru an d in h i s n ame given to eat to t h e assembled vot aries It should be made .

o f equ al qu an ti t i es o f gh i flour a n d sugar T h e cooking pl ace should first be s w ept cle an an d the n
,
.
-

pl astered w ith c o w dung ; the cooking utensils should like w ise be w ell w ashed The S ikh wh o
-
.
,

prep ares the P r asad should en ter t h e cooking pl a ce after b athing an d puri fying himsel f and only
,
-
,

utter : v ah Guru! H e should fill a n ew j a r w ith w ater dr aw n f rom a w ell w ith an iron bucket .
, ,

an d pl ac e it at his si de W hen the K ar ah P ras ad is re ady it should be put on a stan d and th e

.
, ,

people should si t round it praying ( i a s aying : v ah Gur ul ) It should be distributed to all i n . . .

equ al portions ‘ .

The disciple is st ri ctly to obey the orders o f the Guru an d n ever to fors ake him ; apostacy
is visited w ith th e severest punishments ; he is also t o m in i st er to hi s brother S ikhs He is t o .
5

p ay t axes if d em an ded by the Guru ; the w ithholding o f the custom ary o fferings o f th e tenth "
,

P r a h l ad -r ai s ays , 0 . 20

uafi fi ufi i ge w fi u
'

ts i e a n t raflax

fi am fi ung m mfii usrfi wv fi fi w fiaa m i u ’

2
cus t o m o f w ea ri n g blue clo thes ( i rem e m bran c e o f Go in d S in gh m ak i n g
T he n v h is e scape in bl ue
clo th es ) soo n fell i to d isus e ; o n ly t h e A kali s pr es er ved this c us t om S ee p cxviii note 2
n . .
, .

Q
P r ah l ad r ai s ays 0 9
3
-

@
, .

g o ni uau mfi m ai a u fim u
‘

fox arfi r w n m a a f rfi m
T h e K a i ah P r a s ad an d i t s p rep ar a t io n i s d escr ib ed i n N an d L al s Ra h i t n am a
- ’

p i 8 -
, .
, .

P r a h l ad r ai s ays 0 8
5 '

-
, .

6 '

P r ah l ad- r ai s ays , a. 7
w ui um
uhm im fi i f ann w s fi n
‘

z fi i afi

m fi w fi m w é n fi m fi uafl m sfi u
Who , h avi n g s een t he ord er ( o f th e Guru) do es n o t p a y t axes W h o havin g
, .
, h id the money bo x (in which the -
 S K E TC H c v THE sums
'

O F THE RE L I G O N I .
cxv

p art of his income th e def raudi ng of th e K hal sa an d others deputed by th e Guru is severely
,
'

c ensur ed He should consider only th e precep ts o f the Guru as true an d al l others as fal se 1 The
. .

Granth is to be m inded like th e Guru an d th e K h als a like the Guru as it is the visible body o f , ,

the Guru ( an d in conse quence ) the visibl e body o f the Timeless one 2 The persons to w hom the
,
'
.
,

Guru gives authority ( or a Hukm n am a) should be equ ally obeyed an d those w h o set themselves
-
, , ,

up as rivals w ith the m should be burnt w ith thei r families 3 , .

Wi th regard to his family the S ikh is enj oined to disp os e suitably of his daughter ( or sister ) -

an d not t o t ake an y money for her h and

‘
The killing o f d a ughters is strictly forbidden .
.

A mong the mor al duties tr uth fulness an d kin dness to the poor are especi all y inculc ated ; false
hood de aling fr audul ently ste aling sl andering an d fornic ation ar e br an ded as de adly sins A S ikh
, , , , .

should e ar nestly strive to subdue the five p assions : In st

am ( its ) an d pri de (time)
w rath
Q 11 ) greediness in fatu a ,

, .

The inj unctions regardi ng the intercourse w it h people of other creeds evince alre ady a n arrow
minded bigo try an d a deep fanatical ha tred .

A S ikh is n ot even to s al ute one wh o is not a S i kh oth erwise he is an apostate an d accursed , ,

by Go d Wh o bo w s h i s head to one w h o w e ar s a c ap
. a Mo h amm edan ) or sh aves hi s he a d
,

(i
. e .a H ind u) i s doubtles s w or,thy o f hell “
H e is not even t o place a piece o f clo th or an y .

thing belon gi n g to a Muhamm adan on his head o th erw i se he w ill su ffer m any de aths “ A true , .

S ikh should always be e n g aged in w ar w ith the Muh amm ad ans an d sl ay them fightin g them f a ce ,

to f ace ; it i s his d uty to destroy the enemies o f h is f ai th ’ an d to h elp in the diff usion o f the ,

m oney, s i de for the Guru is put) ta lk s fa lsehoo d wi th h i s mo uth W h o acknowle d gin g th e v ow o f a n

set a , , .
,

g o f taxes ste al s ( th em) : such a disc iple i s n o t plea s i n g t o th e Guru Compare al I o Nand L i l s Rah i t ” ’
o ffer in , .

n am e p , 24. .

1
The Rah it n ama of N and L EI ( p 6 4 6) h a s th e furth er i nj unct ion : Do n o t listen to a ny c a lu m n y
- . ,
“

re spec ting the Guru an d he wh o spe aks i l l o f the Guru must be k illed with a sw ord
,
I n thi s w ay th e , .
”

i n fa llibility o f the Guru could ea sily be k ept up .

P r ah l ad r §i s ays v 2 1
2
~ .
,

ag m m fi sfi t
p rfz ag fi fi fi r u
fi fi d fiifi efi fim m ufi fi fi n

T h e K hals a should be m inded a s t h e Guru it i s the m anifest bo dy of the Guru , .

Wh o d esire s to meet wi th me b e havi ng s ea rche d finds me in them

, .

A n d in v. 24 he says
w a w dt
’
m fim n W W W QUT II
“
T his o n e is the sh a pe of th e ti meless d ivin e ma le . T h e K h als a i s t h e visible body o f the Ti mel ess one .

3
P rah l ad-
n ai
'
s ays , 0. 15 ‘
l

wfi m t am fi fiq mfi m Infi x fi a un fi e fi a fi nfi m um n

Nand L i l B ahit-n am a, p 3 , l 6, l 7
’
S ee s . .

5
P r ah l adr r ai s ays , o. 20

i tfi it er fi saré fii a n fi fi w m fi fi fi u
h n

S ee Na nd L i l s Rah it n am a p 2 9
' ’ - .
, . ,

Th ese duties ar e frequently inculca ted S ee Nand L i l s Rah i t -n am a, p 7 62, 64 ; p 9, 73, 77, 79
’
7 . .
. . ,
cxvi S KE T C H O F THE RE L I GI O N O F THE S IK HS .

S ikh reli gion confidence wh atever should be placed in J6g1 s ( wh o are contemptuously called
''
x
. No
Q17; ear cropt ) an d Turks- a
.

To wards the S ikh sectarians th e s ame impl ac able hatred is evinced A true S ikh should .

abst ain from all intercourse w ith the follo w ing people w h o ar e accursed ( excommunic ated ) by the ,

Guru : ( 1 ) the Mi n e the progeny o f P ir th i m all 3 ( 2) the Dh i rm al li é the “

progeny of Dh i r mall ( see p l xxxii note ) ; ( 3 ) the Ram r ai e ( W ) the disciples of Ram r ai
.
,
,
-
,

the son of Guru H ar r é i ( see p lxxvi l 27 -

( 4 ) the Masen de the former deputies of the .
, . ,

ad plucked ones ( m a n
Guru ( see p xciii l ast line an d note
.
, ( 5) the he i i e the Jainas wh o -
, . .
,

are n ow c alled in the P an j ab m oi} o r W atheists ) To these are added as equ ally hein ous , .

( 6 ) those w h o kil l their d aughters ( y m

There ar e some other inj unctions o f minor import ance w hich ar e h ardly w orth mentioning,
such as : n ot t o blo w out a l amp w ith the m on th ; n ot to extinguish fire w ith w ater from which ,

on e h as been drinking ; n ot to rem ain n aked f rom the w aist do w n w ards at night ; not to bathe
w ithout a o r breeches ; distribute f ood ithout bei n g fu lly dressed etc
( ) n o t t o w ,
.

We se e from these minute ordin ances that the S ikh re form atory movement soon ended again ,
‘

in a n ew bonda e w hich w as quite as tiresome as th at w hich they h ad thro wn o fi By precepts

g
,
.

of this kind the S ikhs the m aj ority of whom consisted of rude an d ignoran t Jat s could morally
, ,

but l ittle be improved as n o p rovision w h a tever w as m ad e to raise them t o a higher standard of

,

educ ation an d cul ture Guru Govi nd S ingh being only intent o n rendering them subservient to his
,

w ill an d on k indling their m ar ti al val our an d h atred agai nst the Muh amm ad ans We need there .

f ore n ot be surprised th a t they soon surp assed their f ellow countrymen in al l sorts of vices and
,
-

deb auchery t o w hich they added a r ap acious an d overbe aring conduct so th at th ey bec ame a regular
, ,

scourge t o th e country after they h ad succeeded in overthro w ing th e Muh amm ad an power They
, .

could e asily destroy by their m artial fury an ol d w e ak est ablishment but w ere n ot able to erect ,

a n ew solid f abric upon its ruins as they h ad n o t in themselves the necess ary mor al an d intellectual ,

capacities .

In con clusion w e h ave t o notice some denomin ations whi ch spran g up in th e bosom of the ,

S ikh community .

T he Udd si s This body w as f ounded by S iri Cand the eldest son o f Nan ak There are
.
,
.

f our subdivisions a mongs t them w h o only differ f rom e a ch other by some o ut w ard signs , They n o .

more m arry afte r they h ave given up their household

, an d turned U d asi s ( i e indi ff erent . .

1
S ee Na n d L i l ’ s Rah it -n am a, p 9 80 T h e S p rea d ing o f S i khism by forc e o f a rms is here clearly
.
, .

enjoin ed . N o w o n d er t herefo re, if the S ikhs b ec ame g r a du al ly mo r e fana tic a l th a n the M uh a mm adan s .

a
P r ah l ad - r ai sa ys , v. 22

m m m at afi m w fi m fi «
afi fi fe uit fi rs m afi ufi m fi m u
He s h oul d by n o m ean s put an y co n fid en ce i n a n ear cropt on e a n d i n a T urk - .

\V h o d oes o t ent er tain love wi t h a S ikh go e s t o hell

n
, .
”

3
W e h ave sta t e d p lxxx not e I th at it w as n o t qui te clea r if Ram di s h ad t wo o r th r ee so n s But
.
, , ,
- .

?
f ro m th e S ik h s d é r aj d i v i th ia p 57 l 1 5 sqq a n d a n ot e o f S ird ar A ttar S in gh to h is transla ti on of the
, .
, . .
,

R h i t n am a o f P r h l ad r ai p l w e find th a t h e h ad t h re e sons
n - a -
T h e n ame o f t h e e ldest so n w as P ir th i mall
, .
, . ,

th at o f t h e s eco n d A rj un a d th a t of th e t h ird D h i r m a ll T h e Mi ne a r e therefore n o t t h e d isciples o f Dhi r

n

m al l a s s uppos ed o p lxxxi i n ote 2 but t h e d escen da n ts o f P i rth i m al l w h o h a d t rie d to poison h is you

, .

n er
, n .
, , g ,

b r other A rj n u o w h om t h e Guruship h ad been conferred an d wh o was therefore c a lled by his father m

, n
,

a contemp t ibl e t h i ef .

P r ah l ad r ai says v 1 8
-
, .

m m mu
fi m m lm fi fi fm fi m m m m fim fi n
cx v iii C
S K E T H O F T HE RE L I GI O N O F T HE S IK H S .

pure s aints These people ere origin ally strict S ikhs an d

'

T he N zr mal é
( ) d ha w th e .

f ollo w ed exclusively the Gr anth an d the r egul a tions o f Govind S ingh ; they stood in high esteem
wi th the S ikh community an d exercised gre at i n fluence on the people F ormerly they us ed .

t o w e ar w hite clothes an d dw elt at A mrits ar Mukt sar an d o t her pl aces w hich ar e s acred to the
,
-
,

S ikhs ( as D amdam a but in the course o f time they gr adually rel apsed into Hind u
,
ism by
applyin g the i r mind t o the S h astr as an d especi all y the Ved ant a In consequence o f this internal .

ch ange of mind their outward h abits also underw ent some ch anges ; th ey deposed their w hite robes ~

an d ad opted the common g arb o f the H in d fi F a qi rs consisting o f reddi sh yello w clothes They ,
-
.

also n o w v i sit the holy w ate ring pl aces on the Gan gs an d Jamn a an d con form to ne arly all the
-

Hi n d u rites A t the time o f birth an d de a th they per form the V edic ceremonies an d burn their
.

de a d but do not use the Hin dum antras at w eddings They ar e n o w in a state o f transition an d
, .

deeply tinged w ith H in d u notions so th at they c an no longer be considered as regular S i khs

, .

They live mostly together in sep arate societies under a Guru an d cho ose celib acy ; there i s some
le arning cultiv ated amon g them an d even S anskrit stud ies ar e to so m e extent attended to They .

d o n o t beg but li ve o n the offerings o f the people ; they receive men o f al l c astes into their
,

society as w i thi n the brotherhood no caste is ackno wledged They h ave a l arge establishment at
, .

A mritsar w here they ar e much respected by the people for the puri ty o f thei r m or als l
, .

T he A lcal i s ( the w orshippers o f the W 1 31} or Timeless B eing ) This body is said to , .

h ave been in stituted by Guru Govind S ingh himsel f They w ere the z ealots among the S ikhs wh o .
,

w atched over the p urity o f their religion an d w ithstood firmly the innov ations 2 w hich the B air agi ,

Ban d s w h o af ter the dea th o f Govind S ingh assumed the le adership among the S ikhs in the
,

P anj ab ende avoured to i ntroduce into S ikhism

, They w e ar blue chequered clothes an d b angles or
.

br acelets o f steel round their wr ists an d frequen tly also a discus of steel on their tur ban They .

established themselves i n gre at num bers at A mrits ar w here they assumed the direction of the ,

religious ceremonies an d acted the p arts of defen ders of the faith in the d ay s o f S ikh indepen dency ,

as they assumed the right o f con voking a Gu r m at a a n ation al council liter all y : the Guru s advice
(
’
)
-
,

an d dir ecting its cons u ltati ons Thus t hey bec ame a f ormidable bo dy w hich w as dre aded even by
.
,

the S ikh chie fs as they were al w ays ripe for a fan atic al outbre ak They lived on the offe rings of
, .

the people w hich they o ften extorted by f orce

, A s they w ere i n f act m o re a poli tic al th an a .

religious bo dy thei r influence ce ased w ith the destruction o f the S ikh community an d n o w a days
,
,
- -

they are h ardly t ak en notice of th ey ar e gr adu all y d windl ing a way like S ikhism itself in w hose ,

bosom o f late even an atheistic or m ateriali stic sect h as sprung up th at of the Gul d b dd ei e wh o deny ,
-
,

every cre ation an d the existence of an y S upreme Being The old tough H indu i s m h as therefore .

every prospect of outliving also thi s re form atory movement w hich was impeded in its co urse an d ,

eventu al ly rendered b ane ful by being m ade subservient to poli tic al interests .

1
O ne N ir m ala 8 31 t of th e A mrits a r establish m en t , At m a S in gh , w a s fo r a c onsidera ble t ime my
ins tr uct o r .

2
Thes in n ova tion s did n o t co n c ern th e d oct ri al p ar t s but o n ly som e outw a rd fo r ms a n d customs of
e n ,

S ikh ism H e en d eavo ured t o i n d uc e th e S ikhs t o a ban d on th e ir bl ue d re ss t o a b stain from d ri n kin g l iquo rs
.
,

a n d B h an g
( t o w hich even Govin d S in gh h a d bee ad dicted) an d f rom ea ti n g flesh He t ri ed a lso t o make
n .

them excl ai m new 63 ( vi c tory t o rel ig i o n E) m 3a a? ( V ictory t o t h e S ikh sys t em

‘

,
( ) i n stea d of
t h e e xcl a m a ti o n ord ere d by Guru Gav i n d S i gh : 3 TU
3 % ( bra vo vict ory t o th e Guru
n
3 13
um
,

Fa a? ( b r av e victo r y t o th e K h als a l ) A s t h e b i go te d B a n d s i n sisted on t h e se innovatio n s m any

'

, .

S i k hs e sp ec i ally t h e A k ali s w h o r efus ed t o com ply w i th the m w ere ut t o dea th A f t er t h e defe a t a n d cruel
, ,
p , .

exec u t io n o f B an d s al l th ese i n novation s w er e

p ut a side ag ain exc ept th e blue dress whi c h only the fanatical ,
,

A kali s re t a ined .
 O N T HE C O MP O S ITIO N O F T HE GRANT H .

IV .

O N THE C O MP O S IT IO N O F T HE GRA NTH .

TH E Adi Gran th in its present state w as collected by Guru A rj un as stated on p lxxxi ; after , .

A rj un the verses o f T eg b ah adur w ere added an d on e single Doh r a o f his son Guru Govind S ingh
-
, ,

in answ er t o some D6h r as o f his father W e h ave n o f urther information h o w the w ritings o f t h e
‘

.
,

predecessors o f A rj un h ad been collected an d preserved an d w e must w holly depend for their auth en ,

ti c it y o n the testimony of A rj un himsel f .

Be sides the w ritings of the S ikh Gurus consider able extr acts from the w ritings of famous ,

Bh aga ts w ere also inserted in the Gr anth the w orks o f K abi r ar e still ext ant in India as they ,

w ere preserv ed by his disci ples the K ab i r p an th i s w h o h ave a con sider able est ablishment at Ben ares
'
-
, , ,

but hi therto few selections only h ave been published of them though they ar e far superior in form
‘
,

as w ell as in origin ality o f thought t o the v er sifi c at i on s o f the S ikh Gurus The w ritings o f the .

other Bh agats seem t o be lost as I w as never able in spite o f m ani fold rese arches t o detect a trace , , ,

o f them ; perh aps on e piece or another m ay yet be f ound i n progress o f time .

N e arly al l the p anegyrics o f the Bh atts w ere composed for th e occ asion an d are abject flatt eries ,

w i thout an y intrinsic v alue w h atever ; they w ere a p p arently all added by Guru A r j un himsel f .

The authors o f the Gra nth are th ere fore the f ollo w ing
( A ) S tick Ga m a
. B ab a Nan ak ( Mah A ng ad ( M ah I L ) A m ar di s ( Mah . . .
-
.

Ram di s ( Mah - A rj un ( Mah . T eg b ah adur ( Mah Govind S ingh .

-
.

( Mah X ; only on e Dé h ra S ee Tr ansl p

'

. . . .
.

m
-
B
( ) B h agate
. Bén i B h i
. k an Dh ann a F ari d ( S h 2
e k “
. Jai dé v
2
.
a
'

.
3
.
6

K ia b r “
N am d ev
"
. P i p a R am an and ‘

R a v id as
”
. S adbn a S ai n u f’
.
9
. .
n
.

( l 3) S fi r das 18
( l 4) T r il é can “
'

. . . .

In m an y c o pies Ma h X i s n o t added t o this Deb r a tho ugh goo d copies tes t ify t o i t
. . , .

A bo ut B én i ( fi at?) an d B h i k a n n o p art i c ul a r s a r e kn own

2
.

D h an n a ( 13251 ) i s s a id t o h a ve b ee n a c ul tiva to r ( J at) S ee Tr a n sl p 668 n ote 2 H e b ecame a d isciple

a
. . .
, .

A b out S h ekh F a ri d see T r a n sl p 68 5 n ote 4

4
o f Ram an a n d S ee P rice Hi n d i S el ec t io n s p
.
1 24 , , . . . .
, .

J ai d é v ( m ) 2
S ans k 3 11 1 3 t h e well kn ow n auth or o f t h e Gi ta g ovind a
5 - - .
.
,

S ee abou t K a bi r T ran sl p 1 26 note 1 ; p 93 no t e 1

6
.
, . .
, .
,

7
N am d ev (X 11 1 3 3 fr e q uently only m m ) w as a calico pri n ter
,
a f a m ous B ha g at w h o i s c o n -
,

side r e d t h e firs t M a r athi w ri t e r ; h i s ve rs e s a re th e re fore p a r t icula rly i tere sti n g in a li n guistic poi nt o f vi e w n .

S ee a bou t him T ra n sl p 93 n o te I . .
,
.

8
P i p a R55 5 o f t h e f ort o f Gan g a r a un VIE 3 11 ( m ) a s h e is s tyl ed by the B h ak t a m al a ( see
‘
-
,
,

P rice H i ndi S elec tions p

,
w as first a vota ry o f t h e D 6 v i but b ec a m e af ter wa r d s a d iscipl e of R am an an d
, .
.
, .

R am an an d ( a bo ut A D a discipl e o f R am an u j T welve d isci pl es o f Raman an d ar e m ention ed

. .
.
,

a mo n g them K a bi r Rav i d as P i p a Dh a n n a et c
,
R am an an d re ceived m en o f al l c a ste s a s h i s d iscip l es
, , , .
,

a n d d e cla re d t h at t h e k n o w l e dg e o f B ra hm m a de a m an free fr om all soci al b o n d s .

S ee ab out Rav id as T r a nsl p 1 3 0 n ote 3

1° .
, . .
,

n
S adh n a w as a bu t ch e r ( M W) No thi ng p arti cula r i s know n a bout him i f we abst ract from th e t wo . ,

w o n der ful stories r el a te d a bout h i m i n t h e B h ak ta m ala

-
.

S aiun i s s a id t o h a ve b een a b a rb er (3 T6 ) H e i s also en um er ated a mong t h e tw elve disciple s o f

1
2 .

Ram anan d who m h e himsel f quo t es ( Rag D h a n as a r i S aip u)

,
,
.

S fi r d as a B rahm an w a s fi rst a n A m i n ( com m i ssion er) o f t h e E m p e ror but squan dered t h e mon ey o f th e
1’
, ,
,

dis t ric t trea s ury o n s a i n ts He fled th en t o t h e forest o f Vrin d avan an d becam e himsel f a Bh a g a t
.
.

A bo ut T r i l odan see T ra n sl p 1 26 note 4 ; p cxxiii . .

,
. .
c xx O N T HE C O MP O S ITIO N O F T HE GRA NT H .

Gan gs Har iban s

( C ) Bha g at Bh al h au Bh ik a Das ( Dasu ) Jal an
. .
. .
. . . .

Jal ap K al ( K alu K alhu ) . K al asu . K al asah ar . K i r at u . Mathura .

.
,

N al . Rad . S al ( S alh ) .

The Bh att K alasu eulogiz ed B abs Nan ak ; K al asah ar an d K alu : Guru A ngad K ai n Jsl ap K i ratu , , ,

Bhi k i S al an d Bh al h au: Guru A m ar—d i s ; K alu K al asah ar Nal Rad D asu Jalan Gan gs M athura
, , , , , , , , ,

K i rat u an d S al : Guru Ramd as ; K alu K al as ab i r M athur a an d H ar iban s : Guru A rj un Thence it w ou

,
ld ,
.

a ppe ar th at the Bh att K al asu lived tow ards the close o f the life o f Nanak o r under Guru A ngad ;
,

Jal ap Bh i ka an d Bh al h au under Guru A m ar d i s ; K i rata Nal Rad D asu Jal an Gan gs an d S al

,
-
, , , , ,

under Guru Ram ass an d K alu K al asah ar Mathura an d H ar iban s under Guru A rj un The panegyric
-
, ,
.

o f A n ga d w as composed under Guru A rj un very likely t o fill up th e gap ,

.

The Gran th itsel f consists o f the foll ow ing portions

I The Jap ( or J ap j i ) an introductory ch apter by Nan ak
.
, ,
.

II The S o dam consistin g o f extracts fro m Rag Asa an d B ag Gfi j ri used by the S ikhs as
.
,
,

evening prayer ( U fi IBTW) together w ith

III S o p a r t / m con sisting o f extracts fr om B i g Asa
.
,
.

I V S okzl d consisting of extracts fr om the Rags Gauri Asa an d Dh an as ari used as a prayer
.
'

, , , ,

before retiri ng t o rest .

These pieces w ere intended for devotion al purposes an d therefore put at the beginning of the Granth .

Then f ollo w
V The 1 369 8 wh ich form the bo dy o f th e Granth
.
,
.

S iri Rag R ag Gau d (3 1 31

( 2) sh (an: m
Rag Ma ) . Rag Ramk ali 31 W ) .

B i g Ga ur i (3 1 31 W 33 ) . R ag N at n ar ai n ( 3 1 31 W ) .

B i g Ass m m) . Rag Mal i gaura (3 131 ’

W N W) .

Bi g a n (3 1 31 Rag Mar s ( 3 1 31 m g) .

B i g Dé v gan dh ari (3 1 31 S w i ms?) R ag T a kh ari 3 mg?)

( 7) Ri g B ih fi gr fi ( 3 1 31 Rag K é dsr s ( 3 1 31

Ra g V adh an su ( E TH Rag Bh ai r au ( 3 T3!

‘

I
Rag S orathi ( 3 1 31 333 1 s )
‘

. B ag Basan t u( 3 131
Bi g Dh an as ari ( 3 1 3! rang ( 3 1 31
Bi g S i
B ag Jai t siri (3 1 31
'

W ) . Rag M al ar ( 3 1 31
B i g T é di (an : Rag K an ara ( 3 131 m )
’
.

Rag B ai r a r i ( 3 1 31
‘

W ) . n K au ai; ( a m 3 W ) .

B ag Til an g ( 3 131 '

W ) . R ag P rabh at a ( 3 1 31

Reg S fi h i ( 3 1 3; grit ) . B ag Iaij av an ti (3 1 3!

Rag B il av al u ( 3 T3! W ) .

The verses of th e di ff erent Gurus h ave been distributed into these fore mentioned Rags appar ently -
,

w ithout an y le adi ng principle as h a rdly an y verse is inter n ally connected w ith another
,
The n ame .

o f the B ag is there fore a mere superscription w ithout an y ref erence t o its contents A t t h e c on ,
.

elusion o f a Rag frequently some s ayings o f on e or more Bh a gat s ar e added w hich seem t o h ave ,

been selected in the s ame arbitrary w ay as ch ance might o ffer them N 0 system n or order is there .

f ore t o be looked for in an y o f the Rags In the first four Rags the most i mportant m atter was .

There w er e o rig i n ally o n ly th irty Rags ; th e l ast , Rag l a ij av a n ti

.
, w as composed by T eg b ahadur -
, an d

con t a ins o n ly four ver ses .

c x xn O N TH E L ANGU A GE AN D TH E ME T RE S U S E D I N THE GRAN T H .

O N THE L AN GU A GE AND T HE ME TRE S U S E D I N TH E GRANTH .

Fa o n the foreg oing survey of th e v arious contributo r s t o th e Granth it m ay be e asi ly inferre d that ,

the idiom o f the Granth is not the s ame throughout ; it v aries considerably according to the time
or t h e province in w hich th e author lived Though the Granth as reg ards its contents is perhaps
.
, ,

the most sh allo w an d empty book th at exists in proportion to its siz e it is on the other hand in
, , , ,

a l i n guistic point o f vie w o f the gre atest inte rest t o u

,
s as it is a re al tre a sury o f the old Hin du
,
i

d ialects specimens o f w h ich h ave been preserved th ere i n w hich are not to be f ound anywhere else
,
.

The Granth cont ains sufficient m aterials w hich w ill en able us to investigate tho se old an d now
,

obsolete di alects f rom w h ich th e mod ern id ioms h ave h ad their origin so th at the gap, which
, ,

hithe rt o existed betw een the older P rakrit dialects an d the modern l angu a ges of t h e Arian sto ck ,

m ay by a c are ful comp ar ative study of th e s ame be fai rly filled up

,
It is t o be regretted th at th e
,
.
,

oldest an d therefore m ost interesting specimens o f the l anguage of medi aev al India are comparatively
f ew in number .

Very likely th e old est w riter in the collection o f t h e Granth is N d mdev w h o is al so considered ‘

the oldest M arathi poet ; h e lived about th e f ourteenth century o f our er a though w e h ave no m aterials ,

at h and by w h ich w e m igh t be en abled to fix his time m ore accurately

, W e kno w from the Bhakta .

m ale th at he w as a n ative o f the Dekh an an d lived in the tow n of P an dharp ur ( in the Bhakta mal a
,
-

w ritten m an d fi
gm ) being the illegitim ate child of a daughter o f V am d é v an d by pro
'

y ,

f essi on a c alico printer ( n ot a t ailor as Moles w orth w ill h ave it)

-
, The pecul iarities of the modern .

M arath i ar e alre ady visible in h i s compositions though not in such a degree as in the verses cited
,

by Moles worth in h is M arath i E nglish Diction ary Introduction

- xx v i so th at the suspicion arises
, , , ,

that either the verses o f Nam d é v as far as received into the Granth w ere a d apted to the Hindui
, , ,

or th at the verses cited by Moles w orth w ere ad apted to th e modern M arath i In order to illustrate .

h i s style an d its peculi ar gramm ati c al f e atures w e subj oin here a fe w lines t aken fro m Bi g Gauri
,

( Tran sl p 4 8 9 )
. .

Qa m m w e lum m m w mfi nm e u

m
'

n fi v ax sg nafi s fi n nfi afi s n fi z m m sfi n a

P a use .

By stones ar e c aused t o s w im H o w should n ot men by the order of Ram cross ?

God .

S eiz ing the r af t the w hore the hump h a cked wom an w ithout be auty the hunter and AJamal
,
-

w ere brought across .

Th e m an w h o struck t h e fe et ( o f K ri shn a) bec ame em ancip ated I am a sacrifice to the man , ( wh o)

.

utters : Ram !
We have perh aps in the inflection s] (I of M arathi n ouns o f the first declension but the Instrumental ,

case -
affi x a is not y et ad ded
( nor is it in H i n dni ) th e Formative as such ser v ing as Instrumental
, ,
 O N T HE L AN GU A GE A ND T HE ME T RE S U S E D IN T HE GRA NT H .
cxxiii

the s ame as in S indhi an is the M ar athi Elfi n h ow ? In BTW

. w e h ave a p articiple p ast
“

p assive formed by the affi x i al é the conj unctive vow el 2 of the mo dern M ar athi being lengthened
,
-
,
'

t o i an d at the s ame time a short a sound a dded = fi rft fi ; but by the side o f such f orm ations
,
-

w e find al so the regul ar H i n d ui f orm o f 'the p articiple p a st like T h e pronoun o f the first ,

person singul ar i s b ad an d n o t i i as n ow in M arathi ,

Ne arly al l the pos tpositions are still
, .

w anting so th at pieces o f this kind ar e extremely diffi cult t o tr ansl ate

, .

A bout the s ame time lived the Br ahm an Tm l oéan w h o w as like w ise an inh abitant of the
'

Dekhan as m ay be safely concluded f rom the peculiarities of his style w hich resembles very
, ,

closely th at of Nam dé v We subj oin here a s ample of the s ame t aken fro m the S iri Rag ( Transl
. .

p 1 27 III
.
,
.

fm fla fi fs m q rafi a fa w fw s n x
qé fi u
W fius a fa fl fa inf ant ! n i m i méa #311 3 u3
’ ‘

mm fi fi nfi s w s fi mn fi fi u
'

i mfi 1:3 31e n
w as m aafi s n m fi fxx mme fi fi m x m fiz u8

On
diffi cult terrible ro ad thou must go 0 m an ( w hither ) sun an d moon do n ot penetrate
a , , ,
.

The infatu ation o f the M ay a is then f orgotten ( by thee ) w hen th o u h a st left behind the w orld ,
.

T o d ay he h as become m ani fest i n my mind Dh arm r auh as been see n

-
,
-
‘
.

H i s very strong b ands bre ak in pieces ( men ) be fore him I c annot abide ,
.

We meet h ere like wise w ith the forms 3 3 3 mg , HEW by the si de of g fg n n, w hich w e h ave
noticed in Nam d é v .

( Jay adé v a) though the time in

he lived h as hith erto not yet been fixed w ith w hich
'
'
J azdéo ,

certainty belongs in al l likelihood also t o the f ourteenth century W il so n w h o en umerates him

,
.
,

w ith the disciples o f R am an and is app arently mist aken as the Bh akta m al a no w here states th a t
'
-
, ,

Jai dé v w as a disciple o f Ram an an d w hich it certainly w ould h ave d one if an y tr adition t o this
,

purport h ad been current among the Vaish n av as But w e consider it equ ally w rong i f L assen ( Gi ta .
,

govind a P r olegomen a p iv ) is i nclined t o d ate b ack the Gi ta g ovinda to the tw el fth century of
, ,
. .
-

o ur er a ( about ag ainst such a supposition his o w n P rakrit verses as pre served in the Gr an th , ,

spe ak to o strongly w hich deci dedly be ar th e stamp of a l ater age O nly the f ollo w ing piece of
,
.

Jai dé v w hich is a curious mixture o f S anskrit an d the vulg ar tongue i s contained in the Granth
, ,

( Rag Giij ri S ri Jai d é v )

'

m fi fufi wfi m fz m fi u
ifi m
e ss w fqfi u fi a fz fé fi m s u
i

m
i

fla m m a fi mfi uufir mfi fi m fi mf
x fi fi a wn fi x m a a mfi m s fsfl i u3 01 6 ’
"

fes fw m n fi m fi n w va nfi afi s q u
‘
r

s a gs s re w figw fi uan q fix fi ri ua
553 1 f? fgnfi : W 316 a fi rfi xfi z m esa? n
fi a m w flx m i s a e qu a mé u s
Ufi m fx a fi wfi am fi z m m m i n
fi x fd n fi x fd e fi x fd m u8 ‘

W e i fi ii fi vrfi r m m fi fi z ui u
fi fi a mf w sfl a ei sa ss m nfi uu
 O N T HE L A N GU A GE A N D T H E ME T RE S U S E D I N T HE GRA NT H .

The primeval S pirit (is ) incom p arable ‘ first steeped in love , ,

.

Joy ful far from n ature though in thought pene trating al l

,
2
,
.

P ause .

O nlythe n ame o f Ram is be auti ful U tter ( the n ame ) consisting o f the essence o f nectar ! .

By the remembrance o f w hich there is n o burning “ ( in the he a rt ) neither fe ar of birth th e ”

, ,

trouble o f o l d age ( an d ) de ath .

thou desirest the seo m fi tu of Y am a an d th e others ( kno w ) f ame ( an d ) w elfare ( are to ) 5

( I f ) di re ,

the deer o f meritorious w orks .

In th e present p ast an d future ti m e he is equ ally continuing b e is extremely propitious and

, ,
6

tender .

Greediness an d th e other ( vices ) looking upon another s w ife ( an d ) wh at ( is ) tw ofold conduct

’

du ality ) .

H av ing given up al l bad w orks flee t o the asylum o f the discus holder O f oolish on e ! -
,

Devotion to H ari ( must be ) ( in one s ) he art only ; wh at is the use o f w orks ( an d ) w ords ? of ’

Y 6 g o f s acrifice o f alms an d austerity ?

, ,

Mutter : G6 v in d Govin d 0 m an this is the step t o every perfection

, ,
”
.

Jsid ev ( says ) : th e coming o f th at ( m an ) is fruitful al l ( his ) regeneration is gone 7

,
e
.

O f R d m é n mzd lso w h o lived tow ards the en d

a ,
of the fourtee n th o r the beginning o f th e fi fteenth
century ,
on e piece only is contain ed in th e Granth . It is f ound in th e B i g B asant an d runs thus

m bit s wfa m ir fi a n fi m fe s x e fi wx sf sfi m
’

as x rnb
t s fii fi fin n wfi a é n ém w afi uu
fi m m fi ré m wm i m fir ua
'

w efi q ow s rfs n

m a mfi m w w x nx uts sfi rfi fi ns mm n

fi z um x ns fifi fifi n g m xg a mi fi a fii rfi m x fifi z 11 a

i fis m ia
’

a fs q a fi n fm nfi fivm p m i s i n

mm fi z m rm m um mm afi dtz m
‘

ns

P a use .

W here sh all it be gone colour is applied t o ( my ) h ouse body )

, S ir ? .

My re asoning faculty does not move m y mi nd h as become l ame , .

I All
th e MS S . r ea d : fi xfi f fi
but th re mu st b e so m e m i stake o r anoth er in th is w ord ; ve ry l ikely it
, e

i s m i s ur i t te fo r : W
n u( S a sk $ 3 11 31 u c h a g i g 11 it l 1 o a d a w ith as i n m a ny o ther i n stan ces)
n .
, n n n
, .

be i g ex c e ssi v e j o y 3 3 is sh m te n ed fl om
2
1 13 3 1? 3 3 , n

3
? must h er e ( a s 1 n v 3 ) be se p ar ted fr o m i t is the P 1 k ut r el ative eut c 1 11 but th e a a n
'

A n usv r a S e 1 y fr eque tl y o t w r it t en i n t h e G1 a t h
'

a I v n n n .

{F EE L i stead o f fi fi
4
fr o m t h e S a sk root fi f
'
i n t r a n sitively used he re
3 g
‘ ‘
n
a , n .
, , .

W
5
, d i sc o m fi t ure S an s k “ .
1 313 , 1) b ei n g freque tly exch a ge d n n fo r t h e sem i vo wel y
- .

W W m i l a t r Hi d ui W3
6
( i
sa m - a b y a
) S a n sk .
HR an d fil , n e n .

mfifi m un) , the p t i iple p t us d s

ar c s ubs t ti t h e co m i g
as e a a an ve : n .

3 33
:
S a
n sk . bl o w n , b udd d ( l ike flo w er) f r ui tful b ea ri g i t s f uit
e a
, n r . It is an idio matic
ex p r essio n :
“
t h e d e s t in y of a m an b ud i i t c om e t o i t ful fil m nt
s,
”
. e . s s e .
 O N T HE L ANGU A GE A ND T HE ME T RE S U S E D IN T H E GRAN T H .

P anj abi w as only intelligi ble t o the people of the P anj ab The idiom of the S ikh Gurus however .

is n ot the pure Hi n dui but a sort o f mixture o f both di alects as the y f requently introduce pro
, ,

v i n c i al i sm s w hich give a peculi ar colouring to their diction but at the s ame time bring it ne arer
,
,

home to the understanding of their countrymen The Granth o f Gav i n d S ingh is composed in pure .

H i n dui as he received his e arly education in H indu

,
stan but it h as thereby become ne arly unintelligible ,

t o th e S ikhs of the P anj ab t o w hom it must be transl ated i f anything is t o be expl ained to the m
, ,

f rom it .

It w ould exceed the limits o f th ese rem arks w ere w e t o enter more f ully into the pecul iarities ,

o f the idiom o f the Gr anth w hich c an only be tre ated in a gramm atic al an alysis of the same ,
A few .

hints w hich in a gre at me asure also re fer to the ol d H i n d ui m ay su ffice here The gen er al impression
, ,
.
,

w hich w e receive f rom the study o f the Granth is th at the gr a m m atic al forms of the langu age are n o t , ,

y et firmly fixed but ar e r ather in a state of transition the genius o f the l angu age app aren tly endeavour
, ,

ing t o build up a n ew structure o ut o f the ruins of the P r akrit w hich h ad gone to pieces We find ,
.

there fore a number o f forms promiscuously employe d as us age h ad n ot yet decided for a few s elect ,

ones This is m anifest n ot only in the in flexi on o f the nouns f or w hich a n ew w ay h ad to be

.
,

f ound o ut the ol d P r akrit termin ations h aving al most total l y been lost in the progress of ti me
, ,

but also in th a t o f the verbs .

A s regards the declension al process o f t h e nouns most of them h ave still a voc al ic termination ,

(u o
, , which is very closely t o be attended t o as the right understanding of a sentence frequently ,

depen ds on the voc ali c termin ation o f the noun or nouns In l ater MS S the fin al vowels ar e . .

f requently dr opped as the copyists h ad n o longer a right understandi ng of their gramm atical relation
, ,

o r c arelessly exch anged so th at a sentence becomes e asily con f used thereby This i s especiall y th e .
,

e ase w ith the L ocative singul ar w hich ends in 2 ( i f the noun in the No m i n ati v e termin ate in n ) and
'

, ,

the A bl ative singul ar w hich m ay likewi se end in 2 ( in the modern P anj abi i n i ) w here th e final vowel
'

, ,

in in ferior copies is n ot seldom either dropped altogether or con founded w ith n w hich represents “ ”

the Nomin ative The N omin ative plural is variously formed an d in like m anner the Formative
.

singular an d plural the detail s of w hich w e must forego here , .

The ease affi x es an d postpositions ‘ are m anifold as m ay be expected at th e time of the recon
-
,

struction o f a sh attered l angu age I n the Gen i tiv e w e fi n d the affixes fi r h 2 an d 1 511 31 c m, which
'

a1 e peculi ar t o the ol d Hi n d u i an d the inflected affi xes 31 led 33 1 It em 6 1 5d HTfi t 31 r d ( al so

’ ' '
’
"
, , , , ,

3 1 r d ) the P anj ab 1 :51 dd an d even t h e S in dhi W T san dd I n the D atw e the postpositions a re Icon
’

, , .
,

5 Lo 3; t u ( kn ) :5; km 3m t alk ? a ny is klzé ( as in S indhi ) mf g 21 m snfi s Mom 3 0 m :

,
-
, ,
‘
, ,
'

special P anj ab 1 forms ar e $ 6? n an K n u K 226 the Geniti v e oase affi x fU 722 is as in , ,

v
'

P r akri t also used f or the D ative an d peculi ar t o the ol d H i n dui T h o A oc usat2v e 1 s either i dentical
' '

, , .

w i th the Nomin ative o r express e d by t h e D ative e ase si gns In the A bl a tw o w e find the affixes -
.

fU i n U 7 m U h u 6 6 m a n f g 2 an d the postpositions W U I
E 1 3 3 tlzd m hu
'
' '
czakn 7C da
’

, , _
, , , , , , , ,
_

H th e In the L ocatw e a2ngul ar w e meet w ith the affi x 2 in th e

'
'

tm " so et c , .
,

I
C a s e-a ffi xes
c all tho se re mn an ts o f th e ol d P rakr it ca s e termina tions w hich ar e still usually c on
we -
,

n ec t ed w i t h th e nou n i t sel f ;
p os tposi t io n s w e ca l l thos e a d ve rbi a l n ou n s w h i ch a r e n e w e m ploye d t o m ake up ,

fo r t h e c a se s a n d w h ic h ar e s till w r i tte n s ep a rat ely T o t h e affi xe s w e m ust al so add a n k d an d i ts deriva .

t i r e s th o ugh t hey a re n o w al ways w ritten as s

,
p a r a te w or d s a s t h ey a r e originally an a ffi x ( S a n sk Hi) a n d e , .

i n flec ted ( for they t ur n th e n oun w h ich th ey follo w p rop erly into an a dj e ctive) U nder cas e sig n s we c o m
, , .
-
”

preh en d bo th a ffi xes a d pos t posit ions n .

T h a t t h e H in di an d H i d u s ta i ké ( a L ss) i s r eally a Dati v e p o st p o sit io n is suffi c ie tl y b or n e o ut by th e

2
n n -
n
_
,

Hi n d ui ; s o me d i s puted po i t s i H i d fi sta i g ramm a r a r e t o be s e t tled a ccor di n gly irresp ec t ivel y 0 f th e

n n n n
,

d c i sio n s o f t h e Ma ul a vi s w h o h a v e n o id ea o f t h e o l d l l i d ui
e , n .
 O N T HE L A NGU A GE A ND T HE ME T RE S U S E D I N T H E GRANT H .
cx x vn

L ocating p l ur al w ith ( n ow pronounced the fi

or the Loc ative is expressed by me an s of
af x i

postpositions as a ma2 In f? md l n, fafi

'

etc The I n str umen tal is generally expressed by

'

, , .

the F or mative ( w ithout a c ase sign ) or by the affix which out wardly coincides with the A bl ative
-
.

But the p ostpositions an d the c ase signs general ly ar e as yet very sp aringly used, the noun is usu ally
-

put i n the Form ative, an d the re ader h as to find out f or himself its gramm atic al connexion ; in many
sentences n ot a si ngle case sign is to be m et w ith so th at the tran sl a tion c an onl y be mad e accordi ng to
-
,

conj ect ure This un settled state o f th e l an gu age o ften occasi ons very gre at perplexities
. .

The verb is as yet very littl e developed Gene rally three tenses onl y ar e in use : th e P r esent .

( in th e later Hin dui the P resent indefinite an d in H indi the the P reterite an d the ,

Future O f th e Imperfect I h a ve found only a few curious f orms ; the P erfect an d P luperfect
.
,

w hich very seldom occur ar e compound tenses ,

.

The P resent tense o ff ers a gre at v ariety o f personal termin ations m any of which coincide the , ,

A n usvar a being generally dropped in the wr iting o f the Granth so that th e person c an in m any ,

instances onl y be f ound out by th e conte xt The F utur e offers t w o forms one of w hich is m ade up .
,

by the terminations I n i t} etc corresponding to th e P rak rit termin ations W W m

, , .
mf g
, , , ,

etc an d the other of which is a compound tense as n o w used i n H indi an d Hi n dfi stan i ( see my
.
, ,

S indhi Gramm ar p 2 9 1 annotation ) ,

.
, .

The P reterite is m ade up either by me ans of the p articiple p ast alone or by personal termin a
tions a dded to it ( as in S in dhi ) .

There is still a regular p assive voice for th e P resent Imperati v e F uture an d p art ly al so for , , ,

th e P re terite w hich h as been lost already ( w ith a few exceptions ) in the l ater H in dui , which sh o ws
,

the first attempts to m ake up f or it by h avin g r ecourse to a composition .

” “
There is not only a p articiple p resent active formed by the termi nations mai d, a tu
“ ” “
an t , , ,

”
“
at
”
,
“
id
”
or dd
“ ”
but also a p articiple present p assive ormed by the termin tio
,
f a n
“
i a tu , ,

“
f at
”
.The p articiple p ast offers still the older f orm i nn ) m any are also directly t aken
over f rom the P rakrit w ithout any further assimilation To this must be added that p ronomin al .
'

suffi xes ar e not un frequen tly con n ected w ith the verb especial ly in the P reterite more r arely so w ith , ,

t h e noun In S in dhi this is still ve r y common an d quite a peculiar fe ature o f this idiom but in
. ,

the l at er Hi ndui only a fe w trac es of it are to be met with an d in H indi an d Hind ostani it is ,

alto gether u nkno wn .

From these few rem arks it m ay be in ferr ed th at the idiom of the Granth is well worth a closer ,

investi gation as we sh all thereby get a cle arer insight into the form ation of the modern Nor tt di an
,

v ern a cul ars the peculiarities o f w hich c annot be full y l ai d open w ithout going b ack to the source
,

f r o m w hich they h ave sprun g an d which h as f ortun ately been preser v ed to us in the Gra nth
,
.

Th e w hole Gr anth is w ritten in v erses, as th e H ind u

s have very little taste for prose- compo siti ons .

The arti ficial measures of S anskr it poetry are al l di scarded ; th e metres that are use d in the Granth ,

are eith er ol d P r ai n i metre s or l ater inventi ons perh aps of the poets themselves There are
'

.
,

t wo le ad ing principles in Hi n dui poetry v iz : the verses are me asured by quan ti ty only 2 e by the
'

. .
,
.
,

1
This m ood ( though originally t h e P r esent tense) is in our m odern Hindi an d Hindfi stan i gr am m ars
g ener all y c all ed the A o rist w hich i s quite an in a ppropri a te a ppell ati on
,
In n a t i ve H in d fi l ti n i
g r amm ars it is .

d es ig nated by a s i t in some w ay correspon d s to th e Ar abi c n i w hich De S a cy tran sl a ted by

U ,

A or ist T henc e it w as a pplied al so to the Hindi an d Hin dfi stfi ni

.
B ut it was quite lost s ight of th at t h e .

t echn ic a l terms o f A r abic gramm a r c an n ot be properly ap plie d to t h e Hindu stan i verb wh ich in i t s c o nj uga ,

t ion i s t otally d ifferent fr o m t h e A ra bic verb ; an d i f t h e Maul avi s te rm this tense or r ather mood ( a s it is

al i
the r b c o eri g more suit a ble appellation e a t an y rate must not render it by
n o w) b A a i n o t ff n a w ,
tj ,

a s t his term co n veys a d iff ere nt m ean ing alto gether

“ ”
A or ist ,
.
cxxviii O N T HE L A N GU A GE A ND T H E ME T RE S U S E D I N T H E GRA N T H .

the number of mor as ( n ot by nu mber o f syll ables or fixed feet) an d they must r hy me together ; the ,

metres ar e there fore al l se c alled nzd tr d Ehan das ( regul ated by quantity ) as they are in tended for
- ,

singing or a rhythmic al recit ation The gre atest attention is p aid t o the rhyme as in our modern
1
. ,

poetry ; an d if the poet c an not comm and it re adily t h e l ast w ord is tortured into it an d thereby ,

frequently so di sfigured th at its origin al f orm i s h ardly recognis able

,
.

It c annot be our object here t o give a full description o f al l the metres employed l n t h e Gr anth ,

as this w ould c arry us beyon d the limits o f a prelimin ar y discourse ; w

e must content ourselves with

l aying dow n here the general rules an d giving a survey o f the most common metres w hich will en able ,

the student t o find o ut by sc an ning those fancy metres of some poets to w hich n o n ame h as bee n ,

given in the Granth as ve r y likely no n ame w as kno wn for them w here as the usual metres are
, ,

al w ays indic ated by th eir appropri ate n ames The S ikhs themselves seem n o w t o h ave lost all .

kno wledge o f the metric al l aw s o f the Granth for I never met a person wh o could give me the ,

le ast clue t o them an d the le arned Br i h m ans disdain t o re ad the Granth

,
.

The lengt h of the syll ables i s determined by allotting t o a short syll able on e m at ré or kala ,

2 e mora an d t o a long syll able t w o m at r as A syll able is long either by n ature ( as d i 21 E 6

' '

. .
,
.
, , , , ,

o r by position ( w hen a n atur ally short vo w el is f ollo w ed either by a do u ble or a conjunct

an
)
conson ant ) ; but i f the second p art o f a conj unct conson ant be a semi vo w el a 72 p b or 12 the pre -
, , , ,

ceding vo w el m ay rem ain short if the metre requires it O n the other h and a single consonant
,
.
,

m ay be doubl ed in order to g ain a long syll able

,
this is especi ally the c ase i f it be originally , ,

doubled l n P r akrit ; for instance f3 l ! tis n m ay also be pronounced tissu ( P r akrit fm ) To this cir
' '
.

c um st an ce especi al a ttention must be p aid as the doubli n g o f a conson ant is never indic ated i n ,
.

the w riting o f the Granth n ot even in such c ases w here in common pronunci ation it is still doubled
,
.

A diphthong m ay ag a in be severed into t wo short syll ables as i w herever ,

-
,

require d by the m etre A n aturally long vo w el m ay be pronounced sh or t ; this is especial ly th e

.

c ase w ith é an d 6 w hich m ay be considered as an c ep s as in P r akrit ; e ven the diphthongs ai an d on

, ,

m ay be rendered short under the pressure of the metre O n the other h and t h e poets t ake th e .
,

li berty o f lengthening a short vo w el w henever n ecess ary f or t h e s ake o f the metre n ot only at
, ,

the end o f a verse or hemistich but also in the m idst of a verse though this is comparati vely
, ,

seldom the c ase T w o vo w els m ay be contracted into o n e especi ally 2 w ith a follo wing vowel 2
' '

.
, ,

bein g ch anged in th is c ase into th e semi vo w el y as y n ; even a short an d a long vo wel may
-
,

be contra cted as 2125 t o (1 2 ( short o r long as the metre m ay require it )

'

, , .

A nother point w hich must w ell be attended t o i s th at t h e pronunciation o f the Hi n d u

, i differs

gre atl y in poetry from th at usu al in prose In prose the conson ants ar e n o w frequently mute an d .
,

so al w ays a fin al con son ant cont ai n ing short a ; but in sc an ning a verse n o vo w el is as a rule t o , , ,

be p assed e v er ; even a conjunct conson ant must n o w an d then be sep ar ated into its constituent
p ar ts ( by the inserti on o f 2 or a) in order to gai n the necess ary number o f m atr as
'

, .

1 .
— THE D O HA (OR D O H RAV A N D S O RA TT HA .

The D 6h r a w hich is comparatively little used in the Granth is a distich the tw o verses of
, , ,

w hich rhyme at the end E ach verse consists o f tw enty f our m atras w hich ar e distributed into
'

. -
,

feet ( m ) o f 6 4 3 an d 6 4 1 m at ras respectively there being a c aesur a at the c n d of every ,

'

In the Granth the key n o t e i s therefo re g enera lly a dded a s t h e ver se s o f the Gr a nth are still
-
,

sung in t h e public w orship o f the S ikh s e sp ecially in t h e Har m and ar at A mrits ar a ccomp anied by stringed
,
-
,

m usic al instrume n ts .

S ansk ri t ffl m P rakrit US T; dé h ar a usu ally n o w pro n ou n ced d 6h r 5 i s the dim inutive o f it

2
( Th
R ,
) e .

D 6h 5 is an o l d P rakrit m e t re a s it is al ready found in K al id asa s V ik r a m d r v agi edited b B ollens en,

’
,
( y
S t P etersburg
.
, p 55 an d p 3 73 . . .
 GU A GE AND T HE ME T RE S U S E D I N T HE GRAN T H
O N THE L AN
.

cm

fi fi m mfir m
’

m m ai fl
’

fest? ofi n a

5
5 5
6 cit alv ai
-

ddls uhari 111 5 11 sé sé kar | ta §]pi k ar ali

‘
ufi m nm n fs fi ssafi m é t n s
’

fi z z: :7 1 i ara
U V

lbh au ga li
v

p ati gav a li n a n aka h ari gu na ni r

n i n d aka I n
p 1 a bh a
u 31 K .

3 — THE
. T IP A DA ( on TRIP A DA ) .

The Tip ad a is essentially th e s ame as the Dup ada It consists as a rule o f a stan z a of three . , ,

distichs t o w hich generally a Rah a u is added ; the rhyme generall y v aries in every distich T here
,
.

is a consider able v ariety in the sc ansion some distichs being sc anned by 6 5 4 2 an d 6 + 5 ,

or 3 4 K al a s others by 6 + 5 + 4 + l an d 4 + 1 1 6 or 3 2 K alas ,
,

W a of K abi r aken f ro m Rag Gauri

‘

l
th e a st syll able in this c ase being short e subj oin a Tip a d t . , ,

K abi r 1 9 ( Tran sl p 4 6 4 )
. .

1 511 12511 5 syii p ali ai na lh i t5| l i n man s dé rams 11 5 h ai 111 3 111 “

16 16 32 K .

um fifi : 2m: m m 3 1% n rfim n 11 1 1:1s 1 33 m: 5131 :12: m fi m n uatné

'

u
5h é mbh i r al mii 2
1 11 11 11 1
7 kari j an ly a s ah j i subh a]i a mé r a I ma
n ti m an ly a
l7+ l 7 = 34 K .

q ua afi : s ta ms '
x t n f ann n a m 3 311s as wf a
‘
n nfi z nn ua
brah am e1 kathi kathi antu In a pa i | a ra ma bh agati l haith e gb a lri ai a |
K .

W 3 5113 €8 86 a fs fi rm fi
'

ufi a ss are 3 31% 15 1
-
51 3 1 1 11 11 3
u
'

11 5151 ; I malti ting n t alma bh agati l n15

; bh aig1
17 17 34 K .

4 .
— THE C AU P A DA .

The C aup ada is in very frequent use in Hin dui poetry, the gre atest p art o f th c Granth be ing
composed in this metre I n the Ra m e ya n o f Tu1s1 d as th e C aup ad a is usually a stanz a of four
.
-

tetrastichs e ach o f w hich consists of t w o distichs th e t w o verses o f e ach dist ich again al ways
, ,

rh yming at the end E ach verse contains sixteen m atr as th e distich there f ore thirty two There
.
,
-
.

is a c aesura i n e ach verse after the sixth seventh eighth ninth or tenth mora ; the l ast syll able , , ,

of a verse is gener all y long but it m ay be also sh or t

I
We subj oin here a tet i ast i c h from T ulsi das
, .

H indu 1 edition o f Tuls i das Ram e y an Medic al H all P ress Ben res p l st C au
( a ,
3 29 ,
a p al
, .
,

Colebro ok e state s I c p 8 5 t h at ea c h verse ( i e distich ) contain s thi rty moments ( s even times 4
, . . .
, . .
2)
an d t ermi n a te d by a lon s ll a ble T hi s i w ro g sho w by t h ex mpl uo t e d fr om Tul si -das th e
g y s n a s n e. a e q , ,

K amayan o f whom h e s eems not to h ave exami ned hi ms elf .

 O N THE L ANGU A GE AN D TH E ME T RE S U S E D IN THE GRANTH .

u
it a s sh am : il t fw i m u
’

s “I n an w as
; s
0 0 " v v v v V

a
ye bh ar ata I s ang a sab a l 6ga [l kr i sat an u sr 1 r aghu bi ra biy 6ga
16 : 32 K .

3 1 11 3 11 at es 3v
1 are a mg a re ufit 3 ma m
£1
0 - V V

ba madev a basi sh th a l muni n ay aka de k h é prabhu m ahi dh ari dh a

n ii 51 3 511 51| 1

16 16 : 32 K .

In the Gran th al so the Gaup ada consists as a rule o f f our tetrastichs e ach cont aining two distichs
'

, , ,

o f thirty t wo m atr as sever ally , one or t w o Rah au

-
s consisting of one distich being usuall y adde d , ,

to the st an z a We subj oin an example t aken f rom R ag Gauri Mah III , 1 ( Transl p 222)
.
, . . . .

gun mili ai h ari m éli h 61 ap e méli m il av ai s6 1 || 16 + 16 .

3131 1 13 f afi z
‘
1 1 11 1 1 71 1 6 11 m us t ? “
m éra prabh uaa ; B sp a j an ai uh iik am e m é l é 3
. 5d pa
éh ég ai u
16 16 .

wfs ax
s 3 3ft 36 m in? fifi r w fe nm fi n
af fi ne
v

sati gura k ai bh ai bhramu bh a u j ai bh ai r aj a i s ac a l rangi s amai 1 6 + 1 6 '

m m
V
a fi ufi s afi w fi ufi m 13 3 1 31 m fs m fi mfa n 1
U V
U

g uri m ili ai I h ari m am v as ai subh ai mer a prabhu bh ar a ki mati n ah 1 p ai [l 1 6 16 .

m m nis x um at s
V -
n fi zn s ari? HW
U U - V
II Q
1
sa bdi sal ah ai a ntu na p ar 1 v 1 au r m ér a pr abhu b akhes b akh san ah aru I ] 1 6 + 1 6 K .

But there are also m any C aup ad a s 1 n the Granth consisting onl y of one distich an d a h alf or even
'

of one distich w ith one or t w o Rah au s added In this c ase all the three verses of the tetrastic h .

mus t h ave the s ame rhyme 1 1 9 B i g Gauri Mah V I ( Transl p 24 6 ) . .

,
. .
, . . .

fi x fa fiz m 33 % 3 Tfi n fi 6 u1fi fi ufi m
r U V
m mn m n

kin ; l a1 11 3111 mér a

bidhi kiisa bh ai ky ii p ai a i h ari r a m a s ah ai 16 16 K .

m
-
fif €126 m fm ugfi m 31 3 161 11 1
t
1 3
'
as y ng
v _ U
- :
kus al a gr bi sahh a m ai a 66 m andara sundara chai a 16 K
.

na i m en 11 16 .

m fe m '
m fi mn na
0
v
: :
j an amu g ava ia 1 6 K
'
am
’

j h fi t h e Isl .

E x am ple of a te trastich consisting on l y o f one disti ch

'
, Rag Gauri , Mah V . .
, XX I X ( Tr ansl p . . 26 1 )

fi w fl fi fifi m ufi sfi r é sx fxa fi zfi wa 3 8 751 1 9
— ' V V “ V
pa
y:
na '
u m anu
V

56 p ara1 o s61 j6 t aJ1 c hé dan a I tisn sy r ac an a ll 16 + 16 K

'

a .

5 — . THE P A Nj P A DA .

The P anj p ada occurs but rare ly in th e Granth

'
It consists commonly of fi v e distichs e ach .
,

o f w hich h as i t s o wn rh y me ; one or tw o Rah aus m ay be added to the m Occ asionally the stan z a .

contai ns al so si x disti chs w ith one or t wo Rah aus in a ddition There is a gre at variety of the .

P an j p ada, as n ear l y ev ery di stich diff ers f ro m the other in the number o f the m atras ; the distichs
'
0x 3 x u O N T HE L ANGU A GE AND T HE ME TRE S U S E D I N T HE GRANTH .

are scanned by 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 7 + 1 7 or even 2 0 20 K al as, there b eing a c ac sura in every

, , ,

verse after the seven th eighth ni nth or tenth m o r e , ,

.

A s ex amples m ay serve Rag Asa Mah I XX III consisti ng of six disti chs
'

, ,
. .
,
.
, a P an j p ada with
a Rab au after the first distich ( Transl p 50 3 )
'

. .

é sra ua
‘
mi n in na m uzi n sn m m
V VV V V V — V

m 6 hu s abh a k a ra II m6hu tuma t aJah u I s agala v é kara II 1 5 1 5 30 K

'

m 6hu k ut am bu I : .

m are 3 3 11 am s u mm e rs m ta? 3 % 1 1 613 11 3 111 6 11

— V V V V V V uV tum
V —
n m u ridai I rava1 s ari ra II
V V

m 6 hu ar u bh aramu I t aJah a b1 r a II s a cu a 16 16 : 32 K .

m i l fi mn i? an ; 3 1 : 311 1116 11 3 1 313 :5? 2s1 s L nfi uu

gura di khi a 16 j apn tapu ka ma hi II n am 6h nt fi tai I na t h ai p ahi II 16 16 32 K .

P anj p ada of K abi r Rag Gaur1 XV ( Transl p 4 6 2 )

'
. .
, , .

fi é m fi m uw
éfi m fi am 06 3 11 s fi zfi a 311 61291 11 9
j y ii Jala c h 6d i b ahari bh ai6 mi nd II p hraba j a
n ama h au I tap a
V V
’
. ka
‘

hi n a II 1 7 + 17 34 K .

P anj p ad a o f K ab i r Ra g Gan r1 L ( Tr an sl p
’
. .
, ,

musé m uni m gq ufim m

’

arz i
‘ ’

sn fia fi a
gs na
V V

p év a
karai dina c a ri h ai sa h urar ai Jan a II andh a l6ku na
j n ai I
a m fi rakh a e an a
II 40 K .

6 — . T HE A S TP A DI .
‘

The A stp ad1 w hich is very extensively employed i n the Granth is a st an z a co nsisting usually
, ,

o f eight an d occ asion ally o f more distichs

,
the t wo verses of each distich rhyming together at the ,

end . There ar e al so A stp ad1 s the strophes of w hich consist o f t wo distichs or o f three verses
,

severally in w hich la tter case all the three verses m ust h ave the s ame end rhyme The single ver ses
,
-
.

ar e sc anned by 26 or 24 mora s w ith a c ac su r a aft er the thirteenth mor a so th at a dis tich contains
, ,

either 50 or 4 8 K al as To every A stp ad1 one or t wo Rah aus m ay be added w hich

. never ,

counted .

E g A st p adi consisting o f di s tichs S ir? Rag Mah III II ( Transl p 90 )

.
, , , . .
, . . .

11 6 11 33 1 1 3 111 3 ? “ 33 6 31 13 a
'

h au m ai k arm a k a m av a de I j ama d an dd l agai t in e a ; II 1 3 K . .

m
'

fv wfs '
ara fia fi s a fi as l n fi fi fl fm
'

na
sati guru
V V V
sé
Vub V

h ari liva
Ji sé v an i ar é I sé ti l ai II K .

50 K
a 313 nm
.

fvnmiz n
‘
1 13

m ana re gurmukhi n amu dh1 ai II 1 3 K

qfs 1 3 621
1 as ? fssfemn tam m ats m fi 1 n mfi z usn re u '

dhur i p fi rabi k ar tai l ikh i a tin a gurm ati n a mi s am ai I 1 3 + K .

m ussfi s
' ‘
m aat mfi i m ar
‘

fea s ts x x 3 1 6 11
V V VVV
v i nu s ati gura pr et1 t i na a v a1 I n a mi na Iago bh au I K .

mm m )
'
m1 29 1 1ft! F FE
’

W TFZ M
up anai ukkh u
:
v

p avai I dukh a m ahi s avai

Vs m - V

s s na a ai |I 13 + K .

48 K .

The Gfi ap ai is not t o be fou n d i n th e Granth , but i s much employed by G6 v i n d S ingh .

cm xiv O N T H E L AN GU A GE AN D T HE ME T RE S U S E D I N T HE GRAN TH .

the question i s w h at is m e ant by

,
? The e asiest solution w ould be to understand
by it the S anskr i tz m etr e w hich i s much used i n P r akri t In P rakrit poetry the S an skr i ti is a
'
W .

stan z a consist ing o f four verses w hich together cont ain the number of 9 6 moras e ach verse averaging
, ,

betw een 1 8 an d 28 moras V ery likely by the w ord m fg : a v ari ation of this m etre is intended
.
"
,

as those S l ok s in the Granth d o n o t cont ain the s ame number o f mor as .

The S i ck of M ah I is sc anned by 2 x 5 5 4 2 8 K al as as
. . ,

1 1 1 13 3 fi fimn mi ll fim usrfi i W 31 31 1 1 3 11
—
j a si b agula
I b a dam II sila p u
U V V U V
U V

p ar i Im a dh am K
V

14
p ust a Ika san dh i a +
.

sa .

1 11 m f guu
e:
— V U
311 3 11 3 1 11 8
— U
fsm s fi ve ré
v — v v _ _
‘
u
mukhi Jh fi t h u bibh fi k an a I s aram II t raip a l a I t ib al a bi léai am II 1 4 1 4 2 8 K .

The w hole fi rst s16k cont ains five verses o f this kind an d consequently 5 x 2 8 1 4 0 K al a s .

The 1 18
w hich runs thus
W
} of Mah V ar e sc an ned in a di fferent w ay as sho w n by the first
. .
, S l ok,

kat an ca I m at a k atan éa I pi t a I k at an éa b an it a I bi n é da ut ah a
s
II
” ri a
as? 12
1 3 21 t t i ne d
Si e ? a "

k at an c a I bh r at a I m 1 ta h i t a b andh ava I k at a n c a I m 6hu k uIt am ba té 4 3 4 4 15

4 —I 4 —I 4 12

k atan c a I 11311 2
1 15
1 I moh ani r fi p am p é kh an t é t y agam I karoti 4 3 4 4 15
4 4 4 12 }
m fin m fm m m fi m m u
r ah an t a I s ang a I bh agv an a sim ar an uII n an ak a l abdh y am ac c ut a I tan ah a II 4 3 4 4 15
30 K

1 14 K .

In this $161: the first an d fourth an d the second an d third verse rhyme together an d h ave also the
, ,

s ame number o f moras W hatever h e therefore understood by I n}? m n fi fi so much is evi dent
.
, ,

th at they h ave n o uniform metre as the S l ék s also v ary considerably in the number o f verses
, .

8 — THE
. D AK H A N A .

The Dakh an a is a couplet o f t w o verses w hich rhyme at the end e ach verse being di v ided , ,

by a c aesura into t wo hemistichs after the t w el fth mor a the w hole verse cont aining 1 2 + 1 0 22 ,

K al as w hich m ay be distri buted into Gan as o f 5

, 4 + 3 II 3 4 + 3 A s reg ards the nu mber .

o f m or a s t h e D akh an a there f ore coincides w ith the 8 161: ( see sub

, the only difference being .
,

that th e D akh an a i s al w ays restr icted t o one couplet In the Granth t h e D akh an a is al ways found .
'

i n connexion w ith the so c all ed C h ant ( see the next f oll o w ing metre ) w hich it usu ally precedes
-
, .

We subj oi n t w o B akh ana s f ro m S iri Ri g Ch ant I l 2 Mah V ( Transl p 1 09 )

, , .
, , . . . .

h ath a m aj h ah u m a piri p asé kiu di d ar u II 12 + K .

:13 m y? 1153 8 am
we more 11

s ant a sat an ai l abh a n é I n an aka pr an a adh ar u II 22 K .

44 K .
 O N THE L ANGU AGE AND T HE ME TRE S U SE D IN THE GRANTH .
c xxx v

311 171 mu i=
1 firms“ :
(11111
j én fi
11 ma 5 5 1 11 % £
11 1111 11 1111 5 k r l p al ii ll 12 + 1 o : 22 K .

a? i s? 3 1551 as: 1 12
5 1 11 85 11

l ad dho h abbh é 111 51 5

13 I 1 5 5 11 311 dhami
11 11 111 1 1 ll
111 1 11 12 K .

44 K .

9 — T HE
. CHA NT .

Chant is in the Gr an th the n ame o f a stan z a, which consist s of thre e co uple ts e ach ,

c ouplet h aving its ow n rhyme E ach verse o f the couplet contains 28 moras being sc anned by
. . ,

8 8 8 4 w ith a c esura aft er the sixteenth m or a the w hole couplet theref or e 28 28

a , ,

56 mor as . E g S iri Ra g Ch ant Mah V I , p 1 09 )

, . . . .

fnfi fifs 1 ? $119

‘
se x w as L 1 3 2: 31 % on e 11
V - V

c arana k am al a siu piri ti r 1 ti I| s antan a m am I

a v aé i n II 28 K .

56 K

bh a uI bi p riti
.

dii ti d . 31 11 11 d a sa n ah a bh a Iv aé J1 u II

dasa 11 1 11 23 bh i v éé I hin ii da
r sav ae II {11 5 khi nu d hi r a
j ii 11 111 k arai II 28 K .

56 K .

n am i I 151111 m i n i 11 1 11 1 551; b111 11 11 121 511 11 11 I 5113 m arai II

11 1 11 511 1 28 K .

13135 31% fi rm ? 1 5 7: mm? are m fi r st fi rm awai t n

3 —
e

m ili I g i ves]
i
p r an a a
'

milu m erai p iare I dh a r e II gun a sadh a s an g 28 K .

56 K .

na a n ka ke sua | m 1 dh ari an agr ah u | I m ani t am anki sa Im avae 28 K .

1 68 K .

1 0 — T HE
. P A U RI .

T h e P au ri is on an average a st anz a o f fi v e v er se s ( though i t m ay al so c on tain mo re

or less ) w hich all rhyme together at the end an d ar e divided by a c aesur a into t w o hemis tich s , .

In the Granth th e P auri usu all y f ollo w s aft er one or t wo S 16ks an d con stitutes in connexion with
'

th e S 161: or S 16ks the so c alled 7 d r which is there f ore a mix ed stan z a

-
, The verses of the P auri .

ar e there fore as a rule

,
sc anned in the s ame w ay as the 816k v iz by 1 2 + 1 0 moras which may
, , .
, ,

as in the D akh an a be distributed into Gan as o f 5

,
4 3 II 3 4+ 3 .

We subj oin a P ang1 t aken fr om S iri Rag V 51 Mah I II ( Tran sl p 1 1 3 )

‘
-
. . . .
,

fnfi m fm fg fir tfi ma
‘

o fa n
‘

Ufi
v

ikku II
i
h ar i kk6 kart s . ikh 6 d i b aun'

hari | I 12 + 10 : 22 K .

ser
—
fs as m m n ma ue fe e m
u
11 31 1 i kk asai d ah ai a m aru II ikk6 h ari o itti dh ari K .

Though the word is written here \fifB it must be re a d piri ti , , fo r the s ake of the metr e .
c xxxvi O N T HE L ANGU A GE A ND T HE ME TRE S U S E D IN THE GRANT H .

Ufi fi n fi x afi m fo as e fi s afi u
I? ! y

h ari tis n bin u 11 61 na hi dar n bhr amu bh au d ari k ari I 22 K .

U fa fs fi is W 32 urfs u
‘

fir
‘
e 3a

h ari tis ai n6 s al ahi ji II t udh u r akh ai b ah ari gh ari II 12 + 10 : 22 K .

111% te t r a Erfi z z fm
‘
zw o f: 1 1 m are fe w 3 15
“

1 1

h ari j is a h ari j api bh au b ik h am u t ari II

’
d ay al u
’
n6 h 6i s6 K .

1 10 K .

But the metre o f th e P auri m ay also differ from th at o f the 8 16k as in fact an y metre m ay be ,

optional ly employed as w ell in the 8 16k as i n the P auri so th at t h e app ellation o f S l 6k an d P auri ,

is quite indefinite an d by no me ans implies a fixed o r uniform metre The s afest th ing is al ways .

t o tra ce t h e metre by sc anning W e subj oin here an example o f a 8 16k an d P auri taken from
.
-

Rag Gau ri Bav an ak h ri Mah V X X X V ( Transl p

, ,
in order t o prove this The s16k is
. .
,
. . . .

sc anned by 25 moras distributed into Ganas o f 4 6 6 II 6 3 K al as w here a s th e P au ri is scanned

, ,

by 3 2 mor as distributed into Games o f 2 x

,
K al as In the P auri th e hemistichs are .

occ asion al ly w ritten sep arately ( as verses ) an d rhyme then together the end rhyme being in this ,
-

c ase dispensed wi th .

8 10k .

m m 3 1 11 W WW ni s fi mu
fs fifi i u
n an aka I namu n amu j apu j upi a a ntari b ah ari r angi 4 6 6 I 6 3 25 K .

arfi: 1
13 m e an was: 3 1 1% mu fi fi r II
gu
i
r
p fi r Iai up ad é Isi a n araku n ahi sadh a I s angi II

P aur i .

21711 m t rafir ? 291 03 11 1 11 :1 31 1% 3 1% 251 31 w e? "

n ann a nar alki p arah i t o I n ah 1 II Ja k ai m am I tani n am a baIsah i I 2 x 6 6 +4 2 32 K .

X 1 11 fi rms 313 1 1 1311 $1 m um zn fi z m wfi r m fi fi z

n amu 111 11 11 1 nu gurmukhi j a I j ap ats II bikb ii m ay a I m ahi 11 1 61 I kh ap at é II 2x K .

m m w um afi fi a m w u
n

m
n
a wa
n ann ak a r lu 11 a h 6ta I t a k ahu II n amu m antr a guri di n 6
I Is 11 211111 II 2 X 6 6 4 32 K

n idh a n i dh an a h ari amrit a p fi ré I tah a b aj é n an aka n ub ad a t fi ré I 2 x 6 6 4 32 K .

1 28 K .

S AV A Y Y A (O R S A V A IA ) .

The S av ay y a is a of
different length as it m ay cont ain one t wo or th ree couplets n ow
stan z a , , ,

an d then e v en more O n an aver age the single verse is sc anned by 2 x 8

.
8 8 8 or 32 moras ,

the c aesura divi ding th e s ame into t w o e q ual hemistichs ; but there ar e also verses of 8 8 II 8 + 6 ,

8 8 II 8 5 an d 8 8 II 8 4 moras We meet al so w ith verses consisting only of 8 8 I 8

. -
cxxxviii O N T HE L A NGU AGE A ND TH E ME TRE S U S E D I N T HE GRAN T H .

The second Gath a is couplet sc anned by ( l an dm kd ,

'

a 27 29 an d c al l ed as

L rawfi w aif? w arm fu r 5

3m fi t 123 8 3 n

p r am ano p raj an t i ak asah a I di p a 16a 51 I kh an da h aII

n a 15 12 27 K .

88 3 1 38 m m fi nn fl ag? "
'

gach en a I n ain a bh ar é n a n an aka I bin a I sadh fi na si dh y at é 12 17 29 K .

56 K .

The n ame o f the metre is al w ays added in the Granth w here it is a convention al metre as stated
, ,

alre ady ; w here it is not added it is more or less a fancy metre of the poet S uch stanz as are .
,

design ated by the S ikhs by the general appell ation o f P a m—i ” “

.
 TRA NS L A TI O N O F THE A DI GRAN TH .

The true n ame is the cre ator the S pirit w ithout fe ar , , w ithout enmity h aving ,
a timeless form not ,

produced fro m the w omb 1 .

By the favour of the Guru !

J AP U .
’

At the beginning is the True one at the beginning of the Yug is the T r ue one
, .
3

The True one is 0 Nanak ! an d the True one also w il l be

, .

By meditation ( an d) meditation it ( i e the kno w ledge of the True one ) is not eff ected though I
. .
,

medit ate a hundred thous and times .

By silence ( an d ) silence it is not efi ec ted though I keep on a continual absorption o f mind

‘

, .

The hunger o f the hun gry does not ce ase though I bind together the lo ad o f ( al l ) the w orlds ‘
, .

There may be acquired a thousan d a hundred thous and dexter ities not one goes w ith ( at the ti me
, ,

o f de ath ) .

H o w does one become ‘ a m an of tr uth ( kno w ing the True one ) h o w is the e mb ankment of false ,

hood broken
H e wh o walks in h i s ( i e God s ) order an d ple asure O Nan ak ! ( an d ) w ith ( w hom ) it is ( thus )
'
5
. .
’
,

w ritten .

free fr om the w omb ( the s am e as #313 birth pro duction

: , . O ther fi rms are
E :

3
T h e J ap n i s composed by B ab a Nan ak h imsel f T h e S ikh traditio n runs th us 313 m .
i } .
'

M fw m fi a m m fi m fi m fi fi v fi fi Guru Nan ak h ad a c on .

versation wi th the S iddh s (J ogi s) on th e m ountain S um er u; there the d iscourse o f the J apu j i w as mad e T h e -
.

J apu j i is co mposed i n so cal led We?"( ladd er) verses o f un equal len gth w it hin wh ic h t h e rhyme m ay vary
- -
, , .

# 3 E T # 6 # 3 3 gmt
‘

Mani S in gh c o m m en ts o n thi s : af riz # 3 13 x err

W 313 3 1 : w hen the re w as as yet n o beginn ing o f the world B r ah m was true ( existing ) w hen the
‘

, ,

w orld w as m ad e the n al so B i ah m was t i na

,

9
W 1 etc T here a re s aid to be fou rteen cities seven celestial an d seven sub terrestrial ones the
'
-
, . ,

whol e universe . rim m t o bin d togeth er ( in t o a bundle )

,
.

W i s a p a ss ive for m properly : it i s b ecome n o t as t h e S ikhs n o w explain it : w e be c ome

, , .

m i s a verb al adj e c t i v e w al ki n g
, .
O
L
JA P U 2— 5 .

By ( his ) order ar e m ade the forms ( of all things ) his order ( ho w ever ) c annot be told ,
.

By h i s order are m ade th e livi n g beings by h i s order gre atness is obt ained ,
.

By h i s or der ar e the high an d the l ow by his order p ain a n d ple asure ar e set do w n ,
.

By his order some ar e p ardone d some ar e by his order al w ays c aused to w an der about (in trans
,

migration ) .

E very o n e is un der ( w ithin ) his order exempt from his order is no on e ,

.

0 Nan ak if one underst and his order he w il l not spe ak in self conceit ,
- .

O n e sings his ( i e God s ) po w er i f one h as po w er ( so t o do ) A nother sings ( his ) liber ality if he

’
. .
.
, ,

know s ( h i s) sign .
1

O n e si n gs his be autiful qu alities an d gre atne sses A nother sings a diffi cult tho ught of science .
— .

O n e sings : h a ving m ade the body he reduces it to ashes A nother sings : h aving t aken li fe he gives .

it a gain .

O n e sin gs : he is kn o w n ( m ani fest) ( but ) seen afar off A nother sings : being present he sees in
,
.

the prese n ce .

There is n o end of sayings an d tellings The story story is told by crores crores crores .
, , , .
2

H e ( i a Go d ) goes o n giving they taking become tired

. . F or ages an d ages they go on e atin g
, . .

The L ord goes o n executing his order 0 Nan ak ! he exp an ds unconcerned . .

True is the L ord of a true n ame in l angu age his love is i n fi n i te 3

, , .

If they spe ak an d ask he gives he gives the L ibe ral be stow s gi ft s

, , ,
.

W h at sh all a gain be pl aced be fore ( him ) by me ans o f w hich h i s court m ay be seen ? ,

W h at speech sh all be uttered by th e mouth w hich h aving he ard h e m ay besto w love ? ,

R eflect a t e arly d aw n on the gre atne ss o f the true n ame

F rom the destiny comes clothing f rom his ( fa vour able ) look the g ate o f s alv ation , .

Thus 0 Nan ak ! it is know n that he himself is true in al l

, ,

He c annot be established he is not m ade , . He himself is the S upreme Being ” .

1
m xp l a i n e d i n t h e co mm e n tary by fi rst l o t destiny The se n se is app aren tly th at God may
s
. m . e , , .
,

b e k n o w n fr om t h e g i ft s he is best o w i g B ut m ay al so b e r eferre d t o t h e S an sk fi l
n .

m fm flfi . : ,

I f he k n o w s t h e p ercep t io n ( o f i t) if he i s a ble to p e r c eive it

p er c ep t i on : ( i e t h e QTF3 )
”
, . . .

T h e sen se i s Go d i s pr a ised i n v a rio us w ay s by i n n umer a bl e p e ople

2
.
.

A n o l d S ikh co m m en t a ry gives t h e fol l w i n g exp l n ation o f thi s d a rk p assa ge 39 3 HT

3
o
751 % “3 5 a

a ag é as fs fi s fx ai flrm fifi s fi rfi fi rfi niz fi sré m fi fsfi fi é m fi fi fi

W U A l l the o t h er n am es o f Go d a r e uttere d i n p 1 aise ; as i n si de ( in t h e h ea i t) love d wells so they
,
“
,

prai se him .

E xpl a i n e d by t h e co m mentat or : "3 3 % m m WTfi -l He hims elf d oes an d causes to be

4 ' “

d one al l
”
.

6
m (IIIW 7 U an epithet 0 f th e S upreme B ein g fr ee from any st ain o r contact with the Maya ;
-
, ,

pure l ight
, .
4 J A P U 9— 1 4 .

By h aving h e ard ( his n ame ) Is ar ( S hi v a) Brahma an d Indr a ( h ave been m ade ) By h aving he ard ,
.
,

they praise w ith their mouth the m antr a ‘ .

By h a ving he ard the skill of J6 g ( an d in ) the i r body the secret ( o f God )

‘ 2
r .

By h aving he ard the S h astras the S mriti an d the V edas ( are obt ained )
, ,
.

0 Nan ak ( his ) w orshippers are al w ays h appy By h aving he ard p ain an d sins ar e anni hi l ated . ,
.

10 .

By h aving he ard ( his n ame ) truth contentment an d ( divine ) kno w ledge ( is obtained ) By having
, ,
.

he ard the ( merit o f the ) b athing of the sixty eight Ti r th as

,
- .

By having he ard an d r eading re ading ( the n ame ) they obtain honour ( at th e th reshold of God)
,
.

By h av i ng he ard m editation comes n aturally to them .

0 N an ak ! ( h i s) w orshippers ar e al w ays h appy By h aving he ard p ain an d sins ar e annihilated .

,
.

11 .

By h aving he ard the songs ( st or ies) of the A v atars ( h ave been m a de )

,
By h aving he ard ( they .
3 .
,

h ave become ) S h é kh s F i r e an d K ings ,

.

By h aving he ard the blind find the road By h aving he ar d the un ford able ( w ater or river )
,
.
,

( b ecom es ) f ord abl e

4
.

O N an ak ( h i s) w orshippers ar e al w ays h appy By h aving h e ard pain an d sins ar e annihil ated .

,
.

12 .

The st ate o f him by whom ( the n ame ) is minded c ann ot be told I f one tells it he repents of it
, ,
5
.
,

after w ards .

There is no paper pen nor w riter ( to describe it ) S itting th ey reflect ( o n him by w hom the
,
.
,

n ame ) is minded .

S uch i s the n ame o f the S upreme Being

'
If o n e mind it he kno w s it in his he art .
,
.

13 .

If mind ( the n ame ) understanding an d w isdom is obtained in the he art I f he mind ( it)
on e , .
,
th e
kno w ledge o f the w hole w orld .

If he mind ( it ) he is n ot struck in the face I f he mind ( it ) he d o es not go w ith Y am a

,
.
,
.

S uch is the n ame of the S uprem e Being I f one mind it he kno w s it in his he art .
, .

14 .

If he mind ( it ) he is not hindered on the ro d

,
a . If he mind ( it ) he becomes m anifest w ith honour
,
.
“

"fi t 31 m m 3% They si n g o r reci t e ( in h is p raise) the m antra ,

”
t . e th e m a?)
M an i S i n gh s ay s : 3 7 ; fe e 67 “ '

w as : 0 ni w 3 “
i to their body
n th e secret of
Go d h as co me .
”

$ 13 1 313 : Hindi B T
W ( S ansk Ham) po ssessi n g
.
, al l qu alities , an epithet fo r an A v atar . 3111} m .

S ansk .
“TV : a song .

W j un ford able ( S ansk W

4
ad . .

3% a EffS very shor t expression It m ust thus constructed : 251 6 Q 33% 3h the state
5 ’
, a . be '

of the n ame bei n g m inded .

i a a t th e threshold o f Go d
. . .
 JA P U 1 5, 1 e .

If he mind ( it ) he does n o t anxiously go his w ay ‘ If he mind ( it) he h as co n nexion

, .
, w ith piety .

S uch is the n ame of the S upreme Being I f one mind it he kno ws it in his he art .
, .

Ifhe mind ( it) he obtain s the gate o f s al vati on If he m ind ( it) he brings about the salvation o f
, .
,

his families .

I f he mind ( it) he is s aved an d s aves the disciples of his Guru If he mind it 0 Nan ak ! h e
,
( ) , .
,

does n o t w ander about in begging .

S uch is the n ame of the S upreme Being I f o n e mind it he know s it in his he art .
, .

16 .

The s aints ( or pious ) ar e chosen the s aints ar e foremost The s aints obtain honour at the threshold
, .

( of God )
‘ 2
r .

The Guru is the on e object of meditation to the s aints The s aints are lustrous at the gate o f .

the K ing .

If on e t ell ( it ) he m ay reflect There is n o countin g of the w orks of the Cre ator

, . .

The Dhaul ( w hite bull ) is Dharm ( religious an d civil l aw ) the son of D aya ( mercy ) by whom t h e , ,

rul e o f contentment i s fi x ed .
3

I f one understand this he becomes truthf ul ( know ing the truth )

, .

How mu ch is the lo ad upon the Dh aul ? There i s another e a rth an d beyond another another U pon , .

him w hat lo ad is there an d under him w h at pow er ?

The ( different ) kinds of living beings the n ames o f the colours ; the destiny o f al l ( in w hich ) the
, ,

pen ( of Go d ) h as moved on .

If on e kno w t o w rite this account h ow much w ill be the w ritten account ? ,

H ow much is ( his = God s ) pow er his be auti ful f orms ? h o w m uch his bountifulness ? w h o know s
’
,

t h e f ood ( he is besto w ing ) ?

T h e exp ansion ( of the universe ) i s m ade from on e t ank ‘ F rom this L akhs o f rivers h ave been .

m ade .

1
31 31 75
’
The S ikhs e xplain i t i n d i ff erent ways M ani S in h i s altogether sile n t o n this .

point ; b ut another ol d comment ary s ays : m 5? i353 E h? f9 ? W I l i q fl 3 W I 3 3 3 a efi l N U

8 % K l tfi O n the journey on wa rds there i s a very h e avy ( d iffi cult) ro ad o n w h i ch o n e can n ot
“
,

a scen d B ut t his i s r ath e r a Mus al m an id ea 313 signifies also ( in S an sk m ) a nxious an d this se ems t o
” '
“ ”
.

1 . .
,

be require d by t h e context .

T h e commen ta ri es explain t h e w or d 1 38 i n difi eren t ways ( un d erstan d i n g by it t h e fi v e e l e men ts

2 '

,
''
B ut i t i s certain from other p ass a ges o f the Granth t h at Lia sig n ifie s a holy p ious m an
'
, , , .

3
It i s n o t quite cl ea r wh at i s m e an t by this M ani S ingh s ays a8 fl 3 ITJ H 3 E W 2 1 U H 3
o
'
'
' ‘ '
.
.

s n s fi ué v a ns mfi mn fi w m i fi z ns r fi m i zg mfi ma m fi m
' ‘

i
n

fi
‘

#3 15 m 3 wanna 67} 3 T h e Dha ul is Dharm t h e so n o f D ays Isa r h a s fi xed t h e rul e ( l ine) o n

“
, ,

conten t ment T h e water i s tenfold more th an t h e earth but it cannot d issolve t h e e arth He w h o i s cont ent i s
.
, .

truthful The s ens e s eems t o be : T h e e arth i s support ed n ot by a white he ll but by a fixed l aw an d th e

.
”
, ,

m ercy o f Go d w h o h as a scrib ed t o al l lim i t s a n d bo un d s

,
.

4
T h is wo rd (3 3 1 g ) i s explai n ed difi er en tl y Maui S i n gh s ays it s ig n ifies 6 m ( O m ) ; another o l d
'
. ,

—
co m men tator s ays th at fi re i s equal to i i i fou r m as as a? m m I red fi a t mm 33 m m
'
:
,

m fi e m m was :in a re m i? as E m an its i s were 51 1 O ne m ass of w i n d o n e m ass

“
,
“
,

o f w ater o n e m as a o f fire o n e m ass o f e a rth these four m as as w e re m ad e a K av au i s o n e ta nk o f it This ”

.
, , ,

b est suits th e co n text .

 6 JA P U 1 7— 1 9 .

Wh at is ( thy ) pow er ? w h at ( thy ) t h ought ? I c annot be s acrificed ( to it) on e time ( i a. . I c annot

come up t o it ) .

Wh at is ple asing to thee that is a good w ork , . Thou , O Formless 1‘ ar t a l ways in s afety .

17 .

( There are
) innumer able ( silent ) repetitions ( of the n ame of God ), innumer able reverences .

Innumerable w orships innumerable austerities ,

.

Recitations o f innumer able books an d of the V éda w ith the mouth .

Innumerable j ogs ( of those wh o ) remain secluded in their he art ,

.

Innumer able devotees reflecting on th e comprehension o f his qu alities

,
.

Innumer able truthful ones innumerable bountif ul ones ,

.

Innumerable heroes e ati ng iron i n the f ace ,

.
2

Innumerable apply continu al me dit ation in silence .

W h at is ( th y ) po w er ? w h at ( thy ) thought ? I c annot be s acri ficed ( to it) o n e time .

Wh at is ple asing t o thee that is a good work Thou ar t al ways in s afety 0 Formless
, .
,

( There ar e) innumerable f ools stark blind on os Innumerable thieves li ving on the w ages of ,
-
.
,

i niquity .

Innumer able rulers wh o commit tyr anny Innumerable cut thro ats wh o commit murder
,
3
.
-
,
.

Innumerable sinners w h o commit si n Innumer able li ars w h o w ander about in falsehood

,
.
, .

Innumerable b arb arians w h o eat dirt Innumerable c alumniators w h o put a lo ad on ( their) heads
,
.
, .

N an ak expresses a l o w thought .

I cannot be s acrificed on e time ( i a I cannot reach thee ) . . .

Wh at is ple asing t o thee th at is a good w ork Thou ar t always in s afety 0 Formless

, .
,

( There ) innumer ble n ames innumerable pl aces ( There ) innumer able in accessible in ac
‘
ar e a , . ar e , ,

cessible w orlds .

Innumerable spe ak ( his praise ) bending the he ad dow nw ards , .

5

O f letters ( consists ) the n ame o f letters the praise ( of the n ame ) O f letters ( divin e ) know ledge
, . _

songs t h e metric al recit al s o f (his ) qu alities

, .

O f letters ( consists ) w riting spe aking voice , ,

.

In letters is the description of destiny By w hom these ( letters ) h ave been w ritten upon him it .
6
,

( i a destiny ) is n ot
. . .

by t h e comm enta t or : EU €31 Bf UB 3 Thou ar t fre e from form a n d colour

E xp l a ine d .

l i fi j 3 1 1 21 13 i s i n e r te d fo r t h e s a ke o f the rhyme in st ea d o f H 13
2
3 1 1 iron ea ti n g in th e face
' '
'
v , -
, ,

an id i om atic expression for — expos i n

g on e s fa ce b r avely t o t h e i ron ( i n b a t tle)
’
.

m i s explaine d by 3 1 % r aj as ; i t m ay be
/ /
3
( i t s broke n p lur i s L D B ut it m a y also be : . A .

t r ansl a t ed In n u m era ble give orders o f violence .

N a m es o f cre ated beings o r things

, .

fi l fi m a 1 s a dject ive ben di n g th e he ad d o w n w ard s (an d the feet up w a rds ) as some F a qi rs d o A n ol d

, , .

commenta tor ( w i th out n a m e) s ays m in . W ith the he ad d o w nw ards they “

@
praise him .
”

m c onj un c t i on 1 n stead o f
0
6
211 c onj un c t z o n an d sep ar a t i on ( o f th e bein s destiny
,
g ) : .
 8 JA P U 22— 25 .

There ar e L akhs o f nether regions in the nether regions ( L akhs ) o f he avens in the he avens Having ,
.

sought the end the end they h ave become tir ed the V edas say o n e w ord
, , ,
.

The books ( o f the Musal m an s) say : ( there ar e) eighteen thous and ( w orlds ) one single h air out of ,

the h airs of a h or se .
1L

If there w ould be an account ( of the w orks o f Go d ) it w ould be w ritten ( but ) the account is , ,

d estroyed ( i a impossible ) . 0 Nan ak ! he i sl c al l ed gre at he himsel f kno w s his o w n self

. .
,
.

Th at I m ay praise ( him ) so much underst anding I h ave not obtained Rivers an d brooks fall in to
,
.

the oce an ( but the oce an ) is n o t know n ( by them )

,
2
.

K ings an d S ult ans w ith rings w ith houses w e alth an d property do not become equ al to an an t
, , , ,

i f f rom its mind b e ( Go d) is n ot f orgotten .

3

24

There is no end o f his praises in s aying ( them ) there is n o end ,

.

There i s n o end of his w orks in ( his ) giving there is n o end ,

.

There is n o end in seeing ( his w o rks ) n o end in he aring ( them ) ,

.

N0 end is kno w n w h at counsel is in ( his ) mind No end is know n w hat his f orm is No end nor
, .
, .

limit is kno w n .

O n account o f ( n o t getting ) his end h o w m any l ament ! Hi s bounds c annot be obtained This ,
.

end nobody know s I f much be s aid much ( more ) is ( t o be s aid )

.
,
.

Gre at is the L ord high his pl ace H igher th an high is his n ame
,
. .

If on e be so hi gh he m ay kno w this high o n e , .

S o gre at a one as he himsel f is he himsel f ( only ) kno w s

, , .

O Nan ak ! by his favour able l ook an d by destiny the gift ( o f kno w ing his n am e is obtained ) .

Hi s gre at benevolence
c an not be w ritten He is a great giver there is n o t a bit of greediness ( in him) .
,
.

S ome w arriors ask boundless ( things ) S ome h ave n o consideration n or thought ( t o ask anything ). .

S ome are cons umed an d broken d ow n by p assion S ome h aving t aken ( his gif ts ) deny it . .

S ome f ools go on e ating S ome ar e al w ays afflicted by p ai n an d hunger

. .

This also is thy gift 0 bountiful Imprisonment ( an d ) rele ase is m ade by ( thy ) decree The other
, .

( thi ngs ) no on e c an tell .

I f on e h aving e aten ( his gi ft s ) f alls into reviling He w ill know h o w much he w ill be struck .
,

in the face .
4

1
The S ikhs are in great tro uble a bout t h e expla na tio n o f th ese w ord s an d give al l possible com m en ts ,
.

B ut the sense i s a p p aren tl y : t h e e i g h t ee n t ho us an d w orl d s which the M usa l m an s a ssert t o h a ve been created , ,

are j u st as m uch as a single ha ir o ut o f t h e h ai r s o f a h orse ; i e there are in numerable o ther w orlds . . .

a m . si g n ifi es— a c on st i t uen t p ar t of an y t h i n g ; h e re a si n gl e h air o ut o f t hose w hich constitut e the hairs ,

o f a horse .

2; m m i s n o t kn o w n —must be re ferre d t o T h e o t her i s an a djecti v e (

W )
2 “
,

h a v in g a sea l i n g r i n g th e sig n o f roya lty o r po w e r

-
, B ut t h e w hole v e r s e is without an y a pp aren t log ical.

conn exion a n d t h e S ik h comme n tat ors are totally be w il dered abo ut it .

3
The sense i s : i f by a n an t ( a l o w cre atur e o r m a n ) Go d i s n o t forgotten w e althy k ings will not be ,

equ al t o it .

4
$1337 3 1 supply blo ws .
 J AP U 26, 27 .
9

He himsel f kno w s himself h avin g given ( the gif t )

, .

This al so some some say O n w hom he besto ws his praise

,
.
an d l an d : he , 0 Nan ak ! is king o f kings .

Invalu able are his qu alities invalu able the occup ation ( w ith them ) Invalu able those occupied
, .

( w ith them ) inv alu able the store rooms - 1

, .

Inv alu abl e ( those w h o ) c o m e ( to them ) invalu able ( those w h o ) t ake aw ay ( i e stores from them )
l
,
. . .

Inv alu able ( those w h o ) ple ase ( him ) inv alu able ( those w h o ) are absorbed ( in him ) , .

Inv alu able( his) j ustice inv alu able h i s court ( o f j ustice ) , .

Inv aluable ( his ) b al ance inv alu able ( his ) me asure Invaluable ( his ) bountifulness invalu able the
, .
2
,

perception ( of it ) s .

Inv aluable ( his ) w ork inv alu able ( his ) comm and , .

A n y thing more inv alu able th an inv alu able c annot be told .

They go on telling telling ( them ) in devotion They tell them wh o re ad the V é das an d .

the P uranas .

The le arned men tell an d explain them The Brahm as an d I n dras tell them . .

The Gopi s an d Govind ( K rish na) tell them Is ar ( S hiv a) an d the S iddh s tell them . .

A s m any as ar e m ade Buddh a s ( s ages ) tell them The Dé v as an d D an a v as ( demons enemies of ,

.
,

the D evas ) tell them .

N
The Gods an d ar as an d Munis tell them h aving w orshipped S ome tell ( an d some ) be gin t o tell
"
, .

them S ome h aving told told them rise an d go o ff

.
, ,
.

S o m any cre atures are m ade an d others ( stil l ) he m akes Yet nobody nobody i s able to tell ( his .
,

qu alities ) .

A s gre a t as he ple ases so gre at he becomes ( by sel f exp ansion )

,
O Nan ak ! th at True one ( Go d ) -
. :

kn ow s it .

If some contentious m an tell ( it) he is w ri tten do w n a s a f ool above f ools 6

.

27 .

W h at is th at gate w h at th at house in w hich sitti n g he supports al l ?

, ,
7

There ar e m any innumer able music al instruments an d sounds ; h ow m any ar e the players
H o w m any Rags w ith the Ragini s ar e sung an d h ow m any are the singers ?
T o thee sing w ind w ater fire at ( thy ) door sin gs Dh arm r aj a
, , ,
-
.

The S i tragup t as sing ( t o thee ) w h o w rite dow n con tin u ally kno w an d w eigh the religi ous dee d s
, , .

( To thee ) sings Is ar ( S hi va) B r ah m a th e D evi h aving alw ays remembered ( thee ) they obtain honour
, , .
.

A t thy g ate sin gs Indr a w ith the gods sitting on In dra s throne
’
.

E l m atra der occupied i n a ny business Thes e a re t h e pious disciples wh o ar e c al led i n t h e .

,

Granth m 3 a m j i fi ; t h e $3 13 or s t o re houses a r e t h e 31 111 o r s ai n ts fr om w hom th e n ame m ay

,
-
, , ,

be ob t ai n ed .

“3 3 1 75signifies here me asure an d i s t h e s a m e as ufi n m as proved by othe r p ass ag e s o f the Granth

2 “
, .

3
Co m pare v 3 . .

4
m t o tel l t e t h e qu alitie s o r th e prais e s o f t h e n a m e th e great n ess o f th e n am e
“ ”
, . .
, .

N a ra s a k ind o f centaurs w ith the li m bs o f hors e s an d hum an bo d ie s — VV il so n V i sh nu P ur i n a p 42

5
.
, , , , . .

6
T h e S ikh commenta ries h av e t otally misund er stoo d t h e w hol e verse .

I t m ay also b e tran slated by t h e secon d perso n th ou supp o r test as concl uded from S od ar ( a fter th e
7 “
, ,

J ap Jl ) w h ere a 2 3 i s fou n d
’
- .
,
10 JA P U 23 .

( To th ee ) sing th e S i ddh s ( Jogi s ) i n th eir deep me di tations ( devotees) sing ( to thee )

‘
th e S adh s
‘

h aving reflected .

( T o th ee ) sing the truth f ul an d contented ( t o thee ) sing the h ardy heroes ( T o th ee ) sing the ,
.

P an dits an d Rakh i sar s ( gre at abstin ent m en ) w h o re ad continu ally w ith the V eda s ( in their h ands ) ,
.

o thee sing the scin ting omen ench nt the mind in the he avens in the mort al w orld 2
( T ) f a a w w h o a , ,

an d in the nether regions

3
.

( T o thee ) sing the gems produced by thee w ith the sixty eigh t Ti rt h as , ,
- .

‘
( o thee ) sing the heroes very po w e rful in b attle ( to thee ) sing the our mines
T f ,
.

( To thee ) sing the ( ni ne ) regions the countries th e w orlds w hi ch are m ade an d preserved by thee
6
, , , .

Those sing t o thee w h o ple ase thee thy w orshippers steeped ( in thee ) are full o f happiness
, , , .

M any others w h o sing ( t o thee ) do n ot come t o my mind ; w h at c an Na n ak reflect ( judge ) ?

, ,

H e he 1 5 al w ays the re al L ord true o f a true n ame

,
H e 1 s an d w ill be he w ill n ot be destroyed
, ,
. . , ,

by w hom cre ation is m ade .

By w hom a M ay a ( illusive w orld ) of v arious colours kinds an d sorts is prod uced Having made ,
.

( it ) he sees h i s o w n w ork is a s his gre atness is

, , , .

Wh at i s ple asing to him th at he w ill do n o order c an be given ( t o h i m ) , ,

.

H e is Ki ng L ord of K ings ; Nan ak ( s ays ) : the order ( ple asure ) of the L ord abides ( firmly )
,
.

( Wh o ) m akes contentment the e arring sh ame the vessel ( bow l ) an d ,

w allet , ( w h o applies to his
body ) ashes o f meditation ( Wh o m akes ) de ath his p atch ed quilt his body .
,
a virgin, the use of th e staff
f aith .
6

is an Ai p an th i ( j oining ) al l assemblies ; by th e he art being overcome the w orld is overcome

He ,
’ .

S alutation t o him s aluta tion ! W h o is fir st spotless w ithout b e ginning immortal ( n ot killed)

, , ,
8
, ,

h aving the s ame dress through al l ages .

I
d if eren ce o f {W 3 an d 311 1 1171 i s t h us s t ate d by P a t anj al i : Rest raint o f t h e body ret ention o f
The ,

t h e m i n d a n d m ed i t at i o n exc l usivel y co fi ed t o o n e obj e ct i s d /zy é ; t h e id ea o f i d en t ific a t ion w ith t h e obj ec t

n n , n

of su ch m ed it at ion so a s i f d evoid o f i n d ivi d ual n a ture is sa m dd/z i —V ish P ur p 63 7 n ote 21 ”

, , . . . .
, .

2
$1 5 t h e m or t al w orl d
“
( i n s t ead o f 311 3 S an sk
”
com m o nl y called th e 3113 $ 3 ( F ah d , .

“
the w o rl d o f mo rt als .
”

3
The fa s c in at i g w o m e i n h eaven an d o n earth a1 e th e A p sar asas wh o are o f t wo k i n d s 8 6 m
“
n n , ,

au ) orl l o a re s ai d t o b e t h i rty fo u r n n um b er a n d m en i n n umbe r — V i sh

( l kil w c d y w
, h , i ( d a i v i lc
) t -
, ,

P ur p 1 50 n o t e
. .
, In t h e region s o f P t al a th e lovel y d a ughters o f t h e D ait yas an d D navas w andel
“
a , a

a bo u t fa scin at ing t h e mos t a u st e e — Vis h P ur p 204

”
,
r . . . . .

T h e four m i es a r e : 303 3 ? ( w h a t i s b orn o r prod uced from a n egg) ; fi g ? ! ( w h a t i s bor n fro m a

4
n

foe tus fi g S an sk m ) 6 3 3 ? ( pro d uced b y gro w ing o ut a s pl a t s t r ees an d some lo we r ani mals
,
:
g ; .
, n , ,

S ansk E fg a ) fi fi ( S an sk fi g ) pro d uced from s w eat (as lice

’
. .
, ,

6
W , B rahm a egg gl obe w orl d ; m i s first ch an ged t o b an d t h en aspi rated by -
, ,

t h e in fl uenc e o f t h e p re c e d i g n

W 3 3 1 signi fi es here : use cf t h e st aj S ansk m gffi ; al l th e S ikh expl an ations are wrong
5 ‘
’ ‘
.
, .

T h e s ens e i s : h e us e s f ith fo r t h e s a m e p urpos es as he us es h i s s t a ff

a .

A m o n g st t h e tw el v e d ivis i o n s o f t h e J ogi s t h e r e IS o n e called A ip a n t h s o f w hom Man i S in gh s ays

7
z ,

313 3 i 3 1 35 fa re s 5 TH T hey live w itho ut e n m i ty w ith a l l m en “

UK .

[Kw n o t bl ue a n e pi t het o f t h e w a t e r spotle ss a n d the n ce w a t e r gen erally B ut here i ts original

B ”
il - ,
:
, .

s i gn i fi c at ion m ust be k ept fast : sp ot l ess The exp l an atio n o f the o l d co m m entary : ”( 25w .

“Tea w h at i s called an i l u P w a ter i s t he re fore w rong

“ ” “
, .
 12 JAP U 3 3— 36 .

33 .

In uttering ( the n ame ) there is n o po w er in silence there is n o po w er There is no po wer ,

.

in begging in giving there is n o po w er

, .

There is n o po w er in livi ng in dying there is no po w er There is n o pow er in domini on and

,
.

W e alth ( by it i s) upro ar in the mind

, .

There is n o po w er in in telligence divine kno w ledge an d reflection There is no po w er in clever ,

.

ness ( by w hich ) the w orld m ay be liberated

, .

In whose h and the po wer ( of liberation ) is b e h aving cre ated sec s 0 Nan ak no on e is high or l ow 1 , , ,
. .

34 .

There ( a re ) nights se asons lun ar d ates w eek d ays ( m ade by him ) W ind w ater fire the nether region
, , ,
- .
, , , .

I n the midst of it the e arth i s pl aced as a Dharms al a ( K ar av an ser ai ) O n it ( the e arth ) are different
'
- .

kinds o f living beings an d o f practices .

Their n ames are m any an d endless ( Their) a ctions actions ar e t aken into consider ation ( by God) .
,
2
.

H e himself is true an d true is h i s darb ar T h ere obtain honour the pious an d the chosen . .

( A ccording to h i s) gl ance ( an d their ) w ork the sign ( l ot of the cre atures ) is put do w n The raw ,
: .

ones obtain ripeness there 0 Nan ak l after on e h as gone ( there ) the pl ace is seen
.
,
.

35 .

This i s the pr actice o f t h e Dh arm K han d ( region of j ustice as told in the l ast verse ) Tel l n ow the
-
3
,
.

w orks o f Gi an K h an d ( the re gion of divine know ledge )

-
.

( There are) m any w inds w aters fires m any K a ns ( K rishn as ) an d Mah é s ( S hivas ) M any Brahmas
‘

.
, , , ,

( by w hom ) cre ati on is f ormed an d dresses ( disgui ses ) o f f orms an d colours

,
.

M any regions of w orks 4 m an y M é rus m any Dh ruv as an d instructions ( o f Nar ad a)

, ,
.
6

Many In dras m any moons suns m any orbs an d re gions

, , , .

Many S iddh s m any Buddhs an d Nat h s ( Jé gi s) m any disguises o f the Dé vi M any D evas many
, ,
’

.
,

D an avas m any Munis m any gems an d oce ans

‘

, ,
.

M any mines m any voices m any L ords an d kings Many V édas m any w orship pers ; O Nanak !
, ,
6
.
,

there is n o end of the accoun t .

36 .

In Gi a n K h an d divine know ledge is very strong There ar e sounds ( o f music ) p astimes ple asures
- .
, ,

an d j oys .

The ch ar acter ( sign ) of S h arm K han d ( the regi on o f happiness ) is be auty There is shaped a very
- ’
.

in comp ar able form ( sh ape ) .

Its w ords cannot be told If on e tel l them he afterw ards repents of it

. .

There is f ormed discernm ent intelli gence an d w isdom in the mind There is formed the know
, .

ledge of the Gods an d S i d d h s .

We have d e iated fr o m th e co m m o n expl an ations o f th e S ikh s w hich ar e mostly ludicrous a n d pass in

v
,

s ilen ce w h atever o ffers p ar t ic ula r d iffi cult ies

@
.

fi is t h e F orm a t i v e P lur d ependent o n 3 13

2 ' ' '

Qaz- . .

T h e S ik hs i d entify w i t h B r ahm a l ak e
3
- .

T h e 3 3 31 W is o n this w orld a ccor d in g t o t h e P ur an a s ; Vi sh P ur i n a p 21 2

, .
, . .

5
H is n a me th e S ikh comm entators expressly ad d O n h is instruction see Vi sh P a rana p 1 1 7 .
.
, . .

H1E 3 t h e four m in es ( o f pro d uct ion ) ; m a} sig n ifies the ( f our) sta g e s o f voice from t h e stirring
6
,

o f t h e brea th un to a rtic u la te utter a n ce .

7
m the S an sk at? j oy h a ppiness ( n o t th e P er s
, .
, .
 urn 3 7, 38 .

13

37 .

The character of the re gion of w orks ( K arm K han d) is pow er There is none else -
. .

There are heroes very pow erful in battlsg In them Ram ( Go d ) rem ains quite brimful ( or fi l ling them ) . .

There S i ta is cool ( happy ) in gre atness Their be auties cannot be told

'

. .

They do not die nor are they deceived In w hose he art Ram d well s . .

There d well some communities of Bh agat s ( devotees ) They are j oyful (for ) th at True on e is in .
,

their he art .

In S aé K h n d d wells th e S upreme Being ( the f orml ess ) Having cre ated he w as it an d is happy
a
2 -
.

by the sight .
3

There are regi ons orbs an d w orlds If one w ould enumer ate them there is n o end of the acco unt
, .
, .

There are w orlds an d w orlds an d forms A s his order is so is th e w ork ( done ) .

,
.

H e sees an d exp ands h aving reflecte d , .

O Nan ak l the t ell ing ( of it ) is h ard iron .

38 .

Con tinen ce is the w ork shop ‘ patience the goldsmith U nderstandi ng th e anvil the V eda the t ool
-
, .
, .

Fe ar the bellow s th e he at of austerities the fire The vessel is love in this melt A mrita ( nectar )
, .
, .

( Then ) the s ah d is f ormed “

in th e true mint This is the w ork of those on whom his look an d the .
“
,

destin y is ( fixed ) .

0 N an ak ! th e lo c ker on i s h appy by th e sight .

O n e S l ot .

Wind “ is the Gur u

, wa
ter
the fath er the gre at e arth the mother Day an d night the t w o ar e ,
.
,

f em ale an d m al e nurse ; the w hole w orld sports

- .

Dh arm r aj a rehe arses th e good an d bad w orks in the presence ( of God ) By their own actions some
- .

ar e ne ar an d I cme are afar off ( f rom God ) .

By w hom the n ame ( of God ) h as been meditated upon they ar e gone ( to the other w orld ) having ,
.

c ast o ff their l abour .

0 Nan ak l thei r f aceI are bri ght an d w ith them ( af ter them ) h ow m any people ar e saved ( liber ated ) 1
8
,

( E n d of the J ap fi) .

S i te, th e wi fe fi g c ool refreshed h appy an all usion to her name S i ta

of Ram a . , , , , .

T h e 318 Q3 correspond s to the “ a“ the habitation of B rahm a , .

T h e S ikh co mmentaries exp l i n R E: ram by : fi m a re w e 3 % r em e a ti m e;

a
a

53 1 3 whom he loo ks at he bec omes h appy but the re i s no i dication o f the change of the subj ec t
' “
,
n .

m 1 is th e workshop of a gold smith .

"W t h e s ahd or word o f the Guru t h e instru c tion o f t h e Guru con c entr ated in th e n ame o f Go d
e , .

W m ay a lso be tr ansl ated as Impera tive o r J ussiv e should be formed .

H6} m the tr ue mint i s expl ai ned by 313 333113 t h e assembly o f the t rue or pi ous ; in th is
‘
3 '
: ,
,

a ssembly t h e true instruction is obtained a s sho wn by t h e follo wing verse for those o n whom h is loo k a d
, , n

mercy is are t h e 311 11 S adh s

,
.

7
W ith re ference to the wind or bre ath being the Guru (o f al l ) the S ikhs rel ate : w hen B rahm a created
the human body al l t h e lim bs etc quarrelled which should be th e most important ; th en B rahm a decide d
,
-
, .
, ,

that bre ath was t h e gre atest w ithout w hich th e whole bo dy could n o t live
,
.

: E Efi Wm
w m fg supp l y ,
h o w much cre atio n o r people a common o mission in t h e
‘ ‘
, ,

Gran th .
14 so DA RU , I . 11 .

Om ! By the f avour of the true Guru .

S O DA RU .
l

1 26 9 l ed mahd l d I .
’

I .

W h at is th at thy g ate thy house w here sitting thou supp or test all ? Thy music al in struments
, w h at ,

an d sounds are m any an d innumer able m any are thy musici ans ,
.

M any B ags of thin e w ith the Ragini s ar e sung m any ar e thy singers To thee sing win d water ,
.
, ,

fire to thee sings Dh arm r aj a at thy gate

,
-
'

T o thee sin g the ( l it ragup t as w h o w rite do w n continu ally kno w an d w eigh the religious deeds To
, , .

thee sing Is ar Brahm a the D evi h avi ng al w ays remembered thee they obtain honour
, , ,
.

A t ( thy ) gate sin gs Indr a w ith the Gods sitting on Indr a s se at T o thee sing the S i ddh s in their ’
.

deep meditations to thee sing the S adh s ( s aints ) h aving reflected

,
'

T o thee sing the ch aste the truthf ul the con tented to thee sing the h ar dy heroes
,
T o thee sin g the
, ,
.

P an dits an d Rakh i sars w h o re ad continu ally w ith the V edas ( in their h ands )
,
.

T o thee sing the f ascin ating w omen w h o ench ant the mind in heaven on e arth an d in the nether, ,

region To thee sin g the gems cre ated by thee w ith the sixty eight Ti r th as
.
, ,
- .

To thee sing the heroes very po w erful in b attle to thee sing the f our mines To thee sing the ,
.

regions the countries ( orbs ) the w orlds w hich ar e ma de an d preserv ed by thee

, , ,
.

Those sin g to thee w h o p le ase thee ; thy w orshippers steeped ( in thy love ) are f ul l o f happiness
, ,
.
.

Many others wh o sin g to thee do not come to my mind ; w h at c an Nan ak j udge ?

, ,

H e he is alw ays the true L ord true of a true n ame

, H e is an d w ill be he w ill not cease to be by
, ,
.
, ,

w hom cre ation is m ade .

By w hom a M ay a of various colours kinds an d sorts is produced Having m ade it he sees his own ,
.
,

w ork is as his gre atness is .

Wh at is ple asing to hi m th at he w ill do his order cannot be reversed H e is K ing Lord of K ings ;
, , .
,

Nan ak ( s ays ) the order of the L ord abides .

3

A sé m ahal d I .

II .

he ard ( it ) every one c all s him gre at How gre at h e is h as it been seen ?
Having .
,

H is v al ue c annot be obt ain ed n or told T h e expounders ( o f it ) rem ain abs o rbed in thee 1‘
.

1 . P ause .

my gre at L o rd 0 deep an d profound on e l O abode of qu alities !

O , N ob o dy kno w s ,
h ow much and
gre at t h y attire is !
Al l intel ligent ones have met an d worked up their intell igence . All valuers h ave met an d put
do w n his v alue .

1
S ?) d ar , t h e w or d s, w ith w hich the follo wi n g S a hd begins T hey are tak e n from B i g AS 5 an d inserted . .

here beca use they are used for

, evening prayer by t h e S ikhs We fi n d the m alre ady in t h e J ap p ( with some .

few alterati ons ) v , .

M ah al a ( = m ah all a) al ways de n otes the a ut h or sh ip of a p iec e as m ah ala p ahil a the first quarter
2
, ,

B ab a N an ak m all al a du j a A n g a d e tc :
, .

3
The se an d the like verses w ith out a fixed number o f lines are c al led by the S ikhs sabds ( w ord s)
, , .

This i s a ( l aup ad s ( a verse c onsistin g o f four couple t s )

. .
 16 sé DA RU , v — so P U RK HU , I . .

R aga Gu
j ri ; m a h al d V .
‘

V .

Wh y ,
my he art ex c o git at est thou an effort in the completion
0 , ,
of w hich Ha ri is engaged ?
In rock an d stone ar e beings prod uced their d aily f ood is pl aced bef ore them ,
.

1 . P ause .

my Madh av a he wh o falls in w ith the society o f the s aints is s aved By the f avour of th e Guru
O , ,
.

the highest degree is obtai ned dry w ood is ( m ade ) green ,

.

Mother f ather ( household ) people son w ife n one i s in the protection ( support ) of the other
, , , ,
—
.
2

O n every he a d the L ord pro v ides the d aily f ood ; w h y 0 my he art h ast thou been af r aid ? , ,

( 3 ) Flyi n g flying a hundr ed k6s it ( i e the crane ) comes behind it its young ones ar e left
,
. .
, .

W h o f eeds them w h o nourish es them ? he ( Go d ) in hi s mind h as remembered th em

, .
3

Al l the ( nine ) tre a sures the eighteen per fections the L ord h as put o n the p alm of his h and
,
“
.

0 humble N i n ak i though on e become al w ays a s acrifice a s a crifice a s acrifice there is no end nor , , ,

limit o f th in e ( found ) .

SO P U RK HU .

Rd g uA sa mahal d IV .

Om ! by t h e fa vour of the true Guru

I .

Th at S upreme Being i s H ari H ari is the S upreme Being un attain able un attain able infinite , , , , .

All meditate al l medi tate on thee 0 H ari 0 true cre ator !

, , ,

Al l cre atures ar e thine thou ar t the prov i der o f the cre atures, .

O s aints ! meditat e on H a ri w h o c auses t o f orget al l p ains ! ,

Har i h imsel f is the L ord he himsel f is th e w orshipper w h at i s O Nan ak ! th e helpl ess being ?
, , ,
'

Thou 0 Ha ri ! the o ne S upreme Being ar t unintermittingly conta ined in every body

, , .

S ome ar e donors some are begg ars al l ar e thy w onder ful sho w s
, , .

Thou thysel f ar t the donor thou th ysel f th e enj oyer w ithout thee I d o not kno w another S ir !
, , ,

Thou ar t the S upreme Br ahm ° endless endless w h at c an I tell an d expl ain thy q uali ties ? , , ,

W h o ser ve w h o serve thee S i r their s acrifice is humble N an ak

, , , .

Wh o medi tate on thee 0 H ari ! w h o medit ate on thee 0 H ar i ! those people live comfortably
, ,

in the w orld .

Those h a ve become liberated those h ave become liberated by w hom H ari h as been medit ated upon
, , ,

the noose o f Yam a h as brok e n a w ay from them .

I
M ah al a V . A rju n .

2
m :
f protect io n prop support ; m1 i s m eani n gless a n d only add ed t o m ake up th e
s .
, ,
“

r h yme s i m ila rly m a m -n instead o f m m A j un s poe t ry i s d istinguish ed by s uch violen ce ; h e . 1

’

o ften S poils t h e w ord s a t t h e e d o f a verse so t h a t t h ey are h ar dly reco gniz able

n , .

3
m m igh t in A rjun s poetry also be t ak en for J fi ; t hen th e t ranslation w oul d run th us : h aving
,
’
,
'

r e m em bered t hem in h is mi n d .

fi rms; a n d fi mrx = fi §u x fi rm;

4
(A c c n s W e find i n t h e G r anth al so eig h t ee n siddhis .

m en t i one d .

W S an sk W W I t h e fa rth est l i mit o f B 1 a h m a beyo n d B 1 ah m w h om B r ah m even cannot

6
, .
, e,
, a

reach ; o r perh aps m 0 1 e si m ply fl ag t h e S upr em e B r ah m :

, .
 s6 P U RK H U , 1 1 .
17

By w hom the f e arless by w hom the fe arless Hari h as been meditated upon al l their fe ar w ill go S ir ! 1
, , ,

By w hom my Hari is w or shipped they w ill be absorbed in the form o f Hari Hari , ,
.

Those ar e blessed those ar e blessed b y w hom H ari 1 s medit ated upon humble N a n ak w ill be their
, , ,

s acrifice .

With thy w orship w ith thy w orship ( thy ) store houses ar e filled O endless endl ess one
,
-
, ,

Thy w orshippers thy w or shippers prai se th ee O m anifold m anifold endless H ari !

, , , ,

They o ffer to thee m anifold m anifold ador ation S ir they practise to thee austerities they mutter
, , ,

( thy n ame ) 0 endl ess one !

,

They re ad m any di fferent different S mritis an d S h astras of thi ne they pr actise the K r iy a an d the
, ,
2

six W orks .
3

Those are Bh ag ate those are good Bh agate wh o ple ase my L ord Hari
, ,
.

Thou ar t the first Being ( m ale ) boundless the cre ator like thee there is no other , ,
‘
1
, .

Thou art in al l ages the ( only ) one ; al ways al ways thou art O n e thou art th at immove able cre ator , , .

W h at is ple asing to thysel f th at exists ; w h at th ou thyself dost t h at i s m ade

, , .

By thyself al l the cre ation is produced ; by thyself al l ( the cre ation ) is m ade an d c aused to d is appear .

H umble Nan ak sings the praises of the cre ator wh o know s all
'

.
,

Thou ar t the cre ator true my Lord , ,

.

Wh at is ple asin g to th ee th at w ill be done ; w h at thou gi v est that I obtain

, , .

A ll is thin e thou ar t meditated upon by all

,
.

O n w hom thou best o w est mercy he obtains the gem of ( t h y ) n ame , .

By the disciple o f the Guru it is obtained by the self w illed it i s lost ,

-
.
5

By thyself ( one ) is sep arated ( from thee ) by thyself one is united ( w ith thee ) , .

Thou ar t the oce an all is i n thee ,

.

W ithout thee there i s none other .

The livin g cre atures ar e thy sport .

Having fallen in w ith sep aration t h ey are sep arated w ith union— there is union “ , , .

Whom thou lettest kno w th at m an kno w s ( them ) ,

.

H e alw ays tells an d explains the qu alities o f H ari

,
.

1
ata1 i } m ay be pause ins t e ad o f SIT w ill g o o r c aus al : h e w ill remove , .

?fi m ight also be t r an sl a t ed : t o thee inste ad o f bein g tak en fo r an adjective

2
.
,

3
W m S ansk ram! m ay be tak en generally as a holy a ction ( as sam ifi c e) o r S peci ally as obsequi es
: .
”
.

T h e six w orks o r d uties a r e n o w .

W “1 331 m i e the lock o f , , . .

hair on t h e cro w n o f th e head t h e tooth pick the Dhoti t h e B r ahmanical t hre ad the rosa ry a n d tilak ; t hese
, , , ,

a re bin d in g o n t h e K h at ri ( c f S iri R ag A st p 26
.
, .
,

4
W H in di WITU ITI S an sk E NTO TII th e limit o f th at which i s illi mit able a n epith et o f
: , .
, ,

Vishnu ident ical w ith m m which i s also fo und i n t h e G1 an th

,
-

ama ru he w h o turns h i s fa ce to wa r d s the G ur fi a d isciple o f t h e Gur fi a n d R af H h e wh o turn s

5
, , , ,

h is fa ce t o w a rds h i s o w n mind sel f w illed n o t at ten d i ng t o th e Gur u s i n st 1 uc t io n

’
- .
, ,

s co n s t ructed w ith t h e L oc a t i v e ( W fi
f lm
i ll in ith ) I S like w ise th e L ocat i v e
6
t o f
, a w i , fi a ,

but with lengthened fin al 2 (“ fi t fi l fi ) B ut I fi fi fi m ay also be ta ken a s an adj ective um t ed ; then th e . ,

const ruct ion w oul d h e : :“fi n fi 5333 3 W here al l case sig n s are left o ut the c o n st 1 uc t ion i s m ore o r less
‘
’
-
.
,

a mere conjecture T h e sense ho w ever i s pl ai n : w hen th ou sep ar at est t hem ( f1 om thee by tran smigrat ion )
. , , , ,

t hey a r e se p a r at ed ; w hen tho u un i test t hem they a re unite d ( a bsorb ed in thee ) ,

.
18 so P U RK HU , I II . IV .
— soHI L X , I .

By w hom H ar i i s w orshipped,
he obt ains comfort .

H e i s e asi ly ( n atur all y) absorbed i n the n ame of H ari .

Thou thysel f art the cre ator all i s m ade by thee ,

.

Without thee there i s no other o n e .

T h en h aving cre ate d cre a ted seest an d know est it

, , ,
.

0 humble N an ak ! the disciple o f the Guru w ill become m ani fest ( at the threshold ) .

A sé mahal d I .

III .

In th at pond hi s d w el l ings ar e m ade ; w ater an d fire ar e m ade by him .

In mud w hich is spiritu al blindness the foot does not ( = c ann ot) go ; w e looked they , , w ere
m er sed in it .

1 . P ause .

0 he art 0 foolish he art ! dost th en n o t think of the O n e ?

,

By H ari being forgotten thy virtues ar e w asted .

I am not ch aste nor truthf ul nor re ad f oolish an d i gnor ant I am born

, , , .

N an ak s ays : I a m in the asylum of those by w hom thou ar t not f orgotten , .

—
A sd ; mahal d V .

IV .

The body of m an h as been received ( by thee ) this is thy opportunity to be united wi th Govind , .

O ther w orks ar e of n o use to thee Join the society of the S é dh s ( s aints ) A dore onl y the name !
.

1 . P ause .

A cquire the me ans o f crossing the w aters of existence !

Thy birth ( life ) goes fo r nothing in the enj oyment of th e M ay a .

R epetition ( of the n ame ) austerity continence religious w orks h ave n ot been pr actised ( by me )
, , , ,

0 K ing H ari
N an ak s ays I h ave done me an actions ! K eep the honour o f him w h o h as fall en on thy asylum ! ,

S O H IL A .
2

R aga Gaur i D ip ahi ; mah al d I .

Om ! By the favour of the true Guru

I .

In w hich house pr aise is s aid an d th e cre ator thought of .

In that house sing a son g o f praise an d remember the cre ator 1

1 . P ause .

S ing thou a song o f praise of my fe arless one !

I am a sacrifice to th at song of praise by w hich al ways comfort i s obtai n ed , .

1
s ver s e is g en erally m isunde rstood by the S ik hs F ir st th e text o f n ea rly al l th e MS S is w ron g ;
T hi
0
f‘

,
o o
th ey w r i t e : 1 l 3m 31 g b ll t I t m us t be w r1tte n W i i {33 W ? d o e s n o t s i g n i fy a s t h e S ikhs w ill h ave
n
.

.
0
,

,
.

i t m ud th i s i s Via I f w e w rite 133 3 fig t h e se s e i s qu ite T h e fi r st l ine alludes to Vis h n u

, ,
.
p l a in , n .

sle ep i g o n th e oce an ( Vis h P ur p N an ak s ays : h e i n whom i s

n . . .

W ca n no t appro ach h i m he is , e ,

d ro w e d i n t h e m ud
n

' ‘
.
o .

q fi j m m 1 5 a so n g o f p r a i se ge n eral ly sun g a t m a r n a ges ( 1 n honour o f t h e b r id e a n d bridegroom)

2 O

,
C O

b ut al so in ho n ou r o f Go d The S é h il a is n ow us ed a s a pray er w h ich i s said be fore r etirin g t o res t at night

.
, .
2O S OH IL X , IV . v .

In al l ( cre atures ) is light he i s the light F rom his light light is m ade in al l ,
.
,
.

By the testimon y of the Guru t h e light becomes m anifest W h at is ple asing to him th at becomes . ,

an Ar ti
( illumin ation ) .

My mind is longi g f t r the nect ar of the lotus of the f oot of B ar i d aily I am thirsting
( ) n a e ,

a fter it .

‘
Give w ater o f mercy to th e deer Nan ak by w hich d w elling m ay be m ade in thy n me a
,
.

R aga Gaur i P ur l) ? mah al d IV .

IV .

With lust an d w r ath the to w n is much filled ; a S adh uh avin g come bre aks ( them ) t o pieces .
2

The Guru being obtained by an origin al d e cree ( of Go d ) c auses in the he art devotion to B ar i to be
excited in t h e cou n try .
3

1 . P ause .

M ake t o the S adh uj oin ing o f h ands it is a great religious merit ,

“
.

M ake ( t o him ) prostr ation it is a gre at religious merit ,

"

By the S akat s the relish of th e enj oyment o f B ari i s not kn ow n ; in their he art is the th orn of
"

selfishness .

A s as they w alk they are pierced they ar e p ained they su ffer de ath on their he a d i s punishment
, , , , ,
.

The people o f Hari are absorbed i n the n ame of Hari Hari the p ain o f birth an d the fear of ,

de a th ar e broken .

Th e etern al S upreme Being the L ord is obt ained ( by them ) gre at is their spl e n dour in the world , ,

an d universe .

W e poor an d w retched O L ord ! ar e thin e ; 0 Hari ! protect protect us ! thou art very great , ,
.

T o humble Nan ak the n ame is supp ort an d defence ; ev en in the n ame of Hari is the pith of comfort .

Raga Ga ur i P ur bi makal d V .

I m ake supplic ations he ar 0 my friend ! it i s ( h er e) the time to render service to the saints
, ,
.

H ere ( in this w orld ) h aving obt ain ed the g ain o f Hari dep art ! in the w orld to come ( f urther on ) ,

th y dw elling ( w ill be ) e asy .

I
The w ord s must be thus sep a r ated : 5172 HI 3 etc by w hich ( water o f m ercy) I m ay d well in ‘

, .
,

t h y n ame .

133 35 W he c a us es ( th em i e 3 1 3] 3 311 ) to be broken t o p ieces

2
, , . . .

“f7; U r? f% 333 ?
3
t h e c o n s t r uc t io o f t h e se w o r d s i s d iffi cult
; the subject i s t h e Gur u n ,

w h o c a us es t o b e ex ci ted 333 1 3 333 1 f? o r fi g t fi ) {E a q fi ; d evotion i n the h e art

( he arty d evotio n) '

i the co un tr y
n must b e t ak e as L oc a tive) n .

4
W } ( S ansk Wfi ffi ) joinin g t h e palms o f th e han d s a n d liftin g them up t o t h e forehead in token
.
'

o f revere t i al s al u
n ta t io n .

33 6 3 s f prostr ation i n w hich t h e h ands are pl a ced o n t h e g r ound a n d the b re a st br ought al most in
, . .
,

co n tact w ith t h e ear th ( S an sk { R a fi El m ) . .

6
1 113 3 ( S a n sk the desig n at ion o f a sect w h o w orsh ip t h e fem ale p r i n c i ple a ccordin g to the ritual
“

.
,

o f t h e T a n t ras T h er e ar e t w o ch ief d ivisions o f them D a kéiu

.
d c d r i a n d V é m é cé fi o r right a n d le ft h an d , ,

r itualists T h e w o r ship o f t h e fir st is public a dd resse d t o t h e go dde sses esp eci ally t o fo rms o f D urg é as
.
, , ,

B h av an i a n d P ar v a t i The w orsh ip o f th e l atter add ressed t o T an t rik a i m p erso n atio ns o f D ur g ii a s D evi

.
, ,
,

K 515 S y é m é 0 1 a w om a n r ep res enti n g t h e Fr

{ at is p r i ate a n d s ai d to be cele b rated w ith im p u re p ractices
‘

, , v .
 S O HI L K v —
. s1 Ri RA G, MA H . ss sn I .

1 . P ause .

The ( fixed ) limit of d ays an d nights decre ases O ! 0 he art ! by j oining the Guru thy business ,

is adj usted .
Q
This w orld is in th e abnormal state o f doubt he w h o kno ws Brah m is s aved .

Wh om he havin g aw akened m akes drink this j uice by h im the inexpressible story is know n , .

F or w hich ( obj ect) y ou are come th at buy ye ; the ind w elling of Har i in the heart is by means
,

of the Guru .

( I f ) in your ow n house ( his ) residence ( is ) y ouw ill e asily obtai n comfort there w il l n o t be again
, ,

a turn o f transmigra tion .

O he art knowi ng S upreme Being O disposer o f the destiny ! m ake full the he art s faith
’
-
,

Thy sl ave Nan ak asks this com fort m ake me the dust of the saints

Om! y the f vour

B a of the true Guru !

TH E RA G S I RI RA G .

Mahal a I . Giza/r I .
‘

(L
hrzwadd s 2
.
)
I .

m an sion of pe arls m ay then be raised w ith gems indeed it m ay be studded

A , .

W ith musk k un g ua
aloe w ood an d s an d al w ood h aving pl astered it he ( i s the bu i lder ) m ay
, ,
- - . .

delighted 4 .

Having seen ( it) likely it ( z e the n ame ) is forgotten thy n ame does not come into ( his ) mind
'
°
.
.
,

1 . P ause .

W ithout H ar i li fe is consumed .

I h ave asked my o wn Guru an d seen th at there is n o other pl ace ( but Hari ) ,

.

The ground m ay indeed be studded w ith d iamonds an d rubies on th e bedste ad rubies , may
set .

An enchanting w om an wi th j e w els on her face m ay glitte r an d make sho w s in mer rimen t

, .
, .

H avi ng seen ( her ) likely it is f orgotten thy n am e does not come into ( his ) min d , .

I m ay become a S iddh , I may employ mir a culous pow er I may say to prosperity : Com e ! ,

I m ay sit do w n conce aled ( or ) m ani fest thy people m ay p ay reverence ( to m e) , .

Having seen ( this ) likely thy n ame does n ot come into ( my) mind it is f orgotten ,
.

I m ay become a S ultan an d having assembled an army I m ay put my f oot on the throne

, .

I m ay obtain com mand an d sit do w n O Nan ak ! al l is Wind !

'

Having seen ( this ) likely thy n ame does n ot come into ( my ) mind it is forgotten , .

urg s ig n ifies ccording t o the unanimous testimony o f the S ikhs a musi ca l n ot e or key according to
, a , ,

w hich th ese verses a r e t o be played an d sung B ut t h e exa ct k n o wle d ge o f it seems t o h e l ost ; fo r in S p i te o f

.

many i nquiri es I have never bee n able to get an a ccura te d escrip ti on o f it

, .

2
Th is w ord G em is missing i n some MS S ; th e verses a re in re ality T r ip a d as The S ikhs c al l t h e
. .

Dup adé s T r ip ad é s a n d daup adas generally subd

,
.

3
a m is a very fine c omposition o f a red c ol our made of i mla (S ansk M
. , ) which w omen , .
,

apply t o t heir f o re he ad s .

No person i s m entio ned it m ay there fore he ap plied to t h e first or thi rd person sin gul a r .

313 is n o t t o be co n founded with “f3 ( le st ) ; 313 is th e S ansk a fl ag a c c or di ng to my op i n io n ; we

'
‘
.

have therefore translated i t with l ikely .

 S I RI REG, M AE
J

N . S AB D I I I II . .

S ir ? E dy m ahal d I .

II .
‘

( I f my ) lif e ( be ) cror es crores i f w in d dri kin g ( be nouriture m y) ’

-
n .
, ,

If ( dw elling ) in a c ave I do n ot see neither moon nor sun ( if ) I ha ve , no plac e fo r drea ming ( an d)
sleeping .

Yet thy v al ue is not found out ( by me ) ,

h ow gre at sh all I c all thy n ame ?
1 P ause .

True is the Formless in his ow n pl ace .

Having he ard h e ard the w ord ( one ) t ells it ;

,
i f it ple ses (
a t o an y ) he longs ( f o r i t )
3
,
.

( If ) I be kil l ed an d cut ( in pieces ) repe ated l y if

( ) I be ground on th e gr i nding stone ‘
, .

( If ) I be burned w ith fire ( if ) I be reduced to ashes ( mixed w ith ashes )

,
.

Yet thy v alue i s n ot found out ( by me ) h ow gre at sh all I c all thy n am e ? ,

( If ) h aving become a bird I ro am about an d go t o a hun dred heavens .

( If ) I do not come into the sight of an y on e n or d o d rink a nd eat anything , .

Yet thy v alue i s n ot f ound o ut ( by m e) h o w gre at sh all I c all thy n ame ? ,

0 N an ak ! if h avi n g re ad re ad a p aper consisting o f a hun dred thous and m aunds consideration

,

i de a of him ) be m ade 5
.

( If ) th e ink do not run short ( if ) th e wind move th e p en , .

Yet th y value is not found o ut h ow gre at sh all I c al l thy n ame

S ir i Rag mahal d I .

III .

A ccording to destiny one speaks a ccordin g to desti ny one e ats ,

6
.

A ccordi ng t o desti ny a w ay is m ade according t o destiny one bear s an d sees , .

A ccordin g to destiny the bre ath is t ake n ; w ha t sh all I go to ask a le arned m an ?

1 P ause .

O father , th e
cre ation of M ay a is deception .

By th e bl in d one the n ame is f orgotten h e h as neither this nor th at ( w orld ) .

Wh at lives dies ; being born " it is h ere ( in this w orld) e aten up by death
, .

Wh ere h avi ng sat d o wn one is in formed there none h as gone w ith , .

6

A s m any w eepers as there ar e they all bind together a bundle of r i c e str aw

, .
"

I
O n th e occa sion hen th ese verses are s aid t o h ave been utte red by N an ak see S ikh i d é r aj di v ith i a p 260
w , , .

W it ex pl ain ed by i t i s t h e S an sk “ WWI sat iety ; foo d .

: .

m 75
3
T his li n e i s very i n tricat e a s no s ubject wh atever i s ind ica ted T h e commen ta ry says :
0

m 3 3 0 l 3 311
, .

K .

3 as o n e h a s des i r e so h e covets ( it)

'

, , .

m fg lengthen e d instead o f ufg h avin g fallen (on t h e grinding sto n e)

, ,
-
.

3 1 6 is here i d entic al w i th 3 1 3 751 ide a co n sid era tion

5 ’

m
, , .

m ( S i m l arly W E S T) ; t h e s ubject i s as us ual n o t mentioned

i
, ,
.

7
m f g? from S indh i m
m t o be born , .

fa? Elfi j t ‘ '

e re o n e h a vi n g sa t d o wn is in formed ; o f w h at i s n o t m entio n ed
, Very , , .

likely it should be supp lied : of o n e s go od a n d bad a ctions fo r “ X 16 ? “h as this second ary sign fic ation :
’
,

t o corre ct t o put rig h t

, .

9
To
bi n d up a bund le of ri ce straw -
to (l o a useless busi n e ss . W eeping a ft er a d ea d person is a

useless thing .
24 sm i RAG, MA H . saw VI V I I. .

I sacrifice myself for those wh o he ar an d expl ain ( it ) ,

.

Then the he art is kno wn as dr unk w hen it obtains a pl ace in the p al ace ( o f Go d ) , .

When the n ame is the water ( to b athe in ) good actions ( an d ) truth the scent of s and al , w ood
- on
the body .

Then the face becomes bright ; the gifts o f the one giver are L akhs .

P ain is ordered f rom the part of him w ith w hom comf ort rests ,
.

Wh y is b e f orgotten f rom the m ind w hose the life o f the creatures i s ,

W ithout him al l is impure w h atever there is o f clothing an d f eed

,
.

A l l other words ar e false ; w h at i s ple asing to thee th at is acceptable ,

.

S t r t Rag mahal d I
’
''

VI .

Having burnt
the love ( of the w orld ) rub it an d m ake it ink ; m ake understanding the best paper .

M ake love t h epen m ake the mind the w riter ; h aving asked the Guru w rite the decision
, , .

W rite the n ame w rite ( its ) prai se w rite that w h ich h as no end nor limit
, , .

1 . P ause .

O father ! know t o w rite

this acco un t
Wh ere account w ill be asked there w ill be m ade the true sign ( o r sign at ure )
, .

Wh ere gre atness w ill be obta ined al ways ple asure an d d elight , .

( T here ) from their fa ce m arks w ill issue in w hose heart the true n ame is , .

I f it does a ccrue "by destiny then it is obtained not by pra ttle o f w ords
, , .

S ome come some rise an d go to whom the n ame of chie ftain is given
, , .

S ome are born as begg ars some h ave gre at courts ,

.

Hav ing gone on w a rds ( to the other w orld ) it w ill be kno wn th at without the n ame ther e is change ,

f orm .
2

Out o f thy fear dre ad is very great ; being con sumed being consumed the body beco mes tattered , , .

Those w h o h ad the n ame o f S ultan an d K han h ave been seen becoming ashes , .

O N an ak ! w hen o n e h as risen an d dep art ed al l false love bre aks do wn , .

S ir ? Rag ; mahal a I .

V II .

j uices ar e s w eet by minding ( the name ) ( al l ar e) se asoned by he aring ( it)

Al l , .

The acid (j uices ) w ill go o ff by uttering ( the n ame ) w ith the mouth by the sound they are made spices ,
3
.

O n w hom he looks in mercy to him the thirty six kinds of f ood ‘ ar e one sub stance “
,
-
.

1 . P au
se .

O father ! other f ood is a poor ple asure .

By the e ating of w hich the body is p ained an d disorder rules in the mind .

Red clothing is a red heart w hiteness ( of clo thes ) tr uthf ul ness an d don a tion , .

T h e w ords sa fe fi ifi 31 méifi r must thus be const ruc ted i? fi rs ssfi i :

31 mm
chan ge o f form etc implies here tr ansmi gr at ion H e wh o 1 s not imbued in the n am e will
, .
, .
,

s ubj ect to a course o f tr a smigr a tion n .

a
The W so und d enotes h ere 6 7113 13 utterin g O m !
, , ,

mfi p me a s here food
4
n .

5
O th e occ a sion w h en these ve rs e s a r e s a id to h a e been utt er ed see S ikh a dé r aj di vi t h l a p 293
n v , , . .

8
h a s a do uble me aning : r ed a n d s t eep ed i l o v e ( t o Go d ) ; t h e l at t er i s he r e understoo d
, n .
 S I RI RA G, MA H . S A RD v n i .
25

Blueness an d bl ackness ( of clothes ) w icked actions ; putting on clothes medit ation on the feet , ,

( of H ari ) .

The wai stb and is m ade of contentment we alth an d youth is thy n ame , .

P ause .

O father ! other clothing is a poor ple asure .

By the puttin g on of which the body is p ained an d disorder rules in the mind
To h ave a kn o w le dge o f a horse s s addl e o f a golden b ack strap this is thy w ay ’
,
-
,
1
.

Quiver arro w bow s w ord belt are the consti tuent p arts o f virtue ( w ith thee )
, , ,
-
.

A music al instrument a spe ar appearing publicly w ith honour ( this ) is thy business
, , , , 0 my c aste ! 2

P ause .

O f ather ! other 3 mou n ting is a poor ple asure .

By w hich mounting the body is p ained an d disord er rules in the mind .

( My ) house an d m ansion is the delight in ( thy ) n ame thy ( merciful ) look m y family , .

Th at is ( th y ) order w hi ch w ill ple ase thee ( though there be ) other very boundless t alk
, ,
.

0 Nan ak ! the true king does not ask nor deliber ate .

P a use .

O f ather !
other sleeping is a poor ple asure .

By w hich sleep the bo dy is p ained an d disorder rules in the mind .

r i R ag
Sa makal a I .

V III .

( 1)body ( besme ared ) w ith kungu adorned w ith j e w els perfume of aloe w ood the bre ath ( kept
A , ,
-
,

f ast) in the body .

The m ark o f the sixty eight Ti r th as in the face — in this there is displ ay of little wisdom
- .

In th at is w isdom : praising the true n ame the abode of ( al l ) excellences ,

.

P ause .

O father ! other w isdom other an d other ,

If it h e pr actised a hundred times it is th e f al se e ffort of the false ones ,

.

H e ( = one ) m ay apply himsel f to w orship he m ay be c alled a P i r the , , w hole w orld m ay flock

to him .

H e m ay m ake his o wn n ame famous he m ay be counted am ongst the S i ddh s , .

When his ( honour ) does not fall into account ( before Go d) al l ( h i s) w orship is ( but ) a w retched thi ng , .

Those w h o ar e est ablished by the true Guru4 n obody c an eflac e r ,

‘
.

Within them is the abode o f the n ame by the n ame they w ill become m anifest , .

( By w hom ) the n a me is w orshipped the n ame is m inded they a r e al w ays unbrok

, e n “
an d true , .

When dust is mingled w ith dust w h at w ill become of the soul ? ,

1 1 11413 ( P ers L ‘s-LL) i s the S indh i mm b a ck strap o f a horse merely put o n fo r ornament s s ake ’
1 a - .
. i ,

Nan a k is s aid to h a ve uttered t hese vers e s on b eing a sked by his fa ther K ala to mount a horse an d t o
2

— S ee S ikhad é r a
g o home .
j etc p 294 .
, . .

T h e w ord other d oes not quite ag ree with the prece din g verse a n d seems to be a mere repetition
3
, ,

without an y reference to t h e context T h e sense i s this a n d al l such other mounting

.
.

T h e S ikhs a lw ays n o w refer the w ords “f3 to their Guru as an inc arnation o f the Deity , .

‘
un broken n o t subject t o de a th (m a l fi l fl l a ) ‘‘ '' ’
' ' ‘
5 v .
,
 26 S IRI RAG, MA E . S AE D IX . X .

All clevernesses ar e burnt ( w ith the bo dy ) ; it rises an d goes w eeping .

‘
O n
Na a k the n me being f orgotten h t ill become ( f it ) w hen h vi ng gone to th e gate ( of God ?
a w a w o a
)
I
'

S zr z R ag ; mafi al ci
'
'

IX .

The vi rtue s of th e virtuou s w om an ar e spre ad ( abro ad ) t h e vi cious w om an pines , .

I f the fascin ati ng w om an longs f or h er h usb and there is no meeting ( w ith h im) th e fri en d ( =husband) , ,

is hard he arted
- .

There i s n o h eat nor buoy he is n ot obt ained t h e friend i s f ar o ff

, ,
.

P ause .

My per fe ct Lord is motionless on h i s throne .

If he m akes the disci ple perf ect the True an d U n weigh able one is obtained
2
,
.

The p al ace of my L ord Hari i s be auti ful ; i n it ar e gems an d rubies .

H i s ca stle of pe arls pure d i amonds an d gold i s delight ful

, , .

W ithout a l adder h ow sh all I ascend to ( h i s) c astle

I am h appy by the me dit ation on Hari ( my ) Guru .

The Guru 3 is the l adder the Guru is the bo at the Guru is the buoy the n ame
, , , of Har i .

The Guru is the pond the sea th e bo at the Guru is the Ti rth a an d the sea
, , , .

I f sh e pleases h i m sh e i s bright she goes to b a the in the true tank

, , .

He i s c al led h r i m ful 4 d w ell ing on a f ull throne

, .

( D welling ) in a full beautiful pl ace h e fulfils th e h ope of t h e hopeless

, , .

O Nan ak ! i f h e i s f ound full h ow sh all his qu alities diminish

,

[ My mafial d I .

X .

Com e sister cling to my neck ( cli n g) to m y breast O de ar comp anion !

, , , ,

H aving j oined ( me ) tell ( me ) stories about thy po w erf ul s w eethe art ( husb and ) .

In the true L ord ar e all virtues in us ar e al l vi ces , .

P ause .

creator ! every one is in thy po w er

O .

One w ord should be consi d ered : w hen thou ar t w h at are th e others ,

Go ask th e w om an beloved by her husb and by w h at cleverness is he en oyed by you ?

j
“
E asily w ith contentment she i s adorne d w h o spe ak s s w eetly , .

The s w eet f riend is then m et w ith w hen I he ar t h e w ord ( in structi on ) of th e Guru

, .

Ho w m an y ar e t h y po w ers h owgre at i s thy don ation ? ,

How man y ar e thy living crea tures wh o praise th ee d ay an d night ? ,

H ow m an y ar e t h y f orms an d colours h ow m a ny the h i gh h em an d t h e outc asts ? ,

-

I f the True one is f ound com fort 5 sp ri ngs up ( in the he art ; th e true ones ar e absorbed into
, )
True one .

1
m m ust h e re ad m ( in h avin g gone ) but in a l l such c a ses the Anusvara i s never pl aced , .

3
As the w ord signi fies also Go d W m a y denote a m a n w h o t urn s h i s fa ce t ow a r d s God
,
, a

seek er o f Go d .

3
The Gur u i s here th e Gur dev ( th e inc arna t e Guru) . T his i s sho wn by th e w hole context .

£13 1 full d eno t es in r efe rence t o Go d al l fill in g

, , -
, a ll - perva ding a n d perfect in himsel f .

Hg signi fi es here c omf or t j oy , .

28 sm i RAG, MA H S A E D x1 1 1 .

If the three fold w ork be practised there arises hope an d anxi ety 1
,
.

Ho w n f 3
shall without th e Gur u the tri ad ce ase to be ? by bei g united ith the sel existing co mfort
w 2 -
,

arises .

By hom in his house s ( God s ) p al a ce is recog n i z ed t o be he w a shes off his dirt ( sin ) if
’

( w ) o w n hi , ,

he ( God ) looks ( o n him ) in m ercy .

Without the Guru the dirt does n o t go off w ithout H ari h o w is there perfu me i n the house ?
hom the n e w ord the n ame is reflected upo n he gives up ( al l ) o t h er hope
B
( y w ) o ( t e ) . . , _
.

0 Nan ak ! ( by whom ) he ( t e Hari ) i s seen an d pointed o ut ( t o me ) ( f or him ) I alw ays s acri fi ce myself
. . , .

S ir ? R ag ; mahal a I .

X II I .

‘
W o e t o the life
the un favou red w om an sh e is ruined by second love
of ,
.

L ike a w all impregn ated w ith s altpetre d ay an d night falls an d tumbles do w n ( so she goes to ru
i n) .

Wi thout the w ord ( = n ame ) n o com fort arises wi thout the beloved p ain does n o t go ,
.

P ause .

h andsome young w om an w h at is decoration w ithout the beloved

O
A t the g ate thou o bt ai n est n o entr ance t o the house at the threshold the f al se on e is wr etched , .

H e hi m sel f the w ise o n e is n ot mistaken he is a true gre a t husb andm an , , .

F irst h aving brought the soi l in order he so w s the seed of the n a me ( in i t ) .

5

The nine tre asures ar e produced ( from ) the o n e n ame ( according t o ) destiny th e sign ( = lot ) falls , .

The w i se o n e w h o does n ot kno w the Guru w h a t is h i s wisdom an d good conduct ?

, ,

By the b l ind the n ame is forgotten in the self w illed is gre at mistiness ,
-
.
6

Hi s comin g an d goin g does n ot ce ase ; h aving died he is born ( ag a in ) an d becomes w retched .

S andal w ood h as been bought kung uan d red le ad f or th e p arting line o f the h air
-
,
-
.

V ery much perfume c am phor w ith betel le aves ,

7 -
.

If the w om an does n ot ple ase the s w eethe ar t al l ( this ) app ar atus is useless "
.

The enj oyment of al l ple asure s is useless al l orn aments are an abnorm al thing , .

A s long as sh e is n ot per forated by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) h ow sh all she receive honour at the 9
,

g ate of the Guru ?

0 Nan ak those favoured w omen ar e blessed wh o ar e in love w ith their husb and , .

fi f a fiz m fi fafi (wh a t collec t ed hea p ed

1
is is ) ( w h at b een commen ced) an d
'
, 11 p , $11 1 221 h as ,

fi nd in g ( w ha t i s b ein g d one) .

2
f ag i } ( form ed f rom
-
t h e S an k s .
fa g h a in g th r ee h ea d s o r horns) t r ia d t h e three qual ities 3T3
,
v
, ,

(afi qfi r ue n a t ur e t h e qua l ity o f

th e t g oo dn ess) 3 % ( m m p a ssio n ) a n d
z z
, , , , ,

d a rk n ess ) , in here t i n a ll t h a t i s crea ted

n .

3
m , t h e s a m e a s G W Tfi Hi s elf—exis ting , , an at r t ibute of th e S u
pr me B ing ; but it
e e m ay a s l o be
tr a nsla t ed by : c o mp os r e u ( of m in d ) c o mp os r e u ( of m i n d ) bei n g o bt a i n ed .

T 3 1 63 ,
4
G s eco d love ( o ther th a n th e love o f Go d) w orldly love ; d ua l i ty
n :
.

m i s h ere fo r th e s a k e o f th e rhym e
5
,
g r a in s eed , , .

”i n 313 1 3 a fr qu n expr ssion th e Gr a n th : deep d a r kn ess o r mis tiness ( L )

e e t e , i n
2
1
3 m 8 2 7 5 n a me o f a perfum e 3 m ( A m ar a nthus o l ea c eus) an d m
7 a x a

, s and a l w ood ground

,
,
-

t og et h er t o a p a s t e .

a Q7; F313 3 3 1 3 93 ; 5% i s h er e neit her A bl at i ve n o r L oca t ive but sta nd s fo r 33 13 ( Da ti e)

5

,
v .

3 2 8 1 v a T o p erf orat e to spli t ; in th e p assiv e : t o b e per for a t ed t o be t horoughl y imb u

9
, . .
, ed in .

Hg i s a S indhi w or d ( H3 ) a n d sign i fi es properly : brideg room , .

 S R I I RAG, MA H . S A BD X IV . XV .
29

S i r ? Rag ; mahal d I .

X IV .

E mpty is the body wh en the soul ( or life ) dep arts fro m it

an d frightf ul , .

The burnin g fire is extinguished not an y smoke h as issued from it ‘ , .

The five ( elements ) h ave w ept filled w ith p ain they are destroyed by second love
2
, , .

P ause .

O fool !mutter H ari rememberin g his quali ties , .

E gotism an d selfishness is c aptivating the w hole ( w orld ) is ruined by egotism , .

By whom the name is f orgotten having stuck t o another business ,

They by giving themselves t o dual ity are consumed an d de ad ; in their he ar t is the fire of thirst
, ,
3
.

Those are s aved wh o ar e preserved by the Guru the others ar e che ated an d deceived by their
, ,

( w orldly ) business ‘
.

De ad is f riendship love is gone enmity an d opposition i s de ad , ,

.

( W orldly ) business is stopped egotism is de ad selfishness an d w r ath i s absorbed , , .

It is o w ing t o destiny th at the True o n e is obtained ; the disciple is al w ays suppressing ( his senses ) .

By true w ork the True on e is f ound by the w isdom of the Guru he falls into the skirt ( of the ,

d isciple ) .

That m an is not born ( ag ain ) nor does he die he does not come nor go , .

0 Nan ak ! he w h o is foremost at the gate he w ill go dressed to the threshold ( o f Go d ) , .

5

S ir ? Rag makal d I .

X V;

( l ) The body being burnt h as become e arth the mind by the infatu ation o f the M ay a ( li ke ) dross
.
,
.

The ( ol d) vices h ave again clun g t o it the cruel on es sound ( again ) the tr umpet , .

Without the w ord ( o f the Gur u ) he ( or t h e mind ) is brought into error duality sinks the boat s lo ad ,
’
.

P a use .

mind ! h e attentive t o th e w ord an d cross ( thereby ) over !

0
By w hom the name proceedi n g fro m the mouth of the Guru is not understood he h avin g died is , , ,

born ( ag ain ) he comes an d goes ,

.

That is c alled a pure body in w hich th e true n ame is , .

uch a body is steeped in true f e ar ( o f God ) the tongue h as a true taste

( S ) , .

( ) (
If it i e the body ) is looked upon
. w.ith a true gl ance of mercy
( ) it w ill n o t get into distress ag ain , .

1
3 1% W ; life is comp a red to a bur ning fire , w hich is extingui shed w ithout lea ving an y tr a ce of

i ts existence .

T h e five a r e here th e elements (HE ) v i z : E W(e a rth) 3 13 (w at er ) affix (fi r e) ( bre a th

)
3
"

, .
, , ,

fi l m (ether ) o f w hich the bo dy i s composed a ccord ing t o Hi ndunotion

, T h e S ikhs ref r t h e five t o . e

3 1 31 (lust) g ) $ 3 (covetousness) NU (i nfa tua tion ) m

n

t ? w r a th
( (selfishn ess )
‘
, , , , .

3
w t" h a s in t h e G r an th not t h e s ense o f do ubt but reta ins i t s orig in al me ani ng : dua l i ty tw o fo l d , ,

n ess
(S ansk gram) lik e i f?”
.
,

afi 13%Z fi T must b e cons t uc t ed thus : a fi afi l W: i s fe m (supp l y

r

Efil
' ‘ '
.
''

i s p a rt p ast con j
. .

z fi W W foremost at the g ate (o f t h e Guru) t e quite gi ven t o t h e a tten t i o n a n d service o f t h e

5 ‘
. .
,

Guru .
fi t“ dre sse d i s in a dress of honour
, , . .
30 S RI B i o , MA E
I . I .
, S A BD X V I . X VII .

From the True one wi nd ( air ) h as proceeded f rom the w ind w ate r h as been engendered , .

From w ater the three w orlds h ave been m ade into eve r y body light is in fused 1 ,
.

The pure does not become defi l ed ; by him w h o is steeped in the w ord honour is obtai ned , , .

This m i nd is contented in the True one ( if ) he ( Go d ) c asts upon it a look o f mercy , .

The five be i ngs ar e steeped in true fe ar there is true li ght in the mind
2
,
.

0 Nan ak ! the vices ar e forgotten ; those w h o ar e protected by the Guru ( obt ain ) honour .

8 1% R ay ma ba l d I .

X VI .

O Nan ak ! the bo at o f the True o n e there is crossing over by me ans of reflecti on on the Guru
on .
8

S ome come some go q uite ful l o f s elfishness

, ,
.

The i nt oxic ated w ith obstinacy of mind are dro wned the disciple th at True one is brin ging across , .

P a use .

How sh all it be crossed w ithout the Gur u ( h o w ) sh all comfort be obt ained ? ,

A s it is ple asing ( to thee ) so keep me I h ave n one other

, , .

I f I look before me there i s a c o n flagr at i on o f the j ungle on my b a ck there ar e green sprouts 1

‘

, , .

By w hom it is pro duced by him it is destroyed in eve r y b ody ( vessel ) the True on e is brim ful
, , .

H e himsel f ( al so ) unites t o union ( w ith hi msel f ) t o h i s true p al ace an d presen ce ( he conveys )

5
, .

A t every bre a th I remember thee I never forget thee , .

A s as the L ord d w ell s in the mind ( so so ) the di sciple d ri nks nect ar

, , , .

Mind an d body ar e th ine th ou ar t the L ord h aving re moved pride thou in d w ell est
, , .

By w hom this w orld is produced h a vi ng m ade the forms ( beings ) o f the three w orlds
, .

( Hi s) l ight is kno w n by the disciple ( w here as ) the self w i lled is be w ildered i n mist iness
,
-
.

The light ( w hi ch is) uni nte r mittingly in every body he comprehends w h o be ars in m i nd th e wi sdom , ,

of the Gur u .
6

The disciples by w hom it ( i e the light) is kno wn ar e appl auded

,
. .
, .

They ar e unite d w ith th e True o n e they m anif est the qu alities o f the True on e
, .

0 Nan ak ! by th e n ame they ar e contented their soul an d body is w ith the L ord , .

I
'

S sr i R ag ; mabal d .

X VII .

H e ar, 0
he art ! 0 beloved friend ! be united ( wi th the S upreme Be i ng ) this is the time ,
.

As long as there is there the breath o f youth give ( him ) this body ! ,

Wi thout vi rtue it is of n o use the body decaying is reduced to ash es again

, .

T his is quit e in a ccor da nc e w it h t h e cosmogonies o f t h e P ur i n a s see Vishnu P uri na p 1 6 note 25

n ot
, .
,
.

t h e fi v e b em gs (n o t elem ent s ) a s 3 1 31 a1 1
m
2 n
L IB
3 3 w h i ch ar e p ersonified
3
,
2 , . .
, , ,
.

3 3 3 1 t o cross (t h e ocea n o f exi s t enc ) ; t h e crossing i s m a d e possibl e by r eflect ion o r m edita ti on

, e

o n t h e Guru w h o i s t h e m ed i a t or o f s a lva ti on
, .

a bur ning o f t h e jungle 3

6 fi g li ter a l ly : a c o n fla g r a t io n o f t h e jun gle Is burn in g
, , .

3 % rm
5
i s a fr eque t expr ession in t h e Gr a nt h ; 31% i s t h e L oc a t ive o f 585 un i on 8 0
n
3 ,

t ha t am W
,

e?“ li ter a l ly sign i fies : t o unite in o r t o un ion ( wi t h himself ) from t h e S upr eme Bein g ,

a l l em a n a t e s a n d in t o i t a ll 1 5 a g a in r eun i t ed .

fi 3m t h es e w ord s a r very compreh ensi v e

6
g 311 3 ; e
m a i s 11 1% (from m ) t o keep in :
,

min d to t hink o r reflec t upon (S i n dhi : m S ansk m

,
y ) , . .
32 I
S RI Ri c , MAH . S A BD X IX . XX .

Inthree qu ali ties 1 the body is bound up ; he w h o h as come into the w orld is a sport .

By sep ar ation ( from Go d ) they ar e sep arated in p ain the self w illed do not obtain union ( with God) ,
-
.

I f the mind re ti red f rom the w orld d w ell in its ( o w n ) house ( body ) i f it be imbued w ith true ,

f e ar ( of Go d ) .

It enj oys the gre at delight of divine kno w ledge it w ill n ot again become h ungry ,
.

O Nan ak I kil l thi s ( thy ) mind an d be united ( to God ) there w ill not be ag ain p ain ,
.

S i r ? Rag ; mabal d I .

X IX .

This m ind is foolish an d covetous given to an d allured by cov etousness ,

.

The S ekta ( w orshipper of the S h akti ) is not aff ected by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) in foolishness he ,

is coming an d going .

If a S adb ( holy m an ) meet w ith the true Guru the abode o f qu ali ties ( t e the S upreme Being) ,
. .

is obtained ( by him ) .

P ause .

O ( my ) m ind ! give
up egotism an d pride I
H aving served H ari the Guru the oce an thou w ilt obtain honour at the threshold
, , ,
.

H aving muttered the n ame o f Ram d ay an d night the disciple kno w s the w e alth of Hari ,
.

A l l com forts ar e in the enj oym ent of the taste o f Hari ; in the a ssembly of the s aints divine
k now ledge is obtai ned .

( By w hom ) al ways day an d night the L ord H ari is w orshipped ( to him ) the name is given by the
, , ,

true Guru .

By the do g falsehood is practised ; by reviling the Guru he is wasted an d consum ed .

E rring he w anders about he h as much p ai n ; Yam a h aving killed ( him ) m akes him a threshing floor
, ,
- .
2

The self w illed obtains no com fort the disciple ( obt ains ) comfort an d splendour
-
, .
3

H ere ( in this w orld ) business is pushed o n ( but) the w rit of the True one is authoritative ,
.

H e is the fr iend ( o f ) H ari w h o serves the Guru ; by the agency o f the Guru he is f oremost .

O Nan ak ! w h o does n o t f orget the n ame h e ( is ) conspicuous “ by ( this ) true w ork ,

.

S IN R ag ; n za a l d b I .

X X .

but a little the bel oved be forgotten there is gr eat sickness in the mind ( produced )
If , .

H o w sh all honour a t the threshold be obtained w hen H a ri d oe s n o t d w ell in the mind ? ,

By meeting w ith the Guru com f ort is obt ained t h e fi re di es the ( three ) qu alities ar e absorbed , , .
5

P ause .

O mind , day an d night re m ember the qualities o f Hari I

Those men ar e r are in the w orld by w hom the n ame is not,
a single moment forgott en .

I three qu alities ar e 113

The ,

i e H e b eat s h i m h ar d like a t h r eshing flo o r

2
. .
- .

l 13 m S an sk
a
£1 31 1
3 spl endour lus t r e
.
, , .

2am m ay h er e be tran sl ate d by conspic uo us ( lite ral ly a flag ) ; true w ork ( S ansk 3 3
4 “ ”
= n ot , .

forgett i n g t h e n a m e— i s th at w h ich h as a r eal va lu e o r m erit

~
B y n o t for gett ing t h e n a m e a m an becomes .
,

ho n oured a t t h e t hresh ol d o f B ar i B ut $11 11 35 m ay al so be take n

. h e at ten d s t o i s intent on ,

( wit h th e L oc at iv e ) true w ork .

313 HTffJ
5 ‘
Un fit i s here verb (“T6 6 1
.
W t o be a bsorbed ) an d not postposi tion ( i n ) , .
 S IRI RE G, MA H . S AE D X X I .
33

( If ) l ight be un it ed w ith th e source of light th er e is conj unct ion of the intelligence w ith the ,

p ri n ciple o f in te lligence ‘
.

By th e destr uction of ego ti sm they ar e gone th er e ar e n o ( longer ) doubt an d grie f , .

.
I n w hich di sciple s mi nd Har i d wel ls his union ( w ith H ari ) t h e Guru brings about
’
.
,

If I m a ke ( my ) b ody ( like th at ) of a fascin atin g w om an the enj oyer w ill enj oy ( it) , .

With th at love should not h e m ade th at appe ars as transitory , .

That Lord is the husb and of the bed h e d allies ( w ith ) the disciple ( as w ith ) a belov ed w om en
, .

H av ing removed the f our fi res a by th ro w ing the w ater of B ari ( upon th em ) di e 0 disciple ! , ,

Within ( thee) the lot us i s ( then ) opened filled wi th n ectar thou wi lt be s ati ated , .

0 Nan ak ! h aving m ade the tr ue Gur u ( th y ) fri end thou wilt attain th e Tr ue one hav ing gone to , ,

the thre sh old ( of God ) .

S ir : R ag makal d I .

Obeloved mutter Har i Heri ! h aving taken the wisdom ( =instruc ti on ) of the Guru say
, , Hari
0 mind if th e touchstone be applied to th e True one i f he be w eighed by a f ull w eight
, ,

Hi s v alue is not obt ained by an y one 0 he art ! h e i s a p riceless " gem ,

.

P ause .

O br o ther th e d iamond of Hari is in th e Guru !

,

I n t h e true asse mbly ‘ the true Guru is obtained by pr aising ( Hari ) d ay an d night by me ans of th e
w ord ( of the Guru )
5
.

The true stock in trade ( or goods ) w e alth an d c api tal is obtained from the Guru s revel ation
- -
,
’
.

A s fire dies by w ater being poured upon it thus thirst ( is extinguished ) by the sl av e o f sl aves }!
,

Th e executioner " o f Yam a does not touch ( the discipl e ) thus he crosses the w ater o f e xistence an d ,

w il l c ause ( others ) to cross .

To the disciple fal sehood i s not ple asing ; to him wh o is attached to t r uth truth is ple asi ng , , .

To th e S ak ta ( = impious) truth does not ple ase f al sehood is allotted to the fal se one , .

By the Guru b ein g j oined ( with th em ) they the true ones) are steeped in tr uth the true ones ,

ar e absorbed in the fi n e one .

In th e he art is a gem a ruby ; the n ame is a j ew el th e best thing “ a diamond

, , , .

T h e true stock an d w e al th is the n am e ; in every body is the prof ound an d deep ( S upreme Being ) .

O Nan ak ! by th e disciple the di amond is obtained i f Har i bestow mercy on him , .

T h e S upreme B ein g is 3 351 (H ST self resplen dent or the source o f light which is th e p rinciple
-
,

o f li fe in rati on al bei n gs In c o n sequence o f th e 3 f? ( light) being infused in t o the c reated s p irits there is
.
,

$13 13 i n t el l ig en c e in them
, , T h e S upreme B ein g i s therefore
. intel lig en t or the prin ci ple of in tell i ,

n ce fr om which th e 3 3 % o f t h e ( ration al) bei n g s h as em an ated

g e , 1 .

a 3 {
l
T h e four fire s or b eat s are s aid to be : fi l " 1] 6 , , .

afi a m such l ike c ompounds are ve ry frequent in th e Granth sig nifyi n g literal ly :p ri c el ess in p ri c e
, , .

313 m the true a ssembly or the assem bly o f the true disciples or s aints
,
.

3 3 % am to p raise Hari by me ans o f the m or w ord of t h e Guru

,
.

m m the sl ave o f slaves ( servus ser vorum ) i e th e Guru This phrase is of frequent occ ur
, , . . .

rence i n the Granth .

7
w hic h the S i k hs t ra d ition all y exp l a in by m esse ng er is t h e s am e a s m fia [g
- ’

dan dfl execut ione r .

um l,
ik e 1
3 3 1 t h e t h ing t h e real th ing or subs t ance
, ,
th e b est t hi n g or i n cl ud ing al l things .

5
34 S RI RE G, MA H
I . I .
,
S A BD X X II . XX III .

S ir ? R ag ; mahal d I .

X X II .

By w andering a bout the fire ( o f the he art) is n ot extinguished ,

if one w ander f rom country to
country .

From h i s he art the dirt ( = si n ) does n ot go off w retched is his li fe w retched his ( faqi r s ) dress , ,
’
.

Devotion is n ot brought about by anything except by the instruction o f the true Guru ,
.

P ause .

0 he art attending to the Guru remove the fi re !

, ,

If the w ord o f th e Guru d w ells in the min d the thirst o f egotism dies aw ay , .

O mind ! it ( i e the n ame ) i s a priceless gem from th e n ame o f Ram honour is obtained ‘
. .
, .

H a vi n g j o ined the assembly of the true ones H ari is obtained by t h e di sciple h aving applied his ,

devotio n to Hari 2
.

IVh en h i s o w n sel f i s gone com fort is obtained ( as) w ater mixing w ith w ater is absorbed ( in it)
, , .

By w hom the n ame o f Ha ri H ari is not kept in his thoughts he comes an d goes vicious , ,
.

By w hom the true Guru the S piri t h as not been j oin ed he pines in th e water of existence and
, ,
3
,

c auses ( others ) t o pine .

This gem 0 soul ! w h ich is pricel ess goes thus for a kau di ( cowr ie )
, , .

Those are perf ect an d w i se m en by w hom being desirous “ for the true Guru is found , , , .

H avin g m et w ith the Guru the w ater of existence i s crossed ( by them ) at the th reshold they are ,

m an ifest ( present) w ith honour

5
.

O Nan ak ! they w ill h ave bright f aces ( in w hom ) contempl ation springs up ( an d ) attention ( to the) ,

w ord ( o f the

S ir ? Rag ; mat c h? I .

III X X .

M ake traffi c 0 trader ! take w ith c are a stock o f goods

, .

S uch a thing should b e bought w ith w hich one gets through ( the water of existence ) , .

In th e oth er w orld is a very kno w ing b anker he w ill look after the thing 7 , .

-
(mu
m) is lso n eut er t o be received com e t o h an d
‘

U TE58 1 a , , to .

m 3 f .
( S in d h i El ? S an sk .
Fl a : t h e en teri n g i n t o a thin g absorpt ion in , deep m editation or

i n t ens e d evo tion t o .

3
T h e t r ue G u ru i s o ften c al l ed i n t h e Gran th (H E R) “ i s c all ed in t h e Vis h nuP u ri na
E . -

V i sh n u ( w h o i s i den ti fi ed w it h B rahm a) BE E ( spiri t i n dividualit y ) b ein g t h e firs t form o f t h e S upreme S ee

, , .

V i sh n u P ur i n a p 9 T h e true Guru i s con sidered as a n A va tar o f t h e S upreme B ein g an d th erefore th e

, . .
,

a t t ribut e o f g al i s con ferre d o n him t o o B ab a N an ak i s co n sidered by t h e S ikhs as an A vat ar i n carn ation)

.

(
o f t h e S upre m e
( Vish n u) w h o b ec am e a g ai n i n car n ate i n the n i e fol lo wi n g Gur us ; fo r this reaso n th ey all
, n

call th em sel ves N anak .

3 ft? i s a dj ecti v e ( W ) h avi n g a t aste for l on gi n g fo r o r h avin g a right u n d erst an di n g for th e mat ter
, , , .

W 3 13} h as h ere t h e s ense o f NE W m a n i fest presen t as use d al re a dy by T ulsi D as ( an d writ ten by

6
, , ,

h im m ) .

N o S i kh , h o w
m uch soever I i n quired could exp l ai n me this ver s e T h e sens e i s : t h ose h ave (or will
6
, .

h ave) bright fa ces i n w h om co n templ atio n an d a t te n t io n

affi n et ) o f t h e w ord springs up m -
. ,

soun d w o r d i s n ea rly al w ays t h e w ord o f t h e Guru

, , .

7
T he W o r t r a ffi c k er ( re t ail d e al er
, ) takes h i s E H3 stock o f goods ( or BIfi I c apital) fro m th e '

m ( E n w holes ale merchan t o r b an ker t o w hom h e i s acco u n table , .

36 S RI RI G,
I MAH . S AE D X X VI . XX VII .

himsel is the b t of the net he himsel f is W ithi n ( it ) the greediness ( of th e fi sh )

‘
He f ai ,
.

My beloved himself is in m any ways pl ay f ul O my ( fem al e ) fri end ! ,

He conti nu ally d allies ( wi th ) th e favoured w oman ; behold this is my state .

Nan ak bo w s w ith sup p l i c ati ou: thou ar t the l ake , thou ar t the gander .

Thou ar t the crane thou ar t the white lotus tho uthyself seest ( thy ) opening
”
,
8
,
.

I
‘

S er i Rag mafia l d .

III . GIMW .

XX VI .

Make thisbody the e arth ( good ) w orks the seed the bow holder ‘will pour w ater ( upon it )
, ,
- .

( M ake
) th e mind t h e husb andm an c ause H ari to spring up ( as a sprout ) in the he ar t thus tho u
, ,

obtai n the st ate of fin al em ancip ation .

Wh y ar t thou proud 0 f ool of the May a ( illusive w e alth ) ?

,

Thy father son al l thy wi ves thy mother will at the end n ot be thy comp anions
, , , , .

He w h o pulls out ( fr om h i s he art) the abnorm al st ate of sensu ality an d the w icked ones 5 ,

becomes me di tating on the S upreme S pirit af ter h av ing given th em up , .

Th e n silent repetition ( of the n ame) au st erity an d continence is made, w hen t hey ( i e the wicked)
,
. .

are checked the lotus opens in the hermit age ( i e secluded he art )
,
. . .

( W h o subdues the t w enty seven f old body

) ( wh o ) in the thre e st ations "
remembers continually ,
6

de ath.

H e recogniz es i n the ten an d eigh te en the Infinite ; Nanak s ays : thus he is i n o n e ( continual) ”

absorp tion ( o f thought ) .

S ir ? Rag ; muhal d I .

III . Ghar .

XX V II .

Make w orks the e arth th e n ame the seed give continu all y th e w ater of truth
, , .

Having become a husb andman grow fai th p ar adi se an d hell is thus ( obt ained ) by the f ool ( and) wise ”
,
.

W 31 imin utive o f 31 8 3;
s. m d
. a pl ant A rum Ind icum
( ) th e root o f w hich is some ti mes ,

eaten an d us ed a s a b ait fo r fi sh .

( S ansk a m ) m o st here be tran sla ted by c r an e fo r the s ake o f contrast W

3
. S ansk .
.

m is the white lotus t hat Open s at n ight time

, .

@
, ,
- .

fa u l t ! in ste ad o f 11 1 1 ( S an sk W ) the open ing o f the lotus ( at night ti me)

.
, - .

W m whose h an d Is a h ow an epithet o f Vishnu

,
'

, .

2 1 12 t h e wicked are amt 5m 233 an m

“
. . . .

w W the t w enty seven fol d e bo dy T he body 1 5 s aid to consist of twenty fi ve p arts 0 ‘

,
-
, . .
'
- .

and of twen ty s even -

.

H3 8 m . S t 3 t 10 0 =W
WW GR
is also counted t h e absorptio n o f the soul I n B rahm a
: i
wa ki n g dre a m a n d deep slee
. e
'
p a fourth ( a
, ) ,
m , , m
, .

9
Th e t en a re said to be t h e fou r V edas an d the six S h astras the ei ghteen ar e the eighteen P ur i as
n .

T h e w or d s ar e so elliptic th at they ar e h a r dly i n telli gi ble

, The se n se is : thus p aradise is obtained by .

t h e wise an d hell by t he fool .

 S RI E
I KG MA H , . S AE D X X VIII . XX X I .
37

P ause .

L ikely th ou w ilt think th at it ( i e p aradise ) is obt ained by ( mere ) w ords

,
. .
.

By the conceit of w e alth by th e be auty of the body in this w ise the ( hum an ) bi rth is lost
, , .

V ice is on th e body ( like ) mud this mind is a f rog wh o does not get an y inform ation respecting
, ,

the lotus .

The bl ack bee is th e te acher wh o continu ally t alks ; h ow shall it ( i e the mind ) understand w hen
, . .
,

h e ( the bl ack bee ) does not m ake it underst and ?

S pe aking an d he aring is ( like ) the voice of the w ind ( i e useless ) this mind is att ached to . .
,

the May a .

The ( mercif ul ) gl an ce of the L ord is he art pleasing to them by w hom he is considered as One an d -
,

medit at ed upon .

( By w hom ) the thi r ty ( d ays of fasting ) an d th e five ( prayers daily ) h ave been kept he having , ,

m ade the n ame his comp anion goes oil having frustr ated the design of S at an
, ,
.

Nan ak s ays : it must be dep arted w h at for is property an d w e alth am assed ? ,

S im Rag ; maizal a I .

IV . Gla m

X X VI II .

is the Lord by w hom the w orld is m ade buddin g ( by w hom ) the

He , , w orld is made green .

By w hom the w ater an d e arth h ave been fixed ; blessed is the cre ator .

P ause .

Thou must die 0 Mull a ! thou must die rem ain in the fe ar of the cre ator !
,
1

Then thou ar t a Mulla then thou art a K az i if thou know est the n ame o f God
, , .

N one though he be very le arned w ill rem ain it is gone on w ards

, , , .
2

H e is a K az i by w h om his own self is ab andoned an d the one n ame is m ade his support
, .

H e is an d w ill be he w ill not be destroyed true is the cre ator

, , .

Five times he prays he re ads the book of the Qoran , .

Nan ak says w hen th e gr ave c alls d r inking an d e ating is stopped , .

I
'

S t r i R ag ma h al d .

IV . Ghar .

XX I X .

There is one dog ( an d) t wo bitches w ith ( me ) .

Bew ildered they al ways b ark e arly in the morning .

Falsehood is a kn ife stolen ( goods ) c arri on ,

.

I rem ain in th e form of a bow m an O cre ator ! ,

3

P ause .

‘
I h ave no ro ad o f honour nor do I pr actise g ood , w orks .

I am ugly an d rem ain in an un cle an form .

1
the beginning of a senten c e an d in connexion w ith an imperative is an exhortatory pa rtic le like
at , ,

the S anskrit wfir .

U TFQ 3 m to c a rry the foot = t o go o n to quicken one s step

2 ' ’
.
, ,

3
m armed w ith a h o w ; a c a ste o f l o w people w h o ar e a rmed with a bow an d live by hunti n g
, , .

4
ufi i f U fi ro ad of honour t e I do not walk honourably
'

, , . . .
38 S IRI RE G, MA E . I .
, S AE D X X X .

O nl ythy n ame s aves the world .

This is my hope thi s my support ,

.

With my mouth I utter c alumny day an d night .

‘
I look at another s w ife an d am of l ow occup tion
’
a .

L ust an d wr ath d well in my body I am a (l an dal ,

.

O cre ator ! I rem ai n in the f orm o f a bow m an .

E nsn ared ( caught) is my understan di ng by an elegant dre ss .

I am a che ater I che at the country ,

.

I am very clever gre at is my w eight ,

.
2

I rem ain in the form of a bow m an O cre ator ! ,

I am ungrate ful I live on the w age s o f i niquity

,
.

H ow sha ll I w icked thie f sho w my f a ce ?

, ,

The humble Nan ak expresses his thought .

I remai n in the form of a bow m an 0 cre ator ! ,

S ir : Rag ; met a l s 1 .

IV . Ghar

X XX .

1 There is one ( an d the s ame ) understanding i n as m any cre atures as there

. are.

W ithout understan ding none is cre ated .

A s their understanding is so is their w ay ,

.

The account is one an d the same ( in co n sequence of w hich ) they come an d , go .

3

P ause .

Wh y , 0 soul !
thou cleverness ?
p rac ti sest
H e ( i e Go d) . . takes an d
gives there is no remissness ( on his ,

Thi ne are the cre ature s an d thou belongest t o the cre atures .

To w hom ( else) sh all they come an d w eep O L ord ? ,

A s thou ar t the Lord they come ( t o thee ) an d w eep ,

.

Thou art theirs an d they ar e thine .

We contradict w e contradi ct , .

Thou w eigh est ( us ) w ithin thy sight .

Wh o ( does) good w orks he h as full understanding ,

.

Without good w orks it ( i e the understandi ng) decre ases in the he art
. . .

Nan ak bow s wh at sort o f a m an w ill get divine knowledge ?

He wh o know s his ow n self w ill comprehend ( Go d ) , .

Wh o reflects by the favour of the Gur u

That s age is acceptable at the threshold ( of Go d) .

1
O ccupied w ith
or in a l ow busi n ess or a l o w c aste m an ,
-
.

I t i s di ffi cult to say w h at i s exa ct ly me ant by 3 3 1 3 1

2
3 as there i s no hint t o wh at i t i s to be
'

3 .

referred V ery likely th e sense is : my weigh t ( 3 1 3 m ay have this me aning) is gre at which I as a clever
.
, ,

m an h ave o r exercise
, .

a
$ 1 11 i s th e fi n al acc oun t taken an d a sked at th e thre shold o f God acco rdin g to whi ch they c ome a n d ,

go t e ar e subj ect ed to tr ansm igra tion

, . . .

fim w z fi ua
’
‘
fz s .
40 I
S RI RI G, MA H . S A BD I .
(X X X IV )

P ause .

Ho w sh all the l amp burn w ithout oil ?

I f the P ar anas ar e highly appreci ated i f the , w ick of f e ar is applied to this body .

‘
The understanding of truth is unaw ar es kindled .

P ause .

This is the oil thus the lamp b urns

,
.

M ake a li ght the L ord then m eets ( w ith thee )

,
.

In this body sticks a B any ai ?

’

Comfort is obtained if w orship ( of Go d) h e m ade

,
.

The w hole w orld i s coming an d going .

( I f ) in the w orld w orship ( o f God) be practised

Then a se at at the threshold w ill be obt ained .

N an ak s ays the ar m wil l be s w ung .

3

S in Rag ; maka l d III .

I . Ghar .

Om ! By the favour of the true Guru .

1 . X X X IV ‘ .

( l ) I serve my
. tr ue Guru w ith one mind w ith one thought an d love
o wn , .

Th e true Gu r u is the he art s desire an d T i rt h a o f him w hom he instructs

’
, .

H e obtains the boon f o r w hich h i s he art h as been an xious ; the fruit he w ishes he gets
, , .

I f the n ame be reflected upon if the n ame be asked he is e asily absorbed in the n ame
, , .

P ause .

my min d t aste the juice o f Hari an d thy thirst w ill ce ase

O .

The di sci ples by w hom it h as been t asted rem ai n e asily absorbed

, , .

By w hom the true Gur uh as been served they h ave obtained the tre asure o f the n ame , .

In their he art the love o f B ar i d w ells in their m ind conceit h as ce ased , .

The lotus o f the he art h as opened medit ation is e asily brought about
, .

T h e pure heart is delighted w ith H ari an d at the threshold honour is obtained .

Those w h o serve their o wn true Guru ar e r are in the w orld .

By w hom egotism a n d selfishness ar e destroyed an d H ari is kept in the bre ast .

Wh o h ave love to the n ame fo r them I sacri fi ce myself

, .

Those are h appy in the four periods ( o f the w orld ) in w hom the inexh austible endless n ame is , , .

By meeting w ith the Gur u the n ame is obtain ed spiritu al blindness an d ( w orldly ) thirst ce ase , .

With H ari their he art is delighted in their house they ar e sol itary , .
5

unfi t is W w ithout k n o w i n g un aw ares

e , .

B any a a Hin d i ret ail d ealer T h e B an yas ar e r ather noto riou s fo r t h eir greediness an d unscrup ul ousness
2 -
, : .

B TU W th e ar m wil l b e sw u n g
, In I n d ia people wh o wal k abou t h appy a n d w it hou t con cern
.

usu all y s win g th eir a rms i n w alkin g .

4
T h e S abds ( D up a d as an d C aup ad as) ar e coun t ed in o n e con t in u al n umber but a t t h e s a m e time the ,

verses o f th e di fferen t m ah al as ( or Gur us ) are coun ted sep ar ately T h e first n umb er i n d icates t here fore the .

numb er o f verses b elongi n g t o th e sever al m ahal as th e seco n d the totality of S abds et c i n a Ri g , .

, .

T h e sense is : th ey r eti re f r om t h e w orl d an d w orldly pursui ts

5
.
 S RI RAG,
I MA H I II . .
, S ABD II . III .
(X X X V . XXX VI ) .
41

I shall s acrifice mysel f fo r those wh o h av e obtained the taste of Hari

, .

O Nan ak by h is ( merciful ) look the true n ame is obtained the vessel , of vir tues .
|

S l at Rag ; malaal d III .

II . X X X V .

Wh o having put on m any dresses deceives ( others ) pr actising in his mind

2
, an d he art hypocri sy .

He does not obtai n the p al ace of Hari aft er his de ath h e enters into ordure
, .

P ause .

my mind t b e disciple wh o ( d wel ls ) solitary in his o w n house

O
'

, .

H e pr actises true abstinence an d w il l become m ani fest

By whom h i s mind is overcome by me ans of the w ord ( instruction ) o f the Guru he obt ains the ,

state of fin al em ancip ation in h i s house .

By w hom the n ame of Har i is reflected upon h i m he ( t e Har i ) brings to the commun ion of the , . .

true assembly .

If ( one ) enj oy a l akh o f w omen i f he exercise dominion over the nine re gions ( of the e arth )
, .

W ithout t h e true Guru he does not obt a in comf ort a g ain an d a g ai n he f alls into the w omb 3
, .

By w hom the neckl ace of Hari is put on their neck having d irected their thought on the feet ,

o f the Guru .

Behind them f ol low s incre ase an d success they h ave not a bit of covetousness ,
.

Wh at ple ases to the L ord th at is done anything else c annot be done

.
, ,
.

H umble Nan ak l i ves by t aki ng the n ame ; 0 H ari give ( it to me ) according to thy inherent goo d ,
a
disposition !
S ir ? Rag ; malad l d III .

I . Glzar .

III . X X X VI .

Whose the government is his every body

,
is .

By performing the w ork of a disciple the True one becomes m anifest in the he art .

W ithin w hom the True one d w ells he h as true k n o wledge of th e True one
,
.

Those w h o ar e united w ith the Tr ue one ar e not sep arated ( from him ) they d well i n their ow n house ‘
, , .

P ause .

my beloved w ithout Hari I h av e none other !

O ,

The true Guru is the true ( re al ) Lord un ion ( wi th Hari ) i s m ade by the pure w ord ( instr ucti on o f
,

the Guru ) .

Wh o by the w ord ( of the Guru ) is united ( w ith Hari ) he rem ains united wh om he ( Hari ) , ,

unites himsel f .

In a second love n o one is united ag ai n an d again b e comes an d goes

,
.

I n al l the One dw ells the One is contained ( in them )

,
.

1
313 a ttribut e o f the n ame about the s me 3123 fK QTX ; 3 11 1 is the A rabic
f requent a ,
a as
‘

cup in P nj ab i it d enotes a l a rg e m e t a l l i c p l a t e or v essel 318 3 T5 m ay be tra nsl a ted by t h e v essel of

( ); a .

vir t ues o r the vessel ( receptacl e ) o f ( a ll ) qu alities .

2 the d ress o f a faqi r This verse i s Spok en ag ai n st the deceitful fa qi rs

.
.

5
fi He a t r to fa ll
.
in to t h e w omb t e to b e born a g ain in t h e course o f tra n smig r at ion
, . . .

T h e me an ing is : w hen uni ted w ith the L o rd th ey d well in their o w n house solita ry ( r etired f rom the
4

w orl d ) , an d d o n ot w a nder about like fa qi rs O r h ouse m ay be ta ken as the i n n er m a n

“
.
.
42 I
S RI Ri c , M AH . S ARD I V .
(X X X VI ! )

That disciple t o whom h e himsel f ( = H ar i ) is merci ful is absorbed in the n am e

, ,
.

H av ing re ad h av ing re ad an astrological tre atise the Ban dit s reflect ( o n it )

, ,
.

Their understanding an d intellect are l ed astray they do n ot understand i n their he art is the p assion , ,

o f covetousness .

They wan der about in the eigh ty four l akb s ‘ ( o f transmigrations ) w andering an d w andering they
-
,

become w retched .

W hat i s w ritten bef ore must be done nobody is er asing it ,

.

The service of the true Guru is difficult ; th e he ad should be given after h aving ab andoned
one s o wn sel f
’
.

I f h e fal ls in w ith th e w or d ( o f the Guru ) he i s united w ith H ari ; al l ( h i s) w orship is recompensed ,

.

By touching the philosopher s stone he becomes a philosopher s stone light is absorbed in the
’ ’
,

luminous ( S uprem e B eing ) .

To w hom it i s decreed bef ore w ith them the true Guru w ill fall in ,
.

0 he art d o n o t say : ( I am ) h un gry hungry d o thou n o t utter a cry !

, , ,

By w hom the eighty four l akhs ( o f forms o f existence ) ar e cre ated he gives support t o every on e
-
,
.

The fe arless is al w ays m ercif ul h e rem embers all , .

0 Nan ak ! if it ( = truth ) be understood by t h e discipl e h e w ill ob t ain the g at e o f s alv ation ,

.

S ir ? R ag ; mafi a/l ei III .

IV . X X X VII .

By w hom h avi ng he ard it ( i e the n ame ) is m inded th ey d w ell in their ow n house

, , . .
,
.

H avin g praised the t r ue H ari by m eans of the instruction of the Guru th e vessel o f virtues is obt ai n ed ,
.

Those w h o are s teeped in t h e w ord ( of th e Guru ) are pure I sh all al w ays be their s acrifice ,
.

In whos e he art Hari d w ells in their bo dy he i s m anifest , .

P a use .

my mind medit ate on t h e pure H ari H ari

O , ,

O n w hose f orehe a d it is w ritten f rom t h e b egin n ing th ose disciples constantly meditate on him , .

0 ye holy m en o f H ari b ehold an d look ! he d w ells ne ar brim f ul

, .

By w hom he is recog n iz ed by me ans o f the i nstruction o f the Guru those see him al w ays in their ,

presence .

H e al w ays d w ells in t h e he art o f the v irtuous f r om t h e vicious b e i s far , .

The flesbl y minded ar e w ithout virtu es w ithout t h e n ame they pine an d di e

-
, .

By w hom t h e w ord ( instruction ) o f th e Guru is he ard an d minded they meditate in th eir mind ,

on th at H ari .

By being attached d ai ly t o devotion m in d an d bo dy become pure , .

F als e is t h e colour of the s afflo w er it p asses aw ay an d t h ey w eep in p ain , .

In w hose heart th e n ame i s shini ng he w ill al w ays alw ays be firmly est ablish ed , , .

H avin g obt ained th e boon o f hum an birt h he does n ot think o f the n am e o f Hari n o r m editate
( on it) .

A ft er his f oot h as slipped he c annot rem ain ( here

) in the oth er w orld he does n ot obtain a pl ace
, , .

Th at ti me do es n ot come t o b and ( again ) at t h e end h av i n g gon e he regrets it , , .

O n w hom h e ( Hari ) looks ( in mercy ) he i s s aved h aving constantly directed h i s th oughts ri

on Ha
, , .

1
Ther e a re eigh ty f our l akh s o f forms o f exis t en ce (fifi g z fi fa ) through w hich tr an smigrat io n runs
-
:
,

n in e l a kh s o f E IGH
T ( mo v i n g in t h e w a ter) t w en ty s even l akhs o f m a( ( st a tio n a ry l ik e t rees
,
el even
- ‘
, ,

l a kh s o f gif t : ( w orms t en l akhs o f W WI ( bird s) t w en ty th r ee l a khs o f £31112: ( qua d rup ed s) four l akhs
“

, -
,
,

of
W ( m en ) .
44 srni RI G, MA B . S A B D VI I . VIII (X L . . XLI .
)

he ( Ha ri ) is f ound by desti ny then he is obtai ned ; wi thout desti n y he c anno t be obtai ned
If ,
.

E ighty f our lakhs are lon gi ng f or h im ; w hom he un i tes he is u n ited w ith H ari
-
,
.

0 Nan ak ! b y the disciple Hari is obt ained by being al ways absorbed in the n ame of Hari ,
.

S if t Rag ; malaal d III .

VII . X L .

The n ame of Har i is an oce an of comfort by the disciple it is obtained ,

.

By wh om d ai ly the n ame is meditated upon he is e asily absorbed in the n a me ,

.

Hi s heart is in love w ith the true Har i hi s tongue si ngs th e qu alities of Hari ,
.

P au
se .

O b rother ,
the w orld i s p ained by second love !
H e wh o h as come to the asylum of the Gur u obtai ns comfort h aving d aily meditated on the n ame , .

To the t r ue on e dirt does not stick a pure mind meditates on H ari ,

.

If by t h e di sciple the w ord ( of the Guru ) is kno w n he is absorbed in the immortal n ame of Har i , .

By the Guru di v in e kn ow ledge is kin dled very b ri ght ignoran ce an d darkness p ass away , .

The fleshl y minded ar e filthy fil led w ith dirt ( in them ) is the thirst an d p assion of egoti sm
-
, , .

W ithout th e w ord the dir t does not go off th ey die an d are born ( a ai n ) an d become w retched
,
g
.

They cling to imposture 1 an d h ave neither t hi s nor tha t side .

The disciple practi ses sil ent repetition of the n ame austerity an d contin ence his love is ( di rected) ,

to th e n ame of H ari .

By the disciple the one name of the cre ator is al ways medi tated upon .

0 Nan ak the n ame is medit ated upon ( by him ) ( w hich ) is the support of al l cre atur es , .

III
'

S er t R ag ; mah al d .

VI II . X LI .

( l ) The fleshl y mi nded is filled with spiritual blindness, indifference to th e w orld an d lonel iness he
.
-

does not practise .

H e does n ot know th e w ord ( of th e Guru ) he is al ways in p ain at the threshold of Hari he loses
, ,

hi s hon our .

By the disciple egotism is p arted w ith by being attach ed to the n ame comfort is ob tained ( by h im )
, .

P ause .

0 my mi n d day an d night ( my ) hope h as been ful fil l ed cont inu ally !

,

Wh o h avi ng served the true Guru burn s hi s spiritu al ignoran ce , he is lonely in his ( own ) house .

The disciple practises ( good ) w orks indifference to the w orld an d j oy in Hari sp rings up
,

Im

Day an d
night he perf orms devotion h avin g ann ihil ated egotism he is free from c are
, .

By gre at luck the true ass embly i s obtained H ari is obtain ed an d ( thereby ) e asily j oy , .

That m an is a s aint an d indifferent to the w orld th at m an establishes the n am e in his h eaIt , .

Within w hom l urks no d arkness wh o thoroughl y removes from w ithin his ow n self
, .

The tr e asure of the n ame is sho wn ( to him ) by t h e true Guru , by d rinking th e j uice of Hari he is s atiate d .

1
m m d eceit impostur e com p ounded o f 11 3 1 8
, ,
3 ,
f rogu e ry ( S a nsk S H
m
I -
T11 by inversion of the , . . .
,

first syll able an d

‘
5 5 p l ay playin g w ith ro guery prac t isin g i m o si t io n o n people b e mpt pre
, ,
p y y
,

te nc es or some hocus pocus They cling t o impost ure ( as k n avish faqi rs are w ont to d o) an d lose thus this
.

a n d t h a t w orld a r e depri ved o f both

, .
 sm i E KG, MA H . S A E D IX . x .
(X L II m m ) . .
45

By w homsoever is obt ai ne d the society of the pious by a perfect destin y he is indi fferent to ,

the w orld .

The bou
flesh l y -minded w anders t he do es not kno w the true Guru egotism clings t o his he art
a , , .

0 Nan ak ! those wh o ar e steeped in the wor d o f th e Guru an d dyed in the n ame of B ar i

( ) ,
ar e

w ithout f e ar w h at c an h appen ( t o them ?

, )

S III
'

zr i Rag maizal d .

IX . X L II .

In the house the w ares ar e laid out al l the thing is w ithin , .

I f every moment th e n ame be remembered som e disciple will obtai n it ,

.

The tre asure o f the n ame is inexh austible by a gre at destiny it is obtained , .

P ause .

O my heart give up c alumny egotism an d conceit !

, ,

O disciple meditate thou al w ays w i th one mind on B ar i !

,

The faces o f the disciples w h o reflect on the w ord of th e Guru ar e bright

, ,
.

H ere ( in this w orld ) an d th ere ( th at w orld) they obtain comf ort h avi ng muttered muttered in , ,

th eir heart : Mur ari !

In their ( o wn ) house the p al ace ( of Hari ) is f ound ( by them ) by reflecting on the w or d of the Guru ,
.

The f orehe ads of those wh o turn aw ay their face from the true Guru ( w ill be ) black
, , .

D aily they e arn p ain they ar e perpetu ally looked o ut for by the vil e men ‘ o f Yama
, .

( E ven ) in a dr e am they h ave no comf ort th ey ar e consumed by much anxiety , .

The donor o f all is on e he himsel f gives presents, .

N othing c an be s aid he gives to wh om he ple a ses

,
.

O Nan ak by th e disciple he ( =H a ri ) is obtained he himself kno ws him , .

S ir ? Rag ; makal a III .

X . X L III .

the true L ord be se r ved the True one gives gre atness
If ,
.

( In w hose ) he art he d wells by the favour of the Guru he removes egotism ,

.

This run nin g m i nd he w ill s ave w hen he himself looks dow n upon it ( in mercy )
,
.

P ause .

Obrother 0 di sciple meditate on the n ame of B ari !

, ,

( In w hose ) he art the tre asure of th e n ame al w ays dw ells he receives a pl ace in the p al aces ( o f B ar i ) , .

S oul an d body of the flesh l y min ded is blind he h as n o pla ce n or site

-
,
.

I n m any births he w an ders about like a c r ew in an empty house .

By me ans o f th e instruc ti on o f the Guru there is light in the he art by the w ord ( of th e Guru ) th e ,

n ame of Hari is obtained .

The w orld en dow ed w ith the three qualities is blind the in fatu ation of the M ay a is d arkness
‘

, .

The greedy w orship for th e sake of foo d re ading the V edas they raise a c r y
.

,
.

A mongst w orldly pursuits they ar e consumed an d de ad they h ave n either t h is n er th at side

’

, .

By the in fatu ation of th e May a is forgotten the father an d prese r ver o f the w orld .

an sk W a l o w vile m a n ; i n; m g quite co r respon d s t o w

mm h
ise re d erived fr o m the S .
, ,

#1 1 3 ,c f.S i ri R a g S ah d 2 1
, 2 T h e w ords m ay ho wever also b e transl ated : they ar e alw ays ove rcome by
, . , ,

t h e n et o f Y am a .
 46 S IRI RAG, MA H . S AB D X I . X II .
(X L I V . X LV .
)

W ithout the Guru it (i . e . the w orld ) is thoughtless the ,

w hole ( cre ation ) is ( therefore ) bo und by
( Yama) the de ath .

The fol lo wers of the Guru ar e s aved having remembered

,
th e true n ame .

S ir ? Rag ; mahal d III .

LI V X I . X .

In
( ) the three qu aliti es is the in fa tu ation o f the M i y a the disciple ob tain s the fourth degree
1
, .

H e is united by him ( w ith himsel f ) in mercy the n ame o f Hari comes an d d wells in his he art , .

In w hose bag there is religious m eri t them he unites w ith the assembly of the pious ,
.

P ause .

Obrother ! keep fast the true instruction of the true Guru !

( Wh o) is acquiring the thoroughly True one ( him ) he ( i e Hari ) unites ( w ith him self ) by the w ord ,
. .

( o f th e Guru ) .

By w hom the n ame is know n for them I s acrifice myself ,

.

H aving given up my ow n sel f I sit do w n at ( their ) feet an d w alk according to their w il l

, .

( Wh o) obtains t h e g ain of B ari the n ame of B ar i he is n aturally absorbed in the n ame

, , .

W ithout the Guru the p al ace ( of Hari) is n ot obtain ed the n ame is not gotten , .

S eek suc h a true Guru from w hom th a t True on e m ay be obtained

, .

He w h o kills the demons lives in com fort w h a t is ple,

asing t o hi m th a t is done
2
, , .

A s the tr ue Guru is looked upon so wi ll be the h appi ness ’ , .

If a m an h av e faith ( in the Guru ) b e wi ll h ave n o doubt w h atever , .

O Nan ak ! there is one light an d t w o f orms ( sh apes ) by the w ord ( of the Guru ) union ( bet w een the ,

t wo) is e ff ected .

S i r e Rag ; mahal d I I I .

X II . X LV .

Having b andoned the nect ar they ar e greedy of w orldly obj ects they per form a fal se w orship
a
, .

They forsake their ow n religion they do not understand their ( life ) is d aily spent in p ain
, , .

The fi esh l y mi nded are blind they d o not think they ar e de ad be in g dro wned w ithout w ate r
-
, , , .

P ause .

my heart flee al w ays to the asylum of B ari

O ,

I f the w ord o f the Guru dw ells within Hari is not forgotten , .

Th i s body is a puppet of the M ay a w ithin w hich w icked egotism is put , .

T h e flesbl y —minded comes an d goes is born an d dies ( again ) h is honour is lost , , .

By ser ving the true Guru comf ort is al w ays obta ined by the Luminous one light is unite d ( with
, ,

himself
The serv ice of the true Guru is f ull o f comfort the fruit th at ( one ) w ishes h e obt ain S , , , ‘
.

By ch astity truthful n ess an d austerity his body is p ure he m akes H a ri Hari d well in his heart
, , .

He rem ain s alw ays in j oy day an d night meetin g w ith the beloved b e obtains comf ort
, , .

I s acrifice myself for those w h o h ave come to the asylum of the true Guru, .

A t the true g ate there is true gre atness ( obtained ) they are e asily absorbed in the T r ue o
ne , .

0 Nan ak ! by his ( mercif ul ) look be is obtained the disciple be unites to union ith himsel
( w f) , .

1
3 63 1 =
3 fi u th fourth
mystic stat e of the so ul in which it is unite d with the S upreme
, e or
,

S pirit or B rahm by intense me d ita tion an d a bstraction f rom al l ob ects o f the sens es
j .

Th e W ar e W W
€ 11 a3
3 0

a ccordin
N U
: 0 3 13 ,
g t o S ikh inter preta tion
, , , .

3
The h app iness o f a m an dep ends o n w h at he takes th e Guru fo r .
48 S IR I RA G, MA I] . S AE D X VI .
(X L IX ).

He himself unite s ( wi th hi msel f ) ; he wh o underst ands ( the truth ) becomes pure

, ,
.

H ari is true true is his w ord by th e w ord ( o f the Guru ) union ( w ith H ari ) is e ffected
, ,
.

P ause .

brother ! w h y is he w h o is destitute o f devotion come into th e w orld ?

O , ,

( By w hom ) t h e service o f the perf ect Guru i s not m ade he h as uselessly w asted his hum an birth ,
.

He himsel f is the lif e o f the w orld the giver of comf ort he himself by his gift uni tes ( w ith
, ,

himsel f ) .

W h at ar e these helpless cre atures w h at sh al l on e say an d tell ( to him ) ?

,

He himself gives gre atness to the disciple h e himself c auses ( him ) t o do se rv ice ,
.

H av ing seen his fami ly he is bew i ldered w ith in fatu ation a t the time of dep art ing it does not ,

go wi th ( him ) .

S er ving the true Guru the abode o f v irtues ( or qu alities = Go d ) is obtai ned ; his v alue is not to be
1

f ound out .

The L ord H ari is my comp anion an d fr iend th e L ord w ill be my comp anion at the end ,
.

( O n e) m ay say in hi s o w n mind an d tho ught an d get it s ai d ( by others ) ( but ) wi thout the

2
,

Guru self does not go .

H ari i s the don or propit ious to his devotees h aving bestow ed mercy h e d w ell s ‘ in ( their) he ar t
, ,
3
.

0 Nan ak ! he gives be auty an d understandi ng the L ord himself gives gr e atness to the di sciple ,
.

3 2% B ag ; malaal d III .

X VI . X LIX .

( l ) Blessed is
. mother w h o h as borne ( th e di sciple ) blessed an d f oremost is ( his ) father
th e , , .

H aving served the true Guru comf ort i s obtained ( by the disciple ) f r om w ithin conceit is gone
, , .

S ta n ding at the g ate ( o f the Guru ) the holy people serve ( hi m ) they obt ai n th e abode o f ( all ) qu alities , .

P ause .

my mind turning w ith the f ace to wards th e Guru medit ate on th at H ari
O ,

I f the w ord o f the Gur u d well s in the mind soul an d body become pure ,
.

H aving besto w ed mercy he h as come t o th e h ouse he hi mself h as come an d j oined ( it) , .

By whom h e is praised by me ans o f the w ord of the Guru they ar e e asily coloured , .

The true ones ar e absorbed in the T r ue one they rem ain unite d ( w ith hi m ) an d are not separated,

( ag ain ) .

Wh atever is to be done th at he h as done anything else c annot be done

, , .

Those w h o ar e sep arated long times h e h as uni ted ( w ith himsel f ) h avin g put them do w n in the
, ,

a ccoun t book o f t h e true Gur u

-
.

He h imsel f w ill c ause the w ork to be done anythin g else c annot be done , .

Havin g given up the p assion o f egotism sou l an d body is dyed w ith colour ( love ) , .

Day an d night the n ame of th e f e arless f ormless is cont ain ed in the he art , , .

0 N an ak ! by himself they are uni te d ( w ith himsel f by me ans of the per fect in fi nite w ord of the
) ( ,

Guru ) .

fi m z i m = fi n na fi m x a an 7: unit
‘
C o n st m c t
2
H e m ay say— that h is o w n s el f is g one an d b e m a
y get i t sa i d by othe rs i e it m ay be atte sted by o thers
forms lik e 3 % m
, . .
.

B ut b ea r in the Gra nth al so t h e s en se of a n i n t e nsi ve verb l z e m ay w el l say .

3 3 % 3 3 35 ( W
a

) ki n d t o th e devotees a frequent at t ribu te o f H a ri i n t h e Gra n th

, ,

m
.

sta n ds here instead o f a b ei o

g le n g th ene d fo r t h e s ake o f th e rhyme .
 smi E KG, MA H I I I VII VIII ( L
. .
, saan X . X . . LI .
) 49

S ir ? R ag m ahald III .

XVII . L .

is the abode of ( al l? q u alities his end c annot be att ained

Gav i n d , .

By talki ng an d ch atting he is not obtai ned ( he is obt ained ) if egotism departs from w ithin
, .

By meeting w ith the true Guru he ( i e the disciple ) is always steeped in the f e ar o f God he himsel f
. .
,

(i . e. God ) comes an d dw ell s in the he ar t .

P ause .

brother ! some di sciple unders tands ( the truth )

O .

Those w h o do w orks wi thout under standing ( the truth ) lose the blessing o f their human bir th , .

Th ese h ave obtained th e relish ( of the n ame) wh o h ave t asted i t w ithout h aving tasted it they ,

go astray in error .

The tr ue n ame is nect ar , which c annot be described at all .

He wh o dri nks it h as become accept able being absorbed in the per fect w ord ( of the Guru )
,
-
.

( 3 ) I f he himself gives then it is received nothing else c an be done

, ,
.

I n the h and of the giver is the gift w hich he bestow s by the medi um of the Guru
,
.

A s it is m ade by hi m so it h as be en ( m ade ) ; a s he do es the w orks ( so they are )

, ,
.

The n ame is ch astity truth ful n ess an d abstinen ce ; w ithout the n ame on e does not become
, ,

By a perfect destiny the na me dw ell s in the heart by ,

m eans of the w ord ( of the Guru ) un ion is
e ffect ed .

O Nan ak ! he wh o a bides in the love ( of B ari ) , e asily obtains the qu ali ties of Hari .

S ifi R ag mahal d III .

X V III . LI .

‘
( )If subdue
on e his body an d pr actise uptur ned austeri ty egotism does n o t dep art from w ithin , .

If he practise very sp ir itu al 2 w orks he w ill never obtain t h e n ame

,
.

If be living di e by means of the w ord of th e Guru the n ame of Hari comes an d d w ell s in the heart
, , , .

P ause .

H e ar O
my hea rt flee to the asylum of the true Guru
, ,

By the f avour o f the Guru one is freed from the w orld h e crosses th e water of existence by me an s ,

of the w ord of the Guru .

In the w hole ( cre ation ) the three qu alities are inh erent second love ( du ali ty ) an d ( conse quent ) ,

disorder 3 .

The Ban di t re ads ( but) is bound by the fetter of spir itu al ignor ance ; he does not understand out
,

of love t o the visible w orld .

By meeting w ith th e tr ue Gur u th e triad ( the three qu al iti es ) goes off, on the f ourth station is th e
gate of salv ation .

Fr om the Gur u th e ( right ) w ay is obtain ed the dimness of spiritual ignorance ce ases , .

6 311 a usteri ty pra ctised by lifti n g up t h e a rms o r standing on th e head an d lifting the feet up
wards etc It i s o ften mentioned in the Granth
, . .

W or wm fal i fi) very spiritual afi ec tedl y spiritu al

'
2
.
, ,

3 m 3 should be cons t ructed ; ( i a cre ation

) fi a in al l
( th e
'
111
1 3
' '

16 313 1 3 . .
,

cre ation) th e three qual ities ar e t h e constituent el ement firms must also be tak en as Nomi
natives .
50 srai nae, MA E . III .
, S AE D X I X . XX .
(L II . L III ) .

If one die by me ns f h e w ord ( o f t h e Gu r u ) h e i s s aved he obt ains the gat e o f sal v ati on
( ) a o t , ,
.

By the favour of th e Guru he rem ains united ( w ith Go d) ; true is th e n ame of the cre ator .

This mi nd is very strong it does n o t give up in an y ( w ay ) its scheme

,
.

It infli cts pain ( upon itself ) by another love an d is much punished .

O Nan ak ! those w h o cling t o the n ame ar e s aved h av in g removed egotism by the w o r d ( o f the Gur u )
,
.

S ifi R ag ; m ah a ld III .

X IX . L II .

If he best ow mercy the Guru is obtain ed w h o establis hes th e n ame of Har i ( in the he ar t )
, ,
.

W ithout th e Guru he is not obtained by an y one h e w aste s uselessly his hum an bir th ,
.

By d oing sel f w ill ed w orks he i s punish ed at the th r eshold ( o f Go d)

- .

P ause .

0 my he art drop second love

,

W ithin thee Hari d w ell s by the service o f the Guru thou W ilt obtai n com fort
,
.

True is the sp eech true is the w ord ( o f the Gu r u ) w hen ( on e) loves the t ruth
, ,
.

Ha ving removed egotism an d w rath the n ame of Ha ri d w ell s in ( his) heart

,
.

I f wi th a pure he art the n ame i s me di tated upon he obtain s the g ate of s al vati on ,
.

In egotism the w orld ( =people ) p asses aw ay h a ving di ed it is b om ( ag ai n ) it comes an d goes , , .

The flesh l y minded do not kno w the w ord ( of the Gur u ) they w ill dep art h avi ng lost the i r honour
-
, .

By w hom the n ame is obtained by the service of the Guru h e rem ains absorbed in the Tr ue one , .

( By w hom ) the Guru i s obt ain ed by min di ng the w ord he removes from w ithi n his own self , .

D aily he performs devotion h i s thoughts ar e al w ays directed on th e Tr ue one

,
.

0 Nan ak ! w hen the n ame the hi ghest good dw ell s in ( hi s) he ar t he is e asil y absorbed ( in Go d )
, , , .

S i r ? R ag ; maha l d III .

X X . L III .

Th ese men w h o h ave not served the true Guru ar e afll ic ted in th e four periods ( of the w orl d )
, , .

The S upreme S piri t w hich is in their house ( = body ) is n ot known ( by th em ) they ar e ruined b v ,

conceit an d sel fishn ess .

Beg gin g from th ose w h o are cursed by the true Guru they ar e consumed in the w orld , .

The true w ord ( of the Guru ) whi ch is putting all things right is not recei ved ( by th em )
, , .

P ause .

0 my he art behold al w ays Har i in ( thy ) presence !

,

He takes aw a y th e p ain of birth an d de ath in the w ord ( of th e Guru ) he is contained brimf ul

, .

Those wh o praise the Tr ue on e ar e true the tr ue n ame is th eir support , .

They do true w ork they love the Tr ue on e

, .

W h at the true L ord is do ing none is erasin g , .

The flesbl y min ded do not obt ain (hi s) pal ace the false ones are rui ned by fal sehood
-
, .

P ra ctisin g selfishness the w orld h as died w ithout the Guru there is deep dar k ness , .

By the in fatu ation of the M ay a the comf ort giving donor is f orgotte n -
.

If it serves the true Gur u then it is s aved if it keep the True one in the b re ast
, , .

By mercy H ar i is obtain ed an d by reflection on the tr ue w ord .

Havi ng ser ved the t rue Guru ( his ) mind is pure by ab andoning the p assion of egotism
, .

H aving given up hi s o w n sel f he dies w hil st li v ing by medi t atin g on the w ord o f th e Gu r u
, .

The hurried avocations ( of life) are sto pp ed love to the Tr ue one h as set in , .

The faces of those wh o ar e immersed in th e True one are bright at th at true court . .
52 srai Ri c , mm .
XX III . XXI V (L V I
. . L VII ) .

is t l ng seeing s e king o is continu ally absorbed in the w ord ( of the Gur u)

‘
He e li an d p a
, ( w h, ) ,
.

Hi f
s voice is soundin g in the f our per iods ( of the w orld ) procl aiming the per ectly True one
( )
.
,

( H i s) egotism an d selfishness ar e stopped ( w h o) is united by the True one ,

.

They h ave the p alace ( of Hari ) in their presence w h o direct their constant thoughts on the T r ue on e .

By his ( merciful ) look the na me is me ditated upon wi thout de stiny it c annot be obtai ned ,
.

By a perfect destiny he obtain s the assembly of the pious w ith whom the true Gur ufall s in ,
.

By being d ail y immersed in the n ame the p ain o f the w orld dep arts from w ithi n
,
.

0 Nan ak ! by me ans of the w ord ( o f t h e Guru ) uni on is ( e ffected ) ( wh o) pr aises he i s absorbed in

z
, ,

n ame .

S ir ? R ag ; malza l d III .

X X I II . L VI .

love he h as put in them w h o reflect on the w ord of the Guru

His own .

W ith the assembly of the pious they rem ai n al w ays united remembering the qu aliti es o f the True one ,
.

He h as clear ed aw ay the dir t of dual ity ( in those ) w h o ha ve put Har i in their bre ast .

True is ( their) speech truth in ( their) heart they love the True one 3
, , .

P a use .

my he art ( thou art ) fi l led wi th the dirt of egotis m

O ,

H ar i is pur e an d al w ays be autif ul by means of the w or d ( of the Guru) h e is adorni ng

, .

Those are un ite d by th e L ord himsel f w hose he art is fascin ated by the tr ue w ord .

By bein g d aily immersed i n the n ame light is absorbed in the luminous ( Hari) , .

By the ( in ward ) light th e Lord is kno w n wi thout the tr ue Gu ruunderstan ding is not obtain ed,
.

T o w hom it h as been decreed beforeh and w ith them the true Gur uh as f all en in , .

Without the n ame the w hole ( W orld ) is di stressed by second love it is lost , .

W ithout it it does not live tw enty f our mi n u t es in p ain the ni ght is p assed
-
, .

H e w h o is led astray by e r ror is bli nd a gain an d a gain he comes an d goes , .

( If ) the L ord best o w hi s ow n look ( of mercy ) he h imself unite s ( w ith hi mself ) , .

He b ears an d sees all things h o w sh all it be deni ed ,

They commit sin on sin ( an d ) are cons umed by sin an d c ause ( others ) to be consumed , .

Tha t L ord does not co me in to their sight the flesh l y minded do n ot obtain n n derst an di n g
.
,
-
.

Whom he makes seeing he sec s ; 0 Nanak ! the di sciple obtain s ( understan ding)
, .

S ir ? Rag ; m aka l rz III .

XX I V . L V II .

W ithout the Guru si ckness is

not broken the p ai n o f egotis m does not dep art , .

In w hose he art be d w el ls by the fa vour o f the Gur u h e rem ains absorbed i n the n ame , .

By the w ord of the Gur u Hari is obtain ed wi thout the w ord he is led astray in error , .

P au
se .

my he ar t dw el l in thy own house !

O ,

P rai se th outhe n ame of Ram there w ill not , he g i co m ing

a a n an d going .

T ho ughtrace of th e subj ect be give n it m us t b e according to the whole c ontext the disci ple
no , , , .

i e The n am e
2
. . .

S om e MS S read WW ; the r ight re a ding i s W

3
.whi ch ho w eve r i s a g ainst the rhyme
. , , the
,

A bl si n g by o n a cco un t o f lo e w i th ( =t o ) H a r i
. .
, , v .

T h e lit ho graphed copy read s W W m f g but th e MS S re ad co rrect ly m m ; , .

W
m m fg is the p assive : h ow shall it b e d enied ?
 S RI RE G,
I MA H I II S AE D X X V VI ( L VIII
. .
, . XX . . L IX .
) 53

Har i
is the onl y dono r, there is none other .

He dw ell s in the heart o f him w h o pr ai ses him by the w ord ( of th e Gur u ) comf ort is e as ily obt ained ,

( by him ) .

He sees al l w ithin his look to whom he ple ases he gives

, , .

E gotism is all c alcul ation in c alcul ati on are n ot the nine com forts
, .

Those wh o pra ctise w orks of poison ar e absorbed in very poison 1

.

W ithout the n ame they get n o place in the city of Yam a they suff er p ain
, .

S oul an d body al l is his even he sustai ns them

, , .

By w hom ( the truth ) is understood by the favour of the Guru he obtains the gate , of s alv ation .

O Nan ak prai se thou the n ame ( of him wh o h as) no end nor limit

S zr i Rag ; mahal d I II
'

X X V . L V III .

They h ave alw ays j oy an d co mf ort w hose support the true name is .

By the favour of th e Guru truth is obtained the remover of p ain , .

H e alw ays alw ays sings the qu alities o f the True on e w h o h as love to the true n ame
, , .

Havin g bestow ed his o w n mercy he h as given him a storehouse ( ful l of devotion

, .

P ause .

my he art sin g the qualities o f hi m w h o is al w ays h appy

O ,

The true w ords o f Hari ar e obtained by him w h o rem ains absorbed wi th H ari , .

By true devotion the he ar t h as become red it is coloured by a n atural pro c ess ,

2
.

By the w ord of the Guru th e he art is ench ante d nothing c an be s aid ( about it ) , .

The tongue coloured by the true w ord ( o f the Guru) d rinks nectar h aving the right t aste it sings
, , ,
3

the qu alities ( o f H ari ) ,

Thi s colour is obt ained by that disciple on w hom he ( H ari ) bestow s mercy an d f avour .

This w orld is in uncert ainty sleeping the night is p assed ,

.

S ome ar e draw n out ( from uncert ai nty ) by his ow n decree an d united by himself ( w ith himsel f ) .

H e himself d w ell s in their he a rt an d stops th e in fatu ation o f the M ay a .

H e himself gives gre atness an d m akes the disciple understand ( the truth ) .

The donor of al l is on e the erring he instructs ,

.

S ome ar e ruined by himself th ey ar e attached by him to another ( love )

,
.

From the instruction o f the Guru H ari is obtained the luminous ( Hari ) unites light ( with ,

himself ) .

0 Nan ak those w h o ar e d aily steeped in the n ame ar e absorbed in the n ame .

III
'

S zr i R ag ; makal d .

X X VI . L IX .

By the V irt uous the True one is obtai ned h avin g gi v en up the p assion of thirst , .

By the w ord o f the Gur uthe mi nd is coloured the tongue w ith love an d aff ection , .

Without the true Guru he is not obtained by an y on e ; behold h aving reflected in th y mind ,

From the flesh l y m i nded the di rt does not go off as long as he does n o t love the word of the
-
, Guru .

flu poison n ythin g d etestable o r w icke d

1 “

,
a ,
.

i e F illed w i th l ove
2
. . .

3 fi 1 a ny ( S ansk ( fi fl ) h aving the right taste

, . . , i . e. being en amoured .
54 I
S RI RA G, MA H II I . .
,
S AE D X X VII .
(L X ) .

P ause .

O my he art w alk accordi ng to the w ill o f the true Gur u

,

thou d ellest in th ne house d d i k t nect ar thou w il t e asil y obtain the p al ace ( of Hari )
If w i wn an r n es .

o ,

The v icious ( w om an ) h as no vi rtue she does n ot att ain to sit i n the presence ,
.

The fleshl y minded does n ot kno w the w ord f rom the vi cious the L ord is far
- ,
.

By w hom the True one h as been know n they ar e ful l y steeped in truth ,
.

By the w ord o f the Guru their he art is perf orated the L ord himself h as met w ith them in the ,

presence 1 .

By himsel f they ar e colour ed wi th dye stuff by me ans of the w ord ( of the Gur u ) they ar e un i ted
-
,

by h im .

True colour does not go off those w h o are steeped in truth give themselves to devout medit ation
, ,
.

i g ndered bout the ou co ners the e rth they h ve become tired t h e flesbl y minded
f ( f )
-
Ha v n w a a i n r r o a a ,

d o not obtai n un derst andi ng .

Wh om the true Gur u un it es he is uni ted h avin g been absorbed in the true w ord ( of the Guru )
, ,
.

I am tir ed o f m aking m any f riends ( th at ) one sho uld cut off my p ain ,
.

H av in g met w ith the beloved my p ain is c ut off by the w ord of the Guru union is brought about ,
.

The acqui sit ion of truth is true c apital the know ledge o f the True one is t rue ,
.
2

Those w h o ar e unite d w ith the True on e ar e not sep ar ated ( ag ain ) after h aving become disciples , ,

0 Nan ak

S i r ? Rag mahal a III .

X X VII . LX .

He ih mse lf the cre t r

a o of the elements
,
3
m akes cre ati on having produced ( i t ) bi m sel f he sees ( it) ;
, , ,

In al l the O n e exists the i nvi sible c annot be seen,

.

The L ord himself is merciful he hi m sel f gives un derstanding ,

.

By me ans o f the instr uction o f the Guru he al w ays d wel ls in the he art o f those whose thought is ,

continual ly absorbed i n the True one .

P ause .

O my heart obey the w ill of the Gu r u !

,

S oul an d body al l becomes cool ( refreshed ) ( if ) the n ame comes an d d w ell s i n the he art
, ,
.

By w hom the elemen t ( of the w orld ) h as been m ade an d put d o w n he takes c are ( of it ) ,
.

By the w ord o f the Guru he is know n w hen he himself looks do wn ( in mercy ) , .

Those men are shi ni ng by the w ord ( of the Guru ) at th at true court ( of H ar i ) .

The disciples w h o are ste eped in the tr ue w ord ar e un ite d by the cre ato r him sel f
, , .

By me ans of the inst ruction of the Guru the T r ue one is to be pr aised wh o h as n o end nor ,

H e him self d w ells in every he ar t by ( h i s) order he reflects on the order , .

If h e be praised by me ans o f the w ord of the Guru he destroys egoti sm from wi thi n ,
“
.

Th at w om an w h o is w ithout the n ame will w eep being V icious

, , , .

i . The L ord himsel f h as join ed th em an d i s i n their pres ence present w ith t hem
e .
, .

T h e k n ow led g e ( n fg a cc or d i n g t o t h e t radi t i on al I nterpret atio n o f t h e S ik hs ) o f the T rue one = Go d )

2
,
(
i s t r ue ( real l as t i n g ) al l o the r kno w led g e i s t o n o p urpos e
, , .

3
m 3 33 1 ( = m
’

m ) th e m aker o r creator o f th e elemen ts o r rudiments T h e elemen ts ar e

, .

evolve d from prim a ry m at te r m

( ) Th is ho w ever i s co n sid ered WW ( without begi n n in g) an d there
.
, , ,

fore a s a p ar t o f t h e S upr em e B ei n g i t s el f m 3 3 3 1 c o ul d ho we ve r also be t r an sl ate d by : t h e m aker

.
'
, ,

o f t h e ca u s ality th e ca use o f c aus es .

i e Indiv id uality t h e co nsciousn ess o r opinion o f i n divid ual existe n ce ( as separat ed from t h e S uprem e
. .
,
) .
56 I
S RI RI G, MAH . I II .
, S AE D X X X . XX XI .
(L X III . LX IV ) .

I al w ays s acrifice mysel f for those w h o prais e the ir ow n beloved .

S o ul an d body I sur rend er I give my he ad I clin g to their feet :

, ,

Wh o have k now n the One h avi ng done aw ay second love

,
.

0 Nan ak ! ( if ) by the di sciple the n ame is k no wn she is absorbed in the True one ,
.

S ir ? Rag ; makal a III .

XX X . LX III .

0 Hari ,
thou t per f ectly true ever t h i ng is in thy l ap
(l) . ar y ,
.

In the eighty four l akhs ( o f forms o f exi stence ) they w ander about longing
- ,
without

meeting w ith t h e Gur u they ar e in pai n .

I
( )f thou O li ber
,
al Har i ! best o w est it there is al w ays comf ort in the body ,
.

By the favour o f the Gur u I serve thee 0 tr ue d eep an d profound one , , ,

P ause .

O my he art he w h o is steeped in the name obt ai ns com fort

,

By me ans o f the in str ucti on of the Gur u th e n ame should be praised there is none other , .

Dh ar mr ai ( i e Yam a ) h as the order : sit do w n an d decide on true rel igious mer it !

. .

H e w h o by second love is o f a w icked mind i s under thy domi n ion ,

.

W h o mutte r the q u ali ties of the S upreme H ari th e vessel of vir tues the one Murar i in thei r he art
'

, , ,

To the m Dh armr ai perf orms service ; blessed is he w h o is remembering ( H ar i ) I

If the p assions o f the he art le ave the h e art spiri t ual ignor ance an d conceit is stopped i n the ,

h e art .

By w hom the S upreme S piri t is known he is re adi ly absorbe d in the n ame , .

W ithout the tr ue Gur ufin al emancip ati on is not obtai ned the fleshl y min d ed on e w anders about m ad ,
-
.

He does not know th e w ord ( of the Gur u ) h e i s ch atter in g in w orl d ly obj ects he is absorbed
, , .

H e himsel f is ever y thi ng there is none other , .

A s he c auses ( them ) t o spe ak thus it is spoken w hen he hi mself c all s ( them )

, , .

The speech o f the di sciple is Brahm by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) uni on is e ffected
, .

O Nan ak ! remember thou the n ame by the w orship o f w hi ch comf ort is obt ai ned
,

S i r ? R ag ; m aka l a III .

X XX I . LX IV .

In the w orld fil th an d ( consequent ) p ain of egotism is obtained by second lov e , di rt st ick s ( to

men ) .

The fil th of selfishness tho ugh w ashed, does n o t go off at al l i f ( on e) b athe

, , at a hun dr ed T i rth as
.

They practi se w orks of many ki n ds ( but ) tw of old dir t h as stuck to them

, .

By rea di ng the d irt does n o t go off go an d ask th e s ag es ,

P ause

O my he art if one come t o the asylum of the Gur u then he w ill become pur e
, , .

The flesb l y minded in s aying : B ari H ar i ! have become tire d the dirt co uld not be w ashed o ff
-
, ,

( by them ) .

By a di rty he art devotion c ann ot be m ade th e n ame c annot be obtained , .

The dirty flesbl y minded h ave die d di rty they w ill go h avi ng lost the ir honour
-
, , .

If he ( Har i) d w ell in the he ar t by the f avour of the Guru th e fil th o f egoti sm is absorbed , .

A s in d arkn ess a l amp is l ighte d so c auses the Guru by ( his d ivine know ledge ignor an c e to be
, )
di sp ersed .
 S RI RI G, MA H
I IV S ABD I VI )
. .
, . II .
(L X V . LX .
57

“ ” “
It is done by us w e sh all d o it ” ( s ay ing thus w e ar e foolish an d ignor ant
,
) , .

The ( real ) actor is forgotte n ( by us) ( our ) affection is ( turned to ) second love
, .

There is n o p ai n like th at of th a.May a al l h ave become tired w andering about in the w orld
, .

From the instruction o f the Guru com fort is obt ained h aving put the true n ame in th e bre ast , .

Whom he uni tes he is unite d I s acrifice mysel f for hi m

, , .

0 he art ! to them wh o ar e immersed in devotion th e tr ue speech ( o f the Gur u is th eir ow n pl ac e

)
2
, , .

The he art bein g coloured the tongue is coloured ( also ) an d sings ( then ) the true qual iti es of Hari .

0 Nan ak ! ( by whom ) the n ame is not forgotten he is absorbed in the True one , .

S ir i Rag ; mah al d IV .

Gfi ar I .

I . LX V .

In my soul an d body are excessive p angs of sep aration h o w sh all the beloved come to my house ,

an d meet ( wi th me ) ?
W hen I see my o wn L ord my p ain goes by seein g the L ord , .

I w ill go an d ask those friends in w h at w ise the L ord m ay come to an intervie w ( wi th me ) ?

,

P ause .

O my true Guru w ithout thee there is none other .

I foolish an d stupid m an h ave co m e to thy asylu m out of m ercy j oin t o me th at Hari ! 4

, , ,

The true Guru is th e giver o f th e n ame o f H ari he hims el f unites th at Lord ( w ith men) , .

From the true Guru the Lord H ari is kno wn like the Guru there is none other , .

I fall on the asylu m of the Guru ( s aying ) ki n dl y j oin to me th at Lor d !

N 0 one h as obt ained him ( Hari ) by the obstin acy of h i s mind every o n e becomes tired m aking ,

shi ft s ( to obt ain h im ) .

I f he pr a cti se a thousand clevernesses on an un altered he art colour does not s tick 5

, .

By falsehood an d hypocrisy he h as not been obtained by an y on e ; w h at he sow s th at h e w ill eat , .

The hope of al l is in thee 0 L ord al l cre atures are thine thou ( art their ) c apital
, , .

0 Lord ! n o one is empty o f thee at ( th y ) g at e the disciples ( obt ai n ) praise

, .

Draw out those wh o ar e dro wning in the poison the w ater of existence ! this is th e pet it ion o f
, ,

bumble Nan ak .

S ir a Rag makal a I V .

II . L XV I .

n am e is obtained the he art is s ati ated w ithout th e name I shall live in mi sery
I f th e , , .

W ould th at some disciple a friend w ould meet ( w ith me ) th at he w ould show me the Lord the
, , , ,

vessel of v irtues !
I wi ll be qu art ered fo r hi m wh o m anifests to me the name !
P ause .

my beloved ! I live h aving medit ated on the n ame

0 ,
.

Without the n ame I cannot live ; 0 my true Guru m ake , fast ( in me ) the n ame !

I
t . e. Ha ri .

2 The sense is they live in the true speech of th e Guru are wholly given to it , .

i a Gur uRam das

3
. . .

'

It appe ars th at these ver ses were m ade by Ramd as be fore h e himsel f h ad succeeded to th e Guruship .

n ew fresh n o t improved o r prep ared ( by a course o f discipline)

5
a dj .
, ,
.
58 I
S RI RI G, MA H IV . .
,
S A E D I II . IV .
(L X VII . LX VIII ) .

The n am e i s a p r iceless j e w el it is w ith the perf ect true Gur u

, ,

The true Guru h aving t aken it o ut rev eals it to those w h o give themselves to his se rv ice
, ,
.

Bles se d an d very fortun ate ar e the men very fortun ate the w omen w h o h ave come an d j oined, ,

the Guru .

ith hom the true ru the upreme pi t met they r e luckless an d i n the
W w G u S S ri,
h as n ot a
, ,

po w er of de ath .

They ar e again an d a ga in compell ed to w ander abo ut in the w omb being m ade hideous in ordur e ,
.

O n e shoul d n o t come ne ar t o them in w hose he art is w ra th the Ch a ndal

, ,
.

The true Guru the S upreme S pir it is the pond of immortali ty the very f or tun ate come an d
, , ,

b athe therein .

The dir t of their several birt hs goes o ff h avi ng m ade fast the pure n a me ( in themselves )
,
.

H umble Nan ak h as obt ained the highest station h aving di r ecte d hi s d evout medi t ati on on the t r ue ,

Guru .

S ir ? R ag ; malzal d IV .

III L X VII . .

H i s) qu alities I w i l l sing ( h i s) qu ali ties I w ill spre ad ( his ) qu alities I w ill tell 0 my mother !
( , , ,

The di sciple w h o tells ( h i s) qu aliti es i s m y fr iend ; h av ing j oined ( this my ) fri end I w ill sing the
, ,

qu al ities of H ari
A di amond h aving met w ith a di amon d is per for ated ; in deep red colour I w ill b athe !
, ,

P ause .

O my G6v in d I if I sing ( thy ) qual ities my he art is s ati ated ,

.

W ithin ( me ) is thi rst after the n ame o f H ari the Guru being ple ased procures it ( for me ) ,
.

Colo ur t h e he art 0 ye very f ortun ate ! the Guru being ple ased gr ants the favour
, .

The Guru m akes fast the n ame w ith colour ; I s acrifice myself for the true Guru .

W ithout the tr ue Guru the n ame of H a ri is n ot obtained though they d o lakhs an d crores of ( good ) ,

w orks .

Without destin y the true Guru i s not foun d ( though ) al w ays sitting ne ar him in ( his ) h o use ,
.

W ithin ( w hom ) is the p ain o f ignor ance an d e rr or in ( w hom ) is a fil m ( over the eyes ) they (fem ) , ,

h av e f all en far o ff ( f rom the Gu r u ) .

W ithout meeti ng w i t h the tr ue Gur u gold is n ot m a de ( o f ir on ) the fleshl y m i nded the iron is ,
-
, ,

dro w ned at the side o f the bo at .

The true Guru i s the bo at of the n ame of B ari in w h at w ise c an it h e ascended ,

H e w h o w alks a ccording to the wi ll of the true Gu r u comes an d sits do wn in the bo at , .

Blessed blessed very fortunate ar e those 0 N anak ! w hom the true Gu ru unites ( w ith H ari )
, , , .

R ay ; mah a l a IV .

IV L X VI II . .

( l ) I al w ays stand an d in qui re af ter the ro ad ; i f an y show me the L ord t o them I go

.

, .

I go about foll ow ing those w h o h ave got hold of my beloved m aking entre aty m aki ng supplic ation , , ,

( fo r ) I desir e to meet the L ord .

P a use .

O my brethren m ay an y on e unite me to union wi th H ari the L ord !

,

I h ave devoted myself t o the true Guru w h o h as sho w n ( t o m e ) Hari t h e L ord , .

H umble I fall do w n at the side o f the perf ect true Gur u , .

The hope of the humble is the Guru the Guru the true Guru appl auds them , , , .

I c annot praise enough the Guru w h o m akes me meet w ith H ari the L ord
, .
 60 S I RI RI G, MA E . V .
, S A BD I .
(L X X I ) .

the Guru ar e s aved by devout meditation o n Hari uncontamin ated they rem ain
Th e dis ciples of ,

in the asylum ( of the Guru ) .

Their dep art ur e is al w ays kept in vi e w by them H ari is taken as their viaticum they w ill receive , ,

h onour .

Th e disciples ar e a ccepted at the threshold by H ari himself they ar e received an d embr aced ,
.

To the di s ciples th e w ay i s m ani fest at th e g ate ( o f H ari ) they are by n o me ans kept b ack , .

They praise the n a me o f H ari the n ame is i n the i r he a rt they conti nue devoutly meditating on
, ,

t h e n ame .

Wh il st soun ds n ot produced by be ating ( an instr u m ent ) are soun ded at the g ate they obt ain lustre ,

at the true g ate .

E ve r y one appl auds the di sciples by w hom the n ame i s pr aised .

O L ord ! give m e their comp any ! ( this i s) th e petition o f ( this ) begg ar .

O Nan ak ! the lot of those disciples i s gr e at in w hose he art the n ame i s shi n i n g .

z
S i r ? Rag ; ma/za l c? V .

Glul l I
‘
.

I LX X I . .

H o w thou art delighted h av ing seen the orn aments of t h y son an d w i fe !

,

Thou enj oy est thyself l i vest in ple asures ar t given t o innumer able merriment s
, , .

Thou givest m any orders an d art inflexible .

The creato r does come i n to thy mind ( thou ar t ) a blind ig n orant s el f wil led m an , , ,
- .

P a use .

my he art ! th e giver of comfort i s th at H ar i

O .

By the favour of the Guru he is obtaine d by d estiny h e i s acquir ed , .

Thou art covetou s o f clothes an d enj oyment o f th e dust o f gold an d silver , .

E xc ell ent horses an d eleph a nts ar e much liked

( by thee ) ind efatig able ch ariots ar e m ade
3
.

( But in spite o f al l this ) thou d os t n ot come into anybody s m ind thou art forgotten by all ( thy ) ’

rel ationship ( aft er thy de at h ) .

Be ing led astray by t h e cre ator ( thou art ) i mpure w ithout t h e n ame .

E arn ing the imprec ati o n s ( o f others thou c oll ec t e st w e alth

) .

O n w h at thou art putti n g thy tr u st th at do es n o t r em ain al w ay s wi th the e , .

Thou p rac ti sest egotism O se l fish on e ! thou ar t immer sed in th e inc l i n ati on o f th y he art .

H e w h o i s l ed astr ay by th at L ord himsel f h as no c aste n or f ell o w ship .

H e w h o h as be en j oined ( w ith Har i ) by t h e t rue Gu r u t h e S upreme pi t

,
S ri is alone my fri end ,
, .

O n e is the pro t ector o f th e p e ople o f H ar i w h at d o m en w eep in selfi shness ? ,

W h at i s ple asin g to the people o f B ar i th at he ( = Har i does at the g ate o f

) B ar i they are never,
,

tur ned b ack .

'
0 an ak ! he w h o i s steeped in the lo e o f Har i becom e s a light
I
i n the w hole w orld v
.

l
313 1 ob t ai n l ust re t o b e a dorn ed t o be re c ei v e d w i th ho n our
to
2
Gur u A j un
I
u
O n t h e w h ole h s po et ry I s t h e mo st I n co h er en t an
r .
, r
,

d t h e lea st refi n ed i n t h e Gr a n t h a n d
0 o .

t h erefore frequen tl y ob scure as l i tt le a t t en t io n is p a id b h i

,
y m t o a cl ea r g r a mm a t i c a l co n s t r uc t ion

m S an sk W I
3
exc ell e t h or se
; 3E 3 S i n dh i
W = S a n sk
:

W E T ( P rak rit fi r st W
.
, n
,

t h e n ce t h e H i n d u i I 1W
,
31 bei n g a en p h o n ic in s er t i o n t o a oid
t h e h i a tus T h e L ah 6 r lit hogr a p h e d
)
,
v .

e di t io n read s 3 31 t w o o ther MS S r ead o n l y

, wh i ch s ui t s t h e c o n text b e t t er
.

; t h e
t r a n
sl at
or h as f
ollo w
ed
t h e l at te r r ea d in g .
 S IRI RAG, MA H V . .
, S A BD II . I II .
(L X X II . LX X III ) .
61

8 2% Reg ; mahal d V .

II . LX X II .

o
In ( thei r ) he art ( is ) much wantonness an d gre at merriment ; being led astray by the ple as ures
of th e sight
The u mbrell a we aring sovereignties h ave fallen into doubt ‘ ( i a d uality )
-
. . .

P ause .

brother ! h appiness is obtai ned in the society of the s aints

O .

To Whom it is decreed by that S upreme S pirit w h o fi x es the destiny the p ain of his uncertainty is , ,

blotted out .

A s m any pl aces an d countries th ere ar e so m any h ave ( I ) wandered through ,

The w e althy m an an d gre at l ando w ner s ays ( every where ) it is mine it is mine “
, .

H e c arries out his order f e arless an d unflinch ing he is in his pursuit

, .

E very on e is subjected by him ( but ) w ithout the n ame he is mingled w ith dust
, .

Thirty thr ee crores o f servants S iddh s an d S adbik s standing at the gate

-
, ,
2
.

W e alth gre at dominion — al l O Nan ak ! h as become ( = passed ) like a dre am

, ,
.

S ar i Rag ; maha l d V .

I II . LX X III .

H aving risen e arly in the morning ( the body ) is adorned w itho ut understanding ( the truth ) ,

she is f oolish an d ignorant .

( I f ) that L ord h as n ot come into her mind she w ill be le ft in t h e desert , .

H aving directed her thought t o t h e t r ue Guru she al w ays al ways enj oy s ple asure
'

.
,

P ause .

0 m an , 3 thou
come ( into this w orld ) t o g ain advant age
ar t .

In w hat h ad braw l art thou engaged ? ( thy ) w hole night p a ssing aw ay is gon e ,
4
, ,

C attle an d birds j u mp about de ath i s n ot seen ( by them ) ,

.

In th at co mp any ( se like them ) i s m an w h o is ensn ared in th e net of the M ay a

. . , .

Those ar e perceived as em ancipated w h o remember the true n ame .

The house th at is t o be ab andoned h as b ecome de ar to thy he art

, , .

Wh ither thou h ast t o go an d t o rem ai n of th at th ou dost n ot think ,

.

Those ensn ared ones ha ve come out ( of th e n et ) w h o f all dow n at the feet of the Guru , .

N0 o n e c an protect n o other ( c an ) sho w ( Hari )

,
.

H aving se arched i n t h e f our corners ( I ) h ave come an d fal len on the asylum ( of th e Guru ) .

By th e true king ( = Guru ) Nan ak the dro wning one h as been dr awn out
5
.

T hey h ave fallen in to d oubt u n certain ty they longer k n o w w h o th ey ar e they k n ow

1
or , i . e . no , do n ot

t heir o w n sel f .

fin
2
, a upposed t o have a cquire d mira culous po w ers ( a J ogi ) ; "Tm ( F la m) an asce tic
m an s , ,

e n g age d i n a course o f austerities an d ob servan ces i n o r d er t o o bt ain fi n al em an c ip atio n ,

an y livin g being bu t chiefly m an ( m a n a n d w om an )

3 .
,

afa (Ir si ah ni
) g ht,
t h e time o f e njoyme n t
, li fetime .

B y A rjun t h e ti t le o f F IG m fg m u true kin g i s applied t o th e Guru which a fter wards h as become

5 '

, , ,

t h e u su a l a d d r ess t o the S ik h Gurus .

 I
S RI RI G, MA H V . .
, S A BD IV v . .
(L X X IV . LX X V)
.

S z r i R ag ; m ahal d
'

V .

IV . LX X IV .

The guest o f tw e n ty four or for ty eight minutes is intent on his business

- - .

Being immersed in the busine ss o f the M ay a th e f oolish on e does n ot understand ( the tr uth ) .

H a vi n g risen an d dep a rted he repents he h as fal len into the po wer o f the executioner ( o f Yam a)
,
.

P ause .

O blind thou art se ated ne ar the b ank ( of a ri v er )

on e,

I f it be
w ritten be f ore then thou w i lt obta in the w ord of the Guru
,
.

Not the green n or the h alf ripe the ripe ( field ) he is cutting
-
,
.

H avi ng taken th e sickle he h as arr ived ( on the field ) h av ing kept re ady the re apers ,
.

When the order o f the f armer is given then th e fi eld is r eaped an d me asured ,
.

The first w atch ( of th e night) i s gone in business the second he h as slep t in the third nonsense , ,

is ch atte red in t h e fourth it h as become mornin g

,
.

He h as never come into his mind by w hom soul an d body w ere given ,
.

( My ) soul is devoted an d m ad e a s acrifi ce f o r the assembly of the holy on es

F rom w hich s agacity h as f alle n into ( my ) heart an d the S upre m e w ise S pirit i s obtained .

Nan ak h as seen ( thus ) the he art knowi ng w ise H ari al w ays ( d w elli ng ) w ith him
-
, .

S ir i R ag ; mah ul d V .

V . LX X V .

things ar e forgotte n ( by m e) the O n e is n ot forgotten

A ll , .

H av ing burnt all ( w orldly) business the Guru h as given ( t o me ) the reli sh of the true n ame
, .

H a vi ng dr opped all hopes I acqui re on e hope

, .

Those wh o h ave served the true Guru h ave obtain e d a pl ace ( in the other w orld ) , .

P a use .

my he art praise the cre a tor !

O ,

H aving ab a ndoned all clevernes ses f all do w n at t h e f e et o f the Guru !

P ain an d hunger do n ot perva de ( the body ) if the giver o f com f ort be in the he art , .

O n e is n ot ruined by an y business ( o r w ork ) i f th at T r ue on e is in the he art

,
, .

W hom thou p r o tec t est h av ing given thy h a n d ( t o him ) him no o n e c an kil l , .

If the com f ort giving Gur u be served he w ashes o ff all vic e s

-
, .

( Thy ) ser v ant a sks the serv ice ( o f those ) ( by w hom ) thy ser v ice is per f ormed , .

By th e assiduity o f the ass embly o f the holy ones I obtain a ple ased Go d .

E very thin g i s subj ect to the L ord he himself achieves the a ction , .
1

I s a c r ifice mysel f for the true Guru w h o a ccomplishes al l my desires , .

O n e f riend is seen ( by me ) on e brother an d f riend , .

The O n e s ar e the m aterials the O ne s the m anner ( of applyi ng them )

’
,
’

If w ith the O n e my he art is concil i ated m y mind h as become immov abl e , .

The True one is ( my ) e ating the True on e ( my ) clothing by Nan ak the True on e
, ,

support .

T h er e i s real liber ty o f th e created b ein gs t h e L ord hims el f is p erform i n g t h e a ctions in a n d t hroug h

no
,

t h em.
3 3 3 i s an alli ter at i o n i n stead o f l ike w i se fi g i n s tead o f t o rhym e w i t h 3 A rju n
3 .
,

y m eani n gless syll a ble t d m a ke up t h e rhyme so t h a t t h e

w h o p ay s l itt le a t t en t io t o a pu r e r hyme ad d s a
n n
,
,
fi n al w ord s o f a v er se are o fte h ardly r ecog iz a ble
n n .
 S I RI RA G, MA H S A E D Ix x (L X X IX LX X X )
64 V . .
. .
,
. .

P a use .

O my he art m editate on the n am e of H ari H ari !

, ,

The n ame is al w ays a comp ani on an d w ith ( thee ) in the other w orld it w ill b ri ng ( thee ) em anci p ati on
,
.

O f w h at use ar e the gre atn esses of the w orld ?

The amusement o f t h e M ay a is all insipid at l ast it p asses aw ay an d is anni hil ated
,
.

In w hose he art H ari d w ells he i s perf ect an d f oremost

,
.

Become th e dust o f the pious h aving ab andoned thy o w n self !

Give up all schemes an d cunning an d cling t o t h e f eet o f the Gur u
H e gets the je w el o n w hose f orehe ad the l o t m ay be ( w ritten )
,
.

H e gets it 0 brother ! t o w hom t h e L ord himsel f gives ( it )

,
.

He performs the service of the true Guru the he at of w hose egotism i s p ut o ut ,

.

With Nan ak the Guru h as met an d al l hi s p assions h ave become exti nct .

S ir ? R ag ; m a iza l a V .

IX . LX X I X .

kno w s the cre atures O n e is thei r preserver

O ne ,
.

I n O n e I tr ust in ( my ) he art O n e i s the support o f my li fe

,
.

In the asylum of h im w h o is the S upreme B rahm the cre ator there is

, , , al ways h appiness .

P a use .

O my he art give up all schemes 1

,

W orshi p the perfect Gur u apply thyself cont inu ally t o the me dit ation on the O n e
,

The O n e is ( my ) brother the O n e ( my ) friend the O n e ( my ) mother an d father

, ,
.

In the O n e I trust in my he art w h o h as given ( m e) soul an d body

,
.

Th at L ord is n ot forgo tten from ( my ) he a rt wh o h as subj ected t o himself eve r ything , .

In the house is the O n e ou t side i s the O n e in every pl ace is he h i m self

, ,
.

By w hom the li v ing cre atures ar e m ade him repe at sil ently the eight w atches ( d ay an d night) !
,

Those w h o ar e in love wi th the O n e h ave n o grie f n o r affliction .

Th e S upreme Br ahm the L ord i s O n e there is n o second

, ,
.

Body an d soul al l is h i s w h at is ple asin g to him t h a t is done

, , ,
.

In the perf ect Gur u he h as becom e complete O N an ak repe at thou sil ently th at True one ,

S ir ? R ag ; maizal d V .

X . LX X X .

Tho se w h o h ave applied thei r mi nd to the tru e Guru ar e perfect an d foremost , .

To w hom he himself is merci f u l in their mind div ine kno w ledge springs up
, .

To w hom it is w ri tten on the f orehe ad they obt ained th e n ame o f H a ri

, .

my he ar t m editate on the O n e n ame

O ,

Al l com forts spri ng up t h ou w il t go dr essed ( in a robe o f honour t o the th r eshold

, ) .

The fe ar of bir th an d de ath is gone by the love an d w orship o f Gop al .

2

H e him self preserves ( those w h o ) ar e pure by the society of the holy ones
, .

Th e dirt o f b ir th an d de ath is cle ared aw ay h aving seen the sight of the Guru th ey , ar e h appy .

1
The sense is : In the p e r fe c t Gu ru the S upreme i s com p le tel y co n tained , p resen t .

A n ame o f K rishn a i de n t ified w it h t h e S up r em e

2
, .
 S RI RAG, M A H
I V I II )
. .
, S A BD X I . X II .
(L X X X . LX X X .
65

In
every pl ace is cont ained th at S upreme Br ahm the L ord , .

The donor o f al l is the O n e there is no second

, .

In his asylum em ancip ation i s obtained w h at one desires th at comes to pass , , .

In w hose he art the S upreme Brahm d w ell s they are per fect an d foremost , .

Their pure lustre h as become m anifest In the w orld .

Nan ak is a s acr ifice for those w h o h ave meditated on my L ord .

S ir ? R ag makal a V .

X I . LX X X I .

H avi ng met w ith th e true Guru all p ain is gone the co mfort , of H ari h as come an d settled in
th e he art.

W ithin ( them ) light is m ani fested ( w h o ) direct ( their ) thoughts on the O n e .

H aving j oin ed the holy ones the face is bright they ( se the disciples ) obtain w h at is ,
. . w ritten before
( for the m ) .

Those w h o sing continu all y the qu alit ies o f Govind ar e pure by th e tr ue n ame ,
.

P ause .

O my he art by th e w ord of the Guru com fort is obtained

,

Th e service o f the per fect Guru is by no me ans f ruitless .

The desi res o f the he art ar e fulfilled the tr e asure o f the n ame is obtained ,
.

The cre ator the kno w er o f the he art is know n ‘ as alw ays ind w ell ing
, ,
.

By the favour of the Guru th e face is bright h av ing repe ated the n ame ( an d practised ) liber ality
,

( an d) ablution .

Lust w rath covetousness h ave become extinct all pride is ab andoned

, , ,
.
2

The gain of the n ame is obt ained al l the business is completed ,

.

By the Lord h aving besto w ed mercy he is united ( w ith himself ) his o w n n ame is given to him
, , , .

H i s coming an d going h as been stopped he himsel f ( t e H ari ) h as become kind ( to him )

,
. . .

The true p al ace an d house ( t e of Hari ) is obtained ( by him ) ( w h o ) h as know n the w ord of the Guru
. .
,
3
.

The devotees he protects h avin g besto w ed hi s o w n mercy ( on them ) .

In this an d that w orld the faces of them ar e bright w h o remember the qu al ities o f the True one .

Rememberi ng ( his ) qu alities the eight w atches ( = day an d night) they ar e steeped in infi n ite love .

Nan ak is al ways a s acrifice f or the S upreme Br ahm the oce an o f h appiness , .

S ir ? Rag ; maizal a V .

II X II . LX X X .

I f the perfect true Guru be met w ith the tre asure of the w ord ( = n ame ) is obt aine d
, , .

I f t h e L ord besto w his ow n mercy the immortal n ame is silently repe ated
,
.

The p ain of birth an d de ath is cut off meditation is e asily brought about
,
.

P ause .

O my he art fall on the asylum of the Lord

,

Without Har i there is none other medit ate on th e One n ame !

,

Hi s v alue c annot be told he is an un fathomable oce an of qualities

,
.

U 3 135 ccount o f th e rhyme on a .

A l l th is i s the fruit o f th e service o f the Guru

2
.

i e W h o h as recei ved as true

3
. . .
 I
S RI RE G, M A H V III (L X X X III LX X X IV )
66 . .
, S A BD X . X IV .
. .

o f the Guru ) !
0 ve r y f or t un ate j oin the society ( o f the holy
,
ones ) believe in the true w ord ( ,

S erve the oce an o f h appiness w h o i s ki n g above kings ,

My tr ust is the lotus o f the foot ( o f Ha ri ) there is n o other pl ace ,

.

My hold is on thee 0 S upreme Brahm ! by thy po w er I rem ain ( abide )

,
.

O L ord ! thou ar t the trust o f the h umble into thy society I enter ,
.

H ari should be silently repea ted G6 v i n d should be w orshipped the eight w atches ! ,

By hom soul i e body property preserved by hom merc if ully li fe is protected

( w ) l f ar e, ( w ,) , ,
.

0 Nan ak ! all p ains ar e removed by him the L ord the S upreme Br ahm is f orgiving ( o r : giv ing ) , , ,
.

S
'

tr t R ag ; malzal d V .

X I II . LX X X III .

Wh o in love w ith that True one he does not die nor come ( ag ain ) after h a ving gone
h as fallen ,
.

Though sep arated he is not sep ar ated ( fro m him w h o ) is continu al ly containe d i n all
, ,
.

The pain an d trouble of the h um bl e he ( H ari ) i s br eaki n g o n a ccount o f his good di sposition to wards
( hi s) w orshipper .

T h e w onderf ully f ormed the unstai ned ( S upreme ) h as been unite d ( t o me ) by the Guru 0 mother !
, ,

P ause .

O brother m ake th at L ord thy friend !

,

A w ay w ith the f a scin ation an d friendship o f the M ay a ! no h appy one is seen .

H e is wi se bountif ul w ell disposed pure of an infinite f orm ( o r be auty )

, ,
-
, ,
.

A fr iend a helper very gre at high gre at infi nite

, , , , , .

H e i s n o t kno w n as young ( or ) old h i s court i s immov able ,

.

W h at is asked ( f rom h im ) th at i s obtained he is th e support o f the helpless , ,

.
1

L ooking upon w hom t h e sin s ar e t aken aw ay an d tr anqu ill ity is m ade in soul an d body .

If w ith on e mind the O n e be medit at ed upon the error o f the m i nd ce a ses ,

.

H e is the abode of vi rtues al w ays young w hose bountiful ness is ( all fi ll i n g , ,

.

Al w ays al w ays he shoul d be w orshipped d ay an d nigh t he shou

,
l d not be f orgotten ! ,

F or w hom it w as w ritten bef ore the ir fri end is Gav in d ,

.

Body soul an d propert y al l I o ffer ( t o those by w hom ) this w hole lif e is devoted ( to him )
, , ,
.

H e al w ays sees an d b ear s in the presence in ever ybody Brahm is cont ained , .

( E ven ) the ungrate ful he cher ishes ; the L ord 0 Nan ak ! is al ways giving
2
, .

S ir ? R ag ma ha l a V .

X IV . LXX X IV .

By the L ord by w hom soul body an d propert y h ave been given they ar e e asily ( n at urally )
, ,
'

t aken care of an d preser ved .

H av i ng m ade al l the con st ituent p art s ( o f the body ) infinite li ght h as been put w ithin it by him
)
3
( , .

Al w a ys al w ays the L ord should be remembered put an d keep him w ithin thy bre a st
, ,

1
W 13 1 :
@1 33 ; A rj un
len g th en s or sh o r t en s th e s y llables n o t only at t h e end o f t h e v erse ( fo r t h e
'

s ke o f t h e rhyme) b ut also i n t h e mid st o f t h e line just as h e plea ses

a , , .

2
W u g r ate ful I t i s somew ha t d oub t ful if i t i s t o be der i ved fr om m
, n .
o r fr om fi fi fi
'
.

I n t h e fir st cas e t h e i i t i al m w o uld b e w ron

g i t h e seco n d t h e a ss i m ila tion o f a t o gh a n i s w ith out a n alo gy
n n
, .

3
N T i s h ere i d e n t i cal w ith fi r t a con stitue t p a rt o f t h e bod y o f w hich s e ve a r e e num e rated : blo n d
s , n , n ,

m a r row fa t fle h bo n es m e d ulla ry su bst an ce seme n Th e fi fi W t h e infinit e l ight i s the 1 3 1 3 1 11

s '
, , , , , .
, , ,

o r t h e i n divi du al sp i ri t w hich h as di rectl y em an at ed from t h

e S upreme S p i rit .
63 S IRI REG M AH ,
. V .
, S AE D X VII . X V III .
(L X X X V II . LX X X VIII ) .

of
The qu ali ties of Gav i n d should continu ally be sung extinguisher vices ,
w h o i s th e .

ithout the n me ri co ort obt ined I h ve seen gre t m any th i ngs }

W a o f Ha m f i s n o t a a a a
,

T h ose w h o w ere giv en t o h i s praises h av e e asily crossed the w ater o f existence ,

.

It equ l sting l khs f bstin nces if the dust of the holy ones h e obt ai ned
( is t o ) a T i r th a f a e
.

a a o a , ,
,

From w hom w ill ( on e ) bide himsel f as he ( = H ari ) alw ays sees in the presence ? ,

In every pl ace my L ord i s contained brim ful .

True i s ( h i s) kingdom t r ue h i s order true i s the place o f the True one

, ,
.

T rue po w er he h as applied by the True o n e the w orld h as been cre ated

,
.

I Nan ak am alw ays a s acri fice for him by w hom th e true n ame is silently repe ated
, , ,
.

S tat 1 369 ; makal a V .

VII L X X X V II X . .

ith e or is silently repe ing ri he very f ortu te an d acquir es w e alth

Wh o w ff t a t H a i s n a
,
.

H e w h o remembers H ari in the society o f t h e s aints cuts o ff the dirt o f ( al l his ) b i rt hs ,

.

P a use .

O my he a rt go on repe ating the n ame of Hari !

,

E nj oy t h e fruits desired by th e he art al l g rie f an d angu i sh ce ases ,

.

By w hose agency the body i s sustain ed th at L ord i s seen as being w ith ,

In the w ater the e ar th on the surface of the e arth he i s present the L ord beholds his o wn sight
, , ,
2
.

S oul an d body h ave be c ome pure love t o the True one h as sprung up ,
.

B y w hom the feet o f the S upreme Brahm are w orshipped they h ave performed al l s ilent repetiti ons ,

auste r ities .

A gem j e w el ruby nectar is th e n ame o f H ari

, , ,
.

Comfort e ase j oy reli h ; humble Nan ak sings the qu alities of H ari

, , ,
s .

8 2% B ag ; maka l a V .

X V III . L X X X V III !

Th at is a S h astr th at is a m agic spel l by me ans o f w h ich the n ame of H ari is muttered

, ,
3
.

By ( th at ) pl acel ess one a pl ace h as been obtained ( to w hom ) by the Guru the w e alth o f the lotus of ,

the foot i s given .

( Th at is ) t r ue c apital ( th at i s) true abstinence if ( on e ) sing the eight w atches the qu alities ( of H ari )
, , .

W ith w hom the L ord h as met besto wi n g his mercy ( upon him ) he does not die nor does he come , ,

an d go ( ag ain ) .

P a use .

O my he ar t w orship alw ay s H ari w ith one mi nd

,

H e i s cont ained w ithin ever ybody he is al w ays a helper w ith ( thee ) , .

H ow sh all I count the amount of com forts w hen I remember Gav i n d ,

They h ave been s atiated w h o h ave tasted it th at relish know s ( their ) soul ( onl y ) , .

The L ord d w el ls in the he art of hi m w h o i s associ ated w ith the s aints the beloved is besto w ing ( his ) ,

fa v our ( on him ) .

H e w h o h as served his o w n L ord is king an d chi ef o f men

, , .

1
The se se i s I h ave see n a g reat d eal an d c an spe ak fr o m experien ce
n .

W T lite lly : fi lled i i e c o m pletely diffuse d so that n o place is e m pty o f h im

, ra n, . .
, .

S a n sk
W a m agic S p ell or hym n su g t o ob t a in favour able events
3
.
, , n .
 sm i REG, MAH V . .
, S ABD X I X . XX .
( L X X X IX .
69

( every
At ) opportunity I
( ) delight in the gl ory an d qu ali ties of H ar i in whi ch ( ar e contain ed ‘
) ,

crores of ablutions an d b athings .

( If ) the tongue utters the reportsof the qu alities ( o f Hari ) no al ms w ill come up to it ,
.

H aving besto w ed a favourable look he dw ells in soul an d body the merciful S upreme S pirit the , ,

kin d one .

S ou l body an d w e al th ar e h i s I am al w ays alw ays a s acrifice ( fo r him )

, , , .

Wh o is united by the cre ator ( with himsel f ) he bein g united is never sep ar ate d (from him ) , , , .

The fetters of hi s ser vants are cut asunder by the true cre ator .

The erring one is put by him into the ( right ) w ay n o t considering his vir tues an d vices .

Nan ak h as gone to the asylum of him w h o is the support of al l bodies ,

.

S ar i R ag ; malaal d
'

V .

IX X IX . LX X X .

I f by the to ngue the True one be remembered soul an d body become pure , .

( Th ough there be) mother father an d numerous rel atives w ithout hi m there is n one other
, , .

If he besto w hi s own favour b e is not forgotten a minute,

.

P ause .

O my he art serve the True one as long as there is ( an y ) breath

,

W ithout the True one all is falsehood at the end it is annihilated , .

My L ord is pure w ithout hi m I c annot abide

,
.

In my he art an d body is very gre at hunger m ay some one bring an d uni te (h im w ith me ) 0 mother !
, ,

In the four corners ( of the e arth ) ( a pla ce ) h as bee n sought ( by me ) w ithout the bri degroom there ,

no other pl ace .

Make supplic ation be fore him wh o is uniting the cre ator ( with men )
,

The tr ue Guru is the giver of the n am e ( of him ) w hose storeroom is full .

A l w ays al w ays he should be p raised ( w h o h as) n o end nor limit

, ,

The preserver should be praised w hose actions ar e m any ,

A lw ays alw ays he should be w orsh ipped ! this is the gre atest w isdom
,
.

In soul an d bo dy it is s weet to him on w hose f orehe ad ( this) desti ny is ( w ritten) 0 Nanak !

, ,

8 e Ray mahal d V .

X X . X C .

brother j oin th e s aints remember the true n ame !

O , ,

S tore up prov isions for the soul ( th at w ill be ) w ith ( thee ) here an d there .

From the perfect Guru he ( =Hari ) is obtained h aving besto wed his own favourable look , .

By destiny he obt ains ( him ) to w hom he is mercif ul,

.

P ause .

O my he art, there is no like the Guru !on e

N o other pl ace is seen the Guru ( al one ) unites th at True one ( with thee )
,
.

Al l things he h as got wh o h as gone an d seen t h e Guru

,

W hose mind is fixed on the f eet of th e Gur u th ey ar e ve ry f ortunate 0 mother ! , ,

The Guru is bountiful , the Gur u is pow erf ul th e Gur u is cont ai ned in al l ,
.

,
e G
The Gur u is the Lord the S upreme Brahm the si nking ones th uru c ses to s wi m
a u 2
,
.

1
The sense is : which is equal t o crores o f ablutions .

3
The Guru as an avatar i s identified with th e S upreme B eing
, ,
.
 7O smi REG, M AH v . .
, S A BD X X I X X . II .
(X C I . X C II ) .

By w h at mouth is the Guru praised w h o is the pow erf ul ( =efii c ien t ) c ause of ca uses ,

Those forehe ads rem ained immov able on w hich the Guru put his h and ,
.

The nectar of th e n ame w hi ch the Guru ga ve t o d rink is a suit able f ood against bir th an d d eath
, ,
.

By om the G u u th L ord the destroyer o f f e ar h as been ser ved ( hi s) p ai n h as gone off

( w h ) r e .
, , ,
,

The true Gur u is deep an d profound the oce an of comf ort si n removing , ,
- .

Wh o h as served his o wn Guru on hi m the club o f the messenger of Yam a does n ot fall
,
.

I have se arched an d seen th e whole w orld ( an d f ound that) n othing c an be comp ared w ith t h e Guru .

The t re asure of the n ame w as given ( to me ) by the true Gur u in the he art of Nan ak is ( there fore ) ,

the pith of h appiness .

e m R ag ; mahd l d V .

X X I . X 01 .

Ha vin g considered it s w eet I ate it ( but ) a bitter t aste spr ang up ( af ter),
.

Brothers fri ends good friends w ere m ade ( by me ) ( I ) w as occupied wi th tal ki ng about w orldly subj ects
, , , .

( But all ) p asses quickly w ithout the n a me it is insipid

2
.
,

0my heart sti c k t o th e ser v ice of the tr ue Guru !

,

W h at is visi ble th at is anni hil ated give up th e opini on of thy ( own ) mind !
, ,

L i ke a dog w h o h as become m ad run s i n the ten di rections

, , .

( S o ) a greedy cre atur e does not know w h at is e atable an d not e atable it e ats all , .

Being imm ersed in the intoxic ation of lust an d w rath it fall s ag ain an d again into the w omb , .

By the M ay a a n et is spre ad out h aving m ade a b ait w ithin it .

By greediness the bird is c aught an d c ann ot get o ut 0 moth er ! ,

It does n ot know him by w hom it is m ade ag ain an d again it comes an d goes , .

This w orld is fascin ated in m any w ays an d in m any m anners .

Wh om he preserves h e is preserved ( abi des ) t h e infini te S upreme S pirit is po w erf ul

, , .

The people of Hari are saved by their const ant medi tation on Hari Nan ak is al w ays a s acrifice ,

( for t hem ) .

S i r ? Rag ; mah al d V .

Gh ar II .

X X II . X 01 1 .

The co herd come to the

w f w h at ostentation h as he to m ake
h as c o w h o use
'

The th e h as ar rived it must be gone t ake thou c are of thy household thi ngs !
, ,

P ause .

Omy he art sing the qu al ities of Hari serve the true

, , Guru in love
Wh y art thou conceited of a trifle ?

m m be transl ated in dif ere t w ay s T h e expres sion i s al so found in Tul si D as Ram ayo n
m ay n .

W
,
w h ere i t i s expl a ined by 3 m m t h e e ffi cie n t c auses o f the Mah at etc
( see W i lso n s Vish
,
, .
’
.

Pu p p, .
m m M m ay th e refore be t r ansla ted by : w h o i s a ble t o m a ke the
p r im a ry
el em e
n t s
o r substanc es
( m ) B ut it i s p erh aps m ore si m ple t o t ake i t = m f 3 1 m
.
b e i s th e ( effi cient )
'

c ause o f causes an d th e w hole expressio n m 8 1 3 6 W

,
might be tran slated by : he i s th e powe rful
, ,

( e ffi cien t) cause o f ca uses .

2
L iteral ly : In goin g d elay i s n o t m a d e

m
.

m
3
c o w hou se a h ut built on pa st ure g roun d t hen c e the adjective o r a m
-
t h e c oW h 6 1 d
, , ,

w h o belo n g s t o the m
'
J

(W
T h e w ord 1 3 obsolete in Hi n di n o w but still i n use in Mar ath i
)
.
, .
72 smi RE G, MA H V . .
,
S A BD X X VI . XX VII (xc v 1 . . X C VII ) .

P a use .

Be ci te si lentl y , 0heart the One infinite n ame

, ,

The support of the he art i s h e by w hom li fe soul and body w ere given
, ,
.

In lust w rath an d conceit th e w orld i s im mersed 0 mother !

, ,

F al l on the asy lum of the s ain ts cling to the feet ( o f the Gur u ) ! p ain an d d arkness are done away
,
.

H e practi ses truth contentment an d mercy : these are the best w orks
,
.

He gives up hi s o w n sel f an d becomes the dust o f al l to w hom the Lord the sh apeless gives it
, , , .

Wh at is seen all th at ar t Thou ( thy ) exp ansion is sprea d out

, ,
.

Nan ak s ays : by the Guru ( my ) error h as been cut o ff I consider ( n ow ) al l as Brahm ,

.

S ir ? Rag ; malad l d V .

X X VI . X CVI .

In bad an d good actions the w hole w orl d i s ( en gaged ) .

x
Free fr om both is the devotee ; some rare one is kno wi ng .

P ause .

The Lord is contained in al l ( things ) W hat sh all I say ( an d ) hear ? .

Thou O L ord art the gr e at S upreme S pir it the w ise

, , ,

He w h o i s in pride an d conceit i s no w orshi pper ,

.

O f unbi assed re gar d f or truth 0 s aints is on e amongst a crore

, ,
.

Telli ng an d c ausing to be tol d i s a false reno wn .

2

By telling a story some rare disciple is emancip ated .

The state of him wh o is every w here present 3 does not come into sight
, ,
.

He h as obtained ( thi s ) gift 0 Nan ak ! wh o is th e dust o f th e s aints

,
.

S ir ? Ray ; malza l d V .

Ghar V II .

C VII X X VII . X .

On account of my trust in thee indul gent tre atment h as been sho w n to me .

Th e child errs an d m akes mistakes thou 0 Hari art father an d mother ! , , ,

P ause .

Telli ng an d causing to be told ( legends ) i s easy ( but) w ha t is pleasin g to thee is diffi cul t , .

I put my tr ust in thee I know thy o wn self is I , , .

In all an d w ithout all ar t thou O f ather ! w h o ar t not i n need of anyth ing

, .

O father I do n ot kno w w h at w ord is conf orm able to thee !

,

H e w h o is f ree f rom b onds 0 s aints keeps affectio n for me !

, ,

The Lord h a s become merciful coming an d goin g h as been stop ped , .

Havi ng met w ith the Guru t h e S upreme Brahm w as kno w n by Nan ak

, .

S ome r a r e on e is kn ow ing , supply : t h e fa ct th at good

, an d bad a ctions ar e not existing fo r t h e devotee,
wh o sees in al l B r a hm .

2
B y telli n g o r n a rr atin g sto ries or legends o f t h e gods m aki ng others tell them eman ci ation i s not
p , ,

obtai n e d T h e recital o f th e legend s o f the gods i s consid ered ery meritorious

. v .

3
W I3 a dj ( S ansk W ) lit eral ly : not di s appeared n o t gone = presen t (everyw here) a1m
7
, . .
, , .

T h e exp l anation ( i n t h e P anj abi Diction ary) free fro m t h e ordin a ry conditions o f hum an l i fe i s g ra tuitous , .
 smi REG, MAH V S A RD X X VIII I C VIII
. .
, . XX X .
(X . xc rx ) .
73

S ar i Rag ; mahal a V .

Ghar I .

X X VIII . X C VIII .

1 . H avin g
j oined the s aints de ath h as been cut o ff .

The t rue Lord h as settled in ( my ) he art the L ord h as become merciful , .

The per fect true Guru h as been met w ith ( an d ) al l tr oubles h ave become extinct
, .

P ause .

O my true Guru I am a s acrifice for thee ! ,

I devote myself for thy sight h aving been ple ased thou h ast given me the nectar n ame
,
-
.

Those ar e w ise men wh o h ave served thee i n love , .

Final em an cip ation is obt ained ( foll o w ing ) af ter those in w hose he art the tre asure of th e n ame ,

There is no donor like the Guru wh o h as given th e gift o f the soul 1 , .

Those h ave become acceptable ( w ith ) w hom the Guru h as met by ( thei r) good destiny 2
, .

Those w h o ar e in love w ith the Tr ue one get a pl ace to sit in hi s court , .

In th e h and of th e creator are honours ; they obtain w h at is w ritten bef ore ( for them ) .

True is the cre ator true the m aker ; tr ue is the L ord true h i s support
, , .

The perf ectl y True 3 one is prai s ed ( by hi m ) w hose intelli gence an d discrimin ation is true , .

He is cont ai ned in al l un intermi tti ngly ; Nan ak lives by reciti ng si lentl y the One .

8 5% B ag ; malzal d V .

X X IX . X CI X .

The Guru the S upreme Lord should be w orshipped loving hi m in he art an d body !
, , ,

The true Guru is the donor of the cre atures he gives support to every one , .

The w ords of the true Guru should be done this is true consideration , .

Without being att ached to the society of the s aints al l the fascination of the May a is ( but ) ashes .

P a seu .

O my friend r emember the n ame o f H ari H ar i !

, ,

‘
(I f) conn ex ion w ith the s aints d w el l in the he a rt the toil is a ccomplish ed ,
.

The Guru is infi ni m po w erful the very fortun ate get an inte rvie w w ith him , .

The Guru is in apprehensible pure li ke the Guru there is none other , ,

.

The Guru is th e creator t h e Guru the m aker the disciple h as true in form ation ( regardi ng h im )
, , .

Without the Guru ther e is nothing what the Guru w ishes to do that is done , , .

The Guru is the Ti rth a the Guru is the Coral tree the Guru is the accomplisher of the desi res
,
-
,
5

men ) .

The Guru is the donor h avi ng given the n ame o f B ari he s aves the w hole w orld
,
.

The Guru is po werf ul the Guru is formless ( or the forml ess S upreme Being ) high inaccessible in finite
, , , , .

The gre atness of the Guru is i ncomprehensible w h at w ill the n arrator say ,

1
W 7; must here be taken as a T a tpurush a , the gi ft of the soul , i . a. th e gift by which
, th e soul
m ay be sav ed .

2
m fg , 6A bl E m
. ofgood lot or
133 1 destiny This seems
,
to
from be the simplest expl an ation
, .
,

t h e me aning n aturally not fitting so well th e cont ext .

8
literally : truer t han true = perfectly t rue .

T h e sen se i s : m an s toil is a ccomplished or ove r

4 ’
.
,

W W 3 S ansk mfrsna t h e Coral tree one o f the five trees o f h eaven

5 ‘ - .
, . , ,
74 S R I I RA G, MA H . V .
, S AE D X X X . MA H . A S TP A D . I .

m any frui ts as are desired in the he ar t so m any are w ith the Guru
As ,
.

The (fruits ) w ritten be fore ar e to be obtained ( by hi m ) ( to w hom ) he gives the c apital of the tr ue
,

n ame .

H e w h o h as come to the a sylum of the tr ue Guru w ill not again be destroyed ,

.

0 Hari m ayst t h en never be f orgotten by Nan ak ! this li fe body an d bre ath ar e thine
, ,
.

S ir i Rag ; m aiza l a V .

X X X . C .

O s aints O brother ! final em ancip ati on ( is obtaine d ) by the t rue n ame

He ar, ,
.

The feet o f the Guru should be embraced “ the n ame of Har i is the Ti r th a ,
.

In the next w orld ( such a on e) is received at th e threshold the placeless one obtains ,
a pl ace .

P ause .

brother true i s the service o f the true Gu r u !

O ,

F rom t h e Guru being ple a se d the ( all fil l ing the invisible an d in di visible is obt ained 2
.
, , ,

( I am ) devote d to the true Guru w h o h as given ( me ) the tr ue n ame ,

.

D aily I praise the True one the qu alities of the True one I sing ,
.

The True on e I eat the True one I put on ( as clothes ) true is the n ame o f the True one
, ,
.

May he not be f orgo tten at an y bre ath ( or ) morsel the Guru himsel f is the f ruit yiel di ng body ,
-

person ) .

L ike the Guru none is seen recite hi m ( si lently ) d ay an d ni ght !

,

I f he besto w a favourable look then is obtained the true n ame the vessel o f ( al l ) qu alities
, , .

The Gur u the S upreme L ord is O n e he is contai ned in all

, , , .

T o w hom it w as decreed be fore they meditate on the n ame , .

0 Nan ak ! w h o h as resorted to the asylum o f t h e Guru does not di e n or does he come ( a g ain ) h avi ng ,

Om By t h e f avour of the true Guru !

S IRI RA G .

Ma/zal d I .
; Gizar I .

( A atp adi s )
3

I .

S peak ing ,
spe aking ( my ) he art is proclaim ing ( his qualiti es ) as as it is kno w n ( to my heart) , , ,

it procl aims ( them ) .

H e w h o is procl aimed h o w gre at is he in w hich pl ace is h e ?4

, , ,

A s m any as ar e telling ( h i s qu alities all h aving told them continue medit ting upon them
) ( ) a ,
( ) .

m
K

( srav an a) ( S an sk
, .
W ) , mbrac e t o hold fast t o r eso rt t o
v a.
. To e , , .

2 o

h av m g d i ff erence ( from t h e un ive rs e

no
) th e iden tity o f t h e , S upr eme an d of the
univers e .

T he i s m sui t d oes
-
n ot a
l wa ys co t n
n ai th e x c t number
e a o f ei gh t vers es , b t
o
u s met m s
o i e one m ore
or 1ass .

4
The w hole vers e 1 5 o bscure a n d th e s en s e c an only he rriv ed by conj ec ture
a at .
76 S IR I RA G, MA H . A S TP A D . 111 .

The body an d he art of her ,

w h o is a dorned w ith the w ord of the Guru , is w ith her beloved
( husb and ) .

Having
j oin ed both hands sh e stands an d looks o ut sh e utters a true petition ,
.

S h e i s steeped i n red ( colour ) d w ell s in true fe ar she i s steeped in love in the true colour
, , ,
.

S ervant an d sl ave o f the beloved she is c alled w h o min d s the n ame ,

.

True love does n ot bre ak if he unite t o true union ( with himsel f ) ,

.

I am alw ays a s acri fice for her w h o is imbued w ith the w ord ( o f the Guru ) an d w hose he art is,

perforated ( by it) .

Th at w om an w ill n ot si t do w n as a wi do w w h o is absorbed in the true Guru ,

.

H er beloved i s deli ght ful young true he does n o t di e n or go , , ,

.

H e al w ays sports w ith the beloved w om an true is hi s f avourable look an d good w ill ( to w ards her ) ,
.

Truth is laid out ( by her ) as her w e alth ‘ the orn ament o f her dress i s love ,
.

H avi ng appli ed t h e p aint o f sandal dust the tenth g ate is m ade her p al ace -
,
2
.

Her l amp i s lighted by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) her neckl ace o n her bre a st is the n a me of Ri m , .

S h e is be autiful amon g st w omen o n w hose f orehe a d i s the j e w el o f love , .

H er be auty an d w is d om is ch ar ming by the infinite love o f t he True on e .

W ithout her beloved sh e kno w s n o m an o n account of her love an d affection t o the true Gur u , .

O thou w h o h ast fall en asleep in the d ark night h o w w il l th e night h e p assed w ithout thy fri end ?
, ,

( Thy ) bosom burns ( thy ) body is set on fire ( thy ) he a r t 0 w om an is consumed by fire
, , , ,

W hen the w om an is n o t enj oyed by the husb and her youth p asses t o n o purpose , .

O n th e bed ( i s) the hu sb and the w i fe h as fall en asleep ( an d ) obta i n s ( there fore ) n o u n derst anding
, .

I h ave fallen asleep my beloved is w aking to w hom sh all I go an d ask

, ,

S h e w h o is uni ted ( w ith her L ord ) by the true Guru abides in fe ar ; love 0 N an a k is her comp anion , , .

S ir ? R ag ; mah a l d I .

II I .

Thou thyself ar t the qualities thou t hyself , r e c it est

( them ) tho u thysel f h aving he ard ( them )
,

r eflec t est .

Thou thysel f ar t th e je w el thou ( thyself ) ex am in est ( it ) thou thyself

, , ar t i ts infinite price .

Thou ar t true honour an d gre atness thou thyself ar t besto w ing ( it ) , .

P ause .

0 H a ri ,
thou ar t the cre ator ! A s it ple ases thee so keep me ,

May thy n ame 0 H ari be obtained as rule o f conduct

, ,

Thou thysel f ar t the pure di amond thou thysel f a re the m aj i th col our ,
3
.

Thou thyself ar t the bright pe arl thou thysel f ar t the m edi ator o f the devotees , .

By the w ord of t h e Gu r u ( thou ar t ) p r aising ( thys el f ) in every body ( thou ar t ) visible an d invisible , .

Thou thyself art the oce an an d the bo a t thou thysel f art the ne ar an d f urther shore ( o f ,

T h ou kno w es t the t r ue w ay by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Gur u ) thou ar t ferrying over ( the w ater
,

of exi s ten ce ) .

‘
13 } W moun t ( o f w ei gh t) af t rm a mount o f w ealth
; a
, , .

Q1 1 3 1 m
2
t h e te n t h gat e s aid t o be i n t h e c r o w o f t h e he d
e so c all ed a
“

( rgro q t h e a pertu re
’
,
a t h
, n -
,

o f B r a m a) T h e J ogi s pre t en d t o keep th e brea th fa st i n t h e te n th

h .

g a t e a n d t o d ri n k t h us t h e n e cta r o f
immo r ta l i ty by u n ion w i t h B r ah m w hic h i s bro ugh t a bout th ere
,
,

m sf t h e ro ot of a v rn e from w h i ch a g en ui ne r ed colour is extracted (W

.

3 O
O C
, .
,
coloured wi t h
m aj i th g enui ne r ed in co n t r a disti ctio n t o HU T u n g en uine r ed
v ,

)
, , n
, .

U T? W
4
S ansk W V UT
I W W ) t h e n ea r a n d fu rther ba nk o r shore
.
, .
 srai RAG, MA H . A S TP A D . IV .

77

The fe ar o f the fe arless ‘ is know n w ithout the Guru there is d arkness , .

Thou O c re ator ar t seen as firm al l the other ( cre atures ) come an d go

, , , .

Thou alone ar t pure the other ( cre atures ) ar e bound an d fall into dullness
, .

Those w h o are preserved by the G Iur u ar e saved w h o fix their meditation on the True o n e , , .

Hari is kno w n from the w ord ( o f the Guru ) by him w h o is attached t o the true discourse of the Gur u , .
.

To his body dirt does n ot stick w h o h as a h abit ation in the house o f the True one
, .

If he besto w a fa vourable look the True on e i s obtained w ithout the n ame w h at c an he d o ?

, ,

Those wh o h ave kno w n the True on e ar e h appy in the fo ur ages

, , .

H aving extinguished the thirst of egotism they put firmly the True on e in their bre ast , .

( By them ) the g ain o f the One n ame is obtained in the w orld h aving m ade the Gur u the object of
their reflection .

( By w hom ) true goods ar e laden h e h as al w ays g ain true is hi s stock , , .

I n the tr ue court he w il l sit W hose devotion an d supplic ation is true

, .

W ith honour his account w ill be settled the n ame of Ram is m aking ( h i m ) m anifest , .

H e ( = H ari ) is c alled higher th an high he c annot be seen by an y o n e , .

W here I see there ar t thou alone by the true Guru thou ar t sho w n
, , .

( Thy ) all pervading light is e asily kno wn by Nan ak

- .

S ir ? Rag ; malml d I .

IV .

The fish did n ot know the net the s altish pond is bottomless , .

W h y did the very clever an d be autif ul ( fi sh ) confide ( in it)

O n a cc ount of its ( ow n ) action it w as c aught de ath does not recede from its he ad , .

P ause .

Obrother kno w thus de ath ( impending ) on th y ( o w n ) he ad !

,

A s the fish so m an f alls un a w a res into the net

,
.

The w hole w orld is f ettered by de ath w ithout the Guru de ath does not recede ( from them ) , .

Those w h o ar e a ttached t o the True on e are s aved h aving ab andoned the anom alous state of du ality, .

I am a s acr ifice for those w h o ar e true ( = accepted as true ) at the true gate
, .

L ike a h aw k is the bir ds net in the h and o f the huntsm an

’
.

Those w h o are preserved by the Guru are rescued the o thers ar e c aught w ith the b ait , , .

W ithout the n ame they ar e picked out an d throw n do w n n o on e is a comp anion w ith them ( at th e ,

time o f de ath ) .

Truer th an true he is c alled true is the place of the True one ,

.

By w hom the True o n e is minded i n their he art is true medit ation ,

.

Those di sciples ar e kno w n as pure i n he art an d face w h o h ave divine know ledge , .

O ffer before the tru e Guru the prayer : j oin to me the friend
The sw eethe art being met w ith h appiness is obtained the messengers of Yama h ave died having
, ,

e aten poi son .

If I abide w ithin the n ame the n a me comes an d d wells in ( my ) he art

,
.

fzfi fi flfl 3 3 t h e fe ar o f t h e fe arless ; the s en se o f the w o rd s i s : t h e fea r o f t hose wh o d o n o t fe a r

‘
' '

, ,

thee is kno wn T ho ugh they are apparentl y fe a rl ess they a re at t h e en d a fr a id : fo r w itho ut t h e Gur uan d
,
. ,

h is w ord a l l i s d a rkness B ut m a n 3 3 m ig h t also be tr an sl ated by : t h oua r t k n o wn asf ea r l ess ( Nan a k

.

using suc h co m pound s a s : mm f ree fr om p a rts ) fi fi fi nfl standing fo r fm = fi rs? ’

i a in the net ; w h y did it confidently go i n to the net ?

2
. .
\
 S I RI RA G, MA H . A S TP A D . V .

ithout the uru there is d rkness ithout the ord initi atory m an tr ) ( o n e ) doe s not obt ain
W G a w w ( ,

underst anding .

By the instruction of the Guru light is m ade i f ( on e ) continu ally meditate on the True one , ,
.

There de ath does not enter light is absorbed in the luminous ( S upreme Being)
,
.

Thou art the s w eethe art thou art w ise thou thyself ar t uniting ( men w ith thysel f )
, ,
.

By the w ord ( of the Guru ) thou ar t praised w h o h ast no end nor limit ,
.

There de ath does n o t arrive w here the boundless w ord o f the Guru is
,
.

By ( his ) order all ar e produced by ( his ) order they do their w ork,

.

By h i s order they are in the po w er of de ath by his order they are absorbed in the True on e ,
.

n k h t is ple s g him th t is do e nothi ng is in the po w er o f these cre atures

0 N a a ! w a a in t o a n
, ,
.

S ir ? Rag mahal d I .

V .

He w h o is impure body is o f an impure he art his tongue ( also ) becomes impure

o f an , ,
.

H e w h o is o f a false mou th spe aks falsehood h o w sh all he become pure ?

, ,
'

W ithout the w ord ( o f the Guru ) ( hi s) he art i s not cle ansed fr om the true one trut h is obt ained ,
l
.

P ause .

0 f air l ady ! w h at comf ort h as she w h o is destitute o f virtues

,

Join ed w ith thy beloved thou w ilt enjoy ple asure h appiness i s i n the love t o the true w ord ( of the ,

Guru ) .

I f the beloved ( husb and ) goes abro ad the w om an sep ar ated from her husb and is in gr ief
, , ,
.

A s a fish in little w ater m akes pi t if ul mo aning 2

.

I f it is ple as ing to the beloved com fort i s obtain ed ( by her ) w hen he himself besto w s a favourable look
, , .

I w ill praise m y ow n beloved w ith my friends an d comp anions .

By the be auty of ( his ) body my he art is ench an ted h aving seen ( him ) I am imbued w ith love , .

B eing adorned w ith the w ord ( o f t h e Guru ) ( I am ) be auti ful ( my ) beloved enj oys ( me ) w ith favour , .

A fascin ating w om an is o f n o use i f f alse an d vicious ,

.

S h e h as no com fort in her father s nor in her father i u—l aw s house she burns in a false p assion
’ -
’
, .

H er coming an d going i s annoy ance sh e is forgotten an d ab andoned by her husb and

, .

The w ife of the belove d i s bright ( happy ) sh e w h o is ab andoned w h at relish h as sh e ? , , ,

S h e is o f n o use to the beloved ( husb and ) w h o spe aks a gre at de al o f nonsense , .

A t the gate an d house she i s not ad mitted w h o h as ab andon ed hersel f to another ple asure
, .

The P an dit re ads books ( but ) does n ot underst and the subj ect under consideration
, .

He gives instr uctions t o others ( on h i s p art ) a money business

— .

In a false story the w orld w anders about t o rem ain in the w ord ( of the Guru ) is the best
, .

M an y Ban dit s an d astrologers reflect on the V edas .

In discussion an d opposi tion i n praise an d discussion is ( their ) coming an d going

, .

W ithout the Gur u ( their ) destiny w il l not be loosened t hey tell he ar an d deliver expl an ations , , .

A ll are c alled virtuous I h ave no virtue w h atever

, .

H ari is the bridegroom of the w om an th at is ple asing ( to him ) to me th at Lord ple ases , .

O Nan ak ! if by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) union is e ffected there is no more sep ar ation , .

f EWE mg m
‘
2; mm .
The w ords ar e inve rted m ust thus be pl aced to ge t a n y sense o ut
an d

of them : $5175 m ”I? K W . 1 113 or mfg he art m ind A nothe r re ading i s : m , .

313 very likely in stea d o f fa x 31 3 313 2 . B ut t h e t ext i s app a rently cor r u t h er e

p .

a
m m = W pitiful m o ani, n
g .
 80 I
S RI RA G, MA H . A S TP A D . VII I .

P ause .

brother ( on him ) is no filth w h o b athes in pure w ater

O , ,
.

Thou ( 0 Hari ) alone ( ar t ) pure al l the other ( cre ation ) is defi l ed w ith filth
,
.

‘
The p alace o f Hari h as been m de be uti ul by the cre tor
a a f a .

The light of the lam p of the sun an d moon is incomp arable in the three w orlds is boundless light , .

In the shop the city the fort t h e cells is the trade an d t r afli c o f the True one
, , , ,
.

Th e collyriu m o f divine kno w ledge bre aks the f e ar ( o f him ) ( w h o ) sees the light o f him w h o is ,

w ithout collyrium ( i e o f the S upreme ) ” . .

The hidden an d m anif est ( things ) all ar e kno w n ( by him ) w h o keep s his mind ste ady
, , .

I f such a true Guru ( w h o keeps his mind ste ady etc ) be met w ith he e asily unites ( with the S upreme ) , .
, .

A scratch i s m ade w ith the touchstone b e c ar efully ex amines the good ones ,
.

The counterfeited do n o t obtain a p l ace the genuine ones he puts into the tre asury ,
.

Remove hope an d anxiety ! thus ( thy ) filth w ill be absorbed .

E very o n e desires com f ort n o on e desires p ain ,

.

Comfort ( h as) abund ant p ain ( f ollow ing) ( but) the flesh l y minded one ( h as) n o understanding ( o f this )
,
-
.

I f com f ort an d p ain h e consi dered a s the s ame com fo rt i s obtained f rom the secret o f the w ord ( o f ,

the Guru ) .

If the V é da be re a d w ith a loud voice the speech o f Brahm ( an d ) V y asa ,

The Munis w orshippers an d devotees are imbued w ith love to the n ame the vessel of virtues
, , .
3

Those w h o ar e in love w it h the True one h ave overcom e ; I sh all alw ays be a s acrifice fo r them
, , .

In th e four periods ( of the w orld ) t h ese ar e dirty an d filled w ith filth in w hose m outh is n ot ,

the n ame .

Th e fa ce o f those w h o are destitute o f devotion an d love ( to the n ame ) i s bl ack they lose their honour
, , , .

Those w h o h ave f orgotten the n am e w eep bein g ruined by v i c c

, , .

By searchi ng an d se archi ng he is found he meets w i th him w h o fe ars him an d unites ( him ,

w ith himself ) .

H e d w ells in the house ( = body ) of him w h o kno w s hi s o w n self the thirst o f ( h i s egotism ce ases
) ,

( then ) .

0 Nan ak ! those ar e pure an d bright w h o ar e in love w ith the n ame o f H ari , .

S ir ? R ag mah al d I .

VIII .

H e ar, Omisled an d foolish he art cling to the feet of the Guru ! ,

S ilently recite an d m editate o n the n ame of Hari ! Y am a i s then afraid an d p ain flees
( ) .

Gre at is th e p ain of the ill favoured W om an h o w sh all h er h appy st ate o f w i fehood rem ain firm ?
( )
-
,

P a use .

brother ! I h ave n o other pl ace !

O
My w e alth is the tre asure o f t h e n ame I sacrifice m yself fo r the Guru by w hom it is given,
, .

( By me ans of t h e instruction of the Guru h onour i s ( obtained ) pr aise be to him ! in his soci ety ,

is union ( w ith Go d ) .

31 p alace o f Hari i s th e U niverse w hich i sillumin ated by th e lam p o f t h e sun an d

th e ,

m oo n UTE shop h ear t ; m city = body ; Era fort = th e cro wn o f th e h ea d containin g t h e ten th g ate
f
.
, , ,

(m m ) t h e s eventy t w o c ells o r comp artme n ts o f t h e hum an bo d y

-

m ; Go d is w ithout collyriu m i a w ithout a n y spot o r d a rk ness 3 1 ft s f :light Splen d our

.

2
, . .
.
, , .

3
313 3 1 13 m ay h ere also be t r a nsla ted by : an d i t s quali ties
“

.
 sm i RKG, MAH . A S TP A D I X . .
81

W ith out him I do not live t w en ty fi v e minutes w ithout the n ame I die
-
, .

May by me the blind one , th e n ame be not f orgotten ! if I rem ain steady ( in it) I sh all go to the
, ,

house ( of Har i ) .

0
Th at disci ple ( finds ) no pl ace ( i n Hari s p al ace) w hose Guru 1 8 bli nd ’
, .

W ithout the true Guru the n ame is not obtained w ithout the n ame w h at relish is there ? ,

H e comes an d goes repen ting ( he is) like a cro w in an empty house

, .

Without the n ame there is pai n in the body l ike a w all m ade of soil impregn ated w ith s altpetre
,

( it crumbles do wn ) .

A s long as the True one is not in the min d so long the p al ac e ( of H ari ) is not obt ained
, .

By him the house ( of H ari) is obtained wh o is imbued w ith the w ord ( of the Guru ) h e is con
, ,

t in ual l y in the state of em ancip ation f rom individu al existe nce .

I ask my ow n Guru h aving asked the Guru I do the w ork ( enj oined by him )
,
.

I f I pr aise ( Hari ) by me ans of the w ord ( of the Guru ) h e d w ells in ( my ) he art th e p ai n of egotism , ,

( or individu al exi stence ) is consumed .

U nion ( w ith th e S upreme ) is n aturall y e ffected the true ( disciple ) h as union w ith the T r ue one
,
.

Those wh o ar e imbued w ith th e w ord ( of th e Guru ) are pure h aving ab andoned lust, w rath ,

an d con c eit .

They pr aise al w ays al w ays the n am e they keep H ari in their breast
, , .

H ow should he be f orgotten f rom the he art w h o is the support o f al l cre atures ,

He wh o dies by me ans of the w ord ( of the Guru ) h as ( re ally ) died, he will not die ag ain another ,

Fr o m th e w ord ( o f th e Gur u) H ari is obtained ( by hi m ) wh o h as love to the name , .

W i th out the w ord th e w orld str ays about it dies an d is born agai n an d again , .

E very one pr aises his ow n self a high flo w n ( speech ) is m ade ( in self commendation )
-
! -
, .

W ithout the Guru one s o w n self is n ot kno w n w h at is done by spe aking an d he ar ing ?2
’
,

0 Nan ak ! i f by means of th e w ord ( =instr uct ion o f the Guru ) ( one s o wn sel f ) be kno wn th en
’
,

no one wi ll pract ise deceit .

S ir ? Rdg mahal d I .

IX .

If, wi thout ( having) the beloved ( husband ) the , w oman h e dorned, her youth is useless
a an d

w retc hed .

S hedoes not enj oy in comfort her bed w ithout the beloved her orn ament is useless, .

The il l fated w om an h as much p ain the Lord of the bed is not in the house
-
,
.
3

P ause .

he ar t, mutter the n ame of Ram th en comfort w ill arise

0 ,

W ithout the Guruth e love ( of the husb an d ) is not obtai ned by th e w ord ( of the Guru) it accrues ,

an d ple asure springs up .

By the serv ice of the Gur u comf ort is obtained ; if Hari be the bridegroom there is e asily ,

decoration .

The beloved enj oy s the bed of the true ( wom an ) whose lov e an d affection is deep ,
.

l
$ 33 ; supply : m higher th an high (w ord or speech ) is m ade
£113
'
a
330 or , .

3 3 1 1% fi t ) “ a ft ; the sen se o f these w ords i s : what is t h e good o f s aying that he h as kno wn h is

2

o w n self or o f he a rin g that such a o n e h as kno wn h i s o wn s el f ?

,

T his simile i s u sed by Nan ak al l through t h e Gra nth ad n a u sea m

3
.
82 S R I I RA G, MA H . A S T P AD . x .

She is recogniz ed as a disciple , w h o is united ( w ith Hari ) by the Guru ( on account of her ) virtuous
conduct .
1

Meet w ith ( thy ) true husb and 0 fascinati ng w om an ch armed by ( thy ) beloved enj oy thysel f ! , ,

H e ar t an d body i s delighte d in the True one w hose v alue c annot be tol d ,

.

H i be thy h usb an d ( thou ar t ) a f a vo ured w om an in the house ; he is pure of a true n ame

( )
If r ( ) ,
.
a ,

If in the mind the m ind di e then th e w om an w ill enjoy the beloved ,

.

2
A necklace o f pe arls i n one thre ad is j oined together on her neck .

In the assembly of the s aints comfort springs up the n ame is the support o f the ( female ) disciple ,
.

In a moment ( m an ) is bor n i n a moment he is consumed in a moment he comes in a moment , , ,

he goes .

I f he kno w the w ord ( of the Guru i a t h e n ame ) an d rem ain ( in it ) de ath w il l n o t persecute him,
. . ,
.

The unequ alled L ord c annot be compared (w i th an y thing ) from a story ( th at is told ) he c annot be ,

obtained .

The traders an d t rafii c k ers ar e come h avi ng w ritten d ow n their w ages ,

.

If they do th e w ork of th e True one profit a ccrues to them by his f avour ,

.

Th e true tra ding stock i s obtained f rom the Guru he h as not a bit o f covetousness
-
,
.

The disciple he w ill w eigh accur ately true is his b al ance an d w eight ,
.

H ope an d desire i s ch arming ( him ) by the Guru it is st ep p ed true is ( his ) w ord , ,

.

H e himsel f w ill w eigh accur ately f ull is the w eight o f t h e P erfect ,

.

By the telling of legends ( fi n al ) em ancip ation is n o t obtaine d nor by re ading lo ads of books ,
.

P urity o f the body is not obtained w ithout devotion an d love t o Hari .

O Nan ak ! him by w hom the n ame is not forgotten the Guru the cre ator unites ( w ith himself )
, , , ,
.

S ufi R ag ; mahul d I .

X .

the true perfect Guru be m et w ith the je w el o f reflection is obtaine d

If , , .

If the he art be given to one s o w n Guru th e love of al l is obtaine d ’

, .

The been of fin al em ancip ation is obtaine d th at i s blotting out vices ,

.

P ause .

O brother
ithout the Guru divine know le dge is n ot acquired !
, w
Go an d ask one o f the Br ahm as N ar adas an d V ed V y asas ,
- 3

He w h o is kno w n by application to divine kno w le d g e an d meditation is c alled inexpressible

, , .

( If ) a tree is f ruitful an d green its sh ad e becomes l arge , .

Rubies jew els gems ar e in the store room of the Guru

, , ,
-
.

F rom the store room of t h e Guru is obtained the love to the pure n am e
-
.

The true boundless stock o f goo ds is collected by a f ul l destiny

, .

He is a giver o f comf ort a remover of p ain the true Guru is destroying the demons
, , .

m 3 = 2fla 33 8 1 3 virtuous cond uc t The c ase o r gr am m atical co n nexion i s utt erly neglected by
1
, .

N a a k an d t h e tr an sl a t ion c a n only be m a d e a cc or d i g t o co nj e cture

n , n .

A s a sign o f h er m o r h a ppy s t a t e o f w i fehood

2
, .

m t h e so n o f B r ahm a a n d o n e o f t h e ten orig i n al Ri shis He deligh te d in exciting qu a rr els

3
, , .

( hen c e X I3 2 an e m broiler) H e i s s aid to be the in ventor o f the V i na o r lyre o f a code o f la w s an d o f the

:
.
, ,

N ar adi y a P uri n a fE lTHTH = E TH the suppo sed compiler o f t h e V ed as T w enty eigh t V y asa s ar e m en
.
, .
-

t io n ed w h o a r e inca rn ations o f N ar i y a n a o r B rah m a an d d esce n d to e a rth f rom time t o time to promu

,
( ) l g ate ,

th e V é da s .
 84 S RI RAG, MA H
I . A S TP A D . X II .

It endures itsel f the boiling but does n ot all o w the m il k t o be consumed

,
.

He H ari ) himself h aving united the sep arated ( from h i m ) gives ( them ) true gre atn ess ,
.

O my he a rt entertain such a love w ith Ha ri as the C h akv i w ith the sun

, ,
l

N ot a moment she f alls into sleep she thinks th at the far ( sun ) is presen t ,
.

The flesh l y minded does n o t get an y un derst anding the disciple ( considers him as) al w ays ( be in g )
-
,

in ( h i s) presence .

The flesh l y minded m ake c alcul ation ( but) what the cre ator does th at comes t o p ass
-
, ,
.

H i s v alue is n ot obtained t h ough eve r y on e se arch ( for it ),

.

( If ) by the inst ruction of the Guru it be given then it is obt ained ; he w h o meets w ith th e True on e , ,

fi nds com fort .

True love does n ot bre ak if th at tr ue Gu r u fall s in ( w i th the disciple )

,
.

I f the blessin g of divine kno wl edge h e obtained the kno w ledge of the three w orlds a ccrues ( thereby ) , .

The pur e n ame i s n ot f orgotten i f he take ( = repe at ) the qu alities ( of H ari )

,
.

H aving played those l ittle birds ar e gone whi ch ar e picking up f ood o n th e surface o f th e tank , .

In t w enty four ( o r ) in f orty eight minutes on e must go ; the pl ay ( lasts ) t o day ( or ) t o morro w
- - - -
.

W hom th ou un i test ( w ith thyself ) h e is united h avi ng gone he tre ads o n the true aren a, , .
2

W ithout the Guru love ( to Go d ) does n ot spring up the fil th o f egotism does n ot g o o ff , .

By w hom i s o w n sel f is know n as the S s h a m he believes in the secret o f the w ord ( o f the Guru )
h ”
,
3
.

I f by the disciple h i s ow n self be kno w n w h at else sh all he d o o r c ause t o be done ,

W h at o f those w h o h ave been united sh al l be united ? h e ( H ari ) bel ie v es 4 i n ( them w h o )

, , ,

ar e united by the w ord of the Guru

( ) .

The fleshl y min ded o n e gets n o understanding being sep ar ated ( fro m the S upreme ) he is struck in
-
,

t h e fa ce .

0 Nan ak ! there i s onl y O n e p al ace ( o f Hari ) there is n o oth er place , .

S i r ? Rag ; maka l d I .

X II .

The self wi ll ed ( ungo dly ) w om an goes astr ay an d i s led astray h aving gone astray
-
, sh e finds no

pl a ce ( of rest ) .

W ithout the Gur u n o o n e points o ut ( the w ay ) blind sh e comes an d goes , .

The blessing of divine know le dge i s lost ( by her ) deceived an d ruined sh e goes , .

P ause .

O father,
the M ay a deludes into error !
The ill f ated w om an deluded by error is n ot taken t o th e bosom of th e beloved
-
, , .

E rring sh e w anders about in f oreign countr ies deluded sh e goes an d a b andon s her house , .

E rring sh e ascends a mountain an d a sand hill in er ror she a gitates her mind -
, .

ma a nsk
5
1
( S 3 3 3 1 6 0, th e B rahm ani g oo se o r d uck
.
It i s s aid , th a t t h e m ale a n d fem a le bird .

sep a r a t e a t ni h t - fa ll an d a r e anxio u sl
g y e xp ect i n g t h e r e- a ppea r an c e o f t h e sun t o b e re un it e d T hey a r e .

t h er ef ore s ai d t o be i n lo v e w i th t h e sun .

fi rg ( S l n dh i ) level piece of gro un d o n w hich s p ort s a r e m a d e ; f“? 31 853 1 t o t r ea d o n th e a ren a

, a ,
, ,

t o spor t T h e pla y d o w n he re i s tr an sitory t h e t rue pla w ill come h ere a ft e r w h en uni t e d

y t o t h e S upre me
.
,
, .

m
o

fi gfi ) l i t era lly : h e 1 5 I a bsolut e i denti fi c ati on o f t h e i n d i id ual e xi ste c e with t h e S upreme

3
s
, v
, n .

T h e A bsolute bec om es co s c ious o n ly i n th e hum an spi i t

n T h e t en or o f th e i n struc t ion o f t h e Guru i s here r .

p erfec t ly luci d an d S ikh ism i s i n n o w ay d i ff eri n g fro m t h e commo n H in dfi p a n thei sm

,

Raf ? fi g 1 m
.

: t h es e w or d s a r e as usu al o l
y a h i n t b y th ems elve s th ey a r e quite un i n t el
@
, , n ,

ligi ble T h ey sh oul d be thus c o n s t ruc ted

.
Ra fi fi g 751 l JEfi h -
:
l Tf Q w h o ar e un ite d by
‘ ' ’

m eans o f t h e w ord o f th e Gu ru in th m he ( H ari) con fi des pl a ces h i s ful l trus t in the m

, e
, .
 S IRI RAG, MA H . A S TP A D . X III .
85

How sh all she wh o is sep arated ( from the S upreme ) from th e beginning be united ? ruined by pride
, ,

she w il l lament .

Those sep arated ones the Gu r w ill unite w h o h ave their j oy in Hari an d love the name
p , .

Th ese h ave e asily true gre at splendour w h o rely for support on the qu al ities an d the n ame of H ari
, .

A s it ple ases thee so keep me w ithout thee w h at L ord h ave I ?

, ,

By re ad ing an d re ading letters on e is led astray in ( faqi r dresses there is much pride , .

Wh at does he w h o h as b athed at a Ti r th a ( i f ) in ( his ) he art be the filth o f conceit

, ,

W ithout the Guru by w hom sh al l the he art the K ing an d S ultan be admonished ?
, , ,

( If ) the boon of love ( to H ari ) be obtained the disciple w ill reflect on truth , .

That w om an h as parted w ith h er o wn self ( w h ose ) orn ament is in the w ord o f the Guru , .

In her ( o wn ) ho use th at beloved is obtained by infinite love t o the Guru .

By the service of the Guru the he art becomes pure an d h appy .

In ( w hose ) he art the w ord of the Guru is se ttled she removes from w ithin egotism , .

W hen the been o f t h e n ame is obtained there is alw ays ( n ew ) profit acquired in the he art
,
.

I f it a ccrue by destin y th en it ( th e n ame ) is obt ained by thyself it c annot be taken

, ,
.

Cli ng al w ays t o th e feet o f the Guru remove from w ithin thy o w n self ! ,

The True on e f alls into the l ap of those w h o are in l ove w ith the True one .

E very on e is subj ect t o error unerring is the Guru the cre ator , , .

By the te a ching of the Guru the mind is instructe d love ( t o H ari ) springs up in it ,
.

By hom the me is n o t forgotten ( him ) the i n eX h austi bl e Word of the Guru ) unites ( with th e
( w ) n a (,

S upreme ) .

S ir ? R ag ; mah al d I .

III X .

The thirst after the May a ( il lusive w orld ) is deluding ( men ) sons rel ations house an d w ife , , ,
.

By w e al th an d youth the w orld is d eceived by greediness covetousness an d selfishness , , .

In consequence of the deceit of Spiritu al d arkness I h ave died this prevails in the w orld , .

P ause .

my beloved I h ave none other w ithout th ee !

0 ,

W ithout thee none other is ple asing to me ( if ) thou ar t ple asing ( t o an y one ) h appiness is obtained
, , .

The n ame I w il l praise w ith ple asu re from the w ord of the Guru contentment ( is obt ained )
, .

W h at is seen th at w ill go o ff fal se i s t h e in fatu ation ( of the w orld ) do n o t look ( at it ) !

, , ,

The travelling c arav an h as come ( but ) behol d it is conti nu ally go ing along
, , .

M any tell a story ( but ) w ithout the Guru u n derstan ding ( o f truth ) is n ot f ound
,
.

I f the gre atn ess of the n ame accr ue ( t o an y on e) he is steeped in the T rue on e an d obtain s honour , .

Those w h o ple ase thee ar e good there is n o false nor genuine on e ( by him self )
, ,
.

In the asylum of the Guru fin al em ancipation is obtained ; the trading stock o f the flesh l y -

minded is fal se .

The eight metal s 1 o f a king ( w hich ) are m al le ated ( into money ) are inscribed w ith a w ord
, ,
.

He hi mself is the ex aminer w h o tries them ; the right ones are put i nto the trea sury .

Thy value does not become know n al l h as been seen by me an d c are f ully examined
,
.
2

By telling it d oes not come to h and ; he w h o abides in the True on e obtains honour , .

A ccording to the instruction of the Gu ru Thou ar t t o be praise d another value ( of thine ) c annot be told ,
.

I T he.
eight metals ar e g old ,
sil er copper tin l ea d bra ss iron steel
v , , , , , , .

‘
mfg fi fi fifi afi rf g i f ? afi l fg ha vin g struck a n d soun ded T hisrefers to the h a bit of
‘
1 ‘
.
. ,

strikin g o n e a rthe n w a re a n d soun ding it ( before buying it) t o see if it be sound , to exa mi n e c a refully .
86 smi RAG, MA H . AS TP A D l . u
v .

In w hich body the n ame is not approved o f in th at body is the contention of ego tism ,
.

W ithout the Guru divi ne kno wledge is n o t obtained the enj oyment o f the visible w orld is duality ,
.

W ithout ( praising ) th e quali ties ( of B ari ) it I s of no use the relish o f the M aya 1 8 insipid ,
.

In hope they are born in hope th ey enj oy the ple asures ( of this l i fe )
,
.

Bound i n hope they are m arched o fl r ui ned ( robbed ) they are str uck 1 11 the face
‘

,
.

H e w h o is bound by vice i s be aten wh o f oll o w s th e instructi on of the Guru is s aved by the n ame
, , , .

Thou alone ar t in all pl aces as it ple ases thee so keep me ! , ,

In ( w hose ) he art the True on e d wells by me an s o f the instruction of the Gu ru he h as a good n ame , ,

honour an d reputati on .

By whom the disease of egotis m ( indivi du ali ty ) is removed by means of the tr ue w ord ( of the Guru ) ,

h e perceives the True on e .

In th e sky an d in the nether region in the th ree w orlds thou ar t present ,

.

Thou thysel f art th e devotee an d the object o f his love thou thysel f ar t united ( w ith him) an d ,

un it est hi m ( w ith thyself ) .

May the n ame n ot be f orgotten by Nan ak ! as it ple ases thee so thou fil l est ( al l places ) ,
.

3 2% R a g ; mafi al a
‘

I .

X IV .

By the name of Ram m y heart is perf orated w h at other reflecti on shall I m ake ? ,

By att ention to the w ord ( of the Guru ) co mf ort arises love t o the L ord is the pith of h appiness , .

A s it ple ases thee so keep me ! the n ame of B ari is my support

,
.

P ause .

Omy he art t rue is the w il l of the L ord

,

Medi tate on him w h o h as created an d adorn ed body an d soul 1

( If my ) body be thro w n into the fire as an offerin g h aving cut it ( to pieces of ) one rati an d ,

w eighed it .

I f I m ake body an d sou l the f uel d aily burning ( them) i n the fi r e

, .

I t does n ot com e up t o the n ame of H ari though I perf orm l akhs of crores o f w orks , .

( If my ) body h e cut into h lves h ving ordered the w to be pl aced upon my he ad

1
a a sa , .

( I f my ) body be melted in the Hi mal aya ( sno w mount ain ) yet the dise ase w ill n o t le ave my mind -
, .

It does n ot come up to the n ame of B ari ; eve r y ( place ) I h ave seen an d c arefull y examined .

Though I give ( in ch arity ) c astles of gol d an d present m any excellent hor ses an d eleph ants .

( Though ) I give land an d m any cow s yet ( there is ) pride an d conceit w ith i n ( me )
, .

By the n ame o f Ram my heart is pierced ” the Guru h as given ( me ) the true gift , .

M any are the opinions of the mind m any t h e reflections on the V eda , .

M any are the f etters of th e soul ( but) the disciple h as the gate of s alvation
, .

O n the side of truth is every on e ( but ) above it is good conduct 3 , .

E very one is c all ed hi gh none is seen l o w ,

.

O n e re ason ( le ading thought) is in the cre ated vesse l One light is in the three w orlds .

1
33 3 3 ( S ansk W
. kind o f large saw but w ithout teeth a s form erly suspended a t B ena res by
) , a , , ,

w hi ch t h e bo dy wa s c u t into t wo h alves (lengt h wi se) .

T h e s ens e o f fi q a l t o pierc e i s : t o h a ve a li v ely never intermitt i n rem embrance o f a thi ng t o

2 ‘ ’

, ,
g ,
,

h a ve a constant prick ing .

3
The sense o f t hes e w ord s i s every o n e want s t o kno w truth but a good religious conduct i s better tha n ,

t his re s earch af ter trut h .

88 S RI RI G,
I MA H I . .
, A S TP A D xv r . .

Fire dies if w ater be poured ( upon it) as a chil d by the milk of th e mother ( is sati ated ) ,
.

Without w ater n o lotus is produced w ithout w ater the fi sh dies ,

.

O Nanak ! if th e disciple obtains the j ui ce of Hari he li ves an d sings the qu al it ies ( =p ral ses) of ,
Han .

S ir ? Rag malzal d I .

XV I .

seen a t erri ble mountai n in my f ather s house I bec am e afraid

Hav ing
’
.

1
Hi gh an d d ifficult is the mountain there i s no stairc ase ( le ading up ) to i t ,
.

By the di sciple he ( i a Hari ) is known ( as being ) w ithin ; being uni ted ( with
. .
Hari ) by the Guru , I
am s aved ( i e I h ave crossed )
. . .

P ause .

O brother the diffi c ult w ater o f existence fri ghten s ( me )

,
.

I the per f ect d true Gu ru f l l i n w ith one bei ng f rien dly disposed ( to the Guru brings
( )f an a ,

hi m acro ss ( by ) the n ame of Hari .

Though I m ake prep arations for dep arture ( an d ) kno w that I am going ,
.

Wh o h as come w ill dep art ( ag ai n ) immortal is that Guru the cre ator , ,
.

Yet ( I am ) praisin g the True one ( I h ave) love to the True on e

3
,
.

Be auti ful m ansions an d p al aces thousands of solidly built forts ,

-
.

E leph ants horses s addles armies in boundless l akhs

, , ,

A r e gone w ith no one ; w e aring away they h ave died being s apless ( unsolid ) .

I f gold an d sil ver be col lected w e alth is a net of anxieties ,

.

I f one cry out for j ustice ( or help ) in the w hole w orld w ithout the n ame de ath is upon his he ad ,
.

W hen the body falls do w n the soul w i ll sport 4

,wh at w ill be the state of the evil doer ? ,
-

H a ving seen his sons an d w ives the L ord of the bed is delighted .

P er fume is applied ( by hi m) h e adorns his dress an d figure ,

.

Dust is m i ngled with dust he dep arts le aving his f amil y behind
,
.

H e m ay be c alled a chief a Ki n g a Raj a a R511 or K h an , , ,

5
.

H e m ay be called a Ch au dh ari ‘ a Ran h e m ay burn in ha ughtiness , ,

.

The flesh l y mi nded one by w hom the n a me is forgotten is ( like ) a reed b urnt in a j ungle fi r e
-
, ,
- .

H e w h o h as come i nto the w orld w ill go h aving pra ctised egotism

, , .

The w hole w orld is a ch amber o f l amp black } body mi nd an d trunk ( are or become ) a shes -
, .

Those ar e pure wh o are preserved by the Guru by the w ord ( of the Guru) their fire is extinguishe d , .

O Nan ak I t is crossed ( =s alv ation is obtained ) by the true n ame ( of him wh o is ) king above

By me the n ame is not f orgotten the j ew el o f the n ame of Hari is my trust , .

The flesh l y minded are consumed i n the w ater o f existence and di e the disciples cross the bottomless
-
,

( water ) .

f3 3 3 11 3 ; the second i s sup erfluous a n d onl y a dded t o m a ke up t h e rhyme .

3 ft? mus t here be taken a s P art p conj o f 3 1 18 1 t o become w ell dispose d

2
. . . -
, .

3
T h e w o rd s 1 1% 3 1 %
m
o f w hi ch t h e S ik h G r a n t h i s coul d give me no e xpl a n atio n
, must b e ,

const ruct ed t hus : 1 1% m 3 3] 3 I ha ve love t o the True one 3 1 % is here simply p o stp o si
‘
, .

t ion WW I) Hindi : t o for , .

fi g m
4
t h e soul wil l sport ( i a in tra nsmig ra t i on
,
) . . .

5
some di fi er en c e between r aj a a n d r an t h e la tter signi fying a c h ief tain
'
T h ere is , .

afi q fi t h e bead m an o f a v illa ge o r tr a de
6
, .

7
m a ch a mber o f la mp bla ck by ente ring w hich o n e is sul lied a p l a ce o f
-
, d efil em en t .
 S RI a l e ,
I VII
MAH MAH III (X VIII )
'
. Asr P A D X . .
; . .
, A S TP AD I . .
89

S ir ? Rag ; makal a I .

X V II .

II Gh ar .

Having fixed ( thy ) residence rem ain in the house ; wh y is there continu ally the apprehension
of going ?
This is considered a residence , w hen people rem ain stationary .

P ause .

How is there a ( fi r m ) residence in th e w orld

P r actising righteousness bind thou up good w orks asvi ati cum apply thyself con ti nu al ly t o the n ame ! ,

T h e Jogi practi sing his sitting postures ‘ sits dow n the Mulla si ts do w n in ( h i s) pl ac e ( or
-
,

house ) .

The P an dit expl ains books the S iddh iI sits dow n in a temple
, .

The Gods the S iddh s the Ganasfi the Gan dh arvas the Munis th e S h é kh s P i rs chie fs
, , , , , ,

A r e dep arted to the threshold ( of God ) an d others al so w ill go ( t her e ) , .

S ultans K hans K in gs nobles are gone h aving dep arted ( f rom the w orld )
, , , ,
.

In tw enty f our m inutes ( or) in f orty eight m inutes it must be gone ; 0 he art under stand it th an
- -
, ,

also w il t arrive there !

I f he ( the S upreme ) be described in w ords some r are o n e w ill understand it ,

.

N an ak tells this suppli c ati on ( = s ays ) he is in the w ater in the e ar th an d on the surface of the e ar th ,
.

Al l ah is invi si ble in appro ach a ble po w erf ul cre ator merciful

, , , ,
.

A l l the w orl d is com ing an d goi n g only the residence o f the Mercif ul one is firm
,
.

He is c alled station ary o n w hose he ad there is no destiny

, .

H e aven an d e arth w ill p ass aw ay he alone ( w ill rem ain ) st ation a ry , .

Day an d sun w ill p ass aw ay ni ght an d moon will p ass aw ay l akhs of stars w il l be destroyed ‘
, ,
.

He al one is stati on ary ; O N an ak cal l him the True on e ,

S I R I RA G ; MAH A L A III .

Ghar
’
I .

A stp adi s .

By th e favour of the true Guru !

1 . X VIII .

he ( th e
If besto w mercy on the disci ple devoti on is m ade , , without devotion
c annot be m ade .

eighty fo ur sitting postur es

T h e J og-i s h ave - -
.

T h e S iddh an a s ce tic w h o i s s a id to h av e a cqui re d supe rhum an po wers I n the f ollo wing verse the
2
.
, ,

S iddh s ar e a sor t o f d emi g o ds inh a biti ng with t h e i n ferior d eities a n d Munis t h e region bet ween t h e sun
-
, , ,

a n d e a rth — S ee Vishnu P u
. r i na ed W ilson p 227 , .
, . .

a
The Gana s ( S a nsk 3115) ar e troops o f inferior deities attendan t on S hiva an d under the superin ten dence
.

of Ga n é sh .

‘
W , fr o m m or to be dest royed from th e S ansk HW ,
.

1s P ersia n ca ll , say ! The insertion o f a P ersi an w ord or phra se is consid er e d very

el egant by the S ikh s .
90 sl ur Ri m MA H
, . AS T P AD II .
(X IX )

him sel f un ites ( the disciple w ith himself ) if he ( the disciple ) und erst and ( the truth ) then he
He , ,

w ill become pure .

H ari i s true true i s ( h i s) w ord by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) union i s brought about
, ,
.

P a use .

brother w h y h ast thou come into the w orld void of devotion ?

O ,

The service o f th e per fect Guru i s n ot perf ormed ( by thee ) uselessly ( thy ) hum an birt h is w asted , .

H ari h im sel f i s the lif e o f the w orld t h e donor he himself h aving besto w e d ( the gif t ) unites
, , , , .

W h at ar e these helpless cre atures ? w h at c an one say or tell ?

H e himsel f gives great n es s t o the disciple he himsel f m akes ( him ) perf orm w orship ,
.

Havi n g seen ( h i s) f amil y he i s ch armed w i t h fa scin ation w hen dep arting i t does n o t go w ith ( him ) , , .

W h o serves the true Guru obtains the abode o f ( all ) qu alitie s h i s v alue is n o t ascertained
, , .

My friend is the L ord H ari he w ill be a comp ani on ( also ) at the end , .

In the father s family the li fe of the w orld is the donor ; by the flesh l y minded one ( hi s)
’ 1 -

honour i s lost
2
.

W i thout the true Guru n o one know s the ro ad th e blind one ( h as) no pl ace w h at ever , .

In w hose he art H ari the giver of com fort is not d w el l ing he w ill r egret it at the end w hen he is gone
, , , , .

In the father s family the life o f the w orld is the donor ; by the instruction o f th e Guru he is
’

c aused to d w ell in t h e he art .

D aily d ay an d night ( such a one ) perf orms devotion the in fatu ation o f his egotism ( in dividuality )
, , ,

is stopped .

H e becomes such a s th e person i s w ith w hom he is in love th e true on es ar e absorbed in the True o n e
, .

When he himself ( = H ari ) besto w s a favourable look he ( = the disciple ) conceives love ( to ,

him ) h aving reflected on t h e w ords of the Guru

, .

By the serv ice o f the true Gur u tr anquillity spr i ngs up h aving extinguished the th irst o f egotism , .

H ari the giver o f fa vours al w ays d w ells in the he ar t ( o f him by w hom the True one is put an d
, ,
) ,

k ept in his bre ast .

M y L ord i s al w ays pure by a pure he art he is obt aine d , .

In w hose hear t t h e tre asure o f the n am e o f H ari d w ell s al l the p ain o f h i s egotism ( individu ality ) ,

ce ases .

By the true Guru th e w ord ( =t h e n ame of H ari ) i s proclaimed I am alw ays a s a crifice fo r him , .

O n e m ay say ( so ) in h i s o w n he art an d m ind but w ithout the Guru sel ” does not
( ) f go ,
“
.

H ari is propi tious to ( h i s) devotees the giver o f com fort i f he bestow mercy he d ells in the he rt
, w a , , .

0 Nan ak ! the L ord himsel f gives be auty an d reflection h e gives gre atness to his disciple
, .

S i r ? R ag ; ma l ml d III .

II . X IX .

Wh o practising w orks of egotism on them the punishment o f Yam a falls

ar e
, .

Those ar e s aved w h o serve the t rue Guru being occupied in their thoughts w ith H ari , .

P ause .

Omy he art m editate on the n ame di recting thy f ace to w ards th e Guru !
, ,

To them it i s origin ally an d before by t h e cre ator decreed w h o by me ans , of the instruction of
the
Guru ar e absorbed in t h e n am e .

1
i . a. W h il st livin g i n o ne
’
s fa t he r ’ s ho us e i n t h is w orl d .

2
T h e h o n our of th e h um a n bir t h .
92 S I RI RKG, M AH . A S T P A D IV . .
(X X I )

The fa ces of the disciples ar e be auti ful by their love an d aff ec t ion to the Guru .

By true devotion they ar e attached to the True o n e at the gate o f the True on e they ar e ( found ) true
,
.

They h a ve become acceptable ( themselves ) an d s ave al l their family ( al so ) .

A ll do their w orks ( in ) his sight outside his sight no o n e ( is doing a w ork )

,
.

A s the True o n e is looking upon on e such he is

,
.

n k rom the me come re tnesses ‘

by destiny they ar e a cquired !
O Na a f n a
, ( )g a ,

S i r i Rag ; maka l d III .

IV . X X I .

The disciples medit ate on the n ame the fleshl y minded get no understanding
,
- .

The faces o f the di sciples ar e al w ays bri ght H ari comes an d d w ells in ( their) he art
,
.

Quite e asily comfor t is obtained ( by them ) e asily they rem ain absorbed ( in Har i )
,
.

P a use .

O brother become the sl ave o f the slaves !

,

The service o f the Guru is attachment t o the Guru so m e r are on e obt ains it ,
.

There i s al w ays the h appy st at e of w ifehood of th at f avoured w om an w h o w alks in the love of ,

t h e true Guru .

The i m mov able beloved i s alw ays obtained ( by h c r ) he does not die n o r go ,
.

Bein g united by the w ord ( of the Guru ) sh e is n o t sep ar ate d she is absorbed in the bosom o f the beloved,
.

The pure an d exceedingly b r ight H ari cannot be obtain ed w ithout the Guru .

O n e re ads the V edas ( but ) does not unders t and ( them ) by ( fa qi r dresses an d error he is led a stray
,
.

By the instructi on of the Guru H ari is al w ays obtained the tongue i s absorbed in the j uice of Hari ,
.

By the inn ate n ature of the instruction of the Guru the in fatu a tion of the M ay a is brought to
an end .

W ithout the W ord ( of the Guru ) the w orld goes about in p ain the flesh l y minded she ( the Maya) ,
-

h as e aten up .

H e w h o by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) meditates o n the n ame is absorbed in the T r ue on e by me ans of ,

the w ord .

The a scetics ( S id dh s) w ander about being led a stray by the M aya by th e n atur al property ( of the ,

M ay a i n them ) deep meditation ( so a s to identif y thems elves w ith the S upreme ) is not m ade by them )
( .

In t h e three w orlds sh e ( = the M ay a) is containe d excessively she is cli nging ( to them )

, .

W itho ut the Guru fin al emancip ation is not obt ained nor does the du ality of the May a ce ase, .

W h at is c all ed M aya ? W h at w orks d oes the M aya pr actise ?

By p ain an d h appiness this soul is bound it practises the w orks of egotism ( individu al ity )
, .

W ithout the w ord ( o f the Guru ) the err or does not ce ase egotism ( i ndividu al ity ) d oes n ot dep art ,

f rom w ithin .

W ithout love devotion is not possible w ithout the w ord ( of the Guru it is not acceptable
,
)
( w ith H ari ) .

If by the w ord egotism ( i n di vidu al ity ) be an n ih il ated t h e error of the M ay a w ill ce ase
, .

The boon o f the n ame is obtained by the d isciple w ith natural e ase .

W ithout the Guru the quali ti es ( of B ar i ) ar e not kno w n w ithout the qu alities o f B ar i being
( ,

kno w n ) devotion c annot be m ade .

In ( w hose ) he art H ari t h e propitious to the devotees h as t aken his abode he h as n aturall y f ound
, , ,

th at L ord .

0 Nan ak ! H ar i is pr aised by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Guru by h i m w h o obt ains him by desti y
)( ) ( ) n , .

1
O r :
o
m th e na m e a re .
 smi RX G, MAH III . .
, AS TP AD v . .
(X X II ) 93

8 2% Ray ; maha l d III .

V . X X II .

( l ) The infatu ation

. of th e Mayéfi
by my L ord he himself le ads astray in err or
s m ade , .

The fleshl y mi nded on e practises ( reli gious) w orks ( but ) does not understand ( the truth ) uselessly
-
, ,

he Wastes his hum an birth .

The w ord of the Guru is th e light in this w orld by desti ny it comes an d d wells i n the heart , .

P ause .

my he art repe at silently the n ame an d comfort w ill be obt ained

O , , .

I f the true Guru be pr ai sed n aturally th at L ord w ill be found ,

.

( Hi s) error is gone ( his ) fe ar h as fled w h o applies his thoughts to th e feet of B ar i

, , .

I f the w ord ( o f the Guru ) be performed by the disciple Hari comes an d dw ells in ( his ) he art , .

T o the true house an d p alace ( of Hari ) he is ad m itted de a th c annot eat him , .

Nam e ( w as) a c alico printer an d K abi r ‘ a w e aver ( but) from the perfect Guru they obtained
-
,

s alvation .

The sons o f Brahm a kno w the w ord they p art ed ( there fore ) with egotism ( individu al ity ) an d family
, .
2

Gods an d Nara s sing their prai se n o one eflac es it 0 brother !

‘

, ,

The son o f the Daity a a does not at al l re ad ( w ith his precepto r) the duti es religious Observances ,

an d abstinences ( prescribed by the S h astras ) ( an d yet ) he kn o w s n o du al ity .

H avi ng met w ith the true Guru he bec ame pure d aily he praises the n ame , .

The O n e he recites the One n ame he meditates upon he know s no other

, , .

The si X ( philosophic al ) systems t h e Jogi s an d S any asi s ‘are l ed astray in error w ith out th e Guru
, .

If they serve the true Guru then they obtain the station ( degree ) of s alv ation H ari d w ell s in ( their )
, ,

he art .

I f ( their ) tho ught is fixed on the true w ord ( o f the Guru ) coming an d going is stopped , .

The P an dit re ading an d re adi ng expl ains an argumentation w ithout the Guru h e is led astr ay ,

in error .

N am e or N am d é v , a conside red t h e fi rst Ma r athi w ri ter ( M ol esw orth Ma rathi

famous d evotee, wh o i s ,

D icti on a ry Intro d p X X V ) is s a id t o h a ve been

,
. .
, contempora ry o f K abi r ( about 1 480 a K a hi r the ,

w e aver a Mus al m an b y bi rth ( as b orne o ut b y t h e G ran th an d th e testimony o f Ra v i d as) an d disci pl e o f

,

Ram ana nd lived p a rtly at Maga r a n d pa rtl y a t B en a r e s und er t h e reign o f S ika n da r S hah L odi ( 1 4 88
,

P ortions o f t h e w r i tin gs o f both a re incorpora ted i n t h e Gr a nth espe ci ally of K ab i r w h o comes in fo r a co t) , ,

.

sid er a bl e sh a re in ev e ry B i g an d w h o i s t o be consid ere d as t h e author o f the w hole r e form a to ry mo v eme n t

,

going o n in In dia d uring the Mid dle A ges Nan ak an d the follo wing S ikh Gur fi s h ave i n d orsed the tenets o f
.

K a b i r a n d m a d e th em t h eir own .

T h e son s of B r a h m d the mind born sons o f B r ah m a w h o are called S an atkum ar a S an an d a S an ak a

2 -
, , ,

an d S ah at a n a ( w it h sometimes a fifth Ribh u a d de d ) They a r e s aid t o h ave declined t o crea tepro ge n y an d t o

, , .

h ave e v er rem aine d boys ( K um ar a) pure an d innocent T h e sab d me ans here t h e i n itiatory m an t r ( 56 h am) “ ”
, .
,

implyi ng i denti ty w ith t h e S upreme ; they refused t herefore t o enter du ality by p rocreation .

'
3
33 the so n o f t he Daitya ( H iran y ak asip u ) P r a h l ad w hose story i s t old i n t h e Vish nu P u ri na , .

Hi s preceptor did n o t tea ch him the n ame o f Vishnu but Vi shn u hims el f ( wh o i s h e re to be un d ers to od by th e
,

z 1f3
‘
t h e in structo r o f the whol e w orl d H is fa ther Is s a id to have m . ad e d iffe rent a tt empts on t h e li fe o f
'
h i s son but t o h ave s ign all y fa ile d ; at l a st Hi ra n y ak a sip uw a s torn i n pieces by Vishnu In th e A vat ar of the
,

Na l sin h a ( m a n lion ) i s suing from a pillar o f t h e b al l

- T h is story i s fl equen tl y men tioned In t h e G ran th
. .

fifi gmua (W
-
W
‘
W ) o n e w h o h a s c a st o ff a l l w orl dly d esir es an d poss essi o n s a relig ious m en dic ant
, ,

i f erent fr m the fourth order o f B ra h m ans ) T h e S anyasi s ar e gener all y follow ers o f S hiva the
( n o w d f o .
,

B air agi s o f Vishnu .

 94 I
S RI RAG, MA H . III , A S TP A D V I . .
(X X III )

The round o f the eighty four l akhs ( o f forms o f e x istence ) is allotted ( to him ) w ithout the w ord
-
,

( instruction o f the Gu ru
) he does not obt ain s alv ation .

W hen he reflec ts on the n ame then he obt ain s s alv ation w hen the true Guru unites ( him ) to union
, ,

( w ith Har i ) .

In the assembly of the holy ones the name of B ari i s produce d w here the true Guru i s n a tural ly ,

m et w ith .

S oul an d body I o ff er up my o wn sel f I remove I w alk in fa ith in the true Guru

, ,
.

I am al ways a s acrifice fo r my o w n Gu r u w h o fixes my mind on H ari ,

.

H e is a Brah m an w h o k no w s Brahm w h o i s in love w ith H ari ,

.

The L ord w h o d w ells ne ar in the he a r t o f al l is kno w n by some r are disciple

, , .

O Nan ak ! th e n ame ( by me ans of w hich ) gre atness i s obtain ed is kno wn from the w ord o f the Guru
, , .

S ir ? Rag ; maiz a l d I II .

VI . X X III .

( l ) The w hole w orld seeks composure ( but ) w ith out the Guru it c annot be obtained
l
. .
,

The P an dits an d astrologers re adi ng an d re ading ( tre ati ses ) h ave become tir ed by ( faqi r d resses
, , ,

an d error they ar e led astray .

By meetin g w ith the Guru composure i s obtained i f he ( i e H ari ) bestow his o w n mercy an d good , . .

ple asure .

P ause .

brother w ithout the Guru composure does n ot accrue

O , .

F ro m the w ord ( o f th e Guru) alone composure sprin gs up th at true Hari is obt ained ( f rom it ) , .

W h at i s sung in composure is accept able W ithout composure the recit al ( o f the P ur an s etc ) is , , .

useless .

E a s i ly devotion is produced by composur e o ut o f n atur al love an d ab andonment o f the w orld , .

F rom composure com f ort an d tr anqui l lity ar e obtained w ithout composure l if e is usel e ss , .

By composure ( the disciple ) al w ays alw ays pr aises ( H ai i ) e asily giving himse lf to deep , ,

medit ation .

By composure he utters th e qu alities ( o f B ar i ) he performs devotion directing h is thoughts ( on ,

Hari ) .

By the w ord ( o f the Guru ) H ari d w ells in h is he art h i s tongue e ats the j uice of B ar i , .

By composure death is dri ven aw ay i f ( one ) fal l on the asylum o f the True one , .

By com posure the n ame o f B ari d w ells in ( his ) he art he does true w ork , .

Those ar e very f ortun ate w h o h av e obtained it they rem ain e asily a bsorbed ( in Hari ) , .

In the M ay a co m posure is n ot produce d the M ay a is in du ality , .

The flesh l y m inded ar e doing ( the prescri bed ) w orks ( but ) they burn continu ally in egotism
-
, .
‘

Bir th an d de ath do not ce ase again an d again t h ey come an d go , .

In the three qualities composure is n ot obtaine d the t hree qu alities le ad astray in error , .

It m ay be re ad it m ay h e pondered w h at sh all be s aid ( by h im ) w hen he goes astray from t h e

, , ,

beginning
In the fourth stage is composure it falls into t h e l ap o f the discipl e ,
2
.

pl ay w ith t h e mean in g o f m
T h e w h o le A st p ad i is a
m , It sign ifi e s h ere ( as a substan ti v e
.

acco r d in g t o t h e w hole c o n text : c o mp osur e ease of m i n d “

I II , .
”
S in dh i i t i s still use d i n th i s s en se
m i s also u sed as a dj ective (m )
but n o lo n ger in mo d e rn Hin d i .
,
“
in n a te n a tur a l a n d a s a dve r b
”
, , ,

n at ur a l l y , easi l y .

I n t h e fo ur th st a g e t h e i n di i dual
v s
p i r i t i d e n t i fi es i t self co m p le tely w ith the S u p reme S p i ri t .
 96 I
S RI Ri o , MA H . III , AST P AD . V III .
( X X V ) ; M AH . V .
,
A S TP A D I . .
(X X VI )

S ir ? Rag ; mah al d III .

V III . X X V .

By serving the true Guru soul an d bo dy h ave become pure an d holy .

H e al w ays gets j oy an d comfort in h i s he art w h o h as j oined the deep an d pro found ( H ari )
,
.

H e w h o sits in the true assembly h i s min d i s composed by the true n ame

,
.

P a use .

0 my heart fearlessly serve the true Guru !

,

By serv ing the true Guru H ari d w ells in t h e he art n ot a bit o f filth clings t o it
, ,
.

F rom the true w ord ho n our spri n gs up true i s the n ame of the True o n e ,
.

I sh all become a s acrifice for those w h o h aving exti nguished their egotism ( i n divi d u ality ) h ave kno w n it
, , .

The fleshl y minded do n ot kno w the True o n e they h ave no w here a pl ace or spot
-
,
.

The True o n e ( I ) eat the True on e ( I ) put on in the True on e is my abode

, ,
.

( I ) praise al w ays the True on e in the True on e i s ( my ) d w elling

,
.

A l l i s recogni z ed ( by me ) as the S upreme S pirit by me ans of the instruction of the Guru ( my ) abode ,

i s in ( my ) o w n h o use .

( Wh o ) se es the True on e w h o spe aks the True o n e ( h i s) body an d soul become true
, , .

True is ( h i s) evidence true his in struction the story of the True on e i s true
, ,
.

By w hom the True on e i s forgotten th ey go in p ain an d w eep , .

By w hom the true Guru is n ot served fo r w h at h a ve they come i nto the w orld ? ,

Being bound t h ey ar e be aten at the g ate of Yam a he does n ot he ar ( = lis t e n t o ) their scre ams an d c ri es , .

U selessly their hum an b i rth is l est they die an d ar e born repe ate dly
, .

H avi ng seen this w orld b urn ing h ave fled t o the asylum o f the true Gu r u .

By the tr ue Guru the True o n e i s m ade firm ( in me ) ( I ) al w ays rem ain in true continence , .

The true Guru i s the true bo at by ( h i s) w ord ( I ) c ross t h e w ater of existence

, .

In the eighty four lakhs ( of f orms o f existence ) they continu all y w a nder about ( but ) W ithout
-

t h e true Guru fin al em ancip atio n i s n ot found .

The Ban di t s an d silent ascetics re ading an d re ading h ave become tired by du ali t y they h ave lost ,

their honour .

By the t r ue Guru the w ord ( = the n ame ) is procl aimed w ithout the True on e there is n o other , .

Those w h o are applied by the T r ue o n e cli ng t o the True on e an d d o al w ays tr ue ( good ) w ork
, , .

They h ave obtained a d w elling in their o w n house an d rem ain in th e true p al ace "
.

O Nan ak ! devotees are al w ays h appy they are al w ays in love w ith the true n ame
, .

S ir ? R ag ; m alm l d V .

I . X X VI .

W hom ve ry gre at diffi culty be falls t o him none gi ves an entrance

a , .

I f his enemies ar e lying in w ait fo r him even his rela tives keep aloof f rom
, h im .

E very asylum i s broken dow n every protector fails

, .

( But ) if he remember the S upreme Brahm n o h o t W ind will touch him , .

P ause .

The L ord i s the strength o f the w e ak .

H e neith er comes n or goes h e is al ways firm ; from the

, w ord of the Guru the True one is kno w n .

1
No s ubj e ct
h a t ever i s p m ted o ut
w n , it only be g ue ssed a t
c an .

2
T h e sen s e i s : t h ey d o n o t se ek t h e S upr em e out sid e b ut t h ey fi n d , h im i n t h eir own h e a rt, w hich i s h i s
p al ac e w here h e d w ells
, .
 S R I I RA G, MA H V . .
, A S TP A D I . .
(X X VI ) 97

one be w e ak n aked in the pain o f hunger

If , , .

I f no money fall into his l ap if no one encour age h i m , .

If no one do h i s ai m an d obj ect 1 i f.th er e be no business w h atever ( for him )

, .

I f he remember the S upreme Brahm his s atiety w ill be immov able , .

Wh o h as much anxiety w hose body much sickness pervades

, .

Wh o is sur rounded by a household an d family w h o h as sometimes j oy an d sometimes grie f , .

Wh o w anders about in the four corners o f the e arth wh o sits not dow n nor sleeps for t wenty ,

min utes .

If he remember the S upreme Br ahm his body an d soul w ill be refreshed , .

He m ay be subdued by lust w rath an d spi ri tu al blindness ; he m ay be a miser given to greedi

, ,

z
n ess .

H e m ay h ave committed th e four sins an d crimes he m ay h ave perpetrated an atrocious murder ,

3
.

H e m ay never h ave c aught w ith his ear an y book song poetry , , .

If he rememb er the S upreme Brahm he is s aved by the remembrance of a moment ,

.

H e m ay go through the S h astr as S mriti the f our V éda s f rom m emory , , .

The gre at ascetic m ay practise austerities the J ogi m ay go to a T i r th a , .

H e m a
y ( pr a ctise t
) w o f old more th an the six duties 1
performing w orship he m ay b athe ,
‘
.

If he h as no love to the S upreme Br ahm he w ill surely go to hel l , .

( If he h ave ) dominion proper ty chieftai nships an abundance of enj oym ent of ( sensual )
, , ,

p le asures .

( If he h ave ) delightful an d be autif ul gardens if his order go unflinching ,

.

( I f he have ) merr iments an d sho w s of m any kinds if he have adhered continu al ly to his ple asure ,
.

I f he h as not remembered the S uprem e Brahm he h as gone into the w omb of a sn ake ,
.

He m ay be very rich an d of virtuous conduct his comeliness an d m anners m ay be spotless ,

.

H e m ay be in love w ith mother f ath er son brothers friend , , , ,

.

H e m ay be addressed by the w hole quiver be aring army in hom age S ir S ir ! -

,

If he h as not remembered the S upreme Br ahm he is sei z ed an d thro w n into the lo w est bell ‘
,
.

In h i s body there m ay be no sickness n or an y defect no pain nor grief w h atever ,

.

De ath m ay not come into his mind d ay an d night he m ay enj oy himself ,

.

H e m ay h ave m ade al l his o w n he m ay not h ave got anxiety in his he art

,
.

W 13 3 an d
{l ug
n synonymous
ar e ; the l a tter sta n d s fo r G 1
? { l u n g ( in P rakrit d issolve d

al re a dy i n to E m ail ) T h e w or d is al so use d in th e s ame se n s e in S in dhi

@
.
.

2
fi
’
stands here (fo r the s ake o f th e rh yme) fo I fi mna l attache d to give n to ' ‘

, ,

—
fi rq ) constructe d with the locative
,
a s in S anskrit .

T h e four sins a re n o w s ai d to be t h e killin g o f a girl th e k illi n g o f a c o w th e k illin g o f a B r ah m a n

8
, , ,

an d coh abitation w i t h one s Guru s w i fe F orm erly five h ei n ous si n s w ere enumer at e d : ( l ) k ill i n g a B rah
’ ’
.

m an ( 2) stealing gold ( 3 ) d rin ki n g liquors ( 4) i n tercourse w ith th e w i fe o f one s Guru ( 5) a ssocia

’
, ,
,

t ing w ith an y on e guilty o f such crimes .

T h e six d uties as far as t hey ar e bin d ing on the K ha tri are m en tioned alre ady p 1 7 no te T h e six
4 .
, , , , .

d ut ies o f t h e B rahm an are : ( l ) ma ma ( rea din g o f t h e s a cre d texts) ( 2) WW IQW ( te a ch i n g the s a me) , ,

( ) “ a (
3 s a crificin g) ( ) 4, ( procuri n
g or vic ariously con d u cti n
g s a crifice ) ( 5) ( alms iving )
g , ,

fi a ccep t in g don a tions )

( )
6 El n ]: ( .

“
3 33 1 W W
3 m ust be t hus d ivi d ed : 3 2 A »
U j S
‘ ’ we a ring a quiver th e other
‘ Is : ,

to ors p o hom ag e an d Is the p a rticipl e p ast conjunctive : h aving d one hom a ge

W 1 W w h i t d
“

, o ,
.

6
3 1 13 8
1 i s or i gi n ally o n e o f the seven d iv i sions o f P atal a ( see Vishnu P uran a p but in th e , .

mo der n Hindi it d eno t es the lowest o f the seven d ivisions an d i s identic al w ith m ,
.
98 S I RI RAG, MA H V . .
,
A S TP A D . II .
(X X I
V I .
)

the S upreme Brahm he not remembered he falls of

If h as , ( h as fallen ) into the po wer the servant
of Y am a .

On w hom the S upreme Brahm besto w s mercy he obtains the society o f the holy ones ,
.

A s as he ( Brah m ) is m agnified so so love w ith H ari ( i s incre ased )

, , ,
.

H e himself is the L ord o f both bound ries there is no other pl ace

‘
a ,
.

From the true Guru if he be pleased the true n ame is obtained 0 Nanak
, , ,

I do not kno w w h at things ple ase ( him ) .

0 he art seek the w ay

,

He w h o i s given t o m editation m akes meditation ; ,

H e w h o h as divine know ledge acquires d ivi n e kno w le dg e ,

.

By w hom is the L ord kno w n ?

The Bh agauti remains in hi s practice
2
.

The J6gi says : ( I am ) ema ncip ated .

T h e asceti c is absorbe d in his austerity .

The silent devotee keeps silence the S anyasi i s given to ch astity ,

The stoic is absorbed i n i n difference ( t o th e w orld ) .

The devotee bo w s do w n in ( di fferent ) m anners .

The Ban dit re a ds w ith a loud voice the V é da .

The householder is f ulfilling h is duties in h i s household .

The I h sabdi an d A v adb fi t is ( given ) to mimicry

- .

The K ap ari is given to sho w ( sport ) .

S ome b athe at a T i rt h a .
8

( S ome) w h o go w ithout f ood an d are fasting are touch able ( i e mingling , . . w ith peopl e ) .

S ome hide themselves an d do not give an intervie w .

S om e ar e w ise in their o w n min d .

e s ys : he is w anting
‘
N o o n a .

A l l say : he i s obt ained ( by me ) .

W hom he ( Har i ) unites ( w ith himsel f ) h e is a devotee , .

Giving up al l contr i v ances an d sh i fts

I w ill fal l on the asylum ( of th e Guru ) .

Nan ak flees to the foot o f the Guru .

{ UT m H1 1 31 , th e L ord of bo t h end s or bou n d aries , i . a. o f t his an d t ha t worl d or , of th e w h ole

u n iverse .

faqi r, w h o imitates ss da nce, K ri shn a ;

2
T h e B bag auti i s a t h e d re , e tc .
, of
m , give n to th e pra c tic e ,

perfor m an ce ( o f t h e ( TE “

,
.

3
T h e l k s a bd i i s t h e sa me a s t h e A l ek b n am i w h o o n l u ses t h e w or d A l a k h B ra hm a
(
-
) T h e A v a db fi t
-
y , .

i s a n ak ed fa qi r ; bo th ar e sa id t o be g iven t o mi m ic r y T h e K ap a ri i s a f qi r w h o m a k e s pilgr im a e t o a
g
.

Hi gl aj ; t h ey ca rry a r ed fla g s el l ros aries e t c a n d also give p ublic sho w s

fi fifi fi )
n ,
31 1313 1
, .
,
v
S ansk W . w ak eful a t t en t i e t o g iven t o
, , v , .

4
WIT H h e ( i e Go d) is w antin g or n o t fou n d
: . .
, .
 l oo S IRI RE G, MA H I . .
, J oe i A NDARE , 1 2— 23 .

The p ain o f ( their ) foolishn ess ! is cut o ff destiny h as come an d settle d on their forehe ad S ir ! , ,

Thy w ords ar e nectar .

In the he art of ( thy) devotees they are deeply fixed .

By keeping up w orship in the he art comf ort ( is obtained ) ; 2 ( on w hom ) thou bestowest a favourable
,

look ( him ) thou savest O Lord !

, ,

The true Gur u being met wi th is kno w n

, ,
.

By the meeti ng with whom the n ame i s pr aised .

Without the true Guru it is not obtained ; the w hole ( w orld ) doing ( religious ) w orks h as become , ,

tired O L ord !
,
3

I h ave devoted myself to the true Guru .

W h o h as put me w h o w as l ed astray by error into the ( right) way

, ,
.

If he bestow s his ow n favourable look he h imsel f unites ( with himself ), S ir ! ,

Thou art contained in al l .

By th at cre ator his o wn sel f is hidden .

0 Nan ak he h as become m anifest to tha t d isciple to w hom the creator h as comm u

,
n ic ate d his ,

l ight S i r !
,

By the L ord himself he is cherished .

Wh o h as given an d m ade soul an d body .

H e preserves the honour otthi s o wn se r vant putting both h ands on his forehe ad S ir ! , ,

Al l abstinen c es an d cunni ngs h ave com e t o an end .

My L ord kno w s everything .

Hi s glory is l aid out m an ifest al l the w orld cries : victo ry ! S i r !

,

My vir tues ( an d) vices he h as not taken into account .

The L ord h as remembered his prac t ice ‘ .

T akin g me t o his neck he h as preserved ( me ) n o hot w ind touches ( me ) S ir ! , ,

In my he art an d body the Lord is meditated upon .

The fr uit desir ed by my he art I h ave obtained .

Thou ar t L o rd above a king an d emperor Nan ak li ves reciting silently ( thy) n ame 0 Lord , ,

Thou thyself hast cre ated thysel f .

Thou ha st m ad e another sport the w orld ) an d sho w n it .

In al l is th e perfectly True one ; w hom h e pleases him he lets know ( th e tr uth ) S ir ! , ,

( Wh ere) he is obtained by th e favour o f the Guru .

There the infatu ation of the May a is brought to an end .

He hi mself out o f hi s o wn mercy absorbs ( w ith himself ) S ir !

, , ,

( Thou art ) the Gopi s the river the cow herd, , .

Thou thysel f h ast removed the kine .

By ( thy ) order the vessels are m ade thou thysel f h aving broken ( them ) m akest ( the m agai n )
,
,
5

0 Lord !
Wh o h a ve fixed their mind on the true Guru .

m
1
T he fg , or foolishness , consists in conside i g onesel f difleren t from t h e S uprem e
r n
'

fi at m m
.

a
T h e w ord s 1311 ’

must be thus construc ted : 3 3 1 m M W (U 3 3 %

0

3
Ha s b e come ti red knocked up Th e, .
se n se i s : al l t heir ( religious) w orks h ave bee n o f n o use t h e name ,

w a s n o t ob t ai ned by th ei r w orks .

The s en se i s : th e L ord h as remem bered that it i s hi s pra ctice ever to forgive .

5
”HI-I 3 % W W may also be tran slated : thou th yself having p rep ared (or ador ned them) ,
,
brea kes t ( them) .
 sm i BKG, MA H . V .
, P A I P AE 1 — 9 .
1 01

Th ey h ave brought du ali ty to an end .

A pure light is in those men they are gone h aving adorned their hum an birth S i r !
, , ,

( Thou ar t ) al ways al ways g ,i oin g) good w orks .

I ( am s aying ) ( thy ) pr aises night an d d ay .

( Thou ar t ) giving gi fts w ithout bei ng asked ; Nan ak s ays : remember the True one S i r ’
,

S ifi Rag ; makal d V

P ause .

H aving fal len his feet I Will conciliate him S i r !

at ,

By th e true Guru the S upreme S pirit ( I am ) uni ted li ke him there is none other S ir !
, , , ,

The Lord ( i s) my de ar friend

1
.

( H e is) s w eeter ( to me ) than mother an d father .

( S weeter than ) sister broth er an d al l friends ; like thee there is none other 0 L ord
, ,

By thy order S i v an h as come 2

.

I h ave applied the plough of truth .

I c ommenced to so w the n ame in hope ; 0 Hari having m ade it gro w besto w he aps of corn , , ,

0 Lord !
I h aving met w ith the Guru kno w the One
, , .

I do not kno w an y other w ord in my mind .

By Hari I w as put into one w ork as it ple ases ( thee ) so accomplish it 0 Lord ! , ,
'

O brethren enj oy yourselves an d eat !

,

I h ave been invested by the Guru i n the court w i th th e m antle .

I h ave become the m aster o f the vill age ; th e five p artners w ere brought bound S irs ! 3 ,

I h ave come to thy protection .

The five are the l abourers of my fields .

N0 one lif ts up his shoulder an d is remiss O Nan ak ! by h ard labour the village is cultivated S ir !
, ,

I s acrifice an d devote myself ( to thee ) .

Continu ally I am meditating on thee .

The desolate he ap o f ruins is bu ilt u p I am a s acri fi ce to thee O Lord !

, ,

I am alw ays me ditating on the beloved Hari .

I obtain the fruit I desire in my he art

,
.

A ll my w orks ar e a dj uste d by him the hunger of my heart is t aken aw ay by him S i r !

, ,

A ll ( w orldly ) occup ation is given up by me .

I serve the true Lord .

The name of E ar l th e recep t acle of the nine tre asures I have taken an d bound in my l ap S ir !
, , ,

I have obtained the com fort of com forts .

The Gur uh as fixed the w ord in my he art .

1
am epithe t o f K rish na t h e L ord of cow s A rjun w as a g rea t w orship per o f
an , .

K ri sh na : he w a s h i s ( the Go d whom he h ad speci ally chose n fo r h is w orship) ; h is tomb at L ahore i s

still covere d w ith p ain t in gs exh ibiting the feats o f K rish na .

2
S i v an J li ly A ug us t ( the rainy mont h in the P anj ab)
- .

T h e m as t er o f the vill age the m aster o f the he a rt T h e five p artners are explained by : 311 31
3 .
, ,
k

3 3 in mean s
, .
1 02 S I RI RA G, MA H V . .
, P M M E , 1 0— 21 .

By the true Guru, th e S upreme S pir it, it w as sh o w n ( to me ) h aving put his h and
,
on my fore
h e ad , S ir !
I hav e buil t a true Dharms ala .

I obtain the instr uction of the Gur u h aving se arched ( for it) ,
.

I w ash the feet ( of the Guru) I s wi ng the P ankha bo w ing , ,

an d bo wi ng to him I cling to h is
feet, S i r !
he ard ( his ) w ords ( I ) came to the Guru
Having .

The n ame alms giving b athing w as enj oined ( by the Guru )

,
-
,
.

The w hole w orld w as saved 0 Nanak h av ing ascended the true bo at S ir !

, , ,

The w hole cre ation serves ( him) day an d night S ir ! ,

Give ear an d he ar my supplicat ion S ir ! ,

1

I h ave seen an d a ccur ately examined all : h e himsel f being ple ased h as rele ased ( s aved ) it ( th e , ,

cre ation ) S ir !
,

N ow the or der o f the kind ( Ha ri ) h as been given .

No one is troubling the other .

A ll ( the w orld) h as settled in happiness th is rul e of mildness h as set in S i r , ,

S o ft ly an d lightly nectar is r ai n ing .

I speak w h at I am c aused to spe ak by the Lord

, .

I h ave put much trust in thee thou thysel f wi lt accept me O Lord ! , ,

The hunger o f thy devotees is al ways thy ow n .

0 Har i ( thou art ) fulfill ing my desir es !

,

Give me a sight of thee 0 giver of comfort take an d put me to thy neck 0 Lord !
, , ,

L ike thee none other is f ound .

Thou art in the e arth the he avens an d in the nether regions

, .

Thou art contained in every place ; Nan ak ( s ays ) : thou art the true support o f ( thy ) devotees ,

O Lord !
I am the brave comb atant of the Lord .

H aving met w ith the Guru t h e b ack p art of my turb an stan ds high up -
.

A l l the ( w orld ) h as been assembled f or the w restling ; God hi msel f being sea ted looks on S i r ! , , ,

The mouths o f the dru m s an d kettledrums sound .

The w restlers h ave descended an d take their rounds .

Five young men w ere kil led ( by m e) ; the Guru rej oicin g t apped me S ir ! , , ,

Al l h ave come together .

They w ill go home having ch anged the ro ad 2

, .

The disciples are gone h aving got th e advantage the fi esh l y -minded are gone h aving lost their
, , ,

c apital S ir !
,

Thou ar t w ithout colours an d signs .

Thou 0 Hari ar t seen present an d m anifest

, , .

Havi ng he ard h aving he ard they are meditating on th ee ; t h devotees ar e a ttached to thee 0 oce an
, ,
y ,
o f qu ali ties !

I am constantly the servant o f the Deity .

The Gur u h as cut my rope .

I sh all not again d ance in w restling Nan ak h as sought an d found the fit time S i r !
.

l i . s. my w ord .

2
al l a a fg nn 3 1 2 E Z IFE
‘
; fina l 6 is an a llit era tio n , fo r th e s a ke of th e rhy me .
 1 04 smi RI G, M A H . r , P AHA RE 1 1
. .

S ir ? Rd g mahe l ri I .

II .

In th e fi rst watch o f th e nigh t 0 friend merch ant the child is of a thoughtless mind, ,
.

It d rinks mil k it is caused to play 0 f riend merch ant mother an d fa ther are in love wi th
, , ,

thei r son .

Mother an d father h ave gre at love to their son all ar e under the in fatu ation of the Maya ,
.

By copulation ! ( of the p arents ) he c ame ( into the w orld ) he h as e arned his deeds he does the w ork , , ,

which he h as to do .

Without the n ame of Ram final em ancip ation is not obtained he is dro wned in the love of du ality , .

N an al: s ays : m an w il l be rele ased ( = s aved) in the first w atch by keeping H ari in his mi nd .

I n th e second watch of the night 0 fi i en d merch ant ( his ) mind is filled wi th full youth '
2
.
, ,

Day an d nigh t he is given to lust 0 f r iend merch ant the blind one h as not the n ame in his mind
, ,
.

The n ame of Ram is n ot in h i s he art he con si d ers other ( things ) as sw eet pleasures ,
.

W o h ave no d ivine kno ledge no medit ation virtue nor continence ; they ar e f al se an d being
( h ) w , , ,

bor n they w il l die ( again )

,
.

No t by a Ti rth a n o r f asting nor purity a nd abstinence nor good w orks reli gious pr actices an d
, , , ,

W or sh ip
.
3

0 N an ak by love an d devot ion salvation ( is obtained ) by another ( w ork ) du ality is diff used
, ,

( in the
In the third watch o f the night 0 fr iend mer chant the geese h ave come an d alighted on , ,

the pond .
5

Youth decre ases ol d age gets the upper h and 0 friend merch ant lif e diminishes the d ays go
, , , , .

A t t h e end thou w ilt repent O blind on e w hen thou ar t sei z ed an d c arried o ff by Y am a

, ,
.

Thou h ast made al l thy o w n in a moment it h as become the proper ty o f another

,
.

W isdom i s abandoned ( by thee ) cunning is gone h avi ng practised vi ces thou w il t repent
, ,
.

Nan ak says : 0 m an in the third w atc h remember the L ord direc ti ng ( thy ) th oughts ( on him ) !
, ,

In the f ourth w atch of th e night 0 friend merch ant he ( m an ) h as become old ( h i s) bod y , , ,

em aci ated .

Blind in his eyes he does not see 0 frie n d merch ant w ith his e ars he does not he ar a w ord
, ,
.

H e is blind in his eyes his tongue h as no taste his po w er an d strength h ave come to a stand still
, ,
-
.

There ar e no virtues in h im h o w should he obtain comf ort the flesh l y minded one is coming an d going
, ,
-
.

The straw h as ripened being emaciated it bre aks an d is destroyed ; h aving come he goes w h at is
, ,

h i s t r ust ?
Nanak says : 0 m an in the f ourth w atc h become a c q uainted w ith the w ord proceeding f rom the
,

mouth of the Guru !

The end of those bre aths h as come 0 friend merch ant a burning fever is on th e shoulder , , .

N ot a bit of virtue is contained ( in them ) h aving collected vices they w ill take t h em with
( ,

themselves ) .

B ut fi fi l may
‘’
a lso
tra n sl ated by : d esti n y
be fa te “
,
” “
.

2
a i s h ere adjective ( S ansk rep le te f ull o f ) ; h is mind is filled i n toxi cated) w ith full youth
.
, .

a
S uppl y : s al vat io n is obtained T here i s n o ve r b n o r subject in th ese verses an d the transla tion c an
.
,

o n ly be m ad e ac c o rdi n g to co nj ec t ur e as not eve n a n y case r el at io n is poi n ted o ut

,
-
.

T h e w ords W W E T might al so b e t ransl ated : th e oth er ( he w h o is g i ven t o t h e prac t ices)

du ali ty per m eat es .

5
T h e sense o f this allusion i s : the h ai rs o f m en h ave become white t h e geese b eing w h ite pond , .
,

l ak e bo dy .
 I I
S R RA G, MA H . IV .
, P A HA RE 1 .
1 05

H e wh o goes h aving coll ected virtues w ill not be struck in the face , he w ill not be born ( an d)
die ( ag ain ) .

Yam a w ith the net of de ath w ill mt be able to overpo w er him ; by love devotion an d fe ar ( o f Go d ) ,

he is s aved .

W ith honour he goes ( to the threshold o f H ari ) he is e asily absorbed al l p ains he removes , , .

Nan ak s ays : a m an ( w h o h as become ) a disciple w ill be em ancip ated f rom the True one he w ill , ,

receive honour .

makal a IV ‘
'

S zr i R ag ; .

I . III .

In the first w atch o f the n ight 0 friend merch ant he ( m an ) is placed in the belly by Hari , , .

H e meditates on H ari he utters H ari 0 friend merch ant he remembers the n ame of H ari H ari
, , , , .

H e silently mutters t h e n ame of H ari Hari he adores ( him ) muttering in the fire ( of the w omb ) , , ,

H ari h e lives
, .

H e is born into the w orld he is applied to the mouth ( i a kissed ) fa ther an d mother h ave become
,
. .
,

h appy .

Think o f him 0 m an whose property thou ar t reflecting in thy he art on the w ord proceeding from
,
, , ,

the mouth o f the Gur u .

N anak s ays : in the first w atch m an silently mutters H ari ( w h o ) besto w s mercy ( on him ) , .

In the second w atch of the night 0 f riend merch ant ( h i s) mind is bent on du ality , , .

Mother an d f ather pressing h i m t o their cheek nourish h i m 0 friend merchant s aying : mine
, , , , ,

mine ( thou art ) .

Mother an d father al w ays press him to their cheek they th ink in their he art ,

H aving got ( f rom us food ) he w ill ( again ) f eed ( us ) .

Hi m w h o gives he does not know the fool clings to the gift

‘

.
, , ,

S ome one w h o becomes a disciple reflects he reflects in his mind on Hari directing his thoughts
, , , ,

on him .

N an ak s ays : in the second w atch 0 m an this one de ath w ill never devour , ,
.

In th ethird w atch o f the night 0 friend merch ant h i s mi nd is occupied with c are an d trouble
, , .

O f w e alth he thinks w e alth he collects 0 f riend merch ant the n ame of H ari Hari h e does not
, , , ,

remember .

The n ame of H ari H ari Hari he does never remember w h o at the end becomes a comp anion
, , , .

This w e alth an d prosperity is a false ill usion h aving given it up at the end an d h aving gone , ,

he repents .

W hom the Guru in mercy unites ( w ith H ari ) he remembers the n ame of Hari Hari , , .

Nan ak s ays : in the third w atch 0 m an th at one h aving gen e is united w ith H ari, , , , .

In the f ourth w atch o f the night 0 fr iend merch ant H ar i h as brought on the time o f , ,

dep arture .

S erve w ith ( thy ) h and th e perf ect true Guru 0 friend merch ant al l the night is gone an d
'

, ,

p assed .

S erve Ha ri — not a moment m ake a

,
n
y del ay — w hereby thou w ilt for ever become firm not subject
( ,

to transmigration ) .

In union w ith Hari thou w ilt ever enj oy ple asures the p ain o f birth an d de ath thou w ilt remove , .

Th e follo wing Gur us h ad a pp arent ly t h e w ritings of Nan ak be fore them hence these imitat ions , w hich
usual ly add very few ide as .
 HA RE I
'

1 06 S I RI RA G, MA H V . .
,
PA .
av )
.

Donot m ake in thy thought a di fference betw een the Guru ( an d ) the t r ue Gur u the L ord meeting , ,

w ith w hom ( i a the Gur u ) t h e w orshi p o f H ari becomes ple as ant

. .
.

N an ak s ays : 0 m an in the fourth w a t ch the night o f the devotees is fr uitful

,
.

S ir ? R ag ; maha l d V .

I . IV .

‘
In the first w atch of the night 0 friend m erch ant he ( Hari ) puts ( him ) into the belly
, ,
.

In ten months h e is m ade a m an 0 friend merch ant af ter so m e delay h e e arns ( his former ) w orks
, ,
.

The time i s p assed the ( f ormer ) w orks ar e e arned as it is origin ally w ritten so he h as received
, , , .

Mother father bro ther son w i fe — am ongst them he is plac ed by the L ord
, , , ,
.

H e himself ( i a the L ord ) causes him to do b ad an d good w orks in the pow er of this cre ature is
'

. . ,

nothing .

N an ak s ays in the first w atch m an is put into the w omb .

In the second w atch o f the ni ght 0 friend merch ant he gives w ay to the f re aks o f ful l youth , ,
.

B ad an d good he does n ot kno w 0 f ri end merch ant h i s mind is intoxic ated w ith egotism
, ,
.

B ad an d good thou doest not kno w 0 m an th e j ourney f urther on ( t o the other w orld ) i s difli eu
,
lt ! ,

The perfect true Guru w as never served ( by thee ) on ( thy ) he ad the executioners of Yama are ,

st anding .

When Dh arm Rae Yama) w ill seiz e ( thee ) w h at answ er w ilt thou m ake 0 f ool ?
-
, ,

N an ak s ays : in t h e second w atch m an gives w ay t o the fre aks of f ull youth .

In the thi rd w atch of the night 0 f riend merch ant he col lects poison an d blind i gnorance
, , .

He clings t o son an d w ife in in fatu ation 0 friend m erch an t w ithin he is tossed about by emotions , , .

Man is tossed about w ithin by emotions ( desires ) th at L ord does n o t come into his mind , .

W ith the assembly of the holy ones h e h as not associ ated i n m any w ombs he w ill ( therefore ) ,

su ffer pai n .

The cre ator is forgotten ( by him ) n ot a moment h e h as m editated o n the L ord ,

.

N an ak s ays : in the third w atch ( o f t h e night) poison an d blind ignor ance h e col le c ts .

In the fourth w atch of the night 0 friend merch ant th at d ay h as come ne ar , , .

R emember thou 0 f riend merch ant the n ame communic ated by the Guru it w ill be thy comp anion
, , ,

t o the court ( o f B ar i ) I
Rem ember the n ame given by t h e Guru 0 m an at the en d it w ill be t h y comp anion ! , ,

This is an illusion t h e M ay a w ill n o t g o w ith thee she h as m ade a false f riendship ( w ith thee )
, , .

The w hole night is p assed ; serve th e true Guru an d the d arkness w il l become l ight .

Nan ak s ays 0 m an in the f ourt h w atch th at day h as com e ne ar !

,

The decree of Govind h as c om e 0 f riend merch ant they h ave risen an d gone an d their w ork, ,

w ith them .

No t a bit of del ay they ( i a the messengers of Y am a) give 0 f riend m erch ant fi rm h ands ar e l aid
. .

, ,

upon them .

The decree h as come they ar e m arch ed o ff the flesh l y minded ar e al w ays distressed
, ,
-
.

Those w h o h ave served the pe rfect true Guru ar e al w ays h appy at the th reshold ( o f Hari )
, , , .

The body is t h e ground ( soi l ) o f w orks in ( this present) w orld w h at they so w they are e ating , , .

N an ak s ays : the devotees obtain honour at the court ( o f Hari

) the flesh l y m inded ar e al ways ,
-

w anderi n g ab out ( in tr ansmigr ation ) .

2

W 31 m ay be t h e p ar tic ip le pres en t ( from ”I Q—

C W) o r th e past p ar t . Sa nsk .
m a .

sak e o f t h e rhyme
fo r th e 33%
1 08 S I RI Ri c , MA H V . .
,
drum 1 .

In the w orld an d universe the splendour of H ar i is spre a d ; this gif t though coveted is not 1
, ,
2

a pportioned .

The other gifts w hi ch the flesbl y minded h ave an d exhibit ar e fal sehood conceit glas s an d plaiting
,
-
, , , .

The L ord H ari O my father H ari gives me the dow ry gif t

, ,
- .

H ari is lovely lovely 0 my f ather h avi ng met w ith her beloved the w om an is a n incre asing
, ,

H ar i is from
ges from age o f ages the generation o f the Guru is al w ays going on
age of a , ,
3
.

F rom age t o age the gener ation of the true Guru goes o n by w hich the n ame coming f rom the ,

mout h o f the Gu r u is meditated upon , .

H ari the S upreme S pi rit is never ann i hil ated n o r does he p ass aw ay he gives continually an d
, , ,

becomes ( even ) more abund ant .

O Nan ak the s aints the s aints ( an d H ari ) are One ; muttering the n ame of B ari H ari ( the girl )
, , ,

i s shini n g .

Har i is lovely lovely 0 my father ; being united w ith her beloved the w om an is an increasing vine
, , .

8 2% R ay ; mall a l d V .

éH A NT .

6m ! by the favour of the tr ue Guru !

I . II .

de ar he art 0 friend remember the n ame of Govind !

O , ,

O de ar he art 0 fri end Hari goes through w ith thee

, , .

H ari is a comp anion ; n o on e w h o medi tates on ( his ) n ame goes uselessly ‘ , , .

The fruits he desires in his he art he obt ains having di recte d his mi nd on the lotus , of the foot
( of B ari ) .

Inter an d e arth he is full y diff used the Ban v ar i see s in everybody

wa ,
'
5
.

N an ak gives ( this ) instr uction O dear he art burn ( thy ) error in the a ssembly of the holy ones ! ,

O d ear he a rt 0 fr iend w ithout H ari the exp ansions

, w orlds ) ar e a falsehood
, .

O de ar he art 0 f riend an oce a n o f p oison are the w orlds

, , .

M ake th e lotus o f the f oot o f the cre ator the boat an d the p ain o f doubt w ill not enter thee
( ) , .

( W ith w hom ) the perfect Gu r u meets he is very f ortun ate th e eight watches the Lord is kno wn , ,

( to him ) .

In the beginni n g in the be ginn ing of the Yug is the L or d ; 0 w orshipper t o ( his ) devotees his)
,
( ,

n ame is a s upport .

N an ak gives ( this ) instr ucti on : 0 de ar he art w ithout Hari the exp ansions ar e a f lsehood
a , .

O de a r he art 0 fri end l ade the che ap c argo o f B ari I“

, ,

O de ar he art 0 fr iend knock at the i mmov able door of Hari !

, ,
"

1
m a is a co r r upti o n f r om 3 3 1 23 m fg ) , the e
gg of B ra hm a o r u n iver se .

2
2; 3 35 W it i s n o t a pport io n ed ( o r m e t w i th) though c a us ed to b e ap p ortioned
,
,
, i . e. t
hough
som e o n e c a use i t t o b e a ppo r t io n e d t o hims elf try to
g et i t , .

l ai } o r g en er at ion o f t h e Guru a re h is d isc ipl es

3
, , .

i e \. V i th o ut h av i n g a c co mpl ish ed h i pu r pos e

.
s .

W
5
a n epith et o f K rishn a h a vi n g a g a rla n d o f wil d flo
, w ers ( S a n sk
am ,
fl)
14 m
.
.

{5 '
t o l ad e a n a sso rt m ent o f goo d s a n d
,
g o a bout tr affick i n g w ith th em .

as" le n g t h en ed fo r t h e s ake o f th e rhy me W

, .
 S R I I RAG K i : (B
R ANT, MAH V 1 1 09
'

. . .
,

He serves the g ate of B ar i the invisible an d impenetrable h as obtained an immov able se at

who , , .

H e is not subj ct t o birth an d de ath he is n ot coming an d going the p ain of his doubt is eflac ed ‘

e , , .

The p aper o f C i tr ag up t is torn in‘p ieces the messengers of Yam a cannot do an ything against him , .

Nan ak gives ( th is ) instruction : 0 de ar he art l ade th e che ap ca rgo of Hari ! ,

O de ar he art 0 f riend d w ell in the c omp any o f the holy ones !

, ,

0 de ar he art 0 f riend muttering the n ame ( th ou w il t be ) conspicuous

, , .

Remembering the L ord ( thou ar t ) liv ing in h appiness al l ( thy ) w ish is f ulfilled ,
.

By f ormer w orks the husb and of Lakshmi ( = Vishnu ) is obtained ; H ari meets w ith the long ti me -

sep ar ated .

Inside an d outside every wh er e he is cont ained faith springs ( there f ore ) up in the mind
, , .

N an ak gives ( t h i s) instruction : 0 de ar he art d w ell in t h e comp an y of the holy ones ! ,

O de ar he art 0 friend by love an d att achme n t t o H ari the mind is absorbed

, , .

O de ar he art 0 fri end the fi sh h aving met w ith the w ater o f H ari l ives
, , , ,
.

H aving drunk H ari they ar e s atiated nect ar is poured out al l comf orts ar e sho w ered do wn on , ,

the he art .

The husb and of L ak sh m i is obtained so n gs of congrat ulati on are sung ( their ) desire is f ulfilled
l , , ,

the true Guru is ple ased .

They ar e absorbed in ( h i s) skirt the nine tre asures ar e obtained the n ame an d al l his property
, ,

the L ord h as given th em .

Nan ak h as given ( this ) instr uction t o the s aints : by love an d attachmen t to Hari the mi nd is
absorbed .

S I RI R AG I1 E (B
R AN T ; M A H AL A v

Om By the favour of the true Gur u!

I . III .

‘
. alch azz d
D .

sh all I see in my he art the sight of my beloved ?

H ow
O Nanak in the asylum of the s ai nts t h e support of life is t o be obtai ned
,
.

éha n t .

Love w ith th e lotus of the foot ( of Hari ) is the custom of the s ai nts he comes into th eir he art S ir , ,

A nother love is perverse impropriety it is not ple a sing t o the serv ants ( of H ari ) S i r , ,

It is not ple asing to ( h i s) servants w ithout ( his ) sight h o w shoul d they h ave p atience on e moment
,

Void of the n ame body an d soul are decayed as a fi sh dies w ithout w ater ,
.

Join me O my bel oved 0 support of my life ! h aving j oined the s aints I w ill sing thy qualiti es !
, ,

0 Lord of Nan ak besto w a fa vour th at i n he art an d body I m ay be absorbed in ( th y ) bosom !

, ,

D ale/l an d .

is sh in ing in every place n o other is seen

He ,
.

T h e shutters ( of t h e tenth gate ) ar e opened by meeting w ith the true Guru ,

0 Nanak

Thy w ords ar e quite incomparable ; ( th y ) w ord, the support of the s aints should be refl ected
,

upon ,
S ir !

M I is p eculiar kind
a of verse consisting
, of t wo hemistichs . The follo wing piece is a mixture of

Dak h anas an d Chants .

 110 51 3 1 RE G x17: én xrrr MAH ,
. V .
, I .

Wh o remembers ( thee ) at every bre ath an d morsel hi s faith ( thou art ) m aking full h ow sho ul dst , ,

t ho ube f orgotte n f rom ( = by ) the min d ?

How shouldst thou be f orgotten from the mi nd ( wh o ar t) not remo ved a moment 0 my li fe the , , ,

abode of qu ali ties !

Thou givest the fruits th e he art is des iri ng O L ord thou rememberest the request ( desir e ) o f th e
, ,

creatures .

O Lord o f the helpless ( w h o ar t) wi th all ! w h o mutters ( thy n ame ) ( by hi m ) his birth is not lost
, ,

in the play !
f ! l
( This is ) the prayer o f N an ak to the Lor d : in mercy m ake me cross the w at er o existence

Daklzan d .

( Wh o b athi ng “ in the dust an d ashes of the s ai nts ( to him ) the Lord becomes merciful
i s) ,
.

A ll
'

things ar e obtained ( by hi m ) 0 Nan ak the w e alth an d property o f Hari

, ,
.

v
'
C hc mt .

Be auti ful is ( thy ) house 0 L ord the rest 3 o f ( thy ) devotees i n hope ( on thee ) th ey live S ir !
, , , ,

I n hea rt a n d bod y they ar e immersed ( in devoti on ) they ar e remembering the n ame o f the Lord , ,

the nectar of H ari they ar e d ri n king S ir ! ,

The necta r o f Hari they are drinkin g they are becomin g firm for ever the w a te r of sensual , ,

pleasures is considered insipid ( by them ) .

( To whom ) thou O Gop al my Lord hast become mercif ul they h ave appreciated the tr e asure ( in )
, , , ,

the society of the s ai nts .

In all ways they h ave much com fort an d j oy th e j e w el of the beloved Hari they ar e so wing up ,

w ithin their he a rt .

The suppor t of li fe i s not forgotten a moment muttering mutteri ng ( the n ame ) the y live 0 , , ,

Nan ak ! ‘
D ait ka gz d .

Whom thou hast made thy them thou art unite d

o wn , w ith .

Thou thyself art in thyself that praise ( s ays ) Nanak thou thyself hast he ar d
, , , .

Thou O Govind applyi ng the trick of love an d gr atif y ing me h ast ench ante d my he art S ir !
, , , ,

Clin ging to ( thy ) unf athomable neck I h ave become il lus trious by the favour o f the s ai nts S ir ! ,

Cli n gi ng to th e neck of Hari I h ave become ill ustri ous al l vices are overcome the ch aracteri stics , ,

of devotion h ave come i nto my po w er .

On ( my ) he art al l comf orts are sho w ered Govind is ple ased all birth an d de ath is done aw ay
, , .

By ( my) fri ends a song of congratulation i s sung ( my ) w ish is accomplis hed there is not again , ,

a motion of the May a

?

My hands ar e sei z ed ( says) Nanak by the beloved Lord I am not i nfluenced by the oce an of th e
, , ,

w orld .

1
m literally : m ay h e (i a Nanak) be caused t o cross brought over the w aters o f exis t ence !
, . .
,

W ( W ) must here be t aken as an a dj ect ive

2
.

O r : res tin g pl a ce
3 - .

O N an ak s ays N an ak .

6
m affirm1 m m :51 -
:
a motio n o f th e Maya in my h ea rt
( ) I a m n o t an y m ore
affec ted by the M aya B ut there is ano th er re adi ng w hich bette r suitsthe con t ext v iz :
.

am 1 a m n ot
, , .
,

a g ai n d elude d by t h e M aya .
 112 srai RE G, MA H . IV .
, v ani ti e s

I s acrifice for those into w hose heart Ha ri h as c ome an d settled ( there )

am a ,
.

Wh o h av e not kept the n ame of Hari Hari in th eir min d they ar e gone at t h e end w ith remorse , , .

On whose f orehe ad it w as w ritten i n the beginning by Hari the Lord ( s ays ) humble Nanak they , , ,

m edi tate on the n ame .

P ause .

he art bestow love on Hari Hari !

0 , ,

By th e very fortun ate one the Guru is obtained by the w ord o f the Guru he w ill p ass over , .

Hari himself is H ari him self gives an d takes .

Hari himself le ads a stray in error H ar i hi msel f gives w isdom ,

.

Those disciples in w hose he art he is m anifest ar e some r are ones

, ,
.

I am a s ac rifice for those wh o h ave obtained H ari from th e i nstruction of the Guru .

H umble Nan ak ( s ays ) : th e lotus ( =heart) ( o f them ) is opened in w hose he art Ha ri Hari , , h as
settled .

P a use .

Mutter in ( thy ) he art H ari Ha ri ,

Flee an d fall on the asylum o f Hari th e Guru 0 beloved ! he t akes aw ay al l sins an d p ains; , ,

Wh o is contain ed ( diffused ) in everybody h o w sh all h e d w el l in the he art in w h at m anner

'

, ,

is he obtained
If the Guru th e perf ect true Guru be met w ith H ari comes an d d w ells in the he art an d mind
, , , .

To me the n ame is refuge an d support from th e n ame o f Hari ( comes ) kno w ledge of s al vation ‘ , .

My trust is in the n ame of Hari H ari in the n ame of B ar i is my c aste fello wship 2 , ,
-
.

H umble Nan ak h as me di tated on the n ame he is steeped in love in love an d affection to Hari , , .

Meditate on Hari Hari the L ord is true , .

From the w ords of the Guru the L ord Hari is know n the w hole cre ation is from Hari t h e Lord , .

To w hom it h as been wr itten ( = decreed ) be fore they have come an d j oined th e Guru , .

In ser v an t sh ip "a 0 friend merch ant the n ame o f Hari Hari the Guru i s shining f orth
, , , , .

Blessed blessed i s the tr afii c of th e traders w h o h ave l aden the goods an d stock of Hari !
, ,

The faces o f the disciples are bright at the gate ( of H ari ) h aving come they are placed at th e side ,

o f H ari .

Humble N an ak ( says ) : th ese h ave obtained the Guru w ith whom he himself th e abode o f , ,

qu alities h as been ple ased

, .
4

P a use .

Meditate on Hari at ( every) bre ath an d morsel !

Love is produced in the he art o f th ose disciples w hose prayer is ( for ) , th e na me of Hari .

31% “f3 , 31% sig nifyin g

s alva tion (fin al eman cipa tion ) h ere .

11% V H S C fi S te fel l o w S h iP m = F ITS c a st e an d t if f

2
»
-
p atti ( from t h e S ansk l ifi i r ow li ne , , :

m panti o r w ith elision o f t h e nas al t o p at

.
, , ,

wh ich i s also frequen tly ass imil ated t o

T h e d erivati o n
, , , ,

w h ic h M ole sw or th a ssigns in h i s Mara h i D iction ary t o

t WT?! ( see un d er S l l a W 3 ) i s t here fo re a mista ke ; fo r ‘’

I1TH fal li n g i s a l ways m sc ul i n e

, , a .

fi g ; 3 1 ft in servan tsh ip t e i n t h e state o f bein g a servan t o r w orshipp er

3
, , . .
.

o n accoun t o f t h e rh me
y 3 1 33 bein g masc ul i n e , .
 S R I I RAG, VAR I . II .
1 13

0m B y the f avour f
o the tr ue Gur u

S I R I RA G , VAR; MA HA L A IV

Wi th S l olcs .
‘

1 .

III S l ok I ; mahal d . .

A m ongst the Rags is t h e S r i Rag ; if ( one ) besto w love on the True one
H ari the True one al w ays dw ells in his he art w hose w isdom is immovable an d boundless
, , .
2

Th epriceless j e w el is obt ained ( by him w h o reflects on the w ord instruction o f the Guru
) ( ) , .

Hi s tongue is true his he art is true true is his body an d form

, , .

Nan al: ( s ays ) by serving the true Gur u there is al w ays true tr affic ( m ade ) .

II makal a III S l olc . .

O ther p an gs o f sep ar ati on ar e all deception as long as there is no love to the L ord ,
3
.

This ( hum an ) mind is deluded by the M ay a there is no ( proper ) seein g nor he aring , .

Without the sight o f the husband love is n o t produced W h at w il l the blind do ? ,

0 Nan ak by w hom the eyes ar e taken th at True one gives ( them again )
, , .

P aur i .

H ari al one is the cre ator there is only only the court of H ari ( as refuge )
, , .

The order o f E ar l al one is ( executed ) keep the O n e Har i in thy mind ! ,

W ithout that H ar i there i s no one w h o removes fe ar error an d dread

, ,
.

P r aise th at H ari wh o keeps thee abro ad an d at home

, .

To whom H ar i becomes merciful he muttering : Hari ! crosses the difficult existence

, , .

II .

I makal a I S IG/c . .

They ar e the gi fts of the L ord ; w h at w ill prevail w ith him ?4

S ome being aw ake do not obtain them some h aving fallen asleep he r aises
, , , , ,
.

I S IG/c I L ; makal d .

S incerity an d contentment is the vi aticum of the sincere ones p atience th at of the angels , .

I sh al l obtai n a sight of the P erfect one ( but ) there is no pl ace for the foolish , .

P aari .

Thou thyself h a ving cre ated al l cre ation h ast put it into its ( several )
, , w ork .
6

Thou thyself seeing thy ow n gre atness art h appy

, , .

V ar i s in ra nth a peculia r k ind o f poetica l com p osit ion every piece consis t in g o f t wo o r three S l ok s
th e G ,

a n d o n e P au ri I n on e V ar a re o ft en S l é k s an d P auri belo n gin g to d iff erent a ut hors so t h at th e w h ole i s an

.
,

eclectic artificial collection

, .

2
T his re fers t o H ari .

a
sf d eception shorte n ed fro m 1 11 33 fi B ut it seems bette r t o d erive Q13 ( as a m )
111
3 , . .
,

—
gs .

fro m “fi t i r un n ing w o rldly a ctivity F fid In the s ame sens e 111 3 3 i s also used in t h e Granth
i
- .
, , .

4
fi mn 3 % £ 313 25 literally : what goes w i th h i m ? W h o c an say anything to him o r comp el ,

h i m t o g ive anyth ing ?

T h e sense i s thou ha st cre ated every cre ature a n d a ssigned t o th em t heir sever al occup at ions
5
.
1 14 sm i Ri o , V rI R II I . IV .

0 Hari , w ithout thee there i s nothing thou ar t the true L ord ,

.

Thou thyself ar t exi sting in al l pl aces .

Meditate on th at Ha ri 0 ye s aints w h o gives fi n al emancipation

, ,
.

III .

S IG/c I ; mall al a . I .

C astes are ( but ) r aillery an d n ames are ( but ) raill ery .

U pon al l living cre atures is on e sh ade ( o f ignor ance ) .

I f on e c all himself good

0 Na a n k,
it w ill then be k o
n w n af ter w a rds ‘
w hen he obt ains honour in the account ,
.

S l o/c II .
; mah al d II .

A f t er
de ath it i s gone t o the presence of th at beloved w ith w hom there ,
w as love ( in this w orld ) .

L ife in ( th is ) w orld is a misery af ter th at ( comes the right ) life ,

.

P aa r i .

By thyself the e arth i s m ade moon an d sun ar e t w o l amps ( in it ) ,

.

F ourteen shops are m ade by thee ( in w hich ) tr affic i s c arried o n ,

.
3

T o s ome H ari gives profit w h o h ave become disciples , .

Those de ath does n o t enter w h o h ave drunk the true nect ars ,
.

They ar e t hemselves emancipated ( f rom existence ) w ith thei r family , w hole

w orld is rele a sed .

IV .

S l ot m ai ze I .

Having exerted h i s pow er H e h as t aken a form of appe arance .

‘

H e w h o reflects o n ( th at ) time becomes ( h i s) servan t , .

( H is) pow er is ( visible ) ( h i s) v alue ( m an ) d oes n o t obt ain ( find o ut )

, .

When h e obt ains ( h i s) v alue it c annot be told , .

( O n e) m ay reflect o n the l aw
5
.

W ithout underst an ding ( the tru th ) h o w sh all he cross over ?

( Wh o ) practises sincerity an d bo w s dow n ( t o him ) he accomplishes ( his ) he art s purpose
’
, .

Wherever I see there H e is present

,
.

S l é lc II . m a ll a l d III .

By the Guru
’
s n atur al disposition ( or fav our) the bridegroom is obt aine d ( w h o ) is neither ne ar ,

n or f ar .

0 Nan ak , the true Gur u is then met w ith , w hen the he art rem ains in his presen ce .

U§= W 1fl r a fterw a r ds
I
, a ft e , .

W 3 1 % O Z fo ur t een sh ops fou r teen w orlds s even above an d s even bel o w

2
, ,

o n a ccount o f t h e r h y m e s im il arly € 2fi = g i l fif
3
~

It i s more suitable t o th e con text t o tak e afi mn fo r t h e S ansk p p afq a d ress ed in having t aken a . . .
, ,

for m o f a p p ear a n ce ; t h e s ubj e ct i s t h e S uprem e ( no t m an ) .

31% mm ( ge n i t ive d ep en dent o n W c :3 an d m

s
) 313 1 the Muh a m
o o o o
.
K 1
1

m ad a n l aw ; I n P anJabi W T l s f em m m e i n H l n dust an i m a sc
V I

, .
116 I I
S R REG, v i a V II . VIII .

P a ur i .

Gre a tis the gre atness o f Hari the prai s in g o f H ari Hari ( is , ,

Gre at is the gre atness o f H ar i w h o judges on religious actions ,

.

Gre at is the gre atness o f H a r i w hose is the fr uit of the cre atures
2
.

Gre at is t h e gre atness o f H ari w h o does n o t he ar the w ords o f the sla ndere r
,
.

Gre at is the greatness o f H ari w h o is giving gifts w ithout being a sked

3
.
,

V II .

S IG/c I . maha l a III .

P ractis ing egotism ( i e s aying I I ) the

. .
,
w hol e ( cre ation or w orld ) h as died ; w ith no o ne ( goes )
his w e alth .

By second love ( or du ality ) p ain is received the w hole ( world ) is overpo w er ed by de ath ,
.

0 Nan ak the disciples ar e s aved by rem embering the true n ame

,
.

S l ot II . ma/t al a I .

In w ords w e ar e good in conduct bad ,

.

In the heart w e ar e impure an d bl ack outside w e ( are) w hite ,

.

L e t us emulate those 0 sisters w h o standing serve the g ate ( of H ari ) I

, , ,

( Wh o ) ar e in love w ith ( their) L ord they enj oy ple asures in com fort ,
.

W hilst there is streng th ( in us) sh all w e rem ain po w erless an d w retched ?

O Nan ak ( our ) hum an birth is success f u
, l i f w e j oin th eir comp any ,
.

P auri .

Thou thysel f ar t th e w ater thou thyself art the fish thou thyself ar t the net
, , .

Thou thyself ar t moving about the net thou thysel f ar t therein th e seb al ‘ ,
.

Thou thysel f ar t the lotus uncon tamin ated in w ater a hundred cubits deep “ .

Thou thysel f art procuring fin al emancipation h aving sported on e moment ( or ) twenty fi v e minutes ‘ ,
- .
5

0 Har i w ithout thee there is nothing ; h aving seen ( this ) f ro m the w ord o f the Guru ( I am ) h appy
, .

V III .

S l ot mahal a 1 11 .

S h e w h o d oes know the order ( of H ari ) w eeps

n ot , w il l weep ) much .

S h e w h o is alarmed in her he art does n o t sleep ,

.

The w oman that w alks after the w i ll of her Lord

,

It ight also be t ra n sl ated : Hari i s pr aising Hari

m bei n g ta ken as a verb al adjective , .

i a w h o i s aw a r di n g r et r ib ution t o t h e crea t ures a ccordin g t o t he ir w orks

2
. .
, .

L it erally : unask e d fo r i s th e gift o f Go d ( r ea d 3 3 QT)

a '
.

am S ansk fi a l a n a m e o f an a qu atic plant t h e root o f w hich is esc ul el l t It i s used as a ba it

' '
, .
, , .

fo r fi sh as it a pp ea r s
, .

5
The S ikh Gran t h i s explai n fi U fi T by w a t er a n d 31m as an a djective s i gnifying
‘ ‘

B ut w e c a nnot
d etect a n y e ty m ology fo r ei th er m ean ing m is apparently an adj ective sig nifyi n g : c on ta in ing a h un d r ed
.

cu bi t s (UH ) ; W i s very likely t h e S a n sk fifi fi flfi w a t er T his explan at ion w o uld s uit very w ell t h e
'
. .

context .

T h e fo rm o f exi stence a c r ea ture go es th rough b e fo r e it s a b so r ptio n in t o t h e S upreme (

W 3 ) is called
6
, ,
,

the sp or t f rol ic s o f Ha ri Hari h a s h is sport in o r w ith the creature

, . .
 S RI Ri c , V A R IX
I .
117

Isc alled w ith honour to the court an d p alace .

O Nan ak by destiny this w isdom is obt ained

, .

By the favour of the Guru she is absorbed in the True one .

II S l ot .

0 fleshl y -minded one desti tute

,
of the n ame be not led astray having seen the colour
, , of the
s affron flo w er
-

Its colour ( lasts ) only a few d ays its v al ue is nothing , .

The fools an d blockhe ads w h o cling to another ( but H ari ) ar e con sumed an d di e
, , .

H av ing fall en like w orms into ordure they ar e ag ain an d ag ain consumed,
.

0 N an ak those w h o are attached t o the n ame ar e j oy ful by the n atural good disposition
, , , of

the Guru .

Fro m th e devotees the colour does not go o ff e asil y they rem ain absorbed , .

P aur i .

The w hole cre ati on 1 s produced by thee by thyself the d ai ly bre ad is prep ared , .

S ome eat pr actising f r aud an d deceit f alsehood an d lies ar e emitted f rom their mouth
, .

W h at is ple asi ng t o thee th at thou dost by thysel f they ar e applied to th at w ork

, , .

S ome he h as instructed in truth t o them he h as given inexh austible store rooms

1
,
-
.

Wh o eat thinking o f Hari to them it is pro fi table the h and of the thoughtless
, , ,

th ink of hi m ) is be aten .

IX .

S l ot mafial d III .

Re adi ng an d re ading the Ban dit explains the V ed a, ( but ) th e infatuation o f the Maya lul l s him
to sleep .

By re ason of second love ( du ality ) the n ame of Hari i s forgotten the fooli sh he art incur s punishment , .

H e never thinks o f hi m w h o h as given soul an d body w h o prep ares an d gives the dail y bre ad
, , .

The noose of Yam a is not cut o ff ( his ) neck again an d again he comes an d goes , .

The blind fleshl y minded one does not see anythin g he e arns w hat is w ritten be fore (for h im )
-
, .

By a full ( perfect ) destin y the true Guru is found the co mfort giv ing n ame comes an d d we l ls in ,
-

th e he a rt .

Com f ort he ( i e the disciple ) enj oys com fort he puts on (as clothes ) in comfor t comf ort he p asses
. . , , ,

his ti me .

May not th at n ame be f orgotten by Nan ak f rom his mind by which he obtains lustre at the
“
,

tr ue g ate !
II ; mall a l d III S l ok . .

By serving the true Guru com fort is obtained the true n ame t h e vessel o f ( al l ) qu alities , , .

W h h s kno w n his o w n sel f by the inst ruct ion of the Guru ( to him ) the n ame o f Ram a
( o
) a ,

m anif est .

He is acquiring the per fectly True one gre atness is w ith t h e gre at , .

S oul an d body al l is his ; o ffer praise an d supplic ation ( to hi m )

,

Wh o is p rai sing him by th e true w ord ( o f the Guru ) he d wells in f ull com fort , .

1 The s ubject is h e re ch an ged at once he is = H a r i .

N an ak m ight also be taken as Voc a tive an d t enh the tr a n sla tio n would be m ay not ( by the disciple)
2 :
,

t h a t n a me be f org otten etc ! , .

118 S I RI RI G, v i a X . X I .

( Though ) in the he art be s ilent repetition ( o f the V édas , a usterity an d continence he ,

h as lived
i n mi sery w ithout the n ame ( of H ari ) .

From the ins truction of the Guru the name is obtained the ,
fleshl y -minded on e is ruined by spiritu al
blin dn es s .

A s it ple ases thee so keep me ! Nan ak is thy sl ave

,
.

P a ur i

very one is thine thou ar t every one s thou a r t th e c apit al stock o f al l

E ,
’
, .

A l l ar e begging f ro m thee continu ally m aking supplic ation ,

.

To w hom thou givest he obtains everyth ing ; fro m some thou ar t far to so me ( thou ar t ) ne ar
, ,
.

W ithout thee there is no pla ce f rom w h ich ( a nything ) might be a sked ; m ay so m e one ascertain
,

this in his mind '

Al l are pr aising thee at ( thy ) gate thou m akest m anifest the disciples
,
.

S l ot m afi ac III .

The P an dit re ading an d re ading cries aloud ( but in him is ) the in fatu ation o f the M ay a an d love
, ,

( to her ) .

In h i s he art h e does n ot kno w Brahm in his mind he is foolish an d ignorant , .

In du ali ty ( other love ) he instructs the w orl d he does n o t unders t and the ( right ) considera tion ‘ , .

U selessly his hum an birth is w asted h a ving died h e is born again a n d ag ain , .

S l olc I L ; malzal a III .

By w hom the true Guru is served by them the n a me is obt ained ; ( w h o ) reflects he comprehends
, ,

( th i s) .

Tranquillity an d com fort alw ays d w ell in the mind crying an d scre aming ce ases , .

( Whose ) o w n self consumes itself ( his) he ar t becomes pure ( if ) he reflect on the w ords o f the Guru
, , .

0 N an ak those are emancip ated w h o ar e a tta ched t o the w ord ( of t h e Guru ) o n a ccount o f their
, ,
( ) ,

love to H ari .

P a ur i .

The service o f B ar i i s f ruitful the disciple he H ari ) receives , .

T o w hom H ari is plea sing w ith him the Guru falls in he meditates on the n a me o f H a ri
, , .

F rom the w ord o f the Guru H ari is obtained Har i brings him the disciple ) acr oss , .

By the obstina cy of h i s mind n o o n e h a s obtained him go an d ask the V éd as ,

O N an ak he perf orms t h e service of H ari w hom H ari puts into ( i t )

, , .
2

III S IG/c I ; maiz al d. .

0 Nan ak he is a her o an d gre at w arri or w h o h a s destroyed f rom w ithin w icked egotis m

, , .

The d isciple praising the n ame h as a dorn ed h i s hum an bir th

, , .

H e himself h as a l w ays become emancip ated a n d al l h i s f amily ( t o o ) is s aved by him

( ) .

They obtain honour a t the true gate ( t o w ho m ) t h e n ame i s cle ar , .

1
The se n s e i s : h e d o es not k no w
co m p r eh e n d tha t the r e i s (prop erly ) n o
nor d ua li t y .

fi g; 33 2
‘
u
fi m fg ; m f g Fi fi h e p ut s i n to i t i e t h e s ervice ; m fg
, , . . is p a rt . co nj . of m fi au .
 1 20 S RI RE G, V KR X l I l
I .

S ic/c II .
; makal d III .

Ifthe fleshl y minded m en ar e admonished w ill they ever take it t o he art ?

-
,

The fleshl y m inded on e though united i s n o t uni ted ( w ith the

- he w alks as hi s lot h as fallen .

Contemplative devotion an d ( w orldl y ) ac tivity are the t w o w ays ( o f men ) according to the order ,
2

( o f H ar i ) they ( i e m en ) d o ( their ) w ork . . .

The di scipl e destroys his o w n mi nd applyi ng the touchstone o f the w ord of the Guru ) ( to it ) ,
.

E ven w ith ( hi s) mind he h as a qu arrel even wi th his m ind he holds a P an cay at even in h is mind , ,

he i s reconcil ed .

Wh at his he art desires th at he obtains by his love to the true w ord ( of the Guru )
,
.

The nectar o f the n ame is al w ays enjoyed ( by him ) the disciple does ( good ) w orks ,
.

H e w h o fights w ith others but his ( o w n ) mi nd w ill go h av ing w asted h i s hum an b i rth , ,
.

The flesh l y minded on e is de fe ated by the obstin acy o f h i s m ind he w orks falsehood an d lies
-
,
.

H e w h o overcomes his m i nd by the favour of the Guru applies devout meditat ion on H ari ,
.

O Nan ak the foll o w er o f the Guru w orks truth the fleshl y m inded one comes an d goes
, ,
-
.

P aur i .

H e ar, O
holy men o f H ari O brother the w ord o f B ar i the true Guru ! , , ,

O n w hose face an d f orehe ad ( this ) destiny m ay be from the begin ning th at m an receives it an d ,

keeps it in h i s he art .

The nect ar li ke w ord o f H ari is the best an d highest f rom the w ord of the Guru it is e asily t asted
-
, .

By th at li ght is m ade the d arkness is extinguish ed as by the sun the night is di spersed
, , .
3

The unseen the imperceptible the invisible the spotless ( S upreme ) is seen by t h e eyes of the di sciple
, , , .

X III .

S l ot I . mah al a III .

Those wh o serve their o w n Gu r u bring their he ad into account , .

4

H avi ng removed f rom w ithin their o w n self they conti nu al ly apply deep medit ati on ,

True on e .

Wh o h ave not served the true Guru ,

they h ave uselessly w asted their hum an birt h .

0 Nan ak , w h a t is ple asing t o him ( i e H ar i ) th at he d oes n othing c an be s aid

. .
, , .

II ; mah al a III S l ok . .

The ( hum an ) mind is encircled by p assions an d does t h e w ork o f ( its ) p assi ons .

The ignoran t w h o w orship in second love ( or dual ity ) ar e punished at the threshold ( of Hari )
, , .

Though the sel f deity be w orshipped w ithout the true Guru understanding is not obtained
-
, .
5

S ilent recitation austerity continence— ( this ) is the w ill o f the t r ue Guru by destiny they f all
, , ,

into the l ap .

O Nan ak ( though ) they perf orm ser vi ce ( t o him an d m ake ) r eflec ti o n— h e w h o ple ases Hari is
,
,

a ccepte d .

The sense is : t hough o n e at t emp t to unite him wi t h th e S uprem e , h e is not united he d oes
, no t

blend w ith .

2
we co n te m plation me d itation ( w i thout a n y reg ard to th e prescribe d
, w o r ks ) a n d 1113 '

( = m fi fi ) b usy s t irr in g o r run n i n g w orldly a c t ive l i fe correspo n d in g t o ffi afZ

, , T-I an d , ,
W respect ively
m
.

G
o n a ccoun t o f t h e rhyme
J
,

3 % E T6E “ t o bri n g int o a ccount i e be fore Ha ri t o m ake w ort hy acceptable , . .

, , .

I n fz = u fi or
 smi RI G, v i a mm
'

1 21

Mutter the n ame of Hari , Hari O my he art by w hich al ways day an d n igh t comf ort is brought ab out
, , , , .

Mutter the n ame of Hari Hari O em y he art by the remembrance of w hich al l sins an d vices go
, , ,

Mutter the n ame of Hari Hari O m y he art by w hich povert y an d al l p ain of hunger ce ase
, , , .

Mu tter the n ame of B ari O my he art the disciples sho w ( bestow ) their love w ith ( their ) mouth
, , .

O n w hich mouth the lot is w ritten f rom the be ginning by th e t rue Hari by th at mon th he ( Hari ) ,

c auses the n ame to be recited .

X IV .

I . m akal a III .

W h o h ave not served the tr ue nor reflected on the w ord ( of the Guru)
Guru .

Into ( their) he art divine kno wledge h as not come they are corp ses in the w orld ,
.

The round of the ei ghty f our lakhs ( o f f orms o f exi stence) is al lotted to them they di e an d are
-
,

b orn ( ag ai n ) an d become w retched .

He does service t o the t rue Guru w hom he ( H ari ) himself causes to do so,
.

In the t rue Guru is the tr easure of the n ame by destin y it is obtained ,

.

Wh o ar e attached t o th e true w ord of the Guru by t hem al w ays tr ue medit ati on is m ad e ,

.

0 Nan ak w hom he unite s ( wi th himsel f ) he is n ot sep arated ( ag ain ) he is e asily absorbed ( in h im )

, , , .

S l ok maha l ai I II
‘

He is a w orshipper of kno w s Bh aga v an

Bh agav an , wh o .

( W h o ) by the favour of the Guru know s h i s o w n sel f .

( Wh o ) restr ains ( his ) runnin g ( mind ) an d brings ( it ) into one house .

( Wh o ) w hilst living dies an d pr aises the n ame .

S uch a w orshipper o f Bh agav an w ill become very gre at .

0 Nan ak he is ( or w ill be ) absorbed in th e True on e

,
.

S l olc III .
; makal a III .

is c al led a Bh agauti ( but) in his h e art is hypocrisy

He ,
.

By hypocri sy he never obtai ns th e S upreme Brah m .

Wh o c alumniates another heaps up fil th w ith in ( him sel f )

,
.

Though he w ash off the dirt on th e out si de th e defil em ent of th e m ind does not go off ,
.

H e disput es w ith th e soci ety of the s aints .

D ay by day he is affli ct ed an d absorbed in second love

H e does not remember the n ame of B ar i ( but) does much w ork ,
.

'

Wh at is w ritt en be fore th at c annot be eflaced

,
.

O Nan ak with out the true Gur ubein g served he does not obtain final emancip ati on
,
.

P a ufl .

By w hom the true Guru is me ditated upon they do not sleep distress ,
in (fretting ) .
2

By whom the tr ue Guru is me di t ated upon they ar e f ully s atiated ,

.

1
mplur re erred §i simil
=W a rly the f ollo w ing W #1 1 33 =8 fi r fl W = W T§ ,

l f t H ri ) W hen t h e first rhyme is once put d o wn the follo w in g fin al

fi
( h on o r i c a o a . ,
,

nouns ar e often viole n tly pressed into it t hough t h ey b ecome th ereby quite disfigured a n d unin tellig ible
,
.

ed : a w
2
T h e w ords W W m u st th u s be divid 3 m fi = fl a fi i ( rhyming

wi th t h e fol lo w ng W t ey d leep in d istress o r f retting ; m c m t o be distressed t o fret

)
i
h ,
o n o t s , .
, ,

ould le d me o o f ar t o re fu te al l the fal se interpretations o f the S ikh Gran th i s

S indh i
m or m I t w a t , ,

wh ich they put on t his p ass age .

1 22 sm i al e , v i a xv xv r . .

By whom the true Guru i s meditated upon they are not afraid o f Yama ,
.

To whom H ari h as become merciful they fal l do w n at th e f eet o f th e true Gur u

,
.

Their faces ar e bright here an d there dressed ( in a dress of honour ) they go to the court of
,

X V .

S IG/t I ; mahd l d . II .

The he ad th at does not bow do w n to th e Lo r d should be thr ow n do wn

, ,
.

The chest in which th er e ar e no pan gs of love ( to Hari ) burn that !

,
,

II ; mahal d V 8 767; . .

From the be gin ning 0 Nan ak I h ave gone astray ; again an d a a g in I w as born an d died .

, ,

Mistaking it for musk I fel l i nto a stinkin g puddl e

,
.

P aufi .

The n ame of th at H ari should be m edit ated upon 0 my he art w h o executes h i s order above al l , ,
.

The n ame of th at Hari should be silently recited O my he art w h o at the end time rele ases ( fro m , ,
-

individu al existence ) .

The n ame o f th at Har i should be silently recited 0 my he art w h o removes the thirst of the he ar , ,

an d al l hunger .

Those discipl es ar e very f ortun ate by w hom t h e n ame is silen tly repe ated ; al l thei r w icked sl an der ers
,

f all dow n at t heir f eet .

0 Nan ak adore the n ame ! by the n ame all ar e brought be fore thee an d c aused t o bow down ( to thee )
,

X VI .

8 167: I ; maha l d. III .

The ugly il l tempered ( w om an ) of a f alse an d lying heart m akes disguises

,
-
, ,
.

S h e does not w alk after the w ill of her husb and the ignorant ( w om an ) comm ands ,
.

S h e wh o w alks af ter the w ill o f th e Guru is putti ng a stop to all p ains ,

.

Wh at is w ritten c annot be eflac ed w h at is w ritten f rom th e beginning by the cre ator

'
.
, ,

S h e entrust s soul an d body t o her husb and ( w h o ) puts her affect ion on the w ord ( of th e Gur u)
, .

W ithout th e n ame he ( Ha ri ) i s n o t obtained by an y one see an d reflect in ( thy ) he art ! ,

Nan ak ( s ays ) : S h e is be autiful an d endo w ed w ith graces w h o is enj oyed by the cre ator ,
.

8 16 k II ; m all al a . III .

The infat uation of the M ay a is d arkness neither this nor that side o f it the w orld) is seen
, .

The flesh l y m inded are ignoran t an d fal l into gre at p ain they ar e dro wned having forgotten
-
, ,

n ame o f B ari .

Havin g risen e arly they do m uch w ork ( but their ) affection is in du ality , .

Those w h o serve their own Guru cross the w ater o f existence, .

0 Nan ak th e disciples ar e absorbed in the True on e by keeping the true n ame in their bre ast
, , .

P aufl .

Hari is omnipresent in w ater e arth an d on the surface of the e arth there is none other
, , .

Hari himself being se ated adm inisters j ust ice al l false ones he be ats an d c asts out ‘ , .

I
m fg , fo r t h e sake o f the rh yme in stea d o f Hi .
1 24 S R I I RE G , V AR X IX . XX .

P auri .

Hari h as thorough kno w ledge o f his devotees Hari kno w s everything

a ,
.

L ike Hari none is knowi ng H ari reflects on the religious merit ( o f men )
,
.

Wh y should gri ef an d anxiety be entertained as he is not str iking in inj usti ce ? ,

True i s the L ord true is his justi ce the s in f ul m an he is t aking a way

, ,
.

0 ye devotees j oin your hands an d praise him ! the devotees he is s aving

,
.

X IX .

S ic k I ; mahal d . III .

I w ill contin u ally j oin my own beloved I , w il l put him in my bre ast an d keep ( him ) in my
he art .

I i alw ays al ways praise th at Lord by love an d affection t o the Guru

w ll , , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : O n whom he besto w s a f avour able look her he unites ( w ith himself ) th at is , , a happy
m arri ed w om an .

8 26 k makal a
‘

III .

By the service of the Guru H ari is obta i n ed ( by them ) o n w hom he bestow s his favour able look , .

( By w hom ) the n ame o f H ari is medi ated upon they h ave become Gods f rom men
1
, .

H avin g destroyed their egotism ( in dividu ality ) they ar e united by him ( with himself ) by the w ord ,

of the Guru they are s aved .

0 Nan ak they ar e e asily absorbed by hi m ( if ) H ari besto w his o w n mercy ( on them )

, , .

P auri .

H ari h as
sho w n his gre atness c ausing his ow n w orship to be m ade
, .

H e himself m akes apprehension ( ascertainment ) o f himself he himself h as set up his servi ce

( ) , .

To his w orshippers he gives j oy he h as se ated them fi r m i n ( h is) house

, .

H e does not give a firm standin g t o the sinners g at herin g them he m arches them o ff to ,

horrible hell .

H ari besto w s love on his w orshippers siding w i th them he s aves them , .

X X .

S l ot I . mahal d I II .

E v il -min dedness is Dumn cruelty butcher s w ife she wh o is occupied w ith th e cen su
i,2 e ’
a a
r ,

others i s a sw eeper s w ife she wh o I s overcome by w rath i s a C an dal s w if e

’
,
’

W h at I s e ffected by the d raw ing of li nes w hen ( these ) f our ar e sitti ng w ith thee ? 3

( ) ,

Truth an d abstinence i s the ( right) draw in g of li nes b a thing i s i f one silently repe at the n ame , , .

0 Nan ak in the other w orld he ( w ill be ) the highest wh o does n ot give w a t sins 4
,
y o , .

1
F rom
b ein g m en th ey b ecom e Gods deitie s T h e m editation o n th e n a m e o f Ha r i turns m en into Go d s
, .

2
t h e w i fe o r fem al e o f t h e Dum c as t e Muh amm ad an d rum m ers or musicians o th r
( ) n t e d fo r e i ,

wi ck ed ess a n d depravity
n .

3 1 3 m fémn EW lit era ll y W hat 1 s d one by l in es b eing d ra w n ?

?
3
a lin e
, sf
(a furro w
.

S a n sk a m : P a s t o }) t h e H in dfi s d raw lines round their cook in g place t o k eep o ff defi l em e n t

.
, .

T h e S ik h Gr an th i s expl a in 14f ? by w ish d esi r e but t his 1 5 o n ly a ue ss I t i s iden t ic a l w ith

g V ii}
, , .

w h ich 1 s also foun d I n th e Gr a n t h ( M ru V r II S l ok II a , a .

, .
 I I
S R Ri c , VA R X X I .
1 25

II Maha la I 8 1616 . .

Wh at is the goose w h at is the w hite heron on w hich he looks in mercy ?

, ,

Wh o ple ases him 0 Nan ak him he transforms fro m a cro w into a goose
, , .

P auri .

The w ork ,
th at one w ishes t o do should be told t o H ari , .

He settles the business by the true w ords of the true Guru .

In the society o f the s aints is the tre asure nectar is t asted ( there ) , .

By the f ear destroying an d kind ( L ord ) ( the honour ) of his servant is preserved
-
.

O Nan ak ( wh o ) sings the qu al ities o f Hari ( by him ) the i nvisible L ord is seen
, , .

X X I .

S l olc I . makal d III .

S o ul body is hi s to every one he gives support

an d , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : by the disciple th e liber al donor is alw ays al w ays served ,
.

I am a s acrifice f or them by w hom the f orml ess Hari is me ditated upon

, .

Their faces ar e al w ays bright the w hole w orld p ays them reverence , .

S l olc II .
; m ah al d III .

By meeting w ith th e true Guru deflection ( from one s f ormer ways ) is e ffected all the nine tre asures ’
,

( th at m an n ow ) enj oys .

The eighteen prosperities 1 f oll o w ( him ) he d w ells i n his ow n house in his o w n pla ce , , .

The sounds n o t be aten ( by hum an h ands ) ar e al w ays soun din g a being absorbed in divine contem ,

p l at i on be deeply meditates on H ari

3
.

N an ak ( s ays ) : att ach ment to Hari dw ell s in the he art o f them on w hose f orehe ad it is w ritten from ,

the beginni ng .

P aur i .

I musician 4 of H ari the L ord an d m aster I h ave come t o the g ate o f H ari
am a , ,
.

H ari h as he ard w ithi n ( the house ) th e cry he h as put the musician t o hi s mouth , .
5

Hari h aving c alled the musici an h as asked ( him ) : for w h at pu rpose h ast thou come
,

Give continu ally a gi ft 0 merci ful L ord the n ame of Hari is meditated upon ( by me )
, ,
.

The liberal H ar i h as c aused ( me ) to repe at silently th e n ame o f Hari he c aused Nan ak t o ,

dressed
( w ith a dress of hon our ) .

E lse eig ht S iddhis a r e enumerat ed but in the Gra nth their number i s s w elled t o eig h t een
,
.

T he W o r unbea ten soun d s a r e s a id t o soun d in th e d a sv i d u ar as a s ign t h a t th e per

2
, ,

so n a l i ty i s m erg ed in the S u preme by hea ring conti n ually these supern at u ral sou n d s ( O m ! O m l )
,
.

5
W adj h aving los t th e conscio us n ess o f indivi du a l exis t en ce an d being merged in t h e S upre m e
: .
,

o r in d ivine con t empl a tion The (sf ) i s th e fifth o f t h e mo d es o f h uman exis t ence v iz : W EIR
. , .
,

g m ggfg 3 8 21 g ai n}
, ,
In B o e h tl in gk s an d Ro th s S ansk D ic tionary this significa tio n o f a m“
, .
’ ’
.

i s quite overlook ed .

a cl a ss o f Mu sal m an s w h o a r e musici ans an d begg ars i n o n e person

4 .
,

f 6 t o apply to t h e mou th t o kiss t o ca ress

5
fi b f 8 T ? “ , ,
.
1 26 an d BIG . K AB R I .

0m B y the f avour o f e Gu
the tr u ru

I . S I RI RA G . K ABI R .
l

To be sung a f ter the tun e EX s ul rv .

I .

The mother thinks th at her son is getti ng big ( gro wing)

,
.

S h e does not kno w so much th at d ay by day h i s li fe time is getting less

,
- .

ying mine ”
m ne ”
thou she ondles i m excessively Y am Ran looking on laughs
Sa i ( ,
ar t ) f h , ,
.

Thus t h e World is mi sled by thee in error !

H o w sh all it understand w hen it is deluded by the M aya ,

II .

says : give up the ple asure of the world in t h i s society ( thou ) must certainly die !
K ab i r ,

Mutter him wh o is omnipresent 0 m an ( it is ) the w ord of another li fe in this wise

, , , ,
3
w ilt thou
cross the oce an of the w orld .

III .

W hen it is ple asi ng to him then faith spri ngs up ,

.

E rror an d mistake dep art f rom w ith in .

U nd erstanding an d know ledge ( of the S upreme Being) ar e produced the m ind is wakeful ,
.

By the favour of the Guru deep medit ation settles in the he art .

P ause II .

In this society ( thou w ilt ) not di e .

I f thou k now est his order thou wilt be united w ith the L ord ,
.

II . S I RI RA G . T RIL O OA N .
‘

I .

There is a very gre at infatu ation of the M aya in ( thy ) mind, 0 m an , ol d a

ge an d the f e ar of de ath
f orgotte n ( by th ee ) .

H avi ng seen ( thy) family thou ex p an dest , l ike lotus th ou lookest nother s wife , 0 hypo
’
a , on a

cr i tic al m an !

K a bi r ( see p . 93 , n ote
the m o st impo r t ant re formers o f m ediaeval India an d a t the sa me
on e o f ,

t im e o n e o f t h e old est H i n d ui w riters i s quoted a t t h e e n d o f n ea rly every B i g a s w ell as other fa mo us

, ,

B h ag at s a s, w itness fo r t h e trut h o f t h e te aching o f the S ikh Gurus

a B y pro fession he w as a w ea ver t o .
,

w h i ch b e f r eque n tly a lludes H e w as a p a nth ei st w h o equ ally ridicule d t h e idol a t ry of the P a n di t a n d t h e

. ,

big otry o f th e Mull a T h ere is s till a soot in I dia beari n g h is na me ( which i s by n o m e ans fictiti ous) th e
. n , ,

so ca lle d K abi r — a n th i s — I h ave been so fortun a te as t o collect ne arly al l t h e w orks o f K a bi r which ar e stil l
p
- .
,

cur r ent i Indi a though som e of them appea r t o h e sp urious

n , .

f : S i ri Rag S abd 29
2
c , .

M753 #13 3 migh t also be tran sl ated : life o t si n kin g o r decli n i n g ( W an) otherwise m n is
the for m at ive o f W other , .

T r il oca n i s s a id t o h ave b een a B rahm an; w h o b e w as an d w h ere he lived is not k n o wn H e i s not , , .

m en tioned by Ga rcin d e T a ssy in h i s H istoi re de l a L i t té r a tur e Hi n do ui e t H indoustani B ut a s far a s m ay

'

m
.

be j ud g ed fro m th e use o f t h e w ord b e w as fr o m t h e De khan w here th i s Go d w as w orshipped

, , .
 1 28 S I RI RA G . T H E BHA GAT K AB R I . BE Ni .

II .

The furnace is th e skull ( under ) the horns a pot of gold is pl aced f unnels 2
1
an d .
,

Into this ( pot ) a very pure stre am oo z es the j uice is c aused to drop on the org an of taste the
,

t on gue) .
a

I II .

‘
The one incomp ar able thing th at is m ade ( is this that ) the bre ath is m ade the cup
, , ,
.

In the three w orlds is the Jé gi alone ; say w h o is ( their ) king ? ,

IV .

By such divin e know ledge the S upreme S pirit h as become m anifest .

K abi r s ays : I am steeped in ( h i s) colour identified w ith h i m ) .

Al l the other w orld is led astray in error ; ( my ) mind is in to xicated by the elix ir o f

IV . S I RI RA G . T HE S P E E CH O F TH E B HA GA T B E NI ‘ .

To be sung af ter th e tun e : “

P A H AR I A K AI .

0m B y the f avour o f the tr ue Guru

I .

0 m an , when
thou w ast in the circle of the w omb thou w ast gi ven to medit ation an d contemplative ,

absorption w ith the he ad up w ards .

In the m ort al body w omb ) ( is) no pride o f r ank d ay an d night ( there is ) on e thorough absence ,

o f ignor ance .

Remember those days th e trouble an d great p ain n o w ( th y ) thought is excessively exp anded
, , .

H avi ng le ft the w omb th ou h ast come i nto the region o f de ath tho uh ast f orgotten f rom thy mind
, ,

H ar i th e di vi ne m ale
,
.

o f . a kil n mm li terally : t h e sk y t h e va ul ted fi rm amen t ; then ce meta

furn a ce, .
, ,

p h o r i c a ll y , th e skull the tenth gate (i n the sk ull) w here the nectar i s d istille d a ccording to the la n guage o f
, ,

t h e J é gi s .

fi lm fi P lur fro m fi aI
2
Gen fi i fi t signifies in the language of the J figi s a nd
3
“

sh -
n
’ '
6 51
’
, , . . i

t h e $23 1 o n e o f t h e ch annels of t h e vi t a l bre a t h T h e f g fi r i s s aid t o h e t h e p ass age o n t h e r ig h t .

‘

side proceeding from t h e os coccygis (t h e lo wer b a ck bon e) an d p a ssing through the fi t fi i fi fii o r umbil ical
,
’ ’

reg i o n a n d through the ri ght upp er n ostril t o th e h ead ; th e $3 1 ( Hindi o r funnel i s the ch an n el o f

th e vital br eath o n t h e l ef t side (usu ally c a lled W ) ; th e supposed ch annel between th e t w o le a din g t o ,

t h e mi d dle p a rt o f the h ea d i s c al led

m 8f
, (W ) S an sk glam \V e sh al l o ften meet w it h these
.
, . .

expr essions i n th e Gran th .

3 1 125 a m T h e o rg an o f ta s t e ( S ansk ( Hé neut e r ) t o n gue o n which the juice i s droppe d t o be

'
. .
, , ,

t he n c e put i n t o th e pot o f ol d w h ich i s s a id t o h e t h e h e art

g , .

T h e bre ath i s m ade th e cup ; t h e sense i s : by m ea ns o f th e bre ath t h e S upreme i s enjoyed the J o i
g ,

bei n g un ited wi th h i m by shutt in g up the bre ath i n t h e d asv a d uar T h e J 6gi alone is t hereby in t h e t h ree .

w orl d s ( penetrati n g them as u n ited wi t h t h e vit al spirit a n d t hei r kin re lity

) g i n a .

N o thin g i s kno wn about t his B h a g a t .

 S RI Ri c
I . SP E E C H or T H E BHAGA T BE Ni .
1 29

P ause .

Thou w ilt again repent ( of it ) 0 fool ! into w h at f olly an d error h ast thou fal len
,

Remember Ram an d thou w ilt fib t go to th e city of Yam a do not ‘ o about w ithout h aving been
g ,

a ccomplished

II .

The child is given to the thought of an d enj oyment every moment it is replete w ith p astime ,

spiritu al ignor ance .

Mist aking ( it) for sug arc ane j uice thinking ( it to be ) nectar poison is t asted ( by the child ) then
-
, , ,

the five p assions ( have become ) m ani fest

2
.

H avi ng ab andoned silent repetition austeri ty continence virtue an d w isdom the n ame o f Ram is, , , ,

not w orshipped ( by it ) .

L ust h as sprung up its mind is bent on de ath the S akti ( = M ay a) h as come an d bound it round
, ,

its neck .
3

III .

In the young m an is he at h e looks at the face of another s w i fe going an d retre ating

,
right an d ’
,

w rong ) he does not kno w .

Intoxic ated in lust the gre at poison he is led astray sin an d religious merit he does n ot kno w
, , , .

H aving seen a son an d prosperity this ( hum an ) he ar t becomes proud Ram is dropped f rom ,

the mind .

H i s mi n d w eighs the property of another w h o is dying then being def e ated his hum an birth is , . , ,

ruined ( spoiled ) .

IV .

W hite is the h air th an a flow er the V oice is ( w e ak like ) that of th e seven neth er regions
, w hiter , .

The eye becomes w e ary intellect ( an d ) strength flee then lust falls into the churning pot ‘
, ,
-
.

By hot w orldly pur suits ( his ) mind w as confused in the rai ny se ason the lotus o f the h i s) body ,
6 ”

bec ame w ithered .

Having given up in t h e region of de ath this prese n t w orld ) the w ord o f the inh erent 7 ( H ari) ( or
sound of Hari ) he repents there a fter w ards
,
.

V .

Having seen ( his ) body dried up 9

a noise arises he m akes c alculation ( o f the rest
, of h is life ) ,
but
d oes not understand ( it ) .

ms not
( n e) ; m m i =wa s: ( a U s)
2
T h e fi v e vis i t : o r pa ssio n s ar e : 3 1 31 am $53 n o mu m . . .

a
m Hfi l flfl t h e sen se i s : th e M aya h as la id a rope roun d th e ch ild s or you n g m an s neck ’ ’
.

3 1 33 u g fi r 311 111 8 3 ; m mafi o n a ccount o f t h e rh yme mafi a sf ch urni n g p o t ( S a sk

4 ‘
-
, n .

lust fa lls i n t o t h e churning —p o t a n id iom at ic expr es sion for : t o be utt erly a t a loss
, .

3 % f rom 3 3 8 1 t o be co n fu s ed
5
.

6
m afi ? L oc at ive o f
’
i n t h e r a iny se aso n w h en t h e lo t us should flourish an d be ver da nt , .

T h e sense i s : he h as los t h is good opportunity .

7
mw = a fafl fi in heren t (E rmai) ; t h e w ord o r sound o f B ar i w h o is in h er en t ( in m an )
, , .

a
w d ried
, up ( f rom 1 5 53
3 2 3 1 t o be d rie d up) The S ikhs merely s t a rt conjectures a bout
, .

these pa ss ages but d o n o t unders t an d an y o f them

,
.
1 30 S RI RE G
I . SPE E CH O F T HE BHA GA T RA V I DAS .

He covets to live a qu arter ‘ ( o f h i s li fe longer) ( though ) his eye does n ot see an y thing .

The st rengt h ( of h i s body ) is exh austed the soul the bird h as flow n ofl it is ( no longer ) h appy in
‘
2
, , ,

the co urtyard o f the house body ) .

Béni s ays : h e ar ye devotees w h o h as obtai ned fin al emancip ation w he n dying ?

, ,

V S I RI RAG RA V ID II S
P
. .

I .

Thou ar t I I am thou of w h at kind is the di ff er en ce ?

, ,

L ike gold ( an d ) th e bracelet ( m ade of it ) like w ater an d ,

a w ave .

P ause .

But if I w ould not com mit sins O endless ! ,

H o w w ould be thy n ame puri fier of the sinner ”

II .

Thou w h o art the L ord art acqu ainted w ith the s ecrets o f the he art
, , .

From the L ord the serv ant is kno w n from th e serv ant the L ord , .

III .

( My ) body adores ( thee ) give me discernm ent ! ,

M ay somebody instruct Hav id as w h o is of th e s ame m ass ‘ ( as the S upreme )

, .

I I? S ansk 11 , qua r t er ,
g . 3 o r a st ep , p ac e .

?fi nerg y o r s t ren g th o f t h e bo dy
2
, th e e .

3
Ha vi d s (i n t h e B h a k t a M l c all ed R a i d as see P r ic e H in d i an d Hin d us t ni colle ct ions vol i p 1 24
a a a ,
) , a , . . .

w a s a C am r ( Ha l U o r lea t h e r d r es ser a d lived a t B en r es n o t lo

-

g a ft er K a h i r w h om h e m en tio n s He
a -
, n a n
, , .

w as o n e o f t h e t w el e di sc ip l e s o f R m n a d lik e K a b i r w h o i s t h e s e con d i n t h e n um b er i s l
v
( a a n
) w h o h m e f ,
,

w as a d iscip l e o f Ram an u j .

W
4
ad
j b ei g o f th e s am e m a ss o r lump a s t h e S up r em e o r a fellow m o r ta l ; t h e w ord m ay be
, , n , ,

a p plie d ei t h er w ay .
 1 32 RE G M11 311 , MA H IV . .
, S A BD I II . IV . v .

I fin d n o sleep w ithout h aving seen the Guru .

In my soul an d body is pa in th e Guru c auses me p angs of absence ,

.
1

0 H ari H ari besto w mercy o n me j oin to me the Guru ! hum ble

, , ,
Nan ak ( s ays ) : h aving met with
the Guru I am h appy 0 de ar ! ,

Mdj k maka l a I V .

III .

( I f) the qu alities excell ences ) of H ari be re ad ( i f ) the qu ali ties o f Hari be enumer ated ,
.

( If ) the recit al o f the n ame o f H ari H ar i be continu ally he ard ,

.

Joinin g the assembly of the pious ( an d ) singing th e qu ali ties of H ari th e w ater o f the w orld w hich ,

is difficult t o p ass is crossed O de ar !

, ,

Come m y fr iend w e w ill j oin Hari !

, ,

( Wh o ) gives me a mess age of love from my b eloved .

( Wh o ) sho w s me H ari the di vine m ale H ari he is my friend my comp an ion my beloved brother
, , , , ,

0 de a r !
My p ain Hari the perfect Guru kno ws
, ,
.

I c ann ot exist w ithout praising ( his ) n ame .

May a medicine an d m an tr be given me by the perf ect Guru th at by the n ame of H ar i H ari I m ay , ,

be s aved 0 d e ar !
,

I poor (l atr ik am in the asylum of th e true Gur u

, , .

May I obtai n a dr op of the n ame o f H ar i H ari in my mouth ! ,

H ar i is the oce an we ar e t h e fi sh o f t h e w ater ; hu mble N an ak ( s ays ) : wi th out w ater I die

, ,

0 d e ar !

Maj h mah al d IV .

IV .

0 ye holy people o f Har i O my brother j oin me ! , ,

S ho w me my L ord Hari I am hungry ( aft er him ) , .

M ake f ull my faith in the li fe of the w orld the donor ! hav ing met w ith H a ri m y he art becomes ,

h appy by his sight S i r ,

H aving met w ith t h e assembly o f th e pious I w i ll spe ak the w ord of B ari .

The story ( or recital ) o f H ar i H ari is ple asing t o my mind , .

H ari H ar i is nectar H ari is ple asi ng t o ( = i n my ) mind ; h aving met w ith the true Gur u this
, ,
( )
nect ar is d runk S ir ! ,

He w hose destiny is gre at obtain s the society o f H ari

, , .

Th e luckl ess on e w ande r ing about is str uck in the face .

W ithout destiny the society of the pious i s n o t obtained w ithout ( their ) society he is covered over ,

w i th d irt S ir !
,

Come an d j oin me O beloved w orl d soul ! ,

-

O ut o f mercy put the n ame o f B ari H ari into my he art I ,

By the instr uction o f th e Guru the n ame is s weet an d he ar t ple asing ; humble Nan ak ( s ays ) by the -

n ame my mind beco m es h appy S ir ,

Maj /z maka l d IV .

V .

The kno w le dge of B ar i the Guru the taste o f Hari Hari is obtained ( by me )
, , , .

( My ) he art is stained in the colour of H ar i the j uice of Hari w as given it t o drink ( by him ,
) .

m , an
gu i sh or p an g s ca use d by s ep ara tio n from the belove d .
 RA G Mi iH ,
.
MA H IV . .
, S AE D V I . V II .
1 33

The n ame of Hari H ari the speech of Hari Hari is in ( my ) m on th by the j uice of H ari ( my ) he art
, , , ,

is do z ing S i r ! ,

Come 0 sai n t t ake me to thy ne ck ‘

, , .

L et me hear the story of my beloved !

O s aint o f H ari j oin me I give my he art ( to him ) w h o is telling ( me ) the w erd of the Guru ( =Go d)
,

w ith ( from ) his mouth .

T h e very f ortun ate s aint o f H ari is united ( w ith H ari ) .

From the perfect Guru the juice of H ari is obtained in the mouth .

By the l uckl ess the true Guru is n o t obtaine d the flesh l y minded o n e is continually falling into the ,
-

w omb as embryo S i r ! ,

By the merciful L ord himsel f mercy is besto w ed .

Al l the filth o f egotism an d sensu al ple asures is cle ared aw ay ( by hi m ) .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : in the shop o f the body the disciples ar e c arry ing o n the traffic o f Har i S i r !
3
,

1i! d makal d IV .

VI .

I w ill meditate o n the excellences o f Gov ind o n the n ame o f H ari ,

.

H aving j oined the society ( o f the pious ) I w ill fix the n a me in my he art .

The L ord H ari is an incomprehensible unattainable L ord h avin g j oined the true Guru Har i is , ,

tasted 3 S i r !
,

Blessed blessed ar e the people of H ari by w hom the L ord H ari is know n
, , .

H av ing gone I w ill inquire af ter the people o f H ari .

I w ill rub their f eet h aving rubbed rubbed ( them ) I w ill wash ( them ) ; h aving met w ith th e people
, ,

of H ari the j uice o f Hari is drunk S ir ! ,

By the true Guru the donor the n ame is fixed ( in the he art), ,
.

By the very f ortunate the sight of the Guru is obtained .

N
ec t ar juice true nectar i s ( his ) speech f rom the perf ect Gur u( this ) nect ar is taken S i r !
-
, , ,

By the society of the pious H a ri the true ( U nivers al ) S pirit is j oined ( w ith m an ) ,
.

H avin g j oined the society o f the pious the n ame of Hari i s medit ated upon .

N anak ( s ays ) : ( by w hom ) the story of H ari is he ard an d told w ith ( his ) mouth he believes in the ,

n ame by the instruction of the Guru S ir ! ,

M aj h mah al d IV .

V II .

Come 0 sister ! j oin me O beloved !

, ,

Wh o sho w s me my beloved t o him I devote mysel f ,

.

Ha ving j oined th e society of the pious H ari my s weethe art is obt ained t o the gratuitous service of , , ,

the true Guru I devote myself 0 de ar ! ,

W herever I see there is the Lord ,

.

Thou ar t contained in every body 0 thou ne ar an d de ar one ,

By the per fe ct Guru Hari is sho wn as being w ith ( every on e) I am al w ays devoted to the gratuitous ,

service of the Guru 0 de ar ! ,

I
aw m m = fi ismm W ,
pa ssive co n s t ruction l itera lly : , m ay it be joined me
m ay I be joined to, etc .

2
02 q
'
is t o be ta ken as on e w ord sh op ( literally : a city shop ) ,
- .

3
Baa gener ally
, m a S indhi f o r m o f the P a ssive
, 3 31 2 1 a i s m a de , .
1 84 Ri o Mi i H MA H
,
. V .
, S AE D I .
( VIII )

There is one bre ath ,

al l the eai t h is one ( an d the s ame ) , all the light is one ( an d th e s ame )
in al l .

In al l there i s one ( an d the s ame ) light ( but ) individu ally disti nct it does not mi ngle though one ,
‘
,
2
,

t ry t o mingle it .

By the f avour o f the Gur u the one ( ligh t ) is perceived I am devoted to the gratui tous servi ce of the ,

tr ue Guru 0 de ar ! ,

H umble Nan ak ( s ays ) : he ( i e the Guru ) spe aks w ords of nectar . .

.

They are de ar an d ple asing to the mind o f the di sciples of the Guru .

The true Guru the perf ect Gur u gives instructi on the true Guru is ben efi c en t O de ar
, , ,

Jll dj k ; ma ka l d V .

C au
p add s ; Ghar I .

I . V III .

My he art is longing for the sight the of Guru .

“

It l aments li ke a C atr i k .

The thirst does n o t le ave it it gets no rest w ithout the sight ,

of the beloved s aint , O de ar S ir !

P ause .

I s acrifice mysel f 0 dear I s acrifice mysel f f o r the sight o f the Guru the beloved s aint O de ar
, , , , S ir !
Thy f ace i s be autiful S ir com fortable is the voice o f thy speech !
, ,

A long time h as p assed since I h a ve seen the b o w bolder

,
-
.
4

Blessed i s the country w here thou d w ell est O my s weethe art my fr iend my Murari S ir !
, , , , ,

P ause .

I s acrifice myself I s acrifice mysel f for the Guru my s w eetheart my fri end my Murari
, , , , , 0 S ir !
I f thou a r t not met w i th for t w enty f o ur minutes then it is to me the K al i yug -
,
-
.

No w w hen sh all I meet w ith thee O beloved L ord ? ,

To me the night does not p ass I get n o sleep w ithout h aving seen the Gur d arb ar S i r !
,
-
,
5

P a use .

I s acrifice myself S ir I s acrifice mysel f S i r for this tr ue Gur d arb ar !

, , , ,
-

It h as been ( my good ) l o t the pious one is united by the Gu r u ( w ith himself )

, .

The immortal L ord I h ave obtain ed in ( my ) house .

I w ill serve ( thee ) that I m ay n o t be sep ar ated (f ro m thee ) a sin gle moment ; humble
, Nan ak is thy
sl ave ,
S ir ! °

1
fi g light, hea ven ly pri n ciple o f life i n t h e creat ures
, th e .

T h e i n divi d uali ty o f t h e soul is t here by ass er te d

2
.

Th e fol lo w i n g erses are s a i d t o be a le tt er o f A rjun t o h i s fat her Ramdas w he n livin g a t L ahore where
3
v
, , ,

he h ad been s en t on a cco unt o f fa mily di ssensions He succee ded h is fath er in t h e Guruship in 1 58 1 .

.

The w o rd ma m ) is prop erly an epithet o f V ish nu like Murari ( t h e enemy o f t h e D ai tya Mura)
.

, ,

but a ppli ed h er e t o h i s fa t her ; rat her a gro ss fla t t ery .

5
T h e Gur —d ar bar ( t h e G ur us cour t ) i s t h e t emple a t A mri ts ar w hich w as built b R amd as A m rits ar
’

y , .

w a s form e rly th ere fo r e c al le d Ram d aspur t h e city o f Ramdas , .

a
This ve r s e i s s aid t o ha ve been u t t ere d by A jun af te r h a vi n g been re c alle d by h is fa t he r If th is t ra di
r .

t i o n 0 f t h e S ik h s b e t r ue it w oul d app ea r t h at the son s o f t h e Gurus al so c a lle d t hemselves N an ak e e n

, v
,

before t heir a ccessio n t o t h e Gur uship .

 1 36 RAG Mi iH ,
MA H V . .
,
S A BD I V . v .
(X I . X II .
)

Maj h ; mal zal a V .

IV . X I .

In w hi ch house the w edding orn ament is adj usted by the beloved husb and ) - 1
.

In th at house 0 friend a song of congratul ation is sung

, ,
.

Joy an d amusement ar e in that house ; th at w om an i s shining w h o is adorned by her beloved O dear ! , ,

S h e is v irtuous she is very f ortun ate , .

Blessed w ith sons an d endo w ed wi th an amiable disposition a h appy m arried w ife

, ,
.

That w oman is be auti ful skil ful an d clever w h o is attached to her husb and 0 d e ar !
, , ,

S h e is o f virtuous conduct she is foremost ,

.
2

A l l orn aments suit w ell th at intell igent one .

S h e is o f a ( good ) family she h as brothers w h o is adorned w ith the love o f her husb and 0 dear !
, ,
3
,

The gre atness o f her c ann ot be told .

W h o is j oined by her husb an d an d taken to his bosom .

H er m ar ried state is fir m ; humble Nan ak ( s ays ) : by the lo v e o f her un attain able an d i n ap p reh en
sible husb and she is united ( w ith him ) 0 de ar ! ,
4

S earching se arching I desire his sight

an d .

I enter every uneven ground an d e very forest ( searching for him ) 5

.

Ha ri is w ithout quali ti e s an d endo w ed w ith al l qu alities : is there an y one 0 de ar w h o wil l bring ,

.

an d j oin to me my H a ri O de ar ? ,

In going thr ough the six S h astras in kno w in g them by he art ,

6
.

In w orship in ( applying ) the Til ak in b athing at a T i rt h a

, , .

In the practice o f purity in the eighty f our ascetic postures tranquillity is not obtained 0 dear !
,
7 - 8
,

M any ye ars sil ent repetitions an d austerities ar e practised ( by t h e Jogi ) .

Innumer able strolls ar e m a de on the e arth

9
.

N o t one moment comes tranquillity into his he a rt ag ain an d ag ain the o i rises an d runs about
( ) g ,
J ,

0 de ar !

£0 131 (8 3 31 1 1 20 in g orn am en t es p ecia ll y t h e s t ri g w i th a bit o f g ol d strun g o n it w h ic h th e

, :1 w edd -
, n , ,

brideg room puts ro und t h e n eck o f th e bride an d w h ic h sh e w ea rs till w i d o wed .

2
m ih m i fi s a dj fem ; simila rly fi rmfi t; inst ead o f fi mn fx
, . .
‘
.

3
ad
j h avi g b r oth e rs (I ?
. n i s t o d efen d h er o r t ak e c are o f h er . .

m
.

from m t h e c ausa l o f 311 11 8 1 =

,
( HIWEVT t h e A n usv ar being usually ,

d roppe d i n th e Gr a n th ) to un i t e , It m igh t a lso b e t h e ca us al o f m m a n d could then be tra n slated by

.

sh e i s a ccom p lish e d .

g 1f? i s t h e L o c sin g o f 3 1 3 u n e ve n brok en g rou n d w her e a m a n m a h i de hims elf

. .

y
, , , .

6
T h e si x S h as t r a s a r e : t h e S an kh ya N aya Mi m an sa Yog a V edan t a
y , V a isé sik a ,

m
, , ,

1556 3 5} 3 31 1 ; m fi ffi fi fifi ( by tr a n si t ion o f m t o v ) sf pur ity T his i s a pec ul iar

.

7 1 a
o r
, .

pra c tic e o f t h e J ogi s p r ior to restra in in g t h e b rea th a n d fa lli n g t hen i n to a d ea th like sl eep o r t orp idity T h e -
.

J 6 gi s a re said t o p ur ify first th eir bo d ies by d ri n k i

g milk they s w a llo w t h en a p iece o f cotton cloth dr awing n
,
i t out a t t h e an us thus clea n sin th e stom ac h a n d t h e bo w el s rom
,
g f al l imp u r itie s — Rel ate r e fer o .

9
T hi s i s a n o th er pra ctice o f th e J o i s
g .

9
m y S an sk m , . n a c e r t a i n l arge num ber correspo n i
, .
d n to , g m m .
 1 311 , MA H V
Ri c. M5 S A BD V I V III ( X III
. .
, .
— . .
— XV .
) 1 37

B esto w ing
mercy ( on me ) he ( Har i ) h as j oined to me the s aint Guru ) .

My he art an d body bec ame ref reshed I obt ained comf ort , .

The etern al L ord h as t aken his d welli ng in ( my ) body Nan ak sings ( no w ) the h appiness ( imp arted ,

by ) H ari O de ar !
,

Mdj lz ; mah al d V .

VI . X III .

The S upreme Brah m the infinite Go d ,

The un attai nable in apprehensible invisible i mpenetrable

, , ,

The cherisher of the poor Gap sl Govind Hari meditate upon him in ( thy ) body 0 disci ple !
, , , , ,

The disciple o f the Gur u the destroyer of ( the D aity a) M adhu ‘ s aves .

K rish na the enemy o f Mur a is the comp anion o f the disciple

, ,

The merci fu
.

l Damé d ar is obtained by the disciple not by an y oth er votary O de ar !

2
, ,
3

K é sav 4 does not eat an d is w ithout enmity .

Wh ose feet crores of men w orship .

In w hich disciple s he art th at H ari H ari is he alone is ( his ) w orshipper O de ar !

’
, , ,

E fii c ac i ous is the sight o f the endless an d boundless one .

H e is very po w er ful al w ays a donor ,

.

The disciple by w hom ( his ) n ame is silently repe ated is s aved ; Nan ak ( says ) : s alv ation i s kno wn
, ,

by few 0 de ar !
,

Maj /i ; mahal d V .

V II . X IV .

( I ) Wh at thou s ayest must be done

.
, , w h at thou givest must be t aken , .

The poor an d helpless trust in thee .

Thou thou art everything 0 my bel oved I s acrifice mysel f to th y pow er 0 L ord !
, , , ,

By ( his ) decree is the w ayless w il derness by ( his ) decree is the w ay , .

By ( his ) decree the disciple sings the qu alities of H ari 5

.

By ( his ) decree ( m an ) w anders about in m any w ombs al l i s in his ple asure O de ar ! ,

N o one is f ooli sh no one is clever ,

.

I n everything thy decree is current .

0 un attain able in apprehen sible endl ess unf atho m able one ! thy v alue c annot be told
, , , ,
O L ord !
Give me the dust of ( thy ) s ai n ts O beloved ! ,

I h ave come an d fallen dow n at thy g ate 0 Hari ! ,

S eeing thy sight my he art is s ati ated I am longing to meet ( w ith thee ) O L ord ! ,

M ej ia; mal l al d V
V III . X V .

There is p ai n w hen thou ar t forgotten ,

.

H unger sei z es ( him ) he runs about in m any ,

w ays .

1
An epith et o f Vishnu or K rish na .

2
fi u S ansk {THW ’
Q I . h avin
g a rope rou n d h i s bel ly allu di n g to an eve n t i n
(
K rishn a schil dhood) ; an epi thet o f K rish na
’
.

3 1 f? S ansk votary ( otherwise

3
. o r w ay m an n er , .

3 3 a m h avin g lo n g h air an epith et o f K rish na

4
1 1 S a nsk , i .
, ,
.

5
MW corrupte d o n a ccoun t o f t h e rhyme in stead of BTW
, ,
itself is m eaningless but , ,

t h at d oes not m at ter w ith A rj un if only t h e rhyme be kept up ,

.
1 38 E KG Mi iH ,
MA H V . .
, S A E D Ix x . .
(X V I . X VI I ) .

To thou O cherisher of the poor givest the remembrance of ( thy ) n ame , he is al ways h appy
w hom , ,
.

My true Guru is very po werful .

I f I rem ember him in my hear t al l p ai n is gone ,

.

The dise ase of anxiety the p ain of egotism i s dep arted th ou thyself c h er ish est me 0 Lord !
, , ,

Like a child I ask everything .

Thou ar t g iving 0 L ord an d there is n o deficiency of ple asures

, ,
.

F alling at thy feet I concili ate thee much 0 Gopal wh o art comp assion ate t o the poor , ,
.

I devote mysel f for th e true perf ect Guru ,

.

By w hom al l my fette rs ar e cut asunder .

Into w hose he art thou givest ( thy ) n ame they are m ade pure ; Nan ak is h appy in ( th y ) love ,
l
,

0 Lord !
Maj h ; mahal d V .

IX . X VI .

O dear Gopal O merciful an d mirth ful one !

,

0 deep an d pro found O en dless Govind ,

0 high un fathom able endless Lord ! remember ing re membering thee I live 0 Lord !
, , , , ,

O remover of p ain 0 inestim able treasure ! ,

O thou f e arless free from enmity unfa thom able un w eigh able one !
, , ,

0 timeless f orm n o t pro duced from a w omb remembering thee i n my mind I become re fr eshed,
, ,

O L ord
Thou ar t al w ays my comp anion in every circumstance O Gop al ! ,

Thou ar t cherishing the high an d the l o w .

The elixir of ( thy ) name is s atiating m y heart I drink the nectar proceeding from the mouth o f th e ,

Guru 0 L ord !
,

In p ain an d in comfort I meditate on thee O beloved ! ,

This good dispo sition of mind I h av e obtained from the Guru .

T h ou ar t the support of Nan ak O L ord by all me ans I sh al l pass over ( the oce an o f the w orld )
, , ,

0 L ord ! 3

21a m ; ma ha l d v .

x . X V II .

( l ) Blessed is th at time in w hich I h av e met wi th t h e true Guru !

.
,

F r uit ful i s ( thy ) sight seei ng ( thee ) w ith my eyes I am s aved

, .

Blessed are the forty eight m inutes th e seconds a n d moments an d th e t wenty four minute s bles sed
-
,
-
,

i s th at conjunction O L ord ! ,

By exerting mysel f ( my ) mind h as becom e pure .

W alkin g i n the w ay p f Hari ever y error h as been done aw ay .

The tre as ure of the n ame w as procl aimed to me by the tr ue Guru al l dise ases w ere extin guish ed , ,

O L ord !
Ins ide an d outside is thy w ord .

Thou thysel f h ast told it thou thyself h ast expl ained it

, .

The Guru h as s aid : in al l there is One ( alone ) One ( alone ) there will be n o other 0 Lord ! , , ,

1
A rjun f r equen t ly gi v es no hin t as t o th e subject an d al l must be f ound o ut by conj ecture .

2
The w ord s W 1 21 ? fi g must t hus be d ivided : e fi 11 3}
‘ ‘

31 3 1 is
' ' '
an interjection ,

t he s a me as
1 40 Ri c ME i H , V .
, S A E D X IV — X VI .
( X X L — XX III )
.

He sings thy nect ar n ame -

Wh o is ple asing to th y mind 0 L ord ! ,

Thou ar t the s aints an d the s aints are thine the he art of the s aints is w o n over by thee O Lord
’
, ,

Tho u ar t cherishing the saints .

The s ai nts pl ay w ith thee O Gop al ,

Thy s aints are very de ar to thee thou ar t the life of the s ai n ts O L ord
, ,

My he art i s a s acri fi ce fo r those s aints

By w hom thou ar t kno w n ; w h o are ple asing t o thy mind
In their society comf ort is al w ays obtained ; by the j uice of H ari N an ak is perf ectly s ati ated O L ord ! ,

Maj /z ; malzal d V .

X IV . X X I .

Thou art the oce an w e ar e thy fish ,

.

Thy name is the drop w e ar e the Oatr ik s overcome by thirst

,
.

A f ter thee w e long af ter thee w e thirst o ur mind is absorbed in t h ee O L ord

, , ,

A s a child is s ati ated h av ing drunk milk .

A s a poor m an is com fort ed h a ving seen w e al th .

( A s) a thirsty m an drinking w ater is re freshed : so this ( my ) mind is h appy w ith H ari O L ord ! ,

A s a l amp is shining in d arkness .

A s on e w h o i s looking o ut fo r her husb an d full of des i re

, ,

Becomes joyf ul w hen meeting w ith th e beloved ; so my he art is mirth ful in the love of H
,

O L ord !
The s aints h ave put me into the w ay o f B ar i .

By the mercif ul holy m an Gur u) I h ave been famili ar i z ed w ith H ari .

H ari is ours w e ar e t h e sl aves o f H ari ; the true w ord

,
the n am e ) is given to Nanak by the Guru ,

0 L ord !
M aj /z ; mah a l d V .

X V . X X II .

( Thy ) nect ar n ame is al w ays pure

-
.

( Thou ar t ) the gi v er of comf ort an d the remover o f p ain 0 Hari ! ,

I h ave tasted an d seen all other reli shes the jui ce o f H ari is s w ee ter than al l to my mind 0 L ord !
, ,

Wh oever drinks it he becomes s ati ated , .

H e becomes immort al w h o obtains the j uice o f the n ame

, .

The tre asure of the n ame he obtain s in w hose he art the w ord o f the Guru is settled O Lord !
, ,

W h o h as obtained the j uice o f H ari he is fully s ati ated , .

W h o h a s obtained the relish of Hari he i s ( no longer ) agitated , .

H e obtains the n ame o f H ar i H ari on w hose f orehe ad the destiny ( is w ri tten ) 0 Lord !
, ,
1
,

H a ri h as come into the h and o f o n e m an the Guru ) ( f rom w ho m ) m any ar e benefited , .

M any w h o cling t o h i m ar e em ancip ated

, , .

The tre asure o f the n ame is obt ained by the disciple ; Nan ak s ays : by some rare ones it is seen ,

0 Lord !
M aj /z malzal d V .

III XVI . X X .

Tre asur e perfection an d prospe rity ( ar t t hou ) O my

, , Hari , Har i , H ari !
The boon o f life ( ar t thou ) 0 deep an d prof ound on e ,

3 1 3i}? is a fanciful w ord ( in st e a d of 3 m) m an ufa ctured

, to rhyme w i th ollowi ng
th e f m .
 RA G M3 511 , MA H V S A RD X VII X VIII (X X IV
. .
, . . . XXV .
) 1 41

L akhs an d crores of ple asures an d merriments he enj oys w h o h as clung to the feet of the Guru ,
,

0 Lord !
S eein g
( thy ) sight ( we) h ave become purified .

Al l ( our ) brothers an d f ri ends h ave been s aved .

U n attain able in apprehensible is my L ord ; by the mercy o f th e Guru I medit ate on the True one
,
,

0 Lord !
For w ho m al l cre ated beings look out .

( Thy ) sight some r are lucky one obt ains .

H igh boundless imperceptible is ( thy ) pl ace ; th at ( thy ) m ansio n the Guru sh o w s 0 L ord
, , ,

Deep an d profound is thy n ec t ar n am e c

.

In w hose he art ( thy ) d w elling is he h as become em ancip ated , .

By the Guru all his fetters ar e cut asunder ; humble Nanak ( says ) e as ily b e is absorbed ( in thee ) ,

O Lord !

Maj h ; mahal cz V .

X V II . X X IV .

By th e mercy of the L ord I meditate on H ari H ari ,

.

By the mercy o f the L ord I sing a son g of j oy .

In rising sitting sleeping w aking Hari should be medit ated upon through the w hole life 0 dear !
, , , , ,

The medicine of the n ame w as given me by the s aint the Guru ) .

My sins w ere cut o ff I bec ame pure , .

Joy sprang up al l p ain w ent off al l troubles w ere e ffaced O de ar

, , ,

Wh ose side my beloved takes :

He becomes em ancip ated f rom the oce an o f the w orld .

Wh o h as kno w n the Guru as true W h y should he be af raid O de ar ! , ,

S in ce I obtain the society o f the holy ones .

The c al ami ty of egoti sm is gone by meeting w ith the Guru .

A t every bre ath Nan ak sings ( th e praises ) of H ari ; by the true Guru a screen is put over me ,

O de ar !
Maj h ; makal az V
‘

X VIII . X X V .

( 1 ) He ( the Lord ) is thoroughl y in love his serv ant w ith

” ‘

The L ord the giver o f comfort cherishes his serv ant

, ,
.

H e brings ) w ater ( s w ings ) the fan grinds ( corn for him ) even the L ord is in subserviency to his
( , , ,

,
s erv nt
a
”
O de ar !
,

By the L ord be ( the servant ) is put into his service after his f etter is cut off , .

The order of th e L ord h as been ple as ant to the mind of ( his ) serv ant .

H e does th at w hich ple ases to the L ord ; w ithin ( in his he art ) he is a servant out wardl y he is a
, ,

Lord 0 de ar !
,

Thou ar t a w ise Lord thou kno w est al l rules , .

The servants of the Lord enj oy the ple asures of Hari .

g o t i sm
e cons iderin g on eself as d i s ti n ct f rom the S upreme
=i n di vid ual i ty, .

2
fi a d v literally : len g th w ise an d cross w ise ( like a texture ) S ansk a 13 m
“

. , . .

ae ? a m ath QT “H U B s m ( W EI ) b ri n gin g o n fetch ing ( thin gs) o n the p art o f th e

3 .
, .
,

L ord ; fi g ? 3 supply : Uf a into t h e h a nd o f t h e s er v ant

,
.
 1 42 RAG MAi H , MA H V . .
, S A BD X IX . XX .
( X X VI . XX VII ) .

W h atever is the L ord s th at is his servant s the serv ant is manifest by conne xi on w ith his m aster
’ ’

, , ,

0 de ar !
Wh o
been dressed ( w ith a dress o f honour ) by his o wn L ord
h as
H e is not called ag ai n t o render account .

Nan ak is a s acrifice fo r th at servant he is a deep an d profound j e w el , , O de ar

Mdflz ; makal d V .

X IX . X X VI .

is in th e house
Al l body ) n o t outside ( of it) ,
.

Wh o seeks outside he is led a stray by error , .

W h o h as found it inside by the favour o f the Guru h e is inside an d outside h appy 0 de ar ! , ,

A stre am of nectar is softly r aining do w n .

The he ar t drinks it the w ord ( of the Guru ) is he ard an d reflected upon

, .

Day an d night he ( i a the disciple ) indulges in j oy an d sport continu ally he a muses himself with
. .
,

H ari 0 de ar
'

.
,

H e w h o h ad been sep arated through his ( v arious ) births i s united ( w ith H ari )
, , .

By the mercy o f the holy o n e the Guru ) the dried up on e h as become green -
.

H e gets a good conscience he meditates on the n ame h aving become a disciple he is united ( with
, ,

the S upreme ) O de ar , .

A s a w ave o f w ater is absorbed ( again ) in w ater .

S o light is united ( blended ) w ith the luminous ( S upreme ) .

Nan ak s ays : the shutters o f error ar e cut dow n there W ill not be ( m ade ) ag ain a W a ndering about
‘
, ,
2

0 de ar
M aj h ; maizal d V .

X X . X X V II .

I
s acrifice for th at ( ear ) by w hich thou ar t he ard
am a , .

I am a s acri fice for th at tongue by w hich thou ar t uttered , .

I devote I devote myself t o the gratuitous service of him w h o a dores thee in soul an d body
, , ,

0 L ord !
I w il l w ash the feet o f h i m w h o w alks in thy w ay , .

W ith my eye I w ill see th at merci ful m an .

I give my he art to th at friend of mine w h o h aving m et w ith the Guru h as obtained th at L ord , ,
.

, ,

0 d e ar !
They ar e ve ry fortun ate by Whom thou ar t kno w n , .

In the midst of all they ar e uncontamin ated an d free f rom w orldly concerns .

In the society o f the holy ones t h e w ater o f existence is c rossed by them al l the intoxic ated ones ,

a r e subjected by them 0 de ar I
3
,

My he art h as fallen on their asylum ,

H aving given up ( every other ) expectati on in fatuation an d darkness , .

May the gif t o f th e n ame o f th at un att ain able i n fat h om abl e Lord be given to Nan ak O de ar ! ,
,

{3 3 13
l

g ); shu tt ers o f er r 0 1 ( by w hich error w as co n fined to t h e house ar e cut d o w n

, th e
) .

? IQ8 1 1 5 ve ry l ik ely t h e P e rsi an

2
w an d eri n g s tr ayi n g ab ou t w h ic h very w ell a grees w ith
'

3 31 -1 , , .

S an sk 3 1 3 p p o f f
3
d runk i n t ox ica ted The
E3 .

i g , , ar e : 311 31
,
i n 8 3 RU .
, , ,

W T h e S ikh Gra n t h i s exp l ain

. by w i c k ed a n en emy w hich s a m e re gue ss a s
33 ca n no t be , , I ,

d e ri ved from 5 h o w e ver m ay al so be d c i i \ed f 1 o m c au fi n al d b ei n g ch ange d t o t

$ .

gg
, si ng p a i n
( , ,

w hich Is frequen tl y t h e c ase ) .

 1 44 RAG ME IR MA H , . V .
, S AE D X X IV . X XV .
(X X X I . X XX II )
.

The burning is extinguished my mind becomes cool af ter h aving obt ai n ed the sight o f the true
,

Guru 0 de ar !
,

Com fort h as set in p ai n h as fled f ar aw ay ,

.

By the tongue of the s aints the n ame o f H ari is praised .

W ater an d l and i s fill ed w ith w ater the ponds are quite f ull no o n e goes in vain O de ar , , ,

That cre ator h as bestow ed h i s mercy .

A ll the liv ing cre atures ar e cherished .

He i s kind merciful an d compassionate all are f ully s ati ated ( by him ) 0 de ar

, , ,

F orest gr ass t h e th ree w orlds are m ade green by him

, ,
.

In a moment this w as done by the cre ator .

Turni ng his face to w ards th e Guru Nan ak adores him w h o f ulfils the desire o f the he art 0 de ar , ,

Mdfla; maka l d V .

X X IV . X X X I .

Thou ar t my father thou art my m other ,

.

Thou ar t my cousin thou art my brother ,

.

Thou ar t my protector in al l places then w h at fe ar an d grief ( is to me ) O L ord ! , ,

By thy mercy I h av e know n thee .

Thou art my support tho u ar t m y trust ,

.

W ithout thee there i s none other al l is thy pl ay an d ( thy ) aren a 0 L ord ! ,

A ll the l iving cre atures are m ade by thee .

Wh ere w here it ple ased ( thee ) there there they w ere pl aced
, , , .

W hatever is m ade is thine nothing is ours O L ord I

, , ,

H av ing meditated on the n am e I h ave obtained gre at c om fort .

H av ing sung the excellences o f H ar i my mind h as become ref reshed .

The perfect Guru h as congratulated me thou O N anak h ast overcome the w orld , ,
2

M af ia; maka l d V .

X X V . X X X II .

Thou O L ord ar t the support o f ( my ) soul l ife an d mind

, , , .

( Thy ) w orshipper li ves by singin g ( thy ) boundless excellences .

( Thou art ) th e repositor y o f excell ences nectar is the n am e o f H ari h aving me dit ated me ditated , , ,
on Har i I h ave obtained com fort 0 L ord ! ,

Thou esp o usest the des i re ( o f him ) w h o comes to thy house 3 , .

In the society o f the holy ones thou effac est birth an d de ath .

( Hi s) w ish an d purp ose become ful fil led ; by the Guru falling in w ith ( him ) th ou ar t sho wn , , ,
0 L ord !

( Thou art ) un att ain able in apprehensible n o me asure ( o f thine ) i s kno wn

, , .

The devotees ascetics an d w ise meditate ( on thee )

, .

E gotism ( individu ali ty ) is e ffaced e r ror h as ce ased by the Guru thou ar t m anifested
as being
,
( )
even ,

in th e he art .

1
These rs es app arent ly refer t o a full r ainy s ea son W a ter a n d l a n d t e rivers l akes et c a n d th e
ve .
, . .
, , .
,

d r y g round . N o o n e g o es in a i n i a ever y o n e ob ta i n s h is o bject i s s a t i sfied

v , . .
, .

$513 13 1 for t h e s a k e o f t h e rh ym e c orr up ted f r om f EJfi

2
,
s ubs t dim o f fi l flrnn
,
‘ '
. .
.

I t mus t be r ea d : a urfi i
3
3 i s h ere t h y an d n o t po st pos i t ion I f simply um 3 be read
'

Tin “
,
”
.

( as mo st MS S d o ) th e ve rse bec om es un intell igi bl e

.
, .
 Ri c MKi H , MAH V . .
, S A BB X X VI .
—X X VIII (X X X III . .
—X XX V) .
1 45

( Thou ar t) the repository of j oy blessing an d welfare , .

Com fort an d e asiness is the prai sing of the n ame of H ar i .

Be merciful O L ord th y o w n n am g h as come into the house

, , of Nan ak , O L ord !

Maj }; mai ml d V .

III X X VI . X X X .

H aving he ard h avi ng h eard the inf orm ation about thee I live
, .

Thou art ( my ) beloved L ord very mighty , .

Thy w orks even thou kno w est I rely o n thy support 0 Gé p al ! , ,

S inging thy prai ses ( my ) he art becomes green revi ved ) .

H e aring ( thy ) sto r y I drop all dirt sins ) .

F alling in w ith the society of the pious an d s aints I alw ays silently rep eat ( th y n ame ) ,
0 merciful
L ord
remember my ow n L ord at every bre ath
I .

This method I keep in my he art by the favour of the Guru .

By thy mercy light is m ade (in my he art) out of kindness thou c h eri sh est all 0 L ord ! , ,

True true true is th at L ord

, ,
.

Al w ays al w ays al w ays thou thyself ex i stest

, , .

Thy w orks ar e m anifest O beloved having seen them Nan ak h as b ecome h appy 0 L ord
, ,

X X V II . X X X IV .

By ( his ) order rains h ave commenced to fall .

0 de ar f riend h avin g j oin e d the s aints let us sil e n tly repe at the n ame !
,

Coolness quietness rest com fort is obtained the L ord himsel f h as besto w ed coolness O de ar !
, , , , ,

E very th i ng is abundantly produced ( by hi m ) .

Out of mercy all ar e sati ated by the L ord .

Besto w a gift 0 my donor al l living cre atures ar e s atiated ( by thee ) O L ord !

, ,
1
,

True is the L ord o f a true n ame , .

By the favour of the Guru I al w ays meditate on him .

H e cuts off the f e ar of bir th an d de ath spiritu al ignorance grie f an d tr oubles ar e extinct O de ar !
, , ,

A t every bre ath Nan ak prai ses him .

By the remembr ance of ( his ) n ame all nooses are cut o ff .

The hope ( o f him ) is ful fil led in a moment wh o mutters the pr aises o f H ari H ari Hari O de ar ! , , , ,

Mdj k ; mahal d V .

X X VIII . X X X V .

( I ) . Come
pious s w eethe art O beloved friend !
,
0 ,

H avin g met together w e w ill sing th e prais es of the un attain able an d boundless on e
Those wh o sing an d he ar ( them ) are al l em ancip ated ; he should be meditated upon by whom we
, , ,

ar e m ade 0 de ar !
,

The sins o f al l the ( v ario u

s ) births ( forms o f existence ) go o ff .

The fruits w hich ar e desir ed by ( thy ) he art thou w ilt obtain

, ,

H aving remembered th e L ord th at true Lord ( by w hom ) to every one the d aily bre ad is given 0 de ar !
, , ,

I
m s atiate d , from the S a nsk i ) b ein ch an ge d t o i ted
”
(
” “ ”
T o be 1 El t d an d asp r a
g
‘
“
, am .
.
g , at

th e sa m tim
e e by t h e influence of r ( S indhi d]: h aving p assed to th e c er ebr a l r ow at t h e s a me ti m e )
1 46 RI G M i iH ,
MA H V . .
, S A BD X X IX — X XX I (X X X V I
. .
— XX X VIII )
.

By him w h o m ut ters the name al l com forts are obt ained

, ,
.

A l l fe ar i s destroyed i f H ari Ha ri h e meditated upon

, ,
.

By w hom he is served he is passing over al l his w orks are done 0 de ar !

, , ,

I h ave come an d fallen on thy asylum .

A s it is ple asing t o thee so unite ( m e w ith thee ) !,

O ut of mercy O L ord apply me t o thy adoration th at Nan ak m ay drink true nectar

, , , , O Lord !

M aj /z ; ma/za l d V .

X X IX . X X X VI .

the L ord h as become m erciful

G6 v in d , ,
.

The cloud r ains in al l pla ces .

H e i s comp assion ate t o the poor an d al w ays m erci ful coolness is besto w ed by the cre ator , , 0 de ar !
H e cherishes his o w n cre atures
A s a m other takes care o f her child .

H e removes p ain the L ord i s the oce an o f comf ort he gives f ood t o al l 0 de ar !
, , ,

In w ater an d l an d is o m nipresent the kind on e .

I m ake m ys el f a l w ays a s acrifice an d obl ation (for h im ) .

A l w ays night an d d ay I meditate o n him w h o in a moment s aves al l 0 de ar

, , , ,

A l l ar e protected by the L ord himsel f .

A l l sor ro w s an d troubles ar e gone o ff .

Mutterin g the n ame ( my ) he art an d bo dy ( become ) fresh ( revived ) ( if ) the L ord look ,
f avour ably
on Nanak O de ar !
,

M aj h ; m akal d V .

X X X . X X X VII .

Where the n ame of ( my ) belove d

is muttered L ord
Those pl aces ar e golden upper storied ho uses -
.

W here the n am e of my G6v in d i s n o t muttered those cities become desolate O de ar ! , ,

Wh o e ati n g dry bre ad r emembers H ari

( O n him ) H ari looks in mercy inside an d outside .

W h o ,
h avi n g e aten a n d e aten commits w icked deeds ‘
him consid er an o ffspring of poison O de ar !
, , ,

W h o show s n o aff ection fo r the s aints

W h o commits mis d eeds w ith the sakat s ( th e w orshippers o f the S akti )
By ( th at ) ignor ant m an h i s ( hum an ) body so diffi cult t o be obt ained i s throw n aw ay his o w n root , , ,

uprooted by himsel f 0 de ar ! ,

O thou com p assion ate t o the poor ( I flee ) to thy asylum ,

Thou ar t t o me th e oce an of com fort 0 Guru G6p al ! ,

Besto w mercy ( on me ) th at Nan ak m ay sing ( thy) pr aises ; keep my honour O L ord !

, ,

Maj /z ; mahal d V .

X X X I . X X X V III .

( l ) The
. feet of the L ord
cont aine d in m y he art ar e .

A l l the troubles of t h e K ali yug h ave fled afar -

.

Tranqui llity e ase understanding contemplation h ave sprung up

, , , , w ith the holy ones i s ( m y ) d welling ,

O L or d I

W j ctiv e the F orm at P lur ( i n s te ad W €3 1

1
is n o t ad e , b ut . . of
 REG MX 311 , MAH V IV — VI (X L I X L III )
—
1 48 . .
, S AE D X X X . XXX . . .

Rememberin g,remembering ( thee ) Nanak h as obt ai ned com fort .

Th e eight watc hes he s an g thy praises .

A l l his desires w ere f ulfilled he w ill never be afflicted O Lord !

, ,

Maj h ; makal d V .

XXX I V . X LI .

By the S uprem e Brahm the Lord a cloud ( containing rain ) w as sent

, ,
.

O n w ater l an d on the face of the e arth on t h e ten regions he m ade it r ain

, , ,
.

Tranquilli ty ( o f mind) h as sprung up all thi rs t is quenched in all pl aces j oy is spread O de ar !

, , ,

The giver o f co mfort the remover of p ain ( is h e)

,
.

H e himsel f bestow s gif ts on al l li ving cr e atures .

H e himself cherishes h i s o w n cre atures ; fal ling at h i s f eet I w ill concili ate ( him ) 0 de ar ! ,

By falling on w hose asylum s alv ation i s obtai ned

The name of ( th at ) Hari shoul d at every bre ath be m edi tated upon !
W ithout h im there i s n o other L ord al l places ar e his 0 de ar ! , ,

Thou ar t my trust 0 L ord even th ou, ,

.

Thou ar t the true L ord w eigh ty w ith excellences

,
.

Nan ak ( thy ) slave s ays ( this ) supplic ation th e eight w atches I meditate on thee O Lord !
, , ,

Maj k ; makal d V .

X X X V . X L II .

comforts h ave sprung up th e L ord is ple ased

A 11 ,
.

The f eet o f the perfect Guru ar e d welling in ( my ) heart .

U nderstanding deep m editation springs up ; ( in w hose ) he art i s absorbedness o f mind he kn o ws

, ,

th at s entiment O de ar ! ,

U n attain able inapprehensible is my L ord

,
.

In every body h e dw ells ne ar .

The donor o f th e l ivin g beings is alw ays disti nct ; 1 some r are o n e kno w s his own self 0 de ar ! ,

This is the sign o f being united wi th t h e L ord

( If ) in h i s he art he kno w s ( only ) on e true order ( comm a nd ) .

H e is e asi ly cont ent an d al w ays s ati sfied his j o y is in the wi ll of the Lord 0 dear ! , ,

'
By the Lord th e gi ver ( h is) h and w as given ( to m e)
, ,
.

Al l th e dis eases o f birth an d death ar e done aw ay .

Nan ak is m ade by th e L ord his o wn slave by the praise o f B ar i he enj oys ple asure O de ar ! , ,

M aj /z ; mal mld V .

XX X V I . X LIII .

(l ) . Gap al,
the L ord h as besto w ed mercy ( on me )
, .

The f eet o f the Guru d w ell in ( m y ) he art .

That creator h as espoused ( me ) as his ow n the t abern acle of p ain is pulled do wn ( by him ) 0 de ar ! , ,

In ( my ) hear t an d body is settled th at True one .

N ot an y difii c ul t pl ace i s seen .

The messengers ( of Yam a) ( my ) enemies h ave become ( my ) fri ends the on e Lord is p raised ( by
, ,

me ) O de ar !
,

I T he
sense is : th e S upreme abid es in every bo dy but distinct from it n o t mixed up with it , , . S om e ra re
o n e k n o w s t h at t h e S upreme a bid es i n h is o wn self (or bo dy) an d yet is d istinct from it .
 RAG ME IR , MA H V S AE D X X X VII XXX VIII (X L IV X LV 1 49
. .
, . . . .
)

Wh atever h e does th at ( he does ) hi msel f ( alone )

, .

By ( hum an ) w isdom an d cleverness nothing is produced .

1

H e hi mself a ssists his ow n s aints by L ord ( their ) error an d mistake ar e t aken aw ay 0 de ar !

.the
, ,

The lotus o f the f oot is the support of ( his ) people .

( A ll ) the eight w atches ( their ) occup atio n is w ith the n ame o f Ram .

In com fort an d j oy they sing the praises of G6 v i n d the L ord ; al l ( h is s aints ) are taken c are o f ( by ,

him ) 0 de ar !
,

Meij i»; makal d V .

VII X L I V X X X . .

Th at is a true house in w hich the True o n e is meditated upon

,
.

Th at he art is h appy in w hich the praises of H ari ar e s ung

, .

That country is be autiful i n w hich d w ell the people of Hari ( w h o ar e) a s acrifice to the gratuitous
, ,

service of the true n ame 0 de ar ! ,

The gre atness ( an d ) v alue ( of ) the True one i s not obtain ed ( by m an ) 2

.

( His) po w er an d w orks c annot be told .

Thy people live medit ating meditating ( upon thee ) the true w ord ( of the Guru ) is this heart s
, , ,
’

trust 0 Lord !
,

The pr aising o f the True one is obtained by a gre at destiny .

By the favour o f the Gu ru the pr aises o f H ari ar e sung .

Those w h o ar e i m bued w ith love to thee ple ase thee ( w hose ) ai m is the true n ame 0 L ord ! , , ,

Nobody kno w s the end o f the True one .

In every pl a ce is that True one .

0 Nan ak ! the True one shoul d al w ays be med itated upon ( wh o is ) a cq uainted w ith the he art an d ,

kno win g ( all ) 0 de ar ! ,

M ej ia; mahal ci V .

X X X VIII . X LV .

( Th at ) night is be auti ful ( th at ) d ay is ple a s ant : ,

( In w hich ) there is a m eeting w i t h the s aints in muttering the nect ar —n ame .

W here the gh ari the m uh fi r t a the p al 3 p ass in remembrance ( o f the n ame ) , there li fe is f ruitful
, , ,

0 de ar !
By remem brance o f the n am e al l sin s ar e t aken off .

Inside an d outside is the L ord Hari w ith ( them ) .

Fe ar an d error are removed by the perfect Gur u he ( i a Hari ) is seen in all pl aces 0 de ar ! ,
. .
,

The Lord is pow erf ul gre at high boundless , , ,

.

Hi s store rooms are fill ed w ith the n ame ( containi ng ) the nine tre asures
- .

‘
A t the beginning at the end in the mids t is th at L ord ; do not comp re ( him ) w ith another 0 de ar !
, ,
a ,

0 my comp assion ate to the poor besto w mercy ( on me ) ! ,

The begg ar asks the dust of the pious .

Give the gift ( w hich ) Nan ak thy serv ant a sks th at I m ay al ways alw ays meditate ( on thee ) 0 L ord !
, , , ,

l
m , S in d hi sn u
g , t o be pro duce d . A rjun u ses m an y w ord s wh ich ar e p r es erve d in S indhi only .

F oundppr eh en de d
2
i . e. out or a .

Th e gh ari i s a s point ed o ut al re ady t w enty four minute s t h e m n h fi r t a forty eight minut es an d the p al
a - -
, , , ,

the sixt ieth p a rt o f a gh a r i

fi % 3 ne s o r i gin ally t h e F or m a t ive L oca tive) o f 353 1 = S a nsk E a
4 -
8 x 8 1 2 3 a r to i ( , .
,

clinging to sticki n g t o cont a ct w ith ; litera lly : d o n o t bring ( h im) in contact with a n o t h er i a d o not c om
, , , . .

pa re him with ano th er .

1 50 RAG M3 511 , MA H V . .
, S A E D X X X II I .
— X LI .
(X L VI .
— XL V III ) .

Mafi a; maha l d V .

X X X IX . X L VI .

H ere ( = in th is w orld )
thou ar t on w ards ( = in the other w orld ) th an thysel f ar t
,
.

Al l li ving cre atures ar e f ashioned by thee .

W ithout thee there is none o ther ; 0 cre ator thou ar t my re fuge an d support 0 L ord ! , ,

( My) tongue lives by muttering muttering ( the n ame o f ) the L ord , ,

The S upreme Brah m the L or d w h o is acqu ainted w ith t h e he art

, ,
.

By w hom he i s served he obtains com fort he does n ot lose his hum an birth i n the pl ay 0 de ar
, , ,
1

Th at serv ant of thine w h o h as obtained th e m edicine o f the n ame

, ,

H as removed the sickne ss o f h i s sever al births .

S ing the praise o f H ari day an d night ! this i s a fruitf ul w ork 0 de ar ! ,

L ook ing do w n in mercy his serv ant is a ccomplished ( by him ) .

W ithin every body the S upreme Brahm is w orshipped .

Without the O n e there i s none other ; B ab a N an ak ( s ays ) : this ( contains ) al l w isdom 0 de ar ' ,

dl dj k ;
. m aizal d V .

X L . X L V II .

My he art an d bo dy ar e attached to ( m y ) beloved Ram .

A ll my property sh all be devoted an d given ( t o him ) .

T h e eight w atches the praises o f Govind sh al l be s ung m ay he , n ot be f orgotten one bre ath ,
O
de ar '
H e i s my s w eethe art ,
my belo v ed friend .

I n t h e society o f t h e pious the n ame o f R am i s reflected upon ( by m e) .

In the society of the pious the oce an is c r ossed th e noose o f Yam a is cut off 0 de ar ' , ,

The four obj ects ( are to be obt ained ) by the service of H ari
2
.

The tree o f paradise ( is obt ained ) by mutte r ing th e i n vi sible an d indivisibl e on e

3
.

L ust w rath ( al l ) sins ar e cut o ff by the Guru the desire is fulfilled O de ar !

, , , ,

W hich m an s destiny h as become f ull

’ 4

H e fal ls in w ith the bow holder ( Vishnu ) in the society o f the pious
-
.

N an ak ( s ays ) i n w hose he art th e n ame d w ells h i s m arried state ( o r ) retired n ess from the , w orld is
approved 0 de ar !
,

Jil dj /L ; m ahal d V .

X LI . X L VIII .

By remembrance of the n ame com fort is obt ained in the he art .

O ut of mercy it ( t e th e n ame ) is m ani fested to ( his ) devotees

. . .

Ha ving j oined the s aints H ar i H ari is s il ently repe at ed ( by them ) the dise ases
, ,
of sloth are extinct ,

O de ar !
I n w hose house th e nine treasures o f H a ri ar e 0 brother ! ,

( K no w ) : t o hi m they accrue w hose g ain ( they ar e) from a f ormer birth

,

W d ice- g a m bli n g , i s t h e w orl d , wh e re

life i s w on o r lo st
1
T he , a m . .

T h e four obj ect s o f hum an p ur suit a r e :

2
vi r tue ; love ; WY} w e alth ; fi fi fin al em an cipa , ,

t ion. They a r e usu ally c alled a fi fi .

mm
3
(QTfI E fifi ) o n e o f t h e fi v e t rees o f a p arad is e fr om w h i ch every w ish m ay b e ob t ai n ed
, , .

3 1 31 W w h o se lo t s h a ve b ecom e f ull i e wh o h a s m et w i th h i s full d es erts w h o h as re aped

’

. .
, ,

t h e full fr ui t o f h i s form er w ork s .

1 52 RA G M3 33 ,
MA H I . .
, A S TP A D . I .

The lotus of the f oot ( o f Hari ) dw ells in the he art o f ( his ) devotees .

Without the L ord all ar e wr etched .

( Wh o
) continu ally desire the dust o f the s aints ( t o them ) the n ame o f the True one is ,
a pledge .

In rising an d sitting do w n H ari Hari should be sung ,

By w hose remembrance an immovable boon is obtained .

0 L or d become merciful to N an ak ! w h at th ou doest ( I ) endure

, ,
.

RA G MA i H . A S T P A DI S .

Mah al a I .
; Gizar I .

0m B y th e f av our f
o the tr ue Guru

By the w ord ( o f the Guru ) he ( i a Hari ) imbues w ith love ( to him ) by his order he prep ares
. .
,
‘

( the disciples ) .

H e c alls ( them ) to the true court an d p al ace .

O my true L ord comp assion ate t o the poor in ( thee ) the True one my he art is believing !
, ,

P ause .

I am a s acrifice O L ord I am a s acrifice for the be autif ul w ord ( of th e Guru )

, , ,
2

( Thy ) n ectar n ame is al ways giving com fort by the instruction o f th e Guru thou art est ablish ing it
-
,

in ( my ) he a rt
No o n e i s mine nor am I an y one s
’
.

My tr ue L ord is in the three w orlds .

Given t o egotism m any people dep art h aving pr actised vices they regret it ( after w ard s)
3
, .

Wh o kno w s h i s order he pr aises the excellences of H ari

, .

By the w ork o f the Guru he meditates on the n ame .

A t the g ate ( of H ar i ) account ( is t aken ) f rom al l he is let o ff w h o is shining by t h e t r ue n ame , , .

The self w illed o n e goes astray an d gets n o pl ace ( w ith Hari )

-
.

Being bound he is str uck in his f ace at the gate o f Y am a .

W ithout the n ame n o o n e is a comp anion w ith ( him ) ; the em an cip ated on es are meditating on the
n ame .

T o the false S ak at the True one is not ple asing .

Bound by du ality he com es an d goes .

The w ritten destiny n o one e ffaces ; the disciple he ( i a H ari ) c auses to be em ancip ate d . . .

In her father s house h er beloved w as n o t kno wn ( by her )

’
.

S ep arated ( f rom him ) by falsehood she w eeps w ith sighs .

Wretched ( robbed ) by vices she does n ot obtain the p al ace ( o f Hari ) ; forgiveness fo r vices must be
procured by virtues .

By w hom in her father s house the beloved is kno w n ’

1
m :
m a , he prepares , he a cco m plishes the d isciples by un iti n g them to himsel f , by fin a l e m anei

m W T m igh t lso be tr an sla ted : by

a th e w ord I am shinin g lustrous , .

Rafi supply fi ifl fs
-
114 .
’
.
 RKG Mai n , MA H . A S TP A D . I .

1 53

That ( fem ale ) disciple understands ( the truth ) on th e true Being ( Deity ) she reflects , .

H er coming an d going ar e brought t o a stop she is absorbed in t h e true n ame , .

The discipl e comprehends ( h im f w h o ) is c alled inexpressi ble .

T o the true on e th e true L ord is ple asing .

N an ak s ay s a true w ord : w h o is united w ith the True one he sin s his praises
g , .

III ; Gizar I M dj k ; makal d . .

I II . .

( Whose ) destiny it is ( him ) the true Guru unites ( w ith H ari )

, .

H e applies his mind to th e service ( o f H ari ) t o th e remembrance ( o f th e n ame of H ari ) an d to th e

, ,

w ord ( o f the Guru ) .

H aving contin ual ly destroyed his egoti sm com fort is obtained ( by him ) the infatu ation o f t h e May a
, ,

h as ce ased ‘ .

P ause .

I devoted L ord I am devoted I am a s acri fi ce ( t o them w h o ar e ) devoted to the true Guru

am , , , , .

B y the doctrine o f the Gu r u light h as been m ade ( i n their ) h eart d ay by day ( they are) singing t h e ,

praises o f Hari .

I f he se ar ch ( his ) body an d he art then he obt ains t h e n ame ,

.

H e keeps b ack busy stirring a n d ch ecks it 2

.

Day by d ay h e sings th e w ord of t h e Guru e asily b e is m aking a dor ation ( t o H ari ) ,

.

W ithin this body is an inc alcul able thing .

If f rom the mo uth o f t h e Guru the True on e be obt ained then it is see n , .

There ar e nine g ates ( to the body ) in the ten th h e is em ancip ated an d c auses the unbe aten sound
,
3

to be sounded .

True is the L ord o f a tr ue n ame , .

Wh o by the favour o f the Guru c auses him to d w ell in ( his ) he art

H e rem ains d ay by d ay an d continu ally imbued w i th his love a n d obtains a cuteness o f mind at the ,

true gate .

Wh o h as not go t know ledg e of sin an d religious merit

S h e clings t o dual ity an d is led astr ay by err or .

Blind by ignor ance she does n o t k n o w t h e w ay again an d again she comes an d goes , .

From the service o f the Guru com fort is al w ays obtained .

I” I
“
,
mine ” is stopped
“
,
” “
,
.

By th e discourse of the Guru d arkness is blotted out the shutters h ard like ad amant he ( the Guru ) , , ,

is opening .

H aving destroyed egotism ( individu ality ) he ( H ari ) is established i n the mind .

The mind is al ways directed on the feet of the Guru .

By th e m er c y o f the Guru he art an d body ar e pure ( it is ) medit ating on the pure n ame ,
.

L i fe a n d de ath ( rest ) al l w ith thee .

On w hom thou besto w est ( thy f avour ) t o him th ou givest gre atness ,
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) Meditate thou al w ays on the n ame thou ar t ( thus ) adj ustin g ( thy ) birth an d de ath
“
.
,

1
m the l a st th r ee
,
syll ables 5
5 m a r e a m ere alliter a tio n w ithout an y m ean ing as the
,
'
, ,

whol e cannot be t ak en here as verb al a djecti ve .

S a nsk W fafi busy sti r r ing runni n g aft er th e th i n gs o f thi s w orl d ( t h e s ame a s
2
11 13 3" . , ,

He w h o co n ce n tr ates the vital a ir o r b re ath i n the tenth g ate (from w hich t h e soul takes i t s fli ght fr o m
3

the bo d y) is alre ady em a ncipat ed an d he ars there th e O m .

T h e se n se i s tho ua r t putt i n g a stop to .

1 54 RI G Mil l s , MA H . A S TP A D . 11 . II I .
(I I I . Iv .
)

Maj /e ; m a ha l d III .

II . III .

My L ord is spotless un attainable boundless , ,

.

Without scal es he w eighs the w orld .

Wh o becomes a disciple he comprehends ( him ) h a ving recited ( his ) qu alities he is absorbed in him
, , ,

wh o i s endo w ed w ith ( all ) qu alities .

P ause .

I am devoted I am devoted ( to them ) 0 Lord wh o m ake the n ame of Hari d w ell in ( their ) he art
, , ,
.

Those w h o stick t o t h e True one are da ily a w ake at the true gate they obtain lustre ,
.

H e himsel f b ear s an d he himsel f sees .

O n w hom he besto w s a favour able look th at m an is o f account ,

.

Whom he himsel f appl ies t o ( himself ) he i s applied the disciple is acquiring the True on e
, ,
.

Whom he hi msel f le ads astray w here w ill h e obt ain a ( helping ) h and
,

Wh at is w ritten be fore th at c an not be eflac ed

'
.
,

With w hom the true Guru h as met they are very f o rtun ate o n account of ( their) perfect destiny h e
, ,

is uniting ( them w ith H ari ) .

In her f ather s house the w o man w as daily asleep

’
.

S h e is forgotten by her beloved ( husb and ) on a cco unt of her vice sh e is sent aw ay , .

D aily an d continu ally she goes about l amenting w ithout h er beloved she gets n o sleep , .

Wh o h as kno w n in her father s house the g iver o f comfort ’

S h e h aving destroye d egotism h as reco gni z ed him f rom the w ord ( of the Gu r u )
, , .

(Her ) bed is ple as ant her beloved she alw ays enj oys she is m aking true love ( t o him )
, , .

E ighty f our l akhs o f living beings h ave been produced

-
.

O n w hom h e ( H ari ) b esto w s a gl ance o f f a vour h i m he m akes f all in w ith the Gu r u , .

H e c ut s o ff his sin s his ser vant is al ways pure at the true gate he is shining ( lustrous ) by the name
, , .

If he asks account by w hom is it given ,

There is no h appiness also the second an d th ird ( time ) .

The true L ord himself p ardons he himself h aving p ardoned is uniting ( them w ith himsel f )
, .

He h imself does ( eve ryth ing ) an d c auses it t o be done ( by oth ers ) .

By th e w ord o f t h e perfect Guru he c auses ( people ) t o be united ( wi th himsel f

N an ak ( s ays ) : ( wh o ) obtains the gre atness of the n ame ( him ) he himself is uni ting to union with
( ,

h imsel f ) .

Mdfl ; maka l d III e .

III I V . .

H e himself the only One goes about conce ale d

, , .
2

W hen ( by) the disciple he is seen then this ( hum an ) mind is ch anged , .

Havin g ab andoned ( w orldl y ) thirst he obtains e ase an d comf ort th e O n e is est ablished by hi m in
( ) ,

his heart .

P ause .

I devoted I am devoted ( to them) 0 L ord ( w h o ar e) applyi ng ( their ) mind t o th e only One

am
‘

, , , .

By the doctr ine of the Guru ( their) mind h as come to the house of the ( only ) O n e ( w h o is ) colouring ,
3

( them ) w ith true colour ‘

.

I
The p r im ary c a us e o f union with Hari i s h e h ims elf a n d the ins t rumental cause the G uru .

2
T h e sense is the A bsol ute B eing is u n d erlyi n g e v e rythi n g bu t n o t vis ibly , .

T h e s en s e o f urfi IHTQ
3 '

E T to come t o the h o use o f a n y o n e is : to become i n tim a t ely co n nected

’
,
, .

C ol ouri n g w ith t rue colour ste eping o r im bu i n g w ith t rue lo ve .

1 56 RE G Mi iH ,
MA H 1 1 1 A S TP A D v ( V I )
. . . . .

The beloved is al ways abiding w ith al l .

By the f avour o f the Guru he c asts some gl ance of favour .

My L ord is far higher th an high bestow ing m ercy he himself is uni ting ( w ith hi m self ) ,
.

By th e infatu ation of the M ay a the w orld h as f allen asleep .

F rom w hom the sleep ( comes ) he aw akes ( it ) by the instruction o f the Gu ru he is i mp artin g
1 z
, ,

s agacity of mind ( to th e w orld ) .

Wh o d r inks n ectar he removes ( his ) error ,

3
.

By the favour of the Guru he obtains fin al em ancip ation .

Wh o is given to devotion is al w ays a B airagi ; w h o de stroys h is o wn sel f ( him ) he ( Hari ) is unitin g ,

( w ith him self )

4
.

H e hi mself produces ( the cre atures ) an d puts ( them ) into their occup ation .

T o the eighty f our l akhs o f ( living cre a tures ) he himsel f gives thei r d aily bre ad
- .

N an ak ( s ays ) : th ose w h o meditate on the n ame ar e att ached to the True one
,
w h at is ple asing to ,

hi m th at w ork he c auses to be done

,
.

Maj /e ma fia III .

V . VI .

With in ( the body )

diamond an d a ruby are m ade ( by H ari ) a .

By the w ord o f th e Guru he (H am ) causes ex amin ation ( o f it ) to be m ade

'

In ( w hose ) l ap the True one is ( an d w h o ) praise the True one ( to them ) the Tr ue one is applying ,

the touchstone .

P a use .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) fix the w ord of the Guru in ( their ) he arts
, , , .

In the instruction ” o f the Guru he w h o is void of all d arkness is obtained ( by them ) ; the Lumi n ous
, ,

on e is blendin g light ( w ith himse l f ) .

W ithin the body is a l arge outl ay ( of things ) .

The pure n ame is very un attainable an d boundless .

H e w h o becomes a disciple ob tains it ; he himsel f ( H ari ) besto w s an d procures it

, , .

M y L ord m akes fast the True o n e ( in m e ) .

By t h e favour o f the Guru he applies ( my ) mind t o the True one .

H e w h o is truer th an t r ue exists in all pl aces the true ones ar e absorbed i n t h e True o ne

, , .

F e arless an d tr ue is my b eloved ( L ord ) .

S ins an d vi ces he i s cutting off .

( By w hom ) h e is reflected upon in love an d affection h i m h e is c ausing t o be m ade fi rm in ( his ) ,

f e ar love an d attachment
,
.

Thy w orship is true i f it is ple asing to ( thee ) the True one, , .

1
h ere subst m sleep (E H)
is . .

8 1 ( m e lani n i mpl ie s t h e s am e su bj ect as fl u ng i t mus t t h erefore b e c aus al o f “a?“

2 ‘

( W ) t o fall t o be allo tt ed
, , .

( fi re s m n e ct ar ( fr om W m being ch a ged t o v a n d t h en c e t o p an d t b ein elid ed

3
at-r , . .
,
g ) n
, .

B ut it i s p erh a ps b etter to re t ai n t h e sa m e su bj e ct fo r t h e w hole s en t ence an d t o t r anslat e : h e w h o

4

d es t r oys h i s o wn s elf i s ob t ainin g ( W

, W 1 ) it (i e th e A s n o subj ect i s in dic ated it i s d iffi cult . .
,

t o say w h ich i s m ea t n .

”iii -
TX liter a ll y collyrium fo r t h e eyes ; fi g t h e instruct ion o f t h e Guru consi de re d a s a m ean s t o
5
,
: .
, ,

sh arp en t h e ( spiri tu al) eyes There is a pl ay o f wo rd s b etwe en # 75an d m

.
w hich c annot be rendered ,

in E n glish .
 RI G Mai n , MA H . A S TP AD . VI (V II )
.
1 57

Thouthysel f givest ( it) and dost not repent ( of it) .

( Thou ar t) the only donor of all liv ing cre atures ; h avi ng destroyed by the word ( of the Gu ru ) ( thou
ar t ) v i v i fying again )
( .

0 Hari w ithout thee I h ave not an y one !

,

0 H ari thee I ser ve an d th ee I pr aise !

,

Do thyself unite ( me with thysel f ) 0 true L ord ! by a perfect destiny th ouar t obtained , . .

I h ave none other like thee .

By thy favour able look the body is prospering .

Wh o day by d ay remembers an d keeps ( thee ) in mind ( him ) thou p r otec test 0 Hari ! the disciple , ,

is e asi ly absorbed ( in thee) .

Like thee I have none other .

By thyself ( cre ation ) is m ade by thysel f des t royed , .

Thou thyself art forming an d bre aking ( ag ain ) ; Nan ak is shining becomes lustrous ) by the n ame .

makal d III .

VI . V II .

(1 E very body
h e himsel f is enj oying .

The un attai n able boundless one is present invisibl y ,

.

( By w hom ) my L ord H ar i is meditated upon by me ans of the w ord of the Guru he is e asily absorbed
,

in the True one .

P au
se .

I am devoted O Lord I am devote d ( to them w h o are) fix ing the w ord of the Guru in ( their ) he art
, , , .

( Wh en ) the w ord is understood then they fight w ith ( th eir) min d h aving dest royed ( their w orldly )
, ,

d esires they ar e absorbed ( in the S upreme ) .

Th e five drunken ones rob th e w orld l

.

The bli nd sel f w ill ed m an takes no noti ce nor c are ( o f it)

-
.

He w h o becomes a disciple w atches h i s ow n h o use t h e five d runken ones he consumes ( dest roys)
, ,

by me ans of the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

S ome disciples ar e alw ays steeped in true colour ( love ) .

E asily they serve the Lord b eing d aily into xic ate d ( in his love ) ,
.

Havi n g met wi th th eir beloved they sin g the prai ses of th e True one an d obtai n l ustre at the gate
of H ari .

Fir st by the One his own self w as produced .

S econ dly du ality ( an d thirdly ) the thr eef old May a

,
2
.

The f our th step is the high ( step ) of the di sci p l e ( in which ) he is ac q uiring th e perfectly True on e ,
a
.

He is qui te true w h o is plea sing to the True one ,

.

By w hom the True one is know n he is e asily absorbed ( in him ) ,

.

I t is the w ork ( business ) of t h e disciple th at he serve the True one ( an d) in th e T rue one h e is ,

( then ) absorbed .

{3 see p 1 42 note 3
, . , .

Eff rn
i u ity by cr tion the subj ect
( Go d ) became o bject F i rst the su b tl e elements were pro
2
l d al , ; ea .

d uc ed an d thence th e Maya th e illusive w orld

,
W h a tever i s cre a ted i s p ervaded by t h e th ree Guna s ( S a ta
, . , ,

R ajfi T am a)
,
In th e first elementary creation the thre e Gunas were in equipoise but in the gro sser creatio n
. ,

the Gau s s a r e d istr ibuted unequally .

3
m fl a e t h e f ou rth ste p o r state S ansk
, ( tha t o f co mplete abs t ra ction f ro m wi thou t a n d
.

a bs o r ption i n the D eity so th at th e conscio u sness o f indiv iduality is lost .

,
 1 58 RAG Mii i n , MA H . A S TP A D . V II .
(VIII )

W ithout the True there is none other on e .

The w orld cli nging t o another on e is w asted an d de ad

, ,
.

H e w h o becomes a disciple kno w s the ( only ) One serving the ( only ) O n e he obtains comf ort
, , , .

Al l living cre atures ar e in thy asylum .

Tho uthysel f puttin g ( them ) do w n seest al l the rough an d perf ect chess fi gures
, ,
-
.

D ay by d ay thou thyself c ausest the w ork t o be done ( by them ) t h e n thyself un it est to union ( w ith ,

thyself ) .

Thou thysel f j oi n est ( them t o thee ) an d seest ( them ) in ( thy ) presence .

In all thou thyself ar t brim ful .

N an ak ( says ) he himsel f abides ( in them ) the disciple gets brightness of intel lect .

M lj k ; makal d III .

V II . V II I .

The nectar speech o f the Guru i s s w eet

-
.

S ome r are disciple h as tasted an d seen it .

In ( his ) heart there is light he dr i n k sj th e gre at j uice ( o f , H ari ) , at the true g ate he lif ts up ( hi s)
voice .
1

P ause .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) apply ( their) mind to the f eet o f the Gu r u
, , , .

The true Guru is a pond of nectar ; ( w h ose ) mind is true ( his ) filth b e the Guru ) is removi ng ,

me ans of the n ame !

No on e h as obtained ( f ound out ) thy end 0 True on e ! ,

B y the f avour of the Guru some r are on e h as applied his thoughts ( to thee ) .

H e never c an praise thee enough t o w hom thou i mp ar t est a hunger after the true n ame
, .

The O n e is seen ( by hi m ) an d none o ther .

By the favour of the Guru nect ar is drunk ( by him ) .

By the w ord ( instruction ) o f the Guru his thirst i s quenched n aturally b e is entering com ,

Wh o gives up the j e w el thing ( i

the n ame ) like a straw - . a
.
,

I s a blind flesh l y minded m an th at cl ings t o another love ( du al ity )

-
,
.

W h at he so w s th at fru it he obtains n ot ( even ) i n a dre am he gets com fort

, , .
.

On w h om he ( se H ari ) besto w s his o wn mercy that m an obtains it

. .
,
.

( Wh o ) fixes the w ord of the Guru in hi s mind

H e rem ains d ay by day al w ays in the fe ar ( of H ari ) an d h aving destroyed ( other ) fe ar he is remo v ing ,

his err or .

( Whose ) error is remove d he obtai n s al w ays com fort ,

.

By the favour o f the Guru the h ighest step ( i e fin al em ancip ation ) is attained . . .

H i s he art is pure his speech is pure he is n atur al ly singing the prai ses o f H ari
, , .

H e ( i a the Ban di t ) expl ai ns the S mriti S h astras an d the V éda

. .
,
.

( But) bein g led astr ay by error he does n o t know the t ruth ( the Deity ) .

Without serving the true Guru he does not obtai n com fort he is e arning p ain upon p ain , .

He himsel f does ( everything ) to w hom w il l one say anything ? ,

O n e should go tel l if a mistake be m ade ( by him )

, .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : he himself does an d causes t o be done ( everythin g ) ; wh o praises ( the n ame ) is ,

a bsorbed in the n ame .

L iterally : he sound s h i s voice , i . e . he m a kes him sel f he ard .

 1 60 Rfi e n i i H MA H
,
. I II .
,
AS T P AD . Ix . X .
(x . X I .
)

Maj /i ; mal i al d III .

IX . X .

By serving the true Guru gre at gr an d eur ( i s obtained ) .

H ari com es an d d w ells in the he art un aw ares .

H ari is a fruit ful tree ; by w hom the nectar ( o f Ha ri ) is drunk his thirst h e ( i ,
. e . H ari ) is quenching .

P ause .

I am devote d O L ord I am devoted ( t o them w h o ) unite ( me ) w ith the comp any o f th e society of
, , ,

the pious .

H ari himself unites w i t h the society o f the pious ( those wh o ) by the w ord o f the Guru ar e singing ,

th e pr aises of Hari .

Th at serv ant o f the true Guru becomes lustrous by the w ord ( o f th e Guru )
W h o fixes the n ame o f H ari in his he art .

The filth ( o f w hose ) egotism the pure H ari cle ars aw ay he obtains lustre at the true g ate , .

W ithout th e Guru the n ame c annot be obtained .

The S iddh s an d S adh i ks continu ally l ament .

Without serving the Guru com fort does n ot spring up by a full destiny the Guru is obt ain ed .

The m ind is a looking gl ass ( of steel ) ( w hich ) some ( rare ) disciple sees
-
, .

Rust does n o t settle on it w hen he d r ies up egotism ,

.

H e sounds t h e sound n ot produced ( by an instrument ) th e pure voic e by me ans o f the w ord ( of , ,

the Guru ) he is absorbed ( in the S upreme ) .

W ithout the true Guru nothing c an be seen .

( T o w hom ) by the Guru out o f mercy h i s o w n self i s sho w n

H e himself rem ains united w ith himsel f he is e a sily absorbed in the Inn ate ,

H e w h o becomes a disciple absorbs his mind in the O n e ,

.

The error of du ality h e consumes by th e w ord ( instruction ) o f t h e Gur u .

W h o w ithin ( h i s) body m akes t rafii e an d trade h e obtains the tre asure o f th e true n ame , , .

The chief w ork o f the disciple i s th e pr aise o f H ari .

The disciple obtains ( thereby ) the gate o f s alvation .

( Wh o ) sings day by day steepe d in love th e praises ( o f H ari ) him he ( i e H ar i ) is c alling into ( his ) p alace
, , , . .
.

Th e true Guru the donor i s met w ith w hen ca used t o meet ( by H ari )
, , .

By d int of a perfect destiny the w ord ( o f the Guru ) is c aused t o dw ell in the he art .

N an ak ( s ays ) : Wh o obtains t h e gre atness o f the n ame he i s singing the praises o f the true H ari , .

Mafi a; makal a III .

X . X I .

he ( i e the disciple ) p art w ith his o w n sel f then he ob tains

If . .
, al l .

By the w ord o f the Guru he applies true absorption o f min d .

Tru th he buys truth he collects a tr affic o f t ruth b e is c arrying o n

, , .

P ause .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) ar e day by d ay singing the praises o f Hari

, , , .

I am thine thou ar t my L ord by me ans of th e w ord ( of the Guru ) thou ar t gi vi ng gre atness
, , .

The s en se i s t h e Guru sh o w s th at m an s S piri t is a n em a n atio n o f th e S up r eme S pirit an d therefore i n

,
’

e ssence i d entic al w i th i t He w h o k n ow s th a t t h e S up r eme S pirit is in n a te i n h i m sel f re m ai n s un ited w i th

.
, ,

h i m s el f i s h e do es n o t s ee k t h e S up reme outside o f himsel f but considers himsel f as i d e n tical w ith h i m

, . .
,

(a I a m He) .
 nae Mai n , MA H II I . .
, A S TP A D X I . .
(X II ) 1 61

All th e
se as on an d tim e is pleas ant
I n whi ch th e True on e is approved by my heart .

By servi ng the True one true greatn ess.( i s obtai ned ) by the mercy of th e Guru I obt ai n the T rue one , .

The food o f fai th h e obtains from the gratified true Guru .

Inclin ati on t o other things ce ases when he c auses inclin ation to Hari t o d w ell in his he art
, .

True contentment understanding comf ort he obt ains from the w ord o f the perfect Guru
, , .

Wh o do not ser ve the true Guru they are f oolish blind an d ignoran t m en , , .

Wandering about w hence w ill they ob tain the gate of final emancip ation ?
,

Havi n g di ed an d died they are born ag ain ag ain they come an d ar e struck in th ei r face at the
( ) ,

gate of Yama .

If they kno w the fl avour of th e w ord ( of th e Guru) then th ey kno w their o w n sel f , .

They prai se th e pure sound name ) by the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

S ervin g the True one they al ways obtai n comf ort the nin e tre asures o f th e n am e they ar e causing ,

to d well in ( the ir ) h e art .

Th at pl a ce is be autiful w hich is ple asing to the mind of B ar i

, .

S itting in the assembly o f the pious the pr aises o f Hari are sung ( by them ) .

Day by d ay they praise the true Har i they emi t the spotless soun d the n ame ) , .

The sto ck ( in tr ade ) of the flesh l y minded is false ( not genui ne ) false are the things laid out
-
,

( by them ) .

Falseh ood they e arn an d a burth en of p ain oppresses them .

Led astray by err or they wan der about d ay an d night h avi ng di ed th ey ar e b or n ( agai n ) they lose , ,

their life .

The true Lord is very dear to me .

I n the w ord of the perfect Guru is m y support .

Nan ak ( s ays ) by the n ame he obt ains gre atness w h o is considering p ai n an d ple asure as the s ame ,
.

Maj h ; maha l d I II
‘

X I . X II .

Thine ar e the mines genera) ( thi ne ) the species ,

.
1

With out th e n ame the w hole ( cre ation ) is led a stray in error .

From the service of the Guru th e n ame o f H ari is obt ained , w ithout the true Guru no one is oh

taini ng it .

P ause .

devoted O Lord I am devoted ( to those w h o ) apply their mind to H ari

I am , , ,
.

Th e true Hari is obtained by att achment t o the Guru , ( wh o) is e asil y c ausing hi m (i . e

. Hari ) to
d well in the heart .

If he ( i e the disciple ) serve the tr ue Guru then he obtains everything

. .
,
.

He obtai ns such a fruit as he is desi ri ng .

”
The t rue Guru is the giver o f al l thi ngs by a per ect destiny he is obt ined
f a
,
.

This ( hum an ) mind is dirty an d does not medit ate on the One .

I
BITE “ , s f . P l a r t h e four mi nes ;
. m , s. pecies kin d (S ansk afi from w hich a su bstantive fem
f . s ,
. , .

a mfi is forme d w hich is n ow in S indh i H in di

' ‘
,
- common l y w ri tten 3 1 51 or am ) T h e sense is : by thee al l .

l ivi ng cre atur es ar e crea t e d .

gjfit W be tr an sla ted ei ther : by a pe rfect d es ti ny he ( i Guru) i s ob tained

3
m a s th e
y . .

ver b a dj nia being the n an a lli tera tion) or W

. .
, , I m ay be take n a s
g
er un d ive an d t ra n sl ate d : he m ust be acquired The sense is the s ame ei ther way . .
1 62 RAG MAi H , MA H . I II .
, A S TP A D X I I . .
(X III )

In side much fi l th in ess i s accumul ated by dint of another love ( dual ity ) .

A t the b ank ( of a river ) at a T i r t h a in a foreign coun try the selfish man w anders about an d accu
, ,

mul ato s other addition al filth of egotism .

I f he serve the true Guru then his filth goes off ,

.

H e dies w hilst living an d applies h i s mind t o H ari .

H ari is spotless an d true no fil th sticks t o him ; wh o cli ngs t o the True one his filth he ( Hari ) is
, ,

t aking aw ay .

W ithout the Guru there is deep ( blind ) d arkne ss .

H e w h o h as n o divin e kno w le dge i s blind stark blind ,

.

‘
The w orms of ordure ar e w orking up or dure an d ar e g in destroyed in ordure
a a
,
.

W h o serves the em ancip ated ones becomes ( himself ) em ancip ated .

E gotism an d selfishness h e removes by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Gur u) .

W h o serves daily Hari in truth obtains by a perf ect ( good ) l o t the Guru ,
.

He himself besto w s the gi ft th at he unites t o union ( w ith himself ) ,

.

From the perfect Guru he ( i a the disciple ) gets the tre as ure o f the n ame
. . .

By the true n ame the mind al w ays ( becomes ) true by serving t h e True on e h e is removing his p ain ,
.

Consider him ( i a Hari ) as being al w ays in ( thy ) presence do n ot consider him as being far
. .
,

aw ay '

L e arn f rom the w ord of t h e Guru th at H ari ( is present ) w ithin ( thee ) ! ,

N an ak ( s ays ) : f rom the n ame gre atne ss is obtained f rom the perfect Guru ( thou ar t) obtaining it ,

( i a the n am e )
. . .

Maj /i ; malaal d III .

X II X I II
'

. .

Wh o true here they ar e true ( also ) in the other w orld

ar e ,
.

A true he art i s absorbed in the true w ord ( o f the Guru ) .

T h e True on e it serves the True on e it a cquires f rom the True

, ,
on e it gets comfort ( with the
2

S upreme ) .

P ause .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) cause the true n ame t o d w ell in their he ar t
, , ,
.

The true ones serve ( him ) an d ar e absorbed in the True on e they ar e singing the prai ses of the ,

True on e .

Th e P an dit r oads ( but ) does not obtain a reli sh ( f rom it ) .

By ano th er love ( du ality ) th e M ay a le ads h i s mind astray .

By the spiritu al blindne ss c aused by the M ay a al l h i s intell ect is lost h aving practised vices b e i s ,

regretting ( it after w ards ) .

I f the true Guru be met w ith then he gets the truth ( the Deity ) ,
.

The n ame o f H ari he fixes in h i s mind .

He di es by t h e w ord ( o f t h e Guru ) he subdues h i s o w n min d an d is ( thus ) obtaining t h e g ate of

,

fin al em ancip ation .

1
W i tera tion i n stead o f m a s m des truction ; ( th ei r) d estruction i s in
T, al l O r U BI , . .

n aV J-fl is all it era tio n ins te a d o f w e a verb al a dj ective formed from W E T bei n g consumed ; t h e l a tter
, ,

i s m o re su itable a d bo r n e o ut by o t h e r s i m il ar for m s ( fi l m m
n
) .

c om fo r t j o
y a s u sed i n T uls i D as Ram ay an a T h e S ansk HQ = Ha
2
s m
W w ritten al so
’ ‘
. .
, , . .
,

( If? ( but always s ign ifi es : fl i en dsh ip i n t im ac y an d diff ers from 318 t h e e tymolo gy o f which i s
'

, , ,

uncertain .
1 64 RE G Ml i n MAH , . III .
,
'‘
A S I P A D X Iv . .
(xv )

By the secret of th e w ord ( of the Guru ) ‘ some one obtai ns the p al ace ( of Hari ) the p alace —servants ” ,

he c all s to ( his) p al ace .

True is the w holes ale m er ch ant true his retail dealers ,

- .

The True one th ey buy o ut of infinite love to the Guru .

The True one they purchase the True one they acquire rom the True one they e r com ort
f ,
a n f 3
,
.

Without capital h o w sh all be obtain anything

The flesh l y minded one w anders about in the w hole w orld
- .

W ithout the c apit al ( of the n ame ) al l go off em pty h aving gone empty they ar e incurring pain ,
.

S ome purch ase the True one f rom the de a r w ord of the Guru .

They are s aved themselves an d save all their families .

H aving c om e ( to the th reshold o f H ar i ) they are approved of h avi ng m et w ith their beloved they ,

obtain h appiness .

( 7 Within is the th i ng ( i a th e S upreme ) the f ool seeks it outside . .

,
.

The self w illed ar e bl ind an d w an der about w ithout restraint

- .

W here the th ing is f rom t hence no on e gets it

, the sel f w illed are going astr ay ‘
i n error ,
.

He himsel f gives an d c alls by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) .

The pal ace servant obtains e asy comf ort in the p al ace
-
.

Nan ak ( s ays) : f rom the n ame grea tn ess is obtained ; he himsel f ( i a Hari ) h aving he ar d heard ( the . .
,

w ord of the Guru ) is meditating ( on it) .

Maj h ; mahal d III .

X IV . XV .

( 1 ) By the true Guru his true instruction is proclai med .

Think on Hari at the end he wi ll be ( thy ) compan ion !

,

H ari, th e un att ain able th e inapprehensible the , , m asterless , the unproduced fr om th e w omb , thou
obtai n est by faith in the true Guru .

P ause .

I devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o) p art w ith ( their) o wn self

am , , , .

I f they p art w ith their ow n self then they obtain Hari they ar e e asily absorbed w ith Hari
, ,
.

The w ork th at is w ritten befo r e is perf ormed

, , .

By serving the true Guru com fort is alw ays obtai ned .

W ithout ( divine ) all otment the Gu ru is n o t obtained by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) he ( Hari ) is uniting ,

to uni on ( w ith himsel f ) .

The disciple rem ains uncontami nat ed in the w orld .

Hi s trus t is in the Guru th e n ame is his support , .

I f one oppres ses the disciple wh at i s it t o him ? he himsel f ( i a the oppressor ) is wasting aw ay and
, . .

subj ected to p ain .

The fleshl y minded ar e blind an d h ave n o understanding

-
.

The w orld is a butcher killing itsel f .

By slandering an d slandering it li fts up a gre at burthen w ithout w ages it conveys the bur then , .

This w orld is an inclosed gar den bed my L ord the g ardener -

, .

"H F? s ig ifies here secret mystery n , .

2
m a m a p al ace s e rva nt oth er w is e eunuch
, .

( -
):
313 sig n ifie s h er e : j o y com f ort h a ppin ess
3
, , .

4
W W verb al adj ective , ch an g ed to W W 1 for the s ake of the rhyme .
 RA G Ml in , MA H I II . .
, A S TP A D . XV .

(X V I ) .
1 65

He l w ays t akes care ( of it) no one is empty ( des ti tute o f his c are )
a
, .

A s the smell is th at it gets so it is the indw elling soul is to be kn o wn fr om th e smell

, ( ), ( ) , .

The flesh l y minded ar e sick in the w orld

-
.

The giver of comf ort the unattain able the boundless one is forgotten ( by them )
, , , .

In p ain they continu ally w ander about l amenting w ithout the Guru they get no composure , .

By w hom the rules 1 ar e m ade he kno w s them , .

A s he himself m akes ( them ) he know s ( them t o be m ade by his order

) , .

A s he puts ( the rule ) in side so it is he himself is also putting it outside

( ) , ( ) , .

W ithout th at True one I h ave none other .

W hom he attaches ( to himsel f ) he becomes pure , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) th e n ame d wells w ithin the body ; t o w hom he gives it he obtains it ,
.

Maj k ; mahal d III .

X V . X VI .

( Wh o) c auses to dw ell in his he ar t the nectar n ame -

He removes egotism mine ” an d all p ai n ,

.

Wh o alw ays praises the nectar speech he obtai ns the free gift -
,
2
of the nectar .

P ause .

I devoted 0 L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) fix the nectar speech in ( their) he art

am , , ,
-
.

( Wh o ) fix th e nectar speech in ( thei r ) he art they ( ar e) meditating on the nectar n ame

-
,
- .

He alw ays utters from ( his ) mouth the nectar speech - .

The nectar he alw ays looks an d gl ances at w ith ( h i s) eyes .

The nectar story he al w ays tell s d ay an d night an d procl aims it to others

- .

Being steeped in nectar dye he applies deep me di tation -

.

The nectar he obtains by the favour o f the Guru .

( H i s) tongue spe aks day an d night nect ar in mind an d body he is drinking nectar
3
, .

Th at he ( i a H ar i ) does w h at is not in ( anybody s ) thought

. .
,
’
.

( Hi s) order no one c an e ff ace .

By ( his ) order the nect ar speech e x ists by ( his ) order he c auses the nectar to be drunk
-
, .

W onderf ul are the w orks o f Hari the cre ator ,

.

This ( hum an ) mind w hich is going astray he is turning b ack ( to himsel f )

, , .

He applies the mind to th e nectar speech he i s procl aiming the nectar by me ans o f th e w ord ( of
-
, th e
Guru ) .

The bad an d good ( men ) are cre ated by thyself .

By thyself al l people are tried .

The good ones after h aving tried them th en puttest into ( thy ) tre asury the bad ones thou
, , ,
ar t

le ading a stray in err or .

How sh all I see ( thee ) h o w sh all I praise ( thee ) ? ,

By th e favour o f th e Guru I praise ( thee ) by me ans of the w ord ( o f the Guru ) , .

In thy ( di vine ) decree d w ells nect ar by th y decree thou ar t gi ving nectar to drink ,
.

Th e w ord ( of th e Guru ) is nectar the speech of Hari is nectar ,

.

1
fi fi; lso be tran sl ate d by : ac t d ee d a r r an g em en t
m ay a The sense i s : he himsel f i s or d e r ing
, , .

or arr a n ging everythin g inside an d outsid e .

sr n ifi es also : a free g ift th at i s not a ske d fo r

2
n rfi
p m fi fs m fi f s g .
this seems to suit t h e context .

3 here v erb al a djecti ve inste ad o f M d rinking , , .

1 66 Ri o MA H .
'‘
AS I P AD . X VI . X VII .
( X VII . X VIII ) .

By the service of the true Gur u it ( i e the speech ) is fixed in th e he art . .

.

h unger
’
N an ak ( s ays ) : the nectar n ame is alw ays giving com fort ; h aving dr unk nectar
- al l one s is
ceasing .

Maj ]: mahal é III .

X VI . X V II .

l
( ) N.ect ar r ai ns w ith n a tur al e ase ( al e w ithout an y hum an e ff ort ) .
.

S ome r are di sciple obtai ns it .

H aving drunk nectar he is al w ays s ati ated he ( t e H ar i ) bestow ing mercy ( on . . h im ) is quenching
h i s th irst .

P ause .

I amdevoted O L ord I am devoted t o the disciple wh o is dr inking nectar

, , ,
.

Hi s tongue h aving t asted the j uice rem ains al w ays steeped in love n atur all y it is singing the
, , ,

praises o f H ari .

By the favour of the Guru some on e obt ai n s understanding ( of truth ) .

H aving extinguished dual ity he applies devout meditation on the O n e .

If he ( i e H ari ) besto w a f avourable look ( on him ) then he ( the d isciple ) sings the pr aises of B ari
. .
, ,

by a favourable look ( from the p art of Hari ) he is absorbed in the True one .

U pon al l is thy look 0 L ord ! ,

U pon some li ttle upon some much ,

.

W ithout thee nothing comes to p ass ; the disciple gets acuteness of mind .

By the disciple the truth ( d e the S upreme ) is reflected upon u .

Thy store rooms ar e filled w ith nec tar

-
.

W ithout the service o f the true Guru no on e obtai n s ( it ) from the mercy of the Guru he obtains ( it) , .

The m an w h o serves th e true Guru gets lustre

, , .

By the nectar name he fascin ates he art an d mind

-
.

W hose mind an d body ar e imbu ed w i th the nectar w ord he is e asily procl aiming the nectar -
, .

The flesh l y minded are led astray an d w asted by another love ( du ality)
-
.

They d o not t ake the n am e they die h aving e aten poison , , .

D ail y an d al w ays is ( their ) d w elling in ordure w ithout the service ( o f the Guru ) they are w astin g ,

their life .

H e d rinks n ectar to w hom he himsel f is giving it t o drink

, .

By the f avour o f the Guru b e e asily appli es d evout meditation .

H e himself ( i e H ari ) rem ains brimf ul in al l by the doctrine o f the Guru he i s coming into si ght
. .
, .

H e hims elf is th at pure o n e .

By w hom ( creation ) w as m ade by the s ame it is destr oyed , .

N an ak ( s ays ) keep thou al ways in mind the n ame e asily thou w ilt be absorbed in the True one ! ,

. l j k;
d m ah al d I II .

X VII . X VI II .

They apply themselves t o th e True on e w h o ple ase thee , .

They al w ays serve the True one w ith n atur al ease .

W h o pr aise the True one by me ans of the true w ord ( o f the Guru ) them he is uniting to true union ,

( w ith himself ) .

P ause .

I devoted O L ord I are devoted ( to those w h o ) are praising the True one
am , , , .

Wh o meditate on the True one they are imbued w ith love to the True o ne the t rue ones
, , ar e a bsorbed
in the True one .
1 68 RAG ME i H , MA H . A S TP A D . X IX .
(X X )
.

In the fire of ( w orldl y ) thirst the w orld burns .

There is much greediness conceit an d selfishness ( in it )

,
.

H aving died an d died it i s born ( ag ain ) it loses its honour it thro w s uselessly aw ay ( its hum an ) birth
, ,
.

The w ord of the Guru some r are on e comprehends .

I f he destroy his o w n sel f then the three w orlds become kno w n ( to him )
,
.

I f he dies there w il l n ot be a g ain de ath f or him he is e asily absorbed in the True one
, ,
1 .

He does not ag ai n apply his thoughts t o the May a .

He alw ays rem ains absorbed in the w ord of the Guru .

The True one he prai ses ; w ithin every body the perfectly True one is emitting radi ance .

The True one he praises ( as being) al w ays in his presence .

In the w ord of the Guru he rem ains brim ful .

By the favour o f the Guru the True on e comes into sight from the True one he is obtaini ng com fort ,
.

The True on e is contain ed w ithin the mind .

The True on e is al w ays immov able he does n ot come n or go ,

.

The mi nd th at clings to the True o n e is pure by the doctrine of the Guru it is absorbed in the
, , ,

True on e .

The True on e he praises none other ,

By w hose service com fort is al w ays obtai ned .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : th ese wh o are attached t o the

,
na me , ar e reflecting ; the perfectly True one they ar e

acquiri ng .

Maj }; makal a III .

X IX . X X .

P ure
is the w ord pure the sound ,
.

P ure the light th at is contained in al l

,
.

Wh o is praising the pure w ord of Hari ( becomes ) pure by muttering , Hari , he is removing his fil th

P ause .

I am devoted ,
O L or d, I am devoted ( to him , wh o) is causing the giver of comfort to d w ell in ( his )
mind .

Wh o is praisin g the pure H ari by the w ord of the Guru ,

b e, h aving he ard t h e w ord is extinguishing
,

his thirst .

Into ( w hose ) mind the pure name comes an d dw ells

( Hi s) min d an d body ( become ) pure he removes the spirit ual blindness of the M ay a
, .

H e al w ays sings the pr aises of the P ure an d True on e he is sounding th e pure sound ( = the n ame ) , .

The pure nect ar is obtai ned from the Guru .

F rom ( w hose ) he ar t his o w n self h as died a way in him is no in fatu ation of the M ay a , .

P ure is his ( di vine ) kno w ledge v ery pure his medit ation the pure w ord he c auses to d well in his heart
, , .

Wh o serves the P ure on e he becomes pure , .

The fil th o f egotism he w ashes aw ay by the w ord of the Guru .

The pure an d unbe aten sound an d v oice sounds ( in him ) at the tr ue gate h e gets lustre , .

From the P ure one al l become pure .

A pure he art H ar i strings ( li ke a pe arl ) by the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

Those are very fortunate w h o ar e given to the pure n ame by the pure n ame they ar e lu stro us
, , .

H e is pure w h o is r adi ant by the w ord ( of the Guru )

, .

By the pure n ame he fascin ates his mi nd an d body .

The sense i s : be w ill n o t b e again s ubj ect to another birth an d co n sequent de ath .
 RAG Mii i H , MA H AS T P AD XX
.
. .
(X XI ) 1 69

On accoun t of the true n ame no dirt ever sticks ( to him ) ( his ) face is bright he enj oys comf ort ‘ , , .

( Hi s) he art is filthy by another love .

( Hi s) cooking pl ace is filthy ( and ) é n a filthy pl a ce

-
.

H aving e aten filthy ( food ) he incre ases agai n his fi l th in ess th e fi esh l minded one incurs p in by
; y a
-

( his ) fi l th i n ess .

The fi lthy an d the pure ones all ar e m ade by h i s order , .

Those ar e pure w h o ar e ple asing to the true H ari

, .

Nan ak ( s ays ) in ( w hose ) he art the n ame d w ells th at disciple cle aring y his fi l th in ess
( ) , is aw a .

M aj ]; makal d III .

X X . X X I .

Govind
is bright bright ar e ( his ) devotees , .
2

My mind, temper an d desire ar e pure .

Wh o is bright in t h e he art his f ace is al w ays brilliant the v ery bright n ame
, , he is meditating upon .

P ause .

I devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to him w h o ) is singing the praises of Gov ind

am , , , .

( Wh o ) recites day an d ni ght G6v i n d ,Govin d ( w h o ) proclaims the praises o f Govind by the w ord ( of ,

the Gur u ) .

( Wh o ) sings ( = p r ai sc s) w ith n atural c ase to Govind

H e is bright by the f e ar of the Guru the filth of his egotism goes aw ay , .

H e rem ains al w ays in j o y an d performs adoration d ay an d night h aving heard he sings the pr aises ,

o f Govind .

H is he art d ances ( out o f j oy ) he m akes firm his devotion ,

.

By the w ord o f the Guru he recon ciles his mind w ith the mind .
3

H e keeps true time ( in music ) 4 he puts a st op t o the in fatuation of the M ay a a ccording to the w ord
, ,

( o f th e Guru ) he is d ancing .

H e cries al oud he thro w s do w n ( his ) body

, .

O n account o f the in fatu ation of the M ay a he is overcome by de ath .

The in fatu ation of th e M aya m akes this mind dance ; in ( w hose ) he art is deceit he is incurr ing pain , .

When he himself ( i e H ari ) c auses th e disciple to per form devotion

. .

Hi s body an d mind ar e e asily imbued w ith love ( to H ari ) .

The w ord ( o f H ari ) is told ( by him ) by me ans o f the w ord ( o f th e Guru ) he proclaims ( it ) ; the
,

disciple he ( i e Hari ) is approving ( on account of h i s) devotion ( to Har i )

. . .

Being sur rounded by a circle “ on account of the M ay a h e d ances by another love ( du ality ) he ,

is incurrin g p ain .

In w hose he art love ( to Hari ) springs up he ( becomes ) em ancip ated ,

.

I
'
13 W s ig n i fi es here j oy c o mf or t ; c f p 1 62 n o te 2 w af ers) ” i s a n ew
T
. 313 ,
. .
, .

form at ion o f a verb al a djecti v e 3 3 1 6 ( see m y S i n dhi Gramm a r p 52 w hic h by allite r at i o n i s ch an g ed

'
.
, , , , ,

to t h e ( in i tsel f me a n i n gless) f orm m a n-

IT .

731 1 s m a d evotee o r a sce t ic

. . .

T h e min d w as be fore goi n g a str ay by du ality i t i s n o w reconcile d ( uni ted ) w ith its el f C f p 1 70 n ote 1
3
. . .
, , ,

m ay al so sign ify : h e pl ays t h e cymb al ; see v 6

4
S TE . .

5
f fi fi ffi
i h a vi n
g,
bo u n d ro u n d ( himsel f ) a h alo being surro unded by a h alo l ike t h e m oon T h e , .

sense i s : o n a ccount o f the Maya (illusio n ) h e h a s become d i m sigh te d so th at b e i s n o more abl e t o look -
,

up on t hings as they ar e in re ality he i s ensn ared i n t h e error o f du ality

,
.
 1 70 RE G MI i H , MA H III . .
,
A S TP A D X X I X X . . II .
(X X II . XX III ) .

(7 senses ( ar e) in ( his ) po w er he is endow ed w ith true control ( of hi s p assions )

Hi s ,
.

By means o f the w ord of the Guru he al w a ys m editates on Hari ; this devote e is ple asing to Hari
'

By the disciple devotion is m ade ( all ) t h e f our ages ( to Hari) .

By devotion to another n o one obtains ( him i a H ari ) , . . .

Nan ak ( s ays ) the n ame is obtained by att achment to the Guru by him w h o applies his mind to th e ,

f eet of th e Guru .

Mej ia; mahal d III .

X X I . X X II .

( Wh o) serves the True on e ( w h o) praises the True one ,

He h as never ( an y ) p ain on a ccount of th e tr ue n ame .

Th ose w h o serve the giver

,
of com fort obt ain com fort by the doctrine
, , of the Guru they ar e c ausin g
him to dw ell in ( their) he ar t .

P a use .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o) wi th n atur al e ase practise deep m edit ation
, , , .

Those w h o serve H ari ar e al w ays lustrous ; by be auty an d s ag acious know ledge they are brilli ant
, , .

E very one is called a devo t ee .

Those ar e devotees w h o ar e acceptable to thy mind

, .

They pra ise thee by the true w ord ( of th e Guru ) imbued w ith love ( to thee ) th ey perf orm adorati on , .

E very one is thine 0 true Hari ! ,

If he m eet w ith a disciple then his w andering ab out ce as es

, .

When h e is p le asing to th ee thou im buest h i m w ith love to the n ame thou thysel f c ausest him to
, ,

mutter the n ame .

By the doctrine of the Guru Hari is established in the he art .

Joy an d gr ief al l spiritual blindness is p arted w ith

'

, .

Devout meditation is m ade o n the O n e he is al w ays fixin g th e n ame of Hari in ( his ) min d
, .

The devotees are al w ay s imbued w ith l ove an d affection to thee .

Th e n ame ( containing ) the nine tre asures h as come an d settled in their he art
, , .

By a full destiny the true Gur u i s obtained ( by them ) by me ans of the w ord ( o f the Guru ) ( thou ,

ar t) uniti n g ( them ) to union ( w ith thysel f ) .

Thou ar t al ways mercif ul an d besto w ing c omf ort .

Thou thysel f un i test ( him w h o ) is kno w n ( by thee ) as a disciple .

Thou th ysel f givest the greatn ess of the n ame ; those w h o are attached to the n ame obt ain comf o rt , , .

The true ones are continu al ly pr aising thee .

By the disciple none other i s kno wn ( but thou) .

H i s mind rem ai n s abs orbed w ith the One by ( his ) mind bein g w on over he m eets with ( his mind ‘
,
) .

He w h o becomes a disciple pra ises

, ,

The true L ord wh o is w ithout concern

,
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : ( in w hose ) he art th e n ame d w ell s ( hi m ) H ari is uniting by me ans o f th e w ord of ,
,

the Guru .

Maj k mabal d III .

X X II . X X III .

( l ) Thy devotees
. shining in ( th y ) true court
are .

By mean s of th e w ord of th e Guru they ar e adorned by the n ame .

1
ufi ; fi fi wfi “X III fi i m afamn fi l m ? governs the Da tive (W U ) ; by the m ind being
‘
.

reconcile d , w on ove r to the S uprem e fr om whom i t w as sep a rated by duality du ality in the mind c ea ses
, , .
1 72 RAG MI i H MA H I II
,
. .
,
A S T P AD . XX IV .
(X X V )

H avi n g
died h aving died he l ives an d obt ains then everything
,
.

By the f avour of the Guru h e m akes H ari d w ell in ( h is) m in d .

H e i s al w ays em ancip ated ( fr om m atter ) an d m ak es H ari d w el l in ( h i s) mind e asil y b e is absorbed ,

in the Inn ate ( S uprem e ) 1

.

( Though ) he perf orm m any ( religious ) w orks he does n o t obtain fin al em ancip ation , .

H e w anders about in f oreign countri es an d i s ruined by s econd love ( du ality ) .

U sel es sly his ( hum an ) birth is lost by the decei tf ul on e w ithou t the w ord ( o f the Guru ) he is
'

i ncurri ng p ain .

W h o checks b usy activity an d keeps it b ack

He obtains by the favour of the Guru the highest step .

The true Guru himsel f unites (him ) to union ( with H ari ) being united w ith the beloved he obtains ,

com fort .

S ome ar e given t o falsehood an d obtain spurious fruits .

By sec ond love they usel essly w a ste their li fe .

T h ey ar e dro w ned themselves an d al l their fam ilies ar e dro w ned ( by th em ) h aving spoken falsehood ,

they are e ating poi son .

S ome ( r are ) di sciple sees in this ( hum an ) body the mind

W hen he so aks up by love an d devotion h is individu ality .

The S iddh s an d S adh iks an d silen t ascetics continue in deep medit ation yet even in their body th e ,

min d is n ot becoming visible .

That cre ator himsel f causes ( every thi ng ) t o be done .

W h at c an another d o wh at is done by a cre ature

,

Nan ak ( s ays ) : To whom h e gives the n ame he t akes it ; he c auses the n ame t o d w ell in ( m an s )
,
’

min d .

M aj /z ; mahal a III .

IV X X V X X . .

In this c avern ( = body ) is an inexh austible tre asure .

In it ( i e th e bo dy ) d w ells the invi sible boundless H ari

. .
,
.

H e himsel f i s hidden he him sel f i s m ani fest by t h e w ord

, , of the Guru he is doing aw a y the indi
ual i t y
v id ( of m an ) .

P a use .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) cause the nectar n ame to d well in ( their )
, , ,
-

mind .

The nectar name is a gre at s weet juice out o f th e doctrine o f the Guru they ar e drinking nectar
-
, .

H aving destroyed egotism ( individuality ) the ad am ant shutters are opened ( by t h e Guru ) .

The priceless n ame i s obt ained by the favour o f the Gur u .

W ithout the w ord ( instruction of t h e Gur u) n o o n e gets the n ame by the m ercy of the Guru he ,

m akes it d w ell in ( his ) mind .

( By w hom ) th e ( divine ) know l edge of the Guru as a t rue collyri um is p ut upon ( his ) eyes
In ( his ) he art there is light ignoran ce an d d arkness are disperse d , .

L ight is bl ended w ith the L uminous ( the f ountain of light ) his he art is w on over concili ated to the
( ,

S upreme ) at the g ate o f Hari he obtains lustre

, .

I f he go t o seek ( l a the n ame ) outside his body

. .

He does n ot get the n ame he incurs much f orced l abour an d p ain , .

1
O r : th e l f exi sti g
se - n .

2
h ere com p r ehen sively t h e i n n er m a n , t h e i n t el l i en t o w er as b
g ei n g l ight from l igh t
,
p , .
 RA G Mfi i n , MA H (X X VI)
. A S TP A D . XXV .
1 73

To the blind flesh l y min ded m an it ( i e th e th ing) does not become visible h aving returne d to his
-
. .
,

house ( = body ) 1 the discipl e gets t h e thing ( i e the S upreme ) . . .

By th e f avour of the Guru he obt ains the tr ue Hari .

He sees ( him ) in ( his ) he art an d body the filth o f ( his ) egotism goes o ff , .

S itting in hi s o w n place h e al w ays sings the exce l lences o f B ar i, by me ans o f th e true w ord of th e
(
Guru) he is absorbed ( in Har i ) .

He obstr ucts the nine g ates 2 ( of the bo dy ) he keeps b ack th e runn ing ( mind
) , .

H e gets his d w elli ng in th e tenth ( g ate ) as in his o w n house , .

There th e unbe aten sound is sounded day an d night by the doctrine o f the Gur uh e is hearing 3 th e ,

sound .

Without the w ord ( instruction o f th e Guru ) there is dar kness in the he art .

H e receives th e nine ( sentiments ) an d the seven ( el ementar y substances of the the revol uti on
( in transmigr ation ) does not ce ase .

In the h and of th e true Guru is the key by another the door is not opened the Guru m akes ( the , ,

disci ple ) meet wi th a perf ect lot .

Thou ar t hidden an d m anifest in al l pl aces .

Being united by the favour o f the Guru acuteness of mind is obtaine d .

N an ak ( s ays ) P r aise thou al ways the n am e ! the disciple m akes it dw ell in ( his ) mind .

Mdj h ; mah al d I I I .

X X V . X X VI .

The disciple is united ( w ith Hari ) he himsel f unite s (hi m ) , .

De ath does n ot overcome ( him ) pain does n ot afflict ( him ) , .

Having destroyed egotism ( indi vidu ality ) h e bre aks al l bonds the disciple is lustrous by the word ( of ,

the Guru ) .

P ause .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them w h o ) are lustrous by the n am e of Hari H ari

, , , , .

The disciple si ngs the disci ple dances he appl ies his mind to Hari
, , .

The disciple is approved of he m ay live ( or ) die , .

H i s) li f e is not consumed ( if ) he kno w s the w ord ( of the Guru )

( , .

The disc iple d oes not die nor d oes de ath devour ( him ) the disciple is absorbed in the Tr ue one
, , .

Th e disciple obtai ns lustre at the gate of Hari .

The disciple puts away f rom w ithin his o wn sel f indivi du ality ) .

H e himself crosses an d c auses al l his f ami lies t o cross the disciple is adj usting ( his) li fe , .
5

P ai n never befalls the body of the disciple .

The disciple s p ain c aused by egotism ( individu al ity ) ce ases

’
, , .

The mind of the discip le is p ure filth does not again stick t o it ; the disciple is e asily ab sorbed
, .

l Th e re adin
g y m a n uscript s : W
of m an is w ro n g Wffi m ust be re ad in i t s ste a d , , .

Th e re a ding o f m any m anuscripts ( a n d o f the li thogr aphed copies ) : ( F3 i s w ro n g U must be rea d

a
, , ,

as bo rn e out b the b est m anuscrip ts

y
.

3
m verb al a dj e ctive : h ea r i n g T h e se n se o f this vel se i s By a bstra ction f rom .

w ithout an d r estrainin g the v ital bre ath l n the tenth g a te th e so und n o t p 1 o d uc ed by be atin g ( a music al i n st r u
ment) 1 s heard i e 0 m indicat ive o f th e mental ab so r ption 1 n the S upreme
, . . ,
.

is e re fe rr ed to t h e nine ( H or sen t i m e n t s o f t h e 31x to the seve n c ons t ituen t

‘

' 7 t b : 13
E 13 g . o ,

elements o f th e body .

i a He gains t h e object o f h is li fe
5 .
. .
 1 74 Rit e Mft i n MA H ,
. A S TP A D X X . VI .
(X X VII ) .

The di sciple obt ains the gre atness of the n ame .

The di sciple sings the praises ( of Hari ) an d gets lustre ( th ereby ) .

H e rem ain s al w ays in j oy d ay an d night the disciple is perf ormin g the w ord ( = order of th e
,

Guru ) .

The di sciple is daily in love w ith the w ord ( o f the Gur u ) .

In the f our periods ( of the w orld ) it is kno w n by the disciple .

The disciple sings th e praises ( of H ari ) he is alw ays pure by me ans of the w ord ( of th e Guru ) he is
, ,

performi ng devotion .

W ithout the Guru there i s utter darkness .

S eiz ed by de a th they m ake shrieks .

They are daily sick w orms o f ordure an d ar e incurring p ai n in ordure

,
.

The di sciple himself docs an d c auses to be done ( everything ) .

he himsel = H ar i h as come an d settled in the he ar t o f the disciple

( F or
) f ( ) .

Nan ak ( s ays ) by the n ame gre atness is obtained from the perfect Guru he ( i e the di sciple ) obtains , . .

it ( i e the n ame )
. . .

Maj /a mahal d II I .

X X VI . X X V II .

There is one an d the s ame light ( = vit al po w er ) in the bodies .

The tr ue perfect Guru sho w s ( this ) by his instruction

,
.
.

By ( Hari ) himself the di fference is m ade w ithin the body he himself ( also ) is m aking the h ar mony
1
, .

P ause .

I devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them wh o ) sing the praises of the tru e Hari
am , , , .

Without th e Guru n o o n e obtains understanding ( of truth ) t h e disciple is absorbed n atural ly , .

Thou thyself ar t bril l i ant thou thysel f fasc in at est the w orld
, .

Thou thysel f st r in gest the w orld by a gl ance ?

Thou thyself givest pain an d j oy 0 cre ator the disciple is seeing H ari
, , .

The creator h imself does an d c auses to be done ( ever ything ) .

H e himsel f m akes th e w ord ( o f the Guru ) d w ell in t h e mind .

F rom the instruction ( of t h e Guru ) the nectar sound ( = the n ame ) sprin gs up the di sciple tell s an d -
,

procl aims it .

Thou thyself ( ar t ) th e cre ator thou thy self ( ar t ) th e enj oyer

, .

( Hi s) bonds ar e broken he is al ways free ( from m atter )

,

H e him self i s al w ays fr ee h e hi msel f is true ( wh o ) is a pprehendi ng the in apprehensible one

, , .

Thou thyself ( art ) the M ay a thou thysel f the sh ade ( c a used by the Maya)
, .

Thou thyself the spiritu al blindness ( by w hom ) the w orld w as cre ated
, .

Thou thyself ( art ) the giver o f t h e excellences thou thyself sin gest the excell ences thou thysel f ,
3
,

tell est an d p r ocl ai m est ( them ) .

Thou thysel f does t an d thou thysel f c ausest to be done ( everything ) .

Thou thyself est abl i sh est an d thou thysel f di sest abl i sh est .

W ithout thee nothing i s done thou thyself ar t putting ( the cre atures ) into ( their ) w ork
, .

( 7 T h ou thysel f kill est an d thou thyse l f v iv i fi est .

1
Di f ere n ce du ality.

2
Tho uo er l o ok est t h e w o rld w ith o n e gl ance
v .

3
T h e sen se i s : h e puts h i s o w n pra is e into t h e mouth of the devotee an d he him sel f is a lso the devotee
,

w h o sings it
1 76 RAG Mi i H MA H, . III .
, A S TP A D . XX VIII . X X IX .
(X X IX . X XX .
)

M ej ia; mahal a III .

X X V III . X X IX .

H ari
himself unites ( those ) an d m akes ( them ) do service
( Whose ) second love ( = duality ) ce ases by m e ans of the w ord o f th e Guru .

H ari is pure ( an d ) al ways giving ( his ) qu alities ( t o praise ) he himself ( also ) is absorbing ( them ) in ,

the qu alities of H ari .

P ause .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( t o t hem w h o ) are m aking the perfectly True on e d well in
, , ,

( their) he art .

The tr u e n am e is al w ays pure by th e w ord o f the Guru it d wells in the mind

,
.

The Guru hi msel f is bountiful disposing the destiny ,

.

( H i s) serv ants serve ( him ) by the disciples H ari is kno w n

,
.

By the nectar n ame ( his ) people ar e al ways lustrous from the instruction of the Guru they obtain
-
,

the j uice nect ar) o f Hari .

In the c avern ( = body ) i s a be auti f ul place .

By the per fect Guru the error of egotism ( individu ality ) is stopped .

D ay by d ay they pr aise the n ame they ar e imbued w ith love ( t o it) by the mercy o f the Guru they
, ,

obtain it .

By me ans o f the w ord of the Guru they reflect on this c avern ( = body )
W ithin ( w hom ) the pure n ame o f Murari d w ells .

They sing the praises o f Hari they become lustrous by th e w or d ( of the Guru ) h aving met with
, ,

( their ) beloved they obtain comfort

, .

Yam a is a receiver o f customs ; on second love he levies an impost .

H e punishes him w h o h as missed the n ame

, .

H e takes account of t w enty f our minutes ( gh ar i s) an d o f f orty eight minu

-
tes f rom a Rati he is -
,

draw i ng o ut the w eight o f a Masa .

l

W h o does n o t think o f her beloved in h er father s house ’

S h e robbed by second love w eeps ( w ith ) l amentations

, , .

S h e is quite un adorned def ormed an d be aring ill boding m arks n ot in a dre am she obtains her
,
-
,

beloved .

( By w hom ) in her father s house the beloved is m ade t o d w ell in her he art
’

( To her ) he is sho w n ( as bei n g ) in ( her ) presence by the perfect Guru .

By ( that ) w om an the beloved i s kept fast she puts ( him ) t o her neck by m eans o f the wor d ( of th e
, ,

Guru ) she enj oys the beloved her bed is be autif ul

, .

H e himself gives ( an d ) c alls .

H is ow n n ame he m akes d w ell in the heart .

N an ak ( s ays ) : the gre atness o f the n ame accrues ( t o them w h o d aily al w ays sing his pr aises
) ( ) , .

M ay t mah a l d III .

IX X X X X X . .

( Their) life is excellent ( wh o ) d w el l in their o wn pl ace

,

( Wh o ) serve th e t r ue Gu r u an d le a d a retired life in their house .

T h ey rem ain in the love o f H ari they ar e al ways imbued w ith love to Hari ), by the relish
,
( of Hari
( their) mind is s ati ated .

1
A Masa i s e qual to eight (o r fi ve) Rati s .
 RA G MA i H MA H , . A S TP A D . X XX .
(X X X I ) .
1 77

P ause .

I am devoted O L ord I am devoted ( to them wh o ) h aving re ad an d understood ( the n ame ) m ake it

, , ,

d w ell in t heir he art .

The disciples re ad an d pr aise the n ame o f Hari an d ar e obt aining lustre at the true g ate .

H ari is contained ( every w here ) in apprehensibly an d impenetrably .

By n o contriv ance c an he be obtained .

I f he ( t e H ari ) besto w his mercy then the true Guru meets w ith on e by his favour able look he
. .
( ) , ,

is uniting to union ( w ith himsel f ) .

Wh o re ads in second love does not understand .

On accoun t of the three fold M ay a he is tossed about .

The threef old bond bre aks by me ans of the w ord of the Gur u by the w ord of the Gur uhe ( t e Hari ) , . .

is procuring final em ancip ation .

This ( hum an ) vol atil e mind does not come into ( one s ) po w er ’
.

It clin gs t o du ality an d runs in t h e ten directions ( o f the e arth ) .

It is a w or m o f poison it is steeped in poison an d in poison it i s consumed

, .

“
I I ” he s ays his o wn sel f he c auses to be brought forth
, , , .
1

H e does m any ( religious ) w orks but is n o t at al l a ccepted , .

W ithout thee nothing is done ( on w hom ) thou b est ow est ( thy f avour ) he is lustrous by the w ord ,

( of the Guru ) .

H e is born an d consumed ( but ) H ari he does not co mprehend, .

D aily he w anders about in second love .

The life o f the self w illed one is lost uselessly at the end w hen he is gone he is regretting it
-
, , , .

The beloved ( = husb and ) is in a foreign country ( an d ) she ( = his w i fe ) is decorating ( herself ) , .

The blind self w illed w om an does such w orks

- .

I n this w orl d she ( gets ) n o be auty in th at w orld no entr ance she is uselessly w asting her li fetime
, , .

The n ame of H ari is kno w n by some rare on e .

From the w ord of the perfect Guru it is apprehended .

Day by d ay he perf orms devotion d ay an d night b e e asily obt ains comfort,

.

In all abides th at ( only ) O n e .

S ome r are discip l e underst ands ( this ) .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : The people w h o ar e attached t o the n ame ar e lustrous he himsel f ( al e Hari ) is
, , ,
.

u ni tin g them out of mercy .

Meij i»; mahal a III .

X X X . X X X I .

The fleshl y minded one re ads an d is c alled a Ban dit

- .

By second love he incurs gre at p ain .

Intoxic ated by w orldl y affairs he sees nothing ag ain an d ag ain he comes into the ,
w omb .

P ause .

I devoted O Lord I am devoted ( t o them wh o) h aving destroyed their egotism ( individual ity )
am , , , , ,

ar e united ( w ith H ar i ) .

On account of ( their ) service of the Guru Hari takes hi s abode in ( their ) he art they are e asily ,

d rinking the j uice of Hari .

They re a d the V éda (but ) the t aste o f H ar i h as n ot come ( to them )

,
.

T h ey expl ain a discourse ( but ) ar e blinded by the May a

,
.

1
W v
E T,c aus T o c ause to be brought forth ;
. .
to d eliv er ( s aid of a midwife) . The sense is : b e
everywhere puts in his o wn self .
 V

1 78 BKG MKJH MAH , . A S TP AD . XXX I (X X X II )

. .

The re is alw ays ignorance an d d arkness in the intoxicated ones ( but) th e disciple understan ds and ,

i s pr aising Hari .

( By w hom ) th e ine ffable one is rel ated h e is lustrous by the w ord ,

.

By the instructi on of th e Guru he likes in ( his) mind the True one 1

.

The perfectly True one abides ( w i th him ) d ay an d night ( an d ) t h e mind takes delight 2 in the True ,

Those w h o are attached to the True one the True one likes ,
.

H e himself gives ( to them ) an d does n o t repent o f it .

From the w ord of the Guru the True one is al ways kn ow n being united w ith the True one they ,

obtain com fort .

The filth o f falsehood an d unrighteousness does not stick to them .

By the fa vour o f the Guru they w ake d aily .

The pure n ame d w ells w ithin ( their) he art the L uminous one is blending light ( w ith himsel f ) ,
.

They re ad in the three qu alities th e truth of B ari they do not kno w ,

3
.

H aving strayed aw ay f rom the root ( =fi rst c ause ) they d o not apprehend the w ord o f the Guru .

They are overspre ad w ith spiritu al blindness nothing i s ( clearly ) seen ; fr o m the w ord o f th e Guru ,

they obtain H ari .

They re ad aloud the V éd a ( blinded by ) th e th ree fold Maya

, .

The fi esh l y minded do n ot understand ( them ) on a ccount of second love

-

( Blinded by ) the three qu al ities they re ad the O n e Hari t hey do not kno w w ithout comprehending
, ,

( him ) th ey incur p ain .

When it is ple asing to him then he himsel f unites ( with h imsel f )

, .

By me ans of the w ord o f the Guru he puts a stop to doubt an d p ain .

Nan ak ( says) the gre at ness o f the n ame is true by minding the n ame they obt ain com fort , .

Jlf dj lz maka l d III .

XXX I . X XX II .

Hehimself is w ithout an y qu alities an d endo w ed w ith al l qu alities .

W h o apprehends the truth ( = the S upreme ) h e becomes a Ban dit , .

He himself crosses an d m akes al l his f amilies cro ss wh o m akes the n ame , of B ar i d w ell in his mind .

P ause .

I am d evoted O L ord I am devoted ( t o them wh o ) h avi n g tasted the j uice of Hari are getti n g
, , , , ,

i t s fl avour.

Those p eople are pure w h o t aste the j uice o f B ar i they ar e medit ating on the pure n ame
, , .

They are exempt f rom the obli gati on o f ( religious) w orks ‘ wh o med itate on the w ord ( of th e ,

Guru ) .

In ( their ) he art is the t ruth by divine kno wledge they destroy egotism
, .

3 1 62“ i s lso acti e t o consider t o like to i n cline to

a v , , , .

W W
2
V e h ave i n t h e m an uscrip t s t wo rea d ing s— a 31%
\
( ) } an d ( 6) t In th e
fi rst c a s e 3 m m
m
, .

=
( l i s t h e verb al adject ive of $313 1 v n tak i n g d el igh t i n ; i n the latter , . .
,

3W 1 ( = fifi n afi fi ) i s t h e ver ba l a dj ect ive o f W colouring imbuin g with love A ccordin g to , , .

t h e context th e first r ead ing i s pre ferabl e .

a
3313 S a n sk
’ .

W
t h e aggr eg a t e o f th e thre e qualit ies t h e s am e as t h e f ollo w ing
t h e Maya co n t aini n g the thre e qu alities
,

It i s oppose d here to
fi f fi ffi m fl-T
I , .

.
( afi ) tr ut h
m
.

( S ansk ffi fi i fi) free from t h e obl ig a tio n o f r eligious w orks ( by meditation on t h e n ame)

.
, .
 Ri c M3 311 ,
MA H IV . .
, A S TP A D . I .
(X X X IV ) .

Wh o pr actises ch astity truthf ul ness ,

an d true contr ol of h is senses he is me di tating on the n ame by
,

me ans the perfe ct Guru

of .

In her father s house the w om an i s led astr ay by error

’
.

S h e h as clung t o another an d repents ( o f it ) ag ain ( after w ards ) .

This an d th at w orld both ar e lost n o t in a dre am sh e obt ains com fort

, ,
.

( If ) imb er father s house the w om an keeps in mind her beloved

’

S h e sees ( him as being ) w ith ( her ) by the favour o f the Guru .

S h e re m ains n atur ally imbued w ith love t o ( her ) beloved by me ans o f the w ord ( of the Guru ) she ,

m ake s love (t o him ) .

Their life is fruitful w h o h av e obtained the true Guru ,

.

O ther love is consumed ( by them ) by me ans o f the w ord o f the Guru .

The O n e abides in ( their ) he art h aving j oined the society of the pious they ar e singing the attributes
,

o f H ari .

Wh o does n ot serve the true Guru for w h at h as he come ( into the w orld ) ? ,

H is life is a m isery h i s hum an birth is uselessly thro w n aw ay

,
.

The n ame does n ot come into the mind of the fleshl y minded on e w i tho ut the n ame he is -
,

incurring much p ain .

By w hom cre atio n i s m ade h e know s ( w ith certainty ) ,

.

H e himself unites ( him ) ( w h o ) k no w s ( him ) by me ans o f t h e word ( of the Guru )

,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) the n ame is obt ained by those people on w hose f orehe ad ( this ) destiny w as w ritten ,
1

from the beginning .

M11 511 ; MA H A L A IV .

I . X X X IV .

Hehimself is the primev al boundless m ale ( = S upreme Being ) , .

H e himself establishes an d h aving established disestablishes ( ag ain )

, .

In al l e xists th at O n e ; the disciple obtai ns lustre .

P a use .

I devoted O L ord I am devoted ( t o them w h o ) ar e meditating on th e n ame o f the F ormless on e

am , , , .

H e h as n o form n o r sign ( an d is yet ) seen in everybody ( = in every thing cre ated ) the di sciple is ,

apprehending the in apprehensible o n e .

Thou ar t ki nd an d merci ful that L ord ,

.

W ithout thee there is none other .

I f the Guru bestow his f avour he gives the n ame w h o pr aises ( the n ame ) he is absorbed in the n ame
, , .

Thou thysel f ar t the true cre ator .

Thy store rooms are fill ed w ith devotion ”

- .

The discipl e gets the n ame his he art i s thereby imbued w ith love n aturally he is appl y ing deep
, ,

m edi t ation ( o n the n am e ) .

Day by d ay I sing thy attributes O L ord ! ,

Thee I praise O my beloved 1

,

W ithout thee I d o n ot w ant an y one else by the favour of the Guru thou art to be obtained 3 , .

fi y m g fa nn = fa3 u1 syl l a bl e ?{fi mn b eing a me anin gl ess allitera tion

‘ ‘

fg fid nn
1
th e
' ' ’ '
or ,
- .

T h e sen se o f this exp re s sio n t h y sto re room s ar e fill ed w it h d evo t io n o r a d ora t io n

2
is ; al l devotio n
“ - ”
, ,

i s b es t o w ed by thee f r o m t h y in exh a us ti ble treasury .

U l a m t i s h ere g er un di v e
3 ‘

.
 RA G MA JH , MA H V . .
, A S TI’ A D . I .
(X X X V ) .
1 81

The me asure of the un attai nable an d i n apprehensible one is not obtaine d .

If thou best o w est thy ow n mercy then thou un i t est w ith thyself
( ,
) .

By me ans of t h e w ord of t h e perfect Guru thou ar t meditated upon ; w h o obeys the w ord ( of the
Guru ) is obt ainin g com f ort
, .

The tongue o f a virtuous w om an sings the attributes ( o f H ari ) .

( Wh o ) pr aises the n ame she i s ple asing t o the True o n e

, .

The ( fem ale ) disciple rem ains al w ays imbued w ith love ( t o H ari ) h aving met w ith the True one ,

she is obtaini ng lustre .

The fi eshl y —minded one does ( religious ) w o rks out o f egotism .

In the gamblin g ( fo r ) life al l the pl ay i s lost ( by her ) .

W ithin ( her ) is greediness an d gre a t d arkness ag ain an d ag ain sh e is coming an d going , .

The cre ator himself gives gre atness ( to those )

T o w hom he decreed it f rom the beginning .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : w h o gets the n ame the f e ar des troyin g he obt ains comf ort from the w ord of the Guru
,
-
, .

MA i H ; M A HA L A v .

Gh ar I .

I . X X X V .

W ithin ( the mind ) the i n apprehensible

c annot be apprehended on e .

H aving taken the j e w el o f the n ame he h as conce aled it .

The un attain able in apprehensible one wh o is higher th an all is apprehended ‘

, , ,

o f the Gur u .

P ause ,

I am devoted O L ord I am d evoted ( t o them w h o ) in t h e K ali ( yug) proclaim the n ame

, , ,
-
.

The s aints are beloved an d supporte d by the True o n e by a gre at lot they obt ain ( his ) sight , .

F or whom ( i e i n w hose se arch ) the S adh ik s an d S i ddh s w ander about

.
.

O n w hom ) the Br ahm as an d Indra s medit ate in ( their ) he art

(
( Wh om ) the thirty three crores ( o f gods ) se arch for him they pr ai se in their he art h aving met w ith
-
, ,

the Guru .

The eight w atches the w ind mutters thee .

The e arth i s the servant an d runner o f ( thy ) f eet .

In the ( four ) mines an d ( their ) species in al l th ou ar t ind welling i n th e mind of al l thou ar t the
, ,

sen tient principle ,

2

The tr ue L ord is know n to the disciple .

From the w ord of t h e perfect Guru h e is kno w n .

By w hom he i s dr unk they ar e s atiated the true ones ar e filled w ith the True one
, ,
.

In his house is com f ort he is h appy ,

.

H e al w ays indulges in j oy p astime an d pl ay , .

H e is w e al thy he is a gre at m erch ant w h o fixes his mind on the feet of th e Guru
, ,
.

First t h e dai ly bre ad is prep ared by th ee .

Then the l iving cre atures ar e produced by thee .

or m u
W m here simply
is = n .

s
f formi n g l n the m i n d concep tion fe el in g ( S ansk
, , . or taken as ad jec tive f ai nt ing
.
,

i
a c t ng .
 ’
1 82 R E G Mi iH ,
MA H V . .
,
A S TP A D . II .
( X X X VI ) .

L ike thee there is n o donor no other L ord ( thou ar t ) n ot brin ging an y one in contact ( with thyself )
, , .

W ith w hom thou ar t ple ased he medi tates on thee ,

.

H e perf orms the a dvice o f the holy people .

He himsel f crosses an d m akes al l his families cross ; at the thre shold he is not repulsed ‘ .

Thou ( ar t ) gre at ( thou ar t ) higher th an high

,
.

Thou ar t endless thou ar t infin itely extended

,
.
2

I s acri fice m ysel f for thee Nan ak is the slave ( o f thy ) sl aves
,
.
3

Jll dj h ; mahal d V .

II . X XX VI .

( l Wh o is f ree ( liberated ) wh o is bound ? ,

W h o is endo w ed w ith ( divine ) kno w ledge w h o i s the te acher ( o f it ) ?4 ,

Wh o is householder w h o is living lonely ? w h o attains ( his ) v alue S i r

, ,

In w h at w ise is ( on e) bound in w h at w ise set free ? ,

In w h at w ise is coming an d going stopped

Wh o is doing ( religious ) w orks w h o is abstainin g from w orks ? w h o orders an d is ( himsel f )
,

ordered S ir ?
,
6

W h o is h a ppy w h o is a
,
fi‘
l i c ted ?
W h o is tur ning hi s face to w ards w h o is tu r ning it aw ay ? ,

In w h at wi se is meetin g ( union ) e ffected in w h at w ise sep aration ? w h o m akes this m anner ,

m anifest S ir ? ,

W h at is th at letter by w hich ( w orldly ) activity is stopped ?

,

W h at is the inst ruction by me ans o f w hich ( on e) h ears equ all y p ain an d ple asure ?
,

Wh at is the m anner o f li fe by w hich ( on e) meditates on the S upreme Brahm ? in w hat m anner

,

m ay ( on e) sing ( h is) pr ai se S ir ? ,

The disciple is free the disc iple is bound ( t o H ari )

,
.

The disciple is endo w ed w ith ( divin e ) kno w ledge the disciple is te aching , .

The disciple as householder ( o r ) living lonely i s blessed t h e disciple attains ( his i e H ari s ) v alue S i r !
, , , ,
. .
’
,

By egotism o n e is bound the disciple i s set free ,

.

The coming an d going of the disciple is stopped .

The disciple is doing ( religious ) w orks the disciple is abstain in g from w orks the disciple acts by ,
8
,

his ( o wn ) n atural dispos ition S ir ! ,

The di sciple is h appy th e sel f w illed one is afflicted

,
-
.

The di sciple is turning h i s fa ce to w ards ( the Guru ) the self w ill ed on e is turning it a w ay ( from hi m ) ,
-
.

The disciple is uni ted ( with Hari ) the s elf w illed on e i s sep arated the disciple m akes ( this ) m anner
,
-
,

m an ifest S i r !
,

1
m (= is h ere
verb al a dject ive obt a i n i ng : .

S an sk “ Et a exte n de d e n l a rge d
.
, , .

E W a co r ruptio n i n stead o f QT" Q1 1 1 1

3 “

21 81 N ,

fi mn fi o n ly s i g n ifies e n do wed w i th k n o wl edg e though w e sh ould r ath er exp ect h ere ( fo r th e s ake
4 '
.
,

o f co n t1 a st ) W (E m a ) seek i n g a fter k n o wl e dge 8 3 3 1 (am ) speakin g ; m aster t ea c h er T h e

'
, .
: , .

con st ruction i s q 3 6 3 Ii et c
‘

, .

as m b e o rd er s an d i s ( himsel f ) or d ere d i e he a cts for h imsel f spo n t aneously as expl ai n ed i n v 6

5
, , . .
, . .

dj w o r ki n g d oin g religious w orks fin al (7 bein g d roppe d thou h t h e w or d becomes

6
3 3 3-
11 ,
a .
,
g , ,
-

t h us co n fo u nded with the subs t an ti v e 3 3 1 1 w ork , .

1 84 REG MA i H , MA H . V .
, A S TP A D . IV . V .
(X X X VIII . XXX X I .
)

M IAi H ; M A H ALA V
Gh ar II .

IV . X X X VIII .

P ause .

Continu all y continually the deity shoul d be remembered

,
.

By n o me ans it should be forgotten from th e mind .

From th e society o f th e s aints ( th at ) is obt ain ed ,

By me ans of w hich one mu st not go o n the road o f Yam a .

T ake as viaticum the n ame o f H ari an d n o repro ach w ill be fall thy fam ily S ir ! ,

Wh o are remembering th e L ord

They are n o t thro w n into hel l .

N o hot w ind touch es ( them ) into w hose he art he h as come an d settled ( there ) S i r '
, ,

They ar e be autif ul an d lustrous :

Wh o ar e sitting in the society o f the pious
1
.

By w ho m the w e alth o f Hari is collected they are prof ound ( an d ) boundless S ir ' , ,

( By w hom ) the nectar ( an d ) elixir of H ari is drunk

By seeing the face o f ( th at ) m an one lives ( it is lived ) .

H aving adj usted all ( thy ) business w orship continu all y the f eet o f the Guru S ir
, ,

W h o by H ari is made his o w n

To h im the L ord is know n .

He is a hero he is f oremost on w hose f orehe ad the lot ( is w ritten ) S ir

, , ,

W h o ( fem ) in ( her ) he art is immersed ( in ) the L ord

.

S h e is enj oying kingly ( gr and ) enj oyments .

( By w hom ) n o w icked ( th i ng ) is done sh e crosses h a vi n g appli ed

,
hersel f t o true w ork 0 de a r '
, ,

( By whom ) the creator is m ade t o dw el l in ( her ) hear t

S h e obtains the fruit o f ( her ) li fe .

( I f ) H ari the husb and is liked in ( thy ) he art thy (h appy ) m arried state is l asting 0 cl e ar !
, , ,

The immov able thin g is obtained ( by hi m )

( W h o ) is in the a sylum of the f e ar destroying ( Hari ) -
.

Nan ak ( says ) putting ( him) into the hem ( of his g arment ) he is brought across by him t e H ari
( ) . .
,

endless births ar e overcome S i r ! ,

0 222 B y th e f avour f
o the tr ue Gum

MAi H ; MAH A L A V
el m I I I .

V . X X X IX .

P ause .

( Wh o ) conti nu ally mu tters H ari in ( h is) mind is c almness

, .

By remembering remember ing the Gur dé v ( his ) fe ars ar e efi ac c d an d removed

,
'

( Wh o ) comes to the asylum o f the S upreme Br ahm w h y sh ould he pine wi th grie f ? ,

By w orshipping the feet of the s aints an d pious al l w ishes ar e ful fil led .

fi n ; fin ? m I[ I m , 5 being added fo r the s ak e of th e rh yme .

 RAG M IAi H , MA H V . .
, BARA H MAR K, 1 . 2 .

1 85

In every body abides the One ,

i n water , la n d an d on the f ace of the e a1 th he is fully ,

contained .

( By w hom )
the remover of sins i s w orshipped ( he is ) pure by the dust of the s aints , .

Al l rele ase ( em ancip ation ) ( is m ade by the L ord himself by muttering Hari c almness
) ,

( coldness ) is e ffected .

By the cre ator inquiry ( ex amin ation ) 1 is m ade the w icked died h aving beco m e pow erless , .
2

N an ak ( s ays ) w h o is attached t o the true n am e he al w ays sees H ari in his presence , .

BARA H MAHA .
3

Maj h mah al a V .

Ghar
’
IV .

6m B y th e f avour o f the tr ue Gur uI

Be merciful 0 Ram an d uni te ( with thysel f ) those w h o w ere separated ( from thee ) by ( their
, , ,

f orm er ) w orks an d deeds .

In the f our qu arters in the ten directions ( o f the e arth ) ( we ) erred about being w orn o ut ( we) h ave
, ,

come t o the protection o f the L ord .

A c o w w ithout mil k is o f no use w h atever .

W ithout w ater vegetables 4 ar e w ithering nothing is produced ,

5
.
.

I f there be n o meeting w ith H ari the s w eethe art h o w sh all rest be obtained ? , ,

In w hat house H ari the beloved ( husb and ) is n o t present that to w n ( an d ) village is a f urn ace
, , , .

A l l orn aments al l betel le af j uices w i t h the body ar e but poor ( orn aments )
,
- .

S h e w h o is destitute of the L ord the beloved ( husb and ) is ( w ithout ) friend an d s w eethe art al l ( her )
, ,

li fetime 6.

The prayer of Nan ak is : be mercif ul an d give ( thy ) n ame !

0 L ord H ari j oi ( me ) w ith the L or d w hose d w elling pl ace I s immov able
n
-
.
, ,

I f G6 v in d be a dored 1 n t h e ( month ) Ge t 7 gre at j oy is produced ,

.

By m eeti ng w ith the holy people he 1 s obtai n ed by the tongue ( his ) n ame is uttered ,
.

W h o have obtained their o w n L ord they come into his account ,

.

W h o live on e moment w ithout him the li fe o f ( those ) men is useless ,

.

In w ater l and an d o n the face o f the e arth he is present throughout he is contained in the trees
, , .

Into w hose mind th at L ord does n o t come h o w much sh all I count his p ain ,

B y w hom th at L ord is t aken possession o f their lot i s propiti ated

9
.
,

My he rt 1 s lon ging for the sight o f H ari N an ak ( h as) thirst 1 n ( his ) mind
( ) a ,
.

Th at L ord unites ( h i m w ith himself ) 1 n ( the month p f ) C at w h o clings to ( his ) feet ,

.

I
m a , 8 . m . inquiry c 0 1 r up ted f1 o m
,
U
4 5
1)
.

31 1 1 , f rom the
6\
a
T h e t w el v e m on t h s .

31IH , s
.
f , S a nsk .
mai .

5
21 hi
31 , t n
g from a1 3 = ,
d av v a = d av = d am ( 21 bei ng c h ang e d t o m ) .

e
m contr
, a cted from li fetim e fag afi m l must be rep . % m
eated aft el 31
' '

, otherwise
se n se i s t o be g ot o ut o f this vers e
@
.

first o n th o f th e civil ye ar comm enci n g about the mid dle o f Ma rch

7
3 i s t h e m ,
.

o n a ccount o f the rhyme (HEW )

5
NE T
1 86 RE G Mai n , MA H . V .
, BA RA H Mi n a, 3 —6 .

sh al l in ( the month of V ai sakh the women sep arated ( from their husb ands ) be patient
Ho w l
, , ,

w hose love is cut off ?

H aving f orgotten Hari the sw eethe art the husb and it ( i e the w orld ) h as clung to the deceit
, , ,
. .

o f th e M aya .

S o n w i fe property ( do not go ) w ith ( m an ) th at H ari ( alone i s) imper ish able

, , ,
.

A dhe rin g adh er ing ( t o ) a false business th e w hole ( w orld ) is de ad ( by ) spiri t ual b l indness
,
.

W ithout the n ame of the O n e H ari it ( t e th e w orld ) is robbed on the w ay on w ards ( to the other . .

w orld ) .

H avin g forgotten the Deity ( m an ) is ruined ; w ithout the L ord there is none other .

W h o cl ing to the feet of the beloved their reputation is pure , .

( This ) is the pr ayer o f Nan ak to the L ord : 0 L ord j oin ( me ) let me obtain thee , ,

Then V ai sakh becomes be autiful w hen the s aints meet w ith that H ari ,
.

In ( the month of J 2«c union w ith H ar i should be desired be fore whom all h o w
'

,
.

( Wh o ) clings to t h e skirt of H ari the sw eetheart ( him ) he does not h and over bound to an y one
, ,
.

Rubies an d pe arls ar e the n ame of the L ord they c annot be stolen ,

.

( W ith ) N aray an ar e ( all ) the ple a sures w hich are gratef ul to the mind ,
.

W h at H ari wi shes th at he does th at very thin g the cre atur es do

, , .

Wh o are m ade by the L ord h is o w n they ar e c alled h appy ,

.

W h o being t aken as his o w n are united ( w ith hi m ) h o w shoul d they be sep arated ( from him )
, , ,

an d w eep

( By w hom ) the society o f the pious is obtained they 0 Nan ak enjoy ple asures v
, , , .

O L ord H ar i ( the month o f ) Jé th is delightf ul to him on w hose f orehe ad ( this ) lot ( is w ri tten )
, ,
.

( The month o f [t ear becomes hot to him w ith w hom H ari is not
s
.
,

H aving f orsaken the li fe o f the w orld the divine m ale the hope of man , ,

H e is ruined by du al ity on his neck h as fallen the noose o f Yam a

, .

Wh at h e so w s that he re aps w h at is w ritten on his f orehe ad

, , .

The night is p assed it ( t e the w orld ) is repenting it h as ri sen an d gone o ff hopele ss

,
. .
,
.

W ith w hom the pious fall in they ar e liber ated at the thr eshold , .

0 L ord be stow thy o w n mercy ! ( I am ) thi rstin g aft er t h y sight

, .

0 L ord w ithout thee there is none o ther I this is the pr ayer ( = w ord ) of N an ak
, .

( The month o f As ar becomes agree able t o him in w hose he art the f eet of H ar i d w ell , .

In ( th e month of savan ‘ ( th a t) w om an is excellent ( w h o ) h as love to the lotus o f the f oot

( of Hari ) .

( W hose ) mind body is imbued wi th love to the T r ue o n e ( her ) support is the O n e n ame
an d ,
.

The ple asure of the w orld is false al l th at is seen is ashes , , , .

A drop o f the n ecta r o f H a ri is delightf ul w h o j oins the s aints b e ( or she ) is drinking it , , .

W ood an d grass h as become green fr om the L ord t h e boun dl ess di vi ne m ale is po w erful ,
.

( My ) he art is longing t o be united w ith H ar i by destiny he is besto w ing it .

By w hom the L ord h as been obtai ned to those ( fem ale ) comp ani ons I am al ways devoted , .

N an ak ( s ays ) 0 Hari bestow mercy by m e ans of the w ord o f the Guru ( thou ar t ) aecom
,

p l ishi n g ( me ) .

( The month of sav an is ple as ant to the m on ( w hose ) bre ast is the neckl ace o f the n ame o f H ari
‘ 5
, .

S ansk am @ k 6319 S an s k $ 13 1 8 m
3 4
S ansk
2
. . S an s . . . . . .

5
M o st MS S ( a n d lso th e li thog r aphe d copy o f L ah ore) re ad : 1 13 1 3183 b ut thi s i s senseless m
. a , ,

m ust be read though th e gender ( fem ) i s w rong 3113 8 b ei n g m asc B ut a s it should rhyme w ith
, .
, .

( W ) it is used here in spi te o f i ts bei n g a gramm atical blunder

, .
1 88 RE G MA311 . MA H V . .
,
BA RA H MKHE , 1 1- 1 4 .

the month cold does not ect her clung to the neck of H ari ( her ) Lord
(In o f ) P é k h aff ( ) ( w h o ) h as , ,
.

( H er ) m ind is perforated by the lotus o f the f oot ( of H ari ) ( there is in her ) a desire f or an intervie w ,

( w ith H ari ) .

( H er
) shelter is Gav i n d G é p al th e kin g she serves her
( ) L ,
ord ?
,

The w orld c annot affect ( her) h aving met ( w ith) the pious she sings the excellences ( of Har i)
,
.

From w hom she w as produced ( w ith) him she is united ; ( by ) true love she is absorbed ( in him )
,
.

By the S uprem e Brahm she is taken by the h and an d absorbed ( in him ) she is not ag ain separated ,

( from him ) .

I am devoted a hundred thous an d times ( to her w hose ) s w eetheart is Hari the un attain able the , , ,

unfathom able on e .

I fall on the protection ( of those ) ( s ays ) Nanak ( w h o h ave ) fall en do wn at the gate o f Nar ay ar}
, ,
.

( The mon th of ) P é kh is ple as ant ( to her she h as) all comf orts on whom the fe arless ( Har i) , ,

bestow s ( them ) .

I n ( the month o f ) M agh " m ake ablution an d b athing w ith the dust of the s aints !
H aving heard the n ame of H ari meditate ( on it) give alms to all ! ,

The fil th of the business of life goes o ff pri de w il l le a ve the he art , .

( Thou ) ar t not del uded by lust ; covetousness the dog becomes extinct , ,
.

The w orld praises those w h o w alk in the tr ue w ay .

A l l the religious m erit of the sixty eight T i r th a s ( is nothing) mercy to the cre atures is approved o f
-
,
.

T o w hom he gives it out o f mercy he is a w ise m an , .

N an ak is a sacrifice for them w h o h ave obt ai n ed their ow n L ord , .

They are accounted as pure in ( the m on th o f ) M agh t o whom the perfect Guru is kind ,
.

In ( the month of ) P h al guri 4 ( sh e is ) acquiring j oy ( to whom ) Hari ( her) s weethe art comes , , ,

an d is m ani fest
5
.

The s aints are the comp an ions of Ram in mercy they ar e united ( by him w ith himsel f ) ,
.

( Her ) bed is be autiful ( she enj oys ) al l com forts n ow there is n o ( longer ) a pl ace for p ain
, ,
.

( H er ) w ish is accompli shed ( sh e is ) very f ortun ate she h as got her husb and H ari the king
, , , ,
.

H aving joined her comp anions she sings a son g o f congra tulation she i n t u n es a song of Gav i n d ,
.

L ike Ha ri none other is seen do n o t comp a re an y o n e w ith him i

This an d th at w orld are adjusted by him he gives an immovable place ,
.

( Wh o ) is pre served by him from the oce an o f the w orld he does n o t run about again in births ,
.

The to ngue i s on e m any are th e excell ences ( o f H ari ) ; he crosses ( s ays ) Nanak w h o fall s do w n at
, , ,

the feet ( of H ari ) .

In ( th e month of P h al gun he should contin u ally be pr aised w h o h as not a bit of covetousness ! ,

By w hom the n ame is meditated upon their w orks are accomplished ,

.

( By w hom ) Hari the perfect Guru is adored they ar e standing at the true threshold
”
.
, , ,

The foot o f Hari is the reposito ry of al l com forts ( by me ans of it one ) crosses the w ater o f the world ,
.

Devotion w ith love those h ave obtaine d w h o do not burn in w orldly pursuits ,
.

F alsehoods ar e gone du ality h as fled they ar e filled w ith the ( al l ) fi 11in g True one
, ,
-
.

Wh o are serving the S upreme Brahm the L ord they keep in ( their) he art the One , ,
.

Months d ays m uh fi r tas ( forty eight minutes ) are good ( to him ) on w hom he looks favourably
, ,
-
, .

N an ak asks the gif t of m eeting w ith Hari 0 H a ri besto w mercy ( on me) , ,

S a nsk lfi fil .
'
fia .
2 3
S a nsk .
ma . S an sk .

W .

T hi s verse m ay also thus be translated : I n P h al gun th ere is acquisition taken as s f ) of

j oy Hari the s we etheart com es a n d i s m anifes t Hal = H3 1

''

, , , . .
 RAG MKi H , MA H V . .
, DIN RA INI , 14 .
1 89

11 11 311 ; M AHA L A V .

DIN RA I N I .

Om B y t h e favour of the true Guru

I serve my o wn true Guru I remember Har i al l the d ays an d nights

, .

H aving given up my o w n self I fall on ( his ) a sylum w ith ( my mouth I spe ak s weet w ords
, ) , .

U nite ( w ith me ) th e s w eethe art an d comp anion sep ar ated ( f rom me ) through m any bir ths 0 Hari , ,

The cre atures th at ar e sep ar ated f rom Hari do n o t d w ell in comf ort 0 sister
, , ,

W ithout Hari the beloved n o rest is obtained I h ave se arch ed an d seen al l w ays
, , ,

I am sep ar ated by my o w n deed not an y o n e is to be bl amed , .

Mercifull y O L ord preserve me nobody else does ( th is ) w ork ‘

, , .

0 Hari w ithout thee ( I am ) mingled w i th dust w here sh all a w ord h e s aid ?

, ,

( This i s) th e prayer o f Nan ak m ay I see H ari the s w eethe art w ith ( my ) eyes ! , ,

The petitions of the cre aturesh e he ars H ari is the pow erful boun dless ( divine ) m ale , , .

In de ath an d life ( I ) adore ( him ) ( w h o is ) the support o f al l ,

.

In ( my ) father in l aw s an d in ( my ) father s house ( I belong to ) th at beloved ( husb and ) whose

- -
’ ’

retinu e is gre at .

( H e is ) hi gh un att ain able o f unf atho m able w isdom w ithout an y end ( an d ) li mit
, , , .

Th at is service ( w hi ch ) w ill ple ase him ( if one ) become the dust o f the s aints
, , .

God is a kind protector of the poor s aving the fallen ones ,

.

( From ) the beginning ( f rom ) the beginning of the Yug he is protecting ( them ) true is the n ame
, , ,

o f the cre ator

. .

( Hi s) v alue nobody kno w s nobody is w eighing ( him ) ,

.

I n he a rt an d body he d w ells contin u ally ( s ay s ) Nan ak ( o f w hom ) no estim ate ( c an be m a de )

, , .

Wh o ( are) serving d ay ( an d ) night the L ord t o them ( I am ) alw ays devoted ,

.

The s aints al w ays al w ays adore the donor o f al l

,

By w hom soul an d body ar e cre ated w h o in mercy h as given li fe ,

.
2

By me ans of the w ord o f t h e Guru ( his ) p ure m an t r is w orshipped an d muttered .

( H is) v al ue c annot be told the L ord is endless

_
,
.

I n w hose he art N aray an d well s h e is c all ed a s aint

3
.
,

The d esir es o f the cre atures ar e fulfill ed (i f ) the L ord the s w eethe art be foun d , , ,
.

N an ak li ves by mut tering H ari al l sins ( he is ) destroyi ng ,

.

T h e cre ature th at does n ot f orget ( him ) d ay an d night becomes flourishing

, ,
.

A l l the contention s the L ord is bringing to an end t o me the humble ( he is givin g ) a pl ace , , , .

I grasp the shelter o f H ari muttering in ( my ) he art continu ally ( h i s) n ame I li ve

,
.

0 L ord besto w thy o w n mercy ( on me ) ( th a t) I m ay repose in the dust o f ( thy ) serv ants !
, ,

A s thou keepest ( me ) so I rem ain w h at thou givest th at I put o n an d eat

, , ,
.

0 L ord produce ( in m e ) t h at e ffort ( th at ) h aving j oined the pious I m ay sing ( thy ) praises !
'

, , , ,

N0 other pl a ce is seen w here sh all I go to cry ?

,

( Thou ar t ) destroy i ng ignor an ce removing d ar kness 0 high un att ain able an d un me sur ble one
,
a a
, ,

May ( my ) sep arated m ind be united w ith H ar i I this is the ai m of Nan ak .

A l l w elfare ( I obtain ) in t h at d ay ( in w hich ) I touch the f eet o f Hari the Guru

, ,
.

3
:

ffi z l ife as the s entient principle o r motivity

2
fi g {3 mer a b eing
ely a n alli t e r a tio n f
1 : .
, s . . .

8
“ 3 t h e S
,
uprem e Go d b ut also a pp l i ed t o ,
a s ai nt or d evotee .

4
“ Te = W W w ithout me a su r e ,
.
 V

1 90 RA G MKJH , V A R I .

RA G MIAi H , V A R I .

M ah al a I .

To be sun g af ter the t une M al K am uri d an d O an d r ah ara, the S Bbi s ‘

‘

Om the true n ame is the cre ator the divine m ale ,

.

By the favour o f the Guru !

I .

S IG/c I I . maha l d .

T h e Guruis the donor the house ( o f of ) coolness

,
the ) Guru ( i s a house the Guru
is the l amp in the three w orlds .

The boon o f immortality O Nan ak happiness is obtai ned by the mind being
, , w on over ( or c on

ciliated w ith him ) .

II ; makal d I . .

In ( his ) first aff ection he sticks t o the milk o f (h i s mother s ) te at

2 ’
.

In the second ( he gets ) kno w l edge o f mother ( an d) father .

In the third ( o f ) brother brother s w ife ( an d ) sister ,

’
.

In the f ourth affection sporting springs up .

In the fi fth ( there is ) r unning after e ating an d drinking .

In the sixth he inquires af ter the c aste o f w omen .

In the seventh a household is set up ( by him ) .

In the eighth w rath is indulged in ( the oause o f ) the destruction of the body , .

In the ninth ( h i s h airs become ) w hite he avy ( h i s) bre athing , .

In the tenth he is burn t an d becomes ashes .

Gone are those songs cries an d sighs ,

3
.

The soul h as flown aw ay h aving inquired after the ro ad .

H e h as come gone ( an d ) died — a ( mere ) n ame

,

A fter w ards he c alls ( to ) the pl atter the cro w s }

N an ak ( s ays ) the aff ection o f the flesh l y minded o n e is blind -

.

Without the Guru the w orld i s dro w ned .

S l ok III .
; maka l d I .

(Up ten ( ye ars goes ) childhood ( w ith ) twenty ( ye ars there i s) sporting ( amorous d alliance )
to) ,
,

( being a m an ) o f thirty he is c all ed be autiful .

( Being ) a m an of f orty he i s in full strength ( being ) a m an of fi fty ( h i s) foot becomes w e ak w ith ,

,

sixty ol d a ge comes on .

( B eing ) a m an of seventy he is w e ak in underst anding ( being ) a m an of eighty he is no more able ,

t o do w ork .

W ith ni nety he is sitting o n a couch being feeble he does n ot at al l kno w ( anything ) , .

I h ave se arched an d sought an d seen ( s ays ) Nan ak ( th at ) the w orld is a house of smoke , , .

fi a) t
m of ,tri be o f J a ts
na e a .

fi mn a ffecti o love ; t en k inds o f ctions o f m en ar e m en tio n ed t ho ugh they ar e n ot applicable

af e
'

, a n,
,

t o al l st a tes t h e w h ole d escri p t io n b ei n g t oo a rtifici al a n d th erefore un n a t ur al

, .

T here are m an y re a din g s : fi l Jfi B RIfi B fi isfi g ; it i s best t o rea d fa

fi ) 3fi 3 or #311 3 ; th e
3 ’ ‘ '
‘
, ,

r ea din g fi i arfi g give s o sense

’
n .

T h e s en s e is : w h e th e sh r addh a i s over i n w hich t h e n ear est r el a tio n h as o ff ered a pl a tter m ad e o f

n
(,

leaves a n d filled wi th fm o r rice b al ls) he c al ls t h e cro w s t o eat up th e offerin g

-
, .
1 92 RAG M3 311 , V AR II I IV . .

Without the true Guru the spiritu al bl indness is n ot broken al l become tired h avin g done works ,

( for the s ake of their em ancip ation ) .

By me an s of the instruction o f the Guru the n ame is medit ated upon he ( = m an or the disciple ) is ,

filled w ith comf ort w hen it is ple asing t o thee

,
.

H e saves h i s ow n family blessed i s the mother w h o g ave birth ( t o him )

, ,

Hi s be auty an d intelligence is brilli ant w h o h as applied his thoughts on H ari ,

.

S i ck I ; mahal d
. II .

( Wh o is ) seei ng w ithout eyes he ar ing w ithout e ars , ,

W alking w ithout feet w orking w ithout h ands

, ,

S pe aking w ithout tongue an d thus dying w hilst living

-

( He) ( s ays ) Nan ak h aving kno w n the order ( o f the L ord ) is then united ( w ith ) the L ord
, , ,
.

S IG/cII makal d II . .

W h o is crippled in the legs lame ,

in his h ands an d blind ,
h ow sh all he run an d cling to the neck
( of the beloved )
M ake feet o f fe ar h ands of faith eyes o f underst anding
, ,

Nan ak s ays : thus 0 clever one ! a meeting ( w ith ) the s weethe art is brought about
, .

P aur a .

A l w ays ,
lw ays thou ar t the ( only ) O n e by thee another sport is made
a , .

H aving produced egotism pride an d covetousness thou didst put ( them ) into the cre atures
, .

A s it is ple as i ng to thee so thou keepest ( them ) al l d o w h at thou c ausest them to do

, , .

O n some thou best o w est ( this ) gift an d un it est ( them w ith thee ) by thee they are applied to , th e
I nstruction o f the Guru .

S ome stand an d serve thee w ithout the n ame nothing else ple ases ( them )
, .
.

O thers are e m ployed in w ork some ar e applied t o true w ork , .

( S ome h av e) sons w i fe family some rem ain u n contamin ated ( by such tics ) w h o ple ase t hee
, , , , .

Those ( these l atter ones ) ar e inside an d outside pure they ar e absorbed in t h e true n ame , .

S IG/c I ; mah al d . I .

( I f ) I m ak e
c avern in a mountain of gold o r in w ater under t h e e arth
a , .

O r in t h e e arth or in the sky ( i f ) I rem ai n ( the feet turned ) up w ards an d the he ad do w n w ar ds

, .

( If ) I put on ( my ) bo d y abund ant clothes an d w ash ( them ) al w ays putting ( them ) o ff , .

1

( If ) I re ad aloud the w hite red yello w an d black V éd as

2
, .
,

( If ) h aving become filthy I c arry about filth ( o n my body ) : ( al l this is ) folly an d un soundness
,

of mi n d .

E m ancip ated 3 I become by th e n ame s ays N an ak h aving reflected o n the w ord o f the Guru
, , .

1
p art p co nj f rom 3 13 7 “ H i n dfi st L e lg) t o p ut o ff
. . .

j . .

2
Th ese ar e un usua l appellatio n s o f t h e fo ur V é das A s n o fur ther hint i s give n it is d iffi cult t o say .
, ,

i f the se a pp el l ations a re t o be ap p lied t o the us ual ord e r o f t h e V ed a s ( R ik Yaj ur S am a A th a r va or n o t

) , , , , .

3
m g lit erall y : n o t I rele ase d from in di vid uality ( in Germa n : ein n icht ich)
, ,
-
.
 RAG MKi H , V A R V .
1 93

876k mah al d I .

H aving w ashed hi s cloth es he himself w ashes h is body an d pr actises conti nence .

The dirt sticking to his he art he d oes not know from the outside he w ashes ( h imsel f ) , .

The blind one being led astray h as fallen into the net of Ya ma
, , .

A nother s thing ( property ) he cbn sider s a s his ow n an d e arns p ai n in egotism

’
.

Nan ak ( s ay s ) the egotism ( individuality ) o f the disciple is broken , he meditates name

Hari Hari
, .

The n am e he mutters the name he w orships by the n ame h e enters h appiness

, , .

P aur i .

There is conj unction of the body ( w ith ) the soul ( th ey ar e) j oined in union , .

By him sep aration is m ade by w hom it is produced ‘ , .

Th e f ool is given to enj oymen ts ( but ) all ( is ) p ain , .

From ple asur e dise ases arise by committing sin .

F rom j oy grief ( arises ) ( m an ) is consumed ( by the S upreme) h aving brought on sep aration ( of the
, ,

soul f rom the body) .

The f ool m aking an esti m ate ( of his meritorious actions) raises a qu arrel 2
, .

From th e h and of the true Gur u( comes ) th e se ttlement ( by him ) the qu ar rel is brough t t o an end ,
.

Wh at th e creato r does th at wi ll take pl a ce wh at is done ( moved ) ( ag ainst or wi thout him) does

, , ,

not succeed .

S l ok I ; makal d . I .

He speaks falsehood ( and ) e ats c arrion .

H e goes to te ach others .

H e himsel f is rui ned ( an d those wh o are) w ith ( him ) he ruins ( al so ) ,

.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : as such a guide he becomes kno wn .

S lék II .
; makal a
‘

IV .

I n w hose hear t th e Tr ue on e is he pr aises w ith h is mouth the true n ame ( an d) th e T rue one
,
.

H e himself is w al king in th e w ay os ari an d puts others into the way of Hari .

I f there w ould be a Ti r th a of fire then the fil th w ould go off by bathing in a p uddle he m ake s
, ,

himsel f even more dirty .

The Ti r th a is the p erf ect tr ue Guru ; w h o meditates daily on th e name of Ha ri Hari

, ,

He himself is rele ased ( from m ateri al existence) w ith his fa mi ly, an d giving the n ame of Hari Hari , ,

he rescues th e w hole cre at ion .

H umble Nan ak - i s devoted to him w h o hims elf mutters ( th e n ame ) an d c auses o ther s t o mutter ( it )
,
.

P aufi .

S ome g ather up tuberous root s an d eat them ( their ) dw elling is in the forest ,
.

So me h a
ving put on fl eI h colou r ed clothes w-a nder about as 6gi s in renunci ation of the J w orld .

But ithin there is much w orldly thirst an d desire f o r clothing an d f ood

( )w
.

U selessly they w aste th eir li fe ( they a re ) neither householders nor living solit ary
,
.

Death does n ot recede from ( their ) he d three old is ( their) desi e

a f r
3
,
.

T his sentence i s general w ithout special application ,

.

He quarrels with Go d a s i f bein g tre ated unjus tly ,

.

i a fi Tfi Tfi c orpore al ai m oral a n d W fi fii ment al

3 .
, , ,
. . »
 V

1 94 RE G MAJH, v an V I V I I . .

By me ans of the instr ucti on o f the Guru de ath does not come ne ar as he ( i a Y am a) is the se rvant ,
. .

o f the serv ants ( o f B ari ) .

( In w hose ) he art is the true w ord ( o f the Guru ) an d the True o n e he is i n ( his ow n ) h ouse living ,

solitary .

Nan ak ( s ays ) w h o serve the i r o wn true Guru they are free fr om desires ,
.

I . mahal d I .

If cloth is stained by blood the dress becomes d efi l ed ,

.

H ow sh all the mind o f them ( become ) p ure w h o drink the blood o f men P
‘

Nan ak ( s ays ) t ake the n ame o f Go d w ith a pure he art an d mouth !

Other ( things ) are ( only ) false sho w s of the w orld ( which ) practises false 1
,
w orks .

S ic k II . maka l d I .

When I not ( anyth ing) w h at sh all I say P ( w hen ) I am n othing w h at m ay I become ?

am ,
‘
,

The stor y ( of ) the cre ature ( an d ) the cre ator ( efii c i en t c ause ) is tol d ( by me ) w h at h as become ,

d efil ed I w ash quickly

,
.

I do n ot underst and myself ( any thing ) an d te ach the peopl e such a guide I becom e ,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) ( w h o ) being b lind sho w s the w ay he ruins every one ( w h o is ) w ith ( him ) ,
.

H aving gon e on w ards ( to the other w orld ) h e i s robbed an d struck in th e face as such a guide he ,

becomes know n .

P auri .

( Though ) thou be reflected upon al l the months se asons gb ari s ( tw enty four minutes ) an d m uh fi r tas , ,
-

( forty eight minutes )

-

N o o n e h as obt ained thee by me ans o f celebration 0 true i n comprehe n sible boundless one i , , ,

Th at le arned m an is c alled a f ool w h o ( i s given t o ) covetousness greedin ess an d egotism

, , .

The n am e i s re ad the n ame is com prehen d ed reflection is m ade by me ans of th e instruction o f th e

, ,

Guru .

By the i nstruction o f t he Guru the w e alth of the n ame i s acquired w ith devotion the store rooms ,
-

ar e filled .

( By w hom ) the pure n ame is minded he is ( accepted as) true at the true gate , .

W hose the soul an d body is ( his ) inw ard li ght is boundless , .

Thou alone ar t the true w holes ale merch ant ( all ) the other w orld is ( thy ) retail de aler
-
,
-
.

VII .

S i ck makal d I .

( Make ) ki ndness the mosque sincerity th e pr ayer c arpet rectitude ( equity ) th e l aw ful ( food )
-
, ,

( a ccording to the ) K ur an .
a

Modesty c i rcumcision good conduct fastin g ( thus ) thou bec o m est a Mus al m an
, , .

( Good ) w orks the K a abah the true P i r ( Guru ) the K al im ah kindness th e prayer
’
, , .

( M ake ) th at the ros ary w hich w ill ple ase him ; Nan ak ( s ays ) he preserves thy honour
, .

1
m , A ra b
pre fa ce ( t o a book) g enerally w r itten in h ig h ly orn ame n tal lan g uage
.
, an d

emb ell ish e d w it h g ildin g a d d e cora tion s ; a false s h o w o r p ag ea n t ry

n

S o as th e w or d s s t an d t h ey g ive n o sen se as n o gr a mm atical rel a tion o f a n y kin d is in d icated

2
, , , , the
w hole verse bei n g only a cum u lus o f w ords as so o ftc n , .
1 96 RI G Mai n , VI II IX .

S IG/c I L ; mall al d IV .

removed lust w rath falsehood c alumny h av i ng given up the M aya ( = illusive w orld ) he
H avin g , , , ,

puts a stop to egotism .

I f h aving give n up lust an d w omen he ab andons spi ritu al blindness t h en he obtains in the d ark
, , ,

ness hi m w h o i s free from all d arkness ( = the S upreme ) .

Having given up pride an d conceit l ov e to son ( an d) w i fe h av ing given up ( w orldly ) thirst (an d)
, ,

desire he m akes deep meditation o n Ram .

N an ak ( s ay s ) in ( w hose ) he art the True o n e d w e l ls , he i s absorbed by me ans of the true w ord ( of ,

the Guru ) in the n ame of Hari .

P aur i .

K ings ,subjects chie ftains none w ill rem ain o h !

, , ,

S hops b az ars w il l tumble do w n by ( his ) order oh I

, ,

S olid be autiful g ates the f ool considers as h i s o w n

, ,
.

S tore rooms fill e d w ith w e alth ( are) empty in o n e moment

-
.

H orses ch a riots c amels impetuous eleph ants

, , ,
.

Gardens property household goods w hose o w n ar e they

, , ,

Tents bedste ads t apes te n t w al ls s atin ( w hose o w n ar e they

, , ,
-
,

Nan ak ( s ays ) the tr ue donor ( of al l these things ) is kno wn l from ( his ) po wer .

S IG/c I . makal d I .

( Though ) rivers o f sour mil k be m ade ( though ) springs of milk an d gh i gush f orth , .

( Though ) the w hole e arth become sug ar, ( th at ) ( my ) soul al w ays could enj oy itself .

( Though ) th e mou n tains b e come gol d ( an d ) silver, studded w ith di amonds an d rubies .

Yet ( I w ould ) praise thee the desire o f praising ( thee ) w ould not ce ase , .

S IG/c II . makal d I .

( If ) the fruit of the eighteen lo ads ( of trees 2

an d pl ants ) should be b ad, ( if ) their taste should be
ex q ui si t e f‘
( If ) both moon ( an d ) sun should be stopped in thei r course , ( an d if ) ( my ) place should becom e
im mov able .

Yet ( I ) w ould pr aise thee the desire , of praising ( thee ) w ould n ot ce ase .

S IG/c III .
; m ahal cz 1
’

Though p ain shoul d be inflicted ( on my) body by an inauspicious pl anet ( or ) by the tw o

m us .
; P e rs a . s ll k n ow n
o rts o f w or d s ar e ju m bl ed tog eth e r i n t his verse
. All .

t h e eighteen l o ads ( sup ply : am ffi t r ee p l an t i n g en er al ) It i s s a id that if o f every

2 '
3 13 , , .
,

tree o r p l an t o n e leaf sh o uld be tak en th ey w ould m ak e up eightee n lo ad s — A comp rehensive term fo r al l th e

,

t ree s a n d plan t s o n ea rth .

‘
T h e w ord 313 3 1 i s quite u k n o w n t o t h e S ikh Gr a n t h i s ; b ut it is a p p ar en tly th e S i n dhi M E I
3
n
E ,

d i ssolvin g m el tin g
, T h e taste ( o f t h e fruit) i s m elt i n g t e th e fr u
. it i s so delicate in fla vour that it m elts i n , . .

t h e mo uth .

i f ? 3 T3 t h e t wo Rahus i a R ah u an d K é t u 3 19 i s said to h ave b een 8 2a w i th th e ta il o f a

4 '
, , . . .
,

d ra gon w hos e h ead w as s ev er ed by Vis h n u B o t h hea d a n d tail r eta i n ed the ir s ep a r ate existence ; The head
, .

w as m ad e i n the p l an et ary s ystem t h e eighth a n d t h e t ai l t h e ni n th p l an e t c alled 3 3 ,

 RE G ME 511 , v i a x .

1 97

( Though ) the blood j -

i i
dr nk gn Ra a ‘
s should be put on ( my ) he ad an d my state should appe ar thus
,
.

Y et ( I w ould ) praise thee the desire , of pra ising ( thee ) w o ul d not ce ase .

a
S IG/c IV .
; makal d I .

( If ) fi re ( an d ) cold should be
clothing ( i f ) w ind should be ( my ) food my , .

al l the fa scin ati ng w omen o f he aven

(If ) ( s ays ) Nanak should become my , , w ives .
2

Yet ( I w oul d ) praise thee the desire of praising ( thee ) w ould not ce ase
, .

evil doer is a gobl in ( as) he does not know the L ord

Th e -
, .

H e i s c al led m ad w h o does n ot k n o w his o w n self

, .

Bad strif e is in th e w orld by contention it is con sumed , .

W ithout the n ame it is labouring under di se ase ( an d ) error .

Wh o consid ers both w ays as on e ( an d the s ame ) he w ill be accomplished

'
3
, .

W h o talks infidelity b e h aving fal len by ( his ) i nfideli ty ( into hell ) w ill b ur n
, , , .

A ll the w orld is contai n ed in the true L ord .

A t ( his ) g ate an d court he is accep te d wh o p arts with hi s o wn sel f , .

S lo lc
‘

I . ma kal d I .

He lives in w hose he art Th at o n e d w ells

,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) none oth er lives ( in re al ity ) .

If h e lives ( w ithout him ) ( h i s) honour i s gone ,

.

Al l is unl aw f ul w h atever he e ats ,

.

( H i s ) ple asure ( is ) in dom i ni on ( h i s) ple asure ( is ) in w e alth steeped i n ple asure

, , dances nake d .

N an ak ( s a ys ) deceived an d robbed he goes .

Without the n ame he loses w hen bei n g gone ( hi s) honour , , .

S l ot I I ; mahal d . I .

W h at is the good o f e ating an d dressing

W hen th at True one does n ot d well in the he art ?
W h at are fruit s gh i s w eet mol asses W hat flour wh at me at
, , , ,

W hat c lothes w h at a com fortable bed ( on w hich ) the sport o f enj oyment is made ?
, ,

‘
W a are a
h t rmies w h at the att end ance o f
,
m a ce be arers ( w h at) the d w el ling in gre at sho w ( an d) -
,

p al aces
Nan ak ( s ays ) w ithout the true n ame al l things p ass aw a y .

I
N o hint w h atever i s give n as to w h o the blood dri n k i n g Raj as are -
.

:1 3 fi re T h e S ikh Gra n t h i s are utterly a t a l oss h o w t o exp l ain th ese w or d s B ut

"
.
.

a p a re n tly the S a n sk 3 111 11 w i fe S ind hi E h i

'

p
.
. , ,

i a H in d fi ism an d Islam
3 .
. .

fi : t is tr a ditio n al ly expl ained by m a c e bea r er H a n a sf ( from

@ 5 “
3
1
domes t ic se rva n ts
-
. . .
" ,

p ages o r val e t s ) atten danc e ( o n t h e body) The follo w in g w ord o f w hich I could ge t n o expl an a t io n from th e
,
. ,

Gra n t h i s I w o uld d erive from m

, (or m ) great sho w or d ispl ay th is w ord i s n ow only fo und in ,

Marathi b ut it suits th e co n text very w ell

,
.
1 08 RAG MEi H , V A R X I X II . .

P u
a ri
-

What is inthe h and of the pilgrim ( if ) the truth be in vestigated ,

P oison is in h i s h and he di es i f he t astes it

, ,
.

The domi nion o f the True o n e is kno w n through al l ages .

( Wh o ) mi nds ( his ) order he is a C hie ftain at ( his ) g ate ( an d in ) hi s court

, .

By the L ord a w ork i s ordered ( m an ) is sent ( to do it) ,

.

( U n der ) be at o f d ru m the decisio n ( o f the L ord ) is procl aimed by me ans of the ( of the Guru )
S ome h ave mounted some stand in re adiness ‘
,
.

By some the lo ads are bound some ar e in a running haste ,

.

S l ot 1 . maka l d I .

W hen ( the field ) is ripe then is c ut w h at rem ains w ithin the inclosure is the straw
,
it , , .

L ike hemp it is bruised the corn is t aken after the str aw i s sh aken
, , .

H avin g joined the t wo millstones o f th e mil l they sit do w n t o grind ( the corn ) .

Those ( grains ) w hich rem ained a t the door ( = mouth o f the m ill ) were sp ared
, ,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) : I saw a w onderf ul thing .

S lék II . maizal d I .

Behol d w h at is s w eet ( i a the sugar c ane ) that is cut do wn out do w n an d bruised it is bound by
,
. .
-
, ,

leg .

H avin g pl aced it w ithin the rollers they p uni sh it squeez ing it w el l ,

2
.

Its j uice an d m arrow is p ut into an iron p an it is he ated an d l aments , .

A lso the sediment ( thereo f ) is taken c are of fire is kindl ed ( thereby ) , .

Nan ak ( says ) ( on account of its bei n g ) sw eet it is ill tre ated ; come an d behold it 0 people ! -
,

P aur i .

S ome do not think of de th ( they h ve ) much hope ( of living longer )

a ,
a
3
.

H av ing died an d died they ar e continu ally born ( ag ain ) ; it is not in the po w er of an y body .
4

In their o wn mind an d thoughts they say : ( w e are) good .

The flesh l y minded ar e continu ally observed by Yam a the K ing

-
,
.

T h e flesh l y m inded ar e untrue t o their s al t they ar e u n gr ateful

-
, .

Being bo und they w i l l m ake s al am ( to w h om ) the L ord h ad n ot been ple asing ( durin g their life time )
,
-
.

( By w hom ) the True one i s found ( in w hose ) mouth ( is ) th e n ame ( to them ) the L ord will be ple asing
, , .

They w ill m ake s al am at ( his ) throne wh at is written ( for them ) they will obtain , .

S lck makal d I .

W h at does deep ( w ater) to a fish w h at the ether t o a bird ?

5
,

Wh at does cold to a stone w h at the m arried state to a eunuch

,

m b arb arous w ord ( l ike W W

a ) r eadin ess ( fr om ,

2
s m T h e roll er o f a sug a r m il l ( n o w a
. .
m ) - .

3
m m WEVE} o n acco un t o f t h e rhyme
‘

, .

4
W K Erfi nn fa? K a (i e it is n o t in th e h a n d
. . o f an
y on e they c an not help it .

i e w h a t a ffe c t s ?
5
. .
20 0 RAG MAIH , V AR X I II .

S l ck II .
; mahal d I .

Not the Gods Titans an d Centaurs ( are anything )

,
.

N o t the S i ddh s sadh ik s on e arth ,

.

Is there an y other ? 1

Thou alone Thou alone ( ar t existing)

,
.

S ick III .
; mahal d I .

No tthe gift bestow ing men ( are anything )

-
.

No t the seven ( regi ons ) under th e e arth .

Is there an y other
Thou alone Tho ualone ( ar t existin g )
,
.

8 761: IV . mah al d I .

No t ( is ) the disk sun ( an d) moon ( an ything )

of .

N o t the seven insul ar continents n o t w ater ,

.

( N o t ) fire ”
( an d ) w in d ; non e i s stable .

Thou alone Thou alone ( ar t abiding )

,
.

8 761: V . makal a I .

The d aily bre ad is not in anybody s pow er ’

.
3

O ur h ope “ is the O n e ( S upreme B ein g ) .

Is there an y other
Thou alone Thou alone ( ar t our hope )
,
.

S l olc VI .
; mahal d I .

Birds h ave n o gold in their purse ° .

The tree is hoping f or w ater .

W h o is gi ving it ?
Thou alone Thou alone ,
.

S ick V II .
; makal d I .

Nanak ( s ays ) w h at is w ritten on the f orehe ad th at ,

N one
’

c an e flac e .

A ccording t o
his w il l he puts do w n an d t akes 8
aw a y .

Thou alone Thou alone ( art abidin g )

,
.

P aufl .

Tr ue is thy order by the disciple it is kn ow n ,

.

The True o n e is appreh ended ( by hi m ) h aving parted ,

w ith his own self by me ans of the instruction
o f th e Guru .

1
m = P e rs m l; m =
j
<j o
3
T he senten ce c an only be taken as int er rogat ory
th ere one oth er
is n .

7H3 sf fire another ass i m i l a ti on from W

2
.
,

a
m n n P ers T g a m d ( but n o t in use in P ersian itsel f being rather a b arb arous composition after
‘
. e ,

t h e a n alogy o f a) coming t o h an d used su bsta n t ively ( lik e

U ; s in t h e se n se o f po
) wer “ ”
”
U ) W e.) “ w , a ,

ability 3 % {3 3 altered on acco unt o f the rhyme

”
.
, .

ai rma n b ri m h ope com fo rt

:
, , .

fi raTq P ers g a knot i n t h e en d o f a sh awl or cloth in which money is bo un d up

5 ' '
, .
, , .

W propensi ty w ill
, , .
 Ri c Mi iH , V A R X IV . xv .
20 1

True is thy court by me ans of the w ord ‘ ( of the Guru ) it is pointed out
, .

H avin g reflected on the true w ord ( o f t h e Guru ) he is absorbed in the True one .

The self w illed one is al ways gi v en t o falsehood by error he is led astray

-
, .

Hi s d w elling is a mongst ordure no relish is kno w n by him , .

W ithout the n ame he incurs distress he is coming an d going , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) he himsel f ex ami nes accurately by w hom the false an d genuine one is recogni z ed , .

X IV .

S ick I . mahaid I .

L ions , falcons ,
h aw ks kites these he m akes to eat grass
, ,
2
.

Those w h o eat grass them he m akes to eat flesh ; these w ays he m akes ( them ) go
, .

In the rivers he m akes appear hil locks in the deserts he m akes unfathomable ( pools ) , .

H e establishes w orms an d gives them royalty armies he turns into ashes , .

A s m any cre atures as live the i r bre ath he t akes aw ay an d v i v ifi es the m ( ag ain ) then
, ,
w h at is it
w ith ( him ) ? 3

Nan ak ( s ays ) as it is ple asing to the True one so he gives the morsels ,
.

S i ck II .
; makal a I .

S ome living on flesh some eat grass

are ,
.

To some the food consisting of thirty six ( ingredients ) is allotted ‘ -

.

S ome ( live ) in dust ( an d ) eat dust .

S ome ar e counting ( their ) bre ath counting ( their ) bre ath ,

.

S o m e take the n ame o f the F ormless one f or their support .

( By hi s) gifts they live no one dies ( of hunger )

, .

Nan ak ( s ays ) they go being robbed i n w hose he art H e is not

, ,
.

P aufl .

The w ork
the perfect Guru is done according to destiny
of .

W h o h as p arted w ith h i s o w n self by me ans of the instr uction o f the Guru ( by him ) the n ame is ,

meditated upon .

Wh o sticks to another w ork ( by him ) his li fe i s lost ( w asted )

,
.

W ithout the n ame all is poison ( w h atever ) i s put on ( an d ) e aten ,

.

By praising the true w ord ( = n ame ) one is absorbed in the Tr ue one .

W ithout servi ng the true Guru there is no d w el ling in comf ort again an d ag ain one co m es , .

The w orld is a false c apit al falsehood is e ar ned ( from it),

.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : by prai sing the f ully True one ( one ) goes w ith honour ( to t h e th reshold of the S upreme ) .

X V .

S ic/c I ; maha id . I .

( When ) it is ple asing to thee then they play

,
an d s ing ( w hen ) it is ple asing to thee then they b ath e
, ,

( in ) water .

1
S ome the lithog raph ed copy L hore) re d 31 8 2 W E
MS S ( a n d
. of this i s w ro n g ; th e right
a a EIHT, b ut
’

re a ding i s 31 21 f? m tfi‘m
8 3 31 a n d q fi a re d iff e ren t speci es o f h aw ks
3 ‘
.

3 1 fi ll w h a t i s it w ith ( h i m ) ? i e w h at d oes i t m atter w it h him P m m g postposition

3 '
. .
, .

3 % W I3 oo consisti thirty six in redients delic ate f ood f here = L ré t o fall

4
f i
'

3 f d ,
n
g o , g Ln U -
s .
,

t o one s l o t
’
.
20 2 RE G Mi in , v i a X VI .

When it is ple asin g to thee th en they exercise superhuman powers ‘ they let he ar th e sound of the
, ,

couch .

When it is pleasing t o thee th en they re ad the book ( Quran ) they ar e called Mull as an d S h ékh s
, ,
.

Wh en it is ple asing t o thee then th ey become Raj as an d ac quir e m any enj oyments
,
.

W hen it is ple asing t o thee then they s w ing the s w o rd an d cut off he ad an d neck
,
.

When it is ple asing t o thee , then they go abro ad an d h aving he ard ( m any ) w ords they return to their ,

ho m es .

W hen i t is ple asin g to thee, thou i mbuest ( them ) with love to t h e n ame ; w h o ple ase thee them ,

th en li kest .

Nanak utters one supplic ation word ) all the others e arn falsehood .

II ; makaia I S ick . .

Wh en thou ar t gre at al l is gr e atn ess 2 by the good on e good ( things) ar e done

, ,
.

W hen thou ar t true re al ) then every on e i s true not an y on e is false , , .

3

Telling seeing S peaking going living dying running

, , , , , ,

He h aving issued an order keeps under his order ; Nan ak ( s ays ) : he himsel f is true
, ,
.

P aur i .

By serving the true Guru ( one becomes ) confident hi s error is put a stop to ,
.

The w ork th at the true Guru enj oins ( to him ) i s performed

, ,
.

( I f ) th e true Guru becomes kind ( t o him ) then th e n ame is meditate d upon ,

.

The gain of devotion w hich is the best i s obtain ed by the disciple

, , .

By the self w il led o n e falsehood ( an d) d arkness ( ar e obtained ) ( an d) falsehood is pr actised

-
.

Havi n g gone t o the g ate o f the True on e the true o n e is comforted ‘ .

H e is c alled t o the true p al ace by the True on e .

Nanak ( s ays ) : the true on e is al ways given t o truth an d is absorbed in the T r ue one .

XV I .

S ick I ; maka id
. I .

The K ali yug is ( li ke ) a l arge knif e the s ss ar e

-
, the butchers rel igion ha ving m ade itself w ings
, , ,

h as flo w n aw ay .

There is ( n ow ) the n ew moon s night it is n ot seen where the moon ( o f ) truth

-
’
, , h as risen .

S earching about I becam e be w ildered .

I n darkness there is n o w a y ( seen ) .

Bein g given to egotism in ( my ) heart I w eep in p ains .

.

Nan ak says : in w h at m anner sh all salvation be effecte d ?

II ; mall aia III S ick . .

( In ) the K ali yug the praise ( of Hari ) is the m an ifest light in the
-
w orld .

S ome ( rare ) disciple p asses across ( the w ater of existence ) .

1
m 3 ( S ansk fafi l ) superh um an pow e r, s uppos ed t o be a cquired by a us t ere w o r ship to S hiva an d
h i s w ife D urgiz
.

fi :

They ar e e ight : a rm , ext rem e m inuteness ( i n visibili ty) ; fi ffi l fl , extrem e l igh tn ess
'

.
' ’

m ext reme weight ; mfg po w er o f ob t a in ing every thin g ; mm ful filme n t o f every d esire ; “fat "
, ,
, ,

largeness o f siz e ( ad l ibitum) ; W 1 p ower over nature “

, .

T h e s en se i s : every th in g i s a sig n o f thy gre at n ess

2
.

3
of a fals e illusi v e existence n o t real
, , .

3 3 1 63 1 c an s o f t o c ause t o be quieted o r com for te d S an sk H )

, .

( Q It i s here n ot the c aus al . .

f orm o f BE E“ t o say ( S an sk E ND
, . .
204 RAG Mfi i H , V AR X V III .

The good ones ar e examined an d picked out at the gate ( o f Hari ) .

The ware is found in one shop ‘ by me ans of the perfect Guru .

X V III .

S ick I ; maka id . II .

( Wh o ) removes the eight ( wh o ) destroys th e eight ( wh o ) destroys the nine ( of ) the body
, ,

In h i m ( i s) the n ame containi ng the nine tre asures the O n e deep in qu alities
,
the S upreme Being) ,

he finds .

By th em w hose l ot it is he is pr aised s ays Nan ak h aving m ade ( to themselves ) a Guru ( or ) P i r 3

, , , , .

In the fourth w atch of the d aw n ( o f d ay ) the desire ( after H ari ) o f the intelligent ones springs up ‘ .

They h ave fr iendship w ith those oce ans in their he art an d mouth is the true n ame ,
5
.

There nect ar is di stributed ( according t o ) one s destiny favo ur is bestow ed ,

’
.

The body the gold i s closely examined its colour comes fully o ut ( on the touchsto n e )
, , ,
.
6

I f the glance o f the b anker be favour able it ( i a the body ) is n o t a gain thro w n into the he at ( to be ,
. .

melted ) .

Wh o removes the seven ( temperaments ) he is true an d good he sits w ith th e le arned ,

7
, .

There demerit an d m erit ar e reflected upon the c apit al o f falsehood sinks do w n , .

There the fal se ones (like spurious c o ins ) ar e thro w n dow n the good ones ar e a pplauded , .

T alking ( i a remonstrating against thi s process ) is superfluous

. . useless ) O Nan ak p ai n an d ple asure , ,

( rest) w ith the L ord .

S ic k II ; maka ia H “ . .

The bre ath ( w ind ) is the Guru w ater the father the gre a t e arth the mother , , .

D ay an d night the t w o ar e the m ale an d fem ale nurses the w hole w orld sports
, , .

In the presence ( o f God ) Dhar m (r aj a Yam a ) re ads the good an d bad actions ( o f the cre atures ) .

By their o w n w orks some ar e ne ar an d some far off ( from Go d ) .

By w hom the n ame is meditated upon they ar e gone h aving done their w ork , , .

N an ak ( s ays ) : they ar e bright in their f ace ; h o w m any other people ar e rele ased f rom existence
( )
in their comp any !

31 6 1 1 r el se t h e t hi g i e the n a m e or the absolute bein

1
, w a e, o r
g U Z th e sh op i e t h e hea r t
n , . . .
, , . . .

mg} t h e e igh t ; w h a t e igh t ? perh ap s t h e WW

, o r ei ht a ff e c t ions o f t h e bo dy t h e ei g h t me m be rs
g ,

m r
a
o f the bo d y ( S ig h t) a n d t h e n i n e
( Q11 ) ,outl e t s o f t h e bo dy removi n g (a dj ) .
.

i a h a vi ng ch os en fo r th e ms elves a Gu r u ( o r ) P i r
3
. . .

T h e s en se is : e arly a t t h e d aw n o f d ay th e i n tel lige t on es w h o h a ve fou n d the S upreme w ithin th eir

4
, , n ,

body ar e fi ll ed w ith d esi re t o p r a is e h im

, .

fg ?n m fi qe i l 13“ fr ien dship w ith th ose oce an s i e f iend sh i p love t o H ari t h e ocean
5 ‘

, , . . r , , .

The pl ural is h o o r ifi c o r t o be expl a i ed i n t h e p a n th ei st ic s en se o f th e Gra n th

n n .

$273 t h e colou r o f gol d o n t h e touchs t o ne by wh i c h it s qua li ty is i n d ic a ted

6
, 3 3 1 % i s a verb al adj , .
.
,

risi n g i t ris es i a i t come s fully o ut

, . . .

7
removi n g th e seven ; wh at seve n ? p erh aps t h e RE NE fa o r seven te mp ers ( o f t h e m i n d) -
.

The w h ole v er se i n e a rly un i n t ell igible a s o n ly a few hin t s a r e t h ro wn o ut an d the whole i s p urpos ely m ade
s ,

as ob scure a s po ssible O f s uch se n te n ces a t ra n sl a t i o n c annot prop erly be m a de b ut onl y a conjectur e

. The , .

S ikh Gr a n th i s thems elves could give m e n o expl an a tio n w h a tever .

8
T his S l c k i s here ( a s i n all MS S I h a ve com p ar ed ) a scr ibed t o Guru A n g ad w herea s it is verbatim
.
,

rep ea te d fr om t h e J apj i w here i t is t h e concl udin g S l c k I n t h e J a pj i there i s no w h ere a n y i n dicat ion th at t h e

, .

S l c k d oes n o t belo n g t o N an a k b ut i t is ve ry pro bable th a t t h i s a d d i t io n wa s m a de by Guru A n g ad a n d th at

,
,

fo r cer tain re asons he i s n o t m en tio n ed t h er e a s t h e author o f t h e S l c k .

 RE G M3 311 , VA R X IX .
20 5

P aur i .

True enj oyment ( is) fai th by the true Guru it is pointed out
, .

( Wh o
) believes in the True on e he‘i s h appy in t h e True one
, .

In the true f ort an d vill age in his o w n house he dw ells

, .

By me ans of the ple ased Guru he i s h appy in the love of the n ame .

By falsehood on e c annot go t o th e court of the True one .

By a totall y f alse expl an ation doctr ine ) that p al ace ( of B ar i ) is lost .

By attention to the true w ord ( of the Guru) on e is n ot repulsed ( at the gate of H ari) .

W h o h as he ard an d comprehended the true expl an ation ( o f truth ) is c alled to the pal ace ( of ,

X IX .

S l olc malzal d I .

( If ) I put on ( as clothes ) fire ( if ) I m ake ( my ) house i n the snow ( if ) I m ake i ron my f ood
, ,
.

( If ) , h aving turned all p ains into w ater I drink ( them ) (if ) I urge an d d rive on the e arth , .

( If ) I put on the sc ales the sky an d W eigh it ( an d i f ) I then put a tank ‘ o n ( the scales t o w eigh it
, ,

thereby ) .

(If ) I be so much enl arged ( th at ) I m ay not be contained ( any where ) ( i f ) I drive o n every one
, ,

w ith a nose ring -

.

( If ) there w ould be so much pow er in ( my ) mind th at I do an d th at having ordered I c ause t o be , , , ,

done ( everyt hing ) .

A s gre at as th e Lord i s so gre at ar e h i s gifts i n giving he does as he pleases

, , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : o n W hom he c asts a fa vour able look ( he obtains ) grea tness by the true n ame , .
2

S l ot II . makal d II .

The mouth is not s ati ated w ith spe aking the ear is n ot s ati ated w ith he aring
, .

The eyes are n ot s ati ated w ith seeing they are continu ally discer n ing the qu alities ( o f things )
, .

The hunger of the hu n gry one does n ot ce ase by ( mere ) w ords the hunge r does n o t le ave off
,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) : the hungr y on e is then s atia ted w hen h aving uttered the excel lences ( o f B ar i )
, , ,
he
is absorbed in the abode of ( al l ) qu aliti es the S upreme ) .

P aur i .

Without the True o n e al l is fal sehood , f alsehood

is acquired .

W i thout the True o n e he w h o i s given to falsehood is bound an d m arched off

, , .

W i thout th e True on e the body is ashes an d mingled w ith ashes .

W ithout the True one al l is ( but) hunger w h at i s put o n an d e aten ,

.

W ithout the True one by me ans o f falsehood the court ( of H ari ) is n ot obt ained
, ,
.

( By hi m w h o
) sticks t o false covetousness the p al ace ( of B ar i ) is missed .

The w hole w orld is deceived in deception it comes an d goes 3

,
.

The thirst an d fire in the body ar e extinguished by the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

eight equal to four mas as

a w ,
.

2
The a podos i s i n this verse i s n o t cle ar Nan ak r ambles a bout i n h is thoughts a n d
. a cle ar logical c on
struction ( quite ab stra cted from gramm a r) i s n ever t o be expected T h e sense h o wever .
, , a p pe a rs t o b e this

wh atever m an s fe a t s m ay be h e neve r c an re a ch the L or d whose al l gi ft s a re

’
, , .

3
m m m m l iterally : it is come an d gone
,
.
20 6 RA G MA i H , V AR X X . XX I .

S l ot mahal d I .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : th e Guru is the tree ( of ) contentment religion ( virtue ) is ( its ) blossom divin e , ,

kno wledge ( its ) fr uit .

( The tree ) is abounding in succ ulence ( an d) al ways green by ( religious ) w orks ( an d) meditation ( its ,

fruit ) ripens .

( The w ise one ) is e ati ng the fl avours o f the sirup 1

the gift descends on the he ad ( o f ) the w ise one , .

S l ok I L ; mah al d II .

( There is ) tree o f gold ( its ) le aves are red corals ( its ) bl ossoms j e w els an d rubies:
a , ,

Fruits of gems are found on it w h o e ats ( them ) w ith h i s mouth he is h appy in ( h i s) he art an d mind
, , .

N an ak ( s ays ) : ( w hose ) destiny it m ay be on ( his ) f ace ( an d ) forehe ad ( this ) lot is wr i tten,

.

The sixty eight Ti r th as ( ar e) at the feet o f the Guru

-
.

The excel lent ( men ) al w ays w orship ( the feet of the Guru) .

L aughter desir e covetousness w rath ar e f our stre ams o f fire

, , , ,
.

Those w h o fall ( into them ) ar e burnt ; O Nan ak it is crossed over by sticking to ( religious ) w orks
, , .

P aur i .

Die w hilst living ! h aving destroyed ( one s o wn sel f ) one w il l not regret i t ’
.

This w orld is false ( unre al ) w h o ar e apprised o f it ? ,

W ithout besto w i ng love on the True one i t h as run after ( w orldly ) business .

De ath is a b ad thi ng ; destruction an d de ath ( h ang ) over the he ad o f th e w orld .

By the order ( of B ar i ) the executioner ( of Yama) ( st ands ) on the he ad ( o f every one ) an d lies in w ait .

( If ) he h i mself ( i a Hari ) gives ( his ) l o ve he is m ade t o d w ell in the he art

. .
, .

( If ) n o t f orty eight minutes not a minute procr astin ation be m ade he is obtained
-
, , .

( Wh o ) by the favour of the Guru comprehends ( th e truth ) be is absorbed in the True one , .

X X I .

S l ot malea l d I .

The T ummi an d Tumm a is poison the fruit o f the A kk Dh at u ra an d Nimm ( is p oi so n )

, , .
a

It abides in th at sel f w illed m an i nto w hose mind Thou dost not come
-
, .

N an ak ( s ays ) : the enmity of ( those ) is told ( be fore Yam a) w h o w alk w ithout ( doing ) religious w orks , .

S l ot II . mahal d I .

The mind of the bird is in con formity w ith ( its ) destiny n ow it is high n o w l o w , ,

N o w it is on a s and al tr ee n o w on the bough of an A kk tree n ow in high love

-
,
-
, .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : by the order ( o f God ) it is moved about the course ( o f ) the L ord is applied ( to it) , .

P aur i .

M an y give explan ati ons h aving given ( t hem ) they go ,

.

They give explan ations of the V eda ( but ) its end ( object) they do not obt ain , .

By re ading ( the V eda) they do not obtain ( its ) secret by comprehending ( the truth ) they do , .

U fa f ” 3 . sir up or m elted sugar ; th e fl avour of t h e fr uits , wh en ripene d , is comp ared to a sirup in

s w eetness .

0
2
The 3 311 i s a smaller k ind o f t h e
“
i n Gur ln ukh i it sig n ifies a very b itter f ruit a colocyn th not
( ,

as in S a nsk rit a lo n g w hite gou r d )

, The W ( S an sk is t h e gig an tic s wallo w w ort ; the 113 3 1
. .
-

the thorn appl e the fi g ( S ans k fi fi ) A z a dira chta In dica a tree be aring bitter fruit s
- .
, , .
 RAG MAi H , V AR X X III . XX IV .

They address ( this ) petition ( to their) fem ale fri ends : mind ( him ) 0 ye beloved ,

Without the n am e t h ere is w o e in the house w retched that life ,

.

By the w ord ( of the Guru ) w e w ere accomplished nectar ( w as) drunk ( by us ) ,

.

X X III .

S l ot ma hal d I .

Th edesert is not s atiated by r ain the fire ( of ) hunger does not ce ase ,
.

The Raj a is not s atiated by domin ion ar e dried up oce ans ( ever ) filled ? ,
-

Nan ak ( s ay s ) : h o w much is the inqui ry after the true n ame !

S l ok I L ; mahal d II .

There i s no f ruit of th at ( hum an ) bi rth ‘ so long as one does not kno w Brah m ,
.

The oce an of th e w orld some one crosses by the favour o f the Guru .

The c ause of c auses is pow erful s ays N anak h avin g reflecte d , , .

C aus ali ty i s in the po w er of the cre ator by w hom the skil ful m achinery ( of the , w orld ) is put do wn .

P aur i .

Atthe cour t of the L ord the musician d w ells .

By pr aising the true L ord the lotus ( o f his he art) h as opened .

H av i ng obtained the omnipresent L ord his h eart h as become h appy .

The enemies ar e kicked out an d be aten the virtuous ones ha ve got the ascend ancy , .

Wh o serve the re al an d true Guru ( to them ) the true w ord is show n , .

H aving refl ected on the true w ord ( o f the Guru ) de ath is destroye d ( by them ) .

The musician rehe arses the inexpressible ( S upreme Being ) by the w ord ( o f the ,

accomplishe d .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : the beloved H ari w h o is deep in qualities is met w ith , , .

X X IV .

S l ot maizal a I .

F romsins sins spring up if they commit ( sin s ) they fall into sins
, , .

By w ashing they ( i a the sins ) d o not go o fl“ though they w ash them a hundred ( times )
. .
, .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : ( if ) he ( i a H ari ) p ardon ( them ) then they ar e f orgiven other w ise they f ollow
. .
, ,

( them )
2
.

S IG/c II maha l a I . .

O Nan ak ,t alking an d prating ar e p ain s giving ( them ) up ple asure should be a sked , .

P le a sure an d p ai n both ar e a t the g ate ; m an goes an d puts them on ( like ) clothes

, .
8

W here by spe akin g loss is suff ered there silence is the best thing , .

T h ere i s ttem pt o n the p a r t o f A ng ad t o w rit e S anskrit afi l W

an a i s app arently the gen itive .
'

a s sho w by th e follo w in g m arfi fi I

n the oc ean o f t h e w orl d It appe a rs t h at he h as considered .

fm as a s u bs t antive f r ui t l essn ess ( thoug h i t i s an adj e c tive ) an d tha t 3 f}! m fi i stand s for m
,
’

m t hough t h e S ansk g enitive of W

, is W
. t That such an attempt a t S ansk ri t w ri ting is m ade . -
,

t h e w hol e context sh o w s .

1 "a a d v n ea r fr om b ehind ( S ind hi ma ) ; L nfi y ”g

2
, .
,

3
The s ens e o f t h e w or d s n I f? i s : both a r e at t h e g ate within rea ch M an put s p leasure a n d
’

pain on a s h e put s o n a c l oth i a accordi n g t o h i s liki n g

, . . .
 RAG MAi H , V AR X X V X X VI
. .
209

P aur i .

Hav ing looked about i a the f our corners ( of the e arth ) ( my ) inside was searched ( by me ) .

By the tr ue inapprehensible div i na mal e having cre ated it 1 8 looked down ( in mercy )
, , , .

To him w h o h as gone astray 1 n the desert the w ay is shown by the Guru

, , .

The true Guru is the vehicle o f the True one th e True one is held up ( by him ) , .

The gem ( i a th e S upre m e ) is obt ained in ( one s o wn ) house

. . the l amp is lighted ’

( therein) :
( Wh o ) praise ( him ) by means of th e true w ord ( of th e Guru) ( they ar e) h appy truth is kindl ed , ,

( in them ) .

The fe arless on e wh o i s given to pride is annihil ated

, , .

The w orld h aving strayed aw ay from the n ame w anders about as a goblin
, , .

X X V .

57676
1 I . makal a III .

In fe ar (m an ) is born in f e ar also he dies fear is in h is he art

, ,
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : if he dies in the fe ar ( of God ) he h as com e into the , w orld h appy .

8 ’d II I; mahal d III .

Wi th out f e ar h e lives m any m any ple asures he enj oys , , .

Nan ak ( says ) : if h e dies w ithout fear he rises an d goes , w ith a bl ack face .

P aur i .

( If ) the true Gur u becom e merciful , th en ( one s ) w ish is f ulfilled

’
.

( If ) the true Guru become merciful , one never grieves .

( If ) the true Guru become m erci ful ,

p ains ar e not know n .

( I f ) the true Guru become mercif ul ,

then th e ple as ure o f B ari is enj oyed .

( If ) the true Guru become m erciful , then w h at is the fe ar of Yam a

( I f ) the t rue Guru become merci ful ,
there is al ways happiness in the body .

( If ) the true Guru become merci ful ,

the nine tre asures ar e obtained .

( If ) the true ( Iuru become merci ful , then one is absorbed in the True one .

X X VI .

S l ot mal ml d I .
‘

They pluck their he ad 2 they drink washings they ask the leavings o f me al s an d eat them
, ,
3
.

Having l aid b are the excrements they put them into their mouths h aving seen raw ‘ ‘ 5
water they ,

ar e afrai d .

Like sheep they pluck their he ad their h ands ar e filled w ith ashes ,
.

With mother father an d business they p art th eir families w eep ( aft er them ) w ith l amentations
, , .

I T his hole 8 16k i s directe d a g a inst the J ain a s wh o are n ow called in t h e P anj ab W
w ; see S ikh a
,

dé raj di vi thi s p 1 62 , . .

2
This i s thei r initiatory rite .

m at} n ow cal l ed W ,
w a ter use d alre ady in vessels T h e J ain as drink no fr esh wa ter bu
, t .
,

eith er boiled w at er or w a shi n gs ( from th e pots) .

m
’

sf A rabic
, , (p m p erl y : d isgra ce ) .

3 3 11 18 1 pp,
here used in the s ense o f 3 8 1 L nafi n a tural wate r not cooke d but
. .
‘ '

, , ,

warmed or he ated by the su n .

21 0 RAG MAi H, V AR X X VI .

Th y o ff er r i ce b alls nor pl atter nor f uner al ceremonies t o the de ad they do n o t put down
( e ) n o -
, ,

a l amp any w here .

They ar e not admitted to the sixty eight Ti rth as the Brahm an e ats no food ( from their h ands ) -
,
.

They rem ain alw ays dirty d ay an d night t o their f orehe ad ( they d o not apply ) Til aks ( m arks ) ,
.

They sit do w n h aving al w ays put the shr oud o f de ath ( over their body ) they hide themselves and
, ,

d o not go to a court .

O n thei r loins ( they c arry ) their cups in their h ands a ( white ) brush ( of w ool ) ( thus h aving
l
, , ,

cle an sed the pl ace ) they go f or w ard s an d b ackw ards .

They are neither Jagi s n or Jan gam s nor are they K az i s or Mullas ,
2
.

R uined by the deity they go about di stressed cur sed goes the herd about ,
.

H e kills an d v i v ifi es the living beings none o ther preserves ( t hem ) ,

.

Al ms an d ablutions are ab andoned ashes ar e put o n the h e ad o f the plucked on e ( i a t h e Jaina) ,

. . .

In the w ater gems ar e produced the ( mount ain ) Mé ru w as m ade the churni ng st aff ( by the gods ) ,
-
.

The sixty eight Ti r th as ( w ere ) established by the D avi at the festiv als the praise ( of the gods ) is
-
,

By him ( i e th e Jain a) neither a music al instrument is pl ayed ( in honour o f th e gods ) n or worship

. .

( perf ormed) ( w here as ) the w ise ones al w ay s bo w do w n ( in w orsh ip )

,
.

W h o w hilst living dies he is s aved w hen w ater is put o n ( hi s) he ad

, ,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) : th e he ad plucked ones ar e devils t o them nothing is ple asing

-
,
.

A fter it h as r ained j o y springs up the f rugal econ omy of the cre atures h as come to an end
, ,
.
3

Af ter it h as r ained there i s corn sug a r c ane an d cotton ( produced ) every o n e gets his sh eet 4
, ,
-
,
.

A fter it h as r ained ( the kine etc ) bro w se the grass the w om an constantly churns the ple as ant
, , .
,

thick milk .

By me ans o f th at gh i burnt o ffering s acri fi ce an d w orship being alw ays m ade the business ( o f m an )
-
, ,

is prospering .
5

The Guru is the oce an al l th e rivers ar e disciples by b ath in g in w hich gre atn ess is ( obtained )
, , .

N anak ( s ay s) : if the he a d plucked ones do n o t b athe ( in it) seven spits ( o n them l ) dust on their
-
,
6
,

he ad !
S l ot I L ; mah al d II .

W h at c an the cold do t o the fire wh at the nigh t to the sun ? ,

W h at d arkness t o the moon w h at is the n ature o f w in d an d w ater ? ,

W h at c an the things do to the e arth in w hich every thing is produced ? ,

Nan ak ( s ays ) : then the honour ( o f a thing ) is kno w n , w hen he ( i a . . God ) protects ( its ) honour .

P aur i .

Thou , 0true L ord ar t al w ays h appy , .

Thou ar t t h e true court the others are coming , an d goin g .

Wh o asks the true gi ft h e i s like thee , .

W
1
T he sort o f broo m m ad e o f w h ite w ool w ith w h ich t h e J ain a s cl e an se the p l ac e b efore an d
is a , ,

a ft er th e m l est t h ey by in a d v er t e n ce d es t r oy a l i v i n g b e i n g
, T h is broom t hey call 3 333 8 1 .
.

#311 1 a m en dic an t ; th ey w orship S h iva a n d t h e L in g a a d h a te t h e B ra h m a n T hey w e ar m a tted

2
, n .

h a i r a n d ri g a b ell w h en beggin g
n .

W 3 h a s he re t h e m ea in g of f r ug a l t emp er a n c e n
“
.

4
1 43 2 1 a m a sh eet sp r ead o ut t o r ec ei v e ric e etc f r om t h e cooki n vessel T h e se n se i s : e very o n e
,
g
.
, .
, .

g e t s h is ( full) sha r e o f f oo d .

5
T h e a rg um en t us e d h ere i s j ust t h e s ame as th at a dva n ce d in the Bh ag av ad Gi ta iii 1 0 -
, . .

as Spit Spi t ti n g
6
3 21 m . .
. , .
 21 " RA G GA U RI , MA H S A BD I . II .

RA GU GA U RI GU AR E RI .

(l au
p adas {an d} Dup adae .

Om ! The true n ame is th ecre ator the divine m ale w ithout fe ar

, , w itho ut enmity ,

of timeless form unproduced from the w omb

,
.

By the favour o f the Guru !

mah al d I .

The fe ar ( of God ) is very heavy a gre at w eight ,

The w isdom of the ( hum an ) mind is li ght it talks ( random ) w ords ,

1
.

( By w hom ) the lo ad i s put on t h e he ad an d c arried about

He by the f avourable look ( of Go d ) an d by destin y reflects o n the Guru
,
.

P ause .

W ithout the fe ar ( o f Go d) none l p ass over wi l .

The state ( of ) the f e ar ( of Go d ) i s kept 11 p by me ans o f faith 2

.

F e ar i s in the body ( l ike ) fire it i s kin dled wi th fe a r ,

.

The state o f fe ar i s sh aped by me ans o f the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

W ithout f e ar the sh a ping i s but rough .

( If ) the mould is blind the c a st i s bli nd

3
.
,

By the sport o f the intell ect desir e i s produced .

By a thous and clevernesses p assion does not go dow n .

N an ak ( s ays ) : the flesh l y minded t alk w ind -

.

Blind is ( their ) w ord ( = instruction ) an d senseless pr attle .

Gaur i mal aria I .

In fe ar is the house in the house i s fe ar , by me ans of the fe ar ( o f God ) fe ar goes .

W h at is th at fe ar by w hi ch fear subsides ?
,

W ithout thee there i s no other place .

W h ate ver exi sts al l is thy ple asure

,
}

P ause .

O ne ould be af raid i f there should be ano ther obj ect o f fe ar

w , .

H e is al armed by f e ar ( in w hom there i s) an upro ar o f the min d

, .

The soul does nei ther die n or is drow ned it p asses over , .

By w hom ( everythi ng ) is done he does eve r ything , .

By (hi s) order it comes by ( h i s) order it goes , .

In f u ture an d p ast ( ti m es ) it is absorbed by ( hi s) order 5

.

( Wh o h as) love to Brahm ( an d ) a desire ( fo r) he aven

L i gh t , i bl e t o b ear t h e w eigh t
1
. e
. not a .

7
m m Ra fa is a comp o u d verb i n w hich Rafi ? is n early me an in gless n ,
.

l fg r s m moul d st a mp Hi m
3 '

, . .
, in dist in ct .
:
.

313 fi g} m f g al l i s t h y pl ea sure
4 - '

, 6 al l 1 3
p 1 o d uc ed by t h y pleasure ( o r 0 1 d er )
, .

W
5
“I? l i t er al ly b efore a n d a fter 2 e th e soul i n i t s p ast a n d fut ure bi rth s , . .
is a b sorbed ( re
a bS O I bed ) by h i s orde r .
 RA G GA U RI , MA H . I .
, S ABB I I I . IV .
21 3

In h im is much hunger ( after ) s sign of direction

‘
l
.

E ating an d drinking the f e ar ( of Go d ) ( is h i s) support .

W ithout e ating ( it ) he di es ( an d ) begom es a fool .

( Is there ) an y an y an y an y one w hose he ( i e God ) is ?

, , , , . .

E very one ( is ) thine thou ( belongest) to all

, .

W hose the living cre atures w e al th an d property ar e ,

To express a thought ( about him ) is diffi cult ( s ays) Nanak , .

Gaur i makal d I .

III .

M ake w isdom th e mother contentment the , father .

Tr uth the broth er ; thi s is the best .

2

P ause .

There i s a talking ( about Go d ) ( but ) nothi ng ( in re ali ty ) c an be s aid ( about him )

, .

Thy po w er an d v alue ar e not att aine d .

( Whose ) tw o fathers i n l aw modesty an d reflection h ave become

- -
,

H e m akes ( in h i s) he art ( religious ) w orks ( his) w if e .

The day appointed for th e w edding ( is ) union ( w ith the s aints ) m arri age sep aration ( fro m the w orld ) , . s

The true an d holy ones ( s ays Nan ak ) they are fit ( rel atives )
, , .

Gazer ? makal d I .

The union ( of ) w in d w ater fire , , .

The sport o f the fickle acti ve intell ect ,

.

The nine doors an d the tenth g ate .

Comprehend 0 w ise one th is thought !

, ,

P ause .

He is rel ti ng spe king he ring

a ,
a , a .
4

W h o reflects on his o w n self he becomes w ise ,

.

The body is e arth the w ind ( bre ath ) spe aks ( i n it )

, .

Comp rehend O w ise one w h o h as died

, ,

The form body ) h as died egotism i s rejected ,

.

H e h a s not di ed w h o is seeing
,
.

For w hose s ake they go to the b ank of a Ti r th a

( Th at ) exquisite je w el is even in the he ar t .

The Ban dit h avi ng re ad an d re ad discusses an argument

, , ,

T h e S ikh s d o n ot m ak e o f these tw o lin es T hey explai n 51 1 by ffi fl f i nq y mi n-U K

k no w wh at t o .
' '

by W 3 3 ( l ike he a ven) m by I f ]? 0 1 X i } 3 3 (lik e a rive1 ) al l whic h expl an atio n s give n o

' '

, ,

sense w h at ever U1 ? is a n am e fo r B ra hm (the a bsolute s ubstance) 25 311 2; w e w oul d expl ain by i

.
an :

guid an ce d irectio n an d m = E m sig n ( in H i n d ustam also w t; as : li leg uL to m ake o n e un d er

, , ,
‘
» ,

stan d by hints) T hese verses are mere rid dles in t e n d ed for puz z ling
.
,

A ccor d in g to t h e J a n a m p at r i these w or d s ar e s aid t o h ave been a d dressed t o M ardan a w he n he asked

2
,

l eave t o revisit h is fa m ily .

Ve h a ve a dded th e w or d s i n p a renthesis a ccor d ing t o co njecture as Nan ak usu ally only g i v es a few
3
\ ,

hints which by th ems elves a re more or l ess u n i n t ellig ible

,
.

4
T h e w i s appa re n tly re ferri n g t o the S upreme .
 21 4 RAG GA U R I , MA H . S AE D V . VI .

( But ) does not know the thin g th at is w ithin .

I h ave not died m y c al amity ( only ) h as di ed

,
.

H e h as n o t died w h o rem ains absorbed ( in the S upreme )

, .

N an ak ( s ays ) : by the Guru Br ahm is sho w n

( Wh o ) is not seen dying an d going .

Gaur i maleal d I .

Dakhn i .

( 1 ) ( Wh o ) h avin g he ard
,
an d he ard comprehends ( an d) minds th e n ame
To him I al w ays devote myself .

( Whom ) thou thyself le adest astray , ( he h as) no pl ace nor spot .

( Whom ) thou in str uc t est ( in truth ) , ( him ) th en un i t est to union ( w ith thyself ) .

P ause .

( I f ) the n ame be obtained it goes w ith m e , .

W ithout the n ame the w hole ( w orld ) i s bound by de ath .

A griculture ( an d ) trade ( ar e under ) the protection o f the n ame .

A bundle of seed ( of ) sin s ( an d ) religious m erits ( is w i th m en ) .

P le asure p assion in the he art ar e a loss 1

an d .

W h o h as f orgotten the n ame dep arts w ith a blemish in his he art

, .

The i nstruction o f the true Guru i s true .

Body ( an d ) mind ( become ) cool tranquil ) ( by ) true know ledge .

By the f ull ness o f w ater in the moat ( there ) is sap ( in ) the lotus ” .

( Wh o ) are attached t o the w ord ( o f the Guru ) ( they ar e ) sw eet ( like ) t h e j uice ( o f ) sugar c ane
,
-
.

In accord ance w ith ( his ) order there ar e ten gates in the fort “
body ) .

F ive d w ell in it h aving met ( in ) infini te light ,

.

H e himsel f is w ei ghed he hi m sel f is the ret ai l de aler

,
-
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Guru ) he is accomplishing ‘ ( the di sciples ) .

Gaur i m ahal a I .

VI .

Is it kno wn from w hence ( m an ) comes ?

,

F rom w h at he is produced in w h a t he is absorbe d,

H o w he is bound h o w he gets em an cip ation ?

,

H o w he i s absorbed ( in ) the imperish able self born -

on e ?

P ause .

The n ame is nectar in th e he art the n ame ( is nectar ) in the mouth , .

( It is ) the n ame ( o f ) Nar H ari ( by ) Nar Hari ( he becomes ) free from desire
-
,
-
.

blow , loss ( i n t r ade) a m is fortune

1
a a , .

S uch l in e s c a n no t b e t r a n sl a ted a s al l f es t s o n co j ecture n o c a s e n o r verb b ei n g i n di ca ted

2
, n , .

p erh ap s U fa HI a m o at o r d i tch T h e sen se w oul d be if th ere i s pl en ty o f w a t er in a mo at t h e l o t uses a re

-
: .
,

f ull o f sap .

fi fi afi (m 1 ) is her e ( a s adj ect ive) us ed i n a n a dverbial s ens e a c c or d ing to I t i s co n structed wi th

3
.

t h e L oc ative ( occ a io n al ly also w i th t h e

s

T h e s en se o f t h is ers e i s n o t ea sily fou n d o ut a s n o gr am m atical constr ucti on i s observed

4
v , \
V h o th e .

fi v e ar e ( s ens es P) is n o t i n d icat ed
, T h e S ikh Gr an th i s th em sel es a r e b ewildere d about it
. v .
21 6 REG GAU BI, MA H . S A BB VI II . IX .

I ascend the bo at w hen ( my ) turn comes,

.

W h o ar e repulsed ( from ) the bo at are be aten at the threshold ( of Hari )

,
.

The True one I pr aise blessed i s the g ate of the Guru

,
.

In the g ate an d house of Nanak i s he w h o h as al w ays the s ame form

1 .

Gaa r i ; mah a l a 1 .

V III .

The ( drooping) lotus ( of the he art) w as turned up ( again ) by reflect ing on Brahm .

A stream ( o f ) nectar ( is flo w ing ) ( in ) the tenth ga te ( o f ) the skull 2

.

The three w orlds are penetrated by Murari himsel f .

3

P ause .

0 my heart let no error be entert ained !

,

The m ind being reconciled ( with itself ) nectar juice is drunk -

.

H avin g overcome birth ( regenerat ion ) by dying ( my) mind is reconciled .

4
( I h ave ) died in ( my ) o w n sel f by the mind ( my ) mind is know n
,
.

‘
his
( I f ) ( ) fa vour able look is besto w ed the house is kno w n by the house
,
5
.

Chastity virtue ( going to ) Ti rth as control o f the p assions ( ar e contained ) in

, , ,
th e n ame .

( I f ) I m ake a gre at extension ( of works ) of w h at use i s it ? ,

The divine m ale Naray an is the in w ard governor .

I ould mind nother one I ould o t o an other s house

’
'

I
( )f w a w g ,
.

( F rom ) w hom sh all I ask ( anything ) ? th ere is n o pl ace .

Nan ak is e asily absorbed by me ans of the instruction o f t h e Guru .

Gaur i maka l a I .

IX .

( If ) the tr ue Guru
be met w i th h e show s th at dying is necess ary
,
.

( To w h om ) th e ta ste ( o f ) dying an d ce asing to be is ple asing in h i s he ar t

H e, having removed pride obtains the hea venly city ,
.

P ause .

Death is w ritten ( decreed ) this ( cre a ture ) is not rem aining

,
.

Wh o m utters Hari h e is rem aining in the asylum of B ar i

,
.

( If ) th e true Guru be met w ith then du al ity flees ,

.

The lotus ( of the he art ) i s opening the m ind clings to Hari the Lord, , .

W h o dies w hils t livi ng ( he gets ) in the o t her w orld gre at enj oyment
, .

'

By th e true Guru being obtained by virtue an d control o f th e p assions ,

becomes )
T h e l adder instruction ) of the Guru is higher th an high .

g at e mouth W3 ho us e = bo dy he a r t
t h e S up re me w h o never ch an g es
, 53 1 3 (m , .
@
y ) wh o i s al ways o f the s am e form ,

, .

2 1 1 g m fi is a gr amm atic al blunder i n stea d o f but as this did n o t suit th e vers e it w a s

2 ' ‘
, ,

exch an g ed for ten .

Th a t i s h e i s present in t h e th r ee w orl ds as t h e ab solute substan ce

3
, .

T h e s en se i s : t h e mi n d beco m es conscious o f itsel f .

W3 is t h e s ame as k sh Et ra the body o r h ouse o f th e atm a o r p urush a T h e house i s know n a s t h e seat

5
, .

o f t h e spiri t ( its el f an em an at io n o f t h e S upreme S p i rit

) I t must n o t be lost sigh t o f t h at ( acco rdi n g t o n ote
.
,

1 p 2 1 5) 3175 an d W? are h ere essentially the s ame 3175 b ei n g th e la st o f t h e t wenty t hree components o f
, .
,
-

t h e k sh é t r a .
 RA G GA U BI , MA H . S AE D X .
— X II .
21 7

By des tiny he is obtained ( an d) the fe ar o f Y am a ( is then ) done aw ay w ith .

By meeting w ith t h e Guru ( the disciple ) is absorbed i n th e bosom ( of H ari ) .

O ut o f me rcy the house an d p alace ( on ari ) is show n ( by the Guru ) .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : h aving destroyed his egotism ( individu ality ) he is united ( w i th Hari ) .

Gaur i mahal d I .

X .

The lot h as fallen none e ffaces it , .

W h at do I kno w w h at w ill h appen in f uture ?

,

W hat h as ple ased him th at h as come to p ass

, .

N one other i s acting ( but he ) .

P ause .

I do n o t know ( th y ) w orks ( nor) h o w gre at thy gift is .

A cts an d deeds are the n ature of thy n ame .

Thou ar t such a gre at donor an d giver .

There is n o deficiency ( o f gi fts ) thy store room is distributed ( to the

,
-

( By w hom ) conceit is ente r t ained he is n o t agree able ( to thee )

, .

S oul an d body al l is w ith thee

,
in thy po wer) .

Thou killest an d v i v i fi est thou p ar d on est an d un itest ( w ith thyself )

, .

A s it ple ases thee so th en c ausest thy n ame t o be muttered

,
.

Thou ar t w ise cle ar sighted an d true concerni ng me

,
-
.

By me ans of the instruction of t h e Guru thou givest ( me ) confidence ( in thee ) .

In ( my ) body is filth sin ) ( my ) mind is n o t attached ( t o thee )

,
.

By me ans o f t h e w ord of the Guru by ( h is) true instruction is kno w n ,

Th y po w er an d the gre atness o f ( thy ) n ame .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : the devotee is rem aining ( in thy ) asylum .

Ga ur i mahal a I .

X I .

( Whom ) he m akes recite the ine ffable ( S upreme )

( Hi m ) h e gives nectar t o drink .

O th er fe ars ar e f orgotten , in the n ame he is absorbed .

P ause .

Wh y should one be afraid ? fe ar is absorbed in the fe ar ( of God ) .

By me ans o f the w ord o f the perfect Gur u he ( the S upreme ) is know n .

In w hose he art is the div ine m ale Ram a r ay of li gh t ” of Hari : ,

2

He is w ith n atur al e ase united ( wi th him ) praise (t o him ) ,

E arly in the morni n g an d in the evening th e s n akes go .

H ere an d there the flesh l y minded are bound by de ath

- .

( I n w hose ) he art Ram is d ay an d night they are perfect

-
,
.

Nanak ( s ays ) : ( if ) Ram be f ound error is removed ,

.

Gauri mah al d I .

X II .

He is born dies ( again ) w h o is f ostering the three qu alities

an d ,
.

The four V edas relate the ( diff erent ) form s (h e is going through ) .

1
3 113 is
3 " h ere best t aken as p art past ( S ansk zi ai ) distribute d . .
, .

2
UTfi T, very likely ( fi zfl a r ay o f light contracted t o
'

, ,
21 8 RA G GAU B I ,
MA H . S AE D X III .

They give an expl an ation of the three states }

In the fourth st at e Har i is know n fr om the true
z
Guru .

P a use .

By d evotion to K i m an d the service o f the Guru he is crossing .

H e w ill not again be born an d die .

E very one spe aks o f the f our d esir able obj ects 3
.

The S mriti an d the S hastras ar e in the mouth o f the P an dit .

W ithout the Guru th e reflecti on on the ( four ) objects is n ot obt ained .

T h e boon of fin al e m ancip ation is obt ained by devotion to H ari .

In w hose he art th at H ar i d w ells

( Th at ) discipl e obtai ns devotion ( t o Hari ) .

Devotion t o H ari ( bri n gs in ) fin al em ancip ation ( an d) j oy .

By m eans of the instructi on o f the Gur u the highest bliss is obtaine d .

By w hom h e ( t e H ari ) i s obt ained (t o him ) he h as been sho w n by the Guru wh o h as seen
. .
, ,

W h o in desire h as become free from ( al l ) desires he is instructed ( in the w ay of ,

The L ord of th e poor i s gi v in g al l comforts ( to him )

( Whose ) mind i s attached t o the feet o f Hari ( s ays ) Nan ak ,
.

Gaur i Eé ti mahal a I .

X I II .

The bo dy is immortal ” ( thus thinki n g ) this w orld rem ains in a ple asant sport
“
.

It practises greediness covetousness ( an d ) m uch falsehood it raises m any lo ads

, ,
.

Thee 0 body I h ave seen rolling like dust on the groun d

, ,
.

P ause .

H e ar ,
he ar my instruction
Good w orks w il l be stopped O my soul there w ill n ot come ag ain an opportunity ( for doing good w orks )
, ,
.

I address t hee O my body he ar th en my instruction !

, ,

Thou r evilest an other an d d esirest wh at is another s thou m akest a false t ale be aring ’
,
-
.

Thou l o ok est at another s w i fe 0 my soul th ou commi t test the ft an d adultery

’

, , .

The soul h as dep arted tho u ar t le ft beh ind such a f ors aken w om an thou h ast become
, .

Thou 0 body ar t le ft ( behind ) w h at w ork h ast t h en d one ( even ) in a dre am ?

, ,

W hen I s t ole anything I considered it a s good in my mind , .

H ere there is n o lustre there no entr ance ( f o r me ) ( my ) w hole life is lost

, ,
5
.

P ause .

I h ave become very much afflicted O father N anak nobo dy asks a w ord about me , , .

A r abi an an d Turki sh horses gold silver lo ads o f clothes , , ,

Go w i th nobody ( s ays ) N an ak they f all o ff 0 fool !

, , ,

A cup of sugar can dy f ruit ever ythi n g w as tasted by m e thy n ame alone is nect ar
-
, , , .

( I f ) laying ( deep ) t h e found ation I r aise a w all the house ( w ill be ) a he ap o f ashes
, , , .

Th e three st a t e s ar e :
( w a kef uln es s) G E ( d r e a m ) fi gf fi ( deep slee p )
, , .

T h e ! ?t
2
3 is t h e st a t e o f a bs tracti on f r o m w i thout an d a b sorp t io n in the c o n templatio n of one s
’

o wn Sp i it (
r as n cal w ith t h e S up rem e)
id e t i .

T h e fo ur d esi ra bl e o bje c t s ar e : U I5 m Ih a
3
, , .

4
M an m ust b ec o m e f ree fr o m des ire o r hope o f g etti n g an
y rew ard fo r h i s a ctions o n ly in te n t o n
,

the co n te m pl at io n o f B ar i .

W S ansk W E w h ole
.
, .
220 RA G GA U R I ,
MA H . S A E D X VI .
— X VIII .

”
The body is m ad the soul ignorant s aying : mine mine ( life ) is p assed
, ,
“
,
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : the n aked ( body ) is burnt then afterw ards ( the people ) repent ,
.

Gaur i Zé ti ’
mah al d I .

X VI .

The medicine ch arm ( an d) root ( o f ) the mind ( is ) the

,
O n e ; if the thought be fixed ( o n h i m ),

0 de ar !
He is obtained , wh o is cutting off the si n ful w orks of the several births ,
0 de ar
P ause .

Mind the O n e L ord 0 brother ! ,

In thy thr ee qu alities thou art involved in the w orld the inco mprehensible on e c annot be compre ,

hende d O de ar !
,

( L ike ) sug ar c andy the Maya is sw eet in the body by me an d thee a bundle ( of it ) is lifted up
-
, ,

0 de ar !
The ni ght is d ark n othing i s seen t h e mouse cuts the rope ( o f life ) t o pieces 0 brother !
, , ,

A s much as t h e fleshl y minded d o so much p ain they incur the disciples obtain gre atness
-
, , .

Wh at is done by him ( t e H ari ) that is e ffect ed the destiny c annot be efi ac ed O de ar !

'

. .
, , ,

Wh o ar e f ull them he fills ( so that) they d o n o t w ant ( anything ) w h o ar e colour ed them he

, , , ,

steeps in colour 0 de ar !
,

I f thou bec omest thei r dust ( s ays ) Nan ak then thou w ilt obtain something 0 fool ish one !
, , ,

Gaur i té ti mah al d I .

X V II .

Whose mother ( i s sh e ) w hose father ( is he ) ? from w hich pl ace h ave w e come ?

,

W ithin an or b ( of ) fire ( an d ) w ater w e ar e produced fo r wh at w ork ar e w e m ade ? ,

P ause .

my L ord w h o kno w s thy qu ali ties ?

O ,

My vices c annot be told .

H o w m any trees an d shrubs ar e know n ( by ) us h o w m any anim als ar e produced ? ,

H ow m any sn ak es come into the cottages h o w m any birds are c aused t o fly about ? ,

H e breaks into city shops an d p al aces h aving committed theft he comes home
-
,
1
.

H e looks f or w ards an d looks b ack w ard s bef ore thee w here w ill he hide himsel f ? ,

The shores ( of rivers ) T i r th as t h e shops in the B az ars h ave been seen by me in the nin e
, ,

re gions ( of the e art h ) .

H aving t aken the scales ( I ) beg an to w eigh ( al l I h a ve seen ) the ret ail de aler is even in the he art - .

A s much as th e oce an an d sea i s filled w ith w ater so m any ar e my vices , .

Besto w mercy ( o n me ) h ave a li ttle comp assion ( o n m e) bring across the sinking stones !
, ,

( My ) soul bur n s like fire w ithin the she ars move about , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : wh o kno w s the order ( of Go d ) he ( enj oys ) com fort d ay an d night , .

Gaur i bai r d g am I
'

; mahal d .

X VIII .

The night is p assed in sleeping the day is p assed in e atin g , .

( O ne s ) li fe time is ( precious ) like a diamond it is given aw ay for co w rie

’
-
, a .

Fi fi ! i M
l
“ s
" a h o usc or p alace hun g o ver with gl ass (literally : a h ou se o f lightening) .
 RAG GA U R I ,
MA H I . .
, S A BD X IX . X X . 9 21

P ause .

The n ame of Ram is not kno wn ( by thee ) .

O f ool thou w ilt ag ain rue it after wards !

,

U nri ghteous property they put into the ground unrighteous ( proper ty ) c annot be liked , .
1

Those wh o go off ( t o the other w orld ) liking unrighteous ( property ) come ( ag ai n in another birth )
, ,

h aving lost the unrighteous ( property ) .

I f th at w ould be obtained w hich on e t akes himself every on e w ould enj oy a good destiny
, , .

The decision is m ade according to ( one s ) w orks though every one w ish it ( other w ise )
’
, .

Nan ak ( s ays ) by w hom the w ork ( o f cre ation ) is m ade he takes care o f it , .

The order of the L ord is not kno w n t o some one he gives gre atness , .

Gaur i bazr d gazz i ; mahal a I

'

X IX .

( Though ) I become
doe an d live in the w ood an d eat esculent roots
a

My b ri degroom is met w ith by the favour o f the Guru ; I am devoted devoted ( to thee ) O L ord ! , ,

P ause .

I am the ( fem ale ) ret ail de aler of Ram

-
.

Thy n ame is my goods an d trade 0 L ord ,

( Though ) I become a K okil an d li v e o n a m ango tree an d reflect on ( my ) n atural sound ( or voice ) -

W ith n atural e ase m y bridegroom is met w ith w h o in appe arance an d form is boundless , .

( Though ) I become a fi sh an d live in the w ater : he w h o remembers al l cre atures , ,

My bridegroom d w ells on this an d th at side I sh all meet ( w ith him ) h aving stretched out my ar m
, .

( Though ) I become a ( fem ale ) sn ake an d live o n the ground : ( i f ) the w ord ( o f the Gur u )
d well ( in me ) fe ar goes
,
.

Nan ak ( says ) : they ar e al ways h appy m arried w omen ( in ) w hom the luminous ( S upreme ) ( is ) ( in ) , ,

light they ar e absorbed .

Gaur i p ur bi d ip aki ; mal aul uI .

Om ! By the favour of the true Guru !

p
In w hat house pr aise is uttered an d the cre ator reflected upon
In that house sing a song of pr aise remember the cre ator ! ,

P ause .

S ing thou a song of praise of my fe arless ( Hari ) .

I am devoted t o th at song of praise by w hich h appiness is al ways obtained

,
.

Continu al ly the living cre atures are taken c are of the giver w ill see ( to them ) ,
.

The estim ation of thy gif ts is not found out w ha t is the v alu ation of th at donor ? ,

The ye ar an d day appointed for the w edding is w ritten ( fixed ) h aving met apply oi l !
Give 0 s w eethe art a blessing by w h ich u
, ,
n ion w i th the L ord m ay be brought about !
,

To every house this mess age ( is sent) the c alls ar e continu ally m ade ,
.

I f th e c all er be remembered ( s ays ) Nan ak those d ays come

, ,
.

The S ikhs explain W or m by ”WEB boundl ess en dl ess w hich i s etymologic ally in admissible
, , ,

gives no sense wha te ver . W e derive mm from th e S an sk a l ga false unrigh teous .

, , .
22 RA G GA U nI , MA H . S AE D I . II .
(X X I . XX II ).

RA GU GA U RI ; M AHA L A I II .

Om ! By the f avour of the true Guru !

Gaur i gud r efi
‘

I . X X I .

The Guru being met w ith union ( w ith ) H ari is brought about .

H e himsel f unites to union ( w ith himsel f ) .

My L ord himself know s al l the means .

By his order he uni tes ( w ith himself ) ( those , w ho m ) he recogniz es by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) .

P ause .

By the f e ar o f the true Gur u error an d dre ad go o ff .

W h o i s immersed in f e ar he is t inged in t rue c o lour

,
.

By meeting w ith the Gur u H ari d w ells n atur all y in the he art .

My L ord i s w eighty his val ue ( estim ation ) is n ot f ound out

,
.

( Wh o ) praises by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Guru ) ( him w h o ) h a s n o end nor li mit
H im my L ord p ardons he is p ardoning
,
.

By meeting w ith t h e Guru al l w isdom an d intelli gence are obtained .

In a pure he art d w el ls th at True one .

By the ind welling of the True one every w ork ( becomes ) pure .

The highest w ork i s t o reflect on the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

F rom the Guru the t r ue service ( o f H ar i ) is obtained .

S ome disciple becomes a cqu ainted w ith the n ame .

The liber al H ari lives he is giving ( t o him )

,

( Wh o ) entertains love t o ( his ) n ame ( says ) N an ak

,
.

Gaur i gua r ér i
‘

maha l d II I .

II . X X II .

From the Gur usome pio us person obtains divi ne kno w le dge .

From the Guru he gets understanding an d is acco m plished .

From the Gur u ( he gets ) com posure an d true reflection .

Fro m the Guru he obt ain s the g ate of fin al em ancip atio n .

P ause .

By a perfect l ot ( destiny ) the Guru comes an d is met w ith .

By true composure one i s ab sorbed in the True o n e .

By meeting w ith the Guru he quenches the fire o f thirst .

By me ans of the Guru tran quill ity comes an d d w ells in the m ind .

By me ans of the Guru he becomes pure cle an an d holy , .

Through the Guru union ( w ith H ari) is eff ected by me ans of the w ord .

W ithout the Guru al l the ( w orl d ) is led astray by error .

W ithout the n ame i t incurs much p ain .

H e w h o becomes a disciple meditates on the n ame

, .

By the sight of the Tr ue one true honour i s obtained .

W h o sh all be c alled a donor ? he alone is the donor .

If he besto w ( h i s) mercy union ( w ith him ) is brought about by means of the w ord
,
( of the Guru ) .
2 24 RE G GA U RI, M A H . S AE D V . VI .
(X X V . XX VI )
.

By true devotion on e cle ars aw ay fr om w ithin his o wn self .

My L ord is true h e kno w s every procedure

,
.

N an ak ( says ) ( to w hom ) h e gives th e n ame he kno w s it ,

.

Gaur i gud r é r i maizal a III .

V . X X V .

By killing the min d th e busy running about ( o f the mind ) dies .

W ithout dying h ow sh all ( on e) get Hari ?

Does an y o n e kno w a medicin e by w hich the mind m ay di e ?
,

at m an h as underst an d ing
(W hose ) m ind dies by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Guru ) th .
,

P ause .

O n w hom h e bestow s greatness

Into ( h i s) mind Hari comes an d d w el ls ( therein ) by the favour of the Guru .

( I f ) th e d isciple pr actises ( religious ) w orks

Then he gets an insight into this ( hum an ) mind .

Th e min d is intoxicated in egotism like an eleph a nt .

The Guru i s the go ad ; h aving kill ed ( th e selfish mind ) he v i v ifi es ( it again ) .

The indomitable mi nd (h ardly ) some on e subjects .

I f it re m ains ste ady then it becomes pure

‘
.
,

By th e disciple t his mind is adj usted ( brought into subjection ) .

The dise ases ( of ) egotism ar e removed from w ith in .

W h o ) is kept by him f rom t h e beginning ( h im ) he unites t o union ( w ith himsel f )

( ,
.

H e i s never sep arated by me ans of th e w ord ( of th e Guru ) he is absorbed

,
.

H i s o w n m achinery he himsel f kno w s .

N an ak ( s ays ) : the disciple kno w s the n ame .

Gaur i gud r ér i mabal a III .

VI . X X VI .

In egotism the w hole w orld is m ad .

By second love an d error it is led astray .

It m akes m any reflections but itsel f it does ,

n ot know .

C arrying d aily on business lif e i s p assed .

P ause .

E njoy ( in thy ) he art Ri m 0 brother ! ,

Th e tongue ( o f ) the disc iple i s m ade j uicy ( by ) the j uices ( o f ) Hari .

By w hich disciple Ram i s recogniz ed in his he art

H e serving th e li fe o f the w orld is know n in th e four peri ods ( o f the w orld )
, ,
.

( By w hom ) h aving destroyed h i s egotism he ( i e Ram ) is kno w n

,
. .

( O n h i m ) the L ord bestow s mercy w h o is requi t ing a ccording to one s w orks

’ 2
.
,

Those people ar e true w h o ar e united ( w i th the S upreme ) by the w ord of the

, Guru .

They keep back their running ( mind ) an d st0 p it .

T h e S ik h Gr a n t h i s could n ever t ell m e w h at mg ? 8 %means B ut W T signifies here ( as in .

S an sk rit ) t o em i
,
r a n . I f t h e m i d rem a i n s steady fixed ( O ppos ed t o l ing —
n , 5 r un ni n g about ) it i s purified ( by , ,

b ei g co n ce t ra ted o
n n n t h e S upr em e) .

331 1 fi l m requiti n g a ccord i n g t o one s w orks d ispose r o f th e d estin y o f men a ccording to their
2 ’
, ,

d eserts .
 RE G GAU sI, MA H I I I S A E D V II VIII (X X VII VIII )
. .
, . . . XX .
225

They obtain the ni ne tre asures ( of ) the n ame from the Guru .

By th e me rcy o f H ari Hari comes an d d w ells i n thei r min d

( ) .

S aying Ram Ram ” ther e is j cfi an d tranquillity in the body

, ,
r
.

( If ) he ( i e Ram ) dw ell w ithin th e to rment of Yam a is not inflicte d

. .
, .

H e himsel f i s th e Lord h e h imself the Vaz i r ( pri me minister)

, .

Nanak ( says) serve thou al ways H ari wh o is prof ound in q u alities , .

Gauri gud r ér i ; makal d III .

V II . XX V II .

How hould he be forgotten w hose th e l if e an d soul is

s
,

How should he be f orgotte n wh o is contained in al l ,

By servi ng whom there is assurance ( of ) honour at the thre sh old .

P ause .

I s acr ifice mysel f to the gratuitous service of the n ame of H ari .

( If ) thou ar t forgotten I am bur nt I die, ,

.

By them thou ar t f orgotten wh oar e led astray by thyself ,

.

By them th ou art f orgotten wh o are ( involved ) in du ality

, .

The flesh l y minded (w h o ar e) destitute o f div ine kn o wledge fall into the w omb ( again )
-
, , .

With whom he i s invariably ple ased them th e true Guru appli es to ( h i s) servi ce , .

W ith w hom he is invari ably pleased in their mi nd he c auses Hari to d w ell , .

By th e instruction o f th e Guru they are absorbed in the n ame of H ar i .

In whose bag is religious merit ‘ they ar e reflectin g on divine know ledge , .

In whose bag is religious merit ( by them ) egotism is destroyed , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) I s a crifice myself to them w h o are a ttached to the n ame , .

Gaufi gud r é r i mahal d III .

VI II . X X VI II .

Thou ar t in eflabl e h o w c anst thou be described

‘

In th e w ord of th e Guru ( w hich is ) subduing th e mind thou art cont ained

, , .
2

Thy qu ali ties are m any their estim ation is not f ound out
,
.

P ause .

W hose th e species is in him it is absorbed ( again )

,
3
.

Thy in eflabl e story is explained by the w ord o f th e Guru

'
.

Wh ere the true Guru i s there an assembly o f pious men is f ormed

,
.

Wh ere the true Guru i s ( there ) n at urally the qu al ities of Hari ar e pr ai sed
,
.

W here the true Guru is th ere e gotism is b ur nt by me ans of the w ord ( of th e Guru )
,
.

The di sciple obt ains by his service ( o f B ar i ) a pl ace in the p alace ( o f B ari ) .

The di sciple m akes the name of H ari d well i n his he art .

fi ns Q 3 1375 in w hose b a g is reli gion s meri t i e those w h o in a forme r birth h ave accumulate d
, , . .
,

rel igi ous merit get in a f ollo wi ng birt h t h i s r e wa rd th at they medita te o n divi n e k n ow ledge by mean s o f
, , ,

w h i ch t hey obtain fina l em ancipa t ion .

2
T h e w or d s a re to be co n s t ruct ed th us : 313 m m 313 H3 PS 3WW fi l mn fir t h e w ord o f
' '

t h e Guru which i s subd u

,
ing t h e mind i n th at ( word) t hou ar t co ntained
, .

2 11 8 3 si nifies here species F rom which th e species ( or genus) h as ta ken its rise into th at it is
3 “ ”
g .
,

r e a bsor bed
- .
226 RE G GAU E I, M A H I II . .
, S AE D IX . X .
(X X IX . XX X .
)

The disciple is by his devotion ( t o Har i ) absorbed in the n ame of Hari .

The donor hi msel f ( i a Hari ) besto w s gif ts ( on hi m )

. .

W h o is i mbued w ith love t o the perf ect true Guru .

Nan ak ( s ays ) victory to them wh o are attached t o the n am e !

Gaur i g uar ér i
'
makal d III .

IX . X X IX .

From t h e One ar e al l forms an d colours .

W ind w ater fire al l ( elements ) ar e bound up ( in

, , ,
h im ) .
I

The Lor d sees al l th e colours ( =fo r ms) severally .

P a use .

The One is wonderful th at One ( only)

,
.

S ome rare disciple medi tat es ( on him ) .

Naturally the Lord goes about in al l places .

S ome w here he is concealed ( somew here ) m a nifest by the Lord h arm ony ( b etw een himsel f an d the
, ,

cre ature ) is m ade

.

H e h imsel f aw akes the sleeping ones .

H i s estimation is n ot m ade by an y on e .

E very o n e goes on telling ( his ) story .

Wh o is absorbed in the w ord of the Guru he comprehends Hari , .

Hav ing he ard an d he ard he ( i e H ari ) sees ( everything ) by me ans of the w ord of th e Guru he
. .
,

unites ( w ith himsel f ) .

Gre at grandeur is attained by t h e servi ce of the Guru .

Nan ak ( s ays ) those wh o ar e att ached t o the n ame ar e absorbed in the n ame of Har i ,
.

Gaufl gue r er a mahal d III

’

X . X X X .

The fleshl y mind is asl eep by th e delusion o f the M ay a ( an d its ) love ( to h er ) .

The disciple is aw ake reflecting on the qu alities ( o f B ari ) ( an d) divine kno wledge
, .

Those people wake wh o h ave love to the n ame

, .
2

P ause .

E asi ly one w akes an d does not sleep

I f one gets kn ow ledge ( of the tr uth ) f rom th e perfect Guru .

The bad an d inexpert one never compreh ends ( the truth ) .

H e rel ates a stor y ( of some god ) an d str uggles w ith the M ay a .

The bl ind an d h ere of di vine kno w ledge is never accomplished ( em ancip ated ) .

In this ( K ali ) yug em ancipation ( is obtained ) by the n ame of Ram

-
.

S ome r are on e obtains it by reflection on the w ord of t h e Guru .

H e himsel f is s aved an d he is rescuing ( also ) al l his f ami lies .

In this K ali yug are n o ( good ) w orks n or religion

-
.

The birth of the K ali y ug t akes pl ace in the house o f a San dal
-
.

Nan ak ( says ) : without the n ame n o fin al em ancip ati on is obtained .

1
a m , an a rbitr a ry fo r ma tio n fro m the S a n sk m . .

fi mnfi , instea d o f mi n o n a ccoun t o f the rhyme .

228 RAG GA U RI, MA H I I I . .
,
S A DD X IV . XV .
(X X X IV . XXX V)
.

Inexh austible is the w e alth ( of ) the n ame ( of ) Hari , there is no deficiency ( in it ) .

H ere ( in this w orld ) there is alw ays h appiness , an d at the g ate ( of Hari ) lustre is obt aine d .

P ause .

O my mind no doubt should be entert ained !

,

By the disciple nect ar j uice is drunk ( by me ans o f h i s) service ( of the Guru )

- .

W h o serve t h e true Guru they ar e gre at men in th e w orld ,

.

They them selves are s aved ( an d ) al l their f ami lies are em ancipated .

W h o keep th e n ame o f H ari in ( their ) bre ast

They being attached to the name cro ss the w ater o f existence
, ,
.

W o serve the true Gu ru an d ar e ) al w ays ( h i s) sl aves in ( their ) mi n d

( h ) (
A fter h aving destroyed egotism the lotus ( of their ) he art is exp an ded .

The unbea ten ( sound ) sounds ( in them ) they d w ell in their o wn house ,
.

Being attached to the n ame they are lon ely in ( their o wn ) house .

Wh o serve the tr ue Guru their speech is true ,

.

Continually in devotion they utter the prai ses ( o f Hari ) .

D aily they mutter H ari the bow holder ,

-
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : those w h o ar e atta ched to the n ame ar e quite his ( Hari s ) o wn an d w itho ut
’
, ,

concerns .

Gaur i gud r ér i makal d III .

X IV . X X X IV .

) The true Guru is met w it h in accord ance w ith a gre at destiny

‘
(l . .

In ( w hose ) he art is the n ame he enj oys continu ally the reli sh o f Hari ,
.

P ause .

O disciple meditate on the n ame ! ,

H aving ov ercome regeneration thou o btain est the g ain of the n ame .

Divine kno w l edge meditation the w ord of the Guru are sw eet , , .

By the mercy o f the Guru some r are on e tastes an d see s them .

( Though ) one practise much the pre scribed w orks

W i t hout the n ame they ar e but w o e w o e ( an d ) egotism , .

( Wh o ) i s bound by the fetter an d the noose o f the M ay a

He is rele ased ( says ) N an ak by the Guru s explic ation ( of truth )
’
, , .

Ga ur i bazr d gaz n ; makal d I I I

' '

V X V . X X X .

A s the cloud is r aining on the e arth i f 4 there be w ater on the ground or not
3
, .

A s water comes f orth on the gr ound ( an d ) w ithout aff ection ( for a p articul ar pl ace the r ain turns about 5
)
1
The se n se is : th e t r ue Gur u i s m et w t ih , if one ’
s lot or d est in y be g r eat , on a ccount of h is merit o r io us
w orks i n a fo r m e r b ir th .

2
m m , th e c tio n o f th e V é d as tr eati n g
se of r te i s or w ork s t he n
sc r i bed w orks gen erally th e p re .

fi n} a s ;
'
3
,
w e sho u l d exp ec t h ere al so fi fi as fi t fi h as th e appe a r an ce o f be in g i n an adj ec tive]
‘

conn exion w i th w hic h i s n o t t h e c a se .

4
W T, i n t er r o g a t i ve p a r t icl e (p r operly fW —
fi m
'

, w h et her— or
) b efore th e p article fi mn
shoul d be r e p ea t e d .

fi n ; W
5
T; k
kno w w h at to m ak e o f this w ord a s U 3! c an n ot s ig n ify h e re
th e S i h Gr a n t h i s d o n ot
,

foo t B ut LB! o r U ? ” is a subst a n t ive der ive d fr om t h e v e r b 1 3

”
t o be a t ta che d t o t h ence a t tach
“ “
“ ” “
.

1 18 1 , ,

me n t ,
”
af ec t io n to
“
faafij l ength ened o n a ccou n t o f t h e rhyme B ut th e whole co n structio n
.
”
, .

o f t he s e t w o lin es i s b a r baro us .
 RX G GAU RI, MA H II I . .
, S ARI) X VI . X VII (X X X VI. . X X X VII .
) 22 9

P ause .

0 father,
remove thou in this m anner ( thy ) error !
Wh atever on e is doing th at he is 0 (mar in such a one he is absorb ed , , , .

H aving become female an d m al e w h at w orks are they doing ?

Thou art al ways of vari ous forms thy ( pe ople ) ar e absorbed in thee , .

E rri ng ( from truth ) h e falls into so m any bir ths w hen he ( i e Har i ) is obtaine d then he does , . .
,

no longer err .

W hom the affair concerns he kno ws it if he be absorbed in the w ord of the Guru , , .

E ven thou p r oc l aim est thy w ord 1 thou thyself c ausest error to be told ( taught) , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) (if ) re ality is united w ith re ality then he d oes not com e again into regeneration ,
.
2

Gaufi bazr d gazz i ; maha l d III

'

XVI . X XX VI .

( l ) The
. hole w orld is in the po w er o f death being bound by duality
w , .

Th e flesh l y mi nded on e prac tisin g w orks of egoti sm incur s p ain

-
, , .

P ause .

O my mind apply thy thoughts to the feet of the Guru !

,

T h e disciples taki ng the tre asur e of the n am e are em ancipated at the threshold ( of Hari )
, , .

W andering about in the eighty four l akhs ( o f forms of existen c e ) on account of th e obst inacy of-

( their ) min d they come an d go ,

.

The w ord o f the Guru is n ot kno w n ( by them ) ( there fore ) they fal l again an d again into the w om b , .

By the disciple his own self is know n the n ame of Hari ( there fore ) comes an d d w ells in (h is) ,

m ind .

Day by d ay he is given t o devotion he is e asily absorbed in the n ame of Har i , .

( If ) the mind die by me ans of t h e w ord ( o f the Guru ) then a cle ar apprehension ( of tr uth ) ,

t akes pl ace the p assions of egoti sm ar e d ropped

,
.

H umble Nan ak ( l ays ) : ( by whom ) th ey ar e ob tai ned by d estiny ( according to their f ormer w ork I ) ,

( to th em ) are distributed the store rooms ( ) the n me ( )

o f a o f H a ri ’ - .

Gaufl bair dgazz f - mahal d III .

XV II . X X X VII .

In one s fathe r s house there are f our d ays ( t o be spent) by H ar i Hari they ar e fixed
’ ’
, , .

( That ) female disciple is lustrous ( by w hom ) the pr aises ( of H ari ) are sung ,
.

W remembers the excellences o f B ar i ) in her f ather s house she gets a d welling in her father
’

( h o
) ( ,

i n Ll aw s house
’
.

That fem ale disciple is e asily absorbed ( in H ari ) to w hose mind Hari Hari h as been ple asing , , .

P ause .

Th e beloved d wells in the 4 father in

- -
l aw s ’
an d in the father ’
s house ; say , in w h at m anner m ay he be
ob tained
1
Wha t i s U fU ? It ca nnot be here accord i n g to t h e c ontext tho uar t ” but it is very l ikel y th e S ansk
, , , .

3 (z flfi ) , to c all , to procla im corresponding to 3 3 1 R

, ] t hou c ausest t o be told , .

urrfi = m1?
3
The c o nstr uction o f this line is utterly confused a n d a regula r puz z l e ( for which it is intended) but w e ,

do n o t d o ub t th a t the w ord s must be pla ced i n the order w e h a ve tr ansl ate d th em

,
.

Th e fi n} or bel oved is here the S up reme B ein g

, ,
.
 28 0 RI G GA U RI, MA H . III .
, S A BD X VIII ( X X X VIII )
. .

The pure ( S upreme Being ) himself is in apprehensible by hims elf union is brought about ,
.

( I f ) the L ord himself give understanding th e n ame o f H ari is meditated upon ,

.

The very fortun ate one ‘ meets w ith the true Guru from ( his ) mou th nectar is obtained , .

E goti s m an d du ality ar e destroyed n atur al ly an d e asily he i s a bsorbed , .

In all he himself he himself is existing he him sel f applies ( men ) to the n ame
, , .

By the flesh l y minded he is not obtained on account of their prid e by their i gnor ance ( of divine
-
,

m atters ) they ar e foolish .

They do not perform the serv ice o f the true Guru again an d again they r ue it ,
.

They must d w ell in the belly an d w omb in the belly they ar e melted , .

Thus it ple ases my cre ator the flesh l y minded ar e led astray ( by hi m )
,
-
.

By my L ord H ari the f ull destiny ( of every m an ) is from th e be ginn ing written on the
f orehe ad .

( Wh o ) meditates on the n ame o f Hari H ari ( w ith him ) the Guru the hero meets , , , , .

My f ather an d mother ar e the n am e o f Hari H ari is my rel ative an d brother , .

0 H ar i Ha ri O L ord p ardon an d unite ( w ith thyself ) humble poor Nan ak !

, , , ,

Gaur i bazr d gazz i ; mah a l d III

'

X VIII . X X X V III .

From the true Guru divine kno w ledge is obtained the truth ( re ality ) , of H ari is reflected

The dull intellect becomes unfolded by mutteri ng th e n ame of Mur ari .

By the spir i t the illu sion is dispelled d arkness ce ases ,

2
.

O n w hose f orehe ad it is w rit ten from the very beg in ning to them the n ame , of H a ri is dear .

P a use .

In hat m anner i s Hari obtained 0 ye s aints seeing w hom I live

w , ,

W ithout Hari I do not live a second 0 Guru j oin ( him t o m e) ( th at ) I m ay drink the juice , , ,

o f Ha ri !

I sing th e praises of Hari I co n tinu al ly he ar H ari H ari is m ade ( my ) re fuge

, , .

The juice o f H ari is obtained from the Guru my mind an d body are absorbed ( in him ) , .

Blessed blessed is t h e Guru the true divi n e m ale by w hom devotion to H ari is communic ated
, , , .

F rom w h ich Guru H ari i s obtained th at Guru I buy ( for myself

)
3
, .

H ari the K ing is the giver o f virtues w e are vicious

, , , .

The sin ful sinking stones H ari brings across by me ans o f t h e instruction o f the Guru
, .

Thou ar t the giver of virtues an d pure w e are w ithout virtues , .

0 H ari I h ave fled to ( th y ) asylum preserve me the f oolish one s ave the be w ildered one !
,
( ) , ,

By me ans of the instruction of the Guru e ase an d j oy ar e al w ays ( obtained by him ) ( by whom) ,
Hari H ari is meditated upon in ( his ) mind
, .

( By w hom ) the L ord H ari the beloved is obt ained he si n gs in ( h is) house a song o f praise
, , , .

Bes to w mercy ( on me ) 0 H ari O L ord ( this is my ) prayer by H ari Hari ( I am ) quickened '
, , , , ,

H umble Nan ak asks the dust of those by w hom the true Guru is obtained , .

1
i e
. . He , w ho se l o t o r desti ny
grea t by th e p er form an c e o f m eritorious w ork s in a former birth
15 ,
.

2
fire i s h er e n o t th e g o d S h iva but t h e S pi it a s disti n guish ed from ah a t h e i n dividua l life M
, r , , .
3
i s tak en i n t h e sen se of M ay a t h e ill usio n spr ea d over t h e cr ea tu r e s b t h e thre li i s
,
y e q ua t e .

3
I buy fro m fil m , to bu y t o g ain over ( S an sk ail )
, , . .
23 2 RI G GAU RI , MA H . IV .
,
S ABD III . IV .
(X L I . XL II ) .

Gaur i gud r ér i makal d I V .

III . X LI .

The mother is delighted ( if ) her son e ats ,

.

The fish i s deli ghted by b athing in the w ater .

”
The true Guru is deli ghted ‘ ( i f ) he receives a disciple
,
i n to his favour .

P ause .

0 H ari , join to me those de ar people o f H ari ,

By meeting w ith w hom my p ains dep art 3

.

A s a c o w sho w s aff ectio n h aving met w ith her c al f .

A s a w om an i s delight ed w hen her beloved ( husb and ) C omes home

,

( S o ) the people of H ari ar e delighted w hen they sing the praise o f Hari ,
.

The pe acock lives in delight ( i f ) ( there be ) a stre am of w ater

,
.

The king ( lives ) in deli ght h aving seen a pro fusion o f w e alth
,
.

The people of Hari ( live ) i n d eli ght ( w hen ) they mutter the F orm l ess one , .

M an i s g re atly delighted ‘
( if ) he acquires w e alth an d property
,
.

The di sciple i s delighted ( if ) he be pressed to the neck of the Guru ‘

, .
5

H u m ble Nan ak i s deli ghted ( if ) he m ay lick the f eet of the p io u

,
s .

'
Gaur i gud r éfi mafi a l d IV .

IV . X L II .

( l ) The beggar is deli ghted ( if )

. gives ( him ) alms , a L ord .

The hungry o n e becomes delighted (if ) he m ay eat food , .

The disciple is delighted by meeting w ith the Guru ( thereby ) , be is s ati ate d .

P ause .

0 H ar i , give ( me ) intervie w 0 H ari I long after thee !

an , ,

Besto w m ercy ( on me ) an d f ulfil my desir e !

The éak v i i s d elighted ( w h en ) t h e sun shi nes i n to her face
, .

S h e meets ( th en ) w ith her b eloved an d renounces all p ains .

The di sciple i s deli ghted ( w hen ) he becomes a favourite w ith the Guru
, .

The child i s delighted ( w hen ) it drinks mil k w ith its mouth .

It is h appy in its he art ( w hen ) it sees the mother

, .

The disci ple i s delighted ( w hen ) the Guru receives ( him ) into favour
, .

All other deli ght i s an uns olid delusion o f the May a .

It p asses aw ay an d is a false gl ass an d pl ating .

H umble Nan ak ( s ays ) : delight an d s atiety is ( only ) the true Guru .

1
A ft er 37%
3 6 supply '
1
o o o o o
:

2
3 % 141 6 8 1 to a pply t o t h e m outh
, t o r ec ei ve ( a n I n fe ri or) I nto fa vour to become familia r wi th
, , .

fi n : fil m -IT fi FlX 3 W ; in t h e ol d er l an g u ag e i t w ould b e fi x W

a ’

by meeti ng ,

w ith w hom .

f rafi l fi fi =m
4
KB fifi \ tfi l
‘
l ‘
L T in b ei n g h e re lengthe n ed i n order to
th e fi n a
‘

L , 2
get a

long metr ical Syllable ; 3 ?

fi
L ff
'
) s ignifie s t h er efore li ter ally : ( t o ) a m an it i s li fe s d el i ght
’ ’
.

m 3 UTE ”( T3
5
a m ean ingle ss a ll iteratio n to rhyme w i t h
, is
H1 3 .
 ’

RI G GA U B I MA H I V S AE D V — VII (X L III — X LV 23 3
,
. .
, . . . .
)

Gaur i guar em mahal d IV .

V . X LIII .

Th eservice of th e true Guru is rendered fr uit ful

By meeting w ith whom the n ame of Hari o f B ar i the L ord is meditated upon , , .

By w hom H ari is muttered aft er them many people are em an cip ated
, .

P ause .

0 disciple O my bro ther say : H ari !

, ,

S aying : Hari ! al l sins go off .

W hen the Guru is met w i th then th e min d is brought into subj ection,
i
.

The five runni ng ( senses ) are stopped Hari is meditated upon , .

Day by d ay the qu al ities of B ar i ar e sung in the city

Wh o put the dust o f the feet of the Guru on their mouth
They ab andon falsehoods an d medit ate devoutly on H ari .

They ar e bright f aced at the thr eshold o f Hari O brother !

-
,

The service o f the Guru is ple asing to H ar i himself .

K rish na an d B al abh adra meditate at the feet of th e Guru

1
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) the dis ci ple H ari himself brings across .

Gaur i y a d r efi
’
; mahal d IV .

VI . X L IV .

H ar i himself is th e Jdgi an d c arries a staff ( like a I d gi

H ari himsel f; the B an v ari is contained ( in al l ) ,
2
.

H ar i hi msel f pr ac ti ses austerities an d is given to deep contempl ation .

P ause .

My Ram wh o is of this kind is al l fil li n g

, ,
-
.

H ari d w ells ne ar an d is not f ar off .

H ari himself is the w ord the attention an d contemplation is he himsel f

,
.

H ari himself sees he himself is exp anded

,
.

Hari h imself c auses ( his n ame ) to be muttered H ari himself mutters it ,

.

H ari himself is the cloud ( an d ) the stre am o f nectar w ater ) .

H ari is the nectar he himself is ( also ) the drinker ( of it )

,
.

H ari h i msel f is bri n ging about fin al em ancip ation .

Ha ri himsel f is th e bo at the buoy an d r aft 3

,
.

H ari hi mself is by ( me ans of th e i nstr ucti on o f the Guru s alv ation

, ,
.

H ari himself ( s ays ) Nanak is c ar rying across

, ,
.

Gaur i bai r d gagz t IV

'

makal a
'

V II . X LV .

Thou art our w holes ale merchant an d our Lord w h at sort of goods thou givest us th at we take , , .

We de al in th e n ame of H ari w ith ple asure i f thou thysel f h av in g become merciful givest it ( to us ), , , .

1 n ame o f the elder brother o f K rishn a .

a n epith et o f K rishn a w e aring a g arl and o f w ild flo w ers , .

e m ( = S a n sk H1 1 35 m ) bo a t ra ft
3 .
. . . , .
,

mai n to bring or ferry across ; I naq“ is here the caus al of He art ( to fall)
-
' ' ’
Lna ,
.
2 34 RA G eA uaI , MAH IV . .
, S A BB VIII . IX .
(X L VI . X L VII .
)

P ause .

We ar e the retail de al ers of Ram - .

H ari m akes (us) c arry on t rafii c giving us a stock o f goods 0 de ar ! , ,

H e obtains the g ain of the W orship of H ari an d his w e alth wh o is ple asing to the mi nd of ,

B ari the true w holes ale merch ant

,
.

hom mutte r ing H ari the goods o f H ari are l aden him Y am a t h e t ax g atherer does not
B
( y )
'

w , , , ,
-
,

appro ach .

The tradesmen wh o c arry on another traffic ar e absorbed in p ai n being to ssed about by other
, , ,

( thin gs) .

A s th e traffi c i s t o w hich they ar e a pplied by H ari such is the f r u

,
it they obtain ,
.

Th at m an carries on the tr affic o f H ari H ari t o w hom the Lord gives it h aving become , , ,

merciful ( to w ard s him ) .

H umble N an ak ( s ay s) : ( by w hom ) H ari the w holes ale merch ant, i s served ( from him ) he never , ,

t akes again an account .

Gau ri baz i d gazz i ; mahal d I V

'
'
.

V III . X L VI .

the mother is no urishing the embry o in t h e hope of getti ng a son

As , ,

( S aying) : ha ving become gr e at an d h aving acquired w e alth he w il l give ( m e) h avi n g gone

H
,

through his en joymen t an d p astime

S o th e people o f H ari keep love t o H ari ( think ing) he himsel f will give us his h ands , .

P ause .

O my Ri m 0 H ari my L ord keep me the f ooli sh on e

, , ,

The gre atness o f thy serv ant is gre atness t o thee

In ( his ) p al ace an d house is j oy t o ( w hose ) mind the praise of Hari is ple asing
, .

A l l juices become s w eet t o the mouth w hen on e sings the qu alities o f Har i ,
.

The people o f B ar i are the support o f their dependents t wenty one families ( y ea) the whole world ,
-
,

they s ave .

Whatever is done th at is done by Hari it is the greatness o f Hari

, , .

0 H ari thine are the cre at ures thou ar t exi sting ( in them ) thou ar t c ausing ( them) t o perform
, , ,

w orsh ip 0 H ar i !
,

Thou lettest them obt ain the tre asury of devotion thou thysel f ar t distributing it , .

A sl ave bought in a shop w h at cleverness h as h e ( in the trans action

) ,

If Hari put him into a sovereignty ? a sl ave ( an d ) grass c utter he m akes utter the n ame of Hari -
.

H umble N{ mak is the sl ave of Hari ( th is is ) th e gre a tness of H ari , .

Gauz i guar er i
'
‘

mah al d IV .

IX . X L V II .

The husb an dm an undertakes farming he takes to i t 1 brigh te ning up his spirits , .

2

H e yokes on the plo ugh an d exerts hi m self ( thinking : my son an d d aughter w ill eat from th e
) ( ,

f ruits o f my l abour) .

In this way the people of B ari mutter : Hari H ari ! ( thinking ) H ari w ill at the end rele ase ( us) , .

P a seu .

O my Ram , the foolish one s s alv ation be e ffec ted !

m ay m y , ’

A pply ( me ) t o t h e s ervice of the Guru the true Guru this is m desire !

( ) y , ,

m W
1
an . v a
. .
( S an sk .

W , c an s .
like t o take t o (a th in g )
) to , .

W 851 6 8 1 , to ta ke coura ge , to brighten up one s spirits ’

.
23 6 RAG GA U BI, MA H IV . .
, S A E D X II . X III (L . . LI .
)

Our vices ar e m any m any they ar e m any he aps upon he aps 0 Hari they c annot be counted
, , , , .

T h ou 0 H ari ar t virtuous th en 0 Hari ar t merci ful thou thysel f 0 H ari p ardon est ( as) it
, , , , , , , , ,

ple ases ( thee ) 0 H ari ,

We sinners are protected by the society of the Gur u ( by him ) i nstruction is given ( to us ) the n ame , ,

of H ari rele ases ( us ) .

H ow sh all I tell thy qu alities 0 my true Guru ? w hen w e spe ak of the Guru then astonish , ,

ment overtakes ( us ) .

A sinner li ke me no other protects as w e are rescued an d pro t ected by the true Guru .

Th en 0 Guru ar t ( my ) father thou 0 Guru ar t ( my ) mother t h en 0 Guru ar t my relative my

, , , , , , , , ,

comp anion !
Wh at is our fate O my true Guru th at f ate thou thysel f kno w est 0 H ari
, , ,

W e are w ander ing an d stroll ing about n o on e is asking a w ord about us by the Guru the true Guru , , , ,

w e poor ones are received into his society .

Blessed bl essed is the Guru of humble Nan ak by meeting w ith w hom al l c ares an d p ain s h ave ceased !
, ,

Gaur i baz r d ga zz z IV
' '

; malza l d .

X II . L .

Gold, w omen , fem ale

bu ffaloes ( my ) soul is coveting s w eet is the infatu ati on o f the Maya , .

T o house p al a ce horse insipid ple asure ( my ) mind is attached

, , , .

H ari t h e L ord does n ot come into ( my ) m ind h ow sh all I be emancip ated O my K ing Hari ?
, , , ,

P ause .

O m y Ram , O my H ari , these ar e l ow w orks ( o f mine )

Thou ar t virtuous 0 Hari thou ar t merci ful out of mercy p ar don all my vices !
, , ,

I h ave n o be auty n or high birth n or an y good conduct , , .

W h at d are w e say w h o are w ithout virtues thy n ame is n o t muttered ( by us )

, , .

W e sin ners are s aved in the society o f the Guru it is th e meritorious deed o f the true Gur u , .

A ll soul body mouth nose is given ( by him ) an d w ater f or susten ance

, , , , .

T h e e ating of gr ain the putting o n o f cl othes is gi ven ( by him ) an d other relishes an d en oyments ‘
,
j .

H e by w h om they ar e given does n ot come into ( my ) mind I consider mysel f as a be ast

, , , .

A l l is th y w ork thou ar t the in w ard gover n or , .

W h at sh all w e h elpless cre atures do al l is thy sport 0 L ord ! , ,

Humble Nan ak is a shop bought ( sl ave ) 0 H ari ( I am ) the sl ave ( of thy sl aves ! 2
)
-
, ,

Gaur i bair ag am IV
'

; maha l a .

X III . LI .

As mother h aving given birth to a son nourishes him an d keeps ( him ) w ith in her sight
a , , ,

A n d i n side an d outside ( o f the house ) puts a m orsel into his mouth thumping h i m every moment
( ) ,

( out o f love )
S o the true Gur u keeps the disciple out o f aff ection an d love to H ari .

P ause .

O my Ram , w e ignorant children of Hari the L ord

are
, .

Blessed blessed is the Guru the Guru the true Guru an d

, , , m aster , by w hom we ar e instruc ted con
cerni ng H ari an d m ade w ise .

am i s
1
3 31 , o n ly a meanin gless alliter atio n .

}
2
3135
1 1 318 11 1 is a ludi crous corruptio n in ste ad o f 318 131 1 Q1 atm a .
 RAG en n u
i MA H , . IV .
, S AB D X IV . xv .
( L II . L III .
) 23 7

A s inthe sky turns about an d flies the w hite clothed ( bird ) -

,
1

K eeping its mi nd ( thought ) behind in its he art continu all y remembering its young ones ,

S o the true Guru Hari H ar i h as an afb c ti on for the di sciple the Guru keeps the disciple in his he art
, , ,
.

A s the pinchers 2 thi rty ( or ) thirty t w o ( in number ) preserve w ithin the tongue o f flesh an d
,
-
,

blood
— Does one think th at the flesh = the tongue is in the h and o f the pinchers ? all is sub ect to H ari
( , ) j .

S o w hen men c al umni ate the s aints H ari protects the honour of his people , .

0 brother m ay not an y one th i nk th at anything is in the h and o f any one H e does an d c auses
, , ,

it to be done .

O l d age de ath f ever one sided rheum atism in the face imprec ation al l ar e in the pow er of H ari
, , ,
-
, , ,

none ( o f these evils ) c an be fall ( a m an ) except w hen put on by H ar i ,

.

Me di t ate continu ally in ( thy ) mind an d thought on this n ame of H ari ( says ) humble Nan ak w hich , ,

at the end w il l em ancip ate ( thee )

3
.

Gaur i baz r d au IV
' '

g z ; maha l d .

X IV . L II .

By meeting w ith w hom j oy springs up in the he art he is c alled the true Guru ,
.

The du ali ty of the mind is done aw ay w ith the highest station o f Hari fin al em ancipation ) is ,

obtai ned.

P ause .

My beloved true Guru h ow sh all he be met w ith i’ ,

I m ake obeis ance every moment my perfect Guru h o w sh all he be obt ained ? , ,

By H ari out of mercy my true perfect Guru is j oined ( to the pious one )
, , ,
.

The w ish o f the ( pious ) m an is accompli shed h aving obt ained the true perfect Guru , , .

H ari m akes devoti on firm he he ars devoti on i f one meet w i th th at true Guru
, ,
-
.

N o deficiency at al l t akes pl ace the acquisition of H ar i is continu ally m ade soli d

,
.

In w hose he ar t there is brightness ( o f under standi ng ) ( he entertains ) no second love ,

N anak ( s ays ) : he is s aved by meeting w ith th at Guru w h o m akes ( him ) sing the qu alities , of H ari .

Gaur i p ur l) ? mahal d IV .

X V . L III .

By Hari , the merciful L ord mercy , w as besto w ed ( on me ) , in my mind body , an d mouth I spe ak

Th e colour of the di sciple h as become very deep , my j acket 4 is steeped in the colour of Hari .

P ause .

I am the fem al e sl ave of my L ord Har i .

When m y mind w as reconciled w ith H ari the ,

w hole w orld w as given aw a y ( by me ) as a v alueless 5

Make di scrim in ation O pious brother se arch (thy ) he art an d in quire w ell !
, ,

The f orm of H ari is all li ght Hari d w ell s ne ar to all H ari is w ith ( the m )
, ,
.

Hari H ari the boun dl ess th e i n apprehensible divine m al e d well s ne ar the

, , , , whole w orld .

I
m 3 1 H 3 T6} , i é or cr a ne
. e . the fi , .

2
The or pinchers a re the tee th , .

3
35% W I g ai n:
j acket figuratively he a rt m in d
,
:
, .

WW uf i-13 must here be taken i n the sense of ithout value valueless

5
:
, w .
238 RI G GAU RI ,
MA H . IV .
,
S A E D X VI .
— X VIII (L IV — . . LVI .
)

is m ade m anifest by the perf ect Guru ( my ) he ad is ( there fore ) sold to th e Guru
H ari ,
.

0 H ari inside an d outside of the cre atures ar t thou ! I h ave come to thy asylum thou ar t the
,
,

gre at gre at divine m ale

,
.

H umble Nanak sings d ay by day the excel le n ces of H ari h aving met with th e true Guru the Guru , , ,

the me di ator .

Gaur i p ur l) ? mahal d I V .

X VI . L IV .

O L ord , 0 bo undless life of the w orld , 0 L ord of the U niverse , 0 di vine m ale the arranger (of
,

al l things )
O n w hi ch re ad thou sendest us ,
0 L ord, on th at ro ad do we go .

P ause .

0 Ram , my mind is in love w ith H ari

H aving j oined the society o f the pious the relish o f Ram i s obtained ( by me ) in the delightf ul n ame ,

o f H ari I am absorbed .

The n ame of H ari Hari H ari H ari i s a medi cine in ( this ) w orld the n ame of H ar i Hari Hari
, , , , , , , ,

is t rue .

Al l their sins an d faults ar e done aw ay wi th w h o by me ans o f the instruction of the Guru eat the ,

j uice of Hari .

O n w hose f orehe ad he w rites the decree from the beginning they ar e b ath ing in the pond of ,

contentment the Guru ,

.

Al l their filth of f oolishness is gone o ff wh o are imbued w ith love to the n ame of Ram ,
.

0 Ram thou thyself thou thyself ar t the L ord an d m aster li ke thee there i s no other donor
, , ,
.

( If ) humble Nan ak takes ( thy ) n ame then he lives H ari is muttered by the mercy o f H ari ,
.

Gaur i p ar t ? mah al d I V .

X V II . LV .

Bestow mercy ( on me ) 0 life of the w orld 0 donor my mind is absorbed w ith H ari
, ,
.

By the tr ue Guru the exceedingly pure w ord is communic ated ( to me ) muttering H ari H ai i , , ,
Hari ,
my he art brightens up .

P ause .

0 Ram , my he art an d body are pierced by the true H ari

By the mouth o f w hich the w hole w orld i s dev oured ( from th at de ath ) w e ar e s aved 0 Hari by the , , ,

w ord of the true Guru .

Those w h o h ave no love to H ari are S akat s fools an d ignorant men

, , , .

O n them birth an d de ath press ve r y he avily h aving died an d d ied they are consumed i n ordure , .

Thou ar t mercif ul cherishing in ( thy ) asylum m ay a gift be given to me 0 H ari I am be

, , , ,

seech i n g ( thee )

May I be m ade the sl ave ( o f ) the sl ave ( o f ) H ari my mind d ances an d takes delight in i t ) 1
( , .

The L ord himsel f i s the gre at w holes ale merch ant w e ar e his retail de alers ,
-
.

My mi nd body li fe all is thy stock the w holes ale merch ant o f humble Nanak i s the L ord
, , , , .

Gaur i p ur bi : makal d IV .

X V III . L VI .

Thou ar t merciful removing all p ains give ear an d he ar one petition ( of mine )
, ,

Through w hom thou O L ord H ari art kno w n j oin to me th at true Guru my lif e
, , , , ,

1
W 6 S a n sk .
fi t fit . d elight ; m 3 1% 3 k K 18 , (3 being merely an all iteration .
240 RA G GA U R I , MA H I V. .
, S AE D X X I . XX II ( L I X
. . LX .
)

P a use .

In my he art an d body there i s a desire o f meeting w i t h H ari .

By the comp assion ate Gur u by the Guru some mercy w as sho w n ( to me ) H ari my Lord c ame an d
, , ,
1

j oined ( me ) .

The procedure w hich is going on in my m ind an d thought thou know est 0 H ari !
, , ,

Day by day I mutter ( thy ) n ame ( th at ) I m ay obtain comf ort i n ( my ) he art there is continually a , ,

desire fo r thee 0 Hari ! ,

By the Guru the true Guru the w ay is sho wn ( to me ) H ari my L ord h as c o m e an d j oined (me )
, , , , , ,

D aily j oy h as accrued to th e very fortunate one al l the desir e o f ( his ) servant is accomplished , .

A l l is in the pow er o f H a ri the L ord o f the w orld the K ing o f the U niverse the creator
, , , .

Humble Nan ak h as come t o ( thy ) asylum 0 H ari keep the honour of thy servant ! , ,

Gaur i p ur bi ; mahal d IV .

X X I . L IX .

This mind does n o t keep quiet a moment it is of a vers atile disposition it runs about in the , ,

ten ten directions ( o f the globe )

,
.

( If ) by gre at luck the perfect Guru is obtained by ( w hom ) the m antra of H ari is given the mind , ,

( becomes ) sedate .

P ause .

0 Ram , w e c alled the sl aves o f the t r ue Guru

ar e .

O n o ur f orehe ad a m ark is burnt in w e ow e much debt t o th e Guru , .

2

Much assistance an d meri torious w ork is done ( by hi m ) ( w e ar e) brought across 3 the difi‘l c ul t w ater ,

o f existence ( by him ) .

W h o h ave in their he art n o affection to H ari ( by them ) false connexions ar e m ade , .

A s p aper is dissolved in w ater so the flesh l y minded ar e dissolved in the w omb 4 ,

-
.

Vi e kno w ( th at) w e kno w nothing ; as H ari f urther on keeps us so w e st and

'
, , .

W e ar e erring an d mistaken O Guru besto w mercy on us ! humble Nan ak ( s ays ) dr aw out the bad
, ,

sw immer ' 5

Gaur i p ur bi ; maizal d IV .

X X II . LX .

( I ) W ith lust
. an d w r ath the to wn is much filled ; a pious m an h aving com e there bre aks ( them) to
pieces .

( If ) by a former decree ( o f Go d ) the Guru be obtained he est ablishes in the district devotion
, to
H ari in th e he art .

P ause .

M ake j oining of th e palms of the h ands to the holy m an it is , a gre at meritorious ac t !

M ake prostration ( to him ) it is a gre at meritorious ac t ! ,

1
‘3 is g ra m m a ti cal blun der (inste ad o f
b ut th at d o es n o t m atter if only th e rhyme
1 8
,

b k ept up th r eby ( h W
e e

cm m i ; a m i s t h e p art p ast o f n fi rm ( int u) t o be ar ; nan erran t to o we a d ebt Th e v. .

-
. .

S ikh G a t h i s d o n o t k n o w w h at t o m k e o f it
r n a .

( scil U 31 which i s t o be supplied here) instead o f W 1 3 i n order to ke ep up th e rhyme

a
.
, , ,

w ith 311 3 W 6 1 8 “ t o bri g cro ss t o ferry over

.
, n a ,

W 13 in ste d o f fo t h e s ake o f t h e rh y me
a r .

m imperative o account o f th e preceding imperative 11m

, , n .
 '

r , RI G GAU aI MAH IV . .
, S A BD X X III . XX IV (L X I
. . LX II )
.
24 1

By the S ak at the tas te o f the j uice of H ari is not know n w ithin him is the th em o f egotism
(
, .

A s h e walk s he is pricked ( by it ) he incurs p ain he su ff er s de ath on ( his ) he ad is the club ( of Y am a)

, , , .

The people of H ari are absorbed irf th e n ame of H ari Hari they break the p ains o f birth an d th e , ,

f ear of de ath .

The imperish able di vine m ale the Lord is obtained ( by them) in the w orld an d the uni verse they
, , ,

h ave much lustre .

We ar e poor an d w retched O Lord ! protect 0 H ari thine ow n thou ar t very gre at

, , , , .

The n ame is the support an d prop of humble Nan ak even in the n ame o f H ari i s the pith of comfort , .
1

Gaufl p ar t s; mah al a I V .

X X III .
2
LX I .

this f ort ( = body) is H ari Ram th e K i ng ( but) the i mpudent one get s n o taste ( o f him )
In , , , .

( O n w hom ) Hari wh o is m erciful to the poor besto ws h is favour ( by hi m ) H ari is tasted an d seen
, , ,

by me ans of the w ord of the Guru .

P ause .

The pr aisin g of Ram H ari is ( made ) sw eet by meditati on on the Guru .

H ari the S upreme Brahm is in approach able incomprehen sible the true Guru bei ng f ound acts
, , , ,

as medi ator
3
.

T o w hom the w ords of th e Guru are ple as an t in ( their ) mind to them I come an d fal l do wn b ef ore ,

them 1.
‘

The he art of th e flesh l y minded one is exceedingly h ard w ithin it is a bl ack venomous sn ake “
-
, .

Thou gh much milk m ay be given to drink to a snake poison issues ( from it) in the tw inkling of an , ,

eye ( the bitt en m an ) s w el ls up 8 .

O Lord H ari br ing an d j oin ( to m e) the holy Gur u ( th at) h aving rubbed ( for the bite ) as
, , ,

ch arm the w ord ( of the Guru ) I may t ake it in my mouth ,

?

( )
T o humble N an ak the sl ave an d serv an t o f th e Guru the acid ( becomes ) s weet by clinging to the
, ,

assembly ( o f the pious ) .

Gaufi p ar t ? mahal d I V .

X X IV . LX II .

For the s ake of ( ob taining) Hari ( my ) body i s sold ( by me ) bef ore the perfect Gur u .

By the true Guru the n ame is m ade firm ( in him ) ( o n w hose ) face an d forehead a lucky l o t ( is wri tten ) , .

P ause .

O beloved by me ans,
of the ins truction of the Guru devo ti on to Hari is stirred up .

#3 13 4 13 1 3 ; t iar = S an sk nu s pi th .

2
This verse I l aid before th e assembled Gr an th i s a t A mrits a r but they coul d give me n o expl a n ation o f ,

it wh atever .

3
m fi t = m 3 a cts (a s mediat or)
,
.

un fi t h aving come I fa ll d o w n be fore th em ,

o n a ccount of th e rhyme .

1
5
T h e w or d s 2 1 3 313 3 1 are very obscure
‘
I suppose t h at 33 13 1 is corrupted from t h e Hindi fi g .
,

a very venomous sn ake Th is suits w el l th e context

. .

éfi ; m ; in the t w ink ling o f an eye a3 occurs in this sense twice more in th e .

Granth .
m = m is s welling (i e the bitten m an) The final w ords are so effectually cor rupted in
,
. . .

t his verse t ha t we ca n only tra nsla te them by conjectur e

,
.

7
8 33 1 $ 1 I m ay take 3 1 being a me aningless alliter ation
‘
.
, ,
242 RE G GA U BI, MA E IV .
, S ABD X X V . X X VI .
(L X III . LX IV ) .

in ever ybody Ram th e kin g is contained ( th erein ) by means of the w ord of th e Guru
S porting , , ,

devotion to th e Gur u(Ram ) is stirr ed up .

I cut off mind an d body an d give ( them ) to the Guru ( for ) my error an d fe ar ar e dispersed by the
, ,

w ord of the Guru .

Havin g brought a l amp he kindles it in darkness by the knowledge ( communic ated by ) the ,

Guru devotion to the Gur fi ( God) i s r aised .

Ign orance an d d arkness ar e totally destroyed in the house ( = one s o wn body) th e thing ( =th e ,
’

S upreme Being ) is obtained the m in d becomes aw ake ,

.

The S akate ar e kill ers depending on the M aya Yam a begins to look out for them
, ,
.

They h ave not sold their he ad bef ore the true Guru the luckless ones come an d go ,
.

He ar our supplic ation O Lord w e ask for the protecti on of H ar i th e L ord

, ,
.

The honour an d reput ation of humble Nan ak is the Guru ( my ) he ad is sold be fore the true Guru ,
.

Gauri p ar t ? mal ml d IV .

X X V . LX III .

( I ) We are selfish of a selfish an d fool ish mind by meeting w ith the Guru ( our ) own self is done
.
, ,

a way .

The dise ase o f egotism goes off, comfort is obtai ned blessed blessed is the Guru Hari th e king ! , , ,

P ause .

O de ar by th e
, w ord is obt ainedof th e Guru Hari .

In my he art i s aff ection to Ram the king by the Guru the w ay an d p ath are shown, ,
.

My soul an d body all i s ( put) be fore the true Guru by whom the sep arated Hari is applied to ( my )
, ,

In my he art a desire arose to see ( him , i . a . H ari ) , t h e Guru sho wed him ( as being present) with
my he art .

Tranquillity an d j oy h ave sprung up in my mind my o wn sel f is ( theref ore ) sold before th e Guru ,
.

M any si ns an d w icked deeds w ere done by us becoming a thief an d committing w ickedness I stole ,
.

Now says Nan ak w e h ave come t o ( thy ) asylum keep my honour 0 Hari Hari is lik ed ( by me )
, , , , ,
.

Gaur i 19 22M? mah al d IV .

X X VI . LX IV .

By re ason o f the instruction of th e Guru th e unbe aten sound sounds b y me ans of the instruction ,

of the Guru ( my ) mind si n gs ( th e praises of H ari ) .

By him w hose l o t is gre at the sight of the Guru is obtained blessed blessed is he wh o dir ects h is
, , , , ,

thoughts devoutly on the Guru !

P ause .

The disciple Hari applies to deep me di tatio n ( on the Guru ) .

My Lord is the perfect true Guru m y mind does the w ork ( enj oined by ) th e Guru
, , .

We r ubbing an d rubbing w ash the feet of th e Guru w h o lets ( us ) he ar the st ory of B ar i Har i
, , , ,
.

In ( my) h e art is through the instructi on o f the Guru th e elixi r of Ram ( my) tongue sings th e
,
, ,

qualiti es of B ari .

( My) mi nd being pleas antly ple as antly engaged is s atiated with th e j uice of B ar i it w ill not again
, , ,
l
,

bring on hunger .

l 15 th e p art .
PaS t
a o
conj unct ve i or 3 1 mm , to be plea sa ntly e n g a ged in an occu p atio n , to be
O

In
a h appy situation .
24 4 RA G GA U B I ,
MA H IV . .
,
S AE D X X X I . XXX .
(L X VII . LX VIII ) .

Gaur i maj h ; makal d IV .

X X IX . LX V II .

In my min d in my mind 0 my Govin d in m y m i nd I am imbued w ith love to Hari O dear !

, , , ,

H ari ( my ) j oy
,
husb an d ) is n ot perceived as b eing ne ar 0 my Govind the perfect Guru causes , ,

the in apprehensible on e t o be apprehende d O de ar ! ,

W hen the n ame of B ar i H ari is m ade m ani fest O my Gov ind all the p ains of poverty go off
( ) , , , ,

0 de ar !
The step o f Hari w hich is the highest is obtaine d 0 my Gov in d the very f ortun ate o n e is absorbed
, , , ,

i n the n a m e 0 de ar !
,

W ith ( her) eyes 0 my belove d w ith ( her ) eyes 0 m y Gov ind by who m is H ari the L ord
, , , , , ,

seen w ith ( her ) e y es 0 de ar ? ,

My he art an d bo dy ar e very sad ‘ 0 my Gé v in d w ithout H ari the w om an is w ithering away 0 dear !

, , , ,

Joining the pious people 0 m y Govind m y L ord Hari m y sw eethe art an d comp anion was obtained
, , ,

( by m e) O de ar I
,

H ari th e life o f the universe h as come an d j oined me 0 my Gé vi n d the night is spent by me (n ow)
, , , ,

in h appiness 0 de ar ! ,

0 pious m an j oin to me my L ord Hari ( my ) s weethe art in my he art an d body hunger ( after
, , ,

h i m ) i s excited ( by thee ) O dear ! ,

I c annot exist w itho ut seeing my belo v ed thou h ast roused w ithin me the p angs of sep aration from ,

H ari 0 de ar !
,

H ari the king is my belove d s w eethe art ( if ) the Guru j oin ( him to me ) my he art is v iv ifi ed 0 dear !
, , , , ,

In my min d an d body ( there i s) f ull desire ( after thee ) 0 my Govind ( w hen ) Hari is met with , , ,

( there ar e) c o ngratul ations i n t h e he art 0 de ar ! ,

I a m devoted O my Gé vi n d I am devoted O my beloved I am al ways d evoted to thy

, , , ,

gratuitous service 0 de ar I ,

In my he art an d bo dy i s love to the belove d O my Govi n d ! 0 Hari keep o ur store 0 de ar ! , , ,

Join ( to me ) the tr ue Gur u the media tor O m y Gé v i n d ( th at ) he guiding ( the right way ) m ay
, , ,

unite H ar i w ith me O d ear l ,

If thou best ow est mercy the n ame of H ari is obtained 0 my Govind humble Nan ak is in thy asylum
, , , ,

O de ar !

Gat or ? may };
V
/
mal eal d IV .

X X X . LX VIII .

He is w on der f ul , 0 my Govind, he is w onderf ul, 0 my belove d H ari my L ord is w onderful,

,

0 de ar !
H ar i
himsel f is producing K rishn a O my Govin d by H ari himself the Gopi ( Radh a) is sought 0 dear ! , , ,

H ari himself is enj oying everybody 0 my Gé v i n d H ari himsel f is given t o sensu al ple asures an d , ,

enjoying himself 0 de ar ! ,

H ari is very w is e an d does n o t err O my Gé v in d he himsel f is the true Guru endo w ed w ith magic , , ,

po w er 0 de ar !
,

H e himself is producing the universe 0 my Govin d H ari hi m sel f sports in m any w ays 0 dear ! , , ,

S ome he lets enj oy ple asures O my Gé v in d some w ander about n aked an d disgr a ced O de ar !
, ,
2
,

H e himself is producing the w orl d 0 my Govind H ari gives gif ts t o every on e wh o ask s 0 de ar ! , , ,

m , to be sa d, to w eep .

£3 fi ai r w ig} é fi ai
‘
P ers
2
. .
d isg r ace d by sh ame .
 RA G GA U sI , MA H I V . .
, S AE D X X X I . XXX II ( L X IX
. . LX X .
) 24 5

The n ame is the support of the devotees O my d ind the good story about H ari H ari they ask , , , ,

0 de ar !
H ari himsel f causes devotion to he m ade 0 my Gov i n d the de v otees o f Hari h ave f u
l l desi re , r ,

( af ter H ari ) in their he ar t 0 de ar ! ,

H e himself is existing in w ater an d l and 0 my Govind he is contained ( every where ) he is not far , , ,

aw ay 0 de ar !
,

H ari himself is inside an d outside 0 my Gé v i n d H ari himsel f i s omnipresent O de ar ! , , ,

H ari the vivifying principle is spre ad out 0 my G6 vind H ari himsel f sees in the presence 0 de ar !
, , , , ,

H ari is w ithi n the sound o f the bre ath O my Govi nd as Hari himsel f produces a sound so it , , ,

i s sounded O de ar ! ,

The hidden tre asure of the n ame o f H ari is w i thin ( the he art) 0 my Govind by the w ord of the , ,

Guru H ari the Lord becomes kno w n , 0 de ar !

H e himsel f c auses ( men ) t o flee to his asylum O my Govind ! H ari keeps the honour o f ( h i s) ,

devotees O de ar '
,

H e w hose lot is gre at is united ( w ith ) the assembly ( of the pious ) O my Govind ! the per fection
, , ,

em ancipation ) of humble Nanak is e ffected by the n ame 0 de ar ! 1

,

IV
'
Gaur i mdj k ; makal d .

X X X I . LX IX

(l I ( h ave a desire after ) th e n ame of B ar i I am su ffering the p angs of sep aration fr om H ari O de ar ! , ,

May my Lord H ari my f ri end h e met w ith ( th at ) I m ay obt ain com fort 0 de ar '
, , ,

Ha ving seen the L ord H ari I live 0 de ar mother I , ,

My fr iend is the n ame ( my ) brother i s H ari O de ar !

, ,

S ing 0 pious ( m an ) the qu alities of my L ord H ari O dear !

, , ,

Mutter 0 disciple the n ame thy lot ( w ill be ) gre at 0 de ar !

, , , ,

The n ame o f B ar i H ari O de ar of my beloved Hari O de ar !

, , ,
2
,

Will not ag ain m ake ( thee ) w ander through the w aters of existence 0 de ar ! ,

H o w sh all I see H ari ? in my he art an d body there is a longing ( for h i m ) 0 de sr i ,

Join H ari ( to me ) O pious m an in my he art ( there i s) love t o him 0 de ar !

, , ,

By the w ord of the Guru is obtained the beloved Hari the K ing 0 de ar ! , ,

0 very f ortun ate one mutter the n ame 0 de ar !, ,

In my he art an d body is a gre at desire af ter Govind the L ord 0 de ar ! , ,

O holy m an j oin ( to me ) H ari Govind the L ord 0 de ar !

, , , ,

By the instruction of the true Guru the n ame is al w ays m ade m anif est O de ar I ,

H umble Nan ak ( s ays ) the desire in the he art is ( thus ) ac co mpl ished O dear ' ,

Gaufl maj h mahal d IV .

X X X II . LX X .

My desire is the n ame if it be obt ained then I live 0 de ar !

3
, , ,

In ( my ) he art ( there is ) nectar by the instruction of the Guru I get H ari O de ar

, ,

My he art is imbued w ith love to H ari the j uice o f H ari I drink al ways 0 de ar ' , ,

1 p as sive i s m a de or eff ected ( generally

,

W life ; anythin g de arly belove d

2
E ,
.

3
W " a f entreaty d esi re (C f FR E E
. ,
th c termination ii bei n g ch an ged to i,

w hich i s frequently the c ase .

24 6 RA G GA U RI , MA H V . .
, S ABD I . II .
(L X X I . LX X II ).

H ar i is obt ained in my he art I live 0 de ar , ,

In my he art an d body there is love the arro w of B ari h as pierced it 0 de ar , ,

My beloved friend is H ari the al l w ise spirit 0 de ar

,
-
,

Join ( t o me ) O holy m an the Guru Hari the clever an d w ise O de ar

, , , ,

I am a s acrifice to the gr atuitous service o f the n ame of H ari O de ar ! ,

I inquire after H ari H ari my s w eethe art H ari my fri end 0 de ar

, , , , ,

S ho w to me 0 ye holy men H ari I i n quire after the tr aces of H ari O de ar !

, , , ,

I f t h e true Guru being ple ased show s H ari ( to me ) then I obtain (hi m ) 0 de a r !
, , , ,

P r aising H ari I am absorbed in th e n ame 0 de ar ! ,

I su ffer the p ain of love the p angs of sep aration from H ari O de ar !
, ,

O Guru complete ( my ) f ai th ( th at ) I m ay obtain nectar in my mouth 0 de ar !

, , ,

0 H ari become merci ful ( th at ) I m ay medit ate on the n ame o f H ari O de ar !

, , ,

H umble Nan ak ( s ays ) : ( th at ) I m ay obt ain the j uice o f H ari O de ar ,

RA GU GAU RI GU AR E RI ; MA HA L A V
duup add s .

Om ! by th e f avour of th e t rue Guru !

I . LX X I .

P ause .

How is h appiness brought about 0 my bro ther ? ,

H ow is H ari Ram obt ained as a helper ?

( There is ) no h appiness in the house ( i f ) mine ( be ) al l th e May a , .

( If ) high ( an d ) be autif ul p alace s be roo fed in ( by me ) .

By false covetousness ( one s ) lifetime is lost ’

.

Having seen eleph ants an d horses he i s h appy .

A rmies m ace be arers an d domestic servants a re coll ected by him

( )
-
, .

O n ( his ) neck is the rop e an d noose of selfishness .

H e m ay exercise dominion in al l th e ten qu arters of the e arth

( ) .

H e m ay enj oy m any ple asures an d w omen .

A s in a dre am the king becomes a begg ar ‘ .

( There i s) one h appiness ( w hich ) the t r ue Guru h as sho w n t o m e

, .

W h atever H ari does th at is ple asing to the devotees of H ari

, .

H umble Nan ak ( s ays ) h avin g destroyed their egotism they ar e absorbed i n H ari )
( ) ( .

P ause .

In this w ise h appiness is brought about , 0 my brother !

Thus H ari Ram is obtained as a helper .

Gaur i g ud r ér i mu
huld V .

LX X II II . .

Ho w should on e be given to doubt w h o should be o f slight f aith P ,

‘

W hen he ( i e H ari ) is c ont ained in w ater e arth an d on the s urface of the e arth
. .
, .

The disciples are saved the se l f w illed lose their honour

,
-
.

The se n se IS
o he b ecomes a begg a r s u dd e n l y , as
oI n a d rea m .
248 RA G GA U B I ,
MA H V . .
,
S A BD V . VI .
(L X X V . LX X VI )
.

Thou w ilt get the fruit ( of thy w orks ) the fe ar of Yam a w ill be e ffaced
,

( If ) th ou sin gest continu al ly the qu alities an d the praise of Hari .

P ause .

P ut th e n ame of Hari Har i into th y breast

,

( A n d) thou w ilt quickly accomplish thy w ork

I f thou bec om est attenti v e t o th y L ord
Thou wilt obtain honour at the threshold .

Give up al l all contrivance an d dexterity !

,

Cli ng t o th e feet o f th e pious people

In whose h and all the cre at ures ar e
H e is never sep arated he is w ith all ,
.

Give up shi fts an d sei z e h i s asylum

In a moment thy rele ase w ill be e ff ected .

Consider him al w ays as ( being) ne ar !

Mind the order of the L or d as true !
Blot out by me ans of the word of the Guru thy
, ,
ow n self
Nan ak ( s ays ) m utter the n ame of H ari H ari ,

Gaur i gud r ér i makal d V

V . LX X V .

The w ord
the Guru is al w ays imperish able
of .

By th e w ord o f the Guru th e noose of Yam a is cut asunder .

The w ord of the Guru is w ith the cre atures .

By the word of th e Guru they ar e imbued w ith love to Ram .

P ause .

Wh at is given by th e Guru ,
th at is useful to the he art .

Mind th at which is done by th e holy on e

, Guru ) as true
The w ord o f the Gur u is imm ov able an d n ot t o be broken .

By th e w ord o f the Guru doubt i s cut off and du ality .

The w ord of the Guru does not pa ss aw ay in an y way .

S ing by me ans o f the w ord of the Guru the qu alities o f Hari

The w ord of the Guru is w ith the cre atures .

The w ord of the Guru is the friend of the friendless on e .

For the s ake of the w ord of the Guru he does not fal l into hell .

By the w ord of the Guru ( his) tongue enj oys nectar .

Th e w ord of the Guru is m ani fest in the w orld .

By the w ord of the Guru ( on e) sustains no loss .

( T o whom ) he himself ( i s Hari ) i s merciful :

. .

( To him ) says Nanak is the true Guru al ways comp assionate

, , .

Gauri gu
'
d r ér i
‘

mahal d V
VI . L XX VI .

Wh o m akes gem out of ( a clod of e arth ;

a

Wh o w ith efi or t preserves in th e w omb ;

‘

W h o gives lustre an d greatness

O n th at L ord I meditate the eight w atches ( of th e d ay ) .
 RA G GA U BI, MA H V . .
, S A E D V II . VIII .
( L X X VII . LX X VIII )
.
249

P ause .

O my sw eethe art ‘ m ay I obtain the dust o f th e pious people

,

Joining the Guru I w ill m ed it ateson my Lord

W h o m akes o f a fool an eloquent m an ,

Wh o m akes of a stupid an intell igent m an ,

By w hose favour I obt ain the nin e tre asures

That Lord is not forgotten from my mind .

Wh o gives a pl ace to the homeless ,

W h o gives honour to the honourless ,

Wh o fulfils every des ire

( Hi m ) I remember day an d night at ( every ) bre ath an d morsel .

By w hose favour the rope of the M ay a is out .

By the fav our of the Gur ut h e acid poison ( becomes ) nectar .

Nan ak s ays : by this ( m an ) nothing ( is done ) .

I pr aise the preserver .

Gaur ? gud r é r i ; mahal a V

VII . LX X VII .

( l In his asylum there is no f e ar ( nor ) grie f .

W it h out him nothing w ill h appen .

I give up dexterity force contriv ance an d p assions

, ,
.

He is preserving ( the honour ) o f his servant 2

.

P ause .

Mutter O my he art w ith ple asure : Ram Ram !

, , ,

In the house ( an d ) outside ( of it) he is al w ay s w ith thee .

E st ablish h i m firmly in thy mind ,

( A n d ) thou w ilt t aste the nectar j ui ce the w ord o f the Guru -

.
,

S ay of w h at use ar e the other e fforts ?

,

He himself besto w ing his mercy keeps ( thy ) honour

, ,
.

S ay w h at is m an w h at is hi s po w er ?
, ,

A l l the uproar o f the M ay a is but false v ain ) .

The L ord c auses the w ork to be done .

H e is the inw ard governor of al l the b odies .

O f all comf orts the true com f ort is this

Take to he art the instruction of the Guru !
W h o is given to contempl ati on on the n ame of Ram
H e s ays Nan ak is blessed an d endow ed w ith a gre at lot
, ,
.

Gaur i gud r ér i makal d V

V III . LX X V I II .

By he aring the story about H ari filth is taken off .

( Men ) e asily become much purified

3
.

W W W signifies also (like ( m t o w hich it corr espon d s) s weethe art husb and
1 ” “
, , .

2 1 11 um? xii supply : a n honour , , .

3
“H HE used a d v el bi al l y ;
,
e asily w ithou t diffi culty
‘
fi g S ansk i fwa
“
,
”
.
”
. .
250 RA G GA U R I ,
MA H V . .
, S A E D IX .
(L X X IX ) .

By re ason of a gre at l ot ( de stiny ) the society of the pious is obtained .

Love to the S upreme Brahm springs up .

P ause .

The ( piou s) m an muttering th e n ame o f Hari H ari is s aved

, , ,
.

By the Guru he i s brought over the sea o f fire .

By pr aising H ari ( h is) mind becomes sedate ( cool ) .

The sins of (h i s diff erent ) births ar e gone o ff .

The recept acle of all ( things ) he perceives i n his mind .

No w w h y should he go to seek ( it else where )

W hen his L ord h as become merci ful ,

The l abour of th e w orshipper h as come to an end .

The f etters o f (h i s) servant ar e out

By remembering remembering remembering the abode of ( al l ) qu alities
, ,
.

The O n e is in the mind the O n e is in every spot ,

.

H e abides bri m f ul in every place .

By the perfect Guru every doubt is removed .

By remembering Hari ( s ays ) Nan ak com fort is obtained

, ,
.

Gaur i guar é r i makal d V .

IX . LX X IX .

Tho se wh o die be fore repo se after w ards , .

Those w h o are sp ared they h avi n g girded up their loins

, , , , ar e st an di n g
'

.
'

The busi ness to w hich they clin g

, ,

By th at du ality is made firm in th at they are absorbed , .

P ause .

Th at time ( o f de ath ) does not at all come into their mind .

They cli n g to that w hich p asses aw ay .

By desire the body of the fool is bound .

H e clings to lust w rath an d love , .

O n his he ad is standing Dh arm R ai Y am a ) -

.

H e e ats poison consideri ng it a s w eet thing .

I bind I subdue enmity

, .

W h o w ill put hi s f oot into our ground ?

I am a Ban dit I am clever an d kno w ing
, .

An oth er does n ot comprehend the cre a tor .

H is ow n state an d mind he hims elf k no w s 2

.

Wh at c an one say h ow c an one describe ( it) ?

,

Into w h atever ( busine ss or condi tion ) h e puts ( a m an ) there he must rem ain , ,

( T h ough ) every one i s ask i n g for his o w n w el fare .

E verything is thine thou ar t the cre ator, .

There is no en d nor limit ( of thee ) .

May to ( thy ) servant ( this ) gif t be g iven

( Th at) Nan ak m ay never f orget ( th y ) n ame .

w h o a re s a ed , t e w h o s a r
p r
p e their li fe a n d d o not die ( by me ans o f co n te m pl atio n ) H3 they
. .

.
,

are s t an d i g i e t h ey ar e eng a g ed in w ork mu st w o r k o n in co

n t ra di st inc t i o n to
( “3 t h ey repo se)
n , . .
,
, .

fi TfB fi rffi i s the same as 31%

2
o n c s s ec r e t mind o r t h ough t
’
.
252 B i t} Gi an ni , MA H . v .
,
S A BD X II . X III (L X X X II . . LX X X III )
.

H e h imsel fnnihi l ates He himself establishes

a ,
.

Nan ak ( m akes ) supplic ation bef ore th e Lord .

Gear ? gud r ér i maizal a

'

V .

X II . LX X X II .

The illusive cre ation of m any kinds an d sorts w as seen ( by m e ) .

W ith the pen w isdom w as put do w n on the p aper .

H aving become a chief ( an d ) king a ( fine ) house w as seen ( by me ) .

( But) by ( al l ) this my he art w as n ot s ati ated .

P ause .

S how me th at comfort 0 holy m an ,

( By w hich ) my thirst m ay be quenched an d my mind s atiated }

Ridin g on a horse ( s w i ft like ) the w in d ( an d ) on an eleph ant ,
.

P er fume of s andal w ood a bed an d a be autif ul w om an

-
,
.

The singing of actors an d d an cers in the aren a

In ( al l ) this my mind receives no s atisfaction .

The assembly ( roun d ) the throne the festive procession of ( th e Raj a s ) s ed an ch air
,
’
-
.

A l l f ruits be autiful g a rdens

,
.

Delight in the ch ase the kingly sport

,

( By al l th is ) my m ind is not comforte d ( it is ) illusion an d deceit ,

.

O ut of mercy the holy men told me of th e True on e .

A ll com fort an d j oy w as obt ained ( by me ) ( from ) this .

In the assembly o f the pious the pr ai se o f H ari is sung .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : by him w hos e lot is gre at he ( i e H ari ) is obt aine d

, ,
. . .

P ause .

In w hose ( house ) i s the w e alth o f Hari h e is h appy ,

.

By the m ercy o f t h e Lord un ion w ith the pious ( is brough t about ) .

Gauri gud r ér i maha l a V

X III . LX X X III .

Man thin ks : this body is mine .

A g ain an d a g ain he clings t o i t .

2

S o n w if e household ar e a noose ( to him )

, , .

( S uch m en ) c an n ot become the serv ants of R am .

P ause .

Wh at i s th at m anner by wh ich one m ay sing the ex c ellences

, of Ram ?
Wh at is th at method by w hich one m ay cross thi s M ay a ?
,

W h at is good he con siders as bad

, .

( I f ) one spe ak the truth th at is ( to him ) equ al to poison

, .

H e do esnot kno w victory an d de fe at .

This is the n ature of the S akat ( in ) the w orld .

What is de adly poison th at th e fool drinks , .

The nectar n am e he con s id ers as bitter

-
.

r3 ”3 l e g i n stead . oi for t h e s ake o f th e rhym e .

2
m m i , 31
’
b eing o n ly a n alliter ation .
 RAG GA U BI , MA H V . .
, S A E D X IV X V . .
(L X X X IV . LX X X V) .

He does not go ne ar the assembly of th e pious .

H e w anders agai n about in the eighty four l akhs ( of forms o f existence )

- .

By on e net birds ar e ensn ared.

Glow ing w ith youth ul rdour he is given to sensu al enj oyments o f m any kinds
f a
‘
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) : to wh om he h as become merci ful

Hi s nets ar e cut asunder by the perfect Guru .

Gaur i gud r ér i
’
makal d V
X IV . LX X X IV
By th y mercy the ( right ) way is obtaine d .

By th e mercy of the L ord th e n ame is meditated upon .

By th e mercy of the Lord the bonds are loosened .

By th y mercy egotism is broken .

P ause .

( Thy ) service is done ,

if thou ap p l i est ( on e t o it) .

W e c an do nothing, 0 Go d !
If it is ple asing to thee then I sing ( thy ) pr aise
,
.
2

I f it is ple asing t o thee then I pr aise the True one

,
.

I f it is ple asing t o thee then the true Guru is comp assion ate
, .

Al l com forts 0 Lord ( ar e obt ained ) by thy mercy

, , .

Wh at is ple asing to thee th at is a true w ork

,
.

What i s ple asing to thee that is true virtue

,
.

The receptacle of al l excell ences i s w i th thee .

Thou art the L ord ( thy ) serv ant ( is o ff ering up ) supplic ation ( to
,

( My ) mind an d body become pure by love t o H ari .

A l l com forts I o btain in the society of the s aints .

My mind rem ai ns attached t o thy n ame .

This is considered by Nan ak as h appiness .

Gauri gud r ér i ; makal d V

X V . LX XX V
As m any other fl avours as ar e t asted by thee
( By them ) not for a moment ( thy ) thirst is quenched .

I f thou t astest the fl avour o f the j uice o f Hari

By t as ting ( it ) thou bec om est w onder struck - .

P ause .

my beloved tongue d ri nk nectar !

O ,

S teeped in th is j uice thou w ilt become s ati ated 3 .

O tongue sing thou the excell ences of Ram I

,

E very moment medit ate on Hari Hari Hari ! , ,

Nothi ng else should be he ard nor should one go any where else .

1
a m , p a rt p ast co njunctive o f a m
. a n t o be glo w ing w ith youth ful , . ar d our .

2
sf rea ding from the P uri ns o r singing i n pr aise o f th e Deity
. .

3
fm j} f m ad
j s atiated ari bein g a m eaningless alliteration
.
, .
254 RAG GA U RI, MA H V . .
,
S AE D X VI . X VII .
( L X X X VI . LX X X VII ).

In the society of the pious h e ( i e H ari ) is obtained by him w hose lot is great. .
,
.

O tongue pr aise him al l the eight w atches ( of the day )

,

The S upreme Brahm the L ord is unfathom able , ,

.

H ere an d there ( thou w il t ) al w ays ( be) h appy .

S inging t h e pr aises o f H ari ( thou ar t ) priceless O tongue ' ,

T h e tree h as sprouted blos soms an d fruits are ( on ) t h e tree

, .

S teeped in this j uice ( o f H ari ) thou w ilt not give it up ag ain .

H e brings no ( other ) j uice ne ar his m outh

( T o w hom ) the Guru h as become an assistant s ays Nan ak , .

Gaur i gud r ér i mah al d V

X VI . LX X X VI .

The mind is m ade the p al ace the body the fence ,

.

Within it is an infinite thing the S uprem e Being ) .

W ithin it the w holes ale merch ant is he ard ( s aying )

Wh o is the retail de aler on w ho m there is reli ance there ?
-
,

P ause .

S ome ( rare ) one is t r afii c ker w ith

the gem o f the n ame
’
a .

W h o procures it is feeding o n n ect ar

, .

Mind an d body I o ffer up as a s acrifice w orship is m ade ( by me ) , .

Wh at is th at contriv ance by me ans o f w hich I m ay be imbued w ith love ( to H ari )

,

I fall do w n at ( h i s) foot giving up mine an d thine ‘

, .

W h o is th at m an w h o puts ( me ) into the tr affi c ( o f th e n ame of Hari ) ?

,

In wh at w ise m ay I obtain the p al ace of th e w holes ale merch ant ?

W h at is th at m anner o f life by re ason o f which he c alls ( on e) w ithin ?
,

Thou ar t a gr e at w holes ale merch ant w h o h ast crores o f retail de alers ,

-
.

W h o is th at donor w h o h aving taken ( life ) m akes ( it ) enter ( ag ain ) ?

,

S e arching an d se arching about ( o ur ) o w n house w as ( a t length ) obt ained .

Th e true priceless gem w as ( then ) sho w n ( t o us )

,

W hen out of mercy ( w e w ere ) united by the w holes ale merch ant ( w ith hi m sel f )
, , ,

By re ason of confidence ( faith ) in the Guru s ays Nan ak ,

.

Gaur i gud r ér i malzal d V .

X V II . LX X X VII .

They rem ain night an d d ay in one ( continu al ) love ( o f B ar i )

( W h o ) know the L ord ( as being ) al w ays ( present ) w ith the m .

The n ame of the Lord is m ade ( their ) occup ation .

They ar e ful ly s ati ated by the sight of H ari .

P ause .

( Wh o ) in love w ith Hari they ar e flourishing in mind

ar e , an d body .

They h ave fled to the asylum o f the perfect Guru .

The lotus foot ( of Hari ) is ( their ) soul s support

-
’
.

1
533 1 3 3 1 in e an d th i n e
, m , i . s
. al l questions about mine an d t hine , al l e ar thly goods .
33
"
for t h e s ake
o f the rhym e i n ste a d o f
,
256 RA G GA U nI , MAH V . .
, sa s n xx .
(X C ) .

P ause .

The Maya enters ( men ) in m an y w ays .

The s aints li ve in thy protection 0 Lord ,

S h e enters him w h o is drunk by vai n conceit ,

.

S h e enters him wh o is attached to son an d wi fe

,
.

S h e enters ( him w h o is proud ) ( about) eleph ants horses and things ,

.

S h e enters him w h o i s drunk in the inebriety of youth an d be auty .

S h e enters the ground t h e t abor ‘

an d the ar en a ,
.

S h e enters the assembly h aving he ard the sound of a song ,

.

S h e enters th e bed the p al ace the orn aments , ,

.

The five intoxic ated an d blind ones she enters 2

.

S h e enter s him w h o does w orks ensn ared by selfishness

, .

S h e enters the m arried st ate she enters lonely li fe , .

S h e enters conduct occup ation an d c aste , .

E ver ything she enters except him wh o is steeped in the colour o f B ari ,
.

The bonds o f the sai nts are c ut asunder by Hari .

How should the M ay a enter them ?

Nanak s ays : wh o h ave obtained the dust of the s aints
Ne ar them the M ay a does n ot c om e .

Gear? guar é r i ; malzal a V .

XX . XC .

( In ) the eyes is sl eep ( an d) the p assion of looki ng at another s ’

w ife .

Th e c ar s h ave fallen asleep h aving h eard an d reflected on c al um u

y .

The tongue h as fallen asleep by gree di ness an d s weet taste .

Th e mind h as f allen asleep am az ed by the Maya , .

P ause .

( I f ) one rem ai ns ke in this house body )

aw a

He gets hi s thi ng uni m p ai red .

Al l the c om p an i on sa are into x ic ated in their own ple asure .

They h av e n o know ledge of their o wn house

.
.

The five hi gh waymen ar e robbing “

.

Th e che ats h av e fall en on the empty city .

F ather an d mother c annot protect from them .

F riend an d broth er cannot protect f rom them .

They are not stopped by w e alth an d cleverness .

In the society of the pious these are brought under subjection .

Besto w mercy on me O thou b ow holder ,

-

The dust o f the s aints is all ( my ) tre asure .

W e d ivid e ord s into th e w 3 , ground an d fi rs; ( as, poor gives h e re n o sens e) fi n ? 15 very
, ,

l k ly e s ame a s fi rJi m
i e t h -
a ta bor or drum big i n , t h e middl e an d sm aller a t both ends use d in ,

t he o r a ren a th ea t re
( ) .

i m é
’
. e .
, tl . e tc .

W
K
a
The co m pan i ons
or ar e h er e th e sen ses.

T he H2 3 13 or five high waymen , a re ar m .

§ IL 3 3 VE T W
, , e
 RA G GA uaI , MA H V . .
,
S AE D X X I . X X II (e . . X C II )
.

257

( My ) c apital ( rem ains ) s afethe true Guru w ith .

Nan ak w akes in love to the S upreme Br ahm .

P ause .

He wakes , to w hom the L ord is merciful .

H is c apit al , w e al th ( an d ) property ( rem ain ) s afe .

Gauri gud r ér i mah al d V

X X I . X CI .

_
I n w hose
pow er the K han an d S ultan is ;
In w hose po wer al l the w orld is
By whom everything is m ade
W i thout him there is no one .

P ause .

M ake thy suppli c ati on before thy o w n true Gur u I

H e wil l settl e ( al l ) thy affairs .

W hose court is higher th an all .

W hose n ame is the support o f al l ( his ) devotees .

A l l perv ading an d omnipresent is the L ord

-

W hose splendour is formed in everybody .

Remembering w hom the d w elling of p ain tumbles do w n .

Remembering w hom Yam a does n ot say anything .

Remembering w hom the dried up ones become green .

Remembering w hom the sinki ng stones s w im across .

Victory always t o the assembly o f the s aints !

The n ame of H ari Hari is the support o f the life of his servants
, , .

Nan ak s ays : he h as he ar d my supplic ation .

By th e favour o f the s aints I d well in the n ame .

Gaur i gud r ér i malzal d V

X X II . X CII .

( 1 ) By the sight the true Guru the fire is extinguished

of .

By meeti ng w ith the true Guru egotism is subdued .

In the society of the true Guru the mind does not vacill ate .

The disciple utters the nectar speech - .

P ause .

The w hole w orld is tr ue w hen steeped in the True one

, .

C oolness an d tr anquillity are ( obt ai ned ) from the Guru the Lord is know n , .

By the favour of the s aints he mutters the n ame .

By the favour of the s aints he sings the praise of Hari .

By th e favour of the s aints al l p ains ar e blotted out .

By the favour of the s aints he i s rele ased from his bonds .

By the mercy o f the s ain ts spiritu al blin dness an d error ar e done aw ay .

B athing in the dust of the pious is all ( his ) religion .

When the pious ar e mercif ul Gav i n d is comp assion ate

,
.

A mo n gst the pious ( is ) this my soul .

 r
2 8 RA G GA U B I , MA H V . .
,
S A BB X X III . XX IV (X CIII
. . X CIV )
.

Medi tate on the comp assion ate depository of mercy

Thou wilt th en obtain a se at in the society o f the pious .

On me the destitute of virtues the L ord h as bestow ed mercy

, ,
.

In the society o f the pious Nan ak h as taken the n ame .

Gaufi gud r ér i mahal d V .

XX III . X CIII .

In the society of the pious th e Lord is muttere d ( by them )

( T o w h om ) by the Guru the m antr a of the n ame alone is given .

Having given up conceit they h av e become f ree f rom enmity .

The eight w atches they adore the feet of the Guru .

P ause .

Now th e w icked thought nother is extin guished

of a ,

S ince the praise o f B ari i s he ard w ith ( th eir ) e ars .

The depository of tranqui llity comf ort an d j oy , ,

The protect or protects them at the end .

P ain an d trouble fe ar an d doubt ar e extinguished

,
.

Comi ng an d going are stopped by his kindness .

H e h imsel f beh olds utters an d sees everything

,
.

W h o is al w ays w ith ( thee ) h im 0 mind mutter

, , ,

By th e favo ur of th e s aints he w as m ade m anifest .

The O n e th e oce an of virtues is omnipresent

, ,
.

Wh o rel ates ( them ) l ( becomes ) pure ( he becomes ) cle ansed , wh o he ars ( them ) .

\Vh o conti nual ly sings the excellences o f Gav i n d .

Nanak says : to wh om h e becomes merci ful

A ll th at m an s toil is brought to an end
’
.

Gaur agud r ér i mahal d V .

X X IV . X CI V .

Having broken ( his ) fetters he m akes ( the disciple ) utter Ram .

In ( h i s) mind true meditation spri ngs up .

The troubles ar e done aw ay h e lives in h appiness

, .

S uch a d onor the tr ue Guru is c all ed .

P ause .

He is the giver of h appiness wh o c auses to mutter th e name

, .

Besto w ing mercy he unites w ith him ( i e H ari ) . . .

T o w hom he becomes kind h i m he himself unites ( w ith h imself )

, .

The d epository of all t h e S upreme Being ) he ( i e the disciple ) obtains f ro m the Guru . . .

H avi ng given up his o wn sel f (h i s) coming an d going ar e efi ac ed

'
.

In the assembly of th e pious the S upreme Brahm is know n ( by h i m) .

T o h i s servants Hari h as become merci ful .

The support of ( his ) serv ants is the O n e G6p al , .

On the One ( their) contemplation ( is directed) to the One ( they h ave) love in ( their) mind ,
.

1
i . e. the 313 of Gav i n d .
260 Ri c GA U R I ,
MA H V . .
, S AE D X X VII .
(X C VII ) .

By w hom m any e arths an d skies ar e upheld ;

W hose vit al ener gy is m ani fest in the cre atures
W hose gif t no one eflac es
‘

Remembering rememberin g ( th at) L ord thou w ilt become

,
fearless .

Remember the eight w atches t h e n ame o f the L ord !

( It i s equ al t o ) b athing an d ablution in m any T i r th as .

F all on the asylum of the S upreme B rahm I

Crores o f stains sins ) ar e blotted out in a momen t .

H e i s a ful l king n o t in w ant of anything , .

The confide n ce ( faith ) o f th e servants o f the L ord i s true .

1

The perfect Guru giving ( them ) h i s h an d protects them

, ,
.

Nan ak ( s ays ) the S up reme Brahm i s po w er ful .

Gaur i guar ar a; m aaa l a

’
V .

X X V II . X C VII .

By the fa vour
the Guru ( h i s) min d clings to th e n ame
of .

H e w h o h ad fall en asleep through vari ous births is aw akened

H e utters the nectar speech of the excelle n ces of L ord H ari
-

( By w hom ) the benevolence o f the perfect Guru is obtain e d

3
.

P ause .

By remembering th e L ord b e obt ai n s al l h appin ess .

In the house an d outside ( of it ) ( he gets ) al l comf ort an d tr anquillity .

H e kno w s ( him ) by w hom he is cre ated , .

The L ord himsel f unites him ( w ith himsel f ) out of mercy .

H e t akes h i s ar m an d m akes h i m h i s ow n
W h o i s al ways reiter a tin g t h e story o f B ar i .

It is ch arm spel l an d medicaments , .

4

The n ame o f H ari H ari is t h e support of th e life of the cre atures

, .

True w e alth is obtai n ed by love t o Hari .

In the society of the pious one cro sses ( the w ater o f existence ) w hich is diffi cult t o get over , .

The follo w ers of the s ain ts an d pious d w ell in com fort .

The w e alth of B ari w hich c annot be estim ated is acquired ( by them )

, , .

W h ose l ot it i s t o him the Gu ru gives it

, .

N an ak ( s ays ) at r andom no ( w e alth o f Hari ) a ccrues .

5

1
1 113 1ru e i e it is n o t d eceived
, t , . . .

T h e w o r ds o f th i s li n e m us t be p ut thu s : ma y mfi fi m }
2
There i s no gra m L
m a t ic a l con n exi o n bet w een t h em an d t h e prop er pos i tio n o f t h e w or d s c a n o n ly be a rrived at b co nj e cture
y .

T h e S i khs d o n o t kn o w w h a t t o m ak e o f t his ver se a s t h ey e x l ai n

3
p ME TER } by m an B ut h ere ,
“
.
”

w e“is t h e p ar t p a s t o f W e? “
. fr om t u m ) t o ob t a in a f orm w hich i s also found in , ,
.

R ag A sa, A st p a di , l 3 , 7 .

4
W ; TH
'

QHTI
m edic a m e n t ; 1 m . d rug, S an sk HE W repeated applica .
,

t ion ( o f m ed ic am e t s) n met 1 11 W ] ? i s us ed a s a ge n er al t erm fo r al l r eme

-
di es a n d O p era t i o n s pra c tis ed
i n t h e m ed ic al ar t ( c f t h e S an sk T h e S ikh s h ave n o id ea o f t h e sign ifica t i on o f m 3
. .
,

an d
guess i n a l l d i r ec tio s th ey e xpl ain i t t r ad i t ion a lly by but w i tho ut a n y re aso n ”
n ex p i t i o n a , .

fEIHHT s ig n i fies he e : by ch a c e a t ra n d o m or accid e n tally ( i n con t ra d is tinctio n to W

r n , l ot) : .

J fiz K U fa sup p ly : EIfi Z V25 Hfirfi x

.
 RAG GA uai , MAH V . .
, S AE D X X VIII . X X IX .
( X C VIII . X C IX .
) 261

Gauri guar éfl ; mafi al a V

XXV III . X C V III .

Then ( thy ) h and w ill become p‘ i re

When th e clog o f the M aya is done aw ay .

‘
I f
( ) yth tongue sing continu ally th e exce l lences o f Ram ,

Th ou wilt ob tai n h appiness 0 my brother an d f riend ! ,

P ause .

Write wi th pen p aper an d ink

,

T h e n ame o f Ram ! ( the n ame of Hari is nectar sound -

.

By this w ork th y p assions ( or dise ases ) go off .

Remembering Ram Y am a c annot be at ( thee ) .

The messen gers of Dh arm Rae Yam a) w ill n o t overpo w er ( h i m )

-

( W h o i s not at al l sunk in the in fatu ation of the M ay a

)
”
.

He himsel f is delivered ( from existence ) an d ( w ith him ) the world crosses

( Wh o) mutters the n ame of Ram w ith one mind
3
.

He h imself imp arts instruction t o o thers

Into w hose he art th e n ame o f Ram h as entered .

On w hose f orehe ad thi s tr easure ( i s w ritten )

Th at m an mutters the Lord .

( Wh o ) sings the eight watches the praises of B ar i Hari ,

To h im I devote myself s ays Nan ak , .

GAU RI GU A RE RI ; MA HA L A V .

éaup adas ; Du
p ad as .

Om ! By th e fa vour of the true Guru !

X X IX . X CIX .

Wh at is ano ther s th at ( he con siders) his o w n

’
, .

Wh at is to be given up to th at his mind i s attach ed

, .

P ause .

S ay , h owshould union be e ffected w ith th e L ord ?

Wh at is forbidden f o r th at he h as an inclin ation
,
.

A f alse w ord is considered as tr ue .

‘
( )
If tr ue ( w ords ) be spoken , he does n ot li ke it in his m i n d .

The perverse m an goes th e road to th e le ft .

1
m 1 3 3 3“ ( S ansk .
W ) to si
here changed to R)
» n
g ( a b ein g .

a
The order o f th e w ords in this line must be : mm :13 W 3 a gra mm a tic al rel a tion

is n ot to he expected tha t the re ader h as to find o ut fo r himself

, .

a
m adj intent in h is mind (on Ram only)
, . .

The MS S diff e r very much in this line The re adi n g o f the litho graph ed L ahore copy : 11 %
. .

5 gives no s ense as t h e vo w els a re p u t w r ong n other MS re ad s : 31 % 3

“ 3 X 33 ? , A 3 % i l fi 7; . .

ya w hich n o d oub t i s th e right re adi n g a s th e wo rds give a sen se at le ast 3 13% , for t h e .

sake o f th e rhyme .
262 Ri c GA U BT, MA H v . .
,
S A BD X X X — XXX II .
(C .
— C II .
)

‘
Having gi ven up the ( ro ad ) to the right ( h and ) he chooses the untrodden one .

Th at L ord is the o w ner o f both extremities ( i e of this an d th at w orld ) . .

.

Whom he uni tes ( w ith himsel f ) ( s ays ) Nan ak he becomes em ancip ated , ,
.

Gauri gud r ér i mah al d V .

X X X . 0 .

In the K ali yug they h ave met in union

-
.

So long t hey enj oy themselves as his order is ,

as he orders them ) .

P ause .

( Though ) she burn ( in self immol ation ) -

,
Ram , ( her) friend is not obt ain ed .

Rising ccordi ng to destiny she becomes a S ati

a .

( Though ) in emul ation an d obstin acy o f mind she burn hersel f

S h e does n o t obtain the society of ( her ) beloved she is c aused to w an der about ,
in m any births .

W h o in virtue an d continence obeys t h e order o f her b eloved :

Th at w om an suffers n o p ain in ( this ) w orld .
2

Nan ak s ays w h o considers the L ord as her beloved

S h e is a ble ssed S ati an d accepted at the thre shold ( of Hari ) .

Gaur i gud r é r i ma/zal d V

X X X I . CI .

P ause .

W e ar e rich an d opulent by the true n ame .

We sing the praises o f B ar i w ith n atural e ase .

Wh en I opened an d saw the tre asury of ( my ) father an d gran dfather

Then the tre asure w as put into m y he art .

With gem s an d rubies the v al ue o f w hich c annot be estim ated

,

( My ) store rooms are fi l led they are inexh austible an d c annot be w eighed
-
, .

Havi ng met together 0 brother let us ea t an d spend ( the tre asures )

, ,

They do not beco me diminished they ar e ( r ather ) incre ased , .

N an ak s ays : on w hose f orehe ad he c auses ( this ) decr ee to be w ritten

H i m he applie s to this tre asury .

Gaur i gud r é r i makal d V .

X X X II . CH .

( Then ) p eople die out he is considered of fe ar , w hen as being f ar o ff .

F e ar ceases w he n he is seen as omnipresent

, .

F rom t h e S ik h Gra n t h i s I coul d

xpl an a tio n o f this lin e T h e thre e MS S which I h ave at my
g et no e . .
,

d isposal r ea d a l l W
, I h e i s w ea v i ng , B ut t his gi v es n o sen s e w h a tever
.
It i s als o to be noticed that th e .
,

rhyme i s thus ren d ered im p ur e ( 8 8 7 51 which sp ea k s a g a i n st

W T W e p r opose to read .

( S a n sk . h e is c h oosin g T h is root i s n o lo n g e r foun d i n H in di an d P unj bi a n d therefo re very likely

.
a ,

W T was correc ted t o t h e w ell kn o wn m b ut in S in dh i a

-

m i s still i n commo n use

, T h is emen d ation .

w ill m a ke th e w hol e lin e p er fe ctly cl ea r t au t s i g n ifies h ere n o t s t r aigh t b ut right ( O ppo site to
.
,
” “ ”

l e ft )
.

W E T u n t rodden
, ( li t er ally : un touch ed) i s d erived from t h e S a n sk
E R E ; see my S indhi Gramm ar
I , .
,

Intr o d uct io n p xl ii 6 3 a n d p xli v 7

, . .
, . .
' .

T h e S ikh Gr an th i s exp l ain m

2
?TJ- f Q1 { H ( sh e su ffer s n o p ai n a t t h e h a n d s o f Y a m a) B ut
‘ ' ’
:
.

m ay as well h e t h e loc a t i v e o f “ I?“ dat t im e w o r l d w h ic h s ui ts t h e c o n text bet t er

( a ) , , , .
264 RA G GA U RI, MA H v . .
, S AE D X X X VI . XXX VII ( C V I C VII )
. . .

P ause .

The report about composure ( of mind ) j ars nect r ar e ( full ) of a .

1

Whose lot it is he takes an d drinks them

,
.

( There is ) a sound not produced by be ating ( an instrument) ,

a pure pl ace .

By i ts ( i e th at sound s ) report Gé p al ench ants

. .
’
.

In th at ( pure pl ace ) are m any endless cour ts o f tr an quillity .

The s aints are th e comp anions of the S upreme Brah m .

( W here there is ) endl ess j oy an d no more grie f

That house the Guru gave to Nan ak .

Gaur i mahal d V .

X X X VI . CVI .

Wh at is th at form thine w hich I should adore ?

of ,

Wh at is th at Y é g, by me ans of w hich I should subdue my body ?

P a use .

Wh at i s ( th at) exc ellence w hich I should sing in thy praise ?

,

Wh at is th at w ord by w hich I m ay gl adden ( thee ) 0 S upreme Brahm ?

, ,

Wh at is th at w orship of thine w hich I should pra ctise ? ,

Wh at i s th at m anner by w hich I m ay cross the w ater o f existence

,

W h at is th at austerity by me ans o f w hich one m ay become an ascetic

,

W h at is th a t n a me 2
by me ans o f w hich one m ay remove the filth o f egotism
,

S inging the excellences ( o f Hari ) w orship ( th e acquisition o f ) divine kno wledge meditation
, , , ,

all ( this ) he does 3

( s ays ) N an ak
,

W ith w hom the merciful Gur u meets an d on w hom he besto w s mercy .

P ause .

By him ar e the excell ences by him is the , L ord kno w n

W hose ( w ord ) the giver o f comfort minds .

Gaur i : mahal d V .

X X X VII . C V II .

The body of w hich thou ar t proud is not thy

, , o wn .

Domini o n property w e al th are not thy o wn

, ,
.

P ause .

Wh y dost thou cling to th at hich is not thy o w n ? w

Thy ow n ( is ) the n ame ( which is ) obt ained from the true Guru
, .

S on an d w ife 0 brother are not thy o w n

, ,
.

Not f riends an d acqu ain tances nor father an d mother themselves , .

am the story o r report a bou t th e m or composure o f mind ; a i s mispl ac e d it sh oul d stand ,

2
T he rea din g : 3 3 3 though foun d in t h e th ree MS S at my d is p os al is apparently w ron g w e .
, ,

s h oul d n ece s sarily expect b athin g abluti on ; wh at i s th at ba th in g by m ean s o f w hich etc T h e

, , ,
”
.

MS S o f l at er d ate ar e o ften very th o ugh tl essly w ritten especially in r e ference t o t h e vo w els t h e grammatic al
.
, ,

i mportan c e o f w hich t h e S ikhs n o lo n g er un d erstan d .

Al l t h e MS S a t my dispos al re ad mm but this i s sensel ess ; W18 ( h e d oes ) must be r ead

3
.
, .
 ar e GA U BI , MAH v . .
, S A BB X X X VIII .
— XL .
(ow n — ex ) .
265

Neither
gold silver an d m oney
, ,

N o r horses an d eleph ants ar e o f use to th ee .

Nan ak s ays : wh o is ki n dly u n ited ( w ith H ari ) by the Guru,

Wh o h as Hari the kin g his is everything
, , .

Gaur i makal d V .

XX X V III . C V III .

( l ) The feet of the Guru are on my forehe ad

. .

By h im all my p ains are removed .

P ause .

I am a s acri fice to my ow n true Guru .

H avi n g kno w n the ( S upreme ) spirit I mind h i m w ith the gr e atest delight .

Wh o applies to his face the dust of the feet of the Guru

By him all egotism ‘ is given up .

To wh om the w ord of the Guru h as become sweet in his mind

H e h as seen in ( it) the S upreme Brahm .

The Guru is the giver of com fort t h e Guru is th e cre ato r , .

The Guru s ays Nan ak , is the support o f soul an d life

, .

( I ) 0 my he art praise thou him

.
, ,

In whose ( house ) there is no deficiency w h atever .

P ause .

0 he art m ake th at beloved Hari thy friend !

,

The support of life keep al ways in thy thoughts

O m y he art serve thou alw ays h i m
, ,

Wh o is the primev al spirit the infinite God , .

P ut thy hope on him 0 he art , ,

In w hom confidence ( is placed ) fr o m the be ginning the beginning , of th e Yugs .

The love to whom always becomes h appiness

( H im ) Nanak praises, h aving met ( w ith ) the Guru .

Gaufl mahal d V .

X L . OX .

Wh at ( our) frien d does , th at is agreed to by us .

The action s of ( our) f riend are the re ason s o f ( our ) w el fare .

2

P ause .

In my he art an d thought I trust in the One ,

From w hom ( every ) w ork proceeds he is our f riend ,

.

Our fri end is unconcerned ( about anybody ) .

By the mercy of the Guru he is a friend 3 to me .

m fiz s f th e co n sciousne ss o f i n dividual existence

, . . .

i e they t end t o our w el fa re

2
. . .

W 13 1 P ers EA T friend a cquai n tance

3
.
, , .
2
.l 66 RA G GA U R I , MA H v . .
, S AE D X L I .
- X LI II .
(C X I .
—
C X III )
.

O ur friend i s th e
in w ard governor ,

The pow erful divine m ale th e S upreme Brahm the Lord , ,

.

We ar e thy sl aves ( thou ar t ) o ur L ord ,

.

H onour an d gre atness ( s ays ) Nan ak ar e thine O L ord !

, , ,

Gaur i m aha l d V
X LI . CX I .

T o w hom thou h ast become a po werful advocate

To hi m no stai n w h atever ( is applied ) .

P ause .

O Madh av a, wh o puts h i s hope in thee

T o him the w orld i s nothing .

In w hose he art the L ord i s

H e h as n o apprehensi on w h atever .

T o w hom thou O L ord h ast given firmness ( of min d )

, ,

H i m n o p ai n appro aches .

N an ak s ays : I obt aine d th at Guru ,

Wh o show ed t o me the S upreme Brahm as omnipresent .

Gaur i ; maha l d V .

X L II . C X II .

By a gre at l o t the human body w hich i s h ard ,

to get is obtained ,
.

Wh o do n ot mutter the n ame they ar e suicides ,

.

P ause .

H aving died those ( find ) n o pl ace ‘ by w hom Ram i s f orgotten ,

.

Destitute of R am of wh at use i s ( their ) life

They ar e e ating drinking sporting l aughing t o a gre at extent
, , , .

O f w h a t use is the embellishment o f a c o rp se

W h o d o n o t he ar the praise o f the S upreme bliss Go d )
They ar e born as stupid anim als as quadrupeds an d birds ,
.
2

N an ak s ays : ( in w hom ) by the Guru the ( i n iti atory ) m antra is m ade

In ( h i s) he art the n ame alone is contained ( an d nothing else ) .

Gaur i maka l d V .

X L III . C X III .

Wh o mother w h o h as a father
h as a ,

A ll relatives ar e but nomin al an d false .

P ause .

Wh y , 0 f ool,
thou be w ildered ?
ar t

In accordance w ith ( h i s) order t h ou h ast c ome .

1
m m
Ti y P l a ce .

W
o
2
E; ( S sk an . h ere
u se d as a dj ectiv e : born from th e w om b o f a n a nim al an i mal ,

e sp ecia lly o f t h e lo w er o r d e r . T he a ssimila t ion o f rai l ?! t o W i s a g ain st a ll rul es an d mus t be cons id ered
a s a vu lg ar corrupt ion ( Hi di n “ I!
c
268 RA G GA U R I ,
MA H v . .
, S A BD X L VII .
—X L X I .
( C X VII C X IX
.
— .
)

In the society o f the s aints egotism is e ff aced ‘

.

A ll is looked upon as h aving on e an d t h e s ame f orm

2
.

( If ) the s aints ar e favourab le the fi v e ar e s ubdued

3
, .

The nectar n ame i s collected in the he art

- .

N an ak s ays W hose destiny i s per fect

W ith hi m the feet of the pious h ave f allen in .

Gaur i ; mal zal d V .

X L V II . C X VII .

By muttering the excell ences of H ari th e lotus ( of the he art) open s .

By remembering H ari all f e ar flees .

P ause .

That intellect is perfect by w hich on e sings th e excellences of H ari

,
.

In consequence o f a gr eat d estiny he obt ains the society o f the pious .

In the society of the pious t h e treasure of the n ame is obtained .

In the society o f the pious al l affairs are accomplished .

By devotion t o H ari ( one s ) life obt ains its obj ect ’

( I f ) by the mercy o f th e Guru o n e praise the n ame .

N an ak s ays th at m an is a ccepted
In whose he art the L ord d w ell s .

Gaur i ; ma kal d V .

X L V III . C X V III .

W hose he art ttached to the only O n e

is a

H e forgets ( eve r y ) thought about other things 4

.

P a se u .

W i thout Gé vi n d n one other seen is .

H e is the cre ator w h o c auses ( every ) w ork to be done

,
.

W h o longs f or ( h i m ) i n h i s he a rt w h o utters w ith his mout h H ari Hari !

5
, ,

Th at m an w il l n o t v acill ate i n an y w ay neither in this n or th at ( w orld ) , .

In w hose ( house ) i s the w e al th o f H ar i h e i s a true w holesale merch ant , .

By the perfect Guru fai th is imp arted ( t o h i m ) .

H ari the king the l if e giving S upreme S pirit is united ( w ith him )
, ,
-
.

Nan ak s ay s the highest region is obt ained ( by him ) 6

.

Ga ur i ; mahal a V .

X L IX . CX IX .

( l ) The n ame is the support of the li fe o f th e d evotees

. .

The n ame is ( their) w e alth the n ame is ( their ) occup ation ,

.

1
m , gotism i a t h e id ea o f i n div id ual existen ce
e , . . .

i s con si d e red a s a fo r m o f the S upreme B ei n g

2
i . e
. al l .

m €
3
T h e fi v e, i . e .
, 11 , et c .

3 Tf3 ( 3 T3 ) th ough t c are a bo ut ; till u sed i n this s en se i n S i n dh i

4
, , i t is s .

68 ( S a n sk ca us afi fl q ) t o lo n g fo r t o love
5
38 11 1 . .
, , .

W
6
, t h e high est r e g ion o r pl ace final em ancip a t ion .
 Rae Gauai , MA H v S ABD L L II (C X X CX X II )
. .
, .
— . .
— .
269

P ause .

That m an obtains th e gre atness of the n ame an d lustre ,

To whom i a mercy he himself c auses it to be giv en .

The n ame is the occ asion ( pl ace ) o f the h appiness o f the devotee .

W h o delights l n the n ame th at devotee 1 s accepted

, .

The n ame of Hari upholds the ( pious ) m an .

A t every bre ath the pious man remembers the n ame .

Nan ak s ays : whose lot is perfect

Hi s mind is attached to the n ame .

Gauri malaal d V .

L . CX X .

( I ) W hen by the favour of the sain t s the n ame of H ari w as meditated upon
.

From th at time the running ( unquiet) mind w as satiated .

P ause .

By singin g the excellences ( of H ar i ) comf or t an d rest w ere obtain ed .

Toil w as done away my c al am ity w as struck dow n

, .

H avi ng a dored the lotus of the f oot of the L ord ,

By the remembrance o f H ari my anxiety w as eflfac ed .

When h avin g given up al l ( others) I c ame helpless to the asylum of the One
Then the high pl ace ( of Hari ) w as e asily obt ained ( by me ) .

P ain trouble error an d fe ar fled

, , .

The cre ator s ays Nan ak took up his abo de in my he art

, , .

Gauri ; mah al d V .

LI . CX X I .

( I) Do service ( w ith thy ) han d, ( w ith thy ) tong ue sing the praise s ( of Hari ) !
.

( With th y ) feet run in the w ay of the Lord !

P ause .

( This is) the favour able time , ( this is ) the fit opportunity o f remembering ( Hari ) .

By remember ing the n ame thou w ilt get safely over ( every ) fear ‘ .

With ( thy ) eyes behold the sigh t o f the sain ts !

Reg ard in ( th y ) he art the imperishable Lord !
Go to the pious an d he ar his pr aise !
H e w ill efi ace ( thy ) fe ar o f birth an d de ath
‘
.

P ut the lo t u s foot of th e Lord in ( thy ) bre ast !

-

S ave ( thy hum an ) body w hich is h ard to get ( from f urther tr ansmigr ation ) I
, ,

On w hom he besto ws his own mercy

That m an utters w ith his tongue the n ame .

1
es m eg fj ,
thou wilt get over , on a ccount o f the rhyme (fla n-n) .
 RA G GA U Bl II I ( C X X III C X X V )
—
270 ,
MA H v . .
, S AE D L .
— LV .
. .

P ause .

By forgetting the n ame the p ain of doubt enters ( m an ) .

By remembering the n ame error an d f e ar flee .

Wh o he ars th e p raise o f H ari w h o sings the praise o f H ari

,

That m an p ain does not appro ach .

The m an w h o serves Hari i s graceful .

The fire of the M ay a does not affect him .

In ( his ) mind body an d mouth is th e name o f the merci ful

,

Nan ak ( says ) other w orldly c ares ar e ab andoned ( by him ) .

Gaur i mal ca l d V .

L III . CX X III .

Giving up clever n ess an d much dexterity ,

I kept fast the perfect Guru .

P a use .

P ains become extinct h aving sung w ith ple asure the praises of B ar i .

Th e perfect Guru m et ( w ith m e) h aving devoutly meditated ( on H ar i )

,
.

The Gur u g ave ( m e ) th e m antra of th e n ame o f H ari .

C ares w ere eflac c d anxiety w ent o ff

‘

, .

Joys spr an g up by meeting w ith th e Guru the merciful ,

.

Besto w ing h i s mercy ( on m e) t h e n ooses of Y am a w ere cut asund er ( by him ) .

N an ak s ays ( w h o ) h as obtained th e perf ect Guru

Hi m the May a does not ag ain overspre ad .

Gaur i maha l d V .

L IV . CX X IV .

( T h ou w ast )
preserved by th e perfect Guru himself .

The flesh l y -
m inded ones distress overtook .

P ause .

O my friend mutter th e Guru the Guru !

, ,

Thy face w ill become br ight at the court ( o f Hari ) .

M ake the feet of the Guru d well in thy he art !

( Thy ) p ain enemies an d mis fortune h e w ill destroy
,
.

( I f ) the w ord of the Guru ( be ) w ith thee as a comp anion

A l l cre atures become kind ( to thee ) O brother ' ,

W hen the perfect Guru besto w ed his mercy ( on me )

I bec ame fully s atisfied ‘ s ays Nan ak
,
.

Gaufl ; mah al d V
LV . CX X V .

Many reli shes he enjoys like an ex .

The thie f is bound by the rope of spiritu al blindness .

P ause .

( Man ) is lif eless body if destitute of the society of the pious

a .

He is com ing an d going by th e p ain of the w o m b he is consum ed

, .

} fuln ess , s atisfie d sta te

1
3 , sf
E . .
272 RA G GA U a f , MA H V . .
,
S A B D L IX .
— LX I .
(C X X IX . CX X X I )
— .

A nxiety is e ffaced the w ish of th e he art is accomplished

,
.

By the tr ue Guru the abode of ( all ) excellences m er c y is besto w ed

, ,
.

Troubles fled comf orts settled ( in the he art )

,
.

No d el ay intervened w hen they w ere ordered by the Guru

‘
.

T h eir desire w as attained they met w ith the per fect Guru
,
.

Nan ak ( says ) : these men h ave born e good fruit .

Gaur i maha l d V .

L IX . CX X IX .

The turmoils ar e p assed tr anquillity h as set in from the L ord

,
.

Coolness h as sprung up by the L ord ( this ) gi ft is given

,
.

P ause .

By the mercy o f the L ord they became h appy .

Those w h o w ere sep arated through m any births ar e united ( w ith the L ord )
, ,
.

By remembering by remembering the n am e o f the L ord

, ,

The pl ace of al l dise ases is destroyed .

W ith n atural c ase he utters the praise o f H ari ,

Wh o remembers the L ord througb the eight w atches .

P ain an d tro uble an d Y am a d o not come ne ar ( him ) ,

Wh o sings th e pr aises o f Hari s ays Nan ak ,

.

Gaur i maka l d V .

LX . CX X X .

blessed d ay 0 blessed event

O , ,

By w hich the supreme un fettered Brahm, w as met w ith .

P ause .

I devote myself t o th at time ,

In w hi ch my mind mutters the n ame o f H ar i .

F r uit ful ar e those f orty eight minutes f ruitf ul those tw e n ty fo ur minutes

-
,
-
,

In w hi ch my tongue utters : H ar i H ari ,

F ruit ful is th at f orehe ad by me ans o f w hich I sh all p ay reverence t o the s aints

, .

P ur e i s th at f oot th at w alks in the w ay o f Hari

,
.

N an ak s ays : blessed is my destiny ,

By re ason o f w hich the feet o f the pious w ere met w ith .

Ga ur i maka l d V .

LX I . CX X X I .

( 1) K eep
the w ord o f the Guru in thy mind !
Remembering the n ame all anxiety dep arts

W ithout the L ord

there is none other .

H e alone kills an d preserves .

HT JTFJ g
1 " ‘
m , w hen they ( i e . . th e R H , t h e com forts) were ordered to com e .
 RA G GA U RI , MA H v . .
, S A BD L X II — L X IV
. .
( c xxx1 1 .
— c xxx 1 v .
) 273

P utthe f eet of the Guru in ( thy ) h e art an d bre ast

The oce an of fire thou w ilt cross muttering ( th e n ame ) .

Direct ( thy ) meditation on th e farm of the Guru !

H ere an d there thou w ilt obtain honour .

Wh o h aving given up every ( thing ) comes to the asylum of

H i s an xieties are removed he obtain s h appiness ( s ays ) Nan ak
, ,
.

Gaur a
’
maha l d V .

LX II . CX X X II .

By remembering w hom al l p ain passes off ,

( A n d) the j e w el of the n ame comes an d dw ells in th e mind

P ause .

Mutter O my he art th e praise o f ( th at ) Gav in d !

, ,

The tongue of the pious pr aises Ram .

l

W i t hout the O n e there is none other ,

By w hose favourable look comfort is al ways obtained .

M ake the O n e th y friend acqu aint ance an d comp anion !,

The w ord H a ri H ari w rite in th y he art !

”
, ,

The L ord is cont ained everywhere .

Nan ak sings the praises o f the in ward governor .

Gaur i mahal d V .

LX III . CX X X III .

The w hole w orld is sunk in fe ar .

H e h as no f e ar w hose support is the n ame

,
.

P ause .

Fe ar c annot enter thy asylum .

W h at is ple asing to thee th at ( thou ar t ) doin g

,
.

There is grief an d j oy in coming an d going .

By th at comfort is obtained w h at is ple asing to the Lord ,

.

The M ay a enters the gre at oce an of fi r e .

They ar e cool ( composed ) w h o obtain the true Guru

,
.

K eep me O L ord the preserver

.
,
‘
Nan ak s ays : w h at ( c an ) the helpless cre ature do P

Gaufi ; mah al d V .

L X IV . CX X X IV
By thy mercy the n ame is muttered .

By thy mercy a pl ace ( is obtained ) at ( thy ) threshold .

P ause .

Without thee 0 S upreme Brahm there is none oth er

, ,
.

By thy mercy comf ort is al w ays obt ained .

1
T h e w or d s of this li ne m ust be constr ucted thus m g a?" 1 E H13
3 1 3- .
2 74 BA G GA U R I ,
MA H v . .
, S AE D L X V .
— LX VII .
( c xx xv .
— c xxxv n .
)

( If ) thou dw ellest in the he art ,

no p ain be falls ( it ) .

By thy m ercy suspense an d f e ar flee .

0 S upreme Brahm O boundless L ord ! ,

( Thou ar t ) t h e in w a rd governor o f all bodies .

I o ffer ( t h is) supplic ation t o my o w n true Guru

M ay the n ame the tr ue c apital be given ( t o me ) ( s ays )
, , , Nan ak .

Gaur i mahal d V .

LX V . CX X X V .

L ike empty husks w ithout a grain

So ar e ( those ) empty ( w h os e) mouth is devoid
, of the n ame .

P a use .

Mutter the n ame o f H ari H ari 0 m an ! , ,

W oe t o ( thy ) body void o f the n am e an d b eing another s ’

W ithout the n ame there is n o good lot on t h e face .

W ithout the husb an d there i s n o h appy m arried st ate .

Wh o h aving forgotten the n ame t akes to another enj oyme n t

, ,

N one o f h i s desir es w i l l be accomplished .

O L ord besto w on me thy o w n mercy an d gi f t

, ,

( Th at ) Nan ak m ay mutter the n ame day an d nigh t .

Gaur i ; maka l d V .

LX VI . CX X X VI .

Thou art po w erful thou ar t m y L ord, .

Al l i s f rom thee thou ar t the in w ard governor

, .

P a use .

Th ou, O supreme omnipresent Brahm ( ar t) the shelter o f thy servants

, .

In thy asylum ar e crores o f thy servants s aved .

Al l cre atures as m any as there ar e ar e thin e

, , .

By thy mercy m any com forts ( ar e obtained ) .

W h atever exists all is thy decree } ,

W h o comprehends ( thy ) order he i s absorbed in the T r ue one , .

O L ord in mercy bestow ( o n m e) ( this ) gi ft

, ,

That Nan ak m ay remember the n ame ( containing ) the ( nine ) tre asures .

Gaufi ; maizal a V .

LX VII . CX X X VII .

( Th at ) very f ortun ate obtains h i s sigh t m an

,

Wh o devoutly medi tates on the n ame o f Ram .

P ause .

In wh ose heart H ari d w ells

H im no p ain ( be falls ) even in a dre am .

i . e . exists by t h y decree .
2 76 B AG Gi an ni , MAH v . .
, S A BD L X X I — L X X III ( C X L I — C X L III )
. . . .

The lotus feet ( of H ari ) I put in ( my ) he art an d bre ast

- .

( My ) he art body an d w e alth ar e the Guru s wh o is sust aini ng ( my ) life

’
.
, ,

( Hi s) life becomes fr uitful an d approved of

W h o considers the Gur u the S upreme Brahm ( as bei n g ) ne ar
,
.

The dust o f the s aints is obtained by the very f ortunate .

N an ak ( s ays ) : by mee ting w ith the Guru devout medit ation on H ari is m ade .

Gaur i mahal d V
LX X I . CX L I .

He does wi cked w orks an d sho w s ( outw ardly) other ones ( i . a . good

( But ) at the threshold o f Ram the thief is bound .

P ause .

W h o utters : is a devotee of Ram }

Ram he
In w ater e arth an d on the surface o f the e arth the O n e is contain ed
, .

In his he art is poison ( but ) w ith his mouth he utters nectar

, .

In the city o f Yam a he is bound an d struck in his face .

W i t hin the screen secretly ) he practises m any p assions .

( But ) in a moment he w ill become m ani fest in the w orld .

Wh o in w ardly is delighted w ith the true n ame :

To him ( says ) Nan ak the ord ainer ( o f all things ) is merciful
, , .

Gaur i mah al d V .

LX X II . C X L II .

The colour of Ram never goes o ff ( from him )

Whom the perf ect Guru in str ucts .

P ause .

The mind th at is steeped in the colour o f B ar i i s true .

The S pirit the ord ainer ( o f al l things ) is filling in the red colour
, , .

W h o sitti n g in the society o f the s aints sings his excell ences

, ,

H i s colour does n o t go off .

Without remembering Hari n o h appiness is ob tained .

A l l the othe r relishes o f the M ay a ar e insipid .

Those w h o w ere coloured by the Guru bec ame h appy

, , .

Nan ak s ays : ( to w hom ) the Guru bec ame comp assion ate .

Gaufi maha l a
’

V .

LX X III . C X L III .

By remembering the Lord sins flee aw ay ,

H appiness tranquill ity an d j oy settle ( in the he art )

, .

P ause .

The people of Ram h ave faith in Ram .

By muttering the n ame all anxiety is done aw a y .

I
(31 3 a d e v otee of Ram , utteri n g continu ally : Ram , Ram ! They ar e n o w kno wn fo r
thei r imp ure practices .
 E KG GAU ni ,. MAH v . .
, S ABD L xxrv .
— L xxv i .
( C X L IV — . CX L VI )
.
27 7

In the society of th e pious there is no fe ar nor doubtf ulness ‘ .

The praises of Gop al ar e sung day an d night .

The fetters ar e broken by the L ord out of m ercy .

The protection o f th e lotus foot is given t o them -

.

Nan ak s ays : in their mind cle ar apprehension ( o f truth ) is m ade .

Hi s serv ants continu all y drink enj oy ) spotl ess reno w n 2 .

Ga ufi maha l d V .

L XXI V . C X L IV
W hos e min d is fixed on the feet of H a fi z
Hi s p ain , trouble an d doubt flee aw a y .

P ause .

W h o is de aling in the w e al th of Hari, he is perfect .

Whom he ( i e H ari) cherishes , th at m an is a hero

. . .

T o w hom
the L ord bec ame comp assi onate
Those men cl ing to the feet of the Guru .

( They enj oy ) h appiness tran quillity quiet an d joy , , .

Continu al ly mutt ering the supreme bliss the L ord ) they live .

The c apital o f the n ame is acquir ed in the so c iety of the pious .

Nan ak s ays : by the L ord ( their ) affliction is c ut o ff .

Gaur i
‘

mahal d V .

LX X V . CX L V
By rememberi ng Hari al l troubles ar e e fi a c ed
‘
.

The lotus f eet ente r the he art

- .

P ause .

U tter the n ame of Ram a hundred thous and times !

Thou w ilt dri nk nectar j ui ce by love to the L ord - .
3

There is comf ort tranquillity enj oym ent an d gre at h appiness

, , .

C ontinu ally mutte r in g th e supreme bli ss th e L ord ) they li ve .

Lust w r ath covetousness an d passion ar e removed

, , .

I n the society o f th e pious all blem ishes ar e w ashed aw ay .

Besto w mercy O Lord wh o ar t comp assion ate to the poor !

, ,

May to Nan ak the dust of the pious be given !

Ga ufi makal d V .

LX X VI . C X LV I .

) Wh ose gif ts one puts on an d eats

(l
:
.

How is indolence tow ards him becoming , 0 moth er ?

S a nsk HTfi fi fin al 1’ being l en gthened o n account o f th e rhyme an d me dia l uassimil ated to t

1
.
, .

( wag ) signifies in S anskrit also b ut this mea nin g i s uncommon an d does not fit th e
“
w a t er
‘ '

fi q ,

c ontext .

a
I
fg W ; W c annot be here t h e feminine o f W : but must be taken as a bl ative
m final short 1 bei n g length ened on a ccount of t h e r h yme
'

of , .
278 RA G GA U BI , MA H . V .
, S A BD L X X VII . LX X VIII ( C X L VII C X L VIII )
. . .

P ause .

W h o h aving forgotten the

,
L ord , sticks to nother w ork :
a

He gives aw ay a gem for a shell .

Fors aking the L ord he t akes t o other obj ects o f desire .

I u p aying obeis ance t o the sl ave h ow ( sh all ) lustre ( be obtained ) ?

H e enj oys nectar j uice f ood an d drink
-
,
.

By w hom they ar e given him the d o g do es n o t kno w

,
.

Nan ak s ays : w e ar e untrue t o our s alt

P ardon us 0 L ord thou in w ard governor
, ,
.

Ga ur i ; mafia l d V
LX X VII . C X L V II .

Meditation in the mind ( on ) th e feet o f the L ord

Is ( equ al t o ) b athin g an d ablution at al l T i r th as .

P ause .

By remembering H ari every d ay 0 my brother ,

The filth of crores of births goes o ff .

By w hom the report about H ari i s fixed in his he art

H e gets al l the fruits his mind is desiring
,
.

( Hi s) life an d de ath an d birth ar e approved of

In w hose he art the L ord d w ells .

N an ak s ays : those men ar e perfect ,

Whose l o t is the dust of the pious .

Ga ur i ; maka l r] V .

LX X VIII . C X L V III .

( I) . Wh o is e atin g an d puttin g on clothes an d denies it I

H im the messenger of Dh arm rai ( Y am a ) overpow ers

-
.

P ause .

Wh o turns y his face from him by w hom soul an d body ar e given

aw a ,

H e w anders through crores of bir t hs an d m any w ombs .

This i s th e m anner of th e S akat

Wh atever he do es al l is p erverse
,
.

By w hom soul an d li fe mind an d body ar e sust ained

,

That L ord is f orgotten from ( his ) mind .

M any p apers ar e w ritten ( w ith re ference t o ) the destr uction o f the p assion s .
2

N an ak ( s ays ) deliver ance ( is obtained fro m ) the oce an of mercy an d h appiness .

P ause .

0 S upreme Brah m ( I am ) in thy asylum

,
.

( Whose ) bonds thou cuttest h e crosses by me ans , of th e name of Ha ri .

“Uf a m , d en ie s i t , i th at al l i s t h e g ift o f Go d
. a. .

2
W ; m u st he re be t ak en a s sub stan tive m
( w ) , d est r uc t ion .
28 0 RA G GA U BI , MA H V . .
,
S ABD L X X X II —. LX X X IV ( C L II — C L IV )
. . .

Gaur i maltal d V .

LX X X II . C L II .

He is he avily blind by bei n g fil led wi th w orldly aff airs .

It is p ain ful t o him ( if o n e) remind ( him ) of the name o f Ram

,

P ause .

E ven thou gre atness t o thy servant

ar t .

Hi m w h o is sunk in the M aya thou m ar c h est off to hell

, , .

S ei z ed by sickness he remembers the n ame .

( But ) he w h o is intoxic ated w ith poison ( find s) n o pl ace n or spot ( of rest )

,
.

Wh o is in love w ith the lotus feet -

H e does not think o f other ple asures .

I w ill continu all y remember the L ord .

J oin Nan ak 0 Hari the i nw ard governor !

, ,

Gaur i ; muit e l a V .

LX X X III . C L III .

eight w atches the high w ay robbers ‘ ( w ere ) ( my ) comp anions

Th e .

They w ere merci full y removed by the L ord .

P ause .

S uch at aste o f Hari every on e should e nj oy .

E v ery inclin ation o f the mind th at L ord is f ulfilling .

O ver the very hot oce an of t h e w orld

The L ord is fe r rying in a moment .

The m any fetters c annot be broken .

( But ) by remembering the n ame o n e gets the f ruit of fi n al em ancip ati on .

By contriv ance an d dexterity nothing ( is e ffected ) by this on e by

( I f ) he bestow his mercy ( on me ) Nan ak sings h i s praises
, .

Gaur i maiza l d V .

LX X X IV . CL IV .

( Wh o ) obtained as c ap it al the n ame of H an

h as
H e p asses through the W orld all his aff airs ar e a ccomplished
, .

P a use .

By hi m w hose lot is gre at the praise of H ari is sun g

, , .

0 S upreme Br ahm i f thou gi ve it then it is obtained

, , .

H old f ast the feet o f H ari in thy he art an d bre ast !

Rising thou w ilt p ass o ver the oce an of existence .

E very on e should a cquire the society o f the pious .

( H e wi ll ) al ways ( enj oy ) w elfare p ain w il l n o t ag ain affect him

, .

W ith love an d devotion adore the abode o f ( al l ) virt ues Go d ) !

Nanak ( s ays ) at ( hi s) threshold h onour w ill be obtained .

The or highw ay ro bb ers ar e the fi v e m ,

i n, 553 ,
 RA G GA U R I , MA H v . .
, S A BD L X X X V — L X X X VII (C L V — C L V II )
. . . .
28 1

Gear: mahal d V .

LX X X V . C LV .

.
( I ) In
. w ater , e arth an d on the face o f the e arth is H ari the friend omnipresent , ,
.

Doubts ar e ( thereby ) done aw ay his excellences ar e continu ally sung

,
.

P ause .

In rising an d sleeping Hari is a w atchm an w ith ( me ) ,

Remembering w hom there i s n o fe ar ‘ o f Yam a .

The lotus feet of the L ord ar e d w elling in ( my ) he art

- .

E very p ain is ( thereby ) e ffaced .

( My ) hope trust an d w e alth is the O n e

, .

In ( m y ) he art I rely on the w holes ale merchant .

T h e very humble an d friendless pious people

A re protected by the L ord holding out his h and to them,
.

Gaufi ; mahal cz
‘

V .

LX X X VI . CL VI .

Having
m ade ablution in the n ame o f H ari they ( are ) pure .

( They get thereby ) crores of meritorious deeds done at an eclipse m an y f ruits ( o f their good orks ) 2
,
w .

P ause .

If the feet o f B ari dw ell in th e he art

T h e blemishes o f m any births p ass aw ay .

A s re w ard f or pr aising H ari in the society o f the pious ( this ) is obt ained

( That) the ro ad of Yam a does not co m e into sight .

( Wh ose ) support G6v in d is in mind w ord an d deed ,

F rom him th e w orld the b an e ful thing recedes

, ,
.

W h o in mercy i s m ade hi s o w n by Hari :

He ( says ) Nan ak is mutte ri ng ( the n ame ) h e is muttering H a ri
, , ,
.

Gaufi malt a l a V .

LX X X VII . C L V II .

Fall on ( his ) asylum by w hom H ari is kno w n

( Their) mind an d body become cool being attached to the feet , of Hari .

P ause .

W h o do not settle in their he art the Lord the destroyer , of fe ar

They p ass in continual al arm through m any births .

In w hose he art the n ame of Har i d w ells

All his designs an d affairs ar e accomplished .

I n w hose po w er birth ol d age an d de a th ar e ,

Th at po w erful ( L ord ) remember at ( every ) bre ath an d morsel !

33 m e ar o n a ccount o f th e rhyme
1
s . m f .
, .

T h e s ense i s : b athin g in t h e n am e o f B ar i mut tering t h e n am e o f H a ri i s equa l to crores o f meritorious

2
,

w o rk s done a t a n eclipse w hich bring in m an y frui t s ( re wa r d s ) At a 3 3 8 ecl ipse it i s very meritorious

,
1 . or

to g ive alm s etc , .

 RA G GAU ni , MA H v . .
,
S A BD L xxxv 1 1 1 .
— xc .
( C L VIII .
— CLX .
)

( My ) fr iend ,
s w eethe art an d comp anion is the one Lord .

The n ame of the L ord is the support of Nanak .

Ga ur i malaria V .

LX X X VIII . CLV III .

O utside ( the house ) he is kept fast

( by me ) remember ing ( him ) in ( my ) he art .

( We ) return home t aking G6 v i n d w ith ( us ) .

P ause .

The n ame of Hari H ari ( goes ) w i th the s aints

, .

( Their ) mind an d bo dy ar e i mbued w ith love t o Ram .

By the favour o f the Guru the oce an ( of existence ) is crossed .

Al l the impurities o f the ( former ) births ar e removed .

The remembrance o f the n ame o f the L ord ( brings in ) lustre .

The m antr a of the perfect Guru is pure .

In ( my ) he art ( there is ) attentive regard to the lotus feet -

.

N an ak li ves by seeing ( their ) splendour .

Gaur i ; mah a l a V .

LX X X IX . CL I X .

Blessed is th a t pl ace w here the praises o f G6 v i n d ar e sung

, .

W el fare an d h appiness are made to d w ell ( there ) by the L ord himsel f .

P ause .

C al amity i s there w here H ari is not remembered

,
.

Crores of j oys ar e there w here they sing the excellences of H ari

, .

By f orgetting H ari m any troubles an d dise ases ( set in ) .

( Where ) the L ord is served Y am a does not come ne ar ,

.

T h at is a v er y blesse d immov able pl ace ,

W here onl y the n ame o f the L ord is muttered .

Wherever I go there my L ord is w ith ( me )

,
1
.

W ith Nan ak the in w ard governor is united .

Gaur i mahal d V .

X C . C LX .

The m an th at meditates on Gé v in d
Be h e le ar ned ( or ) unle arned attains the highest state ,
fin al em ancip ation ) .

P ause .

Remember Gé p al in the society o f the pious !

W ithout the n ame w e alth an d property ar e ( but ) false useles s) .

Th at m an is handsome clever an d intelligen t ,

By w hom the decree of the L ord is heeded .

In the w orld th at ( man ) is approved of

Wh o kno w s his L ord ( as being ) in everybody .

W “WW li terally :
I , w hereve r it is gone .
28 4 RA G GA U ni , MA H v . .
, S AE D X C IV — X C VI ( C L X IV C L X VI )
. . .
— .

As mother l ives seeing ( her ) son

a

S o are the people o f H a ri thoroughly in love w ith hi m .

( A s) the covetous o n e is h appy seeing w e alth ( coming in )

( S o ) the mind o f the pious i s fixe d on the lotus f eet -
.

M ay n o t a bit be f orgotten the li beral donor !

The L ord o f Nan ak is the soul s support ’
.

Gaur i maha l a V .

X CIV . C LX l V

P a use .

Those men w h o are a ccustomed t o the elixi r of Ram

,

Ar e i mbued w ith love an d aff ection to the lotus f eet -

.

A l l other j uices appe ar as ashes .

W ithout the n ame the w orld is de v oid o f fruit .

F rom the bl in d w ell they ar e dr aw n o ut by h i msel f

1
.

The qu al ities of Gé p al ar e of w onde rf ul m ajes ty .

In tree an d grass an d in the thr ee w orlds Gé p al is om nipresent .

The cre atures are the exp ansion o f Brahm the merciful is w ith ( them ) .

Nan ak s ays : this is the best tale ,

W h ich the cre ator approves o f .

Ga uz e; m a ha l d V .

X CV . CL X V .

P a use .

Continu ally ablution in the pond of Ram should be m ade !

S tirri ng up t h e gre at juice the nectar of H ari should be drunk !
The n ame o f Gé v i n d is a pure w ater .

Wh o b athes therein al l ( h is) affairs a r e a ccomplished

, .

I f approv al o f the s aints a n d convers ation w ith ( them ) be m ade

2

O n e cle ars aw ay the blemi shes o f crores o f bir ths .

( Wh o ) remembers the pious he is h appy , .

In h i s mi nd an d body the hi ghest bliss the S upreme ) is cont aine d .

T o w hose lot the tre asures of the f eet o f H ar i fall

To hi m N an ak the slave s acri fices himsel f
, , .

Do th at by w hich no dirt w i ll stick t o thee !

In the praise o f H ad this m ind shoul d w ake !
Remember the O n e ( an d do n ot entertain ) a second love !

I
uq '

bl ind w ell the mouth o f w hich i s covered a n d into which peopl e fa ll un aw ares
q , a , .

3 3 s m ( M a rat hi s t ill
2
a pproval a greemen t B ut the w o r d i s not o f P ersian origin it is
'

, . .
, .
,

d eri e d from the s ame so urce as the S indhi 3 3

v co n cord , .
 RA G GA U BI , MA H v . .
, S ABD X C VII .
— X C IX .
( C L X VII C L X IX
.
- .
) 28 5

In the society of the s aints mutter the n ame alone

( He performs ) religious w orks O bserv ances vo w s an d , , , w orship
Wh o does n o t kno w another besides S upreme Brahm
.the
.

His toil h as come to an end

Whose affection rests w ith his ow n Lord .

Th at Vaishn av a ( devotee ) is boundless ( S upreme )

By w hom ( his ) passions are ab andoned s ays N an ak , .

Gaur i mah al d V .

X C VII . C L X VII .

Whil st living th e fools give ( him ) up .

1

H as an y on e after his de ath been ben efi t ted ( by h i m ) ?

P ause .

Remember Gé v in d in ( thy ) he art an d bo dy ( this is ) w ritten ( f o r thee ) ,

the beginning .

T h e m ateria l w orld is not o f an y use ( to thee ) .

W hoever is deceived by the materi al w orld

H i s thirst w ill never ce ase .

T h e dre ad ful afflictions the w orld w hich is h ard to cross

, ,

Ho w w ill he w ithout the n ame of Ram get through them ?

H aving j oi ned the pious he accomplishes s aves ) both families
Wh o adores the n ame of Ram s ays Nanak ,
.

Ga ur i mahal a V .

X C VIII . C L X V III .

( I f an y on e) stroke out his be ard against the humble

Th at ( h ear d ) is burnt in fire by the S upreme Brahm .

P a use .

Th e cre ator an d adm in i ster er of full j ustice ,

H e is protecting his o w n servant .

From t h e beginning from the beginning of the ages h i s m aj esty is m an ifest

,
.

The cal umni ator h as died gre at distress befall s him

,
.

W h o is killed by H im him none preserves

,
.

Be fore an d after 3 his report is bad .

Hi s o w n serv ants he protects putting them to h i s neck ,

( W h o ) in the asylum o f Hari meditate on th e n ame o f Hari ( s ays ) Nan ak ,

.

Gaur i maleal d V .

X CI X . C L XIX .

By himsel f their declar ation is m ade fal se .

“

Afflicti on befalls the sinner .

1
Nohint w hatever i s gi v en wh at the object o f m fi l fi i s ; w e suppose it i s Ha ri o r the n ame The ' ‘ ’

, .

sense seems to be : whilst li v ing they d o n o t c are a bout H a ri a n d after their d e a th it i s t oo l ate .

i s the father s an d the mo ther s fa mily

’ ’
.
. .

a
ma be fore an d afte r i e i n the future an d in this w orld
, . . .

31m A r abic 4 5
,
" declar a tion deposi tion Their decl ara tion is ma de false pro ed to be fal se
, . v .

J
28 6 RA G GA U BI, MA H v . .
, S AE D 0 . CI .
( CL X X . CL X X I ) .

P ause .

W ho se assistant my G6 vin d is
H im Yam a does not appro ach .

Wh o spe aks falsehood at the true court

( Th at ) blind fool d ashes do w n his h e ad an d h ands ( in token of grie f ) .

S ickness enters them w h o commit sin

, .

The Lord hi mself sits do w n administering j ustice .

By their own w ork they are bound .

1

A l l ( their ) w e alth i s gone ( lost) w ith ( their) li fe .

Nan ak fall s on the asylum an d court ( o f H ari ) .

My honour is preserved by my cre ator .

Ga ur i
'
; mahal a V .

C . CL X X .

P a seu .

H im he lets ac quire the dust of ( his ) serv ant w hich is s w eet to the mind ,

( T o w hom ) it is w ritten from the beginning by re son ormer orks 2

a o f f W .

W hose mind is deeply imbued w ith egotism fil ling the he art :

3

They ( become ) pure by cle ansing it in t h e dust o f the pious .

( Though ) they b athe ( their) body in many w aters

The dirt does not go off they do n ot ( become ) pure
,
.

( When ) the true Guru wh o i s al w ays comp assion ate h as met w ith ( them )
, ,

( Then ) remem bering continu ally Hari t h e fe ar o f de ath is cut o ff .

E m ancip ation j oined w ith enj oyment is t h e n ame o f Hari ( to him )

, ,

( Wh o ) w ith love an d d evotion sings his excellences ( s ays ) Nan ak ,

.

Gaufi ; maka l d V .

CI . CL X X I .

( Those ) servants of Hari ( have attained ) to the statio n of life em ancipation )

T o w hom their o wn spirit h as become m anifest ‘ .

P ause .

H avinghe ard the remembrance recital ) o f H ari w ith thy mind an d c ars ,

Thou wilt obtain happiness at the gate of H ari 0 m an ,

The eight w atches Gé p al should be meditated upon

Nan ak h aving seen his sight is h appy
, , .

1
Th e ns e i s th ey must eat t h e fruits o f their o w n w o rks
se .

i s w o r ks done in a former li fe
2
. . .

3
WW must here be ta k en as t w o sep a r a te w o r d s : mt? egotism a n d qfi t min d to which the
‘ '

ver b fi l m } as predicate i s re ferred .

.i s as th e S pi rit o f the S upreme ; w h o h ave i dentified th emselves with the S upreme their spirit being
.
,

i d en ti cal w it h him .
28 8 REG GA U Rf , M A H . v .
, S A BD er r — ow n .
( C L X X VI C L X X VIII )
.
— .

On w ards he himself is ‘ in w hose po w er this pl ace ( = world ) is

,
.

The eight w atches ( my ) he art ( there fore ) mutters Hari .

( With ) honour he is approved o f w h o is intent o n the True on e

2
.
,

T o w hom he hi msel f gives the order .

H e himself is the l iberal donor he himself che rish es ( him ) ,

( Wh o ) con tinu ally takes to he art the n ame o f Ram .

Ga ufl ; maha l d V .

C VI . CL X X VI .

The perf ect true Guru becomes comp assion ate ( t o him )
In ( w hose ) he art Gop al al ways d w ells .

P a use .

Wh o pr aises obtai ns al w ays happiness

Ram , .

The omnipresent H ari the K ing besto w s mercy ( on him )

, ,
.

N an ak s ays : whose l o t is per f ect

( T o him ) the n ame o f Hari Hari ( gives ) a firm auspicious st ate

, .

G aur i maizal a V .

C VII . CL X X V II .

H av ing
un loosed hi s Dh oti 3 he spre ads it on the gro und .

L ike a donkey he appe ases his belly .

P a use .

W ithout ( religious ) orks fin al em an cip ation is n ot obta ined

w .

The boon of fin al em ancipation ( is obtain ed ) ( i f ) the n ame be me ditated upon ,

.

H e is pr actisin g w orship the til ak an d abl a ti o n

,
.

H aving draw n out a knif e he takes gi fts w ith his h ands .

4

H e re ads w ith his mo uth the V eda the s w eet w ord , ,

( But) is killi n g li vi ng cre atures an d h as n o regard for a living b ei n g

,
.

Nan ak s ays : on w hom he besto w s mercy

( Hi s) he art ( i s) pure ( an d ) medit ates o n Brahm .

Gaufl ; m ah a l d V .

CVIII . CL X X V I II .

P a use .

ste adil y in your house 0 ye beloved people o f H ari !

S it ,

By the tr ue Guru your affairs ar e adjusted .

The w icked intoxi cated o n es ar e killed by the L ord 5

.

The honour o f his people is preserved by the cre ator .

1
un f i t o
, nwa rd s hi m self is i e i n th e future w orl d Go d hi m s el f is d wells
he , . .
, .

2
31 8 m is here verb W
25 governs th e A ccus a t ive o r t h e L oc a ti ve .

T h e D h oti i s a pi e ce o f c loth w rap p ed roun d t h e w aist p assin g b et ween t h e l egs an d tucke d up b ehin d
3
, ,

suppl y in g t h e pl a c e o f o ur tro users .

He th r ea t en s w i t h h is d ra w n knife if gift s be n o t given t o h im

, .

are : mu n e t c
The W
fi
5
, .
 RE G GAU si , MA H v . .
, S AE D 0 1 x . ox .
( C L X X IX . CL X X X .
) 28 9

Al l emperors an d kings ar e subj ected ( by him to them )

W h o drink the gre at j uice of the nectar n ame - .

Free from fe ar adore the L ord

( Wh o ) j oins the society of the pious ( on him ) ( this ) gift is besto w ed
, .

( We) h ave fallen on the asylum o f the L ord the inw ard governor , .

Nan ak h as sei z ed the s anctu ary o f the L ord God .

Gaur i mahal d V .

C IX . CL X X IX .

Wh o imbued w ith love to H ari d o n o t burn i n fire

ar e .

Wh o ar e imbued w ith love to H ari them t h e M aya does not deceive

, .

Wh o ar e i m bued w ith love t o H ari ar e n o t drow ned i n w ater .

Wh o ar e imbued w ith love to H ari be ar good f ruit .

P ause .

( their ) fe ar is e ffaced by thy n ame

Al l .

Meeting w ith the assembly ( o f the pious ) they sin g the excellences of H ari , Hari .

A llnxiety o f him w h o is in love w ith Hari is extinguish ed

a , , .

H e i s enraptured w ith H ari w h o h as the m antra of the pious

, .

W h o i s in love w ith H ari is not afr aid of Yam a .

W h o is i n love w ith Hari his w ish is fulfilled

, .

W h o is in love w ith H ari him p ain does n o t befall

, .

W h o is in love w ith H ari is d aily aw ake .

W h o is in love w ith Hari d w ells e asily in his house .

W h o is i n love w ith H ari his doubt an d fe ar flee

, .

W h o is in love w ith H ari his w isdom becomes very gre at

, .

W h o is in love w i t h H ari his report is spotless

, .

Nan ak s ays : I devote mysel f t o those

By w hom my L ord is not f orgotten .

Gaur i ; m ahal d V .

CX . CL X X X .

Wh o m ake e fforts ( their ) minds become sed ate

,
.

W h o w alk o n the ro ad ( of Hari ) al l their troubles ar e gone,

.

W h o mutter the n ame in ( their ) he art j oy springs up

,
.

W ith ple asure the praises o f the supreme bliss Go d ) ar e sung .

P ause .

Happiness sets in w elfare enters their house

,
.

W h o fall in w ith the society o f the pious their c al amity i s gone , .

The eyes ar e purified w hen seeing ( h i s) sight .

Blessed is the forehe ad by touching the lotus feet - .

By
( ) the service o f Govind this body ( becomes ) f ruitf ul .

By the favour of the s aints the highest pl ace ( fin al em ancip ation ) is obtained .

H e himsel f gives a ssist ance t o his people .

Com fort i s obtained by clinging t o the feet of ( his ) servants .

(W )
‘
hen their o wn sel f is gone then they ar e restored
,
t o themselves .

m mf g m mm fi y th eir o w n indi vidual existence or perso n ality ; w hen this

1 -
31 th e is

gone ( blotted out) then they become

, , w h at they origi n a lly are i e sp i rit em an ated fro m the S up reme S i ri t
p , . .
.
290 Ri c en n u
i , MA H . v .
, S A BD er r — em u (C I X X X I — C L X X X III )
. . . .

They fall
the asylum of the depository of mercy
on .

When on e h as obtain ed w h at he is desiring

Then wh y should h e go t o seek it ?
They are firmly establi she d an d loc ated on a se at of enj oyment .

By the favour o f the Guru they are d w elling i n com fort .

Gaufl mahal d V .

CX I . CLX X X I .

( l ) Crores
. of immer sions an d ablutions ar e m a de .

L akhs A rbs an d K h ar bs o f gi f t s are given ( by hi m )

,

In whose mind the n ame of Hari dw c ll s .

1

P a use .

A ll purified by singing the excellences o f Grop al

ar e .

( Their ) sins are blotted o ut in the asylum o f th e comp assion ate pious peopl e .

M uch hi gh austerity is practised .

Many gains an d desires are obtained ( by h im )

( Wh o ) with ( his ) tongue prai ses the n ame of Hari Ha ri , .

The S mriti S hast ras an d Ved as decl are it

, , ,

( Th at) he know s devotion divine know ledge perf ecti on an d com fort
, , ,

W hose m ind by muttering the n ame is reconcile d w ith the Lord

, , .

O f un fathom able w isdom is H ari un attain able an d boundless , .

On Nan ak w h o is muttering the n ame ( w h o ) reflects on the n ame in ( his) he art

, , ,

T h e Lord besto w s mercy .

Ga ur i m ahal a V .

C X II . CL X X X II .

Remembering , remembe ri ng an d remembering ( the n ame ) com fort w as obtained ( by me ) .

The l ot us fee t ( of
-
H ari) ar e fixed i n ( my ) he a rt by the Gur u .

P ause .

Guru Govind , the per fect S upreme Br ahm

A doring h i m m y m ind ( bec ame ) sed ate .

D aily I mutter th e n ame of the Guru the Guru , .

Thereby all my aff airs w ere accomplished .

H avi ng seen ( his ) sight ( my ) mind became refreshed .

The blemishes of the different births w ere w iped aw ay .

Nan ak s ays : o f w h at should one be a frai d 0 brother ! ,

T h e honour o f his o wn serv ant he c auses t o be preserved .

Gaufl ; mahal d V .

C X I II . CL X X X III .

H isserv ant he himsel f assists

own .

H e cherish es him al w ays like father an d mother .

The arith met ical progression is this : 8 TH i s a h undred “

th ous and ; 3w is a hund red L ak hs ;
is a hundred 5ft ( n o w m is a hund red m a .
292 RAG en n u
i ,
MA H v . .
,
S A BD exv n . c xv m .
( eL xxxv n . C L X X X VIII ) .

O thou giver o f comfort to my soul an d life every moment I devote myself to thee O L ord ! , ,

Give a support to my h and 0 L ord draw me o ut f rom the pit O Gop al !

, , ,

I the v icious one h ave little w isdom thou ar t al w ays comp assion ate t o the poor
, , ,
.

H o w sh a ll I keep in mi n d thy co m f orts in w h at manner sh all I reflect ( o n them ) ? ,

I enter ( thy ) asylum O thou benevolent to thy serv ant 0 high un attain able an d boundless o n e !
, , ,

All the ( four desirable ) obj ects the eig h t per fections ( ar e contained ) in the highly delightful
,
1

n ame .

To w hom thou h ast become very kind 0 K é sav a those people sing the praises o f H ari , ,
.

Thou ar t ( my ) mother an d father ( my ) son an d rel ative thou ( ar t) the support o f my li fe

, ,
.

W h o in the soci ety o f the pious ( says ) Nan ak adores ( thee ) he crosses th e difli c ul t w orld ( o f existence)
, , , .

GA U Ri BA IRAGA N I .

A fter the tune of the B ab es -

me t re .
2

M ah a l a V .

Om! By the favour of the true Guru

C X VI I . CL X X X VI I .

P a use .

Is there an y on e wh o sings the beloved Ram

,

H e obtains all w elf are an d ( al l ) true h appiness .

The Bai r agi s w ander about explorin g every w ood , .

S ome r are one gives himself to de vout meditatio n on t h e O n e .

W h o h ave obtained H ari their l o t is gre at , .

Brahm a an d the other ( gods ) S an ak an d the others d esire ( him )

,
3
.

The J6gi s ascetics an d S iddh s long f or H ari

, .

Whose good l o t it is he sings the pr aises o f H ari

, .

By w ho m the asylum of H ari is n ot forgotten

( T h ose ) very f ortun ate s aints Har i un i tes ( w it h himsel f ) .

They ar e by no me ans ( subj ect ) to birth an d de ath .

Besto w mercy on me a n d j oin me O de arly beloved ! ,

H e a r my supplic ation 0 high an d boundless L ord

,

Nan ak i s aski ng the support o f ( th y ) n ame .

Ga ur i p
'
ur bi ; mah al d V .

O m ! by the f avour of the true Guru !

C X V III . CL X XX VIII .

P ause .

In w h at m anner sh all I meet w ith the L ord of my life 0 mother ,

I am w ithout beau ty w ithout intell igence an d strength I the stranger h ave come from
, ,

1
hes e ( four) d e sir abl e obj e cts ar e 11 3 2 3 TH W 3 $111
T , , .

2
i s s id t o b e a ch an t o r a ki n d o f m et re
a .

3
T he s e a re t h e f our m in d bo r n sons o f B r ahm a v iz : S an at k um ara S aua n d a S a n ak a an d
-
, .
, , S ah ata n a, wh o
decl ined t o create prog eny a n d rem ai n ed fo r ever boys Wilso n Vish nuP ur p 38 note 1 3 .
, . .
, .
 RA G GA U BI , MA H V . .
, S A DD C X IX .
— C X X I ( C L X X X IX
. .
— C X CI ) .
298

Ih ave no w e alth nor brilliancy o f youth ; effect thou the union o f the friendless one !
S e ar ching an d se arching about I bec ame a Bai ragani O L ord I am w andering about thirsting ,

after thy sight .

By the Lord wh o is comp assion ate an d mercif ul to the poor my burning he at was quenched
, , ,

( s ay s ) Nan ak .

Gaufl mah al a V .

CX I X . CL X X X IX .

P ause .

In my he ar t a desire h as sprung up to meet w ith th e L ord .

I cling to ( his ) feet I o ffer up supplication ,

May some s aint W hose lot is gre at meet ( w ith me ) !

, ,

I o ff er my mind ( to him ) as a s acrifice I put before him my property al l the opinions of my , ,

mind I give up .

Wh o lets me he ar the story about the L ord H ari him I follow day by day free from w orldly , ,

p assions .

W hen the sprouts o f w orks done in a former li fe become manifest the ( pious ) men the delight , ,

ful Bair agi s ar e m et w ith

,
.

D arkness is cle ared aw ay by meeting w ith Hari ; Nan ak ( s ays ) sh e w h o w as asleep through v arious ,

births becomes aw ake

,
.

Gaur i maka l d V .

CX X . CX C .

P ause .

Come forth 0 bird remembering th e p arty of H ari

, ,

H avi n g met w ith the pious sei z e th e asylum o f the omn ipresent Ram keep this j e w el in thy he art ! ,

A w ell o f error is covetousness a very pungent lotus j uice a noose of illusion ,

-
,
.

Govind the Guru of the w orld is cutting it asunder ; m ake hi s lotus f eet thy d w elling !
, ,
-

Besto w mercy ( on me ) O beloved L ord Govin d O protector o f the poor he ar ( my ) prayer

, , ,

T ake ( my ) h ands 0 L ord of Nan ak soul an d body are all thy property
, ,
.

Gaur i ma kal a V .

CX X I . C X CI .

P ause .

My mind is thinking about the sight of H ari .

Longi ng wi th desire ( after him ) I think ( o f him ) d ay an d night ; is there some s ai nt wh o w ill bring
him ne ar to me
I w ill do service to (his ) humble servant in m any w ays I will bestow favour on him ,
.

Al l com f orts w ere w eighed ( by me ) putting them on a p air o f sc ales w ithout the sight o f Har i they
ar e very few .

By the favour of t h e s ai nts the oce an o f ( al l ) excellences is pr aised he w h o w as going though ,

various births is c aused to return ( to Hari )

,
.

He h as j oy an d com fort w h o meets w ith H ari ; Nan ak ( says ) : his li fe is soon succe ssful an d fruitful
,
.

1
qfi
'

ui u the ide p rty

’

, s , a of H a ri the votaries of B ar i .
 RA G GA U R I , MA H V . .
,
S A BD C X X II C X X III ( C X C II C X C III )
. . . .

RA GU G AU R I P U R BI MA H A IA V
Om ! by the favour of the true Guru !

CX X II . C X CII .

P ause .

How sh all th e L ord be met w ith m y K ing Ram ? ,

Is there such a s aint a giver o f tr anqu il li ty an d happiness w h o w ill sho w me the w ay ?

, ,

Within the incomprehensible one c annot be apprehended w ithin ( like ) a film egotism is , ,

spre ad o ut .

I n the illusion of the M ay a the w hol e w orld i s asleep say h o w sh all this error p ass aw ay ? ,

In one society in on e house they d w ell together ; there i s n o w ord about the cre ator 0 brother ! ‘
, ,

W ithout the one thing ( i e the n ame ) the five ar e afflicted th at thing is in an imperceptible pl ace
. . .

W hose the h ouse is he h as put a lock on it the key ( to it) is entru sted to the Guru
, ,
.

( Though ) one m ay m ake m any cont rivances he does n ot get it W ithout t aking re fuge w ith the ,

t rue Guru .

Whose bonds are cut by the true Guru they devoutly medit ate on him ( in ) the society of the pious , .

Hav ing j oined the pious people a song o f j oy is sung ( by them ) there is n o ( longer ) a diff erence ,

( distinct existence ) o f B ari (from theirs ) ( s ays ) Nan ak O brother ! , ,

P ause .

( If ) one be united w ith

my K ing Ram the L ord in this w ay , ,

Tranquillity se ts in error flees in a moment light meeting w ith the fo untain of light is absorbed in it
, , , ,
.

S uch intim acy ( w ith h im ) w as obtained

an .

By the comp assion ate Bi t h ul a mercy w as bestow ed ( on me ) h e w as sho w n to m e by the true Gur u
2
,
.

W herever I see there ar t thou ; this assurance h as come to me

,
.

T o w hom sh all I m ake pr ayer an d petition as Raghu ( my ) K ing is he a ring ? , ,

3

( Wh en ) doubt is gone o ff an d the bonds are broken by the Guru then tranquill ity an d h appiness ,

are al w ays obt ained .

W h at he w as ( before ) th at he w ill become a gain ; w h at i s pointed out ( to him ) as ple asure ( or )

,

p ain 4

The p arts an d the whole universe st and in the O n e ; the Guru opening the screen sho w s this , ,
.

The n ame the depository of the nine tre asures i s in on e pl ace ( i e the he art) then to w hich place
, , . .
,

should on e go outside ( th e he art ) 5

From o n e ( piece o f ) gold m any ki nds ( o f o r n aments ) ar e made m any fashions ar e formed , .

Nan ak s ays error is destroyed by the Guru ; thus sub stance is un i ted w ith substance “ .

T he refer en ce is t o t h e ( fi v e) s en ses
l ik e t o a t tend t o th e cr ea t or
, who do n ot .

2
m fi g a s ai d t o b e a n am e of K rish n a i d en t i fi ed w i th t h e S u
, pr em e , .

an a n ce s t or o f R am h er e t a k en i n t h e s en s e o f a p atrony m ic a d e sce n d an t o f R agh u Ri m

3
.

1 11 fig} et c w h a t h e w as ( b e fo re ) t h at h e w ill be a g a in i e h e as a n em an a tio n o f t h e S uprem e

4 ‘

, .
, , . .
,

S pirit w ill be a g ai n u it ed w i th i t th en t here i s n o lo n g er an y pl ea s ure o r p ai n fo r h i m he w ill be free from

,
n ,

a l l o posi t e s
p .

m f g 6 “If ? 6 b ei n g a n alli tera tion to rh ym e W ith W W

o -
! ,

T h e ( em an a te d) in d ivi d ua l s ub st an ce i s r e un ite d with t h e p r i m a ry s ubstan ce ( t h e S uprem e )

6 -
.
29 6 c xxv m C X C VIII )
‘

RE G GA U R I , MA H v . .
,
S A E D c xxv n . .
( c xc v n . .

does the helpless im age of w ood ? he w h o m akes it pl ay kno w s it

IVh at ,
.

A s th at j uggler dresses it o ut such a decor ation it be ars ,

.

M any ch ambers of m any kinds w ere m ade ( by him ) he himsel f bec ame ( their ) keeper ,
.

In w hich m ansion b e put ( them ) do w n in such a one they rem ain ; w h at c an this helpless ,

( cr e ature ) d o ?
By w hom everything is m ade he know s it by w hom t h i s w hole cre ation is m ade , ,
.

N an ak s ays : the w isdom o f the boundless L ord ( is seen ) f rom his o w n w orks .

Gaur i mahal d V .

CX X VII . CXC V II .

P ause .

Give up , give up
the enj oy m ents o f the w orld !
, 0 m an ,
Thou c l in gest t o them like c attle th at ar e in the h abit of bre aking into a sow n fi el d .
2

Wh at thou considerest ( as being) of use t o thee th at does n o t go w ith thee o n e inch ,

.

Naked thou h ast come ( into the w orld ) n aked thou w ilt dep art ; thou r et urn est ag ai n an d ar t ,

devoured by de ath .
3

H aving seen the sport o f t h e s affr on flo w er an d be in g taken up w ith i t ( thy ) constant - “

,
0

thought ( is directed ) on those merriments .

8

The string ( o f l if e ) is w orn aw ay d ay an d night for ( thy ) soul t hou h ast done n o w ork w h atever ,
.

W orki ng an d w orking thus thou h ast become ol d by ( v ain ) stories thou art overcome ( thy )
, , ,

body is w asted .
7

A s soon as ( thou ar t ) ench an t ed by th at f ascin ating young w om an the May a) the desire for her ,

n o ( more ) diminishes a minute .

( W hen ) the w orld w as sho w n t o me as being in such a condition by the Guru then I fell on ,

( h i s) asylum giving up pri de

, .

The w ay of the L ord w as sho w n t o me by the s aint the Guru ) in Nan ak the sl ave the w orship , , ,

an d pra ise o f B ar i w as m ade firm .

Gaur i ; malzal d V
CX X VIII . C X CVIII .

P ause .

Wh o is ithout thee
,
w ,

O my beloved the support of my li fe ? ,

The st ate o f the he art even thou kno west th ou art my delightful fri end , .

A l l com forts I obt ained f rom thee O my un fathom able incomprehensible L ord ! , ,

x
1
T he 53 33 3141 are the c h amb ers an d cells of th e body , th e in ter n al a rrangement ; th e

m or m an sion o ut w a r d struc t ure

,
th e .

2
m en a m a sow n field an d g reen m i l
, . . s aid of cattl e th at bre ak into fields .

3
m un W d evoured , .

q g t h e s a ff ron flo wer yieldin g a h a d red dye soon w ea rs O H i s a n im a ge o f t h e w orl d

4
,
-
, , t h at , .

m t o b e ta ke n up w i th a thi n g an d m t o sw ell t o be pu ff ed up joi n e d t ogeth er

5
, , , , , in t h e
s ense t o be c omp l et el y t a k en up or a bsor bed in .

6
Ug
'

u
n (h r
'
e e P l ur al) l aught e r merrime n t a n ) cons t an t tho ught
, , .

7
m7; EM T ; W is here as in v 4 ( 313 2 !
,
W I ) m er el y an alli t er at io n t o m ak e up
.
: , th e r h yme wh ic h ,

he co ul d n ot fi nd .
 RA G GA uaI , MA H v . .
, S ABD C X X IX .
— C X X X I ( C X C IX
. .
—C CI .
) 29 7

Ic
n ot describe al l thy appe arances O depository of ( al l ) excellences 0 giver o f com fort !
a n
, ,

The u n att ai n able in apprehensible etern al L ord is kno wn fr om the perfect Guru
, , .

H aving cut o ff our error an d f e ar he m ade us ex c l usiv el y h i s ow n since our egotism w as

( )
destroyed ( by him ) .

The anxiety about regeneration an d de ath ce ased by the intervie w w ith the society of the pious .

Washing his feet I w ill serve t h e Guru a hu n dred thous and times I w ill devote myself to h i m , .

By w hose favour ( I ) h av e crossed the w ater of existence an d h ave met w ith th e beloved s ays ,

humble Nan ak }
Gaur i makal d V .

CX X IX . C X CI X .

P ause .

W h o sh ould grati fy thee except thou thysel f ?

H aving seen al l thy be auty ( I w as) enraptured (w ith it ) .

In he aven in the nether region in the w orld of de ath in

, , , al l regions ( thou ) th at , O n e, ar t

contained .

S aying : dre ad ful dre adf ul ! 2 they al l j oin their h ands ( in supplic ation ) all cry out f or help to thee
, , ,
3

O L ord of mercy
Thy n ame 0 L ord is purifying the sinners givi n g com fort pure an d cool
, , , , .

They h ave divine kno w ledge meditation an d gre atness ( s ays ) Nan ak the s aints co n verse w ith thee
, , .

Gaufi makal a V .

CX X X . CC .

P a seu .

J oin m e, O my de arly beloved !

O L ord th y w ork h as t aken e ffect
,
.

In m any regenerations in m any w ombs ( I ) w andered about ag ain an d again I incurred p ain
, , .

By t h y mercy I h ave got the hum an body give me thy sight 0 H ari ( my ) K ing ! , , ,

Th at h as been done w hich ple ased hi m it is not done by anybody else

, , .

By t y decree I w as deluded by error n ot bei n g a w ake I f ell asleep

h 4
, .

'

H e ar thou my prayer 0 beloved L ord of my life 0 comp assion ate one 0 repository of mercy
, , ,

K eep m e 0 my father an d L ord cherish the helpless one !

, ,

To w hom thou h ast show n thy sight he f ollo w s th e society of the pious ,
.

Besto w m ercy ( on me ) an d give ( me ) the dust of the s aints ! t h is h appiness Nanak des ires .

Gaur i mahal d V .

C XX XI . CC I .

P ause .

I s crifice to him hose support the n ame alone is

am a a ,
w 5
.

How gre at sh all be counted the gr andeur o f those men , wh o ar e imbued with love to the
S upreme Brahm ?

1
W WI fo r the s ake o f the rhyme fi rfi m n
:

fi le FI E g ( repeated) i s here an interjection o f a bh or r en c e or f l i g h t

2 ”
- .

3
i i i Supply m , : , t hey m ake .

4
fifi l signifies here I
’

mm } m the s ake o f the rhyme ”11 1133 i s otherwise adj ec tiv e, wh ic h is out o f que st io n h ere
5
, for . .
298 RA G GA U R I ,
MA H v . .
, S AE D C X X X II . c xx xm .
( CC II . CC III ) .

H appiness, tr anquillity an d j oy ar e w ith them n o other donor is equ al t o them ,

.

Those people ar e come t o rescue the w orld w h o ar e thirsty after ( their ) sight ,
.

W h o fall s on their asylu m he is s aved in the society of the s ain ts h is desir e is fulfilled
, ,
.

I
( ) f I fall do w n at their feet then I live in t h e society of t h e pious ( I am ) h appy , ,
.

0 L ord b e merci ful ( th at) my mind m ay become th e dust of ( thy ) devotees !

, ,

Dominion youth li fetime w h atever is seen in this w orld w astes away

, , , ,
.

T h e t re asure of th e n ame is al w ays young an d spotless this w e al th o f B ari Nan ak a cqui re d ,

.

Gaur i mahal a V .

CX X X II . CCII .

P ause .

The pr actice o f J6g I h ave he ard from the Guru .

T o me t h e true Guru h as sho w n it by ( his ) w ord ( instr uction ) .

The nine re gions o f the e arth ar e contained in this ( hum an ) body ; every moment I p ay
reverence ( to it ) .

Dedic ati on t o the Guru ( i s = sign ifi es) the ring in th e e ars the O n e formless is ( thereby ) firmly ,

established ( in the he art) .

( W hen ) the fi ve
‘
h aving met together h ave become sl aves an d are brought into the pow er o f
, ,

the O n e ( spirit )
W hen the ten averse ones ( h a v e be come ) obedient then the Jé gi s become pure 2
,
.

Wh o burns his doubt ( or e r ror ) an d applies ( its ) a shes ( t o his body ) he beholds th e w ay as on e 3 , .

Th at tranquill ity an d h appiness is enj oyed ( by him ) w hich is w ritten by the L ord o n ( his ) forehead ,
.

W here there is n o fe ar there he establishes his seat ( his ) li ttle blo w ing horn is the sound n ot
, ,

produced by blo w ing .

4

Reflection o n the S upreme he keeps as his st aff devotion t o the n a me ple ases his mind ,
.

If such a ve r y f ortun ate Jé gi be met w i th he cuts asunder the fetters of the M ay a ,

.

S ervice an d ador ation I per form t o th at person Nan ak licks his f eet ,
.

Gaur i m ah a l a
'

. V .

CX X X III . CCIII .

P ause .

H e arthe w onderful thi ngs of the n ame ! meditating ( o n them ) t ake them all 0 friend ! ,

T o w hom the medicine o f H ari is given by the Guru his mind ( becomes ) pur e , .

D arkn ess is e ffaced from th at body ( in w hich ) the l amp of the w ord of the Guru shines brightly , .

H i s net o f error is cut a sunder w h o h as faith in the society of the pious , .

T ake a fe r ry boat the w ater of existence is deep an d difficult the bo at is the society of
-
, ,

the pio us .

The five are : m € ,

11 , e tc .

m f m
l

}
2
, fe m . o , w hich h as h ere
origi n al m ean in g : a v er se r el uc t a n t ( S an sk rfl t fi l fi )i ts , . .

T h e t e ar e th e t en s en s es v iz : fi v e fi Tfi fi f fl an d fi v e m
n , afi a i e h ear in g feel i n g s eein g tas t in g an d
.
, . .
, , , ,

sm elli g an d t h e fi v e o r g an s o f a c tion t h e voi ce t h e h a n d s t h e feet t h e a n us an d pa rt s o f gener a tion

n , , , , .

3
T h e w h ole i s a fi g ur e T h e sen s e i s : h e w h o cl ea r s aw ay h is d oubt ( i e hi s d ua lity) w ill see that t h e
. . .
, ,

w ay i s o n e w h at eve r m a y b e t h e out w a rd di ff e r en ce s o f t h e s ec t s
, .

4
T h e J agi s w ear a l i t tl e blo w i n g h orn w hich th ey so un d b efore e ating an d d r i n ki n g an d every

religious o bservance in tok en o f adoration, .

3 00 RA G GA U R I , MA H v . .
, S A BD c xxxv r — c xxxv m . .
( c cv r — c cv111
. .
)

May on ( me ) , the destitu t e of virtues ,

f avour be besto w ed , 0 Har i ! my mi nd silently repe ats
( thy ) n a me .

By the fa vour of the s aints Nanak meets w ith H ari , ( hi s) mi nd an d body become cool an d s atiated .

E asily (I am ) absorbed in God .

The true Guru h as become a merciful Go d to me .

Having cut ( my ) rope he m ade m e his servant ( o n a ccoun t of my ) service t o the s aints .

( W hen ) I bec ame a w orshi pper o f the O n e n ame the w onder ful ( S upreme ) w as sho w n to me ,

by the Guru .

Al l bec ame m ani fest an d cle ar ( to me ) by the Gur u di vine kno w ledge w as unfolded to ,

( my ) mind .

The nect ar o f the n ame w as drunk ( my ) he art bec ame s atiated other fe ar was stopped
, ,
.

By obey ing ( h is) order all comf orts w ere obtained the pl ace o f p ain w as removed ‘ ,
.

When the L ord Go d became ver y favo ur ably di sposed ( to w ards me ) the al l blissful one w as show n ,
-

( to me ) .

Nothing is coming nothi ng is going al l is m ade a sport by H ari the king

, ,
.

N anak s ays : un attain able un attain able is the L ord ; the n ame o f Ha ri is the support of ( h i s)
,

devotees .

Gaur i makal a V .

C XXX VII . C C V II .

P ause .

The s anctu ary of the S upreme Brahm the omnipresent L ord should be l aid hold of O my mind !
, , ,

By w ho m t h e universe an d ( i t s) parts ar e supported the name of th at H ari sho ul d be mutte red ,

Give up the thoughts o f ( your o wn ) minds 0 ye people o f H ar i by underst anding ( his ) order , ,

comfort is obtained .

VVb at t h e L ord does th at consider as good in ple asure an d p ain he should be medit ated upon
, ,

Crore s of sinners ar e sa ved by the cre ator in a moment w ithout an y delay intervening ,
.

The p ain an d troubles of the poor the L ord is destroying ; w hom he ple ases him b e cherishes 0 , ,

friends !
The soul an d lif e o f all he cherishes li ke mother an d father he is the oce an of comf ort , ,

0 f riends !
That cre ator gives w ithout expe ri encing an y deficiency the oce an rem ains ( alw ays ) full 0 friends ! , ,

The beggar ( Nan ak ) asks for thy n ame 0 L ord ; in everybody th at ( L ord ) ( is existing ) , ,

0 f r iends !
Nan ak the sl ave is in hi s asylum by w hom no one is dis appointed 0 fr iends
, ,

RA GU GA U RI P nRB I ; M AH A L A V
Om by the favour of the tr ue Gu ru
C X X X V III CC VIII . .

P ause .

Do n o t f orget at an y time Hari H ari in ( thy ) min d ,

Here an d there b e is the giver of al l com forts al l bodies he supports , .

1
T he s ens e is : no more a pla ce for p a in w a s left .
 RA G GA U R I , MAH v . .
, S ABD c xxxrx C X L . .
(0 0 1 x . c ox .
) 3 01

In a moment he cuts off the gre at troubles ( o f him wh o ) repe ats his n ame w ith ( his ) tongue , .

Coolness tranquill ity an d comfort ( are obtained ) in the asylum of Hari the burning fire he quenches
, ,
.

From the c avity of the w omb n d) from hell he protects he brings across the w ater of
(a ,

existence .

Wh o w orships the lotus feet in his mind his fe ar of Y am a he takes aw ay

-
,
.

The omnipresent S upreme Brahm the L ord is high un att ain able an d boun dless
, , ,
.

Wh o is singing his excell ences an d meditating on the oce an of comfort he does not lose in gambling ,

his life .

In lust w rath covetousness an d spiritu al blindness my mind is absorbed O thou w h o art

, , ,

generous to the vicious

May in mercy th y o w n n ame be given to me Nan ak ( will be ) al ways devoted ( to thee ) .

RA GU G AURI éE TI ; M A HA L A V

Om by the favour of the true Guru

CX X X IX . CCI X .

P ause .

There is no h appiness 0 brother w ithout devotion to Ha ri

, ,
.

Thou ov erc om est regen eration by muttering one moment this priceless j e wel ( of the n ame ) in
l

O
society of the pious .

Having le f t behind son w e alth w i fe sports

, , , ,

E nj oyments m any people h ave dep arted

,
.

H aving le ft behind horses eleph ants the merriments o f do m inion

, ,

The fool h as gone off n aked .

The body th at is blooming w ith s andal per fume

,
-

That body is mixed w ith dust .

Deluded by spiritual blindness he thinks th at be ( Go d ) is far o ff .

N an ak s ays : he is always in the presence .

Gaur i makal a V .

CX L . C OX .

P ause .

K eep in ( thy ) mind the n ame o f Hari fo r the s ake of crossing the oce an
”
The Guru is the bo at th at is c arryin g ( thee ) across the waves of doubt ( of this ) World .

The blackness of the K ali yug is d ark - .

By the Guru the l amp of divine kno wledge is kindle d .

V ery much poison of w orldly obj ects is laid out .

Those are s aved w h o continu ally mutter the excellences of Hari .

Wh o is intoxic ated w ith the M ay a is gone to sleep ,

.

W o
h meets w ith the G uru his error
,
an d f e ar are done aw ay .

Nan ak s ays : ( by w hom ) the O n e is me ditated upon

He sees ( him ) in everybody .

W to overcome regener ation to o btain final em ancip ation .

T h e co n struction o f this line is very difli c ul t b ut n o d o ubt the w ord s cohere h ave given them
2 , , as we

the tran slation .

3 02 RAG GA uRi ,
MA H v . .
, S A BD C X L I .
_
c III .
( CC X I — CC X III
.
) .

Thou alone ar t our court ( o f j ustice ) .

Th y se rv ice is rel i ance on the Guru .

B y m any contr ivances it w as not obtained ‘ .

By the Gu r u it was brought into servitude .

The five qu ar relsome ones w ere destroyed .

By the mercy of the Guru ( their) h o st w as subdued .

P resents ( an d ) w ages ( ar e obta i n ed f ro m ) t h e O n e n a me .

H app i ness tranquil l ity j oy an d rest

, ,
.

The servants o f the L ord ar e w orthy .

Nan ak ( s ays ) thei r faces are b r ight .

The shelter of the soul is the name .

The others w h o do w h at they ought n ot t o do in them is the fe ar o f Ya m a

, ,
2
.

By another effort b e is n o t obtained .

I n consequence of a gre at l ot Ha ri i s meditated upon .

( The more ) they contempl ate ( him ) the less he ( Hari ) i s know n ,
.

F urther on ( i n the other w orld ) they are n o t reg a rded a bit .

3

Wh o ar e doing ( r el igious ) w orks in sel f conceit -

They ar e erecting a house of s and in w ater .

( O n w hom ) t h e merc iful L ord besto w s mercy

H e obtains the n ame ( says ) N an ak in the society o f the pious
, ,
.

Gazer ? mah a l a V .

CXL I II . CC X III .

P ause .

I d evote myse l f I devote myself a hundr ed thous an d times

,
.

The n ame y ea the n ame o f the L ord is the suppor t of my soul

, ,
.

Thou alone c ausest ( every ) w ork t o be done .

E ven thou ar t the support o f the liv ing cre atures .

Thou O L ord ar t the o wner o f sovereignty an d youth

, ,
.

1
subject what ever is m en tione d an d from the following verse the I}? c an h ar dly be tak en up as t h e
No ,

subj ect \Ve suppos e t h erefore th a t 3125 the min d m ay be in t e n d ed as th e subject

.
, , , , .

2
m c a n h er e n o t be referr ed t o t h e S uprem e as els e w h ere w h e re i t s t ands f o r m m th e
, , ,

c au se of c a u ses ; i t mus t here be r ea d : k ar n a k ar av an a do i n g w h a t t h ey ou g h t n o t t o d o an d n o t d oi ng w h a t

,

t h ey ou g h t t o d o ( literally : d oing an d n o t d oi n g ) p er ver se W b ei n g a n a dj ec t ive form a tio n

W , ,

do i ng .S imil a rly in M a rathi : W o r ai

m T h e S ikhs d o n o t k n o w wh at t o m ake o f it
. .

3
ma i l f3 ? 3 “Tm th ese words mus t r efer to those wh o con template Ha ri o n their o wn acco unt
, , ,

w ithout h av i n g a 3 3 3 1 31 fo r i t
’
.
 30 4 RE G GA U si , MA H v . .
, S A BD C X L VII C X L VIII ( CC X VII CC X VIII )
. . . .

Then thou w il t
practi se by the favour of the Guru the most excell ent devotion .

Wh o h as t asted the juice of B ar i

That m an s th irst is quenched
’
.

Wh o h as obtained H ari the abode of rest ,

H e does never again run about ( in tran smi grati on ) .

To w hom by the Guru the n ame of H ari Hari is given ,

Hi s fe ar ( s ays ) Nan ak i s gone

, ,
.

Gaur i mahal d V
C X L V II . CC X V II .

P ause .

Wh o f orgets the n ame of B ar i h e h as p ain , .

W h o j oining the assembly of the pious pr aise H ari they

, , , are w eighty wi th virtues .

In w hich di ciple s he art there is ( true ) w isdom

s
’

In his h an ds ar e the n ine tre asures ( an d) perf ection .

Wh o kno w s Hari th e L ord ( an d ) m aster :

In his ( house ) there is n o deficiency w h atever .

( By w hom ) the cre ator is know n

He enj oys al l co mf orts an d ple asures .

In w hose house the w e alth o f B ar i abides

From ' them pain flees s ays Nan ak ,
.

Gaur i mahal d V .

C X L V III . CC X V III .

P ause .

'

( Thy ) pride ( is ) gre at ( th y ) root ( origin ) ( is ) this much

i
, .

( Tho ar t ) not abidi n g as much as thy ) eff or t

( ( y )
m a b
, e
3
.

What is f orbidden by the V eda ( an d ) the s aints to th at ( thou ar t) inclined ‘ 0 friend ’ , ,

Af ter the m anner o f h az ard gambling ‘ the senses subd ue an d overcome thee 5
( )
-
.

By love to the lotus feet ( o f him w h o is) taking aw ay an d supplying all ( I became )
-

disen cumbered .
6

Nan ak is rescued by the society of th e pious the abode of mercy w as given to me " .

fi fi t i s h ere t h e A bl ative : fr om t heir society from .

2
a s roo
, t o ri g in , T h e sense i s : thou h ast n o r ea so n t o be so prou d t h root or origin is this much
.
y
(i e th e m
,

. . o r sp e rm a g eni t ale) .

3
arq 11 ) i s here subs t an t i v e : t en a ci ty e ff o r t
3 Thou m ust go in S p ite o f a ll th y eff orts , .
, .

4
m n 6 bein g m erely an allitera tio n
, .

W 3 8 f t h e vicis sit ud es o f gambl ing m

5 “

,
g ambling w ith altern at e los s an d
. .

vict o ry h a z ard g ambling fi ffi fi l fii

: - . : .

fa3 2§ = f3 ? !
8
vac an t d isencumbered ( from pride t h e d ominion of the se n ses etc 11 6 being
, , , .

a n all ite r at ion N o subjec t 1 5 hin t ed at as usu al but from t h e follo wing line I m ust be supplied
'

.
“ ”
, , .

Q 3 2; = Q 3 1 given T h e S ikhs totally misund erstan d these lines an d could n o t give me an y s ensible
7
, .

expl a na tion .
 RA G GAU BI , MAH V . .
, S A RD . C X L IX .
— C L II .
( c c xrx — c c xxn )
. .
305

I am the sl ave o f the L ord .

The gift of the Lord ( is my ) food .

S uch is my L ord 0 f riend ! ,

In a moment he prep ares ( it) .

I do w orks if I ple ase ( my ) Lord

, .

I sing the actions an d excellences of ( my ) L ord .

I fel l on th e a sylum of the V az i rs 1 of ( my ) L ord .

S eeing them my mind ( bec ame ) sedate .

The One is ( my ) prop the One ( m y ) support , .

H umble Nan ak is eng aged in th e business o f ( his ) Lord .

Gaur i muh al d V .

CL . CC X X .

P ause .

Is there such a one w h o bre aks ( hi s) egot ism

,

( W h o ) f rom this s w eet one 2

keeps back hi s mind
Man h as become dest itute of divine kno w ledge ; w h at is not 3 th at he desires , .

The ni ght is d ark an d bl ack wh at is the me ans by w hich daw n of d ay ( m ay be

, ,

Wandering an d w andering about he ( = m an ) is w orn out w ith fatigue in m any ways h e ,

seeks ( it) 5.

Nan ak s ays : ( o n w hom ) the mercy of the a ssembly of the s ai nts is besto w ed he gets the ,

tre asure.

Gaur i mafi ul d V .

CLI . CC X X I .

P ause .

O ( th ou ) gem granting al l desires f ull of comp assion !

, ,

( I ) 0 S upreme Brahm comp assion ate to the poor by remembering whom

.
, , al l comfor ts are obtai ned !
O timeless S upreme S pirit of unfathom able wisdom
By he aring ( thy ) glory crores of sins are blotted out .

O Lord abode o f mercy besto w mercy ( on me )

, ,
.

( Th at) Nan ak m ay take the n ame of H ari Hari ! ,

Gauri p ur ee; muh al d V .

CL I I . C C XX II .

P a use .

O my mind i n th e asylum of the Lord com forts ar e obt ained

,
.

That day p asses uselessly in which he is forgotten w h o gives comfort to the soul
, ,
.

1
t
. e. s a ints
th e .

2
m 31m 3 i e mm the Maya which i s described
, . .
, , as a ttra cti ve an d sw eet .

i a the Maya w hich i s not in reality but only a n illusion

3
. . , , .

a? sf daw n o f d ay the ver b i s l e ft out

. . .

i s th e m
. . t h e tre a sure
, t h e na me ) .
306 RAG GA uai ,
MA H v . .
, SAE D C L III C L IV ( CC X X III CC X X IV )
. . . .

Thou ar t come ( into this w orld ) as a guest of one night an d ext en dest thy hope ( o f life )
to m any ages .

H o use p al ace property ( w h atever) i s seen th at is like the sh a de o f a tree

, , , ,
.

My body al l my w e alth my g arden an d al l my property p ass aw ay

, ,
.

( If ) the L ord th e giver ( o f them ) be forgotten they become in a moment the property of an other
, , ,
.

H e puts o n ( cle an ) vestm ents he m akes ablutions he applies s andal perf ume ( t o his body ) , ,
- .

The fearless f ormless ( S upr eme ) is n o t kno w n ( by him ) like eleph ants w hich h ave been b athed ‘
, , , .

W hen he ( i e H ari ) b ecomes merciful ( to an y ) he j oi n s the true Guru ( to him ) al l comforts

. .
, ,

( are ob tained ) by the n ame of H ari .

H e becom es rele as ed ( his ) fetters ar e opened by the Guru humble Nan ak ( s ays) : he sings the
, ,

excellences o f Hari .

Ga ur i p ur bi maha l d V .

C L III . CC X X III .

P ause .

O my min d it should al w ays be s aid O Guru Guru Guru

, , ,

The ( hum an ) birth the gem is m ade fruitful by the Guru I s acrifice mysel f for a meeting
, , ,

( w ith him ) .

E s m any bre aths an d morsels a m an is t aking so m any ( times ) the excellences ( o f Hari ) ,

should be sung .

When one s o w n tru e Guru beco m es merci ful then this w isdom an d understanding are obtained
’
,
.

O my mind by t aking the n ame thou ar t rele ased from the bonds o f Yam a al l comforts
, ,

o f comf orts are obt ain ed

( th ereby ) .

S erve the L ord the true Guru the don or ! the fruit th at is desired by the mind comes to h and
, , , ,
.

The n ame is friend acqu aintance an d son ; the cre ator 0 he art goes w ith thee
, , , .

S erve thy o w n true Guru by the Guru it ( i e th e n ame ) is put into ( thy ) l ap
,
. . .
2

By the L ord the merciful Guru mercy w as bestow ed ( on me ) all ( my ) c ares w ere extin guished
, , ,

( thereby ) .

N an ak obtained h appiness by pr aising H ari al l troubles w ere done aw ay ,

.

RA GU G AU R I ; MA HA L A V .

Om ! by the f avour of the true Guru

CL IV . CC X X I V
P ause .

Th e thirst o f some r are on e is quench d e .

3

Crores ( o f R upees ) they a mass hundred thous and crores ( but) their mind they do not check , ,
.

F or m ore an d more ( money ) they struggle .

( Though ) they h ave be auti ful w omen o f m any kin ds ( th ey ar e) p assion ate after another s wife
’
.
,

Good an d bad a re n o t know n ( t o them ) .

1
s en te ce is n ot compl ete supply : h e sullies hi m self o r w allo w s i n th e dust l ike elepha n ts w h ic h
T he n , ,

h a e been bath ed
v .

“1 % U 3 ( p allai) t h e border o f a g ar m ent in which mon ey i s boun d up

z
.
, ,

4
wry — 5% m ay a lso be th e sin gul a r .
3 08 RAG GA U nI , MA H v . .
, S A BD C L VIII C L IX . .
( CC X X VIII . c c xxrx .
)

Tranquil li ty amusement j oy ( an d) sport ( accrued to me ) the wanderings ( in trans migration )

, , ,

w ere stopped union ( w ith the S upreme ) w as brought about

,
.

‘
Nan ak ( s ays ) by me ans of the w ord of the Guru he w as obtained .

RA GU G A U R I MA L V A ; MA HA L A V
Om ! by the f avour of the true Guru !

C L V III CCXXV III . .

P ause .

T ake the n ame of H ari 0 friend t ake it ! , ,

Bef ore ( thee ) is a diffi cult terrible ro ad ,

.

S erve al w ays the s erv ant o f the serv ants de ath i s d w elli n g w ith thee ,
2
.

S erve thou the pious 0 m an an d the net of Y am a w ill be cut off, ,

.

Burn t o fferings s acrifices an d pil grim ages t o holy w atering places ar e m ade but in their heart
-
, ,

they are bound by the p assion of egotism .

H aving enj oyed both hell an d he aven they w ill a g ain an d ag ain be born .

In the city of S hiva in the city o f Brahm a an d I ndra there i s n o immovable d w elling
,
.
3

W ithout the service of B ar i there i s ( n o lasting ) h appiness 0 m an t h e S ei kat s come an d go , , .

A s I w as inst ructed by the Guru so I h ave procl aimed it ,

.

N an ak s ays : he ar 0 my he art h avin g pr aised ( Hari ) there w ill be em an cip ation

, , .

RA GU G A U RI MA L A ; M A H AL A v

() m ! by t h e favour o f the true Guru !

CL IX . CC X X IX .

P ause .

By me chi ld like in underst anding h appiness w as obtain ed 0 friend !

,
-
, ,

Jo y ( an d ) grief li fe 4 an d de ath p ain an d ple asure ar e the s ame i n ( my ) min d af ter h av in g met with
, , ,

the Guru .

A s long as I meditate an d reflect o n somethi n g I am f ull of p ain ,

.
6

( B ut ) w hen the merci f ul per fect G uru is met w ith then there i j y
s o,
an d tranquillity
“
,
.

A s m any clevernesses an d w orks as I pr actised so m any fetters fell upon m e ,

.

( B ut ) w hen the holy m an the Guru ) put h i s h and on my f orehe ad then w e bec ame em ancip ated ,
.

A s long as I w as s ay ing : mine mine so lo n g I w as encomp assed by poison “ ”

.
, ,

W hen m y mind body an d intellect w ere offered up t o the L ord then w e slept in tr anquill ity
, ,
.

13 S ansk RTE ubj ect i s Ha ri o r i t m ay be referred t o m 335 etc

1
1 13 —
I ; th e . s , , .

3 3 3 313 3 t h e s er an t o f t h e s erva n t s i e t h e G uru w h o i s o t herw ise c alle d th e 751 10 ;

2
an d
v

, , . .
,

i n t h e n ext line t h e m ( si n g )
T h e s en s e i s : tho se w h o by re a son o f th eir w o r k a r e tra n s fe r re d t o th es e happy pl ac es must leave them
3
, ,

a g ai n a f t er t h eir m eri t s a r e exh austed

,
.

m fi m The co m m o n m eaning o f 01 % i s d mag e h ur t etc w hich will n o t suit t h e context

. a , , .
,

h er e a s o e w ord is i n co n t ra posit io t o th e other ; 3 1 % m ust there fo r e be t h e a n tithesis o f fm

‘

, n n B ut w e .

a r e n o t a bl e t o d ete c t a y s u itable e tym ology an d m us t leave i t doub tful

n .

5 -
g el 2; m i s t h e F orm a t P lur al 3 3 U q w e ar e f u ll o f ‘

.
, ,

6
m m fo r th e s ak e o f t he rhyme, .
 RAG GA U sI , MAH v . .
, S AE D C L X . CL X I .
( c c xxx . c c xxxr ) .
3 09

long as I c a rried about ( my ) load, I w as mul cte d ‘

So .

When h avi ng thro w n dow n the load th e perfect Guru met ( with me ) then , Nanak became fearl ess a.

(?auz i mal d'

mafi al d V .

C LX . CC XXX .

P ause .

g ave up I gave up 0 de ar ( my ow n ) suppositions

I , , , .

I g ave ( th em ) up I g ave ( them ) up af ter h a vi ng met wi th the Guru

, .

Al l com forts j oys w elfare an d enj oyment s ( are obt ained ) by obeyin g the c omm and o f d ind ‘
, , .

Dignity an d conceit both c am e to an end aft er h aving thro wn ( my ) head before the feet of
,

the Guru .

Ther e is prosperity an d j oy n o c al amity nor p ain ( wh en ) love to the Lord h as spru n g up

, , .

The One Lord is the d well ing pl ace ( an d ) the inh abit ant ( of it) th e ple asure gr ound an d th e
-
,
-

spectator ( of it ) !
The s aints h ave become fe arless their apprehension is put do wn by the al l fi lli n g al l pervading 5
,
-
,
-

( S upreme ) .

Wh atever is done by th e c ause of c auses 6 they do not t ake o ffence at it i n their mind
'

.
,

In th e so ci et y of th e pious ( their ) sleepi ng mind is aw akened by the favour of th e s aints .

H umble Nan ak h as fall en on th y pro tection he h as come to ( thy ) a sylum , .

( By ) love to the name tran qui lli ty an d pleasures are enj oyed pain does not again befall ( one ) ,
.

Gaura mal d mah al d V

CL X I CC X X X I
’

. .

P ause .

ruby w as obtai ned a gem w as obt ained in ( my ) min d

A ,
.

( My ) body bec ame cool ( my) mind became c ool by the w ord of the t r ue Guru I was absorbed
, ,

( in H ari ) .

( l ( My ) hunger cea sed all ( my ) thirst w as q uenched al l anxiety w as f orgotten

, ,
.

( When ) the perf ect G uru pl aced his h and on ( my ) forehe ad ( my ) m i nd w as overco me ( an d ) ,

all the w orld

’
.

( We) ar e perfe c tly sati ated within ( our) he art w e are n ow set free from stagger ing ,
.

A n inexh austible tre asu ry w as given ( us ) by the true Guru there is no deficiency o f di amonds ,

an d pe arls
8
.

H e ar th e One is w onderful 0 brother ! such an understanding is taught by th e Guru

, ,
.

Wh en th e Lord after h avi ng removed the s c reen is met wi th then subservi ence to others
, , ,

is forgotten .

I litera ll y : to p ay in a fine
3 175 .

fi n $ 33 6 for th e s ake of the rhyme

a
.
,

W NW fo r the sake of the rhyme

@
s
.
:

W 1 12 1 S ansk g i a b eing a me aningless alliter a tion.

.

5
W W W ( Hai r) fo r th e s a ke o f t h e rhyme ,
.

m :3 3 3 1 3 85 the prod u cer o f the c ause or c ause of c auses th e prim ary c ause
, ,

c ip l e of wha te ver is d one .

7
instea d o f 31 m al l entire , .

pe arl S a nsk K ai , . .
31 0 Ri c GA U RI, MA H V . .
,
S AE D C L X II C L X IV .
— .
(c oxxxn .
— c xx1 v .
)

Thi s w onder c annot be told he kno w s it by w hom it is tasted

, ,
.

N an ak s ays : the True one i s m anif ested ( to him) into ( w hose ) he art the tre asure is put , by
the Gur u .

Gaur i md l d mah al d V .

C L X II . CC X X X II .

P ause .

They are s aved w h o ar e in the asylum of Ram the ki n g

, ,
.

Al l ( other ) people are in the circle of the M ay a ( an d ) are falling ag ain an d ag ain on the e arth ‘ .

The gre at men h avin g reflected on the S h astras the S m riti an d the V éd a h ave s aid thus
, , ,

W ithout ado r ing H ari there is no s alvation no one obta ined h appiness , .

( I f ) the w ealth o f the thr ee w orlds be am as sed the impulse o f the p assions is not extinguish ed , .

H ow sh all one get stability ( in rectitude ) w ithout de v otion to H ari ? he is returni ng ( into
existence ) immedi a tely .
2

Though he practises m any he art ench anting sports his lust is not s ati ated
-
, .

It is bur nin g an d burni ng an d never extinguished all ( sports ) w i thout the n ame are useless , .

Mutter the n ame of H ari O my fr iend this is the f ull pith of happiness
, , .

The society of the pious removes regeneration an d de ath Nan ak is the dust of the pious , .

Gaur i md l d mahal d V .

C L XIII . CC X X X III .

P ause .

May one explain ( to me ) this arrangement ( o f the w orld ) ?

an y

I f he become the cre ator he m ay give inf orm ation

,
.

By thi s ignorant one nothing is w rought not an y silent repetition ( o f the n ame ) nor austerity
,

is practised .

In the ten di rections o f the globe he m akes w ander his mind by doing w h at w ork is it bound ? ,

He is the L ord o f the mind body property an d l and I a m his an d h e i s mine

, , , .

By re ason o f error an d sp i ritu al blindne ss nothin g is understood these h ave fallen ( like ) ropes ,

on the feet .

Then w h at w ork c an th is on e undert ake w hen thi s one is nothing

3
,

W hen the O n e w h o is void

,
o f all d a rkness an d f orml ess the L o rd himse l f is doing everything 4
, , .

Hi s own w orks he him self kno w s by w hom this arrangement ( o f the w orld ) is m ade
, .

Nan ak s ays : he himsel f is the cre ator by the true Guru th e error is stopped , .

Gaur i md l d maha l d V .

C L X IV . CC X XX IV .

P ause .

W ithout H ar i other w orks ar e useless .

( By w hom ) mutte ri n g repe ti tions austerities , , control of th e passions an d religious w orks are

practised they
,
ar e robbed on this side .
‘
5

By regen era t ion .

2
in ? i n ? uni s uni s first of al l immediately
, , .

$ 1 this on e t e m a n
3
, , . . .

4
Hum an li bert y ( ar bitrium liber um ) i s totally d e n ied h ere as i n every p anthei stical sy stem , .

T h e sen se i s : they ar e strip p ed o f t h e m erits o f their w ork s in thi s w orld ; th ey d o not g o with them
5
.
31 2 RAG GA U nI , MA H v . .
, S AE D C L X VII . C L X V III .
( CC X X X VII . CC X X X VIII )
.

W h o h as obt ained the n ame is w e althy O de ar ,

he ,

Wh o h as medi tated on the L ord ( he becomes ) lustrous O de ar ! , ,

W h o ( h as obt ained ) the society of the pious all hi s actions ar e good , ,

0 d c ar
H e is e asily absorbed O de ar ! ,

Ga ur i mdflz mahal d V .

C L X V II . CCX X X VII .

Come 0 my beloved Ram

,

N ight an d d ay at ever y bre ath I think o f thee O de ar !

, ,

Give ( me ) in f orm ati on 0 holy one ( th at) I m ay fall at ( thy ) feet 0 de ar !

, , ,

W ithout thee h ow sh all one be s aved 0 de ar ! ,

In thy society I am h appy 0 de ar ! ,

In ( every ) tree an d grass in the three w orlds ( thou ) the highest bliss an d j oy ( ar t contained)
, , ,
.

The bed is be autif ul this mind ( o f mi ne ) is openi ng ( to thee ) O de ar !

, ,

H a ving seen ( thy ) sight this h appiness is obtained 0 de ar ! ,

Washing ( thy ) feet I w ill al w ays serve thee O de ar ! ,

W orshi p adoration an d hom age I w il l o ff er to thee !

,

( H avi ng become ) the slave o f sl aves I w ill mutter ( thy ) n ame 0 de ar ! ,

S upplic ation I w il l o ff er to ( thee ) the L ord 0 de ar , ,

My w ish is f ulfill ed my mind an d body are green

,
h appy ) 0 de ar ! ,

S eeing ( thy ) sight all ( my ) p a in is t aken off 0 de ar ,

Muttering continu all y the n ame of H ari H ari I h ave crossed over 0 de ar ! , , ,

This imperi shable h appiness is retained by Nan ak O de ar ! ,

Gaur i m dj /z ; makal d V .

CL XV III CCXXXV III . .

H e ar ,he ar my s w eethe art my friend de ar to ( my ) he art 0 de ar !

, ,

My he art an d body are thine this li fe also I devote t o thee O de ar !

, ,

May the L ord the support o f ( my ) li fe not be forgotten ( by me ) O de ar !

, , ,

I am alw ays in thy asylum O dear ,

May I obt ain by the favour of the Guru th at H ari H ari O de ar , ,

Whom h aving found my he ar t li ves 0 de ar brother ! ,

Al l is the L ord s ( all ) pl a ces ar e the L ord s

’ ’
.
,

I al w ays devote myself to the L ord 0 de ar ! ,

Thi s tre asure he minds att entively w hose l ot is gre at 0 de ar ! , ,

O n the one pure n ame he bestow s his devout medit ation 0 de ar ! ,

( By w hom ) the pe rf ect Guru is obt ained all hi s troubles are eflac ed O de ar
'

, ,

The eight w atches the excellences ( of H ari ) are sung ( by hi m ) 0 de ar ,

A choice je w el is thy n ame 0 Han

'

Thou ar t the true w holesale merch ant thy devotees ar e ( thy) retai l de alers O
-
,
-
,

The w e alth of H ari is t rue c apital stock an d tr affic 0 de ar ! ,

H umble N an ak al ways devotes himsel f ( to it) 0 de ar ! ,

L it er ally : w il l be sa id .
 RA G GAU R I , MA H V . .
, S A BD C L X IX .
— C L X X I (CC X X X IX . .
— CC X L I )
.
31 3

RAGU G A UBI Mi i H ; MAHA L A v .

Om ! by the fa vour of the true Guru !

dL X I X . c c x xxrx .

P a use .

Thou art the obj ect of my high regard , O creator thou ar t th e obj ect of m y high reg ard , .

By thy po w er I d well in comfort the true w o r d ( o f the Guru ) is the obj ect o f my attention
, .

A ll thin gs ar e kno w n ( by those wh o ) w hen h aving he ard ar e sile n t

, , , .

U nderst an ding is never obtained by those w h o are deluded by the M ay a .

The hints an d signs which they give ar e seen by their eyes 1

, , .

He w h o is f ooli sh an d covetous does not at al l h ear w h at is s aid

, .

Wh at sh al l count one , t wo ( or ) f our ( relishes ) ? th e w hole ( world ) is c arried aw ay

relish ( se o f the M ay a)
. . .

S ome few delight in the n ame, ( as) some r are pl ace is cultiv ated .

The devotees ar e lustrous at the true g ate they ar e h appy d ay an d night , .

To those wh o are imbued w ith love to the L ord humble Nan ak al ways devotes him sel f
, , .

Gauri maj h mahal d V .

CL X X . CC X L .

P ause .

Thy n ame 0 L ord is cle aring away p ain thy n ame i s cle aring away p ain
, , , .

( By w hom ) it is adored the eight w atches ( his ) divine kno wle dge the true Guru is completing , .

In w hich body th e S upreme Brahm d w ells th at place is be autiful , .

The servan t of Y am a d oes not appro ach ( him w h o ) w ith his tongue sings the excellences o f Hari , .

T h e kno w ledge of ( thy ) service i s not kno w n ( t o m e) nor do I kno w h o w to a dore ( thee ) .
2

( I flee to ) th y protection 0 life of the w orld 0 my un attain able un fathom able L ord !
, , ,

( To w hom ) the Lor d h as become mercif ul ( their ) grie f an d afii ic ti on s h ave fle d ,

.

No hot w ind touches them wh o ar e protected by t h e true Guru himsel f

,
.

The Guru is Naray an the Guru is God the Guru is the true cre ator
, ,
.

From the Guru being ple ased everything is obtained hu m ble Ni n k is al ways devoted ( to hi m ) ,
.

Gaugi maj /z '

maha l d V
CL X X I . CCX L I .

P ause .

By muttering : Hari Ram , Ram, Ram Ram , ,

( My ) affai rs were accomplished .

I n mu tte ri ng Ram Govind ( my ) face bec a me pure .

Fro m w hom th e glory of H ari is he ar d he is ( my ) brother an d f riend ,

.

In w hom ( are contained ) al l things al l fruits an d all excellences ,

Ho w shoul d ( th at ) Gé vi n d be f or gotten f rom ( one s) mind by re membering w hom p ain dep arts
’
,

By clinging to whose garment s hem one lives an d is brought over the w ater o f existence :
’

Those w h o give hints an d signs are the s ain t s

,
B y their eyes
,
i e by the eyes o f those wh o w hen .
“
, . . , ,

h aving he ard a w or d o f instruction keep silence a n d medita t e upon it

,
.

a
3 1 W I}
'
l i terhl l y : it is n o t kno wn to a dore m m bein g con structed w ith t h e pa st con ,

ju n ctive p a rticiple l ike m

, 1 the a cti ve of it
,
.
31 4 RE G GA U BI , MA H v . .
, S A BD C L X X II .
; MA H IX . .
,
S A RD I . II .
( c om m — c om m )

Hav in gmet w ith th at s ai nt ( i s Guru ) s alvation is obtained the face ( becomes ) bright
. .
,
at the
court ( o f Hari ) .

The praise of Govind the fountain o f l if e i s the c apital of the s aints

, ,
.

N an ak ( s ays ) they ar e s aved by muttering the n ame at the true g ate they ar e appl auded ,
.

Gaufl m aj h ; malaal d V .

CL X X II . CC X L II .

P ause .

excell ences o f the s weet H ari O de ar sing thou the excellences o f the s weet Hari !
S ing th e , ,

By being attached to the True one the pl aceless one obtains a pl ace .

Al l other tastes ar e insipid body an d mind become insipid ,

.

W hat one does w ithout the Lord th at is w asted ( w asted) i s th at life , , .

Havi ng sei z ed th e h em o f the saint Guru) he w ill cross this w orld .

I f the S upreme Brah m be w orshipped ( one s ) w hole reti nue is s aved ,

’
.

H e is ( my) sw eethe art an d rel ative he is ( my ) f riend ( w h o ) puts the n ame of B ari , ,

( my) h e art .

( Wh o ) h av ing e ff aced all ( my ) vices sho w s benevolence ( to me )

, ,
.

( My ) property tre asury vil l age an d house ( ar e in ) the repository of the foot of H ari
, ,
.

Nan ak is a begg ar at thy g ate 0 Lord he asks thee for a gif t , ,

.

Om by t h e favour of the true Guru

RAG U G AU R I ; M A HA L A IX .
1

I . CC X L III .

P ause .

0 ye pious people gi ve up th e pride o f t h e he art !

,

L u st w r ath the society of t h e w icked flee fr o m t he m d ay an d night

, , ,
.

( I ) Wh o considers both pl e asure an d p ain honour an d dishonour as the s ame

.
, , , ,

Wh o rem ains aloof from j oy an d grief by him the substa nce of the universe is know n ,
2
.

That one m ay give up both praise an d blame an d seek for final em ancipation .

This sport says humble Nanak is difli c ul t by some ( rare ) disciple it is kno w n
, , ,
.

Gaufi mahald I X .

II . C UX L I V .

P a seu .

0 ye pious ( this ) cre ation is m ade by Ram

,
.

considers him perish ble another as ete r n al ( but ) the w onderful one c an not be apprehended
3
O ne ( ) as a , , .

Man is in t h e po w er of lust w rath an d spiritual delusion the person of Hari is f orgotten

, , .

The un re al body i s considered as re al like a dre am in th e night ,

.

W h at is seen th at all p ar ish es like the sh ade o f a clo ud

, , .

H umble Nan ak h as know n the w orld as v ain he rem ained ( there fore ) in the asylum of Ri m , .

Guru T egh B ahad ur t h e n i n th S ikh Gur u born A D 1 6 12 ( 1 621 P) executed (at D elhi ) 1 675
1
i . e .
, , . .
, .

t h e sub st an ce o f t h e un i ver se i e t h e s upre me o r absolute being constitutin g the subs t ance o f

2
#131 33 , , . .
,

unive rs e .

f 2? fi n s?! f 2? ma tsa:
-
3
i . s . R am , t h at h e ( i . e . R am) perishes another that he is , , fir m, e
e t rn al .
31 6 RA G GA U RI , MA H . IX .
, S A E D V IL — IX .
( c om m — c om .
)

entertains n o love t o the L or d w h o i s al w ays ne ar inside an d outside

He ,
.

N an ak s ays : him consider em ancip ated in w hose body Ram is c ontai ned ,
.

Ga ufl maka l d I X .

V II . CC X L I X .

P ause .

0 ye pious in the asylum of Ram there i s rest !

,

O n e m ay re ad the V édas an d the P ur an as ( but) this i s vi rt ue if on e remember the n ame , ,

Covetousness delusion o f the M aya selfishness an d attend ance to w orldly pursuits

, ,

Jo y an d grie f a ffect him in w hom th at God i s n o t f ormed

,
.
1

H e aven an d hell nectar an d poison gold an d copper ar e the s ame to him

, ,

T o w hom pr aise an d bl ame covetousness ( spi ri tu al ) del usion an d p assion 3 ar e the s ame
, ,
.

Wh o i s not under the obstr uction o f p ain an d ple asure him consider w ise ,

Nan ak says : hi m consider em ancip ate d w h o i s a m an o f th is kind ,

.

Gaur i mahal d I X .

V III . CCL .

P a use .

0 he art
h at h as h appened to thee the foolish one
, w ,

Day an d night lif e diminishes an d thou dost n o t kn o w th at thou h ast become li ght ( in
, , w eight)
by covetousness !
The body be autiful house an d w ome n w hich thou h ast considered thy o w n
, ,

O f the se nothing is thine ; see reflect an d think ! ,

Thy lif e the j e w el is lost by the e the w ay of Gov ind is not know n by thee
, , , .

N ot a moment thou h ast become absorbed w ith his feet thy li fe i s spent to n o purpose , .

N an ak s ays : th at m an is h appy w h o sings the excellences of the n ame o f Ram , .

Al l the other w orld i s deluded by the M ay a it does not obtain the secure pl ace , .
4

thoughtless m an be af raid of sin !

0 ,

H e w h o is merci ful t o the poor i s annihilating all sin f all thou on his asylum !
, , ,

Whose excell ences the V é das an d P uran as ar e singing his n ame hold fast in thy he art ! ,

The n ame o f Haii i s puri fyi n g in the w orld by continu all y remembering it take o ff al l sins ,

A hum an bo dy thou w ilt not obt ain a g ain m ake some w h at a scheme f or thy fin al em ancip ation , ,

0 m an
N anak s ays prai se hi m , w h o is f ull of com passion ,
an d thou w ilt cross the oce an of existence , 0 m an !

It i s be t t e r h ere t o
e a s a n a djec t ive
t ak S ansk 1 7 f o m e d subst an t i a l
1 . r , .

fi g fi n t o h im re fe r ri n g t o HT 3 i n w hos e m i n d t o who m
2

@
2
, , .

311 ca n no t be h er e a corr el a tive a dj ct i v e ( s uch ) b ut m ust b e a s ubs t a n t ive

3
e It , . i s t h e A r a bic
U
z

be
k :

p a ssio n .

fig ? t he s ecure pl ace fro m w hich m ore rege n er ation t ak es p l ac e

“
Liz
"

, , no .
 RA G GAU B I , MA H . AS TP A D I . .
31 7

RA GU GAU RI .

A stp adi s ; mafial a I .

Ga uri gud r ér i .

Om! the true n ame is the cre ator , th e supreme spirit .

By the favour of the Guru

I .

A tre asure an d perf ection is reflection on the spotless n ame .

( In w hom ) the all fi ll in g rem ains full destroying ( his ) poison

-
,

H i s triad is 1 gone off he is p ure w ithin

, .

The instruction o f the Guru bec ame use f ul in to his ) soul .

P ause .

In th is w ise by utteri n g Ram th e mind is soothed

, , .

By the w ord of th e Guru the collyri um o f understanding he ( se Ram ) is kno w n

, ,
. . .

( Wh at is ) considered as the only h appiness is e asily obtained , .

By the pure w ord ( o f the Guru ) error is stopped .

They bec ame red the false red colour w as absorbed 2

, .

Hi s f avourable look f el l ( on them ) an d their poison w as stopped .

A return took pl a ce h aving died whilst livin g they bec ame aw ake
3
, .

They delighted in th e w ord ( o f the Guru ) their mind w as ap plied to H ari , .

S w eet j uice they collect poison is done aw ay an d ab andoned

, .

In faith they live the f e ar o f Yam a h as fled

, .

( W orldly ) e nj oyments di S p utes an d selfishness are stopped

, .

The mind is imbued w ith love to H ari ( an d t o ) the or der of the boundless one .

The pr actices o f c aste an d brotherhood 4 ar e given up .

( Hi s) favourable look h as fallen ( upon th em ) an d h appiness h as settled in the soul .

Without thee I see n o other f riend .

Whom sh all I w orship t o w hom sh all I apply my mind ?

,

Whom shall I ask to w hose feet sh all I cling ?

,

O n w hose instruction sh all I continue medit ating ?

The Guru I w ill w orship t o the feet of the Guru I w ill cling
,
.

I w ill adore I w ill in love att ach myself to the n ame of Hari
,
.

Instruction an d ini ti ation ( into the mysteries of the Guru ) is ( my ) delight an d desire .

A ccording to ( his ) order I go t o my o w n house .

( My ) pride is gone w ith ple asure I meditate on my o w n spirit

,
.

L ight h as sprung up ( in me ) in th e luminous ( S upreme ) ( I am ) absorbe d

,
.

fan the tr iad i s the three qualities

, . . .

$ 1 105 g fi they bec a m e red i e t i n ge d w ith t h e t rue colo ur o f the love of Go d

2
. .
, , ,
.

3
The wo r d 6 8 2 retu rn n e a rly correspo n d s t o o ur c on v er sion
, .
”

4
51 1 % afi u fi g ; m fg an d W 3 must be take n toge t her ; o t her w ise fi tfi
“

U Tfi '
s
‘ ' '

.
31 8 RA G GA U B I , MA H . A S TP A D . II .

Wh at is written is not eflac ed ; the w ord ( of the Gu r u is ) the sign

'
1
, ,

( From w hich ) th e cre ator the c ause o f c auses is kno w n, ,

.

( I am ) n o t a P an di t n or clever an d w ise ,
.

( But nevertheless ) I am n o t err ing n o r led astray by error .

I do n ot tell legends ( o f th e Gods ) the ord er ( o f Hari ) is know n by me , .

Né n ak is e asily absorbed ( in H ari ) by t h e instruction of the Guru .

Gaur i gud r ér i mahal d I .

The min d is the eleph an t the body the ple asure ground ,
- .

T h e Gu r u is the eleph ant go ad ( Wh o ) attends to the true w ord ( o f t h e Gur u)

-
.

H e enj oys lustre at the roy al gate .

P a se u .

By dint of cleve r ness H e c annot be kno w n 2

.

W ithout ( th e mi nd ) being subdued h ow c an his estim ate be obtained ?

In the house is nect ar the thi eves t ake it aw ay ,
3
.

N one denies it .

W h o keeps ( it f rom the thieves ) t o h i m he himsel f gives gre atness , .

Innumerable 4 fires ar e in on e pl ace .

They ce ased burning by the Guru they w ere extinguished by dint o f instructio n
, .

By w hom hi s mi nd is given over he si n gs w ith ple asure the excell ences ( o f H ari ) , .

A s h e is in the house so he is outside , .

5

S itting ( even ) in a c ave h ow sh all I describe him ?

In t h e sea an d on t h e mountain he is such a fe arless on e .

S ay w h o w il l kill a de ad o n e
,

W h at a fe ar of an y o n e h as he w h o i s f e arless ? ,

By me an s of the w ord ( o f the Gur u ) he kno w s the three w orld s .

By W hom it is said by h im ( h is) s aying is expl ained

, .

By w hom it i s understood by him it i s e asily comprehended , .

H aving seen an d reflected ( o n it) my min d w as soothed .

Celebrity intelli gence an d fin al e ma ncip ation ar e in the O n e n ame

,
5
.

In him the S upreme Being is abiding

W h o rem ains in his ow n house i n his o w n pl ace ,
7
.

H o w m any Munis praise him an d sh o w affection t o him !

In a pure body an d he art think o f th at True on e
Nan ak ( says ) adore continu al ly H ari

Mo st mo de rn MS S r ea d n o w m . but it is perh aps b etter to Ra fi 73 1 11 3 1 ,

rea d :
foun d in o l d good M S S ; t h e tra n sl a t io n w oul d
. the n r un t h us : i n t h e wo r d ( of th e Gur uis) t h e sig n , et c
.

2
H e, i . e. Har i .

3
T h e t h iev es ar e m € th e fi v e
1 2 e tc , , .

a fa nci fu l for m at io n a h u n d r ed kh ar b s
4
. .

T h e subj ec t seem s t o h e Ha ri t ho ugh n o h int w h atever i s gi v e ; p erh a p s t h e d isciple i s m ea

5
, n nt.

W 3 her e a pp aren tly

7
fi fi f mfg i n h is o w n hous e i n h is o w n h ea r t
, .
 3 20 RA G GA U B I , MA H . A S TP A D v .

P a use .

The w orld w as seen ( by me ) engaged in such a gambling .

A ll ask f or h appiness ( an d yet) f orget the n ame .

If the invisible W orld be seen then he could be described

,
.

W ithout being seen he is des cri bed t o no purpose .

By the disciple he is seen w ith n at ur al e ase ,

By bestow ing adorati on an d reflecti on w ith one devo ut thought ( on him ) .

( They are) asking f or h appi ness ( yet ) the ir p ain in cre ases
,
.

They string a neckl ace of all p assions .

1

With out the O n e ( they are) false they do not become em ancipated
,
.

W h o continu all y s ays : “ the cre ator ” he sees ( him ) ,

.

H e extinguishes the fi r e of ( w orldly) thi rst by the w ord ( o f the Guru ) ,

Du alit y doubt w ith n at ural e ase

, ,

( Wh o ) by the instruction of the Guru c auses the n ame to d w ell in hi s h eart ,

( A n d ) sings in true m anner the excell ences o f H ari .

In the body of the disciple i s true love ( to H ari ) .

( Wh o is ) w ithout the n a me ( does not get ) his o wn place

2
.
,

Wh o is devoted to the love ( of H ari ) is most dear ( to the ) king ( Hari )

,
.

( I f) he besto w his ( f avour able ) glance ( o n him ) then he comprehends the n a me , .

The ill usion of the M ay a is all troubles .

The flesh l y minded one is di rty w icked an d ugly

-
,
.

( If ) he serve the t rue Gur u the troubles ce a se

, .

( W h o h as) the nectar n ame (h e h as) alw ays h appi ness

-
, .

The disciple comprehends ( the True on e) bestow ing ( on him ) one ( continu al ) meditatio n
, .

H e li ves in hi s o wn house an d is absorbed i n the True o n e .

Regener ati on an d de a th he stops .

F rom the perf ect Guru he ob ta ins thi s w isdom .

( I f) I w ould tell ( H i s) stor y th ere w ould be no end o f it

,
.

H aving asked the Gur u I saw th at there is no oth er g ate

, .

P ain an d ple asure ( are al lotted ) by his decree an d ple asure .

Nan ak humbly s ays : devoutly me ditate ( on h i m )

Gaur i mal ml d I .

The M ay a is the second ” so thinks the

“
,
3
w orld .

L ust wr ath sel fishness ar e perdition

, ,
.

P ause .

W hom sh all I ll the se c ond there is none

ca .

In al l is th at O n e S upreme .

( S h e is ) the second ( to ) the f ool ish one ( wh o ) t alks , of tw o .

1
e s e i s : th ey c a rry about w ith thems el ves al l p a ssio n s
T he s n .

fi F fi 3 T6 hi s o w n pl a ce ( o f rest) i e fin a l em a n cipatio n
2
, , . . .

3
W m M aya i s t h e s eco n d ( n ext t h e S upreme)
, In . th e m ind of the people th e May a h a s a

re ality though sh e i s only a n ill usion

, .
 RA G GA U nI , MAH . A S TP A D V I . .

He comes an d goes h aving died he becomes ( ag ai n ) a secon d ‘

, .

The e arth an d the sky I do not look upon as t w o .

Al l people ar e w omen an d men .

I see the sun an d the moon th e‘bri gh t l amps , .

In al l is the de arly beloved youth eon t iguousl y .

2

O ut o f mercy he directed my mind t o the O n e

( ) .

The true Guru g ave me the understanding o f the O n e .

The O n e S upreme is know n by the disciple .

H avi ng dest royed du al ity he h as comprehended him by means o f the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

The order o f the One is cur rent in al l the w orl ds .

By the O n e al l cre ation h as been m ade .

K no w th at there ar e t w o w ays ( but ) only O n e L ord

, ,
3
.

Le arn his order f rom the w ord of the Guru .

A l l f orms an d colours ar e in the mind ( o f him ) ,

S ays Nan ak ( wh o is ) pr aising the One

, .

Gaur i mah a l a I .

VI .

If one does w orks w ith re ference t o the S upreme S pirit he i s true , .

Ho w does the ignorant one kno w the secret of fin al em ancip ation

P ause .

S uch a Jogi
reflects on union ( w ith the S upreme ) ,

W h o having killed the five keeps the True on e in his bre ast
, , .

Wh o m akes the T r ue on e dw ell in his he art

H e gets the price of the pra ctice o f J6 g .

In sun moon house an d garden is the O n e

, , .

( Whose ) w ork is to pr aise ( him ) they ar e absorbed ( in him )

,
.

W ith on e w ord some ask a lms 4

.

( Wh o is ) given t o divine k no w ledge an d medit ation ( in him ) the True on e w akes , .

5

Wh o is absorbed in the fe ar ( o f Go d ) does n o t go forth ( from his house ) , .

W h at is the estim ate ( of him ) w h o continu ally devotes himself to me ditation ?

,

( Whom ) he himself unites ( w ith himself ) ( h i s) doubt he stops , .

By the favour of the Guru he obt ain s the highest step fin al em ancip ation ) .

S ervi ce t o the Guru an d reflection on the w ord ( o f the Guru )

Destroy egotism individual ity ) ( this is ) the best w ork ( on e c an d o ) .

( E qu al t o ) silent repetition austerities control of the senses re ading of the P ur i nas

, , , ,

Is the reverence of th e Boundless one s ays N an ak ,

.

T hes e t w olines ar e very d efective the sense is o n ly hinted at { fl mu st a ppa ren tly be re ferred to th e
, .

Maya I n t h e eye s o f t h e foolish on e ( E NE?) t h e Maya is t h e s e con d b ec a use h e b elieves i n dual i ty ; th ere fore
. ,

h e is subject to t r an smig ra tio n an d becomes a s econ d ( from t h e S upreme) i e h e i s n o t a bsorbed in th e , . .

a bsolute substa nce .

2
m m y out h y oung m a n ( a term o f end ea rm ent ap p lied t o Ha ri)
, ,
.

T w o w ays i e th a t o f the Hind urelig ion an d th a t o f t h e M us u l m ans

3
. . .
,

T h e Gosav i s w h en beggin g utter the o n e w ord

4
, ,

5
The s en se o f these li n es is : le a d ing the li fe o f m en dicity i s o f no use the T r ue o n e i s presen t in h im '

, ,

w h o i s d evote d t o d ivi n e k n o w le d ge a n d me di t a t ion .

 B KG GA U nI , MA H . A S TP A D . V II . VIII .

Ga ur i h ld
nm a I .

Wh o hold o f patience reli gious O bservances good conduct an d contentment

l ay , ,

Them sickness does not be fall nor the p ain of Yam a .

1

They become em ancip ated ( an d absorbed into ) t h e L ord wh o h as no form n or figure , .

P ause .

W h at fe ar should the Jogi entertain

In eve r y tr ee hou se an d outside ( of it) is th at ( S upreme )
, .

The J ogi ( w h o i s) fe arless an d meditates on the S upreme

, ,

W h o day by d ay w akes an d devoutly reflec t s o n the True on e

Th at Jogi is ple asin g to my mind .

The net o de th he burns by the r e of divine k o ledge

f a fi n w ”
.

( His) ol d age an d de ath is gone ( w h o ) removes his egotism

,
.

H e hi msel f is s aved an d s aves ( also ) his fore fa thers .

Wh o serves the true Guru he becomes a Jogi ,

.

W h o rem ai ns absorbed in th e fe ar ( o f the S upreme ) he becomes fe arless ,

.

A s he is w hom he serves such a one he ( himself ) becomes

, ,
.

( Wh o ) praises the S upreme S pirit wh o alone is f e arless ;

3
,

( Wh o ) devotes himsel f ( to him ) s aying : 0 L ord o f the friendless !

,

( W h o ) si n gs his excellences he is no more regener ated .

Wh o know s th at inside an d outside is the O n e ;

,

\Vh o by me ans o f the w ord of the Guru comprehen ds his o w n sel f

H e is a pproved of at the g ate ( of H ari ) on account o f the true w ord ( o f the Guru ) .

Wh o dies by me ans o f the w ord ( o f the Guru ) he d w ell s in hi s own house ,

.

H e neither comes nor goes his desire ce ases

,
.

By me ans of the w ord o f the Guru th e lotus ( o f his he art) is opened .

W h atever i s seen th at is in hope an d desp air

,
.

The poison o f lust an d wr ath ( is in them ) hunger an d thirst ,

.

Nan ak ( s ays ) some rare ones are met w ith w h o ar e of mor tified p assions
, .

Gaur i nzahal d I .

V III .

( 1 ) ( If ) such a serva nt ( o f B ari ) be fou n d, ( t o him ) h appiness accrues .

( By w hom ) p ain is f orgotten , h e obtains th at T r ue one .

P a use .

By se ein g ( his ) sight ( his ) w isdom becomes complete .

The dust of the feet ( o f Hari) ( is equ al to ) b athin g at the sixty ei ght ( Ti rth as) -
.

The eyes ar e gl addened by fixed attentive contempl ation .

The tongue ( i s) pure by th e j uice an d essence of Hari .

1
$ 11 1 i u; FC H
‘
r : the s ak e o f the rhym e
2 H , fo r .

h a s her e the sig n ific ation o f rm .

1 8 h er e ver b ( m W E T) : .
3 24 RAG GA U R I ,
MA H I . .
, A S TP A D . X .

He s aves P r abl ad besto w ing mercy on him ‘ .

The f oolish an d thoughtless Ravan a w as led astray .

L ank a w as t aken ( f rom him ) w ith S i ta .

Without love t o the t rue Guru he h ad become proud .

The thous and armed M adhu K i t Mah ikh as -

, , ,
2

H ar n akh as he destroyed w ith ( h is) n ails .

The Dait y as wh o did n ot practise devotion ( t o him ) w ere killed

, ,
.

Jarasandh an d K al aj am un w ere killed .

3

Rak tabij u an d K al an é m u w ere torn in pieces .

“

The Daity as w ere destroyed an d the s aints sa ved .

T h e true Guru himself refl ects on t h e w ord .

By re ason o f second love the D aity as w ere destroyed .

The disciples w ere s aved by re ason of devotion to the True o n e .

The ol d Duryodh an a loses his honour 5

.

( F o r ) Ram th at cre ator is n o t kno wn ( by h im )

, .

H e is consumed in p ain w h o is the ( c ause of ) p ain t o ( other ) men , .

H e is born ( ag a in ) by w hom the w ord of the Guru is n o t kno wn , .

H ow should he obtain h appine ss w h o i s led astray by error ? ,

W h o errs on e little bit he rep ents ( of it) again , .

K ans K es an d the infamous Oa n d fi r u

,
.
6

( By them ) Ram w as n o t kno w n ( there fore ) thei r h onour w as lo st , .

W ithout the L ord o f t h e universe none protects .

Without the Guru pri d e c annot be er adic ated .

By the instruc tion o f the Guru virtue ( i s obt ained ) by the n ame o f H ari composure ,
of mind .

Nanak ( s ays ) w h o gets t h e n ame he sings the excellences ( o f H ari ) ,

.

Gaur i nzahal a I .

I
put sand al perfume on my bo dy
m ay - .

I m ay put on an d w e ar silk g arments -

.

Wh at happiness sh all I obtain w ithout th e n ame of H ari ?

I This r efe r s tory o f H i r a n y ak ash ip u t h e ki n g o f t h e D ai ty a s an d his so n P ra h l ad a w h ich is so

t o th e s , , ,

often bro ugh t for th i th e Gran th S ee V i s h u P ur p 1 26 sqq

n . n . .
, .

fi g n am e o f a n A s ur a al w ay s con e c t ed w i th S a nsk bo th w ere kille d by Vishn u

2
, , n . .

“fi l m S a sk T
, n how ev e r i s s a id t o h a ve been sl a in by D ur g a
.
, .

3
W S an sk a t m a N o m p r o p o f a ki n g o f M aga d h a fa th er i n l aw o f K ans a k il led by B hi m a
, .
, . .
,
- -
,
.

ansk Hag g a i k i n g o f th e Y a v an as d est r oye d b y M uhuk un d a

W S ,
.
, , .

4
m S a n sk ( ma fi a No m p ro p o f a n A s ura m a S a n sk ai l E l afi i No m p ro p o f a n
, .
, . . .
, .
‘’
, . .

A sura kill ed by K r is h a
,
n .

D ur y od h an a t h e el d est o f t h e hund r e d so n s o f D h ri ta rash t r a w h o by p ersu ad in g h i s fa ther t o b a n ish

5
, , ,

h is co usi s t h e P an dava s fr o m H ast in ap ura b e c a m e t h e c au se o f t h e grea t w ar

n , , , .

K a s a k ing o f M athur a an d cou sin o f D evaki t h e mo th e r o f K ri sh n a k ill ed by K r i sh na

6
n ,
K es , ,
.

S a n sk amo r affil fi ) n a m e o f a D a i tya w h o w a s s en t by K an sa to de st roy K ri sh n a

.
, H e h aunted t h e,

f ore st V r i n d fi v an i n t h e fo rm o f a horse t o de st r oy K ri sh n a a n d h i s bro th er B al a ram a b ut w as th rottled by ,

K ri shn a .
€3 3 ( o r 8 13 23 a s it is also w rit ten in som e MS S ) i s corrupted from t h e S a n sk m t Nom
, . .
, .

prop o f a w re s tle r i th e se rv i c e o f K an s a a n d k ill ed by K ri sh na

.
n .
 RA G GA U R I , MA H I . .
, A S TP A D X I . .
3 25

P ause .

W h at sh all I put on in w h at dress sh all I sho w myself ?,

W h at h appiness sh all I obtain w i th op t the Lord of the universe ?

( There m ay be ) a ring in my e ars on my neck a neckl ace of pe arls , .

A red cushion flo w ers an d red po wder , .

What h appiness sh all I find wi thout the L ord of th e universe ?

A w om an ( m ay be ) be auti ful w ith expressive eyes , .

The very lovely ( w om an ) m ay m ake stains an d orn amen ts ‘ .

W ithout adoring the L ord of the universe she is continu ally unh appy .

( H er ) gate house p alace ( an d ) bed ( m ay be ) ple as ant

, , .

Day an d night she m ay spre a d o ut g arl ands of flo w ers .

W ithout H ari the h andsome ( w om an ) is aggrieved .

( There m ay be ) horses eleph ants spe ars ( an d ) music al instruments , , , .

A r mies m ace be arers domestic servants ( an d ) sl aves ”

,
-
, .

W ithout the L ord of the universe ( al l these ar e) vain show s .

I m ay be c alled a S idd h I m ay summon prosperity an d success , .

I m ay fasten a cro w n roy al h at an d u mbrell a on my he ad , .

W ithout the L ord o f the universe h o w sh all I obtain h appiness 3

I m ay be c alled a K han K ing an d Raj a , .

( I m ay c all o ut ) H oll ah S irrah ( al l these ) ar e false plaitings sho w s ) 4

, .

Without the w ord o f the Gur u( my ) affair w ill n ot be adj usted .

E gotism an d selfishness ar e f orgotten by me ans of the w ord o f the Guru ‘

.

By the i nstruction of the Gu r u Murari is kno w n in the he art .

N an ak s ays ( I am ) in thy asylum .

Gan rj i m ah al d I .

( Wh o is engaged ) in the service

the O n e d o es n o t kno w others of , .

H e gives up the bitter troubles of the w orld .

By love ( t o God ) th e True on e is obt ained ( an d in ) th e True one h appiness , 0 friend !

P ause .

( If th ere
be ) such a m an w h o is devoted t o Ram
He by singing the excellen ce s o f H ari is united ( w ith him ) h aving washed
, , , aw a y his filth .

U pside do w n is the lotus ( = he art) o f the w hole w orld .

The fire o f foll y consumes the w orld .

H e is s aved w h o reflects on the w ord o f th e Guru

,
.

The bla ck bee the moth the eleph ant an d th e fish , , ,

The deer die suffering f or their own deeds

,
.

A bsorbed in thirst they d o n ot see the re ality o f things .

Lust ( w hich is in ) t h e mind o f the lover of the fascin ating w om an

, ,

I
T
13 , s .
f .
( Hin d i fi g ) stains , an d other signs , w hic h th e H in d us m ake on their forehe ads etc , .
,
t
wi h

s aff ron , e tc .

2
“1 % a sl ave ( m ea n m an ) , i bei n g ch an ged t o e fo r t h e s ake of th e rhyme .

3
1 13 , a m . h a ppiness .

an i n terjectio n ressed slave me n ial S i r r a h ! th e erb le ft o ut

4
I‘H fi , ad d to a or v is .
3 6 RA G GA U R I , MA H I . .
, A S TP A D . X II .

( A n d) w r ath
destroy all the passion ate ones .

Honour an d respect they love h aving f orgotten the n am e , .

The flesh l y minded one turns h i s thoughts on another s w ife

-
’
.

On his neck is a rope he is entangled in w orldly busi ness

,
.

The disciple is set free h aving t h e excell ences of H ari .

A s a w i d o w gives ( her ) body to another

( S o is ) he in another s po w er ( w hose ) mind ( is absorbed ) in lust an d money

’
.
,

W ithout the beloved s atie ty is never obt ained .

Re ading contin u ally books he peruses t h e S mriti .

H e re ads the V eda an d the P uran as h aving he ard ( their ) m agnificence , .

W ithout being steeped in the love ( of H ari ) th e mind is c l ean lost .

A s the Oat r ik h as love to an d desire fo r w ater ;

A s th e fish deli ghts in w ater

( S o ) Nan ak h avi n g drunk the j uice of H ari is s ati ated

, , .

Gaur i mah al d I .

X II .

Wh o dies in obstin acy does come into account ( be fore Go d)

, not .

W h o puts on ( faqi r dresses an d rubs ( h i s body ) much w ith ashes

He h aving f orgotten the n am e w i ll regret it
, , .

P ause .

Thou , 0 H ari ,
com fort in
ar t t o ) the min d .

W h o forgets ( th y ) n ame h as to endure the p ain o f Yama

, .

W h o is delighted w ith s and al perfume aloe w ood c amph o r -

,
-
, ,

( A n d ) the M aya h e is far from the highest step

, em ancip ation ) .

When the n ame is f orgotte n al l is quite vai n ‘ , .

( Wh o h as) spe ars music al instruments ( an d ) hom age on ( h is) throne

,

( H im ) excessive desire an d lust enter .

W ithout H ari being implored ( there i s) n o atta chment to the n ame .

By di sputing an d pride (there is ) n o union w ith the L ord .

Wh o gives his he art h e obt ains th e delightful n ame

, .

In second love du ality ) there is p ain ful ignorance .

W ithout money ( there is ) no traffi c nor shop .

W ithout a bo at ( there is ) no ro ad on th e sea .

W ithout the Guru being served ( there i s) utter w ant .

P raise praise to h i m w h o sho w s the ro ad !

, ,

P r aise praise to him w h o lets hear the w ord ( o f the Gur u)

, ,

P r aise praise to h im w h o unites to union ( w ith H ari )

, ,

P raise pr aise to him w hose this lif e is

, ,

By me ans of the w ord of the Gu r u I chu rn nectar ( an d ) dri n k ( i t ) .

The gre atness of th e n ame thou givest according to ( thy ) ple asure .

W ithout the n ame h o w sh all I live 2

1
g ig , fo r the s ake o f th e rhyme .

2
m , h ere P r on . a b so l l S in d h i
.
, , ( c f fifu) w hich .
, is a lso fou n d as No m . S ing .
3 28 RA G GA U RI, MA H . A S TP A D . XV .

Wh oles ale merch ants m ass property an d money di e, w h o a .

May to me be given the w e alth o f th e n ectar name o f H ari I -

S ubj ects L ords he ad men chieft ai ns

, , , ,

N one is seen ever rem aining in the w orld .

U n flin c h i n g de ath strikes the fleeting ones on th e he ad .

Th at perfectly True on e alone is immov able .

By w hom eve ryt hing is create d by him it is ( again ) destroyed , .

I f he be kno w n t o the disciple then honour is obtained , .

K az i s S h é kh s F a qi rs w ith ( religious ) garbs

, ,

A re c al led gre at men ( but ) in ( their ) body is the p a in o f egotism

,
.

De ath does n o t give them up w ithout the p atron age ‘ o f the true Guru .

The net o f de ath ( is ) o n th e tongue an d eyes .

In the e ars i s de ath ( as) they he ar w ords o f p oison

,
.

W ithout the w ord ( of the Guru ) they ar e w retched day an d nigh t .

In ( h i s) he art th e T r ue on e dw ells ( w h o ) praises Hari ,

.

Death c annot overcome ( him ) ( w h o ) sings ( his ) excellences , .

Nan ak ( s ays ) : t h e disciple is absorbed ( in h i m ) by me ans o f the w ord ( of the Guru ) .

Gaur i m ah a l ci I .

X V .

They spe ak truth ( there is ) n ot a bit o f falsehood ( in the m ) ,

.

The disciples w al k accord ing t o ( h is) order an d ple asure .

F reed fro m al l p assions they rem ain in the a sylu m o f the True o n e .

P ause .

W h o d w ells in the house the True on e ( him ) de ath does not overcome of , .

The flesh l y minded on e in com ing an d going is subj ect to the p a in o f spiritu al blindness
-
.

H e drin ks n ectar w h o continu ally utters t h e inexpressible o n e

,
.

S itting in h i s o w n hou se h e art) he ( t e H ari ) i s e a sily obtained ( by him ) . . .

2

By hi m w h o is drunk w ith the j uice of B ar i th is h appiness is told

, , .

By w alking accordin g to the instruction o f the Guru on e becomes immovable an d does not
vacillate .

By the true instruction of the Guru b e e asily utters H ari .

H e d rinks nectar an d churns truth .

( By w hom ) th e true Guru is seen ( an d w h o ) h as received the initi ation ( into truth ) ;

( By w hom ) mind an d body are o ffered up an d w h o h as gone into his ow n he ar t

3

H e h avi ng kno w n h i s o w n spirit obtains s alv ation

,
4
,
.

The best food is th e n ame of th e S upreme .

The true S upreme S pirit is infinite light .

Wherever I see there is the uniform ( S upreme )

,
.

I
fi l a l sup p or t pa tron ag e
f
' ’

s
. . , , .

S om e M S S r ead : “Hf? u
2
.
mm w h i ch gi v es n o s en se ; t h e ri ght r ea d i n g ( a s exh ibi t ed by o n e
,

M S ) is : m fi r u
.
rfa W W .

3
m fi x} li t er all y : t ur n in g t o h i s ( o w n) h e art i s m ad e ( b y him) i e w h o h as ret urn ed t o h i s
, , . .

o w n h ea rt h as fo u d h i s o w n i n w a rd sel f
,
n .

Bb a l en g thened fo r th e sa k e o f th e rhym e i st ead o f fi rx

a n .
, , ,
 I VII
'

RA G GA U R , MA H I . .
, A sr P A D
'
. X VI . X .
329

By considering the O n e as true he rem ains independent ( of

The highest step is obtained ( by him ) by w orshipping the feet of t h e Guru .

H i s mind is reconciled w ith his mind egotism du ali ty ) an d error have ce ase d
‘ .

( 7) W h o w h o is n ot s aved in this w ise ?

,

By t h e pr aise o f H ari the s aints an d devotees ar e s ave d .

Th e L ord is obtained by us We do n o t seek another , .

The invisible o n e is sho w n in ( his ) true p al ace by the Guru .

( Hi s) palace is immov able an d n ot oversh adow ed by th e M aya .

By true contentment error i s st epp ed .

In w hose he art th at True one d w ell s

In their society is th e disciple .

Nan ak ( s ays ) by th e true n ame his filth is d on e aw ay .

Gaur i mah al a I .

X VI .

W hose mind is occupied w ith

the delightful n ame
His intervie w ( w ith H ari ) is m a de so as t o w hisper into his e ars “
.

P ause .

If thou dost n o t mutter R am ( it w ill be ) thy misfortune , .

Ram o ur L ord is a donor fo r ages an d ages

, , .

W h o according t o the instruction o f the Guru m a tt er s Ram is a perfect m an

, , , .

In th at one s body sounds the music al instrument w ithout being be aten

’
.

The people w h o ar e devoted t o Ram an d att ached t o H ari :

,

They ar e mercif ully preserved by the L ord .

In w hose he art th at Hari H ari s

'

Touching their sight h appiness is obt aine d .

In all living cre atures t h e O n e sports .

Th e conceited sel f w ill ed m an w anders ag ain about in w ombs

-
.

He comprehends ( th e truth ) w h o obtains the true Guru ,

.

( Wh o ) destroys ( his ) egotism by me ans o f the w ord o f the Guru obtains ( him t e , ,
. . H ari ) .

( 7) H o w sh all on e k now t h e connexion of w h at is belo w an d above ?

The disciple gets ( this ) connexion ( an d ) his mind is reconcile d .

May o n me t h e sinner an d vicious m an f avour be besto w ed !

, ,

O Lord be merci ful to me th at Nan ak m ay cross ( the w ater o f existence ) !

, ,

GA R U I BA I RAGA NI ; M A HA L A I .

Om by the favour of the true Guru

X V II .

Asthe cow herd keeps ( his ) kine t akin g c are o f them ,

.

( Th at ) day an d night he cherishes an d protects them ( is ) a stre am ,

of happiness t o himsel f .

fw fi rm
, S an sk . .

O r : the error of egotism h a s cea se d

2
.

M ost MS S re a d : 3T3 ! N IH ( w i th ) the d elightful me ; MS rea ds : 31 31 K l fi - ith the

3 ‘

. ,
na on e .
T, w

n a me o f R i m .

4
W finpp , c on j . of
W W 1 ( S ansk .
E l l S IR) , t o w hisper into one s c ar s a si g n of in tim at e’
,

fa miliarity . T h e S i kh Gran th i s expl ain 6 W 1: by : h av i n g ap r oa c h ed

p which is a g ain st t h e e t ymology
,

an d a mere g uess .
3 30 RA G GAI RI, MA H A S TP A D X VIII
’

. .
.

P a use .

( S o ) here an d there keep ( me ) O thou comp assion ate to the poor ! ,

W h o flees to th y asylum is f avour ably looked upon ( by thee )

,
.

Wherever I see there thou ar t sporting ; keep ( me ) O protector !

, ,

Thou ar t giving an d ( at the s ame ti me ) enj oying thou even thou art the support of li fe , ,
.

The lot f all s down w ards an d upw ards w ithout reflection on divine know ledge ‘ .

W ithout prai sing the L ord o f the universe darkness i s n ot p assing a w ay .

W e h ave seen th at the w orld i s perishing by covetousness an d selfishness

,
.

By serving the Gur u the L ord i s obt ain ed an d the true gate o f fin al em ancip ation .

In ( whose ) own house is the p al ace of the i n finite ( S upreme ) he ( becomes ) infinite ( hi mself ) , .

W ithout t h e w ord ( o f the Guru ) no one ( i s) firm ; ( w h o ) comprehends ( it) ( obtains ) h appiness 2
, .

W h at h as he brought w h at does he take aw ay ( w hen ) the net of de ath ensn ares ( him )
, ,

ike bucket th t is tightly bound to rope he i i the sky = i n he aven

( L ) a a , a ( s) ( n o w ) n
( ) ( n ow ) ,

in th e region belo w .

( I f ) by re ason o f th e instruction o f th e Guru the n ame be not forgotten honour is e asil y obt ained , .

In ( w hose ) he art is the tre asure o f the n ame his o wn self in dividu ality ) is done aw ay bei n g , ,

united ( w ith H ari ) .

( O n w hom ) the L ord besto w s a favourable look he is absorbed i n the repository o f ( all ) virtues , .
3

Nan ak ( s ays ) th e union doe s not ce ase ( ag ain ) he obt ains true g ain , .

Ga ur i maha l d I .

X V III .

( 1 ) ( If ) by the favour
the Guru one comprehend ( th e truth ) then m atters come to
of , an issue .

The pure n ame th at is in every house i s my L ord

, ,
.

P a se u .

W ithout t h e w ord the Guru on e i s n ot em ancip ated reflect an d look !

of ,

I f o n e do L akhs of ( religious ) w orks w ithout t h e Guru there is d arkness ( in him ) , .

Wh o ar e blind an d w ithout understanding w h at sh all be s aid t o them ? ,

W i thout the Guru the ro ad i s not kno wn in w hich w ise sh all on e get through ? ,

Th e counterfeit it c alls genuine ( bec au se ) it h as no kno w ledge of the genuine , .

T o the bli nd one it give s the n ame of ex aminer ; the time of the K ali yug is w onder ful -
.

The sleeping on e it c all s a w ake the w aking one asleep ,

.

T h e li ving one it c alls de ad fo r the de ad on e it is not w eep ing , .

The coming o n e it c alls going the going o n e come , .

What i s another s it c alls its o wn w h at is its o w n i s n o t considered ( as such )

’
, , .

Wh at is sw eet it c alls bitter the b itter it c alls sw eet

, , .

Wh o i s attached ( to it ) it c alumni ates : such things I h ave seen in the K ali yug
,
-
.

It w orships the m aid servant the M ay a) th e L ord i s not seen ( by it )

-
, .

E mpty w ater is churned ( but ) no butter comes out o f it , .

( W h o ) expl ains this w ord h e is my Guru , .

N an ak ( s ays ) ( w h o ) know s hi s o w n self h e is boundless ,

.

fi rmm di vin e k n o wledg e t h e o n ly sur e m ea n s o f

, , eff e c ti n g fin al em ancip atio n .

f ag fi r m n o m o r e subj e c t t o tran sm i r a t i o n
O D O O O

, , g .

nfq ( S a ns k
W
3
318 .

11 ) the place o r reposi tory

, o f al l qualities or virtues , an epi thet o f the S up reme .
O 3 O
C 0 L RAG GA U Ri , MA H II I . .
,
A S TP A D . III .
(X X L )

( Though ) on e instruct the people no o n e he ars

,
.

The di sciple underst ands an d ( lives ) alw ays in h appiness .

The sel f w illed o n e ( practises ) hypocrisy an d much dexterity

-
.

W h atever he does th at i s n o t accepted ( w ith H ari )

, .

H e comes an d goes an d finds n o pl ace of rest .

The sel f w illed on e does ( religious ) w orks in gre at conceit

-
.

L ike a heron h e sits dow n al w ays ( sunk ) in meditation

,
.

When he is sei z ed by Y am a then he repents

, .

W ithout serving th e true Guru there i s n o fin al em ancip ation obt aine d .

By the f a v our o f the Guru th at H ari is found .

The Guru i s the liber al donor o f the f our ages .

The c aste an d brotherhood o f the disciple i s the gre atness of t h e n ame .

The d aughter of th e oce an i s destroyed an d c ast o ff ( by him ) .

1

Nan ak ( s ays ) : w ithout the n ame cleverness i s in va i n .

Ga ur i ; m ahal ci III .

III . X X I .

R e ad , w h a t i s
the religious duty of th is Yug O brother ? ,
2

F rom the perfect Guru al l bri ghtness o f intellect i s obt ained .

Here an d f urther o n the n ame of H ari is a comp anion

3
.

P ause .

Re ad Ram an d reflect in th y mind I

By the f avour o f th e Guru ( thy ) filth w ill go o ff !
By disputin g an d opposition he H ari ) i s n ot obtained .

Mind an d body ( become ) insipid by secon d love .

By me ans o f the w ord o f the Guru on e appl ies devout medit ation o n the True o n e .

T h e w orld is dirty by me ans o f selfishness .

Though it b athe conti n ually at a s acred w atering pl ace its egotis m does n o t go o ff , .

W ithout h aving fallen in w ith the Guru Yama renders it w retched .

Th at is a true m an w h o destroys ( h i s) egotism

, .

( \V h o ) by m e ans o f the w ord o f the Guru kills the five

H e himself crosses an d m akes al l his family relations cross -
.

The M ay e deludes an d pr actises t ricks .

The blind flesh l y minded o n e clings t o h er

-
.

The disciple keeps aloo f ( from her ) an d rem ains in devout devotion ( to H ari ) .

The hypocritic al m an assumes m any garbs .

In h is he art is ( w orldly ) thirst h e w anders about in selfishness

, .

H e does n o t know h i s o w n self the play i s lost ( by him )

, .

H aving put on clothes he pra ctises shre w dn ess .

The Maya le ads ( hi m ) astray in delusion an d excessive error .

m m 33 k
I
m t h e d augh t er o f the ocea n ( m m
, (n ut ) i the Maya vi si bl s or e w orl d , as havin g
been ra ise d f rom t h e w a ter s by Né r zi y an a .

T h e rel igious d ut y o f t h e p r e se t K ali y ug i s t o re ad utter

2
n -
to the n ame .

T h e sense i s : i n t h is a n d i n t h e oth er w orld

3
.
 RAG GA U Ri , MA H . A S TP A D . IV . V (X X II
. . XX III ) .
3 33

Without serving the Gur uhe

incurs much p ain .

'

Those w h o are attached to the n ame ar e alw ays retired fro m the , w orld .

Wi thin their house they devoutly me dit ate on the True one .

Nan ak ( s ays ) Those wh o serve the true Gur u are very f ortun ate
, , .

Gaur i mahal d I II .

IV . X X II .

( I ) The Br ah m an s chief bu siness is the stu dy of the V eda

’
. .

From it th e gods w ere produced spiritu al illusion an d ( w orl dly ) thi rst ‘
, .

Wh o ar e led astr ay by the three qu alities do not d w ell in their ow n house , .

P ause .

We preserved by Hari ( by whom ) the true Guru is j oined ( to us )

ar e , .

Day by d ay the n ame of Hari is m ade firm ( in us ) by dint of devotion .

The w ord of th e V eda aff ected by the t hree qu al ities is an emb arrassment
, ,
.

H aving re ad a sentence h e ( i e the P an dit) explains it ( but) de ath st rikes ( him) on th e he ad

,